Commentary on Sophocles: Antigone Sir Richard C. Jebb Perseus Project, Tufts University Gregory Crane Prepared under the supervision of Lisa Cerrato Anne Mahoney Jeffrey Rydberg-Cox David Smith National Endowment for the Humanities Trustees of Tufts University Medford, MA Perseus Digital Library Project Perseus 3.0 viaf2603144.viaf003.perseus-eng1.xml Available under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License Sophocles: The Plays and Fragments The Antigone Richard Claverhouse Jebb Cambridge Cambridge University Press 1900 3 The Internet Archive

This pointer extracts section and commline

This pointer extracts section

English Greek Latin German French Italian Sanskrit Gothic Final review and updating of header information Added citeStructure and other TEI changes Made file EpiDoc compliant Updated header metadata Edited file Revision 1.2 fixed Aristotle bibls Revision 1.1 moved more xml files around based on copyright status Revision 1.25 fixed Plat. Parm. references - zr Revision 1.24 fixed Aristot. Nic. Eth. reference - zr Revision 1.23 fixed Aristot. Poet. reference - zr Revision 1.22 fixed Aristot. Met. reference - zr Revision 1.21 fixed references to Aristot. Pol. Revision 1.20 fixed Pindar errors - zr Revision 1.19 fixed bibl errors - zr Revision 1.18 fixed references to Aristot. Pol. up through book 4 Revision 1.17 fixed bad bibls Revision 1.16 fixed Pl. Trin. references - zr Revision 1.15 fixed Pl. Per. references - zr Revision 1.14 removed ?bibl? tags Revision 1.13 fixed bad bibls Revision 1.12 fixed bad bibls Revision 1.11 fixed bad bibls Revision 1.10 fixed bad bibls Revision 1.9 fixing bad bibls Revision 1.8 fixed bad bibls Revision 1.7 fixing bad bibls Revision 1.6 fixing bad bibl refs Revision 1.5 fixing bad bibls Revision 1.4 fixed date, dateRange and dateStruct tags Revision 1.3 fixed author names for consistent sorting Revision 1.2 removed stray item tags Revision 1.1 Converted to XML Revision 1.24 mark refs to Lys. 1 Revision 1.23 fix a citation-fisher typo Revision 1.22 Updated texts to TEI P4 and Perseus P4 extensions; minor cleanup (esp. character encodings and typos.) Revision 1.21 fix some citation-fisher mistakes Revision 1.20 encode Sanskrit in Harvard-Kyoto Revision 1.19 fix refs to Theocritus Revision 1.18 ensure refs to Callimachus and Theophrastus (Characters) are correct Revision 1.17 fix references to Plautus Revision 1.16 changed plonghing to ploughing Revision 1.15 wrap cits around refs to Tacitus, and get abbreviations into bibls where they were missing Revision 1.14 mark more cits (which make better reverse links) Revision 1.13 put proper bibl refs for Shakespeare Revision 1.12 fix a couple of stray typos Revision 1.11 fix mdash in headers (displays badly on some browsers) Revision 1.10 fix refs to Apollonius Rhodius, who is "A. R." Revision 1.9 done with cleanup: while more proofreading is always possible, this is basically ready to go Revision 1.8 cleanup: refs to orators, "ibidem" (to line 700 so far), other general stuff Revision 1.7 begin cleanup Revision 1.6 fix "Metaphysics" that should be "Metamorphoses", and ensure the override file is right Revision 1.5 more cleanup on Antigone, run fisher on Electra Revision 1.4 citation fisher run on Antigone, overrides enhanced Revision 1.3 more cleanup: in particular, lemmata joined to previous Greek passages Revision 1.2 structural markup complete Revision 1.1 minimally parses

Scene:—The same as in the Oedipus Tyrannus,—viz., an open space before the royal palace (once that of Oedipus) at Thebes. The back-scene represents the front of the palace, with three doors, of which the central and largest (the βασίλειος θύρα) is that which in v. 18 is called αὔλειοι πύλαι, as being the principal entrance to the αὐλή of the house.

1-99

Prologue. At daybreak (v. 100) on the morning after the fall of the two brothers and the flight of the Argives, Antigone calls Ismene forth from the house, in order to speak with her apart. She tells her that Creon has forbidden the burial of Polyneices, and declares her resolve to perform it herself. Ismene declines to assist, and endeavours to dissuade her. Antigone then goes alone to the task.

The words κοινὸν (kindred) αὐτάδελφον (very sister) form a single emphatic expression (‘my sister, mine own sister’), not a climax (‘kinswoman, and sister’)— κοινόν strengthening αὐτάδελφον much as in O. C. 535 κοιναί γε πατρὸς ἀδελφεαί ('yea, very sisters of their sire'). κοινόν refers simply to birth from the same parents (cp. 202): it will not bear the added moral sense, ‘having common interests and feelings’: that is only implied, in so far as it may be a result of kinship. αὐτάδελφος (subst. below, 503, 696) is merely a poetical strengthening of ἀδελφός, and does not necessarily imply (as it might here) what prose expresses by ἀδελφὸς ὁμοπάτριος καὶ ὁμομήτριος (Lys. or. 32 § 4) : thus Apollo, son of Zeus and Leto, can address Hermes, son of Zeus and Maia, as αὐτάδελφον αἶμα καὶ κοινοῦ πατρός (Aesch. Eum. 89).

κάρα : the periphrasis (as with κεφαλή) usu. implies respect, affection, or both (cp. Horace's tam cari capitis Odes 1.24.2 ).—The pathetic emphasis of this first line gives the key-note of the drama. The origin which connects the sisters also isolates them. If Ismene is not with her, Antigone stands alone.

ἆρ’ οἶσθ’ … τελεῖ ; For the various interpretations and emendations, see Appendix. The soundness of the text is doubtful, but no proposed correction is probable. I read ὅ τι , pron., not ὅτι , conjunction, and supply ἐστί. In the direct question, τί ὁποῖον οὐ τελεῖ; we understand ἐστί with τί. In the indirect form, it is simplest to say οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅ τι οὐ τελεῖ: and we certainly could not say, οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅ τι [ἐστὶν] ὁποῖον οὐ τελεῖ, if ὅ τι came immediately before ὁποῖον. Here, however, the separation of ὅ τι from ὁποῖον by Ζεὺς τῶν ἀπ’ Οἰδίπου κακῶν makes a vital difference. The sentence begins as if it were to be, ἆρ’ οἶσθ’ ὅ τι Ζεὺς οὐ τελεῖ; But when, after an interval, ὁποῖον comes in, the Greek hearer would think of the direct form, τί ὁποῖον οὐ τελεῖ; and so his ear would not be offended. This, too, suggests the answer to the objection that Ζεύς ought to follow ὁποῖον. Certainly Eur. I. A. 525, οὐκ ἔστ’ Ὀδυσσεὺς ὅ τι σὲ κἀμὲ πημανεῖ , would be parallel only if here we had ἆρ’ οἶσθα, Ζεύς (without ὅ τι). Nor could we have (e.g.) ἆρ’ οἶσθ’ ἥτις Ζεὺς τῶν νόσων ὁποίαν οὐ τελεῖ; But, since ὅ τι might be acc., Ζεύς seems to follow it naturally; and when, afterwards, the sentence takes a shape which makes ὅ τι nom., the ear does not return on Ζεύς as on a misplaced word, because the whole is felt as=τί Ζεὺς ὁποῖον οὐ τελεῖ;—The main objection to reading ὅτι , and taking ὁποῖον as substituted for the direct ποῖον (‘that he fulfils—what not?’) is the shortness of the sentence.

τῶν ἀπ’ Οἰδ. κακῶν , the ills derived from Oed. (cp. Ph. 1088 λύπας τᾶς ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ ): i.e. the curse upon the Labdacidae (594) which he had inherited, and which he bequeathed to his children in a form intensified by his own acts,—the parricide, the incest, the imprecation upon his sons. That imprecation finds a further fulfilment in Creon's edict. ἔτι ζώσαιν does not mean, ‘living wearily on,’ but simply, ‘still living’ (not yet dead), so that ἔτι is almost pleonastic, as in 750 ἔτι ζῶσαν , and so Tr. 305. Sometimes, indeed, the use of ἔτι with ζῆν is more emphatic, as in Ai. 990 ἔτι ζῶν...ἐφίετο (while yet alive), Eur. Bacch. 8 πυρὸς ἔτι ζῶσαν φλόγα (still smouldering).

4-6

Paley (Journ. Ph. 10. 16) regards these three verses as interpolated, because (1) Antigone, like Ismene, should have only seven verses: (2) the words only repeat vv. 2, 3: (3) the double negative offends. But we have no warrant for requiring such a correspondence; and this is not repetition, but development. On (3), see below.

οὔτ’ ἄτης ἄτερ . I translate as if οὔτ’ ἄτην ἄγον (or the like) stood in the text, since there can be no doubt that such was the general sense; but I leave the traditional words, οὔτ’ ἄτης ἄτερ, thinking no emendation sufficiently probable to be admitted. A discussion will be found in the Appendix. Here, the following points may be noted. (1) This seems to have been the only reading known to Didymus of Alexandria, circ. 30 B.C. (2) It certainly does not yield any tolerable sense. (3) But the phrase ἄτης ἄτερ is not, in itself, at all suspicious: cp. Tr. 48 πημονῆς ἄτερ : Aesch. Suppl. 377 βλάβης ἄτερ , 703 ἄτερ πημάτων: Ag. 1148 κλαυμάτων ἄτερ: Th. 683 αἰσχύνης ἄτερ : Ch. 338 τί δ’ ἄτερ κακῶν; Eur. Her. 841 οὐκ ἄτερ πόνων . (4) The gentlest remedy would be οὐδ’ for the second οὔτ’ : ‘nothing painful and not-free from calamity’ (=nothing painful and calamitous). The mental pain was accompanied by ruin to their fortunes. I think this possible, but not quite satisfactory. (5) One word, instead of ἄτης ἄτερ, might seem desirable: I had thought of ἀτηφόρον (cp. δικηφόρος). (6) Donaldson's ἄτην ἄγον can be supported by fr. 325 ὅτῳ δ’ ὄλεθρον δεινὸν ἁλήθεῑ ἄγει, and fr. 856. 5 ἐν κείνῃ τὸ πᾶν, | σπουδαῖον, ἡσυχαῖον, ἐς βίαν ἄγον. (7) But no emendation has yet been made which, while giving a fit sense, also accounts palaeographically for ἄτης ἄτερ being so old. We cannot assume marginal glosses (as ἀτηρ\\) in MSS. of 30 B.C.

αἰσχρόν , shocking the moral sense: ἄτιμον , attended by outward marks of dishonour,—as Oedipus imagines his daughters exposed to slights at the public festivals ( O. T. 1489 ff.). Thus αἰσχρόν in a manner balances the subjective ἀλγεινόν, as the external ἀτιμία corresponds with the ἄτη. Cp. O. T. 1283 ff.

ὁποῖον οὐ … οὐκ ὄπωπα . The repetition of the negative is warranted by the emphasis: cp. Ph. 416 οὐχ ὁ Τυδέως γόνος, | οὐδ’ οὑμπολητὸς Σισύφου Λαερτίῳ, | οὐ μὴ θάνωσι: Tr. 1014 οὐ πῦρ, οὐκ ἔγχος τις ὀνήσιμον οὐκ ἐπιτρέψει ; Aesch. Ag. 1634 ὃς οὐκ, ἐπειδὴ τῷδ’ ἐβούλευσας μόρον, | δρᾶσαι τόδ’ ἔργον οὐκ ἔτλης αὐτοκτόνως : and so oft. after οὐ μά, as El. 626. We need not, then, change οὐ (in v. 5) to ὂν, with Blaydes, nor οὐκ ὄπωπ’ to εἰσόπωπ’ with Todt.

τῶν … κακῶν , sc. ὄν, possessive (or ‘partitive’) gen. with ὄπωπα ,—‘which I have not seen as belonging to, being in the number of,’ our woes. For the omission of ὄν cp. O. C. 694 ἔστιν δ’ οἷον ἐγὼ γᾶς Ἀσίας οὐκ ἐπακούω .

αὖ is oft. thus joined with the interrogative τίς (‘what new thing?’): cp. 1172, 1281: O. C. 357 νῦν δ’ αὖ τίν’ ἥκεις μῦθον... | φέρουσα … ; ib. 1507 τί δ’ ἐστίν ...νέορτον αὖ;

πανδήμῳ πόλει , the whole body of the citizens: so 1141, El. 982: πανδήμου στρατοῦ Ai. 844 . For the adj. compounded with a noun cognate in sense to the subst., cp. βίος μακραίων (O.T. 518), εὐήρετμος πλάτα ( O. C. 716 n.).

θεῖναι , not θέσθαι. τίθημι νόμον denotes simply the legislative act as such; hence it is fitting when the lawgiver is supreme or absolute; as Athena says, θεσμὸν...θήσω ( Aesch. Eum. 484). τίθεμαι νόμον further implies the legislator's personal concern in the law; hence it is said of legislative assemblies (Ar. Pol. 4. 1. 9): but it can be said also of the despot, if his interest is implied: Plat. Rep. 338E τίθεται δέ γε τοὺς νόμους ἑκάστη ἡ ἀρχὴ πρὸς τὸ αὑτῇ ξυμφέρον, δημοκρατία μὲν δημοκρατικούς, τυραννὶς δὲ τυραννικούς.

τὸν στρατηγόν . Creon is already βασιλεὺς χώρας (155), having become so by the fact of Eteocles falling (173). She calls him στρατηγός because that was the special capacity in which, as king, he had first to act; but the title serves also to suggest rigour. The poets sometimes speak of the δῆμος as στρατός ( Pind. P. 2. 87, Aesch. Eum. 566).

ἔχεις , cognitum habes: Tr. 318 οὐδ’ ὄνομα πρός του τῶν ξυνεμπόρων ἔχεις;

κεἰσήκουσας , simply ‘heard’ (not, ‘given heed to’), as O. C. 1645, Ai. 318, Tr. 351, 424.

τῶν ἐχθρῶν κακά , ‘that evils belonging to (proper for) our enemies are coming upon our friends’; i.e. that our brother Polyneices is to share the doom of the Argive dead, by being left unburied. As appears from vv. 1081 ff., Soph. supposes that burial was denied to the slain foemen generally, and not to Polyneices alone. No legend was more familiar at Athens than that of Theseus recovering the Argive corpses from Creon ( Suppl. ). Cp. 1162, where, as here, ἐχθρῶν are the Argives,—the πολέμιοι in their relation to individuals. Ismene, too, seems to understand the Argives; in her reply verses 11—14 refer to φίλους, and vv. 15—17 to ἐχθρῶν. It is rare that ἐχθρῶν should have the art., while κακά has none; but cp. 365: O. T. 1530 τέρμα τοῦ βίου .—We might take τῶν ὲχθρῶν κακά as ‘evils planned by our foes’ (i.e. by Creon): cp. Ph. 422 τά γε | κείνων κάκ’ ἐξήρυκε: ib. 512 τὸ κείνων κακόν . So schol., τὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν μηχανήματα ἐπὶ τοὺς φίλους ἰόντα. But (a) the authorship of the decree having been already named, we now expect a hint of its purport: and (b) ἐχθροί being the natural persons to hurt φίλοι, the antithesis loses point. Some join στείχοντα τῶν ἐχθρῶν, ‘coming from foes’; which is open to the objections just mentioned, and also to this, that, after such a verb as στείχειν, the simple gen. ought to denote place ( O. T. 152 Πυθῶνος ἔβας ), not agent.

μέν does not answer to the δέ in 15, but merely gives a slight emphasis to ἐμοί ; cp. Xen. Cyr. 1.4.12 ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα (though others may know).

Ἀντιγόνη , placed as in O. C. 1 n., 1415; while once ( O. C. 507) the anapaest is in the 4th place.

φίλων , objective gen. with μῦθος , tidings about them: cp. Ai. 221 ἀνδρὸς αἴθονος ἀγγελίαν : ib. 998 ὀξεῖα γάρ σου βάξις . In O. C. 1161 f. σοῦ...μῦθον (where the gen. is objective) = ‘speech with thee.’

ἐξ ὅτου , referring to a definite time, as 1092, O. C. 345, Tr. 326, Ph. 493, like ἐξ οὖ ( O. T. 1201, Tr. 38, Ai. 661, 1337). It refers to an indefinite time below, 457. The brothers had fallen on the preceding day.

δυοῖν … δύο . The addition of δύο would have more point if two pairs were in question, each consisting of one brother and one sister (as, e.g., one might say, ‘the two husbands were taken from the two wives’): yet it is not pointless, since it helps to suggest the isolation of the sisters. As Greek (esp. tragic) idiom loves to mark reciprocity by a repeated word (73 φίλη...φίλου, Ai. 267 κοινὸς ἐν κοινοῖσι ), so it also loves to mark coincidence or contrast of number, whether this is, or is not, especially relevant (cp. 14, 55, 141).

θανόντοιν is clearly required here, though our MSS. have θανόντων. So in El. 1297, where νῷν ἐπελθόντοιν is certainly right, L has ἐπελθόντων (with οι written over ω as a correction). A plur. noun can stand with δύο ( Od. 12.73), and in Il. 16.428 we have αἰγυπιοὶ γαμψώνυχες ...κλάζοντε. But I have been able to find only one proper parallel for such a combination as δυοῖν ἀδελφοῖν θανόντων, viz., a verse of an unknown poet, fr. adesp. 153 in Nauck Trag. Frag. p. 679 Αἴαντε δ’ ὁρμήσαντες ἐκ συνωρίδος: and this has survived because Herodian cited it as a solecism (Anecd. Boiss. 3. 244): ἔδει γὰρ ἐπενεχθῆναι δυϊκῷ δυϊκόν. In that verse, too, the license had an obvious metrical motive, which did not exist here. Cp. 55 f. ἀδελφὼ δύο...αὐτοκτονοῦντε; 58 λελειμμένα ; 62 μαχουμένα .

διπλῇ χερί , i.e. each by the other's right hand (as in O. C. 1425 θάνατον ἐξ ἀμφοῖν =ἐξ ἀλλήλοιν ): so 170 διπλῆς μοίρας, a doom given by each to the other. Cp. El. 206 θανάτους...διδύμαιν χειροῖν , a murder done by two right hands (that of Clytaemnestra and that of Aegisthus). Distinguish the use of the plur. διπλοῖ for δύο, as 51, 1233.

ἐπεί , temporal, ‘since’ (like ἐξ οὗ), as oft. in Her.and the poets. So also ὅτε ( Thuc. 1.13 ἔτη δ’ ἐστὶ...τριακόσια...ὅτε...ἧλθε ).

ἐν νυκτὶ τῇ νῦν , last night: so νυκτὸς τῆσδε Ai. 21 (cp. ib. 209): νυκτὶ τῇδε El. 644 : while ‘tonight’ is τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτός (Plat. Crito 46A). The Argives, having on the preceding day lost all their leaders except Adrastus, fled shortly before dawn (cp. 100).

ὑπέρτερον here simply = πλέον (cp. nihil supra).

As οἶδ’ εὐτυχοῦσα = οἶδ’ ὅτι εὐτυχῶ, so the participles εὐτυχοῦσα and ἀτωμένη are epexegetic of οὐδὲν ὑπέρτερον, = οὔθ’ ὅτι εὐτυχῶ οὔθ’ ὅτι ἀτῶμαι. Of ἀτᾶσθαι we find only this pres. part. (below, 314, Ai. 384, Eur. Suppl. 182) and ἀτώμεσθα Ai. 269 .

ᾔδη : see on O. T. 1525. καλῶς has a slightly ironical tone ( O. T. 1008), glancing at Ismene's apathy.

αὐλείων πυλῶν , the outer door (or gate) of the court-yard, the αὔλειοι (or αὐλῆς) θύραι of the Homeric house ( Od. 18.239), in distinction from the θύραι μεγάρου, or inner door from the court into the men's hall. This was the αὔλειος θύρα, or front door, of the later Greek house, in distinction from the μέταυλος θύρα leading from the court to the inner part. The tragedians commonly use the more stately word πύλαι, rather than θύραι, for these outer doors of the palace: cp. Eur. Helen 431 πύλας τε σεμνὰς ἀνδρὸς ὀλβίου τινὸς | προσῆλθον : ib. 438 πρὸς αὐλείοισιν ἑστηκὼς πύλαις.

ἐξέπεμπον , ‘sought to bring thee forth’: the act., since she had herself fetched or called Ismene; the midd. meaning to summon by a messenger, O. T. 951 τί μ’ ἐξεπέμψω δεῦρο τῶνδε δωμάτων ; cp. on 161, 165. The imperf., because she speaks of the motive present to her mind while the act was being done: cp. O. C. 770 τότ’ ἐξεώθεις κἀξέβαλλες , n.

τί δ’ ἔστι ; marking surprise ( O. T. 319 n.). δηλοῖς is not intransitive, the thing shown being expressed by the partic. in the nomin., just as below, 242 (cp. on 471), Thuc. 1.21 ὁ πόλεμος οὗτος ...δηλώσει...μείζων γεγενημένος . There is a really intransitive use of δηλόω in [Andoc. ] or. 4 § 12 δηλώσει δὲ ἡ τῶν συμμάχων ἔχθρα πρῶτον , etc., unless δηλώσεται should be read there; but the speech is a work of the later rhetoric (see Attic Orators, 1. 137). Not one of the few instances adduced from classical Greek requires δηλόω to be intransitive: Her. 2.117 (subject τόδε): 5. 78 (ἡ ἰσηγορίη): Plat. Gorg. 483D (ἡ φύσις). In Her. 9.68 δηλοῖ τέ μοι ὅτι πάντα... ἤρτητο..., εἰ καὶ τότε...ἔφευγον , the real subject is the clause with εἰ (the fact of their flight shows me).

καλχαίνουσ’ ἔπος τι (for the enclitic τις placed before its noun, see on O. C. 280 f.), ‘that thou art troubled by some tidings.’ The verb is intrans., ἔπος being the ‘internal,’ or cognate, accus. ( Ph. 1326 νοσεῖς τόδ’ ἄλγος ): for its sense cp. O. C. 302 τίς δ’ ἔσθ’ ὁ κείνῳ τοῦτο τοὔπος ἀγγελῶν; From κάλχη, the purple limpet (perh. connected with κόχλος, κόγχη), comes καλχαίνω, to make, or to be, purple: then fig., to be darkly troubled in mind: Eur. Her. 40 ἀμφὶ τοῖσδε καλχαίνων τέκνοις . Hence perh. Κάλχας, the seer who darkly broods on the future. The descent of this metaphor is curious. φυρ, the root of πορ‐φύρ‐ω, signified ‘to be agitated,’—like heaving water, for instance (Skt. bhur, Lat. ferv-ere, Curt. § 415). In Il. 14.16 ff. a man's troubled hesitation is likened to the trouble of the sea just before a storm, while as yet the waves are not driven either way: ὡς δ’ ὅτε πορφύρῃ πέλαγος μέγα κύματι κωφῷ (not yet breaking in foam)...ὣς ὁ γέρων ὥρμαινε δαϊζόμενος κατὰ θυμόν. The Homeric image is thus subtler than that of a storm in the soul ( Volvere curarum tristes in pectore fluctus, Lucr. 6. 34 ). (2) Then πορφύρω is said of the mind itself: Il. 21.551 ἔστη, πολλὰ δέ οἱ κραδίη πόρφυρε μένοντι , ‘was troubled.’ (3) From πορφύρω, as=‘to be turbid,’ came πορφύρα as=simply ‘the dark’ (purple-fish and dye): and then in later Greek the verb took on the specific sense, ‘to be purple.’ (4) κάλχη = πορφύρα: and hence καλχαίνω

is figuratively used like the Homeric πορφύρω. In πορφύρω the idea of trouble precedes that of colour: in καλχαίνω, vice versa.

οὐ γάρ , ‘what, has not,’ etc., introducing an indignant question, as Ai. 1348, Ph. 249.

τὼ κασιγνήτω … τὸν μὲν … τὸν δέ , partitive apposition (σχῆμα καθ’ ὅλον καὶ μέρος), the whole, which should be in the genitive, being put in the same case as the part,—a constr. freq. in nom., but rare in accus.: cp. 561: Thuc. 2.92 δύο ὑποσχέσεις τὴν μὲν βουλόμενος ἀναπρᾶξαι, τὴν δὲ αὐτὸς ἀποδοῦναι .

The place of τάφου before τὼ κασιγνήτω shows the first thought to have been,— ‘of a tomb, he has deemed our two brothers, the one worthy, the other unworthy’: but προτίσας , which has taken the place of a word in the sense of ἀξιώσας, substitutes the idea of preferring one brother to the other. Thus τάφου is left belonging, in strict grammar, to ἀτιμάσας only; for the genit. with which, cp. O. C. 49.

ἀτιμάσας ἔχει =a perfect, O. T. 577.

σὺν δίκῃ | χρησθεὶς δικαίᾳ καὶ νόμῳ , the reading of our MSS., was a clumsy attempt to mend a corrupt text, in the sense: ‘having treated (him) in accordance with righteous judgment and usage.’ The lateness of the corruption is shown by χρησθεὶς as= χρησάμενος, since in classical Greek χρησθῆναι is always pass., Her. 7.144 (the ships) οὐκ ἐχρήσθησαν , Dem. or. 21 § 16 ἕως ἂν χρησθῇ (ἡ ἐσθής); of oracles being delivered, O. T. 604, O. C. 355: in Polyb. 2. 32 ἐβούλοντο συγχρῆσθαι ταῖς...δυνάμεσι, συγχρησθῆναι is found, indeed, in some MSS., but is manifestly corrupt. Several conjectures are discussed in the Appendix. It is most improbable that vv. 23, 24 have grown out of one verse, either by the interpolation of v. 24, or by the expansion of v. 23. For it is evidently essential to the contrast with vv. 26—30 that the honours paid to Eteocles should be described with emphasis. Were v. 23 immediately followed by v. 25, the effect would be too bald and curt. I read σὺν δίκης | χρήσει δικαίᾳ καὶ νόμου , ‘with righteous observance of justice and usage’ [νόμῳ could be retained, but would be harsh; and the corruption of δίκης would have caused that of νόμου]. δίκης , following σύν , was changed to δίκῃ , and then χρήσει became χρησθείς , in an attempt to mend the sense. σὺν χρήσει δικαίᾳ δίκης καὶ νόμου = δίκῃ καὶ νόμῳ δικαίως χρώμενος. For the latter, cp. Antiphon or. 5 § 87 χρῆσθαι τῇ δίκῃ καὶ τῷ νόμῳ. Eur. I. A. 316 οὐδὲν τῇ δίκῃ χρῆσθαι θέλει . The substantival periphrasis (σὺν χρήσει τινός for χρώμενός τινι) is of a common kind; e.g. Thuc. 2.39 διὰ...τὴν ἐν τῇ γῇ ἐπὶ πολλὰ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἐπίπεμψιν : 5. 8 ἄνευ προόψεως...αὐτῶν (=εἰ μὴ προΐδοιεν αὐτούς).—Schütz (1876, Jahr. f. kl. Phil. p. 176) proposed χρῆσθαι δικαιῶν , ‘deeming it right to treat (him) in accordance with justice,’ etc.: where, however, to supply αὐτῷ is most awkward: I should prefer τῷ (instead of καὶ) νόμῳ. O. T. 1526 is an instance in which καὶ seems to have supplanted an article (ταῖς) after the sense had become obscured. But χρῆσθαι δικαιῶν τῷ νόμῳ appears somewhat too prosaic and cold, and, in so lucid a phrase, would δικαιῶν have been likely to become δικαίᾳ?

νόμου , of funeral rites, cp. 519: so νόμιμα (Thuc. 3.58), τὰ νομιζόμενα ποιεῖν (iusta facere): Plut. Sull. 38 κηδείας τῆς νενομισμένης, the usual obsequies.

τοῖς ἔνερθεν ἔντιμον νεκροῖς , ethic dat., in their sight ( O. T. 8 πᾶσι κλεινός , cp. O. C. 1446). The dead repelled the spirit of the unburied from their converse: Il. 23.71 (the shade of the unburied Patroclus to Achilles) θάπτε με ὅττι τάχιστα, πύλας Ἀΐδαο περήσω. | τῆλέ με εἴργουσι ψυχαί, εἴδωλα καμόντων, | οὐδέ μέ πω μίσγεσθαι ὑπὲρ ποταμοῖο ἐῶσιν.

θανόντα … Πολυνείκους νέκυν , by enallage for θανόντος, but also with a reminiscence of the Homeric νεκύων κατατεθνηώτων: cp. 515 ὁ κατθανὼν νέκυς.

ἐκκεκηρῦχθαι = προκεκηρῦχθαι, as in 203. The compound with ἐκ usu. = ‘to banish by proclamation’ ( O. C. 430 n.).

τὸ μὴ … καλύψαι , instead of the ordinary μὴ καλύψαι: cp. 443: O. C. 1739 ἀπέφυγε... | ...τὸ μὴ πίτνειν κακῶς . Though τὸ μὴ καλύψαι might be viewed as subject to ἐκκεκηρῦχθαι, the latter was probably felt as an impersonal pass. The addition of the art. to the infin. is freq. in drama: cp. 78, and O. C. 47 n.

ἐᾶν δ’ . Since τινά can mean πάντα τινά, it is not necessary to supply πάντας as subject for ἐᾶν, though in O. T. 238 ff. we have μήτ’ ἐσδέχεσθαι μήτε προσφωνεῖν τινα,...ὠθεῖν δ’ ἀπ’ οἴκων πάντας.—L has ἄταφον ἄκλαυτον . For this order it may be said, that a tribrach contained in one word forms the second foot in Ph. 1235 πότερα , ib. 1314 πατέρα, Aesch. Ch. 1 χθόνιε. Also, ἄταφον thus gains a certain abrupt force, and the order corresponds with καλύψαι...κωκῦσαι. But against it we may urge:—(1) The other order was the usual one: Il. 22.386 κεῖται πὰρ νήεσσι νέκυς ἄκλαυτος ἄθαπτος : Eur. Hec. 30 | ἄκλαυτος, ἄταφος. (2) On such a question of order no great weight belongs to L, in which wrong transpositions of words certainly occur; e.g. Ph. 156, Ph. 1332: O. C. 1088. Here some MSS. give ἄκλαυστον ἄταφον. There is no ground for distinguishing ἄκλαυστος, as ‘not to be wept,’ from ἄκλαυτος, ‘not wept’ (see O. T. 361 note in Appendix on γνωτός and γνωστός). L gives the form without sigma here, as below, 847, 876, and in O. C. 1708; but the sigmatic form in El. 912.

θησαυρόν : schol. ἕρμαιον, εὕρημα, taking it as merely ‘treasure trove’; but here ‘treasure’ evidently implies ‘store’ (cp. Ph. 37 θησαύρισμα); the carrion-birds can return again and again to their feast.

εἰσορῶσι , when they look down upon it from the air. There is no ground for saying that εἰσορᾶν was specially ‘to eye with desire’: in Xen. Cyr. 5.1.15 οὔτε πυρὸς ἅπτομαι οὔτε τοὺς καλοὺς εἰσορῶ , it is simply ‘look at.’ The conjecture εἰσορμῶσι , to be taken with πρὸς χάριν βορᾶς, ‘swooping to the joy of the feast,’ is not only needless, but bad. Far finer is the picture of the birds pausing in their flight at the moment when they first descry the corpse below.

Take πρὸς χάριν βορᾶς with γλυκὺν θησαυρόν, not with εἰσορῶσι: lit., a welcome store to the birds, when they look upon it, with a view to pleasure in feeding. For the sensual use of χάρις cp. Phaedr. 254 A τῆς τῶν ἀφροδισίων χάριτος.

πρὸς χάριν is used either adverbially or with a genitive. (1) As an adverb, it means literally, ‘with a view to gratification’: hence (a) when the χάρις is one's own, ‘at pleasure,’ as Philoctetes calls the birds ( Ph. 1156) κορέσαι στόμα πρὸς χάριν, to glut their beaks on him ‘as they will’: ( b) when the χάρις is another's, ‘so as to give pleasure,’ ‘graciously,’ as O. T. 1152 σὺ πρὸς χάριν μὲν οὐκ ἐρεῖς . (2) A genitive after πρὸς χάριν can denote (a) that in which the χάρις consists, as βορᾶς here: or (b) the person or thing whose the χάρις is, as below, 908, τίνος νόμου...πρὸς χάριν; ‘in deference to what law?’ Eur. Med. 538 νόμοις τε χρῆσθαι μὴ πρὸς ἰσχύος χάριν , ‘not at the pleasure of force,’— i.e. not so that force can do what it pleases. Here, πρὸς χάριν βορᾶς differs from a simple χάριν βορᾶς by implying the same notion as the adverbial πρὸς χάριν in Ph. 1156 quoted above: ‘to feast on at their pleasure.’—Eustathius on Il. 8.379 (p. 719. 9) defines carrion-birds as τοῖς πρὸς χάριν ὁρῶσι βορᾶς τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν σαρκῶν. It cannot be doubted that he was thinking of our passage, and that his text, like ours, had εἰσορῶσι: but, using the simple ὁρῶσι, he has made a new phrase, ‘looking to pleasure in food,’ and his words afford no argument for joining πρὸς χάριν with εἰσορῶσι here.

σοί , like κἀμοί , depends on κηρύξαντ’ ἔχειν (for which see 22). Creon's edict, addressed to all Thebans, touches the sisters first, since, as the nearest relatives of the dead, they were most concerned to see that he received burial. Antigone speaks with burning indignation. She says, in effect:—‘Thus hath Creon forbidden thee and me to render the last offices to our brother.’ The parenthesis λέγω γὰρ κἀμέ is prompted by the intense consciousness of a resolve. To her, who knows her own heart, it seems wonderful that Creon should even have imagined her capable of obeying such an edict. It is a fine psychological touch, and one of the most pathetic in the play.

τὸν ἀγαθόν , ironical, as O. T. 385 Κρέων ὁ πιστός , Ph. 873 ἁγαθοὶ στρατηλάται.

λέγω γὰρ κἀμέ (instead of κἀμοί), a constr. most freq. when the acc. is a proper name, as Dem. or. 24 § 6 προσέκρουσ’ ἀνθρώπῳ πονηρῷ...Ἀνδροτίωνα λέγω . So Tr. 9, Ph. 1261, Aesch. Th. 609, Eur. Her. 642. On the other hand cp. Dem. or. 8 § 24 παρ’ ὧν ἂν ἕκαστοι δύνωνται, τούτων τῶν τὴν Ἀσίαν ἐνοικούντων λέγω, χρήματα λαμβάνουσιν : Aesch. fr. 169 ἀλλ’ Ἀντικλείας ἆσσον ἦλθε Σίσυφος, | τῆς σῆς λέγω τοι μητρός. In Ai. 569 where L has Ἐριβοία (sic) λέγω, most edd. now give the dat.

Two other explanations may be noticed. Both make σοι enclitic. (1) Taking σοι as ethic dat. with τοιαῦτα : ‘There is the good Creon's proclamation for you,—aye, and for me too, for I count myself also amongst those forbidden’ (Campbell). Thus κἀμοί is not, like σοι , a mere ethic dat., but rather a dat. of interest. Such a transition seems hardly possible. (2) Taking σοι as ethic dat. with ἀγαθόν : ‘your good Creon, aye and mine, for I own I too thought him so’ (Kennedy). But Antigone is too much occupied with the edict itself to dwell with such emphasis at such a moment on the disappointment which she has experienced as to Creon's amiability.

νεῖσθαι pres. ( Od. 5.88): Eur. has νεῖσθε ( Eur. Alc. 737) and νεόμενος (in lyr. El. 723): otherwise the word is not tragic.

τοῖσι μὴ εἰδόσιν , synizesis, as 263, 535, O. C. 1155 ὡς μὴ εἰδότ’ αὐτόν , Tr. 321 καὶ ξυμφορά τοι μὴ εἰδέναι .

παρ’ οὐδέν : cp. 466: O. T. 983 ταῦθ’ ὅτῳ | παρ’ οὐδέν ἐστι . The addition of ὡς serves to mark Creon's point of view more strongly: cp. O. C. 732 ἥκω γὰρ οὐχ ὡς δρᾶν τι βουληθείς , n.

ὃς ἂν … δρᾷ , the antecedent τούτῳ being suppressed,=a dat., τῷ δρῶντι: cp. Isocr. or. 18 § 37 προσήκει βοηθεῖν ὑμᾶς οὐχ οἵτινες ἂν δυστυχεστάτους σφᾶς αὑτοὺς ἀποδείξωσιν ἀλλ’ οἵτινες ἂν δικαιότερα λέγοντες φαίνωνται . That such a relative clause was felt as practically equivalent to a noun-case may be seen from Thuc. 2.62, where it is co-ordinated with a dative: αὔχημα μὲν...καὶ δειλῷ τινὶ ἐγγίγνεται, καταφρόνησις δέ, ὃς ἂν καὶ γνώμῃ πιστεύῃ. Thuc. uses this constr. esp. in definitions, as 6. 14, τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ’ εἶναι, ὃς ἂν τὴν πατρίδα ὠφελήσῃ .

προκεῖσθαι : cp. 481: O. T. 865 νόμοι πρόκεινται.

δημόλευστον = λευσθέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου, the epith. of the victim being transferred to the doom: Tr. 357 ὁ ῥιπτὸς Ἰφίτου μόρος . Cp. Aesch. Ag. 1616 δημορριφεῖς...λευσίμους ἀράς . Death by public stoning would mean that the transgressor was execrated as a traitor to the commonweal: see n. on O. C. 435.

σοι ethic dat.: so O. C. 62 and El. 761 τοιαῦτά σοι ταῦτ’ ἐστίν.

ἐσθλῶν , gen. of origin with πέφυκας, from a good stock: O. T. 1062 ἐὰν τρίτης ἐγὼ | μητρὸς φανῶ τρίδουλος n. Cp. fr. 601 (race cannot be relied upon, since often) πέλεται | οὔτ’ ἀπ’ εὐγενέων ἐσθλὸς οὔτ’ ἀχρείων | τὸ λίαν κακός.

ὦ ταλαῖφρον , ‘my poor sister’: cp. ἄνολβος (1026), δύσποτμος ( O. T. 888), μέλεος, etc.

εἰ τάδ’ ἐν τούτοις : cp. O.C. 1443 ταῦτα... | ...τῇδε φῦναι. The plur. ἐν τούτοις means either (1) ‘in these circumstances,’ as here, and Plat. Phaedo 101C: or (2) ‘meanwhile,’ inter haec, as Plat. Symp. 220B. The sing. ἐν τούτῳ usually=‘meanwhile’; more rarely ‘in this case’ (Thuc. 1.37), or ‘at this point’ (id. 2. 8).

λύουσ’ … ἢ ’φάπτουσα , ‘by seeking to loose or to tighten the knot,’—a phrase, perhaps proverbial, for ‘meddling in any way.’ She can do no good by touching the tangled skein. The Greek love of antithesis naturally tended to expressions like our ‘by hook or by crook,’ ‘by fair means or foul,’ ‘for love or money,’ ‘good or bad,’ etc. Cp. 1109 οἵ τ’ ὄντες οἵ τ’ ἀπόντες (n.): Eur. Bacch. 800 ἀπόρῳ γε τῷδε συμπεπλέγμεθα ξένῳ, | ὃς οὔτε πάσχων οὔτε δρῶν σιγήσεται , which is plainly colloquial,—meaning ‘who will not hold his peace on any terms’; for though πάσχων suits the recent imprisonment of Dionysus, δρῶν could not mean definitely, ‘as a free agent.’ Similarly we may suppose that some such phrase as οὔτε λύων οὔτε ἅπτων ( Plat. Crat. 417E τὸ δὲ ἅπτειν καὶ δεῖν ταὐτόν ἐστι ) was familiar as=‘by no possible means.’ If ἐφάπτουσα is sound, the poet has refined a colloquialism by modifying ἅπτουσα into ἐφάπτουσα, just as τί δρῶν ἢ τί λέγων (cp. Aesch. PV 660) appears in O. T. 71 as ὅ τι | δρῶν ἢ τί φωνῶν. Some find a reference to weaving;—‘by loosening the web, or fastening a new thread’; but, though the phrase may have been first suggested by the loom, it was probably used without any such conscious allusion. Quite different from our passage is Ai. 1317 εἰ μὴ ξυνάψων ἀλλὰ συλλύσων πάρει , ‘not to embroil the feud, but to help in solving it’: cp. Eur. Hipp. 670 τίνας νῦν τέχνας ἔχομεν ἢλόγους | σφαλεῖσαι κάθαμμα λύειν λόγου ; ‘to loose the knot of controversy.’ —Another view makes the phrase refer to Creon's edict: ‘seeking to undo it, or to tighten it,’—i.e. to break it, or to make it more stringent than it already is (schol. λύουσα τὸν νόμον, ἢ βεβαιοῦσα αὐτόν). But, though Antigone has not yet revealed her purpose, too great callousness is ascribed to Ismene if she is supposed to doubt whether her sympathy is invited against or for such an edict.—The act. ἐφάπτειν is rare: Tr. 933 τοὔργον ὡς ἐφάψειεν , that he had imposed the deed on her (by his fierce reproaches): Pind. O. 9. 60 μὴ καθέλοι νιν αἰὼν πότμον ἐφάψαις | ὀρφανὸν γενεᾶς. Was Porson right in conjecturing εἵθ’ ἅπτουσα ? For it, we may observe:—(1) An opposition of the simple λύειν and ἅπτειν suits a proverbial phrase: (2) ἤ and εἰ are elsewhere confused, as O. C. 80 (n.): (3) the single εἴτε is found in O. T. 517 λόγοισιν εἴτ’ ἔργοισιν , Tr. 236 πατρῴας εἴτε βαρβάρου ; Against the conjecture is the fact that εἴθ’ ἅπτουσα would have been much less likely to generate the ἢ θάπτουσα of our MSS., since the intermediate εἰ θάπτουσα, being obviously unmeaning, would have been likely to cure itself.

προσθείμην : cp. O. C. 767 προσθέσθαι χάριν , n.

πλέον , ‘for thine advantage’: O. T. 37 οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον , n.

ξυμπονήσεις is the more general word,—‘co-operate’; ξυνεργάσει , the more explicit,—‘help to accomplish the deed.’

ποῖόν τι κινδύνευμα , cognate acc. to the verbs in 41: cp. O. C. 344 κακὰ | ὑπερπονεῖτον , n.

Read ποῦ γνώμης...εἶ (from εἶναι): cp. El. 390 ποῦ ποτ’ εἶ φρενῶν . The question between ποῦ and ποῖ here is one of sense, not of idiom. ποῖ γνώμης ...εἶ (from ἰέναι) would mean, ‘to what thought will you have recourse?’ Cp. O. C. 170 ποῖ τις φροντίδος ἔλθῃ ; (n.), Tr. 705 οὐκ ἔχω...ποῖ γνώμης πέσω . But the meaning here is, ‘what can you be thinking of?’

εἰ sc. σκόπει .—Join ξὺν τῇδε χερί : she lifts her hand.

κουφιεῖς , take up for burial: cp. Ai. 1410 πλευρὰς σὺν ἐμοὶ | τάσδ’ ἐπικούφιζ ' (the dead Ajax): and the common phrase ἀναιρεῖσθαι νεκρούς.

ἦ γὰρ marks surprise ( O. C. 64). The absence of caesura in the first three feet allows each of the two important words (νοεῖς θάπτειν) to fall slowly from the astonished speaker's lips.

σφε = αὐτόν, as 516, 1226. σφε can be s. or pl., m. or f.: νιν, s. or pl., m., f. or n.

ἀπόρρητον , acc. neut. in appos. with θάπτειν σφε: Plat. Gorg. 507E ἐπιθυμίας...πληροῦν, ἀνήνυτον κακόν.

πόλει , ‘to’ or ‘for’ (dat. of interest), not ‘by’ (dat. of agent), though the latter might be supported by Eur. Phoen. 1657 ἐγώ σφε θάψω, κἂν ἀπεννέπῃ πόλις .

τὸν γοῦν ἐμὸν κ.τ.λ. To the question—‘Do you really mean to bury him?’—the simple answer would have been, τὸν γοῦν ἐμὸν ἀδελφόν, ‘I certainly mean to bury my own brother.’ But the word ἐμόν —reminding her that he is equally Ismene's brother—prompts the insertion of the reproachful clause, καὶ τὸν σόν, ἢν σὺ μὴ θέλῃς . Thus the contrast between τὸν ἐμόν and τὸν σόν anticipates the emphasis on the word ἀδελφόν . The whole thought is,—‘I will certainly do my duty,—and thine, if thou wilt not,—to a brother.’ Since ὁ ἐμός is the same person as ὁ σός, this thought can be poetically expressed by saying, ‘I will certainly bury my brother,—and thine, if thou wilt not’: for the tribute rendered to him by one sister represents the tribute due from both. Remark that γοῦν often emphasises a pers. or possessive pron. (as here ἐμόν): 565 σοὶ γοῦν: Ai. 527 πρὸς γοῦν ἐμοῦ : O. T. 626 τὸ γοῦν ἐμόν : El. 1499 τὰ γοῦν ς '.— Two other versions are possible, but less good. (1) Taking τὸν … ἐμὸν καὶ τὸν σόν as=‘him who is my brother and thine,’ and ἢν as=‘even if.’ But for this we should expect τὸν γοῦν ἐμόν τε καὶ σόν, and κἄν. (2) Taking καὶ with ἤν , ‘I will bury my brother, even if thou wilt not bury thine.’ But (i) the separation of καί from ἤν is abnormal: (ii) the mode of expression would be scarcely natural unless ὁ ἐμός and ὁ σός were different persons.

ἀδελφὸν … ἁλώσομαι . Didymus (circ. 30 B.C.) said this verse was condemned as spurious ‘by the commentators’ (ὑπὸ τῶν ὑπομνηματιστῶν). I believe it to be undoubtedly genuine. One modern argument against it is that Antigone should here speak only one verse. But these two verses express the resolve on which the action of the play turns: it is an important moment in the dialogue. And, at such a moment, Soph. often allows a stichomuthia to be broken by two or more verses for the same speaker. See the stichomuthia in 401—406, broken by 404 f.: O. T. 356-369, broken by 366 f.: ib. 1000—1046, broken by 1002 f. and 1005 f.: O. C. 579-606, broken by 583 f. and 599 ff. Further, verse 46 is Sophoclean in three traits: (a) ἀδελφόν emphasised by position as first word, with a pause after it: cp. 72, 525: O. T. 278 δεῖξαι : O. C. 1628 χωρεῖν . (b) οὐ γὰρ δή in rejecting an alternative: O. T. 576 ἐκμάνθαν’· οὐ γὰρ δὴ φονεὺς ἁλώσομαι . Cp. O. C. 110 n. (c) The phrase with the aor. part.: Ai. 1267 χάρις διαρρεῖ καὶ προδοῦσ’ ἁλίσκεται . Lastly, v. 45, if alone, would be too bald and curt.

ὦ σχετλία , ‘over-bold.’ The word primarily means ‘enduring’ (&\sqrt;σχε, σχεθεῖν). Hence: (1) Of persons, (a) ‘unflinching,’ in audacity or cruelty,—the usu. Homeric sense, as Od. 9.494 σχέτλιε, τίπτ’ ἐθέλεις ἐρεθιζέμεν ἄγριον ἄνδρα ; So Ph. 369, Ph. 930 ὦ σχέτλιε, Eur. Alc. 741

σχετλία τόλμης. (b) ‘Suffering,’=τλήμων, as Aesch. PV 644 (of Io), Eur. Hec. 783. Neither Homer nor Soph. has this use. (2) Of things, ‘cruel,’ ‘wretched,’—a use common to all the poets: so Ai. 887 σχέτλια γάρ (‘'tis cruel’), Tr. 879.

οὐδέν , adv.: μέτα = μέτεστι : τῶν ἐμῶν (masc.) with εἴργειν only: cp. El. 536 ἀλλ’ οὐ μετῆν αὐτοῖσι τήν γ’ ἐμὴν κτανεῖν . Plat. Apol. 19 C ἐμοὶ τούτων... οὐδὲν μέτεστι. For the plur. cp. O. T. 1448 ὀρθῶς τῶν γε σῶν τελεῖς ὕπερ (‘thou wilt meetly render the last rites to thine own,’—Iocasta).

νῷν ethic dat. with ἀπώλετο (cp. O. C. 81 βέβηκεν ἡμίν ). ἀπεχθής , hateful to mankind for his involuntary crimes. ἀπώλετο , ‘died,’ not merely ‘was disgraced’ (cp. 59 ὀλούμεθ’): she is speaking of the deaths which had left them alone. But ἔπειτα in 53 is merely ‘then,’ ‘in the next place,’ and need not mean that Oedipus died before Iocasta. Here Soph. follows the outline of the epic version, acc. to which Oed. died at Thebes: see Introd. to Oed. Tyr. pp. xvi ff. The poet of the Odyssey (11. 275) makes him survive his consort's suicide, and no version appears to have assumed the contrary. The Antigone knows nothing of his exile from Thebes, or of the sacred honour which surrounded the close of his life, as the story is told in the later Oedipus at Colonus.

πρὸς … ἀμπλακημάτων … ἀράξας , ‘impelled by them to strike his eyes’: cp. O. T. 1236 (τέθνηκε ) πρὸς τίνος ποτ’ αἰτίας;

αὐτοφώρων = ἃ αὐτὸς ἐφώρασεν (cp. fr. 768 τὰ πλεῖστα φωρῶν αἰσχρὰ φωράσεις βροτῶν), detected by himself, when he insisted on investigating the murder of Laïus (cp. O. T. 1065). Elsewhere αὐτόφωρος = φωραθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτῷ τῷ ἔργῳ, ‘taken in the act’: Thuc. 6.38 κολάζων, μὴ μόνον αὐτοφώρους (χαλεπὸν γὰρ ἐπιτυγχάνειν), ἀλλὰ καὶ ὧν βούλονται μέν, δύνανται δ’ οὔ: and so in the adv. ἐπ’ αὐτοφώρῳ λαμβάνειν etc.

ἀράξας , with the golden brooches (περόναι): O. T. 1276 ἤρασσ’ ἐπαίρων βλέφαρα.

αὐτὸς αὐτουργῷ χερί , emphatic, like αὐτὸς πρὸς αὑτοῦ (1177), but not strictly pleonastic, since αὐτός =‘by his own act,’ i.e. ‘of his free will,’ while αὐτ. χερί refers to the instrument, ‘with hand turned against himself.’ Cp. on 56.

διπλοῦν ἔπος , a two-fold name (for the same person): as conversely Aesch. PV 209 ἐμοὶ δὲ μήτηρ...Θέμις | καὶ Γαῖα, πολλῶν ὀνομάτων μορφὴ μία . Valckenär on Eur. Phoen.p. 153 cites Heracleitus Alleg. Hom. 21 (of Hera) διπλοῦν ὄνομα φύσεως καὶ συμβιώσεως, ‘a name signifying at once birth and marriage’ (since she was coniunx lovis et soror). Seneca Oed. Tyr. 389 mixtumque nomen coniugis, nati, patris. (The feeble v. l. πάθος for ἔπος meant, ‘a double calamity,’ since both mother and wife perished.)

ἀρτάναισι : cp. O. T. 1264 πλεκταῖσιν αἰώραισιν ἐμπεπλεγμένην .

δύο … μίαν : see on 13 .

αὐτοκτονοῦντε is not literally, ‘slaying themselves,’ or ‘slaying each other,’ but, ‘slaying with their own hands’: the context explains that the person whom each so slew was his own brother. So either (1) suicide, or (2) slaying of kinsfolk, can be expressed by αὐθέντης, αὐτοκτόνος, αὐτοσφαγής, αὐτοφόνος, etc. The compound merely expresses that the deed is done with one's own hand, implying that such a use of one's own hand is unnatural. The object of the deed may be one's own life, or another's. This ambiguity of the compound is illustrated by 1175 f. αὐτόχειρ δ’ αἱμάσσεται .—XO. πότερα πατρῴας ἢ πρὸς οἰκείας χερός; ‘by his father's hand, or by his own?’

κατειργάσαντ’ , plur. verb with dual subject, as oft., even when another verb with the same subject is dual, as Xen. Cyr. 6.1.47 ὡς εἰδέτην...ἠσπάσαντο : Plat. Euthyd. 294E ὅτε παιδία ἤστην ...ἠπίστασθε: see O. C. 343 n.

ἐπαλλήλοιν χεροῖν , ‘with mutual hands,’—each brother lifting his hands against the other. It is hard to believe that Soph. would here have written ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοιν , ‘against each other,’ when χεροῖν would seem a weak addition, and the double οιν would be brought into harsh relief by the independence of the two words. The verse is in every way better if we can read ἐπαλλήλοιν as an epithet of χεροῖν . Now we know that the word ἐπάλληλος was in common use at least as early as the 2nd century B.C. In the extant literature it seems always to correspond with ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοις as=‘one on top of another’ ( Od. 23.47 κείατ’ ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοισι ), being used to mean, ‘in close order’ or ‘in rapid sequence’ (as Polyb. 11. 11 ἐν ἐπαλλήλοις τάξεσι, in close ranks: Alciphro Epp. 3. 6 τὰς ἐπαλλήλους πληγάς, the showers of blows). An exception might, indeed, be supposed in Philo Judaeus De Mose 3, p. 692, where he is saying that the continuity of human record has been broken διὰ τὰς ἐν ὕδασι καὶ πυρὶ γενομένας συνεχεῖς καὶ ἐπαλλήλους φθοράς: which Adrian Turnebus rendered, propter illas eluvionum et exustionum continuas et alternas (‘mutual’) interneciones. But Philo was evidently (I think) using ἐπάλληλος in its ordinary sense, and meant merely, ‘owing to the continuous and rapid succession of calamities by flood and fire.’ It by no means follows, however, that a poet of the 5th cent. B.C. could not have used ἐπάλληλος in a sense corresponding with ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοις as= ‘against each other,’—the more frequent and familiar sense of the words, as in the Homeric ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοισιν ἰόντες, ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοισι φέρον πολύδακρυν Ἄρηα ( Il. 3.132): cp. Aristoph. Lys. 50 ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοισιν αἴρεσθαι δόρυ . The use of ἐπάλληλος here may have been partly prompted by a reminiscence of Aesch. Theb. 931 ἐτελεύ|τασαν ὑπ’ ἀλλαλοφόνοις χερσὶν ὁμοσπόροισιν (cp. Xen. Hier. 3. 8 ἀδελφοὺς... ἀλληλοφόνους).

νῦν δ’ αὖ . Though in L δ’ has been inserted by a later hand, it is found in A, and its omission by the first hand in L (which has made other such oversights) cannot weigh much against it. Some of the recent edd. omit it: but the effect of νῦν αὖ without it would here be intolerably abrupt. For αὖ (‘in our turn’) cp. 7.

μόνα δή , ‘all alone’: Tr. 1063 μόνη με δὴ καθεῖλε : Ai. 992 ἁπάντων δή : so esp. with superlatives, ib. 858 πανύστατον δή : Thuc. 1.50 μεγίστη δή .

ψῆφον , the pebble used in voting, then, the vote; here (as below, 632) applied to the resolve or decree of an absolute monarch. Cp. O. T. 606 μή μ’ ἁπλῇ κτάνῃς | ψήφῳ, διπλῇ δέ , i.e. not by thine own royal voice alone, but by mine also.

τυράννων , i.e. Creon: allusive plur., as 67: O.T. 366 n.

κράτη , the powers of the king, as 173 (cp. O. C. 392 n.). The disjunctive ἢ (for which Axt proposed καὶ ) means: ‘if we offend against this edict, or (in any way) against the royal powers.’ It could not mean: ‘if we infringe his edict, or (by persistence after warning) come into conflict with his power.’

τοῦτο μὲν is not governed by ἐννοεῖν , but is adv., ‘on the one hand,’ answered by ἔπειτα δ’ (63) instead of τοῦτο δέ, as elsewhere by τοῦτ’ αὖθις (167), τοῦτ’ ἄλλο ( O. T. 605), εἶτα ( Ph. 1346), or δέ ( O. C. 441).

ὡς , with οὐ μαχουμένα , marks the intention of nature as expressed in sex,—‘showing that we were not meant to strive with men.’ This might be illustrated by Arist. 's phrase, βούλεται ἡ φύσις ποιεῖν τι, in regard to nature's intention or tendency (De Anim. Gen. 4. 10, etc.).

οὕνεκ’ , ‘that’ (as O. T. 708, O. C. 1395, and oft.): not, ‘because,’ as some take it, supplying χρή with ἀκούειν.

ἐκ , as from the head and fount of authority; so El. 264 κἀκ τῶνδ’ ἄρχομαι : cp. O. C. 67 n.

ἀκούειν , infin. expressing consequence (‘so that we should hearken’), without ὥστε, as 1076 ληφθῆναι. We find ἀκούω τινός, ‘to obey a person,’ but not ἀκούω τι, as ‘to hear (and obey) a command.’ Here ταῦτα and ἀλγίονα are accusatives of respect, ‘in regard to these things,’ as πάντα in El. 340, τῶν κρατούντων ἐστὶ πάντ’ ἀκουστέα, ‘I must obey the rulers in all things.’ If the accusatives were objective, the sense would be, ‘to hear these taunts’ (or, ‘to be called these names’): cp. Ph. 607, Ai. 1235.

ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν . μέν (with no answering δέ) emphasises ἐγώ (see on 11), while οὖν has its separate force, ‘therefore,’ as in O. T. 483, O. C. 664. The composite μὲν οὖν (‘nay rather’) would be unfitting here.

τοὺς ὑπὸ χθονός , the gods below (451), and also the departed spirit of Polyneices,—which, like the spirit of the unburied Patroclus ( Il. 23.65), can have no rest till sepulture has been given to the corpse. Cp. O. C. 1775 τῷ κατὰ γῆς (Oedipus): for the allusive plur., El. 1419 ζῶσιν οἱ γᾶς ὑπαὶ κείμενοι (Agamemnon). In ref. to the nether world, Attic writers regularly join ὑπό with gen., not dat.: El. 841 ὑπὸ γαίας... ἀνάσσει : Tr. 1097 τόν θ’ ὑπὸ χθονὸς | Ἅιδου...σκύλακα : Phaedr. 249 A τὰ ὑπὸ γῆς δικαστήρια . Indeed ὑπό with dat. is altogether rare in Attic prose, except as meaning (a) under an authority, as ὑπὸ νόμοις, or (b) under a class, as Plat. Symp. 205B αἱ ὑπὸ πάσαις ταῖς τέχναις ἐργασίαι . In poetry, Attic and other, it is freq. also in the local sense: cp. 337 ὑπ’ οἴδμασιν.

βιάζομαι τάδε , pass. with cogn. acc., as 1073 βιάζονται τάδε. Cp. Ph. 1366 κἄμ’ ἀναγκάζεις τάδε; and below, 219.

τοῖς ἐν τέλει βεβῶσι = τυράννων in 60, i.e. Creon. βεβῶσι , as El. 1094 μοίρᾳ μὲν οὐκ ἐν ἐσθλᾷ | βεβῶσαν : O. C. 1358 ἐν πόνῳ | ταὐτῷ βεβηκώς . Elsewhere Soph. has the simple phrase: Ai. 1352 κλύειν...τῶν ἐν τέλει , and so Ph. 385, 925. οἱ ἐν τέλει are ‘those in authority,’ —τέλος meaning ‘final or decisive power,’ as Thuc. 4.118 τέλος ἔχοντες ἰόντων , ‘let the envoys go as plenipotentiaries.’ Pindar's τέλος δωδεκάμηνον (‘an office held for a year’), N. 11. 10, is perh. poetical. As synonyms for οἱ ἐν τέλει we find (1) οἱ τὰ τέλη ἔχοντες, Thuc. 5.47, and (2) τὰ τέλη simply,—‘the authorities,’ sometimes with masc. part., as Thuc. 4.15 ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς...τὰ τέλη καταβάντας βουλεύειν . Hellen. 6. 5 has τὰ μέγιστα τέλη, ‘the highest magistrates’ (like Thuc. 1.10 ἔξω τῶν βασιλέων καὶ τῶν μάλιστα ἐν τέλει : cp. 2. 10).

τὸ γὰρ | ...πράσσειν : for the art. in the 6th place, with its noun in the next v., cp. 78 : O. T. 231: O. C. 265, 351: Ph. 674.

περισσὰ πρ .: cp. 780: so Tr. 617 περισσὰ δρᾶν, = πολλὰ πράττειν, πολυπραγμονεῖν.

οὐκ ἔχει νοῦν οὐδ. = ἀνόητόν ἐστι: prop. of persons, as Tr. 553 γυναῖκα νοῦν ἔχουσαν .

ἔτι , ‘yet,’—at some future time: so El. 66 (κἄμ’ ἐπαυχῶ) ἄστρον ὣς λάμψειν ἔτι : Tr. 257 δουλώσειν ἔτι (he vowed that he would yet enslave him).

πράσσειν … δρῴης (instead of πράσσοις): for such substitution of a synonym cp. O. T. 54 ἄρξεις...κρατεῖς (n.): O. C. 1501 σαφὴς ...ἐμφανής . With δρῴης we have a double ἄν , the first after the negative, the second after the emphatic ἐμοῦ γ’: cp. O. T. 339 n.—Objection has been made to ἡδέως on the ground that it ought to mean, ‘with pleasure to yourself.’ Wecklein, indeed, takes that to be the sense, supposing γε to be misplaced; i.e. the proper order would have been, ἡδέως γε ἂν ἐμοῦ κ.τ.λ.: but the position of <)μοῦ in the verse sufficiently shows that γε must go with it. ἐμοί γ’ (Meineke) would leave μέτα awkward: and ἀσμένης (Lehrs) would not have been displaced by ἡδέως , which the old scholia confirm. All the difficulty has arisen from failing to distinguish between (1) οὐκ ἂν ἡδέως δρῴης, and (2) οὐκ ἂν μετὰ ἐμοῦ ἡδέως δρῴης. In (1) ἡδέως could mean only, ‘agreeably to yourself.’ But in (2) it is ambiguous; for the statement is equivalent to saying, ‘your co-operation with me would not be agreeable’; i.e. to you, or to me, or to either of us,—as the context may imply. Here, as the emphatic ἐμοῦ γε indicates, she means ἡδέως ἐμοί. Cp. Plat. Rep. 426C ὃς...ἂν σφᾶς...ἥδιστα θεραπεύῃ , i.e. ‘whoever serves them most acceptably’ (not, ‘most gladly’). Aristoph. Nub. 79 πῶς δῆτ’ ἂν ἥδιστ’ αὐτὸν ἐπεγείραιμι ; (i.e. most pleasantly for him).

ἴσθ’ from εἰμί: ‘be such as thou wilt,’—show what character thou wilt. Cp. Ph. 1049 οὗ γὰρ τοιούτων δεῖ, τοιοῦτός εἰμ’ ἐγώ: ib. 1271 τοιοῦτος ἦσθα τοῖς λόγοισι : El. 1024 ἄσκει τοιαύτη νοῦν δῑ αἰῶνος μένειν : O.T. 435 ἡμεῖς τοιοίδ’ ἔφυμεν.

όποία σοι δοκεῖ =( τοιαύτη) ὁποίᾳ (or ὁποίαν) εἶναι δοκεῖ σοι, the relative being attracted into the case of the suppressed antecedent. This was the more natural since ὁποία σοι δοκεῖ, ‘of any kind you please,’ was felt as almost one word, ὁποιαδήποτε; just so ὃς βούλει (quivis), instead of οὗτος ὃν βούλει, Plat. Gorg. 517A μήποτέ τις τῶν νῦν ἔργα τοιαῦτα ἐργάσηται οἷα τούτων ὃς βούλει εἴργασται : Crat. 432 A ὥσπερ αὐτὰ τὰ δέκα ἢ ὅστις βούλει ἄλλος ἀριθμός.—Those who read ἴσθ’ (from οἶδα ) ὁποῖά σοι δοκεῖ compare El. 1055 ἀλλ’ εἰ σεαυτῇ τυγχάνεις δοκοῦσά τι | φρονεῖν, φρόνει τοιαῦτα . But εἰδέναι is not φρονεῖν. In Attic, ἴσθ’ ὁποῖά σοι δοκεῖ could mean nothing but ‘know such things as seem good to thee.’ It could not mean (a) ‘Have such sentiments as seem good to thee’: nor (b) ‘Be wise in thine own wisdom.’ The Homeric phrases, πεπνυμένα εἰδώς (‘wise of heart’), ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς, ἤπια οἶδε (‘he has kindly feelings,’ Od. 13.405), etc., have no counterpart in the Attic usage of εἰδέναι. In 301 δυσσέβειαν εἰδέναι, and in Ph. 960 δοκοῦντος οὐδὲν εἰδέναι κακόν, the verb means simply ‘to know.’

θάψω , emphatic by place and pause: see on 46 ἀδελφόν.

φίλη … φίλου , loved by him, as he is loved by me: Ai. 267 κοινὸς ἐν κοινοῖσι : ib. 620 ἄφιλα παρ’ ἀφίλοις.

μετ’ αὐτοῦ κείσομαι , i.e. in the same world of the dead (76). The repetition of μετά serves to bring out the reciprocity of love more strongly: φίλη μετ’ αὐτοῦ κείσομαι, μετὰ φίλου (κειμένη),— instead of the simpler φίλη μετὰ φίλου κείσομαι.

ὅσια πανουργήσασ’ : having broken a human law in a manner which the gods permit,—viz., in order to observe a divine law. Creon uses the word πανουργίας below, 300. ὅσια is peculiarly appropriate since the word was familiar where duty to heaven was distinguished from duty to man: cp. Polyb. 23. 10 παραβῆναι καὶ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους δίκαια καὶ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺσὅσια. The phrase is an ὀξύμωρον (a paradox with a point), like ‘splendide mendax’; i.e. the qualification ( ὅσια) seems contrary to the essence of the thing qualified. Cp. Milton (Tetrachordon), ‘Men of the most renowned virtue have sometimes by transgressing most truly kept the law’; which is not an oxymoron, because the words, ‘most truly,’ suggest an explanation by showing that ‘kept’ is not used in its ordinary sense.

ἐπεὶ κ.τ.λ. : (I will obey gods rather than men), for the other world is more to me than this.

τῶν ἐνθάδε = ἢ τοῖς ἐνθάδε: O. C. 567 τῆς ἐς αὔριον | οὐδὲν πλέον μοι ς οῦ (=ἢ σοὶ) μέτεστιν ἡμέρας (n.).

κείσομαι , though we have had the word in 73. For other examples of such repetition, see n. on O. C. 554, and cp. below 163 ὤρθωσαν, 167 ὤρθου: 207 ἔκ γ’ ἐμοῦ, 210 ἐξ ἐμοῦ: 613, 618 ( ἕρπει): 614, 625 (ἐκτὸς ἄτας).

σοὶ δ’ is better than Elmsley's σὺ δ’ , since the primary contrast is between their points of view: ‘if it seems right to thee, dishonour the dead,’ rather than, ‘do thou, if it seems right, dishonour the dead.’ Remark, too, that the simple εἰ δοκεῖ (without dat. of pron.) is usually a polite formula, ‘if it is pleasing to you (as well as to me)’: Ph. 526 ἀλλ’ εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν: ib. 645 ἀλλ’ εἰ δοκεῖ, χωρῶμεν : ib. 1402 εἰ δοκεῖ, στείχωμεν.

τὰ τῶν θεῶν ἔντιμα , the honoured things of the gods; the laws which are theirs (454 θεῶν νόμιμα), held in honour (by them and by men). τὰ τοῖς θεοῖς ἔντιμα (25, El. 239 ἔντιμος τούτοις ) would have presented the gods only as observers, not also as authors, of the laws.

ἀτιμάσασ’ ἔχε (cp. 22), ‘be guilty of dishonouring’: cp. Ai. 588 μὴ προδοὺς ἡμᾶς γένῃ , and n. on O. T. 957.

ἐγὼ is slightly emphasised by μέν (see on 11), which goes closely with it, and does not here answer to the following δέ .

ἄτιμα ποιοῦμαι = ἀτιμάζω: cp. O.C. 584 δῑ οὐδενὸς ποιεῖ.

τὸ δὲ | ...δρᾶν : see on 67 τὸ γὰρ | ...πράσσειν. The inf. with art. is strictly an acc. of respect (‘as for the acting..., I am incapable of it’), but is practically equiv. to the simple inf., ἀμήχανος δρᾶν: see n. on O. C. 47 οὐδ’ ἐμοὶ...τοὐξανιστάναι... | ...ἐστὶ θάρσος .

τάδ’ ἂν προὔχοιο , ‘thou canst make these excuses’ (sc. εἰ βούλοιο): Aesch. Ag. 1394 χαίροιτ’ ἄν, εἰ χαίροιτ’· ἐγὼ δ’ ἐπεύχομαι . For προέχεσθαι as= προφασίζεσθαι cp. Thuc. 1.140 ὅπερ μάλιστα προὔχονται . So πρόσχημα = πρόφασις ( El. 525).

δὴ , ‘now,’ as the next thing to be done: cp. 173.

τάφον χώσουσ’ , prop. to raise a mound on the spot where the remains of the dead had been burned: Il. 7.336 τύμβον δ’ ἀμφὶ πυρὴν ἕνα χεύομεν . So Il. 24.799 σῆμ’ ἔχεαν ,—after placing the bones in an urn (λάρναξ), and depositing this in a grave (κάπετος). She speaks as if she hoped to give him regular sepulture. This is ultimately done by Creon's command (1203 τύμβον...χώσαντες), though the rites which Antigone herself is able to perform are only symbolical (255, 429).

Join οἴμοι ταλαίνης , ‘alas for thee, unhappy one’: O. C. 1399 οἴμοι κελεύθου τῆς τ’ ἐμῆς δυσπραξίας, | οἴμοι δ’ ἑταίρων : but the nom. when the ref. is to the speaker, as El. 1143 οἴμοι τάλαινα τῆς ἐμῆς πάλαι τροφῆς.

μὴ ’μοῦ προτάρβει (or, as some write it, μὴ ἐμοῦ) is clearly right. If we read μή μου προτάρβει, then the emphasis is solely on the verbal notion. ‘I fear for thee.’—‘ Fear not so: make thine own fate prosperous.’ But the stress on τὸν σόν renders it certain that the poet intended a corresponding stress on the preceding pronoun: ‘Fear not for me— make thine own fate prosperous.’ And μὴ ’μοῦ is no more objectionable than μὴ ’γώ in El. 472. προτάρβει , as Tr. 89 (with gen. πατρός). Distinguish προδείσας, ‘afraid beforehand,’ O. T. 90 (n.).

ἐξόρθου here=‘straighten out,’ i.e. guide in a straight or prosperous course: cp. 167 ὤρθου πόλιν, 675 ὀρθουμένων. Elsewhere ἐξορθόω is usu. ‘to correct, amend’ (Plat. Tim. 90D); more rarely, like ἀνορθόω ( O. T. 51), ‘to set upright’ (τὸ πεσόν, Plat. Legg. 862C). In the figurative uses of ὀρθός and its derivatives the context must always guide our choice between the notion of ‘upright’ and that of ‘straight.’

ἀλλ’ οὖν … γε . In this combination ἀλλά is like our ‘well’; οὖν =‘at any rate’ (i.e. if you must do it); and γε emphasises the word which it follows. Cp. El. 233 ἀλλ’ οὖν εὐνοίᾳ γ’ αὐδῶ , ‘well, at any rate (i.e. though you will not listen to me) it is with good-will that I speak.’ Ph. 1305.

κρυφῆ δέ : here δέ = ἀλλά: Thuc. 4.86 οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐπ’ ἐλευθερώσει δέ.

σὺν δ’ , adv., sc. κεύσω: cp. Ai. 1288 ὅδ’ ἦν ὁ πράσσων ταῦτα, σὺν δ’ ἐγὼ παρών.

αὔτως (adv. of αὐτός, see on O.T. 931), in just that way—‘likewise’: Tr. 1040 ὧδ’ αὔτως ὥς μ’ ὤλεσε .

καταύδα , sc. τὸ ἔργον, ‘denounce it.’ The word occurs only here, the pres. used in this sense being καταγορεύω ( Thuc. 4.68 καταγορεύει τις ξυνειδὼς τοῖς ἑτέροις τὸ ἐπιβούλευμα ): aor. κατεῖπον.

πολλόν : this Ionic form occurs also Tr. 1196 πολλὸν δ’ ἄρσεν’ ἐκτεμόνθ’ ὁμοῦ | ἄγριον ἔλαιον , though in no other places of tragedy. And Soph. also used the epic form πουλύπους in a trimeter, fr. 286 νόει πρὸς ἀνδρί, σῶμα πουλύπους ὅπως | πέτρᾳ, κ.τ.λ. Porson on Eur. Hec. 618 wished to read in our verse either πλεῖον (which is inadmissible, as Nauck observes, Eur. Stud. 2. 27), or μᾶλλον, which some edd. receive. But πολλὸν is manifestly better than μᾶλλον.

σιγῶσ’ is explained by ἐὰν … τάδε , while the thought is strengthened by πᾶσι : she is to tell the news to all.

θερμὴν ἐπὶ ψυχροῖσι κ.τ.λ.: ‘thou hast a hot heart for chilling deeds’; i.e. in thy rash enthusiasm thou art undertaking deeds which might well chill thy soul with a presage of death. ἐπί with dat. here=‘with a view to’ ( Xen. Anab. 3.5.18 ἐπὶ τούτοις ἐθύσαντο ): not ‘in,’ like ἐπ’ ἔργοις πᾶσι O. C. 1268 (n.). Cp. 157. θερμήν has suggested ψυχρά, and the thought of the dead has helped (cp. O. C. 621 νέκυς ψυχρός ). In Aesch. PV 693 δείματα are said ἀμφάκει κέντρῳ ψύχειν ψυχάν (to chill,—where Meineke's ψήχειν, ‘to wear,’ is improbable). Cp. Aristoph. Ach. 1191 στυγερὰ τάδε κρυερὰ πάθεα : Eur. fr. 908 κρυερὰ Διόθεν | θανάτου πεμφθεῖσα τελευτή. For the verbal contrast, Schütz cp. Ad Herenn. 4. 15. 21 in re frigidissima cales, in ferventissima friges, and A. P. 465 ardentem frigidus Aetnam Insiluit. He thinks that Ismene (hurt by vv. 86 f.) implies, ‘and a cold heart for thy living sister,’ to which Ant. rejoins by v. 89. But θερμήν is not ‘affectionate,’ and Ant. seems to mean simply, ‘love and piety banish fear.’— Some understand, ‘with a view to joyless things’ (cp. on 650): but this would be weak.

ἁδεῖν , an aor. inf. used in Il. 3.173, as also by Solon (fr. 7 ἔργμασιν ἐν μεγάλοις πᾶσιν ἁδεῖν χαλεπόν), Her., and This Pind. is the only place in classical Attic where any part of the aor. ἕαδον occurs.

εἰ καὶ δυνήσει γ’ , yes, if (besides having the wish to please them) you shall also have the power. καὶ goes closely with δυνήσει : cp. O. T. 283 εἰ καὶ τρίτ’ ἐστί . Such cases must be carefully distinguished from those in which εἰ καί form a single expression; see O. T. p. 296.

Since οὐκοῦν (‘well, then’) precedes, δὴ is best taken as giving precision to ὅταν ,—‘so soon as.’

πεπαύσομαι , ‘I will cease forthwith’: so Tr. 587. Cp. the perf., Ph. 1279 εἰ δὲ μή τι πρὸς καιρὸν λέγων | κυρῶ, πέπαυμαι, ‘I have done.’

ἀρχήν , adv., ‘to begin with,’ ‘at all,’—in negative sentences; often placed, as here, before the negative word; El. 439 ἀρχὴν δ’ ἂν...οὐκ ἂν...ἐπέστεφε : Ph. 1239 ἀρχὴν κλύειν ἂν οὐδ’ ἅπαξ ἐβουλόμην: Her. 3.39 ἔφη χαριεῖσθαι μᾶλλον ἀποδιδοὺς τὰ ἔλαβε ἢ ἀρχὴν μηδὲ λαβών . In affirmative sentences the art. is usually added: Andoc. or. 3 § 20 ἐξῆν γὰρ αὐτοῖς καὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐῶσιν Ὀρχομενίους αὐτονόμους εἰρήνην ἄγειν : so Isocr. or. 15 § 272.

ἐχθαρεῖ , pass.: so, from liquid stems, 230 ἀλγυνεῖ: O. T. 272 φθερεῖσθαι : Ai. 1155 πημανούμενος . The ‘midd.’ fut. in ς affords numerous examples, as below, 210, 637, 726: see n. on O. T. 672 and O. C. 1185.

ἐξ ἐμοῦ , ‘on my part’ (cp. 95), rather than simply ‘by me’ (cp. 63).

ἐχθρὰ...τῷ θανόντι προσκείσει δίκῃ , ‘thou wilt be subject to the lasting enmity of the dead.’ The word προσκείσει means literally, ‘wilt be attached to...,’ i.e., ‘wilt be brought into a lasting relation with’; and ἐχθρά defines the nature of that relation. The sense is thus virtually the same as if we had, ὁ θανὼν ἐχθρός σοι προσκείσεται, ‘the enmity of the dead will cleave to thee.’ The convertible use of προσκεῖσεθαι is illustrated by 1243 ἀνδρὶ πρόσκειται κακόν, as compared with El. 1040 ᾧ σὺ πρόσκεισαι κακῷ , and ib. 240 εἴ τῳ πρόσκειμαι χρηστῷ . Here, προσκείσει expresses merely the establishment of the permanent relation between the two persons. It does not mean, ‘you will be brought, as his foe, into dependence on him’ (i.e. under the power of his curse); as in Eur. Tro. 185 τῷ πρόσκειμαι δούλα τλάμων ; ‘to whom have I been assigned as a slave?’ (i.e. by the casting of lots:— the answer is, ἐγγύς που κεῖσαι κλήρου). Nor, again, ‘you will press upon the dead as his foe,’ i.e. be hostile and grievous to him: for, as δίκῃ shows, the punishment is to be hers, not his. The idea might have been expressed in a converse form by τὸν θανόντα ἐχθρὸν προσθήσει (cf. Xen. Cyr. 2.4.12).

Lehrs proposed Δίκῃ, i.e. ‘you will fall under the chastisement of justice.’ Donaldson, following Emper, reads ἐχθρᾷ... δίκῃ, as iure inimicorum apud mortuum eris: i.e. on the part of the dead you will be deemed to have only the rights of a foe. This is impossible. The ordinary reading is sound.

ἔα , one syll. by synizesis, as O. T. 1451 (n.).

τὴν ἐξ ἐμοῦ δυσββουλίαν , the folly proceeding from me, the folly on my part, for which I bear the sole blame: El. 619 ἀλλ’ ἡ γὰρ ἐκ σοῦ δυσμένεια καὶ τὰ σὰ | ἔργ’ ἐξαναγκάζει με , ‘it is the enmity on thy part,’ etc. Tr. 631 μὴ πρὼ| λέγοις ἂν τὸν πόθον τὸν ἐξ ἐμοῦ, | πρὶν εἰδέναι τἀκεῖθεν εῖ ποθούμεθα . Cp. O. C. 453 n.

τὸ δεινὸν τοῦτο , ironical: cp. El. 376 (Electra in answer to her sister's warnings) φέρ’ εἰπὲ δὴ τὸ δεινόν.

πείσομαι γὰρ οὐ : for the position of the negative (which belongs to the verb, not to τοσοῦτον), cp. 223, O. C. 125 προσέβα γὰρ οὐκ ἄν . We still write οὐ here, not οὔ, because the sentence runs on without pause: but 255 τυμβήρης μὲν οὔ, Ai. 545 ταρβήσει γὰρ οὔ , since in each case a comma can follow the negative.

μὴ οὐ , not μή, because the principal verb πείσομαι is negatived: O.T. 283 n. She means, ‘even if I have to die, at least I shall not suffer the worst of evils; which is not death, but an ignoble death.’ Cp. frag. adesp. 61 οὐ κατθανεῖν γὰρ δεινόν, ἀλλ’ αἰσχρῶς θανεῖν.

τοῖς φίλοις δ’ ὀρθῶς φίλη , ‘but truly dear to thy friends,’—i.e. both to the dead brother and to the living sister. The words are especially a parting assurance ( ἴσθι ) that Ismene's love is undiminished. ὀρθῶς = ἀληθῶς, as Diphilus frag. incert. 20 τὸν ὀρθῶς εὐγενῆ. Others make φίλη active,—‘a true friend to thy friends’ (i.e. to Polyneices): which is certainly the fittest sense in Eur. I. T. 609 ὡς ἀπ’ εὐγενοῦς τινος | ῥίζης πέφυκας, τοῖς φίλοις τ’ ὀρθῶς φίλος (Orestes, when he devotes his life to save his friend's). But here the other view is decidedly preferable.

100-161

Parodos. For the metres see Metrical Analysis. The framework is as follows. (1) 1st strophe, 100 ἀκτίς to 109 χαλινῷ=1st antistrophe, 117 στὰς to 133 ἀλαλάξαι. (2) 2nd strophe, 134 ἀντιτύπᾳ to 140 δεξιόσειρος=2nd antistrophe, 148 ἀλλὰ γὰρ to 154 ἄρχοι. Each strophe and each antistrophe is followed by an anapaestic system (σύστημα) of seven verses, recited by the Coryphaeus alone, in the pauses of the choral dance. The fourth and last of these systems, following the second antistrophe, announces the approach of Creon.

The Ajax is the only play of Sophocles which has a Parodos beginning, in the older style, with a regular anapaestic march. But something of the same character is given to this ode by the regularity of the anapaestic systems. In the Parodos of the O. C. , on the other hand, though anapaests similarly divide each strophe from each antistrophe, the systems are of unequal lengths, and the general character is wholly different, being rather that of a κομμός: see n. on O. C. 117.

The fifteen Theban elders who form the Chorus have been summoned to the palace by Creon,—they know not, as yet, for what purpose (158). They greet the newly-risen sun, and exult in the flight of the Argives.

The ode vividly portrays the enormous sin of Polyneices against his country, and the appalling nature of the peril which Thebes has just escaped. We already know Antigone's motive. This is a dramatic prelude to the announcement of Creon's.

ἀελίου , Dor. for the epic ἠελίου, with α— as usu. (808, O. C. 1245), though it is sometimes used with ă, as Tr. 835, Eur. Med. 1252.

τὸ κάλλιστον ...φάος . Two constructions are possible; I prefer the first. (1) Θήβᾳ φανὲν τὸ κάλλιστον φάος, the art. going with the superlative, which it emphasises,—‘the very fairest,’—a common use, as Hipp. 289B οὐχ ἡ καλλίστη παρθένος αἰσχρὰ φανεῖται; Od. 17.415 οὐ μέν μοι δοκέεις ὁ κάκιστος Ἀχαιῶν . (2) τὸ Θήβᾳ φανὲν κάλλιστον φάος, the art. going with φανέν. This seems awkward. When a voc. is followed by a noun or partic. with art., this is normally in direct agreement with the voc., as ὦ ἄνδρες...οἱ παρόντες (Plat. Prot. 337C), as if here we had ἡ φανεῖσα. The Schol., who prefers this constr., shirks the difficulty by his paraphrase, ὦ τῆς ἀκτῖνος τοῦ ἡλίου φῶς, τὸ φανὲν κ.τ.λ.

ἑπταπύλῳ : epithet of Θήβη in Od. 11.263, Hes. Op. 161, as ἑκατόμπυλοι in Il. 9.383 of Θῆβαι Αἰγύπτιαι.

τῶν προτέρων : cp. 1212f.: Thuc. 1.10 στρατείαν...μεγίστην...τῶν πρὸ αὐτῆς . Tacitus Hist. 1. 50 solus omnium ante se principum. Milton P. L. 4. 322 Adam, the goodliest man of men since born, | His sons, the fairest of her daughters Eve. Goethe Hermann und Dorothea 5. 101 Von ihren Schwestern die beste.

ἐφάνθης with an echo of φανέν (παρήχησις): cp. O.C. 794 στόμα | ...στόμωσιν.

χρυσέας , with υ^ as O.T. 157, 188. So Pind. Pyth. 4.4 ἔνθα ποτὲ χρυ^σέων Διὸς αἰητῶν πάρεδρος . The υ^ was admitted by the lyrists, and from them borrowed by the dramatists, though only in lyrics, and even there only occasionally. Homer never shortens the υ: for, as χρυσέῳ ἀνὰ σκήπτρῳ ( Il. 1.15) shows, the Homeric χρυσέης (etc.) must be treated as disyll. by synizesis.

βλέφαρον = ὄμμα: Eur. Phoen. 543 νυκτός τ’ ἀφεγγὲς βλέφαρον (the moon). Cp. Job iii. 9 (Revised Version), ‘neither let it behold the eyelids of the morning.’

Διρκαίων . The Dircè was on the w. of Thebes, the Ismenus on the E. : between them flowed the less famous Strophia: Callim. Hymn Del. 76 Δίρκη τε Στροφίη τε μελαμψηφῖδος ἔχουσαι | )Ισμηνοῦ χέρα πατρός (alluding to their common source S. of the town). Though the Ismenus, as the eastern stream, would have been more appropriately named here, the Dircè is preferred, as the representative river of Thebes: so Pindar, ‘the Dircaean swan,’ expresses ‘at Thebes and at Sparta’ by ῥεέθροισί τε Δίρκας...καὶ παρ’ Εὐρώτᾳ ( Pind. Isthm. 1. 29). Cp. 844.

τὸν λεύκασπιν...φῶτα , in a collective sense: so ὁ Πέρσης, the Persian army, Her. 8.108, etc. Cp. Aesch. Theb. 90 ὁ λεύκασπις λεώς (Dind. λευκοπρεπής): Eur. Phoen. 1099 λεύκασπιν εἰσορῶμεν Ἀργείων στρατόν . The round shield, painted white, which the Argive soldier carried on his left arm, is the λευκῆς χιόνος πτέρυξ of 114. The choice of white as the Argive colour may have been prompted by a popular association of Ἄργος with ἀργός .

The words τὸν λεύκασπιν Ἀργόθεν answer metrically to 123 πευκάενθ’ Ἥφαιστον ἑλεῖν. Instead of Ἀργόθεν (¯˘¯) we therefore require ¯˘˘¯. The short final of λεύκασπιν is legitimate, the metre being Glyconic (see Analysis Metr.). In the antistrophic verse, the H of Ἥφαιστον is ‘irrational,’ i.e. is a long syllable doing duty for a short: and Nauck is incorrect in saying that the metre ‘requires’ (though it admits) a choriambus beginning with a consonant. The simplest remedy is to read Ἀργόθεν ἐκ | βάντα φῶτα , and to suppose that, after the loss of ἐκ, βάντα and φῶτα were accidentally transposed. Cp. O. C. 1088 where σθένει ’πινικείῳ is certainly the right order, but the MSS. reverse it. (See also above on v. 29.) Dindorf reads ἐκ φῶτα βάντα, assuming tmesis: but tmesis of ἐκ in Soph. occurs elsewhere only before μέν ( Tr. 1053) or δέ, and there was no motive here for interposing φῶτα. Hermann reads Ἀργόθεν ἔκ as=ἐξ Ἀργόθεν: but elsewhere ἐκ comes before, not after, such forms (ἐξ Αἰσύμηθεν, Il. 8.304: ἐξ ἁλόθεν, ἐξ οὐρανόθεν, etc.). If Ἀργόθεν is not genuine, then it was probably a gloss on some other form in ‐θεν. Had γᾶς Πέλοπος (or Δαναοῦ) been in the text, a scholiast would have been more apt to paraphrase with ἀπ’ or ἐξ Ἄργους. This is against such conjectures as Ἀργέϊον, Ἀργογενῆ, Ἀργολικόν, Ἰναχίδαν, Ἰνάχιον, as is also the fact that βάντα suggests a mention of ‘the place whence.’ Ἀπιόθεν (Ahrens) would mean ‘from Ἄπιος,’ but we require ‘from Ἀπία’ sc. (γῆ, the Peloponnesus, O. C. 1303 n.), i.e. Ἀπία—θεν: cp. Ὀλυμπίαθεν. I had thought of Ἰναχόθεν , which Mekler, too, has suggested, though he has not supported it by argument. The points in its favour are: (a) the order φῶτα βάντα can be kept: (b) after ‘Dircè's streams’ in v. 105 a reference to the Argive river would be appropriate: (c) ἀργόθεν might have come in either as a gloss, or a corruption of the letters αχόθεν, if ιν had dropped out after λεύκασπιν. But I hesitate to displace Ἀργόθεν, esp. when a direct mention of Argos here so naturally corresponds with the direct mention of Thebes in v. 101.

πανσαγίᾳ (only here)=πανοπλίᾳ, modal dat. σάγη (for accent, cp. Chandler § 72)=‘what one carries,’ and so, generally, ‘equipment’ ( Aesch. Cho. 560 ξένῳ γὰρ εἰκώς, παντελῆ σάγην ἔχων ), or, specially, body-armour: Aesch. Pers. 240 ἔγχη σταδαῖα καὶ φεράσπιδες σάγαι (opp. to the light equipment of the τοξότης).

φυγάδα πρ. , proleptic, with κινήσασα , ‘having stirred to flight,’ etc. cp. O. C. 1292 ἐξελήλαμαι φυγάς.

πρόδρομον , ‘running forward,’ i.e. ‘in headlong haste’: Aesch. Th. 211 ἐπὶ δαιμόνων πρόδρομος ἦλθον ἀρ|χαῖα βρέτη. In prose, always of precursors (as heralds, or an advanced guard).

ὀξυτέρῳ...χαλινῷ , ‘in swifter career,’ dat. of manner with φυγάδα πρόδρομον. Cp. O. C. 1067 (where the Attic horsemen are described rushing in pursuit of the Thebans), πᾶς γὰρ ἀστράπτει χαλινός, ‘the steel of every bridle flashes,’—as they gallop on with slack reins. So here, the χαλινός, which glitters as the horse rushes along, is poetically identified with the career itself, and thus is fitly joined with ὀξύτερος. The phrase seems happy in this context. The Argives began their retreat in the darkness (16): when the sun rises, the flashing steel of their bridles shows them in headlong flight.

ὀξυτέρῳ does not mean (1) ‘in flight swifter than their former approach’; nor (2) that the reins are shaken ever faster on the horses' necks. ὀξυτόρῳ (L) was a mere blunder: it could only mean ‘piercing’ (the horse's mouth), not, ‘giving a sharp sound,’ when the reins are shaken.—Cp. Aesch. Th. 122(describing the Argive besiegers) διάδετοι δέ τοι γενῦν ἱππιᾶν | κινύρονται (μινύρονται L. Dind.) φόνον χαλινοί. Ib. 152 ὄτοβον ἁρμάτων ἀμφὶ πόλιν κλύω. Our passage suggests horsemen rather than drivers of war-chariots: perh. the poet imagined both, as in O. C. 1062 πώλοισιν ἢ ῥιμφαρμάτοις | φεύγοντες ἁμίλλαις .

The MSS. have ὃν...Πολυνείκης . If this were sound, it would be necessary to suppose that after ἀμφιλόγων a dipodia has been lost, such as Nauck supplies by <ἤγαγεν· ἐχθρὸς δ’> ὀξέα κλάζων. For (1) a verb is wanted to govern ὅν, and (2) the description of the eagle, beginning with ὀξέα κλάζων, clearly refers to the Argive host, not to Polyneices only. But if, with Scaliger, we read ὃς ...Πολυνείκους , no such loss need be assumed. The correspondence between anapaestic systems is not always strict, and the monometer ὀξέα κλάζων could stand here, though the anti-system has a dimeter in the same place (129). The MS. reading ὃν...Πολυνείκης probably arose from a misunderstanding of the scholium:—ὅντινα στρατὸν Ἀργείων, ἐξ ἀμφιλόγων νεικέων ἀρθείς, ἤγαγεν ὁ Πολυνείκης, οἷον ἀμφιλογίᾳ χρησάμενος πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν· διὰ βραχέων δὲ εἶπεν αὐτό, ὡς γνωρίμου οὔσης τῆς ὑποθέσεως. The Schol. wrote ἀρθείς, to agree with Πολυνείκης, and not ἀρθέντα, to agree with στρατόν, because it suited the form of his paraphrase, οἷον ἀμφιλογίᾳ χρησάμενος πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν. By διὰ βραχέων δὲ εἷπεν αὐτό, the Schol. meant not merely the indefiniteness of νεικέων ἐξ ἀμφιλόγων, but also the compactness of Πολυνείκους | ἀρθεὶς ἐκ νεικέων for ὅντινα στρατὸν ἤγαγεν ὁ Πολυνείκης. But a transcriber, noticing that the Schol. joined ἀρθείς with Πολυνείκης, might easily infer that ὃν...Πολυνείκης ought to stand in the text, and might take διὰ βραχέων as meaning that the verb ἤγαγε could be understood.—L has the Doric γᾷ, and presently γᾶν, ὑπερέπτα, which I keep: see Appendix.

Πολυνείκους … νεικέων , playing on the name, like Aesch. ( Aesch. Th. 577 , Aesch. Th. 658, Aesch. Th. 829): as elsewhere on that of Ajax ( Ai. 432 αἰάζειν ), and of Odysseus (fr. 877, πολλοὶ γὰρ ὠδύσαντο δυσμενεῖς ἐμοί, have been bitter).

ἀρθείς , ‘having set forth’: so Her. 1.165 ἀερθέντες ἐκ τῶν Οἰνουσσέων ἔπλεον : 9. 52 (of a land-force) ἀερθέντες ...ἀπαλλάσσοντο. Attic prose similarly uses the act. ἄρας, either absolutely, or with dat. (ταῖς ναυσί, τῷ στρατῷ), or, more rarely, with acc. (τὰς ναῦς Thuc. 1.52). Here the choice of the word suits the image of an eagle soaring.

νεικ. ἐξ ἀμφιλόγων , lit. in consequence of contentious quarrels, i.e. his claims to the Theban throne, against his brother Eteocles. Eur. Med. 636 ἀμφιλόγους ὀργὰς (contentious moods) ἀκόρεστά τε νείκη: Ph. 500 ἀμφίλεκτος...ἔρις. The prep. as O. C. 620 ἐκ σμικροῦ λόγου .

ὀξέα κλάζων : Homeric, Il. 17.88 (of Hector) ὀξέα κεκληγώς: Il. 16.429 μεγάλα κλάζοντε (of vultures fighting): so Aesch. Ag. 48 (the Atreidae) μέγαν ἐκ θυμοῦ κλάζοντες Ἄρη.

αἰετὸς εἰς γᾶν ὣς ὑπερέπτα seems clearly right. If ὥς is omitted, we have a metaphor instead of a simile, with harsh effect. If we read αἰετὸς ὥς, and omit εἰς, γᾶν ὑπερέπτα could mean only, ‘flew over the land,’ not, ‘flew over the border into the land.’ Further, it is better that the flow of these descriptive verses should not be broken by a paroemiac before v. 116. No argument either way can be founded on v. 130 (where see n.), since, even if it were a paroemiac, that would not require a paroemiac here.

ὑπερέπτα . The act. strong aor. ἔπτην (as if from ἵπτημι) occurs simple only in the Batrachomyomachia (210, if sound) and the Anthol.: compounded, only in the tragic lyrics and in late prose. Cp. 1307.

λευκῆς χιόνος πτ. , ‘a wing white as snow’ (the white shield, see on 106); genitive of quality (or material), equiv. to an epithet: cp. O. T. 533 τόλμης πρόσωπον (a bold front): El. 19 ἄστρων εὐφρόνη (starry night): Eur. Phoen. 1491 στολίδα...τρυφᾶς (a luxurious robe): ib. 1526 γάλακτος...μαστοῖς (milky breasts).

στεγανός , pass. here, ‘covered’; but act. in Aesch. Ag. 358 στεγανὸν δίκτυον : cp. Xen. Cyr. 7.1.33 αἱ ἀσπίδες...στεγάζουσι τὰ σώματα.

ὅπλων … κορύθεσσι . The image of the eagle with white wings, which suited the Argive descent on Thebes, here passes into direct description of an invader who comes with many ὅπλα and κόρυθες,—the shield, spear, and helmet of heavy-armed troops. For the dat. in ‐εσσι cp. 976 χείρεσσι. ἱπποκόμοις , ‘with horse-hair crest’ ( Il. 13.132 ἱ. κόρυθες ). For ξύν denoting what one wears or carries, cp. O. T. 207, O. C. 1258, Ai. 30 πηδῶντα πεδία ξὺν νεορράντῳ ξίφει . There is no real difference here between μετά and ξύν : Donaldson refines too much in suggesting that μετά means merely ‘by their sides,’ while ξύν ‘denotes a closer union’ (i.e. ‘on their heads’).

In στὰς δ’ ὑπὲρ μελάθρων there is a momentary return to the image of the flying eagle,—‘having stayed his flight above my dwellings,’—before swooping. The words do not mean that the Argive army was posted on hills around Thebes: the only hills available were to the N. of the town. The Ἰσμήνιος λόφος (Paus. 9.10.2), on which Donaldson places the Argives, was merely a low eminence close to one of the city gates. Thebes stood on a low spur of ground projecting southward, and overlooking the plain. Sophocles has elsewhere described the Argive besiegers, with topographical correctness, as having ‘set their leaguer round the plain of Thebes’ ( O. C. 1312 τὸ Θήβης πεδίον ἀμφεστᾶσι πᾶν ). Struve's πτάς (a participle not found elsewhere except in composition with a preposition) seems improbable, and also less forcible.

The words φονώσαισιν ἀμφιχανὼν... λόγχαις once more merge the image of the eagle,—as at v. 115,—in literal description of a besieging army, save in so far as the figurative ἀμφιχανών suggests a monster opening its jaws. The word was perh. suggested by Il. 23.79 ἐμὲ μὲν κὴρ | ἀμφέχανε στυγερή (hath gaped for me—i.e. ‘devoured me’). These transitions from clear imagery to language in which the figure is blurred by the thought of the object for which it stands, are thoroughly Sophoclean: cp. n. on O. T. 866.

φονώσαισιν : the word is not rare in later writers, but in classical Greek occurs only here and Ph. 1209 φονᾷ, φονᾷ νόος ἤδη. Cp. τομάω ( Ai. 582).

ἑπτάπυλον στόμα , prop. the access afforded by seven gates: fr. 701 Θήβας λέγεις μοι τὰς πύλας ἑπταστόμους (sevenmouthed as to its gates). Nauck changes στόμα to πόλισμ’ to avoid hiatus: but cp. O. T. 1202 βασιλεὺς καλεῖ | ἐμός , n.

ἔβα , emphatic by place: cp. 46.

πρίν ποθ’ , ‘or ever,’ as Tr. 17. αἱμάτων , streams of blood, as Aesch. Ag. 1293 αἱμάτων εὐθνησίμων | ἀπορρυέντων (with ref. to one person). Soph. has the plur. only here: Aesch. and Eur. use it several times each, either in this sense, or as=‘deeds of bloodshed’ (once as=‘slain persons,’ αἵματα σύγγονα, Eur. Phoen. 1503).

γἑνυσιν might be locative dat., ‘in’; but seems rather instrumental, ‘with.’ After πλησθῆναι the missing short syllable is best supplied by τε (Triclinius). The constr. is, πρὶν (αὐτός ) τε πλησθῆναι, καὶ Ἥφαιστον στεφάνωμα πύργων ἑλεῖν. For τε irregularly placed, cp. O. T. 258 n.

στεφάνωμα : Eur. Hec. 910 (of Troy) ἀπὸ δὲ στεφάναν κέκαρσαι | πύργων: cp. n. on O. C. 15.

πευκάενθ’ Ἥφαιστον , the flame of pine-wood torches ( Verg. Aen. 11. 786 pineus ardor ). Cp. 1007, Il. 2.426. σπλάγχνα δ’ ἄρ’ ἀμπείραντες ὑπείρεχον Ἡφαίστοιο.

τοῖος , introducing the reason; O. C. 947 n.

ἐτάθη , lit. ‘was made intense,’ here suggesting both loud sound and keen strife. Cp. Il. 12.436 ἐπὶ ἶσα μάχη τέτατο πτόλεμός τε : 23. 375 ἵπποισι τάθη δρόμος: Aesch. Pers. 574 τεῖνε δὲ δυσβάϋκτον | βοᾶτιν τάλαιναν αὐδάν.

πάταγος , clatter of arms (a word expressive of the sound), as distinguished from βοή, a human cry; cp. Her. 7.211 οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι ὁρέοντες φεύγοντας βοῇ τε καὶ πατάγῳ ἐπήϊσαν . The Argives began to retreat in the night: at dawn, the Thebans made a sally in pursuit of them, and turned the retreat into a rout.

ἀντιπάλῳ δυσχείρωμα δράκοντος , a thing hard to vanquish for him who was struggling against the (Theban) dragon, —i.e. for the Argive eagle. The two readings between which the MSS. fluctuate, viz., ἀντιπάλῳ ... δράκοντι and ἀντιπάλου … δράκοντος , arose, I feel sure, from ἀντιπάλῳ … δράκοντος (V has ἀντιπάλω...δράκοντος). For the gen. after this adj., cp. Pind. O. 8. 94 μένος γήραος ἀντίπαλον, a spirit that wrestles with old age: Eur. Alc. 922 ὑμεναίων γόος ἀντίπαλος , wails contending with marriagesongs.

The interpretation of the passage turns primarily on two points.

(1) The δράκων certainly means the Thebans,—the σπαρτοί ( O. C. 1534) sprung from the dragon's teeth sown by Cadmus, and thence called δρακοντογενεῖς (schol.), Ovid's anguigenae ( Met. 3. 531): cp. 1125 ἐπὶ σπορᾷ δράκοντος. Poetry often represented a struggle between an eagle and a dragon or snake (δράκων could mean either, the ‘dragon’ being conceived as a sort of huge python); as Il. 12.201, Od. 4.4. 11.

(2) The δυς in δυσχείρωμα must refer to difficulty experienced by the vanquished Argives, not by the victorious Thebans. The word must mean, then, ‘a thing hard to overcome,’ not, ‘a victory won with difficulty.’ So δυσχείρωτος is ‘hard to subdue’ (Her. 7.9), as ἀχείρωτος is ‘unsubdued’ (Thuc. 6.10), and εὐχείρωτος ‘easy to subdue’ (Xen. Hellen. 5.3.4). Cp. δυσπάλαιστος, δυσπάλαμος, δύσμαχος, etc., used with poetical irony to express the irresistible. In O. T. 560 θανάσιμον χείρωμα is a deed of deadly violence: in Aesch. Th. 1022 τυμβοχόα χειρώματα are works of the hand in mound-making. In itself, δυσχείρωμα might mean ‘a thing achieved with difficulty’; but here the irony is clearly pointed against the routed Argives: the poet does not mean that the Thebans won with difficulty. Thus δυσχείρωμα is here the opposite of what Aesch. calls εὐμαρὲς χείρωμα, a thing easily subdued: Aesch. Ag. 1326 δούλης θανούσης, εὐμαροῦς χειρώματος. The Theban πάταγος Ἄρεος was a thing which the Argives could not overcome.

Those who read ἀντιπάλῳ … δράκοντι explain either (a) ‘a hard-won victory for the dragon foe’: but this gives a wrong sense to δυσχείρωμα: or (b) join the dat. with ὲτάθη : ‘a din was raised by the dragon foe (cp. Il. 22.55 Ἀχιλῆϊ δαμασθείς ), a thing hard (for the Argive) to subdue.’ But δυσχείρωμα, placed as it is, cannot be thus dissociated from the dat. ἀντιπ. δράκοντι and mentally referred to another dat. which is left to be understood.

Those who read ἀντιπάλου … δράκοντος understand (a) a thing on the part of the dragon foe which was hard (for the Argive) to overcome; i.e. ‘an irresistible onset of the dragon foe.’ But such a construction of δυσχείρωμα with the gen. seems impossible, esp. when there is no dat. to help it out. Or ( b) ‘a hard-won victory of the dragon foe’; which gives a wrong sense to δυσχείρωμα.—The form of the word is in one respect unique. Every similar neuter noun compounded with δυς is from a verb so compounded: as δυσέργημα, δυσημέρημα, δυσπράγημα, δυσσέβημα, δυστύχημα, δυσφήμημα, δυσχέρασμα, δυσχρήστημα, δυσώπημα. But there is no such verb as δυσχειρόω, ‘to subdue with difficulty.’ The noun has been boldly coined to express δυσχείρωτον πρᾶγμα.

μεγάλης : 1350 μεγάλοι... λόγοι: Plat. Phaedo 95B μὴ μέγα λέγε : Verg. Aen. 10. 547 Dixerat ille aliquid magnum.

ῥεύματι : Aesch. Pers. 88 μεγάλῳ ῥεύματι φωτῶν (so ib. 412 ῥεῦμα Περσικοῦ στρατοῦ ). Eur. I. T. 1437 παῦσαι διώκων ῥεῦμά τ’ ἐξορμῶν στρατοῦ . The transposition ῥεύματι πολλῷ is unnecessary. In the same dipodia an anapaest must not precede a dactyl, nor a dactyl an anapaest; but a spondee can be followed by a dactyl, as O. C. 146 δηλῶ δ’. οὐ γὰρ ἂν ᾦδ’ ἀλλοτρίοις .

χρυσοῦ καναχῆς ὑπεροπλίαις , ‘in the haughty pride of clanging gold.’ ὑπεροπλίαις seems a certain correction of ὑπεροπτίας (see cr. n.), and has justly won its way with recent edd. The word is fitting, since ὑπεροπλία is prop. ‘overweening confidence in arms’; and Soph. has used the epic plur. with the epic ι—, Il. 1.205 ᾗς ὑπεροπλίῃσι : so too Theocr. 25. 138 σθένεϊ ᾧ | ἠδ’ ὑπεροπλίῃ Φαέθων

μέγας. In post-Homeric poetry ὑπέροπλος is a freq. epith. of overweening strength (ἠνορέη, βίη, ἥβη, etc.).—Other readings are:—(1) χρυσοῦ καναχῇ θ’ ὑπερόπτας, ‘and haughty in the clang of gold.’ This involves an improbable change; the subst. ὑπερόπτης, too, is unsuitable here, and cannot be defended by Theocr. 22. 58 πρὸς πάντα παλίγκοτος ἠδ’ ὑπερόπτης . Wecklein, reading ὑπερόπτας, keeps καναχῆς in the sense, hoffärtig auf : but a genit. after ὑπερόπτης could not denote that in which one takes pride. (2) χρυσοῦ καναχῆς ὑπερόπτης, or ‐όπτα, i.e., ‘Zeus, a despiser of the clang of gold.’ (3) χρυσοῦ καναχῆς ὑπέροπτα, adv. neut. plur. (as O. T. 883), ‘advancing haughtily in a great stream of clanging gold.’ But the adv. comes weakly at the end, and χρυσοῦ κ. is harshly joined with π. ῥεύματι.—Aesch. , too, gives prominence to gold in picturing the Argive chiefs: Capaneus has golden letters on his shield ( Aesch. Th. 434), Polyneices has the image of a warrior in golden armour, with a golden legend (644, Aesch. Th. 660).

καναχῆς , of metal, as Il. 16.105 πήληξ βαλλομένη καναχὴν ἔχε .

παλτῷ πυρί , i.e. with the thunderbolt which Zeus brandishes in his hand before hurling it: Aristoph. Av. 1714 πάλλων κεραυνόν, πτεροφόρον Διὸς βέλος.

βαλβίδων ἐπ’ ἄκρων , at his topmost goal, i.e. at his goal on the top of our walls. ἄκρων might mean merely ‘uttermost,’ but is rather associated in the poet's mind with the object meant by βαλβίδων. In Eur. Phoen. 1180 Capaneus is struck by Zeus at the moment that he is surmounting the γεῖσα τειχέων, the coping of the walls. The βαλβῖδες were the posts, to which a rope was attached, marking the point from which runners in the double foot-race (δίαυλος) set out, and to which they returned: hence both starting-point and goal.

ὁρμῶντα : for the partic. as subst., without either art. or τις, cp. El. 697 δύναιτ’ ἂν οὐδ’ ἂν ἰσχύων φυγεῖν : Plat. Gorg. 498A ΚΑΛ. εἶδον. ΣΩ. τί δέ; νοῦν ἔχοντα λυπούμενον καὶ χαίροντα ; The name of Capaneus could be left unmentioned, since the story was so famous. No leader of the Argive host, except Polyneices, is named in this play. The attack of Capaneus was said to have been made at the Ἤλεκτραι πύλαι on the s. side of Thebes ( Aesch. Th. 423 , Paus. 9.9.8). His fall from the scaling-ladder, as the lightning struck him, was often represented in art.

νίκην , cogn. acc. with ἀλαλάξαι , to raise the cry ἀλαλαί for victory: Aristoph. Av. 1763 ἀλαλαί, ἰὴ παιήων, | τήνελλα καλλίνικος .

ἀντιτύπᾳ , restored by Porson ( Aav. p. 169) for ἀντίτυπα, is certainly right. Adjectives in ος, compounded with a prep., are oft. of three terminations in epic poetry, as ἀμφιελίσση, ἀμφιρύτη, ἀντιθέη ( Od. 13.378), ἀμφιβρότη ( Il. 2.389), ὑποδεξίη ( Il. 9.73), etc. The dramatists could admit some such forms, esp. in lyrics; thus they have ἡ ἐναλία as well as ἡ ἐνάλιος, ἡ ἐννυχία as well as ἡ ἐννύχιος.

As regards the sense, ἀντίτυπος was regularly used of hard surfaces, which, as it were, repel that which strikes them (for the accent ἀντίτυπος, not ἀντιτύπος, though the sense is act., see on O. T. 460). Probl. 5. 40 οἱ...ἐν ἀντιτύποις περίπατοι. Lucian Amor. 13 τὴν ἀντίτυπον οὕτω καὶ καρτερὰν τοῦ λίθου φύσιν. So, fig., Plat. Crat. 420D τὸ...ἀναγκαῖον καὶ ἀντίτυπον , what is necessary, and what resists us.

τανταλωθείς , ‘swung,’ that is, sent flying through the air from the edge of the wall on which he was just setting foot. The word expresses the force with which the thunderbolt struck him, just as ἀντιτύπᾳ expresses the crash when he struck earth. This form of the verb occurs only here. Arist. uses both ταλαντεύομαι (pass.) and ταλαντεύω (act. intr.) as ‘to sway to and fro.’ The Schol., explaining by διασεισθείς (i.e. ‘with a rude shock,’ which is substantially right) quotes Anacreon 78 [ἐν] μελαμφύλλῳ δάφνᾳ χλωρᾷ τ’ ἐλαίᾳ τανταλίζει (where the subject was perh. a god, or the wind).

πυρφόρος , ‘torch in hand’: so of Prometheus ( O. C. 55, where see n.) and Artemis ( O. T. 207). Aesch. Th. 433 φλέγει δὲ λαμπὰς διὰ χερῶν ὡπλισμένη· | χρυσοῖς δὲ φωνεῖ γράμμασιν, πρήσω πόλιν.

βακχεύων : so oft. Eur. as H. F. 898 Λύσσα βακχεύσει: but this is the only place where Soph. connects evil frenzy with the name of a god whom this same Ode invokes (154).

ῥιπαῖς...ἀνέμων . Capaneus, breathing fury and slaughter, is likened to a deadly tempest. For ῥιπαί, ‘blasts,’ cp. 929 and O. C. 1248 n. So Aesch. Th. 63 πρὶν καταιγίσαι πνοὰς | Ἄρεως.

εἶχε δ’ ἄλλᾳ τὰ μέν , ‘but those things indeed’ (the threats of Capaneus) ‘went otherwise’ (than he had expected): ἄλλα δ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλοις μέγας Ἄρης ἐπενώμα, ‘while to others great Ares assigned various dooms,’ etc. The poet has described how Zeus smote the most formidable foe. As to the other Argive chiefs, he briefly adds that Ares struck them down by various deaths: i.e. they perished, not by a stroke from heaven, but in the course of battle. In L's reading, εἶχε δ’ ἄλλαι τὰ μὲν ἄλλαι τὰ δ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλοις , one cause of corruption has evidently been a confusion between alternative modes of expressing ‘some’ and ‘other,’ viz. (1) by doubled ἄλλος, (2) by τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ. It is in favour of our reading (Erfurdt's) that it helps to account for this, since it supposes that τὰ μέν was answered by ἄλλα δέ . Cp. O. C. 1671 οὐ τὸ μέν, ἄλλο δὲ μή : Il. 6.147 τὰ μέν τ’ ἄνεμος χαμάδις χέει, ἄλλα δέ θ’ ὕλη | τηλεθόωσα φύει . It is immaterial that, here, τὰ μέν means, not, ‘some things,’ but, ‘those things’; since the latter is its first sense also where we render it by ‘some.’ Further, with regard to ἄλλᾳ , remark that this form of adverb is used elsewhere also in ref. to the course ordained by gods or fate: O. C. 1443 ταῦτα δ’ ἐν τῷ δαίμονι, | καὶ τῇδε φῦναι χἁτέρᾳ: Aesch. PV 511 οὐ ταῦτα ταύτῃ μοῖρά πω τελεσφόρος | κρᾶναι πέπρωται . For other proposed readings, see Appendix.

ἐπενώμα : Aesch. Eum. 310 λάχη τὰ κατ’ ἀνθρώπους | ὡς ἐπινωμᾷ στάσις ἁμά , apportions.— στυφελίζων ( στυ^φελός, ‘firm,’ στυ—/φω, to compress), ‘striking heavily’: Il. 1.581 ἐξ ἑδέων στυφελίξαι .

δεξιόσειρος , ‘right-hand trace-horse,’ here means a vigorous ally, who does more than his own share of the work. Ares has brought the Theban chariot victoriously through the crisis of the race against its Argive rival. In the fourhorse chariot-race the four horses were harnessed abreast: the two in the middle were under the yoke (ζύγιοι), being called ὁ μέσος δεξιός and ὁ μέσος ἀριστερός (schol. Aristoph. Nub. 122): the two outside horses drew in traces ( σειραῖοι). The chariot went down the right-hand side of the course, turned sharply from right to left at the distance-post (καμπτήρ, νύσσα), and came back down the left side. Hence, at the turning-point, the right-hand tracehorse had most work to do; and the best horse was put in that place. Cp. El. 721 (at the turning-post) δεξιόν τ’ ἀνεὶς | σειραῖον ἵππον εἶργε τὸν προσκείμενον. Plat. Symp. 4. 6 ἁρματηλατοῦντα δεῖ ἐγγὺς μὲν τῆς στήλης κάμψαι, quoting from Il. 23.336 the precept τὸν δεξιὸν ἵππον | κένσαι ὁμοκλήσαντ’, εἶξαί τέ οἱ ἡνία χερσίν. Cp. Aesch. Ag. 842 ζευχθεὶς ἕτοιμος ἦν ἐμοὶ σειραφόρος (said by Agam. of Odysseus): and cp. ib. 1640.

The old v.l. δεξιόχειρος , explained by the schol. γενναῖος καὶ παραδέξιος, is read by Musgrave, Hartung, and Pallis. Hartung A. renders it ‘der Starke,’—understanding it as ‘the strong and deft striker.’ Neither δεξιόχειρος nor δεξιόχειρ seems to occur, though ἀριστερόχειρ (left-handed) is found in late Greek.

ἑπτὰ λοχαγοί . In O. C. 1313 ff. the list agrees with that of Aesch. ,— Amphiaraus, Tydeus, Eteoclus, Hippomedon, Capaneus, Parthenopaeus, Polyneices. (Adrastus, who escaped, is not counted as one of the seven.) Capaneus, though not slain by human hand, is included, since he was vanquished. Amphiaraus, according to the legend which Soph. recognises in El. 837, was swallowed up by the earth, but seems here to be reckoned among those who fell in fight (cp. n. on O. C. 1313).

ἴσοι πρὸς ἴσους , instead of saying simply πρὸς ἑπτά,—a common idiom: Eur. Phoen. 750 ἴσους ἴσοισι πολεμίοισιν ἀντιθείς : Her. 1.2 ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα : 9. 48 ἴσοι πρὸς ἴσους: Plat. Legg. 774C ἴσα ἀντὶ ἴσων .

Ζηνὶ τροπαίῳ , to Zeus who makes a τροπή, or rout, of enemies. Eur. El. 671 ὦ Ζεῦ πατρῷε καὶ τροπαῖ’ ἐχθρῶν ἐμῶν . So he is invoked after a victory, Her. 867.(In Tr. 303 ὦ Ζεῦ τροπαῖε is usu. taken as=ἀποτρόπαιε, ‘averting.’) In his relation to war, Zeus was worshipped also as Ἀγήτωρ (esp. at Sparta), Ἄρειος (at Olympia, etc.), Στράτιος, Χρυσάωρ (in Caria), Στήσιος or Ἐπιστάσιος (the Roman stator, stayer of flight).

πάγχαλκα τέλη , ‘tributes of panoplies,’ as Tr. 238 Heracles dedicates βωμοὺς τέλη τ’ ἔγκαρπα Κηναίῳ Διΐ, i.e. ‘dues of fruits,’—alluding to the τέμενος of which the produce was given to the god ( ib. 754). Not, (1) ‘complete suits of armour’: nor (2) ὁπλιτικὰ τάγματα, ‘troops of warriors,’ as Eustath. took it (p. 686. 16), led perh. by Aesch. Pers. 47 δίρρυμά τε καὶ τρίρρυμα τέλη .

It was the ordinary practice to set up a τρόπαιον (old αττ.τροπαῖον) after a victory, on the spot where it had been won, or, in the case of a sea-fight, on the nearest land (Thuc. 2.92). Such a trophy ordinarily consisted of shields, helmets, and weapons, conspicuously displayed on wooden supports, and dedicated, with an inscription, to a deity. Cp. Eur. Phoen. 1473 (of the Thebans after the victory) οἱ μὲν Διὸς τροπαῖον ἵστασαν βρέτας (i.e. a wooden image of Ζεὺς Τροπαῖος), | οἱ δ’ ἀσπίδας συλῶντες Ἀργείων νεκρῶν | σκυλεύματ’ εἴσω τειχέων ἐπέμπομεν. Part of the armour would be affixed to the walls of Theban temples (cp. Aesch. Ag. 577, Th. 276).

πλὴν τ. στυγεροῖν , ‘wretched’ (as Ph. 166): not, ‘hateful,’ nor, ‘filled with hate.’ Of the seven Argive leaders, Polyneices was the only one who could not properly be said to have been vanquished, since he was not more vanquished than victorious. But, in excepting him, the poet associates him with the brother who was his victim as well as his conqueror. Thus ἑπτὰ...ἔλιπον..., πλὴν τοῖν στυγεροῖν, is a lax way of saying, ‘defeat befell each of the seven Argive leaders, except in the case of the two brothers,’—in which an Argive leader and a Theban leader slew each other.— πατρός , etc., gen. of origin (38).

καθ’ αὑτοῖν = κατ’ ἀλλήλοιν. Cp. Dem. or. 40 § 29 ὧν ἂν ἐν αὑτοῖς διενεχθῶσι γυνὴ καὶ ἀνήρ . Plat. Prot. 347D λέγοντάς τε καὶ ἀκούοντας ἐν μέρει ἑαυτῶν.

δικρατεῖς λόγχας , two spears, each of which was victorious over the wielder of the other. So Ai. 251 δικρατεῖς Ἀτρεῖδαι , two Atreidae, each of whom is a king. That is, δικρατεῖς is equiv. to two distinct epithets (δύο and κρατοῦσαι): cp. O. C. 1055 διστόλους...ἀδελφάς , two journeying sisters: ib. 17 πυκνόπτεροι = many, and feathered (n.): see O.T. 846 n.

στήσαντε , having set in position, levelled, against each other. The Homeric δόρυ was chiefly a missile; here the λόγχη is used for thrusting.

ἀλλὰ γάρ , like ἀλλ’ οὐ γάρ (O.C. 988 n.), can be used with or without an ellipse. Here there is no ellipse, since ἐπέλθωμεν follows (153), and γάρ , introducing the reason given by ἦλθε,= ‘since.’ Below, 155, there is an ellipse, —‘But (let us cease), for Creon comes’; where γάρ might be rendered ‘indeed. ’

μεγαλώνυμος : schol. ἡ μεγάλην περιποιοῦσα δόξαν: the personified Nikè is ‘of great name,’ because victory is glorious.

πολυαρμάτῳ implies warlike renown, as well as wealth and splendour (cp. 845). Already in Il. 4.391 the Cadmeans are ‘urgers of horses’ (κέντορες ἵππων): so Scut. Herc. 24 Βοιωτοὶ πλήξιπποι: Pindar Ol. 6. 85 has πλάξιππον...Θήβαν, Isthm. 7. 20 φιλαρμάτου πόλιος (as elsewhere χρυσάρματος, εὐάρματος). Critias , speaking of the inventions for which various cities were famous, says (fr. 1. 10) Θήβη δ’ ἁρματόεντα δίφρον συνεπήξατο πρώτη.

ἀντιχαρεῖσα , with gladness responsive to that of Thebè. The goddess Nikè has come to meet the victors, and their joy is reflected in her radiant smile. (We can imagine her descending towards them from the sky, like the winged Nikè of Paeonius found at Olympia.) The doubts which have been felt as to ἀντιχαρεῖσα disappear if it is observed that χαρεῖσα here refers to the outward manifestation of joy, not merely to the feeling in the mind. Thus ἀντί expresses the answer of smile to smile, as in ἀντιλάμπω of light to light, or in ἀντιφθέγγομαι of sound to sound. I do not take ἀντί here to mean merely ‘over against,’ as when Pind. Ol. 3.19 says ἤδη γὰρ αὐτῷ... | ...ὀφθαλμὸν ἀντέφλεξε Μήνα, the (mid-month) moon showed the light of her eye over against him. —Not (1) ἴσον αὐτῇ χαρεῖσα (schol.), i.e. merely, ‘rejoicing as Thebes does,’ which extenuates ἀντιχαρεῖσα into συγχαρεῖσα. Nor (2) ἀντὶ τῶν κακῶν χαρεῖσα, i.e. rejoicing in requital of past troubles.

ἐκ...πολέμων τῶν νῦν , ‘after the recent wars.’ For ἐκ , cp. Ph. 271 ἐκ πολλοῦ σάλου | εὕδοντ’, sleeping, after long tossing on the sea. For νῦν referring to the recent past (=‘just now’), cp. Dem. or. 18 § 13 ἡλίκα νῦν ἐτραγῴδει καὶ διεξῄει : Xen. Anab. 7.1.26 ἀναμνησθέντας τὰ νῦν ἤδη γεγενημένα (i.e. the events of the Peloponnesian war, which had ended four years before).

θέσθαι (L), as infin. for imperative ( O. C. 481 n.), has a certain solemnity which seems to make it better here than θέσθε , though the latter is not excluded by ἐπέλθωμεν. The last syll. of θἑσθαι answers to the second of ἐχθίστων in 137; each is an ‘irrational’ syllable (- for ˘): see θεῶν, monosyll. by synizesis ( O. C. 964 n.).— παννυχίοις , since a παννυχίς was esp. grateful to the city's tutelar god Dionysus (1147), whose rites are νύκτωρ τὰ πολλά (Eur. Bacch. 486 ).

ὁ Θήβας (gen. sing.) ἐλελίχθων , = ὁ τὴν Θήβης χθόνα ἐλελίζων, shaking the ground of Thebes (with his dances): for the objective gen., cp. O. C. 333 λόγων αὐτάγγελος.

Βάκχιος = Βάκχος, as Eur. Bacch. 225 τὴν δ’ Ἀφροδίτην πρόσθ’ ἄγειν τοῦ Βακχίου , and oft.

ἄρχοι sc. τῆς χορείας (schol.). Cp. 1146.

ἀλλὰ … γάρ : see on 148.— Κρέων , monosyll. by synizesis, as πλέων Od. 1.183; in Aesch. Ag. 1493 ἐκπνέων is a spondee. Cp. O. C. 1073 *(πέας , a monosyll.

Μενοικέως ,=˘¯¯, as O. C. 1003 Θησέως (¯¯), and so oft.

νεοχμὸς νεαραῖσι . Neither adj. is suspicious; new events have made a new ruler; and the doubled adj. is quite in the poet's manner. Cp. 1266 νέος νέῳ ξὺν μόρῳ: Ai. 735 νέας | βουλὰς νέοισιν ἐγκαταζεύξας τρόποις : O. C. 475 οἰὸς...νεαρᾶς νεοπόκῳ μαλλῷ : ib. 1259 γέρων γέροντι συγκατῴκηκεν πίνος : Tr. 613 καινῷ καινὸν ἐν πεπλώματι , etc. Though νεαρός usu.= ‘young,’ it occurs also in the sense of ‘novel,’ as in Pindar's νεαρὰ ἐξευρεῖν (N. 8. 20). Three views of the metre have been taken. (1) That v. 156 should be enlarged to a dimeter by supplying one anapaest or its equivalent. (2) That v. 156 should be reduced to a monometer by omitting νεοχμός or Μενοικέως. (3) That both v. 156 and v. 160 should be made dimeters by supplying three anapaests or

their equivalents. See Appendix I prefer the first of these views. An anapaest or spondee, meaning ‘ruler,’ has probably dropped out before νεοχμός . Seyffert's κρείων is at first sight attractive, as accounting for its own disappearance; but, since it is the same word as Κρέων— which had an epic form Κρείων, as conversely Pind. and Aesch. use κρέων—this would be rather a feeble pun than a strong παρήχησις. Either ἄρχων or ταγός is possible.

θεῶν … συντυχίαις , fortunes sent by the gods,—the possessive gen. denoting the authors, just as it can denote the parents: cp. Ph. 1116 πότμος...δαιμόνων: Aeol. fr. 37 τὰς δὲ δαιμόνων τύχας | ὅστις φέρει κάλλιστ’, ἀνὴρ οὗτος σοφός. (In O. T. 34 δαιμόνων συναλλαγαῖς is different.) ἐπὶ συντυχίαις means that the fortunes are the conditions which have made Creon king: this ἐπί with dat. of attendant circumstance sometimes=our ‘in,’ as O. C. 1268 ἐπ’ ἔργοις πᾶσι (n.), sometimes ‘for,’ as Aristoph. Eq. 406 πῖν’ ἐπὶ συμφοραῖς (i.e. to celebrate them), cp. El. 1230: here we could say, ‘under the new dispensations of the gods.’ (Distinguish 88 ἐπὶ ψυχροῖσι as =‘for’ in the sense ‘with a view to.’)

μῆτιν ἐρέσσων , consilium animo volutans, ‘turning it over’ busily in the mind. ἐρέσσειν, to ply the oar, is fig. said of putting a thing in lively motion, as Eur. I. A. 139 ἐρέσσων σὸν πόδα . Then also of activity in speech, as Ai. 251 ἐρέσσουσιν ἀπειλάς , ‘they ply threats’ (utter them repeatedly and loudly): or, as here, in thought. Cp. 231.—(Not, ‘speeding his counsel hitherward,’ i.e. coming to disclose it: ‘ advolvens, i.e. patefacturus,’ Ellendt.)

σύγκλητον , specially convoked;—implying that there were other and regularly appointed seasons at which the king met the γέροντες in council. At Athens four meetings of the ἐκκλησία were regularly held in each πρυτανεία (a period of 35 or 36 days): these were κυρίαι (though the term may once have been restricted to the first of them), or νόμιμοι. An extraordinary meeting was σύγκλητος or κατάκλητος. Pollux 8. 116 σύγκλητος ἐκκλησία ἣν ἐξαίφνης ἐποίουν μείζονος χρείας ἐπιλαβούσης· ἐκαλεῖτο δὲ καὶ κατακλησία, ὅτι καὶ τοὺς ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν κατεκάλουν ( down to the ἄστυ). Arist. Pol. 3.1. 10 ἐνίαις γὰρ οὐκ ἔστι δῆμος, οὐδ’ ἐκκλησίαν νομίζουσιν ἀλλὰ συγκλήτους: ‘in some States there is no popular body, and they have no regular assembly, but only meetings on special occasions.’ σύγκλητος is one of those words which, though a technical term at Athens, could still be used by Attic poets without any prosaic local allusion being felt,— just as they used πρύτανις, ἐπιστάτης, ἄρχων, ψήφισμα, etc.

προὔθετο is another example. The presidents of the ecclesia were said γνώμας προθεῖναι when they invited a discussion. Thuc. 6.14 ὦ πρύτανι ... γνώμας προτίθει αὖθις Ἀθηναίοις , ‘lay the question again before the assembly.’ Id. 3. 42 τοὺς προθέντας τὴν διαγνώμην. Cp. Xen. Mem. 4.2.3 τῆς πόλεως λόγον περί τινος προτιθείσης . Lucian Menipp. 19 has προὔθεσαν οἱ πρυτάνεις ἐκκλησίαν, ‘gave notice of’: but for this the usual phrase was that of Aeschin. or. 2 § 60 προγράψαι τοὺς πρυτάνεις ἐκκλησίας δύο. Here, λέσχην is

not the meeting, but the discussion which is to take place there: thus the poet's phrase, true to Attic usage, corresponds with γνώμας προθεῖναι rather than with ἐκκλησίαν προθεῖναι. Herod. uses λέσχη of a public discussion (9. 71): cp. O. C. 167. The midd. προὔθετο suggests Creon's personal interest in the question: the active would denote the mere act (see on 8 θεῖναι). Cp. 1249. προτίθεσθαι more oft. denotes what one proposes to oneself.

κοινῷ κ. πέμψας , lit. having sent (notice of the meeting) by means of a summons addressed to each of us. The κήρυγμα is the mandate which κήρυκες carried to each of the fifteen elders,—not, of course, a public proclamation: cp. 164. For the absolute πέμπω, cp. Thuc. 5.43 πέμπει εὐθὺς ἐς Ἄργος ἰδίᾳ : and so oft. (Not, ‘having sent for us,’ μεταπεμψάμενος: cp. on 19.)

162-331

First ἐπεισόδιον. Creon, the new king, enters from the central door of the palace. Recognising the loyalty which the elders had shown to his predecessors, he expresses his own conception of the duty which a king owes to the State. He then announces the edict which, in accordance with that conception, he has published concerning the two brothers. The Chorus submissively acknowledge his right to do so, but express no approval. A guard now arrives (223), and announces that the king's edict has already been violated by an unknown hand, which has strewn dust upon the corpse of Polyneices. Creon dismisses him with threats of a dreadful death for him and for his fellows, if they fail to discover and produce the offender.

162-210

There is a general dramatic analogy between this speech and that of Oedipus in O. T. 216—275. In each case a Theban king addresses Theban elders, announcing a stern decree, adopted in reliance on his own wisdom, and promulgated with haughty consciousness of power; the elders receive the decree with a submissive deference under which we can perceive traces of misgiving; and as the drama proceeds, the elders become spectators of calamities occasioned by the decree, while its author turns to them for comfort.

τὰ μὲν δὴ πόλεος . . ὑμᾶς δ’ . The perils of the war are now over; the affairs of civil government claim my next care; and I have therefore sent for you, the nearest supporters of my throne.

πόλεος occurs only here in Soph. , but twice in the trimeters of Aesch. ( Aesch. Th. 218, Suppl. 344), and thrice in those of Eur. ( Eur. Or. 897, El. 412, Ion 595). Eur. has also in trimeters ὄφεος ( Eur. Bacch. 1027, Eur. Bacch. 1331, Suppl. 703), and κόνεος ( Cycl. 641). In Comedy we find ὕβρεος ( Ar. Th. 465, Plut. 1044), and φύσεος (Vesp. 1282, 1458). Such forms, which metrical convenience recommended to Attic poets, must not be confounded with the Ionic genitives in ι, such as πόλιος. The gen. πόλευς, contracted from πόλεος, is used by Theogn. 776 etc.— πολλῷ σάλῳ σείσαντες . Cp. O. T. 22.

The image of the State as a ship dates in Greek literature from Alcaeus (whom Horace copied, Carm. 1. 14), fr. 18. The ship of Alcaeus is labouring in the trough of a wild sea,—water is coming in,—the sail is torn,—the anchor will not hold: νᾶϊ φορήμεθα σὺν μελαίνᾳ | χείμωνι μοχθεῦντες μεγάλῳ μάλα, κ.τ.λ. It is only through Heracleides Alleg. Homer. 5 that we know the meaning of Alcaeus to have been figurative and political. Aesch. often uses the image ( Aesch. Th. 2 , Aesch. Th. 62, Aesch. Th. 208 etc.). Creon returns to it at 189. It is peculiarly well suited to his point,—the unity of the public interest.

ὤρθωσαν , made upright, ‘righted’: but below 167, ὤρθου=was keeping straight: cp. on 83.

ἐκ πάντων , (chosen) out of all, δίχα adv. (with ἱκέσθαι) apart from them: cp. 656 πόλεως . . ἐκ πάσης μόνην, 1137 τὰν ἐκ πασᾶν τιμᾷς: El. 1351 ὅν ποτ’ ἐκ πολλῶν ἐγὼ | μόνον προσηῦρον πιστόν . In other places, where δίχα is prep. with gen., we find it similarly connected with another expression of like purport, as Ai. 749 ἐκ...κύκλου | . . μεταστὰς οἷος Ἀτρειδῶν δίχα.

ἔστειλ’ ἱκέσθαι : lit., by means of messengers I caused you to set forth, so that you should come (epexeg. inf.): Ph. 60 οἵ σ’ ἐν λιταῖς στείλαντες ἐξ οἴκων μολεῖν. But στέλλεσθαι (midd.) ‘to summon to oneself’ ( O. T. 434): cp. n. O. T. 860.— τοῦτο μέν , answered by τοῦτ’ αὖθις: see 61 n.

σέβοντας , like μένοντας (169), part. of the imperf.,=ὅτι ἐσέβετε: so 1192: O. T. 835 τοῦ παρόντος (n.): and cp. on O. C. 1565 f.

θρόνων . . κράτη , powers belonging to the throne: cp. 60, 173.

ἡνίκ’ Οἰδίπους κ.τ.λ. The only obscurity arises from the use of the plur. κείνων in 168. κείνων παῖδας ought to mean, ‘the descendants of Laïus and Oedipus,’ viz. Eteocles and Polyneices. But, as the sentence stands, it must mean, ‘the offspring of Laïus and of Oedipus respectively’; viz. Oedipus, the son of Laïus; Eteocles and Polyneices, the sons of Oedipus. The relative clause, ἡνίκ’ . . ὤρθου πόλιν , induced the poet to add immediately the other relative clause to which the same person is subject, viz. ἐπεὶ διώλετο , instead of inserting, after ὤρθου πόλιν, words expressing their loyalty to Oedipus. We might, indeed, suppose that, after ὤρθου πόλιν, we were intended to supply mentally, καὶ τὰ ἐκείνου θρόνων κράτη σέβοντας. But against this is the fact that, after τοῦτο μέν . . τοῦτ’ αὖθις ,—‘in the first place’ . . ‘in the second place,’

καί (in κἀπεὶ) would scarcely have been thus used to introduce a distinct third clause. Evidently καί links ἡνίκα ὤρθου to ἐπεὶ διώλετο.

ἐμπέδοις φρονήμασιν , with steadfast sentiments (of loyalty), modal dat., as oft. προθυμίᾳ, εὐνοίᾳ, φρονήματι (Thuc. 2.62), etc. Hartung, whom some recent editors follow, adopts ἐμπέδους on the strange ground that Soph. must otherwise have written ἐμμένοντας. But μένοντας ἀμφὶ τοὺς κείνων παῖδας=‘remaining around them,’ and the modal dat. is added no less legitimately than the causal dat. in Eur. Her. 701 δειλίᾳ μένειν , ‘to remain through cowardice.’ Soph. could have said ἐμπέδους φρονήμασιν, as he has said συντρόφοις | ὀργαῖς ἔμπεδος ( Ai. 639): but ἐμπέδοις is better here, both (a) because a series of accusatives has preceded, and (b) because, as μένοντας has already marked their constancy, we now want an epithet for their φρονήματα.

ὅτε causal, O. T. 918 n.

πρὸς διπλῆς μ. : cp. 14 n.: for πρὸς, 51 n.: for διπλῆς . . μίαν , 13 n.

παίσαντες . . πληγέντες . In Attic prose the verb ‘to strike’ usu. had as pres. τύπτω (or παίω), fut. τυπτήσω (or πατάξω), aor. ἐπάταξα, aor. pass. ἐπλήγην. The aor. of παίω is mainly a poetical word, used in tragedy, more rarely in comedy, and by Xenophon. In Attic prose ἔπαισα is usu. the aor. of παίζω. Meineke proposed πλήξαντες here, but that aor. (except in comp. with a prep.) is almost unknown to classical αττιξ. παισθέντες, again, though that aor. pass. occurs twice in Aesch. , is very rare.

αὐτόχειρι … μιάσματι , the stain of a kinsman's murder (see on 51, and cp. 1176): cp. Aesch. Th. 849 κακὰ | αὐτοφόνα. σύν , as 1266 νέῳ ξὺν μόρῳ: O. C. 1663, σὺν νόσοις: Pind. O. 2. 42 σὺν ἀλλαλοφονίᾳ.

ἐγὼ . . δή , I now: where δή nearly=ἤδη , O. T. 968 n. Aesch. Eum. 3 (after Gaia came Themis) ἣ δὴ τὸ μητρὸς δευτέρα τόδ’ ἕζετο | μαντεῖον.

κράτη : cp. 166 .

γένους κατ’ ἀγχιστεῖα τῶν ὀλ. , by nearness of kinship to the dead, γένους ἀγχιστεῖα forming one notion, on which the genit. τῶν ὀλ. depends, as on words meaning ‘near.’ The neut. plur. ἀγχιστεῖα (only here) would most properly mean ‘rights’ or ‘privileges’ of such nearness (cp. ἀριστεῖα, πρωτεῖα, etc.), but seems here to be merely a poetical equiv. for the abstract ἀγχιστεία. In Attic law ἀγχιστεία was any degree of relationship on which a claim to an inheritance could be founded in the absence of a will otherwise disposing of it. To claim an inheritance under a will was ἀμφισβητεῖν κατὰ διαθήκην: to claim on the ground of relationship, ἀμφισβητεῖν κατ’ ἀγχιστείαν. συγγένεια, consanguinity, might, or might not, constitute ἀγχιστεία: e.g. Isaeus says of the relationship of mother to son that it is συγγενέστατον μὲν τῇ φύσει πάντων, ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἀγχιστείαις ὁμολογουμένως οὐκ ἔστιν (or. 11 § 17), since a mother could not inherit from her son. (See Selections from the Attic Orators, pp. 331, 344.) Creon succeeds as the nearest male relative. Aesch. , Soph. , and Eur. ignore the Boeotian legend which gave a son, Laodamas, to Eteocles (Her. 5.61), and a son, Thersander, to Polyneices (id. 4. 147, etc.). The sisters represent the ἐσχάτη ῥίζα (599).

ἀμήχανον δέ . ‘You were loyal to the kings whose successor I am. Now ( δέ ) a man cannot be really known until he has been tried in office. (I do not, therefore, ask you to pledge your loyalty to me until I have been so tested.) I will, however, tell you the principles which I intend to observe.’ Thus δέ merely marks the transition to a new topic. It is not directly adversative, as if he meant: ‘You were loyal to my predecessors, but I do not yet ask you to be loyal to me.’ On that view, however, the general connection of thoughts would remain the same.

Demosthenes, in his speech on the Embassy (343 B.C.), quotes this passage (vv. 175—190) as illustrating maxims

which Aeschines had violated, though, accustomed as he had been to play tritagonists' parts, he ought to have known them by heart (or. 19 § 247).

ψυχήν , ‘soul,’ the man's moral nature generally: φρόνημα , the ‘spirit’ of his dealing in public affairs, according as his aims are lofty or mean, his policy bold or timid (cp. 207 τοιόνδ’ ἐμὸν φρόνημα): γνώμην , the intellectual aspect of the man, his ability and judgment. In Her. 5.124 ψυχὴν οὐκ ἄκρος , 3. 14 διεπειρᾶτο αὐτοῦ τῆς ψυχῆς, the word=‘fortitude.’ But the usage of Soph. favours the more general sense here: cp. 227, 929, Ai. 1361 σκληρὰν...ψυχήν , El. 219 σᾷ δυσθύμῳ τίκτουσ’ αἰεὶ | ψυχᾷ πολέμους . Plato has the phrase τῆς ψυχῆς τὴν γνώμην for ‘the intellect’ (Legg. 672 B).

ἀρχαῖς , duties of administration. It might be explained as a generic plur. of ἀρχή, in the sense of ‘sovereignties,’ as Isocr. or. 3 § 15 αἱ μοναρχίαι , § 16 τὰς τυραννίδας , etc.: but it seems truer to say that the Athenian poet was thinking of public offices or magistracies. νόμοισιν has a general sense: the king is concerned with νόμοι both as νομοφύλαξ and as νομοθέτης: but, as the context suggests, it is of law- giving that Creon is more particularly thinking. Tournier has suggested ἀρχῇ τε καὶ θρόνοισιν, but we must recollect how largely the language of Attic tragedy is tinged with democratic associations.

ἐντριβής , exercitatus: Plat. Legg. 769B ἐντριβής γε οὐδαμῶς γέγοια τῇ τοιαύτῃ τέχνῃ.

φανῇ ‘be found,’ without ὤν, as Pind. P. 5. 107 πέφανταί θ’ ἁρματηλάτας σοφός: Thuc. 1.8 Κᾶρες ἐφάνησαν (were found to be). Not: ‘be revealed, by being conversant.’ Cp. Arist. Eth. Nic. 5.3 πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐν μὲν τοῖς οἰκείοις τῇ ἀρετῇ δύνανται χρῆσθαι, ἐν δὲ τοῖς πρὸς ἕτερον ἀδυνατοῦσιν. καὶ διὰ τοῦτο εὖ δοκεῖ ἔχειν τὸ τοῦ Βίαντος, ὅτι ἀρχὴ ἄνδρα δείξει· πρὸς ἕτερον γὰρ καὶ ἐν κοινωνίᾳ ἤδη ὁ ἄρχων . Besides Bias of Priene, others of the ἑπτὰ σοφισταί,—as Chilon, Pittacus, Solon,—had this saying ascribed to them. Plut. Sull. 30(Sulla ) εἰκότως προσετρίψατο ταῖς μεγάλαις ἐξουσίαις διαβολὴν ὡς τὰ ἤθη μένειν οὐκ ἐώσαις ἐπὶ τῶν ἐξ ἀρχῆς τρόπων (as not allowing characters to be constant under the influence of habits formed in office), ἀλλ’ ἔμπληκτα καὶ χαῦνα καὶ ἀπάνθρωπα ποιούσαις . Shaksp. Jul. Caes. ii. 1. 12 He would be crown'd:— How that might change his nature, there's the question....The abuse of greatness is, when it disjoins | Remorse from power.

ἐμοὶ γάρ . A ground for the preceding statement is introduced by γάρ , though the compression of the thought slightly obscures the connection. ‘A man cannot be known until he has been tested in power. For (γὰρ) a man in power may easily be deterred, by fear of unpopularity, from pursuing the counsels best for the State: and if he is so deterred, I think him worthless.’ πᾶσαν … πόλιν , the whole city, as 656 πόλεως ... ἐκ πάσης, 776 πᾶσα...πόλις, Ai. 851 ἐν πάσῃ πόλει (in the hearing of all the city). In prose the art. would have been added (cp. Thuc. 7.29 τῇ πόλει πάσῃ , 4. 87 ξυμπάσῃ τῇ πόλει, 2. 65 ἡ ξύμπασα πόλις); but its omission in poetry being so common, it is strange that πᾶσαν should have been suspected here.

μὴ … ἅπτεται , not οὐ, since the relative clause is general (‘such an one as does not...,’ Lat. qui with subjunct.): cp. O. C. 1175 ἃ μὴ | χρῄζεις . Instead of ὅστις μὴ ἅπτεται we should more often find ὅστις ἃν μὴ ἅπτηται: yet the instances of the indic. after ὅστις in general statement are not rare even in prose; cp. Thuc. 2.64 οἵτινες...ἥκιστα λυποῦνται, ἔργῳ δὲ μάλιστα ἀντέχουσιν : ib. ὅστις λαμβάνει.

ἐκ φ. του : cp. 111 νεικέων ἐξ ἀμφιλόγων.

ἐγκλῄσας ἔχει (cp. 22),=a perf., in the sense ‘has shut once for all,’ ‘keeps shut.’ Distinguish the prose idiom, Dem. or. 9 § 12 Φερὰς...ἔχει καταλαβών , has seized, and keeps.

νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι , an emphatic formula (‘seems, and has always seemed’), El. 676, Ph. 966: cp. El. 1049 πάλαι δέδοκται ταῦτα κοὐ νεωστί μοι : Il. 9.105 οἷον ἐγὼ νοέω, ἠμὲν πάλαι ἠδ’ ἔτι καὶ νῦν .

μείζον’ : whoever recognises a friend more important than his country, —i.e. with stronger claims upon him: ἀντὶ τῆς...πάτρας instead of the simple gen., or ἤ with accus., as Tr. 576 ὥστε μήτιν’ εἰσιδὼν | στέρξει γυναῖκα κεῖνος ἀντὶ σοῦ πλέον . Cp. 638 (γάμος ) μείζων φέρεσθαι, more important to win: O. T. 772 τῷ γὰρ ἂν καὶ μείζονι | λέξαιμ’ ἂν ἢ σοί ..., ‘to whom more important,’ i.e. with a better claim on my confidence,— nearer and dearer. μεῖζον (which was written by the first hand in L) is specious, —‘a more important thing,’ a greater good: cp. Eur. Or. 784 μέγα γὰρ ηὑγένειά σου , Andr. 209 ἡ Λάκαινα μὲν πόλις | μέγ’ ἐστί. But Demosthenes, at least, seems to have read μείζον’: for, in applying the verses to Aeschines, he paraphrases thus (or. 19 § 248): τούτων οὐδὲν Αἰσχίνης εἶπε πρὸς αὑτὸν ἐν τῇ πρεσβείᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἀντὶ μὲν τῆς πόλεως τὴν Φιλίππου ξενίαν καὶ φιλίαν πολλῷ μείζονα ἡγήσατο αὑτῷ καὶ λυσιτελεστέραν, ἐρρῶσθαι πολλὰ φράσας τῷ σοφῷ Σοφοκλεῖ.

οὐδαμοῦ λέγω : Aesch. Pers. 497 θεοὺς δέ τις | τὸ πρὶν νομίζων οὐδαμοῦ, τότ’ ηὔχετο . Eur. Andr. 210 Σκῦρον οὐδαμοῦ τίθης (nullo in numero habes). Xen. Mem. 1.2.52 ὥστε μηδαμοῦ παρ’ αὐτοῖς τοὺς ἄλλους εἶναι πρὸς αὐτόν , ‘so that the rest were nowhere with them in comparison to him.’ So οὐδενὸς λόγου (or ἐν οὐδενὶ λόγῳ) ποιεῖσθαι, ἐν οὐδεμιᾷ μοίρᾳ ἄγειν, etc.

ἐγὼ γάρ . Here, as in ἐμοὶ γάρ above (178), γάρ introduces a reason; but here, again, the connection is obscured by the form of the sentence. The reason is contained in τοῦτο γιγνώσκων κ.τ.λ. (188). ‘I have no esteem for a man who prefers popularity or private friendship to the good of the State (178— 183); for (184) I well know that all private welfare depends on the welfare of the State; and so I should never commit the faults which I have just condemned in others.’— ἴστω is confirmed against the conjecture ἴστωρ (or ἵστωρ) by those passages in which it is joined with an accus., as Il. 7.411 ὅρκια δὲ Ζεὺς ἴστω , 15. 36 ἴστω νῦν τοδε Γαῖα, etc.

οὔτ’ ἂν σιωπήσαιμι . Applied to the actual case, Creon's words mean, ‘I should never be deterred by fear of popular murmurs (cp. 692 ff.) from publishing such an edict as this against burying Polyneices, when I clearly saw that otherwise a disastrous precedent would be set. And though Polyneices was my nephew, I should never allow myself to recognise as friend or kinsman a man who had borne arms against the country.’

στείχουσαν ἀστοῖς . Demosthenes paraphrases this by στείχουσαν ὁμοῦ (or. 19 § 248); whence Dobree and Shilleto surmised that he read ἆσσον (cp. O. C. 312 στείχουσαν ἡμῶν ἆσσον ). Now I think that I can explain why Demosthenes so paraphrased. He is applying the verses to Aeschines (see above, n. on 182): τὴν δὲ ἄτην ὁρῶν στείχουσαν ὁμοῦ, τὴν ἐπὶ Φωκέας στρατείαν, οὐ προεῖπεν οὐδὲ προεξήγγειλεν. The ἄτη which Aeschines saw approaching was the interference of Philip in the Sacred War,—his action against the Phocians. If Demosthenes had said στείχουσαν ἀστοῖς, this must have seemed to refer to the fellow-citizens of Aeschines, —the Athenians. The orator therefore modified the poet's phrase by substituting ὁμοῦ ,—a word vague enough to suggest the concern of other Greek states besides Phocis in the peril.

ἀντὶ τῆς σωτηρίας , added for emphasis; ‘ruin, and not welfare, which a king is bound to promote.’ (The art. τῆς is merely generic, as in τὴν ἄτην.) So Tr. 267 φανεὶς δὲ δοῦλος ἀνδρὸς ἀντ’ ἐλευθέρου , a slave, and not a free man (as he ought to be): O. T. 1490 κεκλαυμέναι | πρὸς οἶκον ἵξεσθ’ ἀντὶ τῆς θεωρίας .

ἄνδρα δυσμενῆ χθονός ; cp. Plat. Lysis 213 B τὸ φίλον ἂν εἴη φίλον τοῦ φιλουμένου...τὸ μισοῦν ἄρα πάλιν ἐχθρὸν τοῦ μισουμένου. Andoc. or. 1 § 96 (in a νόμος) πολέμιος ἔστω Ἀθηναίων.

ἐμαυτῷ with φίλον . Some MSS. of Dem. (or. 19 § 247) give ἐμαυτοῦ in the quotation, but here the dat. is clearly better. θείμην ‘hold’ (rather than ‘make’): cp. Tyrt. 12. 1 οὔτ’ ἂν μνησαίμην οὔτ’ ἐν λόγῳ ἄνδρα τιθείμην.

ἡ σῴζουσα , ‘who bears us safe.’ σῴζειν was esp. said of a ship or its captain: cp. Plat. Gorg. 511D ἐὰν.. ἐξ Αἰγίνης δεῦρο σώσῃ , if she (ἡ κυβερνητική) has carried us safely from Aegina to Athens.

ταύτης κ.τ.λ. It is only while she remains upright, as we sail on board of her, that we can make real friends. ὀρθῆς (like ὤρθωσαν in 163) refers to the ship maintaining a safe stability, as opposed to capsizing: the contrast is given by ὑπτίοις..σέλμασιν..ναυτίλλεται in 716 (where see n.). So Ep. ad Fam. 12. 25. 5 ut rectam teneamus (navem) .

τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα , we make the friends (whom we really make): since friends made at the cost of endangering or wrecking the ship of the State cannot properly be considered friends at all: they are φίλοι ἄφιλοι. For the use of the art., cp. Thuc. 2.40 οὐ..πάσχοντες εὖ ἀλλὰ δρῶντες κτώμεθα τοὺς φίλους . The thought is like that ascribed to Pericles by Thuc. 2.60 , ἐγὼ γὰρ ἡγοῦμαι πόλιν πλείω ξύμπασαν ὀρθουμένην ὠφελεῖν τοὺς ἰδιώτας ἢ καθ’ ἕκαστον τῶν πολιτῶν εὐπραγοῦσαν ἀθρόαν δὲ σφαλλομένην. καλῶς μὲν γὰρ φερόμενος ἀνὴρ τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν διαφθειρομένης τῆς πατρίδος οὐδὲν ἧσσον ξυναπόλλυται, κακοτυχῶν δὲ ἐν

εὐτυχούσῃ πολλῷ μᾶλλον διασῴζεται. ‘Pericles Thucydidis 11. 60 Sophoclem videtur respexisse, vel eum Sophocles,’ is Dobree's remark ( Adv. 2. 37); but there is no adequate ground for such a view. The verbal coincidence of ὀρθῆς with ὀρθουμένην may well have been accidental. What is really common to poet and historian is the general sentiment of Periclean Athens. For another example of this, cp. O. C. 116 n.

νόμοισι , here, rules of conduct, principles, as El. 1043; cp. O. C. 907.

αὔξω , pres. (used also in Attic prose): the Attic fut. was αὐξήσω. The pres. here expresses purpose (‘I intend to make Thebes prosperous’). Cp. Plat. Legg. 731A φιλονεικείτω δὲ ἡμῖν πᾶς πρὸς ἀρετήν· ὁ γὰρ τοιοῦτος αὔξει τὰς πόλεις .

ἀδελφὰ τῶνδε , the more usu. constr.: but O. C. 1262 ἀδελφὰ τούτοισιν (n.). This use of the word is freq. in Attic prose, as Phaedr. 276 D ὅσα τούτων ἀδελφά.

τῶν ἀπ’ Οἰδίπου . In regard to origin, ἐκ is properly said of parents, ἀπό of ancestors: Isocr. or. 12 § 81 τοὺς μὲν ἀπὸ θεῶν τοὺς δ’ ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότας . Cp. 466, 471, 1066; Ph. 260 παῖ πατρὸς ἐξ Ἀχιλλέως. Ai. 202 χθονίων ἀπ’ Ἐρεχθειδᾶν . But poetry oft. has ἀπό of the parent, as O. C. 571 κἀφ’ ὅτου πατρὸς γεγώς : while, again, ἐκ oft. denotes merely the stock (including progenitors above the parent): cp. 1056: so ἀγαθοὶ καὶ ἐξ ἀγαθῶν ( Phaedr. 246 A), etc. The poetical indifference on this point is well seen in fr. 104, where τοὺς μὲν δυσσεβεῖς κακῶν τ’ ἄπο | βλαστόντας is opposed to τοὺς δ’ ὄντας ἐσθλοὺς ἔκ τε γενναίων ἅμα | γεγῶτας.

δορί was the ordinary Attic form, occurring in prose (as Thuc. 1.128, 4. 98), and was prob. used by Soph. as well as δόρει , which metre requires in O. C. 620 (n.), 1314, 1386: cp. n. on O. C. 1304.

τὰ πάντ’ ἐφαγνίσαι , to perform all due rites over the grave; i.e. to make the proper offerings to the dead (ἐναγίσματα, O. C. 402 n.), esp. libations, χοαί. For ἐπί in the compound cp. El. 440 χοὰς | οὐκ ἄν ποθ’, ὅν γ’ ἔκτεινε, τῷδ’ ἐπέστεφε : O. C. 484 τάσδ’ ἐπεύχεσθαι λιτάς , i.e. ‘over’ the rite. ἐφαγνίσαι is the reading of L; the force of the prep. is rightly given in the glosses, ἐπὶ τῷ τάφῳ ἁγνίσαι τὰ πάντα, and ἐπὶ τῷ τάφῳ ὁσίως ποιῆσαι. Though ἐφαγνίζειν is not elsewhere extant, there seems no reason to question it. ἀφαγνίσαι has been preferred by some, merely because that compound is recognised by the old grammarians (Suid. , Hesych., Phrynichus in Bekk. Anecd. 26). But ἀφαγνίζειν meant esp. to purify from guilt (expiare): Paus. 2.31.8 (of Orestes at Troezen) ἐκάθαιρον καὶ εἱστίων, ἐς ὃ ἀφήγνισαν, ‘until they had purged him.’ Similarly in midd., Eur. Alc. 1145 πρὶν ἂν θεοῖσι τοῖσι νερτέροις | ἀφαγνίσηται , until she has made expiatory offerings to them. So ἀφαγνεύω in Plut. Mor. 943C (the souls of the good are to suffer only so long) ὅσον ἀφαγνεῦσαι καὶ ἀποπνεῦσαι τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος..μιασμούς (‘to purge away’: perh. we should read ἀφαγνίσαι). The force of ἀπό is thus the same as in ἀφοσιοῦσθαι, and in ἀφιερώμεθα as used by Aesch. Eum. 451 (‘I have been hallowed,’ i.e. purified). The case of κἀφαγιστεύσας below (247) is different from that of ἐφαγνίσαι here: it is, I think, for καὶ ἀφαγιστεύσας.

τοῖς ἀρίστοις , implying that, in his case, the αὐτόχειρ μίασμα (172) is to make no difference. Cp. Ai. 1379, where Odysseus offers to join in funeral honours to Ajax (notwithstanding his offence), μηδὲν ἐλλείπειν, ὅσον | χρὴ τοῖς ἀριστοῖς ἀνδράσιν πονεῖν βροτούς.

ἔρχεται κάτω : the χοαί were supposed to pass through the earth, and to be drunk by the spirits of the dead: Aesch. Ch. 164 ἔχει μὲν ἤδη γαπότους χοὰς πατήρ: cp. Od. 10.94, Eur. Hec. 535 ff. The dat., as O. T. 711 χρησμὸς..ἦλθε Λαΐῳ .

L has Πολυνείκην here, but Πολυνείκη in O. C. 375. Both forms are sound. From about 400 B.C. the Attic tendency of proper names in ‐ης was to pass from the 3rd to the 1st declension. Attic inscriptions of circ. 410—350 B.C. give the acc. in -ην more often than that in -η. From c. 350 to 30 B.C. the gen. in -ου is far more frequent than that in -ους. Even proper names in -κλέης, which kept the acc. in -κλέα to c. 300 B.C., afterwards formed it in -κλῆν. (No Attic inscript. gives -κλῆ.)

λέγω : see n. on 32 λέγω γὰρ κἀμέ.

γτ=ν πατρῴαν . . καὶ θεοὺς . . πρῆσαι : cp. Aesch. Th. 582(of Polyneices) πόλιν πατρῴαν καὶ θεοὺς τοὺς ἐγγενεῖς | πορθεῖν, στράτευμ’ ἐπακτὸν ἐμβεβληκότα. But πέρσαι, for πρῆσαι, would be a needless change here. ‘To burn his country’ means ‘to burn his native city’: so O. C. 1421 πάτραν κατασκάψαντι , when thou hast laid thy native city in ruins. θεοὺς πρῆσαι is to burn the gods' temples and the ancient wooden images (βρέτη) therein: cp. Her. 8.109 ἐμπιμπράς τε καὶ καταβάλλων τῶν θεῶν τὰ ἀγάλματα . Aesch. Pers. 809 οὐ θεῶν βρέτη | ᾐδοῦντο συλᾶν οὐδὲ πιμπράναι νεώς.

θ. τοὺς ἐγγενεῖς , of the race, here in a large sense, of the Cadmean stock: while θεοὶ πατρῷοι are usu. rather the gods of one's own family ( O. C. 756 n.). Cp. El. 428 πρός νυν θεῶν σε λίσσομαι τῶν ἐγγενῶν.

κατελθών , not καταχθεὶς ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως: on the shield of Polyneices, Dikè was portrayed saying, κατάξω δ’ ἄνδρα τόνδε ( Aesch. Th. 647).

γ)θέλησε μέν … ἠθέλ. δέ , rhetor. epanaphora ( O. C. 610 φθίνει μέν . . φθίνει δέ ). Since πάσασθαι cannot govern γῆν . . καὶ θεούς, ἠθέλησε μὲν should in strictness have preceded γῆν.

πρῆσαι . Prose would have used ἐμπρῆσαι, though Thuc. has the pres. part. of the simple form (6. 94 πίμπραντες ).

κατ’ ἄκρας , here in its proper sense, of a town being sacked ‘from top to bottom’ ( Il. 13.772): cp. O. C. 1241 n.

αἵματος κ. πάσασθαι (πατέομαι), denoting the extreme of savage hatred; Il. 4.35 ὠμὸν βεβρώθοις Πρίαμον : 24. 212 τοῦ ἐγὼ μέσον ἧπαρ ἔχοιμι | ἐσθέμεναι: Theogn. 349 τῶν εἴη μέλαν αἶμα πιεῖν.

τοὺς δὲ … ἄγειν , as if τῶν μέν had preceded αἵματος. O. T. 1228 ὅσα | κεύθει, τὰ δ’ αὐτίκ’ εἰς τὸ φῶς φανεῖ . Tr. 117 στρέφει, τὸ δ’ αὔξει . Il. 22.157 παραδραμέτην, φεύγων, ὁ δ’ ὄπισθε διώκων .

The traditional ἐκκεκηρῦχθαι τάφῳ can be explained only by supplying λέγω or the like. But in 196 κρύψαι and ἐφαγνίσαι depended on κηρύξας ἔχω in 192 (I have proclaimed to the people). It would be intolerably awkward to communicate the second part of the proclamation in an oblique form with the principal verb unexpressed: —‘(I tell you that) it has been proclaimed.’ The choice lies between (1) Musgrave's ἐκκεκήρυκται τάφῳ , and (2) Nauck's ἐκκεκηρῦχθαι λέγω . In favour of (1) remark:—(a ) τάφῳ is not, indeed, necessary with κτερίζειν , which can be used absolutely; as Il. 11.455 αὐτὰρ ἐπεί κε θάνω, κτεριοῦσί με δῖοι Ἀχαιοί , ‘will give me funeral honours’: but, as the main point is that a τάφος is given to one brother and refused to the other, the addition of τάφῳ to the more general term κτερίζειν is plainly desirable here. (b) The misplacement of μήτε is due to the thought of κωκῦσαι having come only after τάφῳ had been uttered (μήτε κτερίζειν μήτε having been preferred to μὴ κτερίζειν μηδέ), and is not bolder than (e.g.) the misplacement of τε in Ph. 1411 f. αὐδὴν τὴν Ἡρακλέους | ἀκοῇ τε κλύειν λεύσσειν τ’ ὄψιν. (c) The MS. error may have arisen from a reminiscence of ἐκκεκηρῦχθαι in 27. The line of Carneades ( L. Diog. 4. 64), τοῦτον σχολῆς τῆσδ’ ἐκκεκηρῦχθαι λέγω, is no argument for λέγω in the text of Sophocles. What could the parodist have made of τάφῳ ? The tragic solemnity of the decree was the point of the parody, which uses ἐκκεκ . in a different sense from the poet's (‘I proclaim that he is banished from this school’: see on 27).

ἐᾶν δ ': see on 29. Construe, ἄθαπτον, αἰκισθέντ’ ἰδεῖν , mangled for all to see, δέμας καὶ πρὸς οἰωνῶν καὶ πρὸς κυνῶν ἐδεστόν , in the body (acc. of respect) which birds and dogs devour. L favours αἰκισθέντ ': but this is a point on which our MSS. have little weight. Reading αἰκισθέντ ', it would be also possible to take ἐδεστόν as masc., with a slight pause after it; but this seems less good. With αἰκισθέν τ’, δέμας is accus. in appos.: leave him unburied, a body eaten (etc.), and mangled. Some recent edd. prefer this.

δέμας of a corpse, as 903, El. 756, Eur. Or. 40 etc.: in Hom. always of the living, who has σῶμα only of the dead: in Attic σῶμα is said of either.

ἰδεῖν : the aor. inf., as in the epic θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, since the aor. suggests the moment at which the startling sight catches the eye, whereas the pres. inf. would suggest continued gazing.

φρόνημα : on 176.

ἔκ γ’ ἐμοῦ , by an act of mine (cp. 63, 93), while ἔν γ’ ἐμοί in a negative sentence=(not) if I can help it ( O. C. 153).

The MSS. have τιμὴν προέξουσ’ ..τῶν ἐνδ. , shall have honour before the just, schol. ἕξουσι πρὸ τῶν δικαίων. Such a constr. of προέχω occurs nowhere else. But the objection to rendering, ‘shall have the advantage of the just in honour’ ( τιμήν as acc. of respect) is that, after προέχειν in this sense, the point of advantage was regularly expressed by the dat.: see examples on O. C. 1007. τιμῆ ( PallisA. ) is most probable, since either TIMHI or τιμηι might easily have become the accus. before the verb. Hermann read προσέξους ' (which I do not understand) because of the hiatus (but cp. O. T. 351 προεῖπας , ib. 107 αὐτοέντας ); and because the honours claimed for Polyneices are only equal, not superior. But Creon's meaning is explained by vv. 514 ff.: the honour is greater for a public foe than for a patriot.

τιμήσεται : cp. on 93.

I print Dindorf's κἀς for καὶ in v. 212, not as thinking it certain, but because, with the least change, it gives a satisfactory construction. Soph. has this crasis in fr. 428 φίλων τε μέμψιν κεἰς θεοὺς ἁμαρτάνειν. Cp. Plat. Rep. 538B παράνομόν τι δρᾶσαι ἢ εἰπεῖν εἰς αὐτούς (‘with regard to them’). For the place of the prep., cp. 367, O. T. 734 Δελφῶν κἀπὸ Δαυλίας . With the MS. reading, the accusatives in v. 212 must be governed by σοὶ ταῦτ’ ἀρέσκει as=σὺ ταῦτα δρᾶσαι διανοεῖ. Greek was bold in constructions κατὰ σύνεσιν, and might possibly have tolerated this: but it seems improbable. In the apparently similar instances the periphrasis for the transitive verb always contains a noun directly suggestive of that verb: as Eur. Ion 572 τοῦτο κἄμ’ ἔχει πόθος = τοῦτο κἀγὼ ποθῶ : Aesch. Ag. 814 φθορὰς... ψήφους ἔθεντο : Suppl. 533 γένος...νέωσον αἶνον: Theb. 289 ζωπυροῦσι τάρβος ...λεών: Dem. or. 19 § 81 τεθνάναι τῷ φόβῳ...ξένους . Nor can the accusatives in v. 212 be explained as mere accus. ‘of respect’; nor as if, by a euphemism, παθεῖν were understood.—There is much in favour of the view that Κρέον in v. 211 has displaced an infin., such as παθεῖν, λαβεῖν, λαχεῖν, ποιεῖν, or τὸ δρᾶν. In v. 1098 L has εὐβουλίας δεῖ, παῖ Μενοικέως, λαβεῖν, where later MSS. have Κρέον in place of λαβεῖν: see n. there. If Κρέον is not genuine in v. 211, then it is much more likely to have been a mere gloss on παῖ Μενοικέως than a corruption of a similar word. The conjecture κυρεῖν, then, merits no preference; though the acc. ταῦτα could stand with it ( Aesch. Ch. 714 κυρούντων...τὰ πρόσφορα, Eur. Hec. 699 ἐπ’ ἀκταῖς νιν κυρῶ ).—Brunck wrote ταὔτ ', understanding ἀρέσκει (με ) ταὐτὰ σοί, ‘my view is the same as yours.’ But ταῦτ’ is right. The Chorus say—‘Such is my lord's pleasure. And, of course, he can do as seems him good.’ Their tone is sufficiently interpreted by vv. 216, 220, 278. Cp. Her. 1.119 (Harpagus to Astyages) ἔφη... ἀρεστὸν εἶναι πᾶν τὸ ἂν βασιλεὺς ἔρδῃ. The Chorus do not oppose Creon; but they feel a secret misgiving; they wish at least to remain passive.

In παντί πού γ’ the enclitic που closely adheres to παντί, and γε emphasises the whole expression; as in El. 1506, ὅστις πέρα πράσσειν γε τῶν νόμων θέλει , the γε emphasises the whole phrase πέρα πράσσειν. The transposition σοί γ’ … που is open to the objection that παντί, not σοί, claims the chief emphasis. παντί που πάρεστι has also been proposed. But ἔνεστι is slightly more suitable to this context, because more suggestive of tacit disapproval. ‘It is possible for you’ (‘but we doubt whether it is expedient’). πάρεστί σοι is generally said rather when the speaker means, ‘it is easy for you,’ or ‘it is open to you,’— in seconding a wish of the other person, or in making an offer to him. Ph. 364 τἄλλα μὲν πάρεστί σοι | πατρῷ’ ἑλέσθαι. Cp. O. T. 766. — παντί που μέτεστί σοι, which some prefer, is still less suitable here. It would imply a right shared by the King with some other man or men (cp. on 48).—Though the antecedent ( ἡμῶν) to χὡπόσοι ζῶμεν is understood, πέρι can stand at the end of the verse, since such a relative clause was felt almost as a noun-case: see on 35. Cp. Eur. Ion 560 ἦ θίγω δῆθ’ οἵ μ’ ἔφυσαν ; (=τῶν φυσάντων).

ὡς ἂν … ἦτε can be explained only by an ellipse of ἐπιμελεῖσθε or the like. After verbs of ‘taking care,’ the usu. constr. is ὅπως with fut. indic.; but ὡς ἄν with subj. is sometimes found, as Hipparch. 9. 2 ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ὡς ἂν πραχθῇ...ἢν μή τις ἐπιμελῆται ὡς ἂν ταῦτα περαίνηται. In elliptical phrases, where a precept or charge is given (ὅρα, etc., being understood), the regular constr. is ὅπως with fut. ind., as Lys. or. 1. 21 ὅπως τοίνυν ταῦτα μηδεὶς ἀνθρώπων πεύσεται . The elliptical ὅπως μή with subjunct. is different,—‘take care lest,’ —a deferential way of hinting an objection (Plat. Crat. 430D), like the simple elliptical μή with subjunct. O. C. 1180. Since, however, ἐπιμελεῖσθαι could be followed by ὡς ἄν with subjunct., it is conceivable that Soph. should write ὡς ἂν σκοποὶ ἦτε instead of the usual ὅπως σκοποὶ ἔσεσθε. I cannot think, with Wecklein, that the sentence is broken off, as though Creon said,—‘In order that ye may be watchers of my mandate,’—being about to add, μὴ ἐπιχωρεῖτε.—Dindorf's πῶς ἂν … εἶτε is supported by usage, as O. T. 765 πῶς ἂν μόλοι δῆθ’ ἡμὶν ἐν τάχει πάλιν ; Nauck (Cur. Eur. 11. 79) refuses εἶμεν and εἶτε to tragedy, but is not convincing. In O. T. 1046 εἰδεῖτ ' (for εἰδείητε) is certain: and εἶτε for εἴητε is strictly parallel. εἶτε occurs in Od. 21.195 ποῖοί κ’ εἶτ’ Ὀδυσῆι<*> ἀμυνέμεν, εἴ ποθεν ἔλθοι ; In Eur. Alc. 921 ἦμεν might replace εἶμεν: though in Hipp. 349, at least, the opt. εἶμεν seems required. But πῶς ἂν εἶτε is here less fitting than ὡς ἂν ἦτε, because a request is less suitable than an injunction.

σκοποί , φύλακες, who watch to see that no one breaks the edict.

νυν is better than νῦν .

τῶν εἰρ ., the commands: cp. Aesch. Ag. 1620 σωφρονεῖν εἰρημένον , Her. 7.26 εἴρητο συλλέγεσθαι...στρατόν .

πρόθες τοῦτο , set him this as a task (cp. 1249), βαστάζειν , for him to take in hand (suscipiendum); the act. inf. as O. C. 231 πόνον...ἀντιδίδωσιν ἔχειν . For the lit. sense of the verb cp. Ai. 827 ὥς με βαστάσῃ | πεπτῶτα (raise me).

τοῦ νεκροῦ γ’ : but ἐπίσκοποι τῶν ἀστῶν are still needed.

τί δῆτ’ ἂν … ἐπεντέλλοις = τί δῆτ’ ἂν εἴη...ὃ ἐπεντέλλεις; cp. O. C. 647 μέγ’ ἂν λέγοις δώρημα : Ph. 26.

The reading ἄλλῳ is a bad one, for the contrast is between commands, not persons; and an awkward ambiguity would arise, since τοῦτο might then seem to mean the watching of the corpse.

ἐπιχωρεῖν , accedere, to join their side: Thuc. 4.107 δεξάμενος τοὺς ἐθελήσαντας ἐπιχωρῆσαι... κατὰ τὰς σπονδάς . Mirab. 133 τούτῳ τῷ ἐπιγράμματι ἐπεχώρησε καὶ ὁ τόπος ἐκεῖνος (corroborated it).

ἀπιστοῦσιν = ἀπειθοῦσιν: 381, 656.

τάδε, cogn. acc.: cp. 66.

ὃς (instead of ὥστε) ἐρᾷ , a constr. most freq. in negative sentences, usu. with ὅστις ( Dem. or. 1 § 15 τίς οὕτως εὐήθης ἐστὶν...ὅστις ἀγνοεῖ ), or ὃς ἄν and opt. ( Plat. Rep. 360B οὐδεὶς ἂν γένοιτο οὕτως ἀδαμάντινος, ὃς ἂν μείνειεν ). But it occurs also in affirmative sentences, as Eur. Andr. 170 ἐς τοῦτο δ’ ἥκεις ἀμαθίας ...ἣ...τολμᾷς . Cp. Her. 4.52.

καὶ μὴν (lit., ‘and verily’) here confirms the last speaker's remark by adding an assurance that disobedience does indeed mean death; while γε after μισθός emphasises that word. ‘And I can tell you that the

requital of disobedience is that.’ For καὶ μήν so used, cp. O. T. 836, 1004 f., El. 556.

τὸ κέρδος , ‘gain,’ i.e., as ἐλπίδων shows, the prospect of gain, with the generic art. (cp. 1242): so fr. 749 τὸ κέρδος ἡδύ, κἂν ἀπὸ ψευδῶν ἴῃ.

διώλεσεν , gnomic aor.

ἐρῶ μὲν οὐχ : cp. on 96.

ὅπως = ὅτι, as O. T. 548: cp. El. 963 μηκέτ’ ἐλπίσῃς ὅπως | τεύξει . This use is rare in Attic prose (for after θαυμάζω, etc., ὅπως =‘how’), though freq. in Her., as 2. 49 οὐδὲ φήσω ὅκως...ἔλαβον. Yet cp. Plat. Euthyd. 296 E οὐκ ἔχω ὑμῖν πῶς ἀμφισβητοίην...ὅπως οὐ πάντα ἐγὼ ἐπίσταμαι.

τάχους ὕπο is the reading of the MSS. Aristotle quotes this verse as an example of a προοίμιον used by the speaker to avert a danger from himself, and gives it thus:—ἄναξ, ἐρῶ μὲν οὐχ ὅπως σπουδῆς ὔπο ( Rhet. 3. 14§ 10). Hence some edd. adopt σπουδῆς, as coming from a source older than our MSS. But, since τάχους is free from objection, such a change is unwarrantable. Aristotle's quotations seem to have been usually made from memory, and his memory was not infallible. To take only three examples cited by Bellermann, we find: (1) El. 256 ἀλλ’ ἡ βία γὰρ ταῦτ’ ἀναγκάζει με δρᾶν , quoted Metaphys. 4. 5 ἀλλ’ ἡ βία με ταῦτ’ ἀναγκάζει ποιεῖν: (2) O. T. 774 ἐμοὶ πατὴρ μὲν Πόλυβος ἦν , quoted Rhet. 3. 14§ 6 ἐμοὶ πατὴρ ἦν Πόλυβος: (3) Ant. 911 μητρὸς δ’ ἐν Ἅιδου καὶ πατρὸς κεκευθότοιν , quoted Rhet. 3. 16§ 9 with βεβηκότων as last word. So Il. 9.592 κήδε’ ὅσ’ ἀνθρώποισι πέλει τῶν ἄστυ ἁλῴη· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι , is quoted Rhet. 1. 7§ 31 with ὅσσα κάκ’ substituted for the first two words, and λαοὶ μὲν φθινύθουσι for the last three.

ἐξάρας (α—), aor. part., not pres., because, as ἐξ- shows, the notion is, ‘having set in nimble movement’ (at starting). Cp. Eur. Tro. 342 μὴ κοῦφον αἴρῃ βῆμ’ ἐς Ἀργείων στρατόν.

φροντίδων , possessive gen. with ἐπιστάσεις , halts belonging to thoughts, i.e. caused by them. Others understand, ‘halts for thought’ (made in order to reflect),— which is less simple. Cp. De Anim. 1. 3 (p. 407a 32) ἡ νόησις ἔοικεν ἠρεμήσει τινὶ καὶ ἐπιστάσει (halt) μᾶλλον ἢ κινήσει.

ὁδοῖς , locative dat.; cp. O. C. 553 ὁδοῖς | ἐν ταῖσδ ', ‘in this my coming.’

κυκλῶν = περιστρέφων.

ψυχὴ γὰρ ηὔδα κ.τ.λ. The naïveté consists in the direct quotation of what his ψυχή said, rather than in the statement that it spoke; thus Hor. Sat. 1. 2. 68 (quoted by Schneid.) is really similar,—Huic si...Diceret haec animus. Take πολλὰ with μυθουμένη only. I do not think that ηὔδα...μυθουμένη was meant to mark garrulity; the language is not homely enough: rather it is simply,— ‘found a voice, speaking many things.’ ἔφη λέγων is not similar ( Ai. 757).—Cp. Launcelot Gobbo in Shaksp. Merch. 2. 2: Certainly my conscience will serve me to run from this few my master. The fiend is at mine elbow and tempts me...My conscience says, ‘Launcelot, budge not.’ ‘Budge,’ says the fiend. ‘Budge not,’ says my conscience.

τάλας … τλήμων , nom., not voc., because each is rather a comment (‘hapless that thou art!’) than properly an address: so O. C. 185 ὦ τλάμων , ib. 753 ὦ τάλας ἐγώ , Eur. Med. 61 ὦ μῶρος.

μένεις is better than μενεῖς , since, ‘are you tarrying again?’ (his halts having been frequent, 225) is more graphic than, ‘will you tarry again?’— αὖ cannot mean here, ‘on the contrary’ (i.e. instead of going on).

πῶς … οὐκ , as O. T. 937, 976, etc.

ἀλγυνεῖ , pass.: cp. on 93 ἐχθαρεῖ.

ἑλίσσων , turning over and over in the mind: cp. on 158 ἐρέσσων.

ἤνυτον (sc. τὴν ὁδόν), gradually made my way (impf.); whereas ἤνυσα would have suited a quick journey. Cp. this impf. in Plat. Symp. 127C οὐδαμῇ ταύτῃ ἤνυτον , ‘they could make no progress by that means.’ Soph. has this tense also in Tr. 319 (ἔργον ἤνυτον): cp. below, 805. In Dem. or. 21 § 104 our MSS. give οὐδὲν ἤνυε. For the use of the verb in ref. to journeys, cp. Thuc. 2.97 (ὁδὸς ) ἡμερῶν ἀνδρὶ εὐζώνῳ τριῶν καὶ δέκα ἀνύσαι. The Attic pres. seems to have been ἀνύτω as=‘to accomplish,’ or ‘to make way,’ but ἀνύειν as=‘to hasten.’ Plut. 413 μή νυν διάτριβ’ ἀλλ’ ἄνυε: Ran. 606 ἀνύετον: though in Plut. 606 οὐ μέλλειν | χρή σ’, ἀλλ’ ἀνύειν, some MSS. have ἀνύτειν (see Pors. on Phoen. 463). This is the distinction meant by the grammarian in Bekk. Anecd. 411. 28 ἁνύττειν (sic ) οἱ Ἀττικοὶ ὅπερ ἡμεῖς, ἁνύειν δὲ τὸ σπεύδειν. (The aspirated forms lack good evidence.) Cp. ἀρύω, Attic ἀρύτω.

σχολῇ βραδύς , reluctantly and slowly; the opposite of σὺν σπουδῇ ταχύς ( Ph. 1223), with eagerness and speed. σχολῇ oft.=‘at a slow pace’ (πορεύεσθαι, Xen. Anab. 4.1.16; ὑποχωρεῖν, Thuc. 3.78). As βραδύς could mean ‘sluggish’ ( O. C. 306), we might here refer σχολῇ to pace, and βραδύς to reluctance; but, though the common use of σχολῇ in regard to pace helps to make it suitable here, it is better, in this context, to give σχολῇ the moral and βραδύς the physical sense. For σχολῇ combined with another word in such an expression, cp. Polyb. 8. 30 σχολῇ καὶ βάδην ποιεῖσθαι τὴν πορείαν. There is no lack of point. Such a messenger ought to have come σπουδῇ ταχύς.—The conjecture σπουδῇ βραδύς is (I think) not only wrong but bad. It would mean, ‘slow in my haste’; eager to arrive, yet moving slowly. σπεῦδε βραδέως, to which it is supposed to allude, meant, ‘never remit your efforts, but advance circumspectly towards your aim’: festina lente (on which see Erasmus in the Adagia); Eile mit Weile; Goethe's Ohne Hast, ohne Rast. (σπεῦδε βραδέως was a favourite maxim of Augustus, Suet. Aug. 25; Gellius 10. 11 § 5, on whom, as often, Macrobius has drawn, Sat. 6. 8. 9.) The frightened and irresolute φύλαξ, —sent, sorely against his will, on a hateful errand,—had no more σπουδή than Mr Facing-both-ways. Wecklein, keeping σχολῇ, supposes the Guard to mean, ‘this was a case of σχολῇ βραδύς, not σπουδῇ βραδύς,’—an improbably obscure and feeble jest at such a critical moment. The variant given by the schol., σχολῇ ταχύς , would be an oxymoron, designedly comic; ‘I took my time about hurrying,’ ‘'twas but a laggard haste that I made.’ A cheerful epigram of this sort would better suit a mind more at ease.

τέλος γε μέντοι , at last, however; γε emphasising the word before it: O. T. 442 n.

ἐνίκησεν , impers., as Thuc. 2.54 ἐνίκησε δὲ...λοιμὸν εἰρῆσθαι (the opinion prevailed that...): Her. 6.101 ἐνίκα μὴ

ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν πόλιν. That μολεῖν should not be regarded as the subject to ἐνίκησε, is shown by such an example as Her. 8.9 ἐνίκα τὴν ἡμέρην ἐκείνην αὐτοῦ μείναντάς τε καὶ αὐλισθέντας μετέπειτα νύκτα μέσην παρέντας πορεύεσθαι , where the length of the interval excludes such a view. The personal constr. occurs below, 274; cp. Thuc. 2.12 ἦν...Περικλέους γνώμη...νενικηκυῖα .

σοί with μολεῖν . In Attic prose a dat. of the person after ἔρχομαι is freq., and oft. can be rendered (as here) only by ‘to,’ though it is properly rather a dat. of interest. Thus Thuc. 1.13 Ἀμεινοκλῆς Σαμίοις ἦλθε =‘ A. came to the Samians,’ though the primary notion is, ‘the Samians enjoyed the advantage of A. 's coming’ (to build triremes for them). So id. 1. 27 ὡς αὐτοῖς...ἦλθον ἄγγελοι: Plat. Prot. 321C ἀποροῦντι δὲ αὐτῷ ἔρχεται Προμηθεύς . In poetry this dat. is freely used after verbs of motion, but the idea of interest is always traceable; cp. 186 n. Aesch. PV 358 ἀλλ’ ἦλθεν αὐτῷ Ζηνὸς ἄγρυπνον βέλος . So here, μολεῖν σοί is not strictly a mere equiv. for μολεῖν πρὸς σέ, but implies Creon's interest in the news. The notion is, ‘to come and place myself at your disposal.’ For the emphatic place of σοί , cp. 273 (and 46 n.): for the pause after the first syllable of the verse, 250, 464.—κεἰ, ‘and if’: not ‘ even if.’ If καί were taken as=‘ even,’ there would be a very harsh asyndeton, whether the stop were at σοί, or (as Nauck places it) after μολεῖν. It is true that καί could mean ‘ even,’ without causing an asyndeton, if we adopted Wecklein's tempting φράσων for φράσω δ ': but the latter is confirmed by O. T. 302 εἰ καὶ μὴ βλέπεις, φρονεῖς δ’ ὅμως (where see n.),—δέ introducing the apodosis after a concessive protasis. For κεἰ as=‘and if,’ cp. Ai. 447, 1057. The transposition κεἴ σοι is improbable, as destroying the significant emphasis and pause on σοί.

τὸ μηδέν , what is as nought, — a tale of simple discomfiture: since he can only report the deed, without giving any clue to the doer. Cp. Tr. 1107 κἂν τὸ μηδὲν ὦ : Ai. 1275 ἤδη τὸ μηδὲν ὄντας ἐν τροπῇ δορός .

τῆς ἐλπίδος , not ‘hope,’ but ‘the hope’—defined in next v.

δεδραγμένος is certain. Il. 13.393 κόνιος δεδραγμένος (and 16. 486). Diod. 12. 67 δράξασθαι καιροῦ. (Cp. Shaks. Per.f. 1. 49 Gripe not at earthly joys. ) Here the phrase is meant to be homely. The v.l. πεφραγμένος was simply an attempt to mend L's πεπραγμένος . We should require the dat. with it. The gen. cannot be justified by instances in which poetry uses a gen. of the agent without ὑπό, after pass. part., as Ai. 807 φωτὸς ἠπατημένη , Eur. Or. 497 πληγεὶς θυγατρός , etc.

τὸ μὴ παθεῖν ἄν = ὅτι οὐ

πάθοιμι ἄν, depending on ἐλπίδος...δεδρ. as= ἐλπίζων: for the art. with infin., cp. 78 n.

τὸ μόρσιμον : i.e. if you do kill me, then it was my destiny to be killed.

ἀνθ’ οὗ , on account of which: O. T. 264 ἀνθ’ ὧν : El. 585 ἀνθ’ ὅτου.

τὸ γὰρ | πρᾶγμ’ : cp. on 67. γάρ prefaces the statement: O. T. 277 n.: cp. below, 478, 999.

εὖ γε στοχάζει κ.τ.λ.: ‘yes, you take your aim well, and seek to fence yourself round against the charge.’ The mark at which the man aims is his own safety; and this is explained by the next phrase. Commentators have made difficulties by assuming that the metaphors of στοχάζει and ἀποφράγνυσαι must be harmonised into a single picture,—as of an archer shooting from covert. But in fact there is a rapid transition from one to the other; the second interprets the first; and all that is common to them is their military source. στοχάζομαι was familiar in a sense akin to that which it has here: cp. Plat. Lach. 178B στοχαζόμεν οι τοῦ συμβουλευομένου ἄλλα λέγουσι παρὰ τὴν αὑτῶν δόξαν (trying to hit the thought of the person who consults them): Polyb. 6. 16 ὀφείλουσι δὲ ἀεὶ ποιεῖν οἱ δήμαρχοι τὸ δοκοῦν τῷ δήμῳ καὶ μάλιστα στοχάζεσθαι τῆς τούτου βουλήσεως. So here the verb suggests a designing person, whose elaborate preamble covers a secret aim. Creon is quick to suspect bribery (221). Cp. 1033 ὥστε τοξόται σκοποῦ | τοξεύετ’ ἀνδρὸς τοῦδε. Schneidewin thought that στοχάζει might here be a term of hunting or war, with ref. to the erecting of nets on poles, or of palisades. στοιχίζειν was so used, of nets in hunting ( Cyneg. 6. 8). But στοῖχος is from rt στιχ, while στόχος is from a probably distinct rt σταχ (στάχυς ), στεχ (perhaps lengthened from στα). In Aristot. Rhet. 3. 14§ 10 the citation of v. 223 is immediately followed by the words τί φροιμιάζῃ; which Nauck (with Bergk) substitutes for εὖ γε στοχάζει here. But, though the schol. there says that Creon spoke them, they evidently belonged to some other passage, which Arist. cites as a second example: perh. to Eur. I. T. 1162 τί φροιμιάζει νεοχμόν; ἐξαύδα σαφῶς . A schol. on Arist. l. c. says, τὸ δὲ τί φροιμιάζῃ ἐν τισὶ τῶν ἀντιγράφων οὐ κεῖται (i.e. in some MSS. of Arist. ); which looks as if the words had been deleted, in such copies, by readers who could not find them in

κἀποφράγνυσαι . Inscriptions of the 5th cent. B.C. show φάρξαι (not φράξαι) to have been the old Attic aor. (Meisterhans p. 89), and so ναύφαρκτος, etc.: but the analogy of the pres. φράττω recommends φράγνυμι rather than φάργνυμι. For the constr., cp. Thuc. 8.104 ἐβούλοντο ἀποφάρξασθαι αὐτοὺς οἱ ἐναντίοι (to shut them off).

τὸ πρᾶγμα , so soon after 239: cp. on 76.

δηλοῖς δ’ ὥς τι ς. : see on 20 .

τὰ δεινά , dangers,—i.e. the κακὰ ἔπη (277) which he brings: γάρ (yes, I am cautious) for, etc.

ποτ ', tandem aliquando, O. T. 335 n.

ἀπαλλαχθείς , ‘having been removed,’ i.e. ‘having taken yourself off’; cp. Aristoph. Vesp. 484 ἆπ’ ἄν, ὦ πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, ὑμεῖς ἀπαλλαχθεῖτέ μου ;

καὶ δή , without more ado: O. C. 31 n.

θάψας , because the essential rite was the throwing of earth on the body: cp. on 80, and below, 256.—The καί in κἀπί is ‘and’ (rather than ‘both,’ answering to καί in 247); it introduces an explanation of θάψας.

διψίαν , as Aesch. Ag. 495 πηλοῦ ξύνουρος διψία κόνις : Lucr. 2. 376 bibula...arena.

κἀφαγιστεύσας (καὶ ἀ.) ἃ χρή , i.e. having made the due offerings, perh. flowers ( El. 896), or στέφη of wool. We may doubt whether the poet thought of any χοαί as having been poured by Antigone at this first visit; see n. on 429.—ἀφαγιστεύσας and ἐφαγιστεύσας are equally possible; but I prefer the former, because here, as v. 256 suggests, the idea is that of ἀφοσιωσάμενος,—having avoided an ἄγος by satisfying religion: see on 196 ἐφαγνίσαι.

ἀνδρῶν : he does not think of women.

οὔτε του γενῇδος … οὐ δικέλλης . For the enclitic του so placed, cp. 20 n.: for οὔτε … οὐ , O. C. 972 n. γενηΐς, γενής (only here), is prop. an adj., an implement with a γένυς (jaw), or blade: El. 485 ἀμφάκης γένυς , the two-edged blade (of a bronze axe). Hesych. γενῇδα· ἀξίνην, πέλεκυν (referring, as the acc. shows, to some other passage): and here the γενῄς is prob. the same as the ἀξίνη below (1109), which was to be used in raising the mound (1203). We may render ‘pickaxe,’ since this properly has a blade as well as a point. The γενῄς would break the hard surface. Then the earth would be thrown up (ἐκβολή) with the δίκελλα , which was a sort of heavy two-pronged hoe, used, like the Roman ligo or bidens, in hoeing up soil: the μάκελλα (μία, κέλλω to drive forward) being a like tool with one prong. The σμινύη was like the δίκελλα, a two-pronged hoe. ‘Mattock’ is the nearest word for it. ‘Spade’ would better suit ἄμη (or the Homeric λίστρον), though this was prop. rather a shovel. For the combination cp. Shaks. Tit. Andr. 5. 3. 11 'Tis you must dig with mattock and with spade.

δικ. ἐκβολή , throwing up of earth by mattock (possessive gen. denoting the subject, γῆ ἣν ἡ δ. ἐκβάλλει): ἐκβ. , abstract for concrete, like τροφή for θρέμμα ( O. T. 1 n.). In Greek μοδ. ἐκβολάδες is a mining term, ‘out-put.’— The epithets στύφλος (‘hard,’ cp. 139), and χέρσος ‘dry,’ tell something which the preceding words, and the following ἀρρώξ , would not alone have told; viz. why no foot-prints were traceable.

ἐπημαξευμένη , lit. ‘traversed (i.e. furrowed) by a carriage’ with its (four) wheels, =τροχοῖς ἁμάξης κεχαραγμένη: ἐπ‐ , not ἐφ‐ , since as Eusth. says (on Il. 18.485) τὸ...ἅμαξα οἱ μὲν παλαιοὶ ψιλοῦσι, οἱ μέντοι νεώτεροι Ἀττικοὶ ἐδάσυναν. (Cp. n. on ἀπήνη, O. T. 753.)

ἀλλ’ ὁ ἐργάτης ἄσημός τις ἦν : for τις added to the predicate, where the subject has the art., cp. O. T. 618, Aesch. Theb. 491 ὁ σηματουργὸς δ’ οὔ τις εὐτελὴς ἄπ’ ἦν : Aristoph. Pl. 726 ὡς φιλόπολίς τίς ἐσθ’ ὁ δαίμων καὶ σοφός . Not: ὁ ἐργάτης τις (the doer, whoever he is) ἄσημος ἦν, like ὁ κύριός τις ( O. C. 288 n.).

It is still the early morning of the day on which the drama opens. The Argives having fled in the night, Creon had published his edict shortly before dawn. Antigone had done her deed in the short interval between the publication of the edict and the beginning of the watch over the corpse. ὁ πρῶτος ἡμεροσκόπος , the man who took the first watch of this day, was the first who had watched at all. If a sentinel had been near the body, Ant. must have been seen. The other men were somewhere near. (Afterwards, they all watched, Ant. 413. ) ἡμεροσκ. , in prose ἡμεροφύλαξ (Xen. Hellen. 7.2.6), as opp. to νυκτοφύλαξ (id. An. 7. 2. 18).

δείκνυσι … παρῆν : historic pres. combined with past tense; cp. Lys. or. 1 § 6 ἐπειδὴ δέ μοι παιδίον γίγνεται, ἐπίστευον ἤδη καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐκείνῃ παρέδωκα.

δυσχερές , not merely ‘perplexing,’ but ‘distressing’ ( Ai. 1395), since they foreboded punishment. So δυσχέρεια, molestia ( Ph. 473).

ὁ μὲν answered by σημεῖα δ’ (257).

τυμβήρης μὲν οὔ (cp. on 96), not entombed: i.e. there was no τύμβος, indicating that the ashes had been buried beneath it (1203): the body itself lay there, though covered over with dust. τυμβ. , prop., ‘provided with a mound,’ but below, 946, merely=‘tomb-like’; and so in Ar. Th. 889Euripides says τυμβήρεις ἕδρας, ‘seat on a tomb.’— λεπτὴ δ’ … ἐπῆν , instead of λέπτῃ δὲ κόνει κεκαλυμμένος (as in Soph. Ph. 545 δοξάζων μὲν οὔ, | τύχῃ δὲ...ὁρμισθείς): for this introduction of a new finite verb, where a participial clause was expected, cp. 813 ff.

ἄγος φεύγοντος ὥς sc. τινος ( O. T. 629 οὔτοι κακῶς γ’ ἄρχοντος , n.): the gen. is not absol., but possessive, denoting the author: ‘as of (i.e. from) one avoiding.’ ἄγος , the guilt incurred by one who passed by an unburied corpse without throwing earth on it: οἱ γὰρ νεκρὸν ὁρῶντες ἄταφον, καὶ μὴ ἐπαμησάμενοι κόνιν, ἐναγεῖς εἶναι ἐδόκουν. Aelian Var. Hist. 5. 14 νόμος καὶ οὗτος Ἀττικός, ὃς ἂν ἀτάφῳ περιτύχῃ σώματι ἀνθρώπου πάντως ἐπιβάλλειν αὐτῷ γῆν· θάπτειν δὲ πρὸς δυσμὰς βλέποντας. So, too, Aelian says of the hawk, Hist. Anim. 2. 49, νεκρὸν δὲ ἄνθρωπον ἰδὼν ἱέραξ, ὡς λόγος, πάντως ἐπιβάλλει γῆν τῷ ἀτάφῳ· καὶ τοῦτο μὲν αὐτῷ οὐ κελεύει Σόλων, ὡς Ἀθηναίους ἐπαίδευσε δρᾶν (though our schol. ascribes the precept to a prehistoric Βουζύγης): and of the elephant, H. A. 5. 49 τὸν ἐλέφαντα θεασάμενος ἐλέφας νεκρὸν οὐκ ἂν παρέλθοι, μὴ τῇ προβοσκίδι γῆν ἀρυσάμενος καὶ ἐπιβαλών, ὁσίαν τινὰ ἀπόρρητον ὑπὲρ τῆς κοινῆς φύσεως τελῶν (‘fulfilling some mysterious law of piety imposed by Nature’), καὶ φεύγων ἄγος· εἶναι γὰρ τὸ μὴ δρᾶσαι τοῦτο ἐναγές. It was remembered as a disgrace to Lysander that, having put to death some prisoners of war, οὐδὲ ἀποθανοῦσιν ἐπήνεγκε γῆν (Paus. 9.32.6). Cp. id. 1. 32. 5 πάντως ὅσιον ἀνθρώπου νεκρὸν γῇ κρύψαι. Hor. Carm. 1. 28. 33 precibus non linquar inultis, Teque piacula nulla resolvent...licebit Iniecto ter pulvere curras.

θηρός , here a wild beast, as dist. from domesticated animals (cp. 1081): more often the term excludes only birds and fishes.

του with θηρός also: Eur. Hec. 370 οὔτ’ ἐλπίδος γὰρ οὔτε του δόξης ὁρῶ | θάρσος παρ’ ἡμῖν.

οὐ σπάσαντος . The negatives in 257 affect ἐλθόντος: and οὐ stands with σπάσαντος as if we had simply οὐκ ἐλθόντος, οὐ σπάσαντος, σημεῖα ἦν. οὐ is not here an irregular substitute for οὔτε, as in 250: this would be so only if we had οὔτ’ ἐλθόντος. Either οὐδὲ σπ. or οὔτε σπ. would be correct, but the latter would suppose an οὔτε understood before ἐλθόντος. For σπάσαντος of rending, cp. 1003. It could not mean, ‘having cast up earth’ over the body (as Triclinius took it). The point is that the body must have been covered before the beasts had had time to come. The poet has preferred this order to σπάσαντος οὐδ’ ἐλθόντος (i.e. ‘or even having come’), because, εἰ ἦλθον, καὶ ἔσπασαν ἄν.

λόγοι δ’ … φύλακα . The regular form would be, λόγοις κακοῖς ἐρροθοῦμεν ἐν ἀλλήλοις, ἐλέγχοντες φύλαξ φύλακα (or ἄλλος ἄλλον), φύλαξ being the part in apposition with the whole ( ἡμεῖς). The irregularity of the form in the text is threefold. (1) For λόγοις κακοῖς ἐρροθοῦμεν we have an equiv. in sense, though not in grammar, λόγοι κακοὶ ἐρρόθουν . (2) In spite of this, ἐν ἀλλήλοισιν is retained, whereas ἐν ἡμῖν is now needed. (3) As a plur. part. would have been awkward after λόγοι, we have φύλαξ ἐλέγχων φύλακα, which thus is virtually equiv. to a gen. absol., φύλακος ἐλέγχοντος φύλακα. Remark that, even in regular examples of partitive apposition, a participle, describing what all do, is sometimes thus made singular; Xen. Anab. 7.3.47 οί ἱππεῖς οἴχονταί μοι ἄλλος ἄλλῃ διώκων (instead of διώκοντες). It is only the first of these three points that this passage has in common with others to which it has been compared. ‘They disputed, some saying this, some that,’ often appears in Greek as ‘there was a dispute,’ etc., without causing οἱ μὲν...οἱ δέ to be changed into the gen. absol. Her. 8.74 πολλὰ ἐλέγετο,...οἱ μὲν ὡς...χρέον εἴη ἀποπλέειν, Ἀθηναῖοι δέ etc. Thuc. 4.23 ὑπ’ ἀμφοτέρων...ἐπολεμεῖτο, Ἀθηναῖοι μὲν περιπλέοντες..., Πελοποννήσιοι δέ etc. Aesch. PV 200 στάσις τ’ ἐν ἀλλήλοισιν ὠροθύνετο, | οἱ μὲν θέλοντες...οἱ δέ etc. (This illustrates the use of ἐν ἀλλήλ. here, but is less bold, since the noun is sing.) Eur. Phoen. 1462 ἦν δ’ ἔρις στρατηλάταις, | οἱ μὲν πατάξαι...οἱ δέ etc. Bacch. 1131 ἦν δὲ πᾶσ’ ὁμοῦ βοή, | ὁ μὲν στενάζων... αἱ δέ etc. For ἐρρόθουν , of a confused noise of angry tongues, cp. 290. ῥόθος (onomatop.) is said of a rushing noise of waves, or of oars dashed into them, etc.: then, fig., Aesch. Pers. 406 Περσίδος

γλώσσης ῥόθος, of an unintelligible jargon.

ἐλέγχων , questioning (434, O. T. 333, 783: El. 1353), here, in the sense of ‘accusing.’

κἂν ἐγίγνετο : and blows would have come at last,—had not the matter been settled by the proposal mentioned at 268. (Not, ‘blows would come,’ i.e. were often exchanged, as Nauck takes it.)

τελευτῶς ', ‘at last,’ the adverbial use, found even with another partic., as Thuc. 6.53 τυραννίδα χαλεπὴν τελευτῶσαν γενομένην.

ὁ κωλύσων : cp. O. T. 297.

ἦν … οὑξειργ. , was the doer (in the belief of his comrades).

ἐναργής , manifestus facti: O. T. 535 λῃστής τ’ ἐναργής.

ἀλλ’ (ἕκαστος), evolved from οὐδείς: fr. 327 ἐμοὶ δ’ οὐδεὶς δοκεῖ | εἷναι, πένης ὤν, ἄνοσος, ἀλλ’ ἀεὶ νοσεῖν. Dem. or. 20 § 74 μηδεὶς φθόνῳ τὸ μέλλον ἀκούσῃ, ἀλλ’, ἂν ἀληθὲς ᾖ, σκοπείτω.

ἕφευγε μὴ εἰδέναι , ‘pleaded in defence that he knew nothing of it.’ For this pregnant use of φεύγειν cp. Aesch. Suppl. 390, where the Argive king says to the Danaides, whose cousins threaten to seize them under Egyptian law, δεῖ τοι δὲ φεύγειν κατὰ νόμους τοὺς οἴκοθεν | ὡς οὐκ ἔχουσι κῦρος οὐδὲν ἀμφὶ σοῦ: you must plead, in accordance with Egyptian law, that they have no right over you. So defendere, In Pison. 10. 5 si triumphum non cupiebas, cuius tandem rei te cupiditate arsisse defendes? (‘will you plead?’) Note that this use (like the absol. legal sense, ‘to be a defendant,’ from which it comes) was necessarily restricted to pres. and impf. Hence we must not cite, with Donaldson, Dem. or. 27 § 1 οὗτος τοὺς υὲν σαφῶς εἰδότας τὰ ἡμέτερα ἔφυγε μηδὲν διαγνῶναι περὶ αὐτῶν, εἰς δ’ ὑμᾶς τοὺς οὐδὲν τῶν ἡμετέρων ἀκριβῶς ἐπισταμένους ἐλήλυθεν (which means: ‘he has avoided any decision on the case being given by those who knew our affairs thoroughly, but has come to you,’ etc.): nor, with Paley, Xen. Hellen. 1.3.19 ὑπαγόμενος θανάτου...ἀπέφυγεν, ὅτι οὐ προδοίη τὴν πόλιν ἀλλὰ σώσαι , i.e. ‘being put on trial for his life, he was acquitted, (on the plea) that he had not betrayed the city,’ etc.

μὴ (not οὐκ ) εἰδέναι , as after verbs of denying, Aristoph. Eq. 572 ἠρνοῦντο μὴ πεπτωκέναι .—Only one other version is tenable, viz., ‘shrunk from knowing it’; but this could hardly be said in the sense, ‘shrunk from confessing that he knew it.’—Others understand τοὺς ἄλλους as subject to εἰδέναι, ‘shrunk from (the others) knowing it’ (‘entzog sich dem Wissen der anderen’), which is impossible. So also is Campb.'s version, ‘always escaped, so that we could not know him,’ which would, in the first place, require ἔφυγε.

μύδρους , lumps of red-hot iron. μύδρος=a molten mass, from rt μυδ, whence μύδος, ‘moisture,’ μυδάω, etc. Cyril Adv. Iulian. 359 quotes this verse, after referring to a Chaldean custom of making an oath more solemn by causing those who took it to pass between the severed portions of a victim (διὰ μέσων... διχοτομημάτων). It is probably the oldest trace in Greek of ordeals analogous to the medieval ‘judgments of God.’ The word μύδρος occurs elsewhere in connection with a solemn sanction for an oath. In Her. 1.165 the Phocaeans μύδρον σιδήρεον κατεπόντωσαν, swearing not to return till it should float. Aristid. 25 ὁ δ’ Ἀριστείδης ὥρκισε μὲν τοὺς Ἕλληνας καὶ ὤμοσεν ὑπὲρ τῶν Ἀθηναίων (to observe the defensive league against Persia, 479 B.C., Grote 5. 257), μύδρους ἐμβαλὼν ἐπὶ ταῖς ἀραῖς (in sanction of the curses on traitors) εἰς τὴν θάλατταν. I conceive that in these passages, as elsewhere, μύδρος has its proper sense,

a red-hot mass of metal, and that the custom was symbolical of an older use of the μύδρος in ordeals by fire. This would explain how the Alexandrian poets of the 3rd cent. B.C. (Lycophron, Callimachus) came to use the word μύδρος, in defiance of its etymology, as simply ‘a lump’ (or even ‘a stone’). They supposed that the μύδροι had been cold masses.

πῦρ διέρπειν must here refer to a definite ordeal, by walking through a fire. The idea, at least, of such an ordeal appears in the familiar Attic phrase διὰ πυρὸς ἰέναι (‘to go through fire and water’); Plat. Symp. 4. 16 ἔγωγ’ οὖν μετὰ Κλεινίου κἂν διὰ πυρὸς ἰοίην, Aristoph. Lys. 133 διὰ τοῦ πυρὸς | ἐθέλω βαδίζειν . But it is doubtful whether the actual use of any such ordeal in the historical age can be inferred from Dem. or. 54 § 40 ἀξιοπιστότερος τοῦ κατὰ τῶν παίδων (by the lives of one's children, cp. or. 29 § 26) ὀμνύοντος καὶ διὰ τοῦ πυρός, i. e. swearing that one is ready to undergo the test by fire. It has been suggested that ἰόντος has fallen out after πυρός, which seems improbable. But the phrase may be rhetorical. Cp. Verg. Aen. 11. 787 (the Hirpi): medium freti pietate per ignem Cultores multa premimus vestigia pruna. —Becker Char. 183 notices some other ordeals. There was a temple in Achaia, the priestess of which, before election, was proved by drinking ball's blood; if impure, she died (Paus. 7.25.13). Perjury, and some other crimes, were assayed by the accused mounting the steps of an altar for burnt sacrifice (ἐσχάρα): if he was guilty, flames appeared ( Aeth. 10. 8). Incontinence was tried by the test of entering a grotto of Pan at Ephesus (Achilles Tatius 8. 6).

θεοὺς ὁρκ. , to swear by the gods; the acc. is cognate (the god being identified with the oath), like ὅρκον ὀμνύναι: Xen. Cyr. 5.4.31 ταῦτα...ὄμνυμί σοι θεούς.

τὸ μήτε δρ .: for the art., cp. 236.

μήτ’ είργασμένῳ : the conjecture μηδ ' is needless, since μήτε can be understood before βουλεύσαντι: see O. T. 239 n.

πλέον : cp. 40 .

λέγει , between two past tenses: cp. 254.

τις εἷς . It is at first sight tempting to write τις, εἷς ὃς πάντας. But such emphasis on the idea of ‘one against all’ seems hardly appropriate here. And τις εἷς sometimes = εἷς τις: Thuc. 6.61 καί τινα μίαν νύκτα καὶ κατέδαρθον : Plat. Soph. 235B (οὐκέτ’ ἐκφεύξεται) τὸ μὴ οὐ τοῦ γένους εἶναι τοῦ τῶν θαυματοποιῶν τις εἷς: Parm. 145D ἔν τινι γὰρ ἑνὶ μὴ ὂν οὐκ ἂν ἔτι που δύναιτο ἔν γε ἅπασιν εἶναι.

προὔτρεψεν , impelled, here =ἠνάγκασε: cp. O. T. 358 n.

οὐ γὰρ εἴχομεν κ.τ.λ.: ‘for we did not know how to gainsay him, nor how, if we did the thing (advised by him), we could prosper.’

As ἀντιφωνεῖν means opposing his suggestion, so δρῶντες means acting on it. Others join ὅπως δρῶντες , ‘by what course of action.’ Since, however, a definite proposal was before them—viz., reference to Creon—we must then understand, ‘by what other course’ (than the proposed one). But the sense is, ‘We could not refute him, and, on the other hand, we dreaded your anger if we followed his advice.’ εἴχομεν has the same sense in both clauses. ἔχω, as=‘to know how,’ takes (1) an infin., or (2) a relat. clause with subjunct., as 42, Tr. 705 οὐκ ἔχω...ποῖ γνώμης πέσω . This is merely an indirect form of the deliberative subjunct., ποῖ γνώμης πέσω; So here, πράξαιμεν would be πράξωμεν if the principal verb were in a primary tense. The direct question would be, πῶς καλῶς πράξωμεν; Carefully distinguish ὅπως (or πῶς) ἄν with optat. after this οὐκ ἔχω, as Tr. 991 οὐ γὰρ ἔχω πῶς ἂν | στέρξαιμι , I know not how I could. The two constructions are combined again in Ai. 428 οὔτοι σ’ ἀπείργειν οὐδ’ ὅπως ἐῶ λέγειν | ἔχω .

σοί (cp. 234), rare for εἰς σέ. After ἀναφέρω τι the pers. is usu. expressed by εἴς τιvα (less oft. by ἐπί or παρά τιvα). But Lysias has the dat. in or. 12. 84 οἷς τὰς ἀπολογίας ἀνοίσει , ‘to whom he will carry back his defensive pleas’ (i.e. ‘on whom he will lay the blame,’ and so, again, in or. 7 § 17): yet ib. § 64 τὰς... ἀπολογίας εἰς ἐκεῖνον ἀναφερομένας . In Mod. Greek ἀναφορά is used of an official ‘report.’

ταῦτ’ ἐνίκα : see on 233: the impf. differs from the aor. only as ἐδόκει (‘seemed good’) from ἔδοξε (‘was resolved’).

πάλος , perh. taken by shaking lots in a helmet (cp. 396, Ai. 1285): καθαιρεῖ , reduces, i.e. ‘condemns’: Lys. or. 13 § 37 τὴν...ψῆφον...τὴν...καθαιροῦσαν , the vote of condemnation.

τἀγαθόν , iron., whereas his second errand is a true ἕρμαιον (397). —ἄκων οὐχ ἑκοῦσιν : cp. Tr. 198 (the herald detained against his will by a throng of questioners) οὐχ έκὼν ἑκοῦσι δὲ | ξύνεστιν.—οἶδ’ ὅτι, adverbial (‘doubtless’), like δῆλον ὅτι, cp. 758: so used even in the middle of a clause, as Dem. or. 9 § 1 πάντων, οἶδ’ ὅτι, φησάντων γ’ ἄν (‘when all, I know, would certainly admit,’ etc.).

ἐμοί , ethic dat., ‘for me,’ rather than dat. with βουλεύει as=‘advises’; the latter dat. is rare ( Aesch. Eum. 697 ἀστοῖς...βουλεύω σέβειν ); in Tr. 807, Ai. 1055 the dat. with βουλεύω is a dat. of interest (to plot against one). In poetry the act. can mean, not only ‘to form a plan’ ( O. T. 619), or to give counsel ( ib. 1417), but also, like the midd., to deliberate.—With μή supply ἐστί ; cp. 1253; Plat. Theaet. 145C ὅρα μὴ παίζων ἔλεγεν, look whether he did not speak (i.e. I suspect that he spoke) in jest. To supply ᾖ is also possible (cp. O. C. 1180), but less fitting here.

τι , adv., ‘perchance’: O. T. 969.

θεήλατον, sent by gods ( O. T. 992 θεήλατον μάντευμα ), i.e. wrought by them (cp. 285), since there was no trace of human agency (249): not, imposed upon a human agent by a divine commission (as O. T. 255 πρᾶγμα θεήλατον ). So in Il. 16.667 Zeus provides supernaturally for the burial of Sarpedon. Cp. O. C. p. xxxv.

ἡ ξύννοια , the art. being equiv. to a possessive pron., as 1089 f. τὴν γλῶσσαν, τὸν νοῦν. Cp. Plat. Rep. 571E εἰς σύννοιαν αὐτὸς αὑτῷ ἀφικόμενος.

πάλαι , i.e. ever since the φύλαξ spoke (249). Cp. 289.

πρὶν ὀργῆς καί με μεστῶσαι , ‘before thou hast actually filled me with anger’: καί has nothing to do with πρίν , but belongs solely to μεστῶσαι , a strong word, the stress on which makes it easier for the force of καί to pass over the enclitic με . Cp. O. T. 772 τῷ γὰρ ἂν καὶ μείζονι | λέξαιμ’ ἄν : ib. 989 ποίας δὲ καὶ γυναικὸς ἐκφοβεῖσθ’ ὕπερ ; where in each case καί goes with the verb. We must distinguish the ordinary combination πρὶν καί, ‘before even,’ which would be in place here only if Creon meant, ‘Cease, before you have so much as angered me’: cp. Tr. 396 ᾄσσεις, πρὶν ἡμᾶς κἀννεώσασθαι λόγους (before we have even renewed our talk): Aristoph. Av. 1033 πέμπουσιν ἤδη ’πισκόπους | ἐς τὴν πόλιν, πρὶν καὶ τεθύσθαι τοῖς θεοῖς : Plat. Gorg. 458B πάλαι..., πρὶν καὶ ὑμᾶς ἐλθεῖν,... επεδειξάμηv.

κἀμέ would be unmeaning: no one else is angry.

μεστῶσαι : Plat. Rep. 330E ὑποψίας...καὶ δείματος μεστός , and so often.

πότερον κ.τ.λ. Did they think him good? Or, thinking him bad, did they yet honour him?— ἔκρυπτον (sc. γῇ) = ἔθαπτον: the word is specially suitable here to the covering with dust (256). Cp. O. C. 621 κεκρυμμένος νέκυς : El. 838 κρυφθέντα (of Amphiaraus swallowed up by the earth). Bellermann cites an inscr. from Smyrna (Rhein. Mus. 1872, 27 p. 465) παίδων σε φίλαι χέρες, ὡς θέμις ἐστί, | κρύψαν. The impf. (‘were for burying’) refers to the motive present to the agent's mind when the act was undertaken: cp. 19 ἐξέπεμπον n.

ἀμφικίονας ναούς , temples surrounded by columns, an epith. marking their stateliness and splendour, as Eur. Andr. 1099 ἐν περιστύλοις δόμοις (of a temple), I. T. 406 περικίονας ναούς. The ναὸς περίστυλος or περίπτερος (so called because the ceiling of the colonnade projected like a wing, from the cella) had a colonnade on each of its four sides: the ναὸς ἀμφιπρόστυλος, only on two (front and back): but, though the latter would satisfy the word ἀμφικίονας, the poet doubtless meant the former.

κἀναθήματα , votive offerings, such as gold and silver vessels of all kinds; statues; bronze tripods, etc. (Cp.

Her. 1.50; Thuc. 6.46; Isae. or. 7 § 41.) The wealth of Delphi in ἀναθήματα is already proverbial in Il. 9.404; at Thebes the Ἰσμήνιον ( O. T. 21) also seems to have been rich in them. After ἀνάθημα the gen. denotes either ὁ ἀναθείς (as more oft.), or, as here, the divine owner.

γῆν ἐκείνων (depending on πυρώσων ), i.e. the territory of Thebes (cp. on 199), since the land belongs to the θεοὶ ἐγχώριοι and πολιοῦχοι: not merely the τεμένη attached to their shrines.

νόμους διασκεδῶν , to scatter the laws abroad, i.e. to shatter the fabric of civil order: cp. Tennyson, Red ruin, and the breaking up of laws. Cic. Agr. 2. 37 disturbare... legem. So διασκεδ. of breaking up a treaty ( O. C. 620), or a king's power ( ib. 1341).

διασκεδῶν would suit ἀναθήματα, but could not possibly be joined with γῆν (as if the latter meant ‘State’): hence it must be taken with νόμους only.

τοὺς κακοὺς τιμῶντας … θεούς; owing to the natural emphasis on τοὺς κακούς, the ambiguity is only grammatical. Cp. Her. 7.150 ἐπεὶ δέ σφεας παραλαμβάνειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας , oblique for ἐπεὶ δέ σφεας παρελάμβανον οἱ Ἕλληνες.

ταῦτα , the edict, depending on μόλις φέροντες (aegre ferentes): καὶ πάλαι , even from the moment when it was proclaimed; cp. 279, where πάλαι only refers back to 249.

πόλεως ἄνδρες , like γῆς τῆσδέ τις ( O. T. 236 n.).

ἐρρόθουν , muttered: 259n.

ἐμοί , against me, dat. of object, as after χαλεπαίνω, μέμφομαι, etc.

κάρα σείοντες , ‘tossing the head,’ in defiant menace (so caput quassans, Verg. Aen. 12. 894 ), instead o going quietly under the yoke. Mor 170 E τοὺς τυράννους ἀσπάζονται,...ἀλλὰ μισοῦσι σιγῇ κάρα σείοντες (alluding to this v.). So, acc. to Suidas, s.v., Soph. used ἀναχαιτίζειν (prop. said of a horse throwing the mane back, rearing) as=ἀπειθεῖν καὶ ἀντιτείνειν, ‘to be restive.’

ὑπὸ ζυγῷ . Cp. Aesch. Ag. 1639 ζεύξω βαρείαις (ζεύγλαις).

λόφον , the back of the neck, a word used of draughtanimals (of the human nape, perh. only once, Il. 10.573): hence, fig., Eur. fr. 175 ὅστις δὲ πρὸς τὸ πῖπτον εὐλόφως φέρει | τὸν δαίμον’, οὗτος ἧσσόν ἐστ’ ἀνόλβιος. id. Eur. Tro. 302 κάρτα τοι τοὐλεύθερον | ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις δυσλόφως φέρει κακά, ‘impatiently.’ ( Shaksp. Henry VI. Pt. III. 3. 1. 16 yield not thy neck To fortune's yoke. )—Nauck writes the verse thus, νῶτον δικαίως εἶχον εὐλόφως φέρειν, because Eustathius, in alluding to it, once represents it by νῶτον εὐλόφως εἶχον (on Od. 5.285), and twice by νῶτον εὐλόφως φέρειν (on Il. 10.573, Od. 10.169). But Eustath. was quoting, or rather paraphrasing, from memory, and confused our verse with Eur. fr. 175 (quoted above); also, perhaps, with Lycophron 776 εὐλόφῳ νώτῳ φέρειν. His references to Sophocles are often loose and inexact. See Appendix.

δικαίως , loyally. Donaldson had a too ingenious view that the word here meant, ‘with

equal poise’ (New Crat. 371).—ὡς = ὥστε ( O. T. 84): στέργειν , tolerare: Tr. 486(Lichas advising Deianeira with regard to Iolè) στέργε τὴν γυναῖκα, be patient of her.

τῶνδε , masc., the malcontents (for ἐκ , cp. 63 ).

τούτους, the watchers of the corpse: the pronouns joined as in 39 (n.).

εἰργάσθαι is best taken with ἐξεπίσταμαι : cp. 1092 ἐπιστάμεσθα...αὐτὸν...λακεῖν. The inf., instead of the partic., with ἐπίσταμαι, seems unknown in Attic prose, except, of course, where the sense is ‘to know how.’ Cp. 472. The inf. might, indeed, depend on παρηγμένους , as ἐπάγω (to induce) oft. takes an inf.: but (a) as a matter of fact, an infin. seems not to occur after παράγω in this sense: and (b) it may be noticed that Attic idiom often prefers the form, ‘induced by them, he did it,’ to, ‘he was induced by them to do it’: e.g. Xen. Mem. 4.8.5 πολλοὺς...λόγῳ παραχθέντες ἀπέκτειναν : Dem. or. 5 § 10 οἷς ἐπαχθέντες ὑμεῖς...προεῖσθε Φωκέας . For this participial expression of the leading idea, see n. on O. C. 1038.

νόμισμ’ , institutum. This primary and general sense of the word was almost confined to poetry ( Aesch. Th. 269 Ἑλληνικὸν νόμισμα θυστάδος βοῆς), the special sense, ‘current coin,’ being the ordinary one. For the other sense, the usual word was νόμιμον (or νόμος). Hence in Aristoph. Nub. 247, when Socrates says, θεοὶ | ἡμῖν νόμισμ’ οὐκ ἔστι, Strepsiades rejoins, τῷ γὰρ ὄμνυτ’; ἢ | σιδαρέοισιν, ὥσπερ ἐν Βυζαντίῳ (i.e. if gods are not current with you, do you swear by iron coin?): where the schol. remarks that νόμισμα meant ποτὲ μὲν τὸ νόμιμον ἔθος, ποτὲ δὲ τὸ κόμμα τοῦ τετυπωμένου χαλκοῦ.

ἔβλαστε : cp. O. C. 611 βλαστάνει δ’ ἀπιστία.

πορθεῖ , ‘sacks’ (not merely, in a general sense, ‘ruins’): money invites attack, and often purchases betrayal: cp. Hor. Carm. 3. 16. 13 diffidit urbium Portas uir Macedo et subruit aemulos Reges muneribus.

τόδ’ (after τοῦτο : cp. 39) ἄνδρας , individual citizens, as distinguished from πόλεις. ἐξανίστ . δόμων , drives them from their cities by corrupt intrigue,—for which the στάσεις of democrat and oligarch in Greek cities gave many openings. The phrase is strikingly illustrated by the verses in which Timocreon of Rhodes, when an exile, assailed Themistocles ( Plut. Them. 21), as τοὺς μὲν κατάγων ἀδίκως, τοὺς δ’ ἐκδιώκων, τοὺς δὲ καίνων, | ἀργυρίων ὑπόπλεως.

τόδ’ ἐκδ. καὶ παραλλάσσει , this trains and perverts good minds of men, ἵστασθαι πρὸς αἰσχρ. πράγμ., to address themselves to base deeds. παραλλάσσει=‘alters sideways’; i.e. causes to turn out of a straight course into an oblique course; hence, like παράγει, παραστρέφει, perverts. Cp. Arist. Pol. 8. 7§ 7 αἱ ψυχαὶ παρεστραμμέναι τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἕξεως (their minds being warped from their natural condition). Since παραλλάσσει implies a bad training, it can be followed, like ἐθίζει and like words, by an infin.: it is unnecessary, then, to make ἵστασθαι , in its relation to παραλλάσσει, merely epexegetic (‘so that they set themselves’); though it might, of course, be so. Wecklein takes καὶ παραλλάσσει as parenthetic = παραλλάσσουσα: but this, too, is needless, nor is it supported by 537 (where see n.).

ἵστασθαι πρός τι means here, ‘to set oneself facing it,’ so ‘to turn to it, address oneself to it,’ just like τρέπεσθαι πρός τι: cp. Plat. Rep. 452E πρὸς ἄλλον τινὰ σκοπὸν στησάμενος ἢ τὸν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ , ‘having set himself to some other aim,’ etc. Distinguish some other phrases with ἵστασθαι and πρός which are not really similar: Thuc. 3.11 πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ στῆναι (a power to which they could rally): 4. 56 πρὸς τὴν ἐκείνων γνώμην ἀεὶ ἕστασαν (they had always sided with the Athenian policy): 6. 34 πρὸς τὰ λεγόμενα καὶ αἱ γνῶμαι ἵστανται (men's minds adapt their attitudes to what is said).

πανουργίας … ἔχειν : showed men how to practise villanies. For ἔχειν of the moral habit, cp. Od. 1.368 μνηστῆρες ὑπέρβιον ὕβριν ἔχοντες : Il. 9.305 λύσσαν ἔχων ὀλοήν . The inf. might be epexegetic, but really depends on ἔδειξεν as implying ‘taught’: cp. Eur. Med. 195 οὐδεὶς λύπας | ηὕρετο... | ᾠδαῖς παύειν (has found out how to...). δείκνυμι of invention, as Ai. 1195 δς στυγερῶν ἔδειξεν ὅπλων | Ἕλλασι κοινὸν Ἄρη : fr. 396. 6 στρατοῦ φρυκτωρίαν | ἔδειξε, κἀνέφηνεν οὐ δεδειγμένα (Palamedes).

εἰδέναι , ‘to know,’ i.e. to be conversant with (cp. on 71) παντὸς ἔργου δυσσέβ. , impiety of (shown in) any deed,=πᾶν δυσσεβὲς ἔργον (cp. 603 λόγου τ’ ἄνοια): for πᾶς, cp. O. C. 761 n. Note παντὸς ἔργ . after πανουργίας : the familiar use of πανουργία extenuates the force to which etymology entitles it, while in πᾶν ἔργον that whole force is felt: so πᾶν ποιεῖν is stronger than πανουργεῖν, and πᾶν λέγειν than παρρησιάζεσθαι ( Plat. Apol. 39A ἐάν τις τολμᾷ πᾶν ποιεῖν καὶ λέγειν). Cp. Soph. Ph. 407 παντὸς ἂν λόγου κακοῦ | γλώσσῃ θιγόντα καὶ πανουργίας, where πάσης must be supplied, showing how πανουργία could be used without direct reference to its derivation.

ἤνυσαν : cp. 231.

χρόνῳ ποτέ , at some time or other: i.e. they will be caught sooner or later. With δοῦναι δίκην : Ph. 1041 τίσασθε, τίσασθ’ ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ ποτέ.

ἐξέπραξαν ὡς (= ὥστε, 292), as Aesch. Pers. 723 καὶ τόδ’ ἐξέπραξεν, ὥστε Βόσπορον κλῇσαι μέγαν ; The verb is here ironical; cp. Plat. Gorg. 479A τὸ αὐτὸ διαπεπραγμένοι εἰσὶν ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις τοῖς μεγίστοις νοσήμασι συνισχόμενος διαπράξαιτο μὴ διδόναι δίκην .. τοῖς ἰατροῖς, μηδε= ἰατρεύεσθαι .

Ζεύς , in his quality of Βασιλεύς (Xen. Anab. 3.1.12), is fitly invoked by a king who vows that he will uphold the royal authority. Cp. 487.

ὅρκιος , adverbial: O. C. 1637 κατῄνεσεν τάδ’ ὅρκιος (n.). Cp. 823 ( λυγροτάταν).

τὸν αὐτόχειρα , the very man (248) whose hand strewed the dust, said with an emphasis corresponding to that with which the Guard had insisted on the absence of any clue (249). For αὐτο-, cp. 56, 172. τάφου = ταφῆς , as 490, 534, O. T. 1447: in a symbolical sense like that of θάψας (246).

μοῦνος : cp. O. T. 304 n.— ‘Death alone shall not suffice for you,’ already implies a threat of torture. To make this threat explicit, πρὶν ἂν . . δηλώσητε is added, as if merely οὐ θανεῖσθε had preceded. ‘(You shall not die,) until you have first been hung up alive, and have revealed (the authorship of) this outrage.’ They are to be suspended by the hands or arms, and flogged. Cp. Ai. 106 θανεῖν γὰρ αὐτὸν οὔ τί πω θέλω . . πρὶν ἂν δεθεὶς πρὸς κίον’ ἑρκείου στέγης . . μάστιγι πρῶτον νῶτα φοινιχθεὶς θάνῃ . Phorm. 1. 4. 43 ego plectar pendens. In Plat. Legg. 872B a slave who has slain a free man is to be flogged, and then (if he does not die under the lash, ἐάνπερ βιῷ παιόμενος) put to death by other means. Other views of κρεμαστοί refer it to (1) mere suspension, as a torture, like that of Melanthius in Od. 22.175: (2) stretching on a cross-like frame; cp. Alexis ap. Athen. 134 A ἥδιστ’ ἀναπήξαιμ’ αὐτὸν ἐπὶ ξύλου λαβών. Impalement (ἀνασταυρόω, ἀνασκολοπίζω) is certainly not meant.— ζῶντες κρεμαστοί , ‘suspended alive,’ as ζῶν is oft. joined with another partic.: Xen. Anab. 2.6.29 οὐχ ὥσπερ οἱ ἄλλοι . . ἀποτμηθέντες τὰς κεφαλάς, ὅσπερ τάχιστος θάνατος δοκεῖ εἶναι, ἀλλὰ ζῶν αἰκισθεὶς ἐνιαυτόν.

δηλώσηθ’ : as to the belief that torture was sure to wring the truth from slaves, cp. Isae. or. 8. 12 ὁπόταν δοῦλοι καὶ ἐλεύθεροι παραγένωνται, . . οὐ χρῆσθε ταῖς τῶν ἐλευθέρων μαρτυρίαις, ἀλλὰ τοὺς δούλους βασανίζοντες οὕτω ζητεῖτε εὑρεῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τῶν γενομένων. (Cp. Selections from the Attic Orators, p. 358 n.)

ὕβριν , in concrete sense ( O. C. 1029).

ἵν’ … ἁρπάζητε , with grim irony, since they are to die before they can apply the lesson. So O. C. 1377 (Oed. calls down destruction upon his sons) ἵν’ ἀξιῶτον τοὺς φυτεύσαντας σέβειν, where see n. Cp. below, 716.

τὸ κέρδος , accus. (cp. 1242): ἔνθεν οἰστέον ( ἐστί).

μάθηθ’ , aor., learn once for all: but ἁρπάζητε, pres., go on stealing.

ἐξ ἅπαντος , from every source, with τὸ κερδαίνειν : Xen. Mem. 2.9.4 οὐ γὰρ ἦν οἷος ἀπὸ παντὸς κερδαίνειν : Ar. Th. 735 ὦ ποτίσταται | κἀκ παντὸς ὑμεῖς μηχανώμεναι

πιεῖν. In O. C. 807 ἑξ ἅπαντος εὖ λέγει =speaks well on any theme (starting from anything).

τι suits a timid appeal: cp. O. C. 1414 ἱκετεύω σε πεισθῆναί τί μοι.

δέ (Boeckh), though favoured by L, could not be justified as an expostulatory ‘now.’ δώσεις : O. C. 1287 διδοὺς ἐμοὶ | λέξαι.

οὕτως , ‘without more ado,’ ὥσπερ ἔχω: Ph. 1066 οὐδὲ σοῦ φωνῆς ἔτι | γενήσομαι προσφθεγκτός, ἀλλ’ οὕτως ἄπει; Phaedr. 237 C νῦν μὲν οὕτως οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν (‘off-hand’).

ἴω , delib. subjunct., somewhat rare in pres. ( O. T. 651).

καὶ νῦν ὡς = ὡς καὶ νῦν: for the hyperbaton of ὡς, cp. Ai. 590, El. 949, 1243, etc.— ἀνιαρῶς , with ι— : but Eur. , like Ar. , has ἀνι^αρός ( Eur. Or. 230 etc.): Aesch. does not use the adj., though he has ἄνι^ος. ἀνία (ι—) is used by Soph. , but not by Aesch. or

ἐν with ὠσίν , through association with such phrases as Aesch. Pers. 605 βοᾷ δ’ ἐν ὠσὶ κέλαδος.

ἐπί with τῇ ψυχῇ denotes the seat, and, equally with ἐν, here=our ‘in’: cp. Il. 1.55 τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεά .

τί δὲ is right, not τί δαὶ (L): see Appendix.

ῥυθμίζεις , bring under ῥυθμός, i.e. reduce to a clear form, define, ὅπου (ἐστί ), with respect to its seat (i.e. whether it is in the ears or in the mind). Cp. Metaphys. 11. 10 ἐὰν μὴ ῥυθμίσῃ τις, unless one reduce (the opinions) to a clear form, or method. So he oft. associates ῥυθμός with σχῆμα, as Phys. Ausc. 8. 3 τὸ σχηματιζόμενον καὶ ῥυθμιζόμενον, what is being reduced to form and system. For the epexegetic ὅπου cp. Ai. 103 ἧ τοὐπίτριπτον κίναδος ἐξήρου μ’ ὅπου ; ib. 890 ἄνδρα μὴ λεύσσειν ὅπου .—Cp. Shaksp. Troil. 4. 5. 244 That I may give the local wound a name, And make distinct the very breach whereout Hector's great spirit flew.

τὰς φρένας...τὰ δ’ ὦτ’ , acc. defining σε : Ph. 1301 μέθες με χεῖρα: cp. on O. C. 113.

οἴμ’ ὡς , impatient, as Aristoph. Ach. 590 οἴμ’ ὡς τεθνήξεις : elsewhere in Soph. it expresses pity or grief (1270, Ai. 354, 587).

λάλημα suits Creon's contemptuous impatience. The schol. (see crit. n.) prob. read ἄλημα (‘a knave,’ lit., ‘fine meal,’ from ἀλέω): cp. Au. 430 παιπάλημ’ ὅλον. But if Creon used that word, he would seem to give the man credit for real subtlety: he would be taking him too seriously. Thus ἄλημα is the word applied by Ajax to his mortal foe, Odysseus ( Ai. 381, 389), who is similarly called πάνσοφον κρότημα in fr. 827: cp. Ph. 927 πανουργίας | δεινῆς τέχνημ’ ἔχθιστον (Neoptolemus). Cp. 756 δούλευμα : O. T. 85 κήδευμα (n.).

δῆλον, like ἐναργές (cp. on 263).

‘At any rate (οὖν—babbler or not) I certainly have not done this deed.’ εἰμί is supplied with ποιήσας. For οὔκουν … γε cp. 993, Ph. 907NE. αἰσχρὸς φανοῦμαι . . ΦΙ. οὔκουν ἐν οἷς γε δρᾷς· ἐν οἶς δ’ αὐδᾷς, ὀκνῶ: and so oft., as O. T. 565, 1357, O. C. 848.

‘Yes, (you have done it,) and that, too, at the cost of betraying,’ etc. The particle γε implies the contradiction, ἐποίησας: καὶ ταῦτα goes with the participle ( προδούς ): cp. O.T. 37, El. 614 τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, | καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος . So Lat., hominem . . studiis optimis deditum, idque a puero ( Cic. Fam. 13. 16).

ἦ δεινόν . Creon has pronounced the Guard guilty on mere δόξα, without proof. The Guard says, ‘It is grievous that, when a man does harbour suspicions (ᾧ δοκεῖ γε ), those suspicions should at the same time ( καὶ ) be false.’ γε means that, in such a matter, hasty δόξα should be avoided altogether. It is always bad to assume a man guilty without proof; it is worse when the rash assumption is also erroneous. Cp. δόκησις ἀγνώς, ‘a blind suspicion’ ( O. T. 681), and ib. 608 γνώμῃ δ’ ἀδήλῳ μή με χωρὶς αἰτιῶ . Eur. Bacch. 311 μηδ’ ἢν δοκῇς μέν , (ἡ δὲ δόξα σου νοσεῖ,) | φρονεῖν δόκει τι.—Nauck supposes a play on two senses of δοκεῖν, ᾧ δοκεῖ (or, as he reads, δοκῇ) having been suggested by ἔδοξε τῷ δήμῳ, etc.: ‘'Tis monstrous that he who decides should have false views.’ But, even if the absolute ᾧ δοκεῖ could be thus used, the colloquial frequency of δοκεῖ (μοι ποιεῖν τι) in Aristophanes suffices to show that ᾧ δοκεῖ could not, to an Athenian ear, have suggested ‘the ruler’ or ‘the judge’: it would have seemed to mean merely one who ‘proposes,’ not ‘disposes.’—Schütz makes δοκεῖν depend on δοκεῖ: ‘'Tis grievous when a man is resolued to believe even what is false’ (if only he wishes to believe it). A bold speech for the Guard to Creon; nor does it satisfy either γε or καί.

κόμψευε . . τὴν δόξαν , make neat sayings about it,—referring to the rhetorical form of the last verse, with its παρήχησις, δοκεῖ...δοκεῖν. Not necessarily, ‘quibble upon it,’—as if δοκεῖν had been used in two different senses,—a view of κόμψευε which has been brought to support the interpretations of v. 323 mentioned above. The verb is usually midd., often with acc., as Eur. I. A. 333 εὖ κεκόμψευσαι πονηρά (‘thou hast given subtle form to wicked pleas’): Plat. Lach. 197D πρέπει...σοφιστῇ τὰ τοιαῦτα μᾶλλον κομψεύεσθαι.

τὴν δόξαν , that δόξα of yours: cp. 96: El. 1110 οὐκ οἶδα τὴν σὴν

κληδόν’ (the κληδών of which you speak), not merely, ‘the word δόξα.’ If the v. l. τὸ δόξαν (see cr. n.) was intended to mean the latter, it should have been τὸ δόξα.

νυν (‘very well,’ like οὖν) is better than νῦν , which would mean ‘for the present’ (as opposed to the near future).— ταῦτα … τοὺς δρῶντας = τοὺς ταῦτα δρῶντας : cp. 384: the pron. gains emphasis by its place.

δειλά , as involving mean treachery towards king and city. Theognis 835 ἀλλ’ ἀνδρῶν τε βίῃ καὶ κέρδεα δειλὰ καὶ ὕβρις | πολλῶν ἐξ ἀγαθῶν ἐς κακότητ’ ἔβαλεν (sc. ἡμᾶς).

δεινά (L) is defended by Seyffert as=‘flagitious,’ by Whitelaw as=‘clever’ (iron.), ‘your wondrous winnings.’ In some forms of minuscule writing λ and ν could easily be confused: cp. O. T. 1130 ξυναλλάξας , where the first λ has been made from ν : and O. C. 1164, where μόνον has been restored from μολόντ’ .

ἀλλ’ prefacing the wish ( O. C. 421): εὑρεθείη sc. ὁ δρῶν (319): μάλιστ’, denoting the best thing that could happen ( O. T. 926 n.).—κἂν for καὶ is needless. We find καὶ ἐάν...καὶ ἐάν: ἐάν τε...ἐάν τε: but, as a rule, ἐάν (or ἐάν τε)...καὶ [not καὶ ἐὰν] μή: e.g. Eur. Hec. 751 κἂν τύχω κἂν μὴ τύχω : Plat. Legg. 660E ἐάν τε μέγας...ἐάν τε σμικρὸς...ἦ, καὶ (‘and’) ἐὰν πλουτῇ καὶ μή. For the conjunctive form in stating alternatives, cp. O. C. 488 n.

καὶ with νῦν, not with γάρ .

γνώμης , of reasonable forecast, cp. O. T. 1087.

332-375

First στάσιμον. 1st strophe (332—342)=1st antistrophe (343—353): 2nd strophe (354—364)=2nd antistr. (365 —375). For the metres see Metrical Analysis.

The Chorus had not thought it possible that any one should brave death to bury the corpse (220). But the deed has been done, and without leaving a trace (252). And Creon has silenced the suggestion that gods did it (278). The train of thought is continued in this ode. Its theme is man's daring,—his inventiveness, and the result to his happiness.

Man is master of sea and land; he subdues all other creatures; he has equipped his life with all resources, except a remedy against death. His skill brings him to prosperity, when he observes divine and human laws, but to ruin when he breaks them.—At that moment Antigone is led in, and the coryphaeus speaks the closing anapaests (376—383).

πολλὰ … κοὐδέν . Schol. ἐν σχήματι εἶπεν, ἀντὶ τοῦ, πολλῶν ὄντων τῶν δεινῶν, οὐδέν ἐστιν ἀνθρώπου δεινότερον. The σχῆμα is the rhetorical parataxis,

καί being equiv. to ‘and yet’: cp. Tr. 1046 ὦ πολλὰ δὴ καὶ θερμὰ κοὐ λόγῳ κακά | … μοχθήσας ἐγώ· | κοὔπω τοιοῦτον οὔτ’ ἄκοιτις ἡ Διὸς | προὔθηκεν κ.τ.λ. It is stronger to say, ‘they are great; and he is greater’: than, ‘though they are great, he is greater.’

τὰ δεινά , not ‘dread,’ nor ‘able,’ but ‘wonderful.’ There is a certain resemblance to Aesch. Ch. 585 ff. πολλὰ μὲν γᾶ τρέφει | δεινὰ δειμάτων ἄχη...ἀλλ’ ὑπέρτολμον ἀνδρὸς φρόνημα τίς λέγοι; but there δεινά=‘dread,’ and the scope is limited to the violence of human passion.

τοῦτο , sc. τὸ δεινόν, this wondrous power, man. The schol. quotes Theocr. 15. 83 σοφόν τοι χρῆμ’ ἄνθρωπος . Not adverbial with χωρεῖ, ‘so’ (in a way corresponding with his δεινότης), as Bellermann takes it, comparing O. T. 1005 (τοῦτ’ ἀφικόμην), where see n.— πέραν , properly, ‘to the further side of’ (trans). The point here is that man dares to cross the sea. πέρα (ultra), which Blaydes prefers, would imply wanderings (not merely over, but) beyond sea. A European visitor to New York goes πέραν πόντου: to San Francisco, πέρα. Cp. O. C. 885 and p. 279.

χειμερίῳ νότῳ with χωρεῖ, goes (driven) by it: cp. Od. 14.253 ἐπλέομεν Βορέῃ ἀνέμῳ , and ib. 299 (of the ship) ἡ δ’ ἔθεεν Βορέῃ ἀνέμῳ. The dat. might be merely ‘with’ (dat. of circumstance), but is better taken as instrumental. Cp. 588 πνοαῖς. Some make χειμερίῳ νότῳ a temporal dat., like ὥρᾳ χειμῶνος, which it can hardly be.— Soph. is thinking of the Aegean, where the prevailing winds were from the N. or N.W. in spring and summer, while stormy south winds were associated with winter: Hesiod warns a man with a voyage before him not to await χειμῶν’ ἐπιόντα νότοιό τε δεινὰς ἀήτας, | ὅς τ’ ὤρινε θάλασσαν ὁμαρτήσας Διὸς ὄμβρῳ | πολλῷ ὀπωρινῷ, χαλεπὸν δέ τε πόντον ἔθηκεν. The epithet χειμερίῳ aptly distinguishes this wintry νότος from that gentle south breeze (now called the ‘embates’) which regularly sets in at sunset in the fair season (cp. Curt. Hist. Gr. 1. 14).

περιβρ … ὑπ’ οἴδμασιν , passing under swelling waters which open depths around: i.e. he is in the trough of a heavy sea, while on each side the waves rise above his ship, threatening to engulf it. Verg. Aen. 1. 106 his unda dehiscens Terram inter fluctus aperit. βρύχιος, ‘of the depths’ (βρυχία...ἠχὼ βροντᾶς, Aesch. PV 1082), is formed as if from βρύξ, of which Oppian uses acc. βρύχα (‘depth of the sea,’ Hal. 2. 588). ὑποβρύχιος=‘under water,’ and so neut. pl. adv. ὑπόβρυχα ( Od. 5.319 etc.). περιβρύχιος occurs only here. For the ι— before βρ cp. 348, 1104, 1117. The schol.'s ἠχώδεσι means that περιβρύχιος was taken as' ‘roaring around’ (βρυ—χάομαι), where the υ would be long, against metre (cp. 347). The Homeric ἀμφὶ δὲ κῦμα | βέβρυχεν ῥόθιον ( Od. 5.411) might suggest this view.

ὑπερτάταν , highest, as eldest, παμμήτωρ (Aesch. PV 90), and παμβῶτις ( Ph. 392): Plat. Tim. 40C γῆν... πρώτην καὶ πρεσβυτάτην θεῶν ὅσοι ἐντὸς οὐρανοῦ γεγόνασι .

ἀκαμάταν : this form of the fem. occurs only here, unless ἀκαμάτῃσι (and not ἀκαμάτοισι) χέρεσσιν be right in Hes. Th. 747, but is warranted by similar epic forms in tragedy, as ἀθανάτας (gen.) Aesch. Ch. 619, Eur. Phoen. 235: ἀδμήταν El. 1238 (and -ης in dial. O. C. 1321). For the initial α—, cp. the epic ἀθάνατος, ἀγοράασθε, etc. (and see Introd. to Homer, Appendix, note 5, p. 195): but in El. 164 we find ' α^κάματα.

ἀποτρύεται , prop., wears away for his own purposes (midd.), —fatigat, vexes (with constant ploughing). Earth is ‘immortal,’ and not to be exhausted; but man's patient toil subdues it to his use. Cp. Tr. 124 ἀποτρύειν ἐλπίδα , to wear it out.—Not, ‘wearies himself by tilling’ the soil.

ἰλλομένων ἀρότρων, as the ploughs go backwards and forwards,— turning at the end of one furrow, and going down the next. Cp. Nicander Ther. 478 φεῦγε δ’ ἀεὶ σκολιήν τε καὶ οὐ μίαν ἀτραπὸν ἴλλων, ‘in flying (from the snake), always make your course wind (ἴλλων) from side to side, instead of keeping it straight.’ Xen. Cyn. 6. 15 κύνες ἐξίλλουσαι τὰ ἴχνη, ‘puzzling out the tracks,’ i.e. going backwards and forwards till they have found a clue. As to the spelling ἴλλω υερσυς εἴλλω, see Appendix. It is needless to write ἀρότων , ‘ploughingseasons’ ( Tr. 825), and to take ἰλλομένων as=περιτελλομένων. The picture of the ploughs at work is more vivid; and, with ἀρότων, ἔτος εἰς ἔτος would be feebly redundant.

ἔτος εἰς ἔτος , an adverbial phrase, like ‘year in, year out’: for the use of the simple acc. in temporal adverbs (like ἀωρίαν) see O. T. 1138 n.; for εἰς , Od. 9.134 μάλα κεν βαθὺ λήϊον αἰεὶ | εἰς ὥρας ἀμῷεν (‘as each year comes round’): Theocr. 18. 15 κἠς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος : so εἰς νέωτα (next year), and the Gk μοδ. χρόνο σὲ (=εἰς ) χρόνο, ‘year after year.’

ἱππείῳ γένει , the ‘offspring of horses,’ meaning ‘mules’; which are ‘far better than oxen to drag the jointed plough through the deep fallow’ ( Il. 10.352). Arist. Rhet. 3.2 § 14 ὸ Σιμωνίδης, ὅτε μὲν ἐδίδου μισθὸν ὀλίγον αὐτῷ ὸ νικήσας τοῖς ὀρεῦσιν, οὐκ ἤθελε ποιεῖν ὡς δυσχεραίνων εἰς ἡμιόνους ποιεῖν· ἐπεὶ δ’ ικανὸν ἔδωκεν, ὲποίησε, χαίρετ’, ἀελλοπόδων θύγατρες ἵππων. As this story suggests, the very fact that the ordinary Attic word for ‘mule’ was ἡμίονος (adj. ὀρικός) might lead an Attic poet to prefer such a periphrasis as ἵππειον γένος. The objections to taking ἱππείῳ γένει as simply =ἵπποιςare,that (1) Greek ploughmen used oxen or mules more than horses, and (2) the achievement of taming the horse (350) is thus anticipated. Some understand both horses and mules, giving γένει a double sense—rather awkwardly, I think.

πολεύων , κατὰ σύνεσιν after τοῦτο . Cp. Od. 11.90 ἦλθε δ’ ἐπὶ ψυχὴ Θηβαίου Τειρεσίαο, | χρύσεον σκῆπτρον ἔχων: 16. 476 μείδησεν δ’ ἱερὴ ἲς Τηλεμάχοιο, | ἐς πατέρ’ ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἰδών: Il. 11.690 ἐλθὼν γὰρ ἐκάκωσε βίη Ἡρακληείη . But as Soph. would write ΠΟΛΕΥΟΝ, it was the easier to read πόλευον.

343-353

Man's conquests over the animal world are here taken in two groups. First, those of which the primary aim is to kill or to capture. Here the means is netting (ἀμφιβαλὼν σπείραισι δικτυοκλώστοις), in its threefold sporting use, as applied to fowling (ὀρνίθων), hunting (θηρῶν), and fishing (πόντου φύσιν). Secondly, those conquests which aim at reducing wild animals to man's service. These are effected by μηχαναί (349),— arts of taming and training. And their result is aptly expressed by the word

κρατεῖ: here, man is not merely the slayer or captor; he becomes the master of docile toilers. The horse and the bull are types.

Thus, in this ode, the scale of achievement ever ascends: man (1) conquers inanimate nature: (2) makes animals his captives: (3) trains them to be his servants: (4) develops his own social and intellectual life.

κουφονόων is merely a general epithet, ‘light-hearted,’ ‘blithe and careless’; Theognis 580 σμικρῆς ὄρνιθος κοῦφον ἔχουσα νόον: cp. the proverbial phraseology of Athens, ἄνθρωπος ὄρνις, ἀστάθμητος, πετόμενος, | ἀτέκμαρτος, οὺδὲν οὐδέποτ’ ἐν ταὐτῷ μένων ( Au. 169). The epithet is given to ἔρωτες below (617), and to εὐηθία in Aesch. PV 383.— Not, ‘quick-witted’ (and therefore harder to catch).

ἀμφιβαλὼν with σπείραισι δ.: it can precede the dat. by so much, because its meaning is already clear, and the dat. is merely a poet. amplification.

πόντου … εἰναλίαν φύσιν , a brood living in the waters of the sea, the tautology being only of the same order as in πόντος ἁλός, ἁλὸς ἐν πελάγεσσιν, πέλαγος θαλάσσης, etc.— σπείραισι δικτυοκλ., instr. dat. with ἀμφιβαλών, in the coils of woven nets: for the adj. compounded with a subst. (δίκτυον) cognate in sense to σπεῖρα, see n. on O. C. 716 εὐήρετμος πλάτα .— Au. 528 mentions ἕρκη, νεφέλας, δίκτυα, πηκτάς as nets used by the fowler (ὀρνιθευτής). In hunting the lion, bear, boar, deer, hare, etc., various nets were used; the δίκτυον, to enclose large spaces; the ἐνόδιον, to close passages; the ἄρκυς (cassis) or tunnel-net. The chief fishing-nets were the ἀμφίβληστρον (castingnet), and the σαγήνη (drag-net, whence seine, sean).

περιφραδής . Eustath. p. 135, 25 φραδής...ὅθεν σύνθετον ὁ παρὰ Σοφοκλεῖ ἀριφραδὴς ἀνήρ. This was evidently a mere slip of memory. Neither Soph. nor Eur, uses any compound with ἀρι or ἐρι, though Aesch. has ἀρίδακρυς, ἐρίδματος, ἐρικύμων.

μηχαναῖς . μαχαναῖς in Ai. 181 and μαχανᾷ in Aesch. Th. 133 are the only instances in which Tragedy gives a Doric form to words from this stem.— ἀγραύλου , having his αὐλή, or dwelling, in the open country, as opposed to a domesticated animal: Eur. Bacch. 1187 πρέπει γ’ ὥστε θὴρ ἄγραυλος φόβῃ . For the combination with ὀρεσσιβάτα cp. Plat. Crat. 394E τὸ θηριῶδες τῆς φύσεως καὶ τὸ ἄγριον αὐτοῦ καὶ τὸ ὀρεινόν .

λασιαύχενά θ’ . The elision at the end of the verse (ἐπισυναλοιφή) is comparatively rare in lyrics, as in dialogue (1031); but cp. 595 πίπτοντ’, 864 αὐτογέννητ’.

ὀχμάζεται , he tames, ἀμφὶ λόφον ζυγῶν , putting the yoke about its neck. ὀχμάζω (prop., ‘to get a firm hold upon’) was esp. used of breaking horses: Eur. El. 816 (Thessalians honour a man) ὅστις ταῦρον ἀρταμεἴ (cuts to pieces) καλῶς, | ἵππους τ’ ὀχμάζει. Schol. on

Rhod. 1. 743 κυρίως ἐστὶν ὀχμάσαι τὸ ἵππον ὑπὸ χαλινὸν ἀγαγεῖν ἢ ὑπὸ ζυγόν. The midd. voice does not occur elsewhere; but this cannot be regarded as an objection, when we remember how many rare middle forms occur in the dramatists. Thus προσορωμένα in O. C. 244 is a solitary example of that verb in the midd., and if the license could be taken with so common a word, much more might it be allowed with a comparatively rare one. Blaydes writes ὀχμάζει ὑπ’ ἀμφίλοφον ζυγόν: but the Ms. ἕξεται indicates that the verb, whatever it was, was of the midd. form. ὀχμάζεται was published by G. Schöne in 1833, and by Franz in 1846: they appear to have made the conjecture independently. Donaldson (1848) printed ὁχμάζεται ἀμφὶ λόφον ζυγῶν, and seems to ascribe ζυγῶν to Franz and Schöne; though Franz, at least, proposed ἀμφὶ λόφον ζυγῷ. ζυγῶν has been revived (seemingly without knowledge of a predecessor) by H. Schütz (1886). Sophocles would write ΑΜΦΙΛΟΦΟΝΖΥΓΟΝ, and thus ζυγῶν changes no letter. Aesch. used the fut. ζυγώσω (fr. 110), and Soph. has the verbal ζυγωτῶν ( El. 702). To ἀμφιλόφῳ ζυγῷ it may be objected that, being clear, it was not likely to become -ον ‐όν: but, when ἀμφίλοφον had once been written, ζυγῶν (or ζυγῷ) would easily become ζυγόν. As to the schol. on ἀμφίλοφον,—ἀντὶ τοῦ, περιβαλὼν αὐτῷ ζυγὸν περὶ τὸν λόφον, ὑπάγει,—it cannot fairly be urged for ζυγῶν (or for any partic.), since it may be merely a paraphrase of ἀμφίλοφον.—Schütz's ἐφέζεται is attractive; for the acc. he cp. Aesch. Eum. 409 βρέτας...ἐφημένῳ , Eur. Helen 1493 Εὐρώταν ἐφεζόμεναι . Add Aesch. Ag. 664 ναῦν θέλουσ’ ἐφέζετο . The sense would be, ‘seats himself behind the horse’ (in a chariot): cp. Il. 5.46 ἵππων ἐπιβησόμενον , etc. But, though oxen were used for draught, ἐφέζεται suits ταῦρον less well. The sense, ‘tames,’ is clearly that which we require. See Appendix.

φθέγμα κ.τ.λ. The phrase, ‘man has taught himself speech,’ should not be pressed as if the poet was thinking of a theory on the origin of language. It was the Eleatic view that language came θέσει, not φύσει, and Soph, may have known that; but by his ἐδιδάξατο he meant simply, ‘developed for his own benefit, by his own effort.’ So Isocrates (or. 3 § 6) conceives primitive man as living in a brutal state, and emerging from it by the development of speech and thought,— λόγος being one of the human faculties (τῶν ἐνόντων ἐν τῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φύσει), and the distinctive one:—ἐγγενομένου δ’ ἡμῖν τοῦ πείθειν ἀλλήλους καὶ δηλοῦν πρὸς ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς περὶ ὼ=ν ἂν βουληθῶμεν, οὐ μόνον τοῦ θηριωδῶς ζῆν ἀπηλλάγημεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ συνελθόντες πόλεις ᾠκίσαμεν καὶ νόμους ἐθέμεθα καὶ τέχνας εὕρομεν. Cp. Hor. Sat. 1. 3. 103 (men fought,) Donec verba, quibus voces sensusque notarent, Nominaque invenere: dehinc absistere bello, Oppida coeperunt munire et ponere leges. The Aeschylean Prometheus ( P. V. 444) claims to have made men ἔννους...καὶ φρενῶν ἐπηβόλους, but not (like Shelley's Prometheus) to have also given them language. Cp. Peile's chapter ‘On the Nature of Language’ (Primer of Philology), p. 156: ‘In this way then we may conceive of the

beginnings of speech...Speech is the development, through imitation, of a capacity of man—the capacity of making a noise.’ This is quite compatible with ἐδιδάξατο.

ἀνεμόεν φρόνημα : cp. Il. 15.80 ὡς δ’ ὅτ’ ἂν ἀΐξῃ νόος ἀνέρος...| ὣς κραιπνῶς μεμαυῖα διέπτατο : Od. 7.36 τῶν νέες ὠκεῖαι ὡσεὶ πτερὸν ἠὲ νόημα : O. C. 1081 ἀελλαία ταχύρρωστος πελειάς : fr. 621 ἀελλάδες φωναί. Not ‘lofty,’ in which sense ἀνεμόεν could be said only of a high place. Cp. Shelley, Prometheus: ‘He gave man speech, and speech created thought, Which is the measure of the universe.’ Soph. does not imply that speech created thought; he is rather thinking of them as developed (in their riper forms) together.

ἀστυνόμους ὀργάς , ‘such dispositions as regulate cities’; i.e. those feelings which lead men to organise social life, and to uphold the social order by their loyalty. For ὀργάς, cp. Ai. 639 συντρόφοις | ὀργαῖς , the dispositions that have grown with his growth: Eur. Tro. 53 ἐπῄνεσ’ ὀργὰς ἠπίους . The relation of φθέγμα to ἀστυνόμοι ὀργαί is illustrated by Arist. Pol. 1.2 § 12, where he is showing that man, more than any other ἀγελαῖον ζῷον, is πολιτικόν: ‘Speech is intended to explain what is expedient and what is hurtful,—and so also what is just and unjust. It is characteristic of man, as compared with other animals, that he alone has a sense of good and evil, just and unjust; and it is the association of beings with this sense that make a Family and a State.’

ἐδιδάξατο here=simply αὐτὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐδίδαξε. The notion, ‘men taught each other,’ ‘learned by mutual converse,’ cannot be extracted from it. The passive διδάσκομαι as=μανθάνειν is freq., but I can find no parallel for the use of the aor. midd. here. For the ordinary use, cp. Plat. Menop. 93 D τὸν υἱὸν ἱππέα...ἐδιδάξατο (had his son taught to ride): so Plat. Rep. 467E (διδαξαμένους, ‘when we have had them taught’); [Plat. ] Plat. Theag. 122E, De Virt. 377 B; Xen. Cyr. 1.6.2, Mem. 4. 4. 5; Aristoph. Nub. 1338. Once or twice ἐδιδαξάμην is merely ἐδίδαξα with the idea of the teacher's interest superadded: Pind. O. 8. 59 τὸ διδάξασθαι | εἰδότι ῥᾴτερον: so Simonides fr. 145 (of himself) διδαξάμενος χορόν (unless he meant, ‘caused to be trained’). In Aristoph. Nub. 783 διδάξαιμ’ ἄν (Elmsley) should prob. be read. It is rare for any midd. form, without a reflexive pron., to denote that the subject acts on (and not for) himself: thus, ‘he kills himself’ is not ἀποκτείνεται, but ἀποκτείνει ἑαυτόν (Plat. Phaedo 61E). The exceptions are chiefly words of the toilet, as λούομαι. The dative of the reflexive can be more easily understood, as Thuc. 6.40 πόλις...οὐκ...αὐθαίρετον δουλείαν ἐπιβαλεῖται , sibi imponet.

πάγων κ.τ.λ. Construe: καὶ (ἐδιδάξατο ) φεύγειν ἐναίθρεια βέλη δυσαύλων πάγων, καὶ δύσομβρα βέλη. He learned to build houses, to shelter himself from frost and rain. πάγοι δύσαυλοι=frosts which make it unpleasant to bivouack in the open: cp. Aesch. Ag. 555 δυσαυλίας.

ἐναίθρεια =under a clear (frosty) sky: cp. fr. 154 ὅταν πάγου φανέντος αἰθρίου (‘a clear frost') χεροῖν | κρύσταλλον ἁρπάσωσι . Nauck takes δυσαύλων πάγων as ‘inhospitable hills,’ citing Moschion fr. 7. 5 (Frag. Trag. p. 633), who describes primitive man as inhabiting ὀρειγενῆ σπήλαια: but the context is against this. As corrections of the MS. αἴθρια, there is little to choose between ἐναίθρεια and ὑπαίθρεια: Aesch. Ag. 335 has ὑπαιθρίων πάγων: but after πάγων the loss of ἐν would be easier than that of ὑπ. The ι of αἰθρία could be long (as Solon 13. 22): but ι— is not elsewhere found in the derivatives; for in Cratinus Δηλιάδες fr. 5 we must read Ὑπερβορείους αἴθρια τιμῶντας στέφη (not, as Blaydes gives it, Ὑπερβορέους αἴθρι—α). The spelling ἐναίθρεια is conjectural, but in O. C. 1088 L has ἐπινικείῳ, as metre requires, for ἐπινικίῳ. Below, v. 814, ἐπινύμφειος has been conjectured: see n. there.

βέλη , the ‘shafts’ of piercing cold, or of lashing rain. Cp. Plat. Legg. 873E κεραυνός, ἤ τι παρὰ θεοῦ τοιοῦτον βέλος ἰόν (some such swift and sudden visitation): Aesch. PV 371 βέλεσι πυρπνόου ζάλης (sent forth from Aetna): Il. 1.53 κῆλα θεοῖο (of the pestilence).

παντοπόρος is at once a comment on the achievements already enumerated (cp. περιφραδής in 348), and a general expression absolving the poet from further detail: ‘yes, there is nothing that he cannot provide.’ Isocr. may have had this passage in mind in or. 3 § 6 (quoted on 354), where an enumeration parallel with that of Soph. is closed by a phrase answering to παντοπόρος,—καὶ σχεδὸν ἅπαντα τὰ δῑ ἡμῶν μεμηχανημένα λόγος ἡμῖν ἐστιν ὁ συγκατασκευάσας. We must not point thus: βέλη· παντοπόρος, ἄπορος κ.τ.λ., when the sense would be weakened, and the construction perplexed (‘all-providing, and in no case without resource, he meets the future’).

οὐδὲν … τὸ μέλλον = οὐδὲν ὃ μέλλει (ἔσεσθαι), nothing that is to be (cp. the absolute τὸ μέλλον, τὰ μέλλοντα). So Plat. Lach. 197A ἔγωγε ἀνδρεῖα καλῶ οὔτε θηρία οὔτε ἄλλο οὐδὲν τὸ τὰ δεινὰ ὑπὸ ἀγνοίας μὴ φοβούμενον = οὐδὲν ὃ μὴ φοβεῖται. This negative form is as correct as (though actually rarer than) the positive πᾶν τὸ καλῶς ἔχον ( Plat. Rep. 381A) for πᾶν ὃ καλῶς ἔχει. Donaldson took τὸ μέλλον adverbially: ‘in regard to the future, he comes to nothing without resources.’ Cp. 728, μηδὲν τὸ μὴ δίκαιον, where μηδέν is subst., not adv.

μόνον and μόνου are alike admissible; μόνον means, ‘the only thing that he will not achieve is to escape death’; μόνον, ‘the only thing that he will not escape is death.’ In this general view of human achievement, μόνον seems a little the better. φεῦξιν — ἐπάξεται , procure means of escape from death. ἐπάγεσθαι, prop. ‘to bring into one's own country’; usu. said of calling in allies to help one; or of importing foreign products: Thuc. 4.64 ξυμμάχους δὲ οὐδέποτε ...ἐπαξόμεθα : id. 1. 81 ἐκ θαλάσσης ὧν δέονται ἐπάξονται. Then often fig., of calling in anything to one's aid: Plat. Legg. 823A τὸ δὲ δὴ παρὸν ἡμῖν τὰ νῦν οἷον μάρτυρα ἐπαγόμεθα· δηλοῖ μὲν ἂν ὃ βουλόμεθα : ‘we call to our help, as a witness, the example which is actually present with us; it will show what we mean.’ Gorg. 492B αὐτοὶ ἑαυτοῖς δεσπότην ἐπαγάγοιντο τὸν τῶν πολλῶν ἀνθρώπων νόμον τε καὶ λόγον καὶ ψόγον (‘call in to rule them’). Menander Ὑδρία fr. 2 γέροντα δυστυχοῦντα, τῶν θ’ αὑτοῦ κακῶν | ἐπαγόμενον λήθην, ἀνέμνησας πάλιν (‘seeking to procure forgetfulness of his troubles’). The word is admirably suitable and vivid here: man looks to every side for succour against the foe that is ever in the land,—Death; but from no quarter can he find help. It is surprising that so many recent critics should have confidently condemned ἐπάξεται, and sought to replace it by conjectures (see cr. n.).

ἀμηχάνων , such as seem to baffle all treatment: El. 140 ἀμήχανον | ἅλγος : Simonides ap. Plat. Prot. 344C ἀμήχανος συμφορά.

φυγάς , like φεῦξιν: Eur. Helen 799 λέκτρων...φυγάς , means of escape from the union; cp. Aristoph. Eq. 759 κἀκ τῶν ἀμηχάνων πόρους εὐμηχάνους πορίζων.

ξυμπέφρασται , here midd., as Aesch. Suppl. 438 καὶ δὴ πέφρασμαι : cp. O. C. 1016 n.

365-375

The ode closes with a more direct reference to the incident which suggested its theme. The daring ingenuity shown by the unknown breaker of Creon's edict is an instance of the subtlety which leads to ruin. The implied contrast with Creon—ὑψίπολις by his care for the laws—is effective in view of the destined περιπέτεια.

σοφόν τι … ἔχων : lit., possessing, in his resourceful skill, a thing subtle beyond belief: σοφόν τι is predicate, and in apposition with τὸ μηχανόεν τέχνας. Cp. Thuc. 2.89 μέγα τι τῆς διανοίας τὸ βέβαιον ἔχοντες ἀντιτολμῶσιν : ‘they are strong in the confidence of their spirit when they confront the foe.’ There is no ground for altering σοφόν into δεινόν, τοῖον, or the like.

τὸ μηχανόεν τ ., the inventive quality in his skill: for τέχνας, cp. O. T. 380 n.; for the absence of τᾶς, cp. above, 10 ( κακά). Cp. Thuc. 1.90 τὸ...βουλόμενον καὶ ϋποπτον τῆς γνώμης : 2. 61 ἐν τῷ ὑμετέρψ ἀσθενεῖ τῆς γνώμης.

τοτὲ μὲν … ἄλλοτ’ . L has τοτὲ here: cp. El. 739 τότ’ (i.e. τοτὲ) ἅλλος, ἅλλοθ’ α+τερος: Phaedr. 237 E τοτὲ μὲν ἡ ἑτέρα, ἅλλοτε δὲ ἡ ἑτέρα κρατεῖ . Cp. O. C. 1745 n. There is no reason, then, for reading ποτὲ μέν here with inferior MSS., though it is equally good (Plato has ποτὲ μὲν answered by ποτὲ δέ, by ἐνίοτε δέ, or by αὖθις δέ).

ἐπ’ with κακόν as well as ἐσθλόν: cp. 212 n. on κἀς.

γεραίρων , ‘honouring,’ is in my belief a certain correction of the MS. παρείρων. The latter=‘weaving in,’ as a thread into a texture, or a flower into a wreath: for the genuine fig. use of it, see Plat. Symp. 6. 2 μεταξὺ τοῦ ὑμᾶς λέγειν οὐδ’ ἂν τρίχα, μὴ ὅτι λόγον, ἄν τις παρείρειε: ‘while you are speaking, one could not put in a hair, much less a speech’ (so close and continuous is the texture of your speaking). Here, παρείρων has been explained as, ‘weaving the laws (etc.) into the texture of his life’; but, even if we grant that so strange a phrase would be possible with words added to express ‘the texture of his life,’ it is certainly impossible without them. Dindorf proposed παραιρῶν as=‘wresting,’ ‘violating’ (a strange sense), and pointed at δίκαν· ‘he comes to evil (though at other times to good) when he violates the laws,’ etc. ΓΕΠΑΙΠΟΝ could easily generate ΠΑΠΕΙΠΟΝ. γεραίρειν, prop. to distinguish by gifts of honour, is also a general poet. synonym for τιμᾶν: cp.

5. 67 ἐτίμων τὸν Ἄδρηστον καὶ δὴ πρὸς τὰ πάθεα αὐτοῦ τραγικοῖσι χοροῖσι ἐγέραιρον. Ar. Th. 960 γένος Ὀλυμπίων θεῶν | μέλπε καὶ γέραιρε φωνῇ.

θεῶν τ’ ἔνορκον δίκαν , Justice, which men swear to observe, taking oaths by the gods (ὅρκοι θεῶν: O. T. 647 n.): =ὅρκοις θεῶν κεκυρωμένην.

ὑψίπολις seems best taken as =ὑψηλὴν πόλιν ἔχων: cp. Pind. P. 8. 22 ἁ δικαιόπολις...νᾶσος (Aegina). In Pind. O. 2. 8Theron, tyrant of Acragas, is called ὀρθόπολις in an active sense, as=ὀρθῶν τὴν πόλιν. In O. T. 510 ἁδύπολις = ἁνδάνων τῇ πόλει : but it is harder to suppose that ὑψίπολις could have been intended to mean, ‘standing high in his city.’ Nor would that be the fittest sense. The loyal citizen makes the prosperous city; and her prosperity is his. See on 189. In this clause the Chorus thinks especially of Creon (191 τοιοῖσδ’ ἐγὼ νόμοισι τήνδ’ αὔξω πόλιν).

ἄπολις . Where the typical citizen is a law-breaker, the city is ruined, and the evil-doer is left citiless. So Creon had described law-breaking as ἄτην...ἀστοῖς (185). The contrast with ὑψίπολις shows that the sense is not merely, ‘when a man breaks the law he becomes an exile’ ( Lys. or. 21 § 35 ἀντὶ ...πολιτῶν ἀπόλιδας ). The central thought is the power of human wit to make or mar the πόλις, according as the man is moral or immoral.

τὸ μὴ καλόν , the generic μή, such a mood as is not good.— τόλμας χάριν , by reason of (‘thanks to’) his audacity, with ξύνεστι, not with ἄπολίς ( ἐστι). In O. T. 888 δυσπότμου χάριν χλιδᾶς is not precisely similar, since it goes with κακά νιν ἕλοιτο μοῖρα. Others point at ξύνεστι, taking τόλμας χάριν with μήτ’ ἐμοί κ.τ.λ.: but μήτ’ should clearly be the first word in that sentence.

παρέστιος . Cp. O. T. 249 n., where Oed. invokes a curse on himself, should the murderer become ξυνέστιος with him: also ib. 240 n. Hor. Carm. 3. 2. 26 vetabo, qui Cereris sacrum Vulgarit arcanae, sub isdem Sit trabibus, fragilemve mecum Solvat phaselon. Schneidewin cp. also Eur. fr. 848 (the dishonourer of parents) μή μοι γένοιτο μήτε συνθύ\της ποτέ, κ.τ.λ., and Callim. Hymn. 6. 117 (to Demeter) μὴ τῆνος ἐμὶν φίλος, ὅς τοι ἀπεχθής, | εἴη, μήθ’ ὁμότοιχος.

ἴσον φρονῶν , ‘may he not become like-minded with me,’ is another way of saying, ‘may I never come to share his sentiments.’ Cp. Il. 15.50 ἶσον ἐμοὶ φρονέουσα , ‘likeminded with me’: Aristoph. Av. 634 ἐμοὶ φρονῶν ξυνῳδά . In a narrower sense (not intended here) τὰ αὐτὰ φρονεῖν was said of agreement in politics, idem sentire de republica: Her. 1.60 τὠυτὸ φρονήσαντες , ‘having made common cause’ (the στασιῶται of Megacles and Lycurgus).

ἔρδει , L's reading, should be kept. The indic. is, of course, compatible with generality: for such an indic. after an optative, cp. Dem. or. 4. 51 νικῴη δ’ ὅ τι πᾶσιν ὑμῖν μέλλει συνοίσειν . It is also rather in favour of the indic. that the speaker is here thinking of an actual case. The optat. ἔρδοι would be abstract, ‘any one who should conceivably do these things,’ and would be equally correct: cp. on 666.

376-581

The choral ode has closed with an allusion to the unknown man (ὅς : cp. 248 τίς ἀνδρῶν, 319 ὁ δρῶν). At this moment Antigone is led in by the Guard.— ἀμφινοῶ : cp. O. C. 316 (where Antigone can scarcely believe her eyes, on seeing Ismene,) ἆρ’ ἔστιν; ἆρ’ οὐκ ἔστιν; ἢ γνώμη πλανᾷ; For ἐς , cp. φοβεῖσθαι εἴς τι, O. T. 980 n.

δαιμόνιον τέρας , a portent sent by gods,—so astounding as to require a supernatural cause. Xen. Mem. 1.3.5 εἰ μή τι δαιμόνιον εἴη .

πῶς εἰδὼς κ.τ.λ.: ‘How, when I know (that she is Antigone, sc. ὅτι ἐστί), shall I maintain that she is not?’ ( οὐκ εἶναι = ὅτι οὐκ ἐστί). A simple verb of ‘saying’ regularly takes οὐ with inf. in oratio obliqua: λέγω οὐκ εἶναι = ὅτι οὐκ ἐστί. If this verb of saying is negatived, the negative with the inf. is still οὐ: πῶς λέξω οὐκ εἶναι; Here, ἀντιλογέω has the construction of a simple verb of saying: πῶς ἀντιλογήσω οὐκ εἶναι; Hermann conjectured μὴ οὐ τήνδ’ εἶναι (which is palaeographically very improbable). μὴ οὐκ εἶναι would be the normal constr. after πῶς ἀντιλογήσω, if ἀντιλογέω were viewed in its special quality as a verb of ‘denying.’ ἀρνοῦμαι μὴ εἶναι: πῶς ἀρνήσομαι μὴ οὐκ (or simply μή, O. T. 1388 n.) εἶναι; Cp. below, 443 n. It may be noted that, when ἀντιλέγω means to ‘deny,’ it is more often followed by ὡς (or ὅτι) οὐ with the finite verb; when followed by μή and inf., it more often means ‘to protest against’ a measure; Thuc. 3.41 ἀντέλεγε...μὴ ἀποκτεῖναι Μυτιληναίους : Xen. Cyr. 2.2.20 αἰσχρὸν ὂν (=οὐ δεῖ) ἀντιλέγειν τὸ μὴ οὐχὶ τὸν πλεῖστα πονοῦντα...μεγίστων ἀξιοῦσθαι.

ἀντιλογήσω might be deliberative aor., but is rather fut. ind. (cp. O. T. 1419, O. C. 310).

ὦ δύστηνος : nom. for voc., O. C. 185 n.

δ. πατρός , gen. of origin: O. C. 214 n.

Οἰδιπόδα— occurs as gen. in O. T. 495, but as voc. ib. 1194.

τί ποτ’ ; Cp. Ph. 1210.

οὐ δή που : cp. O. T. 1472 οὐ δὴ κλύω που...;

ἀπιστοῦσαν = ἀπειθοῦσαν, cp. 219, 656.

ἄγουσι . It is far more probable that the final ιν of βασιλείοισιν should have dropped out in L (see cr. n.) than that Soph. should have written ἀπάγουσι. At Athens ἀπάγω and ἀπαγωγή were technical terms for a process of summary arrest by which any citizen could bring before the magistrates a person taken in a criminal act (ἐπ’ αὐτοφώρῳ). We have seen (on v. 158) that a word with a technical Attic sense was not necessarily excluded from Attic poetry. But ἀπάγω would surely jar here. Allowing for the difference between a technicality and a

colloquialism, it would be nearly as bad as, ‘Have they taken you up?’

καὶ connects ἀπιστοῦσαν with καθελόντες (not with ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ): cp. O. C. 737 n.

384-581

Second ἐπεισόδιον. Antigone, brought before Creon, avows and justifies her deed. Creon declares that she shall die. Ismene, when led in (531), associates herself with the act, but is not permitted by her sister to claim any part in it. Creon orders that both sisters shall be kept prisoners.

ἐκείνη , she whom we sought: cp. O. C. 138 ὅδ’ ἐκεῖνος ἐγώ , n.

τοὔργον ἡ ’ξειργ .: for the order, cp. 324.

ἐς δέον : cp. O. T. 1416 ἐς δέον πάρεσθ’ ὅδε | Κρέων : so ib. 78 εἰς καλόν : Ai. 1168 ἐς αὐτὸν καιρόν . L has εἰς μέσον, i.e. ‘he comes forth in public’ (so that you, and all, can speak with him). The phrase occurs elsewhere in Soph., but never with ref. to entrance on the stage: Soph. Ph. 609 ἔδειξ’ Ἀχαιοῖς ἐς μέσον (showed him publicly); Ai. 1285 τὸν κλῆρον ἐς μέσον καθείς (i.e. among the others): Tr. 514 ἴσαν ἐς μέσον (into the arena). Here, ἐς δέον is not only far the better phrase, but is confirmed by Creon's question in the next v., ποίᾳ ξύμμετρος... τύχῃ; A, and almost all the later MSS., have εἰς δέον, which may, doubtless, have been a conjecture suggested by O. T. 1416, —as is held by those who believe all our MSS. to have come from L; but it looks more like a true reading which L has somehow missed. Cp. on 831.

ξύμμετρος , commensurate with, i.e. here, opportune for. O. T. 84 ξύμμετρος γὰρ ὡς κλύειν : ib. 1113 ξυνᾴδει τῷδε τἀνδρὶ σύμμετρος .

ἀπώμοτον , abiurandum: there is nothing, the possibility of which men ought to deny on oath: οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ τι ἀπομνύναι χρὴ βροτοὺς μὴ οὐκ ἂν γενέσθαι. Archilochus fr. 76 χρημάτων ἄελπτον οὐδέν ἐστιν οὐδ’ ἀπώμοτον | οὐδὲ θαυμάσιον. Eupolis ΙΙόλεις fr. 25 τί δ’ ἔστ’ Ἀθηναίοισι πρᾶγμ’ ἀπώμοτον;

ψεύδει =falsifies (like ψευδοποιεῖν): Thuc. 3.66 τὴν...ψευσθεῖσαν υπόσχεσιν.

ἡ ’πίνοια , here, the after -thought, αἱ δεύτεραι φροντίδες. But usually the ἐπί in ἐπινοέω, ἐπίνοια, denotes advance,— ‘forming a design,’ or ‘inventing’: Aristoph. Eq. 90 οἶνον σὺ τολμᾷς εἰς ἐπίνοιαν λοιδορεῖν ; Cp. Lucian Προμηθεὺς εἷ ἐν λόγοις 7 τό γε μεταβουλεύεσθαι Ἐπιμηθέως ἔργον, οὐ Προμηθέως ἐστίν.

ἐξηύχουν ἄν , I could have vowed, σχολῇ ἥξειν ποτὲ δεῦρο , that it would be long before I ever came hither. Cp. Eur. Helen 1619 οὐκ ἄν ποτ’ ηὔχουν οὔτε σ’ οὔθ’ ἡμᾶς λαθεῖν | Μενέλαον, ὦναξ, ὡς ἐλάνθανεν πάρων : ‘I should never have expected that he would escape us’; where (as the order of words shows) ἄν goes with ηὔχουν,—the suppressed protasis being, as here, εἰ ἠρώτα τις, ‘if any one had asked me.’ So Lys. or. 12 § 22 ἐγὼ δ’ ἐβουλόμην ἂν αὐτοὺς ἀληθῆ λέγειν , ‘I could wish’ (the ref. there being to present time), sc. εἰ δυνατὸν ἦν. Cp. Soph. Ph. 869 n. The needless emendations of this verse have aimed at disjoining ἄν from ἐξηύχουν and attaching it to the infin., or else at removing it altogether. But, though the φύλαξ had actually said (in the ‘aside’ at 329) that he did not mean to come back, he was not therefore debarred from using this turn of phrase; ‘I could have vowed that I would not come back.’

σχολῇ (cp. 231), here iron., ‘not in a hurry’ ( O. T. 434 n.); Shaksp. Tit. Andron. 1. 2. 301 ‘I'll trust by leisure him that mocks me once.’

ταῖς σαῖς ἀπειλαῖς , ‘by reason of thy threats’: cp. 335 (νότῳ) n, 588 (πνοαῖς), 956 ( ὀργαῖς). Here, the causal dat. seems also to suggest occasion (‘at the time of your threats’): see on 691 λόγοις.

ἐχειμάσθην : Ph. 1460 χειμαζομένῳ (ἐμοί), in my sore trouble.

ἡ...ἐκτὸς (τῶν ἐλπίδων) καὶ παρὰ ἐλπίδας. I cannot parallel this zeugma of preps. with a case suited only to the second (in Il. 17.760 περί τ’ ἀμφί τε τάφρον both preps. take acc.): and yet it seems to be genuine, the phrase being so energetic and compact. ἐκτός is certainly supported by 330, while ἄτοπος, ἄλογος, and εἰκός are all very improbable substitutes. Nor can I think, with Schütz, that ἐκτός is here adverb: ‘the outside joy’ (i.e. outside of one's calculations).

οὐδὲν ἔοικε μῆκος , is not at all (adv.) like in greatness, α+λλῃ ἡδονῇ , to any other pleasure; i.e. is vastly greater than any other. For the adv. οὐδέν , cp. Lys. 220 C τὸ φίλον...οὐδὲν τούτοις ἔοικε . For μῆκος = amplitudo, Empedocles 15 ἐξ οἵης τιμῆς τε καὶ ὅσσου μήκεος ὄλβου: so Pindar speaks of μακρὸς ὄλβος (P. 2. 26), μακροτέρα ἀρετά (I. 4. 21), Aristotle of μακρὰ τιμήματα ( Pol. 3. 5. 6, opp. to βραχέα ib. 4. 4. 24), μακρὰ οὐσία ( ib. 4. 4. 5), and Soph. himself of μακρὸς πλοῦτος ( Ai. 130). For ἔοικε Wolff-Bellermann cp. Thuc. 7.71 ὁ...φόβος ἦν... οὐδενὶ ἐοικώς (‘great beyond example’), De Vect. 4. 31 οὐδενὶ τῶν παρεληλυθότων ἐοικός (‘far greater than any of the past’); and for the sentiment, Eur. fr. 554 ἐκ τῶν ἀέλπτων ἡ χάρις μείζων βροτοῖς | φανεῖσα μᾶλλον ἢ τὸ προσδοκώμενον.— Nauck's treatment of this verse and the next has no justification: see cr. n.

δῑ ὅρκων … ἀπώμοτος , though I had sworn with oaths (sworn solemnly) not to come. Cp. Ai. 1113 ὅρκων οἷσιν ἦν ἐνώμοτος : Aristoph. Ran. 150 ἐπίορκον ὅρκον ὤμοσεν .

καθῃρέθη (cp. 383 καθελόντες) is clearly better here than L's καθευρέθη: and the compound καθευρίσκω is nowhere found in classical

τάφον κοσμοῦσα , paying the due rites of burial (τάφον = ταφήν, cp. 490), by sprinkling the dust and pouring the libations on the corpse. κοσμέω was specially said of obsequies: cp. 901, El. 1139 λουτροῖς ἐκόσμησ’.

ἐπάλλετο , as when lots were shaken in a helmet ( Ai. 1285; cp. El. 710). His ἕρμαιον is the luck of being the first to bring the glad tidings,—as his former mission was ironically called τοῦτο τἀγαθόν (275). In the discovery and seizure of Antigone he had no greater share than his comrades (432).

κρῖνε = ἀνάκρινε, question: Ai. 586 μὴ κρῖνε, μὴ ’ξέταζε.

δίκαιός εἰμι : the only certain instance in Tragedy of the personal constr. ( Thuc. 1.40 δίκαιοί γ’ ἐστε...ἰέναι ); for in Eur. Hipp. 1080 πολλῷ γε μᾶλλον σαυτὸν ἤσκησας σέβειν | ἢ τοὺς τεκόντας ὅσια δρᾶν, δίκαιος ὤν , the latter words are more pointed if ironical (‘just man though thou art’): and Aesch. Eum. 55 καὶ κόσμος οὔτε πρὸς θεῶν ἀγάλματα | φέρειν δίκαιος is different (‘proper to bring’). But Ar. has this use, Nub. 1283 ἀπολαβεῖν...δίκαιος εἶ , and ib. 1434.

ἀπηλλάχθαι , perf., for good and all: O. T. 1050.

Observe the order of the words as marking his amazement. For the double interrog. cp. Il. 21.150 τίς πόθεν ει<*>=ς ἀνδρῶν ; Ph. 243 τίνι | στόλῳ προσέσχες τήνδε γῆν, πόθεν πλέων;

πάντ’ ἐπίστασαι : one of the formulas which often close a messenger's speech, as Tr. 484 πάντ’ ἐπίστασαι λόγον : Ai. 480 πάντ’ ἀκήκοας λόγον : ib. 876 πάντ’ ἀκήκοας : Ph. 241 οἶσθα δὴ τὸ πᾶν.

ἦ καὶ , O. T. 368 n. The first καὶ here is not ‘both.’

ὀρθῶς , ‘rightly’: i.e. do your words express what you really

mean to say? (Not, merely, ‘truly,’ i.e. in accordance with the fact: cp. 99 n.)

τὸν νεκρόν : antecedent with art. drawn into relative clause: O. C. 907 n. νῦν δ’ οὕσπερ αὐτὸς τοὺς νόμους εἰσῆλθ’ ἔχων, | τούτοισιν κ.τ.λ.

ἆρ’ ἔνδηλα : said triumphantly: Aesch. Ag. 268 ΧΟ. πῶς φής...; ΚΛ. Τροίαν Ἀχαιῶν οὖσαν· ἦ τορῶς λέγω ; Cp. Ai. 1158 οὐδείς ποτ’ ἄλλος ἢ σύ. μῶν ᾐνιξάμην ;

ὁρᾶται...ᾑρέθη : historic pres. combined with aor., as Ai. 31 φράζει τε κἀδήλωσεν : cp. 419, Tr. 359 ff., O. T. 118 f.

ἐπίληπτος , seized in the act=ἐπ’ αὐτοφώρῳ. Her. 3.69 ἐπίλαμπτος... ἀφάσσουσα (τὰ ὦτα) ἔσται, ‘will be caught feeling the ears.’ [Dem. ] or. 25 § 80 τοὺς ἐπιλήπτους (the epileptic) φησὶν ἰᾶσθαι, αὐτὸς ὢν ἐπίληπτος πάσῃ πονηρίᾳ .

ἥκομεν . The occupation of the guards was temporarily gone when they perceived that the burial, which they had been set to prevent, had been effected (255). Creon, speaking to their deputy, sent them back to their post, with orders to discover the culprit (306). ἥκομεν (imperf.) simply refers to their taking up their station again near the body. It need not imply that they had escorted their comrade on his way to Creon. We could not take ἥκομεν...ἐπηπειλημένοι as merely plur. for sing., and then refer σήραντες, etc., to the guards collectively. Nor is the conject. ἱκόμην needed.

τὰ δείν’ ἐκεῖν’ . Creon's threats were addressed to all the guards: cp. 305 ff.

τὸν | νέκυν : so O. C. 351 τὰ τῆς | οἴκοι διαίτης : Ph. 263 ὃν οἱ | δισσοὶ στρατηγοί: El. 879 κἀπὶ τοῖς | σαυτῆς κακοῖσι . So Aristoph. Eccl. 452 οὐδὲ τὸν | δῆμον . Aesch. places the art. thus only when it is a pronoun ( Aesch. Ag. 7 τῶν: Aesch. Theb. 385, Aesch. Eum. 137 τῷ). In Eur. no instance seems to occur.

καθήμεθ’ is better taken as plpf. than pf., for, though ἥκομεν is ambiguous, we have a series of historical tenses in 415—421. Ar. sometimes uses and sometimes omits the augment, as Ar. Ach. 638 ἐκάθησθε, Ar. Eccl. 304 καθῆντο (both proved by metre); and if our MSS. can be trusted, classical prose, too, admitted both forms, as Aeschin. or. 2 § 89 ἐκαθήμην, Dem. or. 18 § 169 καθῆτο . In the five pluperfects furnished by Attic inscriptions of 428— 325 B.C. the syllabic augment is always added, but there is no epigraphic evidence in the particular case of ἐκαθήμην (see Meisterhans, p. 77).

ἄκρων ἐκ πάγων , with καθήμεθα, ‘on the hill-top.’ The corpse lay on the highest part of the Theban plain (1110, 1197), with rising ground (πάγοι) behind or around it. The guards post themselves on this rising ground, facing the corpse, and with their backs to the wind. The use of ἐκ (or ἀπό), with a verb denoting position, occurs only in a few places of poetry; but it is certainly genuine, and deserves attention, for its true force has not (I think) been observed. (1) Il. 14.153 Ἥρη δ’ εἰσεῖδε χρυσόθρονος ὀφθαλμοῖσιν | στᾶς '

ἐξ Οὐλύμποιο ἀπὸ ῥίου. Here, ἀπὸ ῥίου goes with εἰσεῖδε: but ἐξ Οὐλύμποιο, however much εἰσεῖδε may have influenced it, at least cannot be disjoined from στᾶσ’. (2) Eur. Phoen. 1009 ἀλλ’ εἶμι καὶ στὰς ἐξ ἐπάλξεων ἄκρων | σφάξας ἐμαυτὸν σηκὸν εἰς μελαμβαθῆ | δράκοντος, ἔνθ’ ὁ μάντις ἐξηγήσατο, | ἐλευθερώσω γαῖαν . It is impossible to sever στάς from ἐξ ἐπ., even if we partly explain ἐξ by σφάξας. (3) ib. 1224 Ἐτεοκλέης δ’ ὑπῆρξ’ ἀπ’ ὀρθίου σταθεὶς | πύργου κελεύσας σῖγα κηρῦξαι στρατῷ . The position of σταθείς forbids us to sever it from ἀπ’ ὀρθ. π., even though ὑπῆρξε or κελεύσας is used to explain ἀπό. (4) Eur. Tro. 522 ἀνὰ δ’ ἐβόασεν λεὼς | Τρῳάδος ἀπὸ πέτρας σταθείς . A similar case. In all these passages, a picture is presented, and we have to glance from a remoter to a nearer object. The mental eye is required to measure the space between Hera on the peak of Olympus, and Poseidon on the plain of Troy; between Megareus on the walls of Thebes, and the cavern into which his corpse is to fall. And, in each case, ἐκ or ἀπό denotes the quarter in which the remoter object is to be looked for. This, which might be called the ‘surveying’ use, is distinct from that in which the prep. has a pregnant force, as being directly suggestive of motion (οἱ ἐκ Σικελίας ἥξουσι); but it springs from the same mental tendency,—viz., to take a rapid glance over the dividing interval. Cp. ἵστασθαι πρός τινος (‘on his side’). So here: in the foreground of the picture is the corpse, which they have just laid bare. Now look to the hillocks behind it; in that quarter you will see the guards at their post.—I have not cited Od. 21.419 τόν ῥ’ ἐπὶ πήχει ἑλὼν ἕλκεν νευρὴν γλυφίδας τε | αὐτόθεν ἐκ δίφροιο καθήμενος , because there ἐκ δίφροιο goes with ἕλκεν, not with καθήμενος (he drew the bow, just from the chair, where he sat).

ὑπήνεμοι , under the wind, i.e., so that it blew from behind them, not in their faces, as the next v. explains. (At v. 421 the dust is blown in their faces, but that is by the sudden, gusty σκηπτός.) The idea of ‘sheltered,’ which ὑπήνεμος usu. implies, is less prominent here, yet quite admissible, if we suppose them to sit just below the summits of the πάγοι. Cp. Xen. Oec. 18. 6 ἐκ τοῦ προσηνέμου μέρους, on the side towards which the wind blows, opp. to ἐκ τοῦ ὑπηνέμου, to windward. Theophr. Causs. Plantt. 3.6.9 opposes πνευματώδης καὶ προσήνεμος τόπος to τὰ ὑπήνεμα: and Hist. An. 9. 15 ἐν προσηνέμῳ to ἐν ἐπισκεπεῖ.

βάλῃ , the ‘vivid’ subjunct. (instead of βάλοι), after a secondary tense; while in v. 414 we have the normal optat. ( ἀκηδήσοι). For this combination cp. Xen. Anab. 3.5.17 παρήγγειλαν, ἐπειδὴ δειπνήσειαν,...ἀναπαύεσθαι, καὶ ἕπεσθαι ἡνίκ’ ἄν τις παραγγείλῃ .

ἐγερτί : see on ἀστακτί, O. C. 1251. Each man was careful to keep wide awake, and also to see that his comrades did so.

κινῶν , urging to vigilance. Plat. Rep. 329D βουλόμενος ἔτι λέγειν αὐτὸν ἐκίνουν καὶ εἶπον, ὦ Κέφαλε, κ.τ.λ. The conject. νεικῶν is needless. For the sing. instead of the plur. (κινοῦντες) in partitive apposition, see on φύλαξ ἐλέγχων φύλακα, 260.

ἐπιρρόθοις κακοῖσιν , lit., with obstreperous taunts,

the adj. expressing the loud, continuous noise of tongues. The ἐπι- does not mean ‘bandied to and fro’: see Tr. 263 πολλὰ μὲν λόγοις | ἐπερρόθησε . In fr. 521 ἐπίρροθα δώματα=‘open to reproach.’ Elsewhere (as with Aesch.) ἐπίρροθος= ‘helper’ (ἐπιρροθέω, to come with shouts to the rescue). Cp. ἐρρόθουν 259 n., Aesch. 290.

ἀκηδήσοι : fut. opt. in orat. obliqua; the direct form of the threat would be ( κλαύσει) εἰ ἀκηδήσεις (or ἐὰν ἀκηδήσῃς). Cp. Ph. 374 ἤρασσον κακοῖς | τοῖς πᾶσιν... | εἰ τἀμὰ κεῖνος ὅπλ’ ἀφαιρήσοιτό με: he said ( ὄλοιο), εἰ ἀφαιρήσει. Ai. 312 δείν’ ἐπηπείλησ’ ἔπη, | εἰ μὴ φανοίην (he said, εἰ μὴ φανεῖς). ἀκηδέω had been used by Hom. Il. 14.427, 23. 70, Aesch. PV 508, and recurs in later poetry. The MS. ἀφειδήσοι cannot be defended as=‘play the prodigal with,’ i.e. ‘be careless of.’ ἀφειδεῖν πόνου could mean only to be unsparing of labour. In Thuc. 4.26 ἀφειδὴς ὁ κατάπλους καθειστήκει is explained by the next words, ἐπώκελλον γὰρ τὰ πλοῖα τετιμημένα χρημάτων: they were ‘unsparing’ of their boats, since a value had been set on the latter. Bonitz, to whom ἀκηδήσοι is due, refers to Apoll. Rhod. 2. 98 οὐδ’ ἄρα Βέβρυκες ἄνδρες ἀφείδησαν βασιλῆος, where Choeroboscus has preserved the true ἀκήδησαν. In the schol. on Ai. 204 φειδόμενοι occurs by error for κηδόμενοι.

415-421

The incident of the storm was a dramatic necessity, to account for Antigone reaching the corpse unobserved. A powerful picture is compressed into seven lines. (Cp. O. C. 1315 ff. for a like instance of self-restraint in description.)

κατέστη , prop., had taken its place. There is a Homeric echo here: Il. 8.66 ὄφρα μὲν ἠὼς ἦν καὶ ἀέξετο ἱερὸν ἦμαρ, | τόφρα μάλ’ ἀμφοτέρων βέλε’ ἥπτετο, πῖπτε δὲ λαός· | ἦμος δ’ ἠέλιος μέσον οὐρανὸν ἀμφιβεβήκει, | καὶ τότε δὴ χρύσεια πατὴρ ἐτίταινε τάλαντα.

χθονὸς (from the ground) with ἀείρας: cp. O. T. 142 βάθρων | ἵστασθε , n.

τυφώς , the whirlwind: the σκηπτός is the storm of dust (κονιορτός) which it lifts from the ground. The word σκηπτός usu.=‘a thunderbolt,’ and by its deriv. ought at least to mean a storm swooping on the earth from the sky; but the schol. attests its use in a larger sense; σκηπτὸς δὲ λέγεται πᾶν πνεῦμα θυελλῶδες, ὅταν συνερείδῃ τῇ γῇ, καὶ πάλιν ἄνω αἴρη·| τὸ δὲ τοιοῦτο καὶ στρόβι—λόν τινες καλοῦσι, παρὰ τὸ στροβεῖν.

οὐράνιον ἄχος , a trouble in the sky (cp. O. C. 1466 οὐρανία...ἀστραπή ), since the cloud of dust darkened the sky: schol. τὸ λυποῦν τὸν αἰθέρα, καθὸ ταράσσει αὐτόν: only ἄχος is rather what annoys us than what annoys the (personified) οὐρανός. In these lines the poet describes the actual physical effects produced by the storm. He mentions the destruction of foliage; and we need some reference also to the main point of all—the obscuring of the air. Therefore I should not take οὐράνιον ἄχος as=‘a heaven-sent plague’; that is presently said by θείαν νόσον (421). A third version—‘a trouble rising high as heaven’ (like οὐράνιον πήδημα, etc.)—is also possible, but less suitable here than either of the others. In Aesch. Suppl. 809 ἴυζε δ’ ὀμφὰν οὐρανίαν , the adj. clearly=οὐρανομήκη, and so perh. in Pers. 572 ἀμβόασον οὐράνῑ ἄχη, though there (as in Ai. 196 ἄταν οὐρανίαν φλέγων ) ‘heaven-sent’ is at least equally fitting.—For the tribrach in the 5th place, see O. T. 719 n.

πίμπλησι (histor. pres., between ἔθαλπε and ἐνεμεστώθη, cp. 406), viz., with dust and scattered leaves.— αἰκίζων , maltreating, λυμαινόμενος, by breaking the branches and tearing off the leaves.

ἐν δ’ ἐμεστ ., tmesis: cp. 1274, El. 713 ἐν δὲ πᾶς ἐμεστώθη δρόμος . Distinguish the adv. ἐν δέ (and withal), O. T. 27 n.

μύσαντες . μυ—/ω (from μῦ, a sound made with closed lips)=‘to be shut,’ said of the eyes, the lips, or any opening ( Il. 24.637 οὐ γάρ πω μύσαν ὄσσε ): but the aor. part. regularly meant, ‘with eyes shut’: Plat. Gorg. 480C παρέχειν μύσαντα καὶ ἀνδρείως ὥσπερ τέμνειν καὶ κάειν ἰατρῷ . There was a proverb, μύσαντα φέρειν (‘to grin and bear it’), Meineke Com. 3, p. 4.

νόσον , the scourge of the storm: cp. 1141.

ἐν χρ. μακρ .: for the prep. see O. C. 88 n.

πικρᾶς , in its bitterness. Elsewhere πικρός, said of persons, means ‘embittered,’ and so ‘hostile,’ etc. (as Ai. 1359). But there is no reason why πικρός should not also mean ‘embittered’ in the sense, ‘with a bitter feeling of anguish.’ There is a pathos in this which is lost by reading πικρῶς, ‘shrilly.’ Nor could πικρᾶς mean merely ‘piercing,’ as if the epithet of the cry were given to the bird itself. In O. C. 1610 φθόγγος πικρός , and in Ph. 190 πικρὰ οἰμωγή, mean not merely a ‘shrill,’ but a ‘bitter,’ cry; and so conversely here, the epithet πικρά, while primarily denoting anguish, also suggests the shrill sound.

εὐνῆς...λέχος would be a weak pleonasm for ‘nest’; it is better to take εὐνῆς as the nest, and λέχος as the restingplace of the young birds within it. The phrases λέκτρων εὐναί, λέκτρων κοῖται, κοίτης λέκτρον, etc., said of the marriagebed, are not properly similar, meaning rather, ‘the bed on which they slept,’ etc.: i.e. εὐναί or κοῖται refer to the act of sleeping. κενῆς is certainly pleonastic with νεοσσῶν ὀρφανόν (cp. Ph. 31 κενὴν οἴκησιν ἀνθρώπων δίχα, and O. T. 57n.), yet hardly anticipates it; the bird, approaching its nest, feels that it is κενή, then peeps in, and, sure enough, the λέχος is ὀρφανόν .

οὕτω δέ , ‘so, I say, she’: for δέ introducing the apodosis in a simile cp. El. 25 ὥσπερ γὰρ ἵππος εὐγενής...θυμὸν οὐκ ἀπώλεσεν | ..., ὡσαύτως δὲ σὺ | ἡμᾶς τ’ ὀτρύνεις κ.τ.λ. : so Tr. 112 ff., πολλὰ γὰρ ὥστ’...οὕτω δὲ τὸν Καδμογενῆ.

ψιλόν , sc. κόνιος, stripped of the dust which she had sprinkled on it (409). Cp. O. C. p. 279.

γόοισιν ἐξῴμωξεν : cp. O. T. 65 ὕπνῳ γ’ εὕδοντα , n.

ἐκ δ’ … ἠρᾶτο , tmesis: cp. n. on 106.

διψίαν : cp. 246.

φέρει κόνιν . A difficulty presents itself. The essence of the symbolical rite was the sprinkling of dust. She had done that (245). Was it not, then, done once for all? In Horace ( C. 1. 28. 35) the passer-by is free when the dust has been thrown; he can go his way. I have never seen this question put or answered. The only answer which I can suggest is that, at her first visit, she had not brought the χοαί. (Cp. on 245 ff.) Perhaps the rite was considered complete only if the χοαί were poured while the dust still covered the corpse.

The πρόχους , or ‘out-pourer,’ was a jug, especially a water-jug, with a handle, and had, of course, various forms; some of the types given by Guhl and Koner (p. 147, fig. 198, 26—31) resemble modern water-jugs for washing.

εὐκρότητος , ‘well-hammered,’ and so ‘wellwrought,’ is the epith. of a knife (δωρίς , sc. κοπίς) in Eur. El. 819.

ἄρδην (for ἀέρδην, from αἴρω) is found with πηδᾶν ( Ai. 1279) and φέρειν (Eur. Alc. 608), but is usu. fig., as with ἀπολλύναι. Here, ἄρδην ἐκ πρόχου στέφει = ἄρασα τὸν πρόχουν στέφει.

χοαῖσι . In Od. 10.519 the three χοαί to the dead are of (1) hydromel, (2) wine, (3) water: see O. C. 479 n.

τρισπόνδ. , instead of the simple τρισίν: cp. on 346 σπ. δικτυοκλώστοις. χοαί were to the νέρτεροι, as σπονδαί to the ὕπατοι: λοιβαί could mean either ( O. C. 477).— στέφει : El. 51 τύμβον... | λοιβαῖσι πρῶτον καὶ καρατόμοις χλιδαῖς | στέψαντες.

ἱέμεσθα , pres.: for the ι—, cp. O. C. 1279 n.

σὺν δὲ … θηρώμεθ’ , tmesis, as El. 746 σὺν δ’ ἑλίσσεται | τμητοῖς ἱμᾶσι . But σύν is adv. ib. 299 σὺν δ’ ἐποτρύνει : cp. above, 85.

ἠλέγχομεν , proceeded to prove against her, i.e. taxed her with, her past and present deeds. We should not supply αὐτήν: the verb governs τὰς πράξεις only: cp. Plat. Theaet. 161E ἐλέγχειν τὰς ἀλλήλων φαντασίας τε καὶ δόξας (examine into). It would be natural to say, ταῦτα ἐλέγχω αὐτήν, but hardly τὰς πράξεις ἐλέγχω αὐτήν.

ἄπαρνος … οὐδενός = οὐδὲν ἀπαρνουμένη, the gen. with the adj. corresponding to the acc. with the verb; cp. κωλυτικός, ποιητικός τινος etc.

καθίστατο , she did not take up the position of denying anything. Her attitude towards the charge was one of simple confession. καθίστασθαι with a predicative adj. expresses definite assumption of a character, or complete attainment of a state; Thuc. 3.102 ξύμμαχον καθεστήξει (will have definitely allied itself): 6. 15 πολέμιοι καθέστασαν: 4. 78 τοῖς πᾶσι...ὕποπτον καθεστήκει: 2. 59 ἄποροι καθεστῶτες: 4. 26 ἀφειδὴς...καθεστήκει: 6. 59 χαλεπωτέρα...ἡ τυραννὶς κατέστη. So Ai. 306 ἔμφρων...καθίσταται : O. T. 703 φονέα...καθεστάναι .

ἅμ’ for the MS. ἀλλ’ (ΑΜ for ΑΛΛ) is certain; καθίστ. would be unmeaning with the adverbs, and we cannot supply a new verb. Cp. Thuc. 7.77 § 6 σιτία ἅμα κομίζειν , where ἅμα (for the MS. ἄλλα) is due to Reiske. Besides ἅμα μὲν ...ἅμα δέ (‘partly’...‘partly’), we also find double ἅμα, (a) wherethe clauses are linked by καί, as here; Plat. Gorg. 496B ὧν ἅμα τε ἀπαλλάττεται ἄνθρωπος καὶ ἅμα ἔχει (cp. ib. 497 A): (b) with partic. and finite verb: id. Tim. 38 B ἵνα ἅμα γεννηθέντες ἅμα καὶ λυθωσιν. Verg. G. 3. 201 simul arva fuga, simul aequora verrens. Cp. Hor. S. 1. 7. 11 Inter | Hectora Priamiden animosum atque inter Achillen.

φίλους φησί, διὰ τὸ εἷναι τὴν Ἀντιγόνην τοῦ βασιλικοῦ γένους (schol.): he is a δοῦλος of the family. Cp. Eur. Med. 54 χρηστοῖσι δούλοις συμφορὰ τὰ δεσποτῶν | κακῶς πίτνοντα .

πάντα ταῦθ’ refers to ἐς κακὸν δὲ...ἀλγεινόν: ‘all these things’=‘all such objects as the safety of friends.’ λαβεῖν , ‘to obtain,’ epexeg. of ἥσσω: cp. 638 : Ph. 81: El. 1015 προνοίας οὐδὲν ἀνθρώποις ἔφυ | κέρδος λαβεῖν ἄμεινον : where, as here, we have a gen. depending on the comparat., instead of ἤ with nom.— Semitelos takes λαβεῖν as=ὑπολαβεῖν: ‘all these considerations are naturally lower in my estimate than my own safety.’ Similarly Campbell; ‘It is in my nature’ (ἐμοὶ πέφυκε—a questionable sense) ‘to take less account of all this than of my own safety.’ But such a use of λαμβάνειν does not seem warranted by Thuc. 2.42. τὴν τιμωρίαν...ποθεινοτέραν λαβόντες, or by such phrases as λαμβάνειν τι ἐν πόθῳ ( O. C. 1679).—Blaydes's τἄλλ’ … ταῦτ’ is attractive, but unnecessary; and palaeographically it is not probable.

σὲ δή, κ.τ.λ. sc. καλῶ. Eur. Helen 546 σὲ τὴν ὄρεγμα δεινὸν ἡμιλλωμένην | τύμβου ’πὶ κρηπῖδ’ ἐμπύρους τ’ ὀρθοστάτας, | μεῖνον . Aristoph. Av. 274 ΕΥ. οὗτος, ὦ σέ τοι. ΠΕ. τί βωστρεῖς ; The abrupt acc. calls the person's attention in a rough and harsh way. A governing verb is sometimes added, as El. 1445 σέ τοι, σὲ κρίνω, ναὶ σέ, τὴν ἐν τῷ πάρος | χρόνῳ θρασεῖαν . Ai. 1226 σὲ δὴ τὰ δεινὰ ῥήματ’ ἀγγέλλουσί μοι | τλῆναι... | σέ τοι, τὸν ἐκ τῆς αἰχμαλωτίδος λέγω . Eur. Med. 271 σὲ τὴν σκυθρωπὸν καὶ πόσει θυμουμένην, | Μήδειαν, εἶπον , etc. Antigone has her eyes bent on the ground: she is neither afraid nor sullen, but feels that Creon and she can never come to terms. There is nothing in common between their thoughts. Cp. 499.

φὴς δεδρακέναι, ἢ καταρνεῖ μὴ δεδρ ., a zeugma. καταρνεῖ . In this compound (found only here) κατά gives the notion of ‘downright,’ ‘explicit’: cp. καταφάναι (to affirm), κατάδηλος. μή regularly precedes the inf. when ἀρνεῖσθαι means ‘to deny,’ but not when it means ‘to refuse’: Phaedr. 256 A ἀπαρνηθῆναι τὸ αὑτοῦ μέρος χαρίσασθαι.

καὶ......κοὐκ , corresponding with the alternatives in Creon's question : for the conjunctive form, cp. 1192: [Eur.] Rhes. 164 ναί, καὶ δίκαια ταῦτα κοὐκ ἄλλως λέγω.

τὸ μή : for the art., cp. 78. τὸ μὴ οὐκ is unnecessary, though it would be normal: cp. O. T. 1387 οὐκ ἂν ἐσχόμην | τὸ μὴ ’ποκλῇσαι , n.

σὺ μέν . If she had denied the charge, the φύλαξ must have been detained; now, he can go. κομίζοις ἂν ς . gives a contemptuous permission. So in gentle command, Ph. 674 χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω , Tr. 624 στείχοις ἂν ἤδη . Cp. Eur. Phoen. 1636 κόμιζε σαυτὴν...δόμων ἔσω.

ἔξω with β. αἰτίας , after which ἐλεύθερον is pleonastic: cp. Ai. 464 γυμνὸν φανέντα τῶν ἀριστείων ἄτερ : and see n. on κενῆς above, v. 424.

μῆκος , adv., ‘at great length,’ like μακράν, τέλος, etc. If we read σύντομον or σύντομα, μῆκος might be obj. acc. to εἰπέ, but συντόμως seems right. Cp. Aesch. Pers. 698 μή τι μακιστῆρα μῦθον ἀλλὰ σύντομον λέγων | εἰπὲ καὶ πέραινε πάντα .

ᾔδησθα , not ᾔδης τὰ , is certainly right. This 2nd pers. occurs in seven places of drama, two of which require it (Eur. El. 926, Cycl. 108), while the other five admit it (this v., Tr. 988, Aristoph. Nub. 329, Th. 554, Eccl. 551). Similarly ἦσθα is either necessary or admissible whenever it occurs in Attic drama. Aristoph. Lys. 132 has ἔφησθα, and ἔφης nowhere: but the case for ἔφησθα as the sole classical form seems less strong than for ᾔδησθα and ἦσθα. ἔφησθα is required in four Homeric passages ( Il. 1.397, 16. 830: Od. 3.357, 23. 71), but ἔφης in one, Il. 22.331 Ἕκτορ, ἀτάρ που ἔφης Πατροκλῆ’ ἐξεναρίζων , and in another it is traditional, 22. 280 ἦτοι ἔφης γε (where ἔφησθα is unlikely). The ending is - σθα , not -θα, ς being an integral part of it: Curtius compares Lat. -sti (dedi-sti), and Gothic -st (saisô-st, thou sowedst), Gk Verb pp. 34 ff. Besides οἶσθα, ᾔδησθα, ἦσθα, and ἔφησθα, the forms which take σθα are the ηομ. εἶσθα (‘thou wilt go’); the presents indic. διδοῖσθα ( Il. 19.270) and τίθησθα ( Od. 9.404, 24. 476); and a few subjunctives and optatives (as βάλῃσθα, βάλοισθα).

κηρυχθέντα , the plur. partic. impersonal, as 570 ἡρμοσμένα, 576 δεδογμένα: a use more freq. with adjectives, as ἀδύνατα, δίκαια (cp. O.C.485n.), esp. verbals (below, 677).

ᾔδη : on the form cp. O. T. 1525 n.

τί δ’ οὐκ ἔμελλον , sc. εἰδέναι: ‘why was I not likely to know it?’=‘of course I knew it.’ Plat. Rep. 605C πάνδεινόν που (ἐστί). τί δ’ οὐ μέλλει (sc. εἶναι), εἴπερ γε δρᾷ αὐτό; Xen. Hellen. 4.1.6 τὸν δ’ υἱὸν... ἑώρακας αὐτοῦ ὡς καλός ἐστι;—τί δ’ οὐ μέλλω (sc. ἑωρακέναι );

ἐμφανῆ . I prefer this to L's ἐκφανῆ , not because Soph. does not elsewhere use ἐκφανής, but because, in the two places where Aesch. has used it, it has the sense of emerging into view ( Aesch. Pers. 398, the Greeks going into action at Salamis, or of standing out among other objects which are less distinct (ἀνδρὸς ἐκφανὲς τέκμαρ, Aesch. Eum. 244). The sense required here is simply, ‘public.’

καὶ δῆτ’ , ‘And you indeed dared ...?’ Not, ‘And then’ (i.e. with that knowledge), which would be κᾆτα.

Ζεύς is opposed to Creon's edicts, not only as supreme god and therefore guardian of all religious duty, but also in each of his two special qualities,—as χθόνιος ( O. C. 1606 n.),—and as οὐράνιος, since the denial of burial pollutes the realm of οἱ ἄνω θεοί (1072).

τῶν κάτω θεῶν . For this rare gen. (instead of the regular dat.) with ξύνοικος , cp. Lycurgus In Leocr. § 145 οὗτος ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χώρᾳ σύνοικος ὑμῶν γενήσεται. So O. C. 1382 Δίκη ξύνεδρος Ζηνός . ‘The Justice that dwells with the gods below’ is their personified right to claim from the living those religious observances which devote the dead to them. A person who omits such observances is defrauding Hades of his own: see 1070. This Justice, then, ‘has not ordained such laws’ as Creon's; it has not forbidden kinsfolk to bury their dead; on the contrary, it has bound them to do so. τοιούσδ’ … ὥρισεν is a certainly true correction of the MS. οἳ τούσδ’ … ὥρισαν . With the latter, οἳ are either Zeus and Δίκη,—which would be the natural sense,—or οἱ κάτω θεοί: and τούσδε νόμους are the laws of sepulture. But, after τάδε in 450, referring to Creon's edicts, the demonstrative pronoun here also should refer to them. Creon has just called his own laws τούσδε νόμους (449). If Antigone, immediately afterwards, used τούσδε νόμους to describe the divine laws, the stress on τούσδε would be extremely awkward. Further, τοιούσδ’ ὥρισεν has a pathetic force which renders it incomparably finer here than the somewhat tame statement of fact, ‘who have appointed the laws of burial among men.’

ἄγραπτα … νόμιμα . Arist. Rhet. 1.13 § 2 distinguishes (1) ἴδιος νόμος, the particular law which each community defines for itself, which is partly written, partly (so far as consisting in custom) unwritten: (2) κοινὸς νόμος, the universal, unwritten law of nature (ὁ κατὰ φύσιν). ἔστι γάρ, ὃ μαντεύονταί τι πάντες, φύσει κοινὸν δίκαιον καὶ ἄδικον, κἂν μηδεμία κοινωνία πρὸς ἀλλήλους ᾖ μηδὲ συνθήκη, οἷον καὶ ἡ Σοφοκλέους Ἀντιγόνη φαίνεται λέγουσα, ὅτι δίκαιον, ἀπειρημένον (=in spite of the edict), θάψαι τὸν Πολυνείκη, ὡς φύσει ὂν τοῦτο δίκαιον. (Here he

quotes vv. 456 f.) Cp. O.T. 865 ff. νόμοι... | ὑψίποδες, οὐρανίαν | δἰ αἰθέρα τεκνωθέντες, with notes there. Thuc. 2.37 (νόμοι ) ὅσοι ἄγραφοι ὄντες αἰσχύνην ὁμολογουμένην φέρουσι. When ‘the unwritten laws’ are thus called νόμοι, the latter word is used figuratively. νόμιμα , observances sanctioned by usage, is the more correct word: so Plat. Legg. 793A observes that τὰ καλούμενα ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν ἄγραφα νόμιμα cannot properly be called νόμοι, but still must be taken into account: δεσμοὶ γὰρ οὗτοι πάσης εἰσὶ πολιτείας, μεταξὺ πάντων ὄντες τῶν ἐν γράμμασι τεθέντων τε καὶ κειμένων καὶ τῶν ἔτι τεθησομένων.

ἀσφαλῆ , they stand fast for ever, like the θεῶν ἕδος ἀσφαλὲς αἰεί ( Od. 6.42).

θνητὸν ὄντ’ , ‘one who is a mortal,’—i.e. Creon; but it is needless to supply σέ from τὰ σά: the expression is the more forcible for being general. Cp. Eur. fr. 653 οὐ θαῦμ’ ἔλεξας, θνητὸν ὄντα δυστυχεῖν: Eur. Alc. 799 ὄντας δὲ θνητοὺς θνητὰ καὶ φρονεῖν χρεών. Bothe's θνητὰ φύνθ’, rashly adopted by Nauck, is a wanton change, which the ambiguity of the neut. pl. makes still worse.

ὑπερδραμεῖν , out-run, and so fig., prevail over: Eur. Phoen. 578 ἢν δ’ αὖ κρατηθῇς καὶ τὰ τοῦδ’ ὑπερδράμῃ , and his cause prevail (Canter's certain corr. of ὑπεκδράμῃ): Ion 973 καὶ πῶς τὰ κρείσσω θνητὸς οὖσ’ ὑπερδράμω; (prevail against Apollo). Ithas been proposed to refer θνητὸν ὄνθ’ to Antigone: but if she said, ‘I did not think your edicts so strong that I, a mortal, could prevail over divine law,’ δύνασθαι would rather imply that, if she had been able, she would have been willing to do so. Besides, ὑπερδραμεῖν is more naturally said of the law-giver who sets his law above the other law.

νῦν γε κἀχθές . Cp. Her. 2.53 μέχρι οὗ πρώην τε καὶ χθές . Plat. Legg. 677D ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, χθὲς καὶ πρώην γεγονότα (where the phrase is presently strengthened into τὸν ἀτεχνῶς χθὲς γενόμενον). The usu. Attic form was χθὲς καὶ πρώην, though πρώην καὶ χθές also occurs. Cp. Catullus 61. 137 hodie atque heri. So heri et nudius tertius. Tryphon, an Alexandrian grammarian of the Augustan age, is quoted by Apollonius De Adverb. p. 556, 32 as saying, χθὲς ἀττικώτερον τοῦ ἐχθές: but the reverse seems to be the case. Attic Comedy supports ἐχθές against χθές in a majority of cases; though χθές may have been preferred, even in prose, after a vowel.

ζῇ : cp. O. T. 482 ζῶντα (of the oracles which are operative, effectual), and ib. 45 n.

’φάνη , with prodelision of the temporal augment in the 6th place, as ὡς ἐγὼ ’φάνην O. C. 974 n.

τούτων (sc. τῶν νομίμων)... τὴν δίκην , the penalty belonging to these laws: i.e. the penalty of breaking them. The emphasis on τούτων

shows that, like ταῦτα just before, it refers to the νόμιμα: we cannot, therefore, render, ‘the penalty of such an act’ ( sc. τοῦ ὑπερδραμεῖν).

ἐν θεοῖσι , the forensic ἐν, denoting the tribunal: Plat. Legg. 916B διαδικαζέσθω δὲ ἔν τισι τῶν ἰατρῶν : Gorg. 464D εἰ δέοι ἐν παισὶ διαγωνίζεσθαι: Lys. or. 13 § 35 ὁ δὲ δῆμος ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἐν δισχιλίοις ἐψηφίσατο (sc. ποιεῖν τὴν κρίσιν). Cp. O. T. 677 ἐν...τοῖσδ ', n.

δώσειν . The fut. inf. and the pres. inf. are equally common after μέλλω in Soph. ( O. T. 967 n.).

θανουμένη γάρ introduces the reason for her conduct. ‘It was not likely that I should obey your edicts, and thereby incur punishment after death, for the sake of avoiding immediate death. For, as to death, I knew already that I must die some time or other; and if it is to be a little sooner, so much the better.’

τί δ’ οὔ ; sc. ἔμελλον ἐξειδέναι (448).

κεἰ μὴ σὺ προὐκήρυξας : Even if thou hadst not proclaimed death as the penalty of infringing the edict. The apodosis might be either (a) ἐξῄδη ἄν, implied in τί δ’ οὔ; or ( b) ἔδει ἄν με θανεῖν, implied in θανουμένη. But (a) is best: ‘I should have known it, even if you had not brought it publicly to my knowledge.’ For καὶ εἰ cp. O. T. 305 n.

τοῦ χρόνου , the natural term of life (cp. O. T. 963): expressed below by πρίν μοι μοῖραν ἐξήκειν βίου (896).

αὔτ’ , i.e. αὐτό. Cp. El. 1267 εἴ σε θεὸς ἐπόρισεν | ἁμέτερα πρὸς μέλαθρα, δαιμόνιον | αὐτὸ τίθημ’ ἐγώ : fr. 154 ἔχοιμ’ ἂν αὐτὸ μὴ κακῶς ἀπεικάσαι. αὖτε (L) would mean, ‘again,’ ‘on the other hand’ (so far from thinking it a loss). The epic αὖτε is used by Soph. in one lyric passage ( Tr. 1010); by Aesch. both in lyrics and in trimeters; never by The Eur. simpler αὐτό is more probable here.

φέρει = φέρεται ( O. C. 6 n.).—The woman uses the masc. gender in putting the general case. Cp. Eur. Med. 1017 οὔτοι μόνη σὺ σῶν ἀπεζύγης τέκνων· | κούφως φέρειν χρὴ θνητὸν ὄντα συμφοράς .

465-468

Kvičala and Wecklein reject these four verses, despairing of the difficulties found in vv. 466, 467, which have been variously amended; see Appendix. The alleged difficulties are, (1) παρ’ οὐδὲν ἄλγος: (2) the mention of the mother only: (3) the position of θανόντ’, which might suggest the sense, ‘slain by my mother’: (4) ηἰσχόμην (as L has it). Before dealing with these points, I would call attention to a trait which the impugners of these verses have overlooked, and which speaks strongly for the genuineness of the passage as a whole, corrupt though it be in certain words. That trait is the clause τοῖσδε δ’ οὐκ ἀλγύνομαι in 468, returning upon the thought παρ’ οὐδὲν ἄλγος in 466. This series of three clauses, in which the second is opposed to the first, and the third re-iterates the sense of the first, is peculiarly Sophoclean: cp. Ai. 1111 οὐ γάρ τι τῆς σῆς οὕνεκ’ ἐστρατεύσατο | γυναικός,... | ἀλλ’ οὕνεχ’ ὅρκων οἷσιν ἦν ἐνώμοτος, | σοῦ δ’ οὐδέν : similar instances are O. T. 337 f., Tr. 431 ff. This touch would hardly have come from an interpolator.

ἄλγος , nom., sc. ἐστί: παρ’ οὐδέν ,

adv.: ‘is a pain in no appreciable degree,’ is a pain not worth a thought: as he might have said, οὐδαμοῦ ἄλγος ἐστί. The normal use of παρ’ οὐδέν, ‘of no account,’ is either (a) with the verb εἶναι, as O. T. 982 ταῦθ’ ὅτῳ | παρ’ οὐδέν ἐστι , or (b) with a verb meaning ‘to esteem,’ as above, v. 34, τὸ πρᾶγμ’ ἄγειν | οὐχ ὡς παρ’ οὐδέν. The only peculiarity here is that, instead of a word in the general sense, ‘is esteemed’ ( ἄγεται), we have a virtual equivalent, tinged with the special thought of the moment, viz., ‘is a pain.’ Exactly so in El. 1327 we have πότερα παρ’ οὐδὲν τοῦ βίου κήδεσθ’ ἔτι, instead of πότερα παρ’ οὐδὲν τὸν βίον ἄγετε. Thus the suspicions as to the genuineness of παρ’ οὐδὲν ἄλγος are illusory.

ἀλλ’ ἄν . For the position of ἄν (to which objection has been taken) cp. El. 333 ἀλγῶ ’πὶ τοῖς παροῦσιν· ὥστ’ ἄν, εἰ σθένος | λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ’ ἂν οἷ’ αὐτοῖς φρονῶ : ib. 439 ἀρχὴν δ’ ἄν, εἰ μὴ τλημονεστάτη γυνὴ | πασῶν ἔβλαστε, τάσδε δυσμενεῖς χοὰς | οὐκ ἄν ποθ’, ὅν γ’ ἔκτεινε, τῷδ’ ἐπέστεφε .

ἄθαπτον ἠνσχόμην νέκυν , had allowed him to be an unburied corpse. For ἄθαπτον without ὄντα, cp. Hist. An. 8. 8 δύναται δ’ ἄποτος ἀνέχεσθαι (sc. ὤν): and O. T. 412 n. L has ηἰσχόμην , and ἠνσχόμην appears only as one of several readings in the later MSS.,—the other readings being manifestly impossible. The first question is, Could an Attic poet have used ἠνσχόμην for ἠνεσχόμην? We can only say that we find nothing really like it, and that no support for it can be drawn from the Homeric forms in which ἀνά suffers apocope, viz., ἄνσχεο = ἀνασχοῦ ( Il. 23.587 etc.), ἀνσχήσεσθαι ( Il. 5.104), ἀνσχετά ( Od. 2.63), ἀνσχεθέειν ( Od. 5.320). Still, there is force in Prof. Tyrrell's remark (Classical Review, vol. 11. p. 140) that ‘ἠνσχόμην is just the form in which an Attic poet would have applied apocope of ἀνά, inasmuch as he would have felt that he was only sacrificing the redundant augment.’

In my first edition I placed in the text the emendation of Semitelos (1887) ᾔσχυναν κύνες . Cp. Il. 22.74 ἀλλ’ ὅτε δὴ πολιόν τε κάρη πολιόν τε γένειον | αἰδῶ τ’ αἰσχύνωσι κύνες κταμένοιο γέροντος . If the ες of κύνες had been obliterated, νέκυν would easily have arisen (esp. after ν); and a change of υ into ο would have taken ᾔσχυναν far towards ηἰσχόμην. But, while I still hold that this brilliant conjecture has no small degree of probability, I also recognise the justice of the criticism that the context here decidedly favours a verb in the first person.

Other emendations will be found in the Appendix. Most of them assume that we must have ἠνεσχόμην (or ἀνεσχόμην), and therefore alter the words θανόντ’ ἄθαπτον and νέκυν in various ways, —usu. omitting νέκυν. The verses produced by these processes are wretched, while, from a palaeographical point of view, they are pure conjectures, which do not attempt to account for the tradition in L.—Two points remain. (1) τὸν ἐξ ἐμῆς | μητρός . This is like saying, ‘the son of the same womb.’ Cp. Eur. I. T. 497 πότερον ἀδελφὼ μητρός ἐστον ἐκ μιᾶς ; Yet it has been seriously urged by many critics, as a ground for change, that a mention of the father was indispensable. ἐμῆς need not be altered to ὁμῆς (Seyffert)

or μιᾶς (Meineke). (2) τὸν ἐξ ἐμ. | μητρος θανόντ’ . It is quite true that, when written, these words have an awkward ambiguity; but they would have had none when spoken, since a slight pause after μητρός would have been required to bring out θανόντ’. This is the right test to apply in the case of a play written to be acted.

σχεδόν τι , ‘almost,’ iron., ‘it might perhaps be said that...’: so El. 608 (also at the close of a defiant speech), εἰ γὰρ πέφυκα τῶνδε τῶν ἔργων ἴδρις, | σχεδόν τι τὴν σὴν οὐ καταισχύνω φύσιν. Cp. ib. 550 εἰ δὲ σοὶ δοκῶ φρονεῖν κακῶς | γνώμην δικαίαν σχοῦσα, τοὺς πέλας ψέγε (end of a speech): also Ai. 1038, O. C. 1665.

μώρῳ μωρίαν : cp. 754. The παρήχησις gives bitterness (O.T. 371).

ὀφλισκάνω with dat., as Eur. Bacch. 854 γέλωτα θηβαίοις ὀφλεῖν , etc.; but in this use it can also take πρός τινα or παρά τινι (Plato). Cp. O. T. 511.

These two verses give a moment of stillness before the storm breaks forth. So at O. T. 404 four verses of the chorus divide the angry speech of Oedipus from the retort of Teiresias.

τὸ γέννημα τῆς παιδός (the offspring consisting in the maiden) the maiden his offspring, δηλοῖ (sc. ὂν) ὠμόν , shows herself fierce, ἐξ ὠμοῦ πατρός , from a fierce sire (i.e. by the disposition inherited from him). Cp. 20 δηλοῖς...καλχαίνουσα (n.): the omission of ὄν is somewhat bold, but possible for poetry; cp. 709 ὤφθησαν κενοί: Plat. Legg. 896B δέδεικται ψυχὴ τῶν πάντων πρεσβυτάτη . γέννημα occurs below, 628, O. T. 1167, and Tr. 315, meaning always ‘that which is begotten,’ the offspring. So in Plato the word always means the thing produced; for in Sophist. 266 D, τὸ δ’ ὁμοιωμάτων τινῶν γέννημα, where Ast takes it as=‘confectio,’ the sense is, ‘the other a product (consisting in) certain images.’ In Aesch. PV 850 ἐπώνυμον δὲ τῶν Διὸς γεννημάτων | τέξεις κελαινὸν Ἔπαφον , the word, if genuine, would certainly mean ‘begetting’; but Wieseler's correction, γέννημ’ ἁφῶν (‘an offspring called after the touch of Zeus’), is highly probable. For τὸ γέννημα τῆς παιδός as=ἡ γεννηθεῖσα παῖς, cp. 1164 τέκνων σπορᾷ, El. 1233 γοναὶ σωμάτων ἐμοὶ φιλτάτων (her brother), Eur. Med. 1098 τέκνων...βλάστημα . Here, the thought would have been complete without τῆς παιδός (‘the offspring shows the father's fierceness’), which is added, as if by an after-thought, for the further definition of τὸ γέννημα. I cannot believe that Soph. intended τὸ γέννημα τῆς παιδός to mean, ‘the inborn disposition of the maiden,’—an unexampled sense for γέννημα. On the other hand, all the emendations are unsatisfactory and improbable. The language, though somewhat peculiar, appears to be sound.

εἴκειν … κακοῖς , not ‘to succumb’ to them, but to bend before them (as trees before a storm, 713), with a prudent view to self-preservation. Cp. Aesch. PV 320 σὺ δ’ οὐδέπω ταπεινός, οὐδ’ εἴκεις κακοῖς, | πρὸς τοῖς παροῦσι δ’ ἄλλα προσλ βεῖν θέλεις .

ἀλλ’ ἴσθι τοι : so oft. in threat enings: cp. 1064: Tr. 1107 ἀλλ’ εὖ<*> τοι τόδ’ ἴστε : El. 298 ἀλλ’ ἴσθι τοι τίσου<*> γ’ ἀξίαν δίκην.

πίπτειν , instead of the regular πίπτοντα: this inf. after οἶδα (as= ‘I know that...’, not, ‘I know how to...’) is not rare in poetry; cp. O. T. 691, Ph. 1329, Aesch. Pers. 173, 431, 435: so after ἐπίσταμαι above, 293, and 1092.

ὀπτὸν … περισκελῆ , tempered to hardness: for the proleptic adj., cp. Thuc. 2.75 ᾔρετο τὸ ὕψος...μέγα , Eur. El. 376 (πενία) διδάσκει δ’ ἄνδρα τῇ χρείᾳ κακόν (to be bad).

περισκελής , dried or parched all round, from σκέλλω, torrere: cp. Il. 23.190 μὴ πρὶν μένος ἠελίοιο | σκήλεῑ ἀμφὶ περὶ χρόα ἴνεσιν : hence, fig., αί περισκελεῖς φρένες ( Ai. 649): cp. retorridus. From the same rt come σκληρός, σκελετός (skeleton), and ἀσκελής (dried),—this last having a fig. sense in the Homeric ἀσκελὲς αἰεί (‘stubbornly,’ Od. 1.68).

ἐκ πυρός , by means of fire; cp. 990: Ph. 710 ἐξ ὠκυβόλων τόξων...ἀνύσειε...φορβάν.

θραυσθέντα καὶ ῥαγέντα , ‘broken and shivered.’ ῥαγέντα is here the stronger word, in so far as it pictures the fragments of the ruptured iron flying asunder, while θραυσθέντα merely says that the iron is broken into pieces. As Heinrich Schmidt observes, the foremost idea in ῥηγνύναι is that of the separation of the parts,—the rent or rift being brought before us; in θραύειν, that of a whole being broken into small pieces (Synonymik der Gr. Sprache, vol. 111. pp. 304 ff.).

χαλινῷ δ’ . Cp. O. C. 714 ἵπποισιν τὸν ἀκεστῆρα χαλινόν , n. For σμικρῷ cp. Ai. 1253 μέγας δὲ πλευρὰ βοῦς ὑπὸ σμικρᾶς ὅμως | μάστιγος ὀρθὸς εἰς ὁδὸν πορεύεται.

καταρτυθέντας , brought under discipline, made docile. καταρτύω =to equip, or prepare ( O. C. 71): then, like ἁρμόζω ( O. C. 908), in a fig. sense, to bring into order, regulate, by a course of training: cp. Plat. Legg. 808D (a child is the ὑβριστότατον θηρίων), ὅσῳ μάλιστα ἔχει πηγὴν τοῦ φρονεῖν μήπω κατηρτυμένην (not yet brought under discipline): Plut. Mor. 38C (the sensuous impulses, αἱ ἐφ’ ἡδονὴν ὁρμαί, are disastrous) ἂν ἐᾷ τις ἀφέτους, ᾗ πεφύκασι, χωρεῖν, καὶ μὴ...καταρτύῃ τὴν φύσιν (discipline the character). Plut. Them. 2 τοὺς τραχυτάτους πώλους ἀρίστους ἵππους γίνεσθαι φάσκων, ὅταν ἧς προσἡκει τύχωσι παιδείας καὶ καταρτύσεως (education and discipline). In Aesch. Eum. 473 the act. perf. part. κατηρτυκὼς (ἱκέτης) is said to be a term applied to a horse whose mouth was ‘fully furnished’ with teeth (i.e. which had shed its foal's teeth), and hence, ‘broken in,’ ‘tamed’: at any rate, it must be kept distinct from the passive καταρτυθείς as used here.

Suspicion has fallen on ἐκπέλει , which occurs only here: Hesych. explains it by ἔξεστι, and ἐξέπελεν by ἐξεγένετο. He would hardly have invented the imperf., if he had not met with it in literature: and the metrical convenience of such a synonym for ἔξεστι is a further reason for believing that it was current.

ὅστις : for the omission of the anteced. τούτῳ, see on 35: for the gender, on 464.

τῶν πέλας : cp. fr. 83 ('tis better to conquer by any means) ἢ δοῦλον αὐτὸν ὄντα τῶν πέλας κλύειν.

αὕτη δ’ . Creon began by addressing Antigone (473). He now denounces her to the Chorus. Cp. O. T. 1078 αὕτη δ’ ἴσως, κ.τ.λ. (of Iocasta).— ὑβρίζειν μὲν … ὕβρις δ’ : epanaphora ( O. T. 25 n.). The sense is, ‘Her disobedience was an act of consummate insolence; and her defiance now makes it worse.’ ἐξηπίστατο , ‘knew thoroughly,’ with bitterness; cp. 686; Eur. fr. 796 ὅστις σωφρονεῖν ἐπίσταται. τότ’ is explained by ὑπερβαίνουσα.—τοὺς προκ ., which had been set forth: cp. O. T. 865, Eur. I. T. 1189 τὸν νόμον...τὸν προκείμενον.

τούτοις , neut., these deeds: cp. 468 κείνοις ...τοῖσδε.

δεδρακυῖαν γελᾶν =to exult in having done it. For the partic., cp. Aristoph. Vesp. 1007 κοὐκ ἐγχανεῖταί σ’ ἐξαπατῶν Ὑπέρβολος .

νῦν , ‘now,’ i.e. ‘under these circumstances,’ is better than νυν or τἄρ’ here.

εἰ ταῦτα … κράτη , if this victory shall remain on record for her, without bringing her any punishment. For κράτη , deeds of might, and so prevalence, victory, cp. El. 476 Δίκα, δίκαια φερομένα χεροῖν κράτη : ib. 689 οὐκ οἶδα τοιοῦδ’ ἀνδρὸς ἔργα καὶ κράτη . For κείσεται , cp. Pind. I. 4. 17 τὶν δ’ ἐν Ἰσθμῷ διπλόα θάλλοισ’ ἀρετά, | Φυλακίδα, κεῖται, ‘for thee, Phylacidas, a double glory of valour is laid up at the Isthmus.’ So, here, κείσεται means, ‘placed to her credit,’ ‘permanently secured to her’; cp. the colloquialism, ‘to score a success.’ Other interpretations are:—(1) ‘If this royal power of mine shall have been instituted without penalty for her.’ For the word κράτη, this sense is tenable (cp. 60, 166, 173, O. T. 237): it is the whole phrase that appears strained. And ταῦτ’ (said with bitter emphasis) evidently refers to Antigone's acts; cp. 483 τούτοις. Semitelos reads πείσεται : ‘If this sovereignty of mine’ (here Creon lifts his sceptre) ‘shall yield to her without punishing her.’ The verb would, however, be strange, and somewhat weak. (2) ‘If these edicts shall have been set forth without penalty for her.’ This last gives an impossible sense to κράτη. Aristoph. Ran. 1126 ff. illustrates the poetical ambiguity of κράτη, the debate there being whether, by πατρῷα κράτη, Aesch. meant, ‘a victory over a father,’ or ‘power derived from a father.’—For the form of ἀνατί , cp. O. C. 1251 n.: for ταῦτα without τά , ib. 471.

ἀδελφῆς , (child of) a sister, ἀδελφιδῆ: for the gen., cp. 380, 825.

εἴθ’ ὁμαιμονεστέρα , ‘or nearer in blood to me than any member of my family.’ The gen. ὁμαιμονεστέρας (see cr. n.) would mean, ‘or (child of) one nearer in blood to me,’ etc. She could be the child of no one nearer than a sister, unless it were of a mother or of a daughter; and it is far-fetched to suppose that Creon means, ‘my niece,—aye, my sister, or my granddaughter.’ All that he means is, ‘my niece,—aye, or the nearest relation possible.’ This is more simply and clearly said by the nom. ὁμαιμονεστέρα. If the comparative were here restricted to the regular Sophoclean sense of the positive ὅμαιμος and ὁμαίμων, as meaning brother or sister (see on O. C. 330), then the gen. could be explained in another way, viz., as a rhetorical hyperbole: ‘sister's child, or child of one who was thrice my sister,’ —like Plato Lysis 210C ὁ πατὴρ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ καὶ εἴ τι τούτων οἰκειότερόν ἐστι.

Hyperbole is congenial to Creon's excitement; cp. 1040. But the addition, τοῦ παντὸς Ζ. ἑρκείου, ill suits this, while, on the other hand, it agrees well with the nom. ὁμαιμονεστέρα. On the whole, then, I incline to prefer the nom.; but the point is a nice one, and the gen. is quite tenable.

κυρεῖ (οὖσα), =ἐστί: cp. O. T. 362 φονέα...κυρεῖν .

τοῦ παντὸς Ζηνὸς ἑρκείου = πάντων τῶν οἰκείων (schol.): so Eustath. 1930, 30 ἑρκεῖον Δία ἐκεῖνος (Sophocles) τοὺς ἐν οἴκῳ πάντας δηλοῖ. The altar of Ζεὺς ἑρκεῖος stood in the court-yard (αὐλή) in front of the Greek house; ἕρκος denoting the buildings which enclose the αὐλή, or, sometimes, the space so enclosed, the αὐλή itself. In Od. 22.334 Phemius thinks of passing from the μέγαρον into the αὐλή, Διὸς μεγάλου ποτὶ βωμὸν | Ἑρκείου. (Cp. my Introd. to Homer, p. 58.) This is the altar at which Peleus was sacrificing, αὐλῆς ἐν χόρτῳ ( Il. 11.774 : cp. Athen. 5, p. 189 F): as in Plat. Rep. 328C there is sacrifice in the αὐλή. So in Her. 6.68 Demaratus supplicates his mother especially by τοῦ Ἑρκείου Διὸς τοῦδε (whose altar or image he is touching, καταπτόμενος). Priamisslain πρὸς...κρηπίδων βάθροις...Ζηνὸς ἑρκείου (Eur. Tro. 16),—ἐπὶ τῇ ἐσχάρᾳ, τοῦ Ἑρκείου (Paus. 4.17.4): cp. Ovid Ibis 286, Cui nihil Hercei profuit ara Iovis. In Cratinus jun., Χείρων 1 ff. (c. 350 B.C.), a returned exile says, ξυγγενεῖς | καὶ φράτορας καὶ δημότας εὑρὼν μόλις | εἰς τὸ κυλικεῖον ἐνεγράφην (put on the feasting-list—παρὰ προσδοκίαν for εἰς τὸ γραμματεῖον): Ζεὺς ἔστιμοι | ἑρκεῖος, ἔστι φράτριος: where ἑρκεῖος corresponds with ξυγγενεῖς. Dionysius 1. 67 expresses the attributes of the Roman Penates by the words πατρῷοι, γενέθλιοι, κτήσιοι, μύχιοι, ἐρκεῖοι (for ἑρκίους in his text should be ἑρκείους: so L has ἑρκίου here).—In relation to the family, Ζεύς is also γενέθλιος ( Pind. O. 8. 16: cp. ξύναιμος, Pind. O. 659), ὁμόγνιος, and ἐφέστιος (as presiding over household life: Ai. 492, Her. 1.44).—For the god's name used to denote that which he protects, cp. Eur. Hec. 345 πέφευγας τὸν ἐμὸν ἱκέσιον Δία , = my supplication, with its consequences.

ἀλύξετον . The pres. ind. ἀλύσκω occurs in Apollon. Rhod., and the pres. part. in Hom. Od.; otherwise we find only the fut. (usu. ἀλύξω, but ἀλύξομαι, Hes. Op. 363) and aor. ἤλυξα (once midd., ἐξαλύξωμαι Ai. 656). The gen. μόρου follows the analogy of ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀπαλλάττεσθαι, etc. The regular constr. of the verb is with the acc. (as in the Homeric κῆρας ἀλύξας), and so Eur. always has an acc. with ἐξήλυξα. In El. 627 θράσους | τοῦδ’ οὐκ ἀλύξεις , the gen. is not like this, but causal (‘for this boldness’). Oppian's ἐξήλυξε μόροιο ( Hal. 3. 104) was obviously suggested by our verse. So in Ph. 1044 Soph. has ventured on τῆς νόσου πεφευγέναι, thinking, doubtless, of the Homeric πεφυγμένος ἦεν ἀέθλων.

καὶ γὰρ οὖν , for indeed: cp. 771 εὖ γὰρ οὖν , O. C. 980 οὐ γὰρ οὖν , ib. 985 ἀλλ’ ἓν γὰρ οὖν.

ἐπαιτιῶμαι κείνην , I accuse her, βουλεῦσαι ἴσον τοῦδε τάφου , of having had an equal share in plotting this burial. For the inf. after ἐπαιτιᾶσθαι cp. El. 603 ὃν πολλὰ δή με σοὶ τρέφειν μιάστορα | ἐπῃτιάσω . Aristoph. Vesp. 1446 Αἴσωπον οἱ Δελφοί ποτε...φιάλην ἐπῃτιῶντο κλέψαι . Plat. Critias 120C εἴ τίς τι παραβαίνειν αὐτῶν αἰτιῷτό τινα . For the substantival ἴσον with gen., cp. Eur. Ion 818 ὁμοῖος εἶναι τῆς τύχης τ’ ἴσον φέρειν : id. Ph. 547 δωμάτων ἔχων ἴσον.—Another construction is possible: ἴσον ἐπαιτιῶμαι κείνην τοῦδε τοῦ τάφου, βουλεῦσαι: ‘I charge her equally with this burial,—i.e. with plotting it.’ The constr. with the gen. is frequent ( Aesch. PV 974 ὴ= κἀμὲ γάρ τι ξυμφορᾶς ἐπαιτιᾷ ;): the objection here is that the epexegetic infin. βουλεῦσαι, requiring a case different from that governed by ἐπαιτιῶμαι, ought to come last: cp. Plat. Crito 52B οὐδ’ ὲπιθυμία σε ἄλλης πόλεως οὐδ’ ἄλλων νόμων ἔλαβεν εἰδέναι : Eur. Med. 1399 χρῄζω στόματος | παίδων ὁ τάλας προσπτύξασθαι . In O. T. 644 εἴ σέ τι | δέδρακ’, ὀλοίμην, ὧν ἐπαιτιᾷ με δρᾶν, ὧν might represent either (a) τούτων ὧν, δρᾶν being epexegetic, or (b) τούτων ἅ (acc. governed by δρᾶν); the latter is simplest.

βουλεῦσαι , of plotting mischief, as Tr. 807 τοιαῦτα...πατρὶ βουλεύσασ’ ἐμῷ : Ai. 1055 στρατῷ...βουλεύσας φόνον .

καί νιν καλεῖτ’ , ‘And now call her.’ This is the καί so frequent in the orators, when the speaker turns to call for witnesses, documents, etc.: Lys. or. 16 § 13 καί μοι ἀνάβηθι , or. 13 § 35 καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι τὸ ψήφισμα .

λυσσῶσαν … οὐδ’ ἐπ .: cp. O. T. 58 n.: Her. 9.55 μαινόμενον καὶ οὐ φρενήρεα.

ἐπήβολον , ‘in possession of’ (compos), a word used by Aesch. ( Aesch. P. V. 444 φρενῶν, Aesch. Ag. 542 νόσου), but not by Eur. Itbelonged to the diction of Ionian epos, appearing first in Od. 2.319 (οὐ γὰρ νηὸς ἐπήβολος οὐδ’ ἐρετάων), and is used by Herod. ; Plato, too, admits it (as Euthyd. 289B ἐπιστήμης ἐπηβόλους). Düntzer would derive it from ἐπί and ἄβολος (‘meeting with’), assumed from the late verb ἀβολέω as=ἀντιβολέω ( Rhod. Ap. 3. 1148); but it is more likely that it was simply an epic metrical license for ἐπίβολος. The sense seems to come from ἐπιβάλλομαι as=‘to throw oneself on’ a thing, and so take possession of it.

ὁ θυμὸς τῶν … τεχνωμένων , the mind of those who are planning nothing aright (planning utter mischief) in the dark, φιλεῖ κλοπεὺς ᾑρῆσθαι , is apt to stand convicted of its treason, πρόσθεν , beforehand,—i.e. before the treasonable deed has been done. For the order of words (ὁ θυμός being divided from the attributive gen. by the predicate), cp. Thuc. 2.8 ἡ δὲ εὔνοια παρὰ πολὺ ἐποίει τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἐς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους . Ismene has not yet been caught in a disloyal act; but her guilty conscience has already shown itself. κλοπεύς here answers to κλέπτειν as=‘to do by stealth or fraud,’ Ai. 1137 πόλλ’ ἂν κακῶς λάθρᾳ σὺ κλέψειας κακά . It denotes the plotter's treachery towards the State, not the betrayal of the plotter by his own conscience (as some have taken it). ᾑρῆσθαι κλοπεύς (without ὤν), as O. T. 576 φονεὺς ἁλώσομαι : the perf. (expressing that the exposure is already decisive), like ηὑρῆσθαι ib. 1050.

τεχνωμένων midd., as usual; cp. Ph. 80 τεχνᾶσθαι κακά. This is better than to make it pass., as a gen. absol., (‘when utter mischief is being contrived,’) a constr. which seems to require the change of ὀρθῶς to ὀρθῶν, since τὰ μηδὲν ὀρθῶς could hardly mean, ‘things which (are) in no wise well,’ sc. ἔχοντα. οἱ μηδὲν ὀρθῶς τεχνώμενοι=those who plan nothing in such a way as to be right (the generic μή): cp. Ph. 407 παν<*>ς ἂν λόγου κακοῦ | γλώσσῃ θιγόντα καὶ πανουργίας, ἀφ’ ἧς | μηδὲν δίκαιον ἐς τέλος μέλλοι ποιεῖν .

γε μέντοι : cp. O. T. 442 n. ‘(I hate such plotting in the dark:) however, I certainly hate this also,—when a detected traitor seeks to glorify the treason.’

Ismene's guilty terror is contrasted with Antigone's impudent hardihood,—as Creon deems it. μισῶ … ὅταν , like μέμνησαι ὅτε...ἐποίησας ( Xen. Oec. 2. 11), οὶ=δ’ ἡνίκ’ Αἴας εἷλκε (Eur. Tro. 70) etc.

ἔπειτα , like εἶτα, as Ai. 760 ὅστις ἀνθρώπου φύσιν | βλαστὼν ἔπειτα μὴ κατ’ ἄνθρωπον φρονῇ.

καλλύνειν , to make καλός (fr. 786 πρόσωπα καλλύνουσα, of the waxing moon), here, to make specious: so Plat. Legg. 944B εὐδιάβολον κακὸν καλλύνων (a soldier excusing himself for ὅπλων ἀποβολή).

θέλεις τι μεῖζον , sc. ποιεῖν,— not that θέλω could not take a simple acc., but a Greek would mentally supply a general inf. to balance κατακτεῖναι: cp. Thuc. 3.85 ἀπόγνοια...τοῦ ἄλλο τι (sc. ποιεῖν ) ἢ κρατεῖν τῆς γῆς.

ἑλών : cp. O. T. 641 κτεῖναι λαβών.

ἐγὼ μὲν οὐδέν . He desires nothing more,—and will take nothing less.

ἅπαντ’ ἔχω : cp. Eur. Or. 749 τοῦτο πάντ’ ἔχω μαθών (‘tell me that, and I am satisfied’).

ἀρεστὸν οὐδέν , not ἀρεστὸς οὐδείς: cp. O. T. 1195 βροτῶν | οὐδέν.

μηδ’ ἀρεσθείη . Cp. 686. If sound (as it seems to be), this is a solitary example of the aor. pass. ἠρέσθην as=‘became pleasing,’ and must be defended by the pass. (or midd.) ἀρέσκομαι as used by , Herod. 6. 128 ἠρέσκοντο, ‘they were approved’ (or, ‘they pleased’): 9. 79 μήτε Αἰγινήτῃσι ἅδοιμι μήτε τοῖσι ταῦτα ἀρέσκεται (those who approve this course). Considering the Ionic affinities of Attic Tragedy, this use of ἀρέσκομαι in Ionic prose seems a sufficient warrant for a corresponding use of ἠρέσθην, whether we take it as properly passive (‘was approved’), or as a pass. form used to supplement the middle (‘pleased’). I do not add Eur. fr. 942 θεοῖς ἀρέσκου, because there I should read θεοὺς ἀρέσκου, ‘propitiate the gods,’ the Attic use of the midd.; cp. Xen. Mem. 4.3.16 νόμος δὲ δήπου πανταχοῦ ἐστι κατὰ δύναμιν ἱεροῖς θεοὺς ἀρέσκεσθαι , ‘to propitiate the gods with sacrifice. The Attic passive meant ‘I am pleased,’ Thuc. 1.129 τοῖς λόγοις τοῖς ἀπὸ σοῦ ἀρέσκομαι , 5. 37 οἱ βοιωτάρχαι ἠρέσκοντο, but occurs only in pres. and impf.: ἠρέσθην, as the corresponding aor., appears only in later Greek, as Paus. 2.13.8 οὐκ ἀρεσθεὶς τῷ δοθέντι πώματι . The traditional ἀρεσθείη, then, is at least not less probable than Hermann's ἀρεσθείην , when the whole question is viewed in the light of attested usage. As to Elmsley's neat ἀρέστ’ εἴη , a fatal objection to it is the change to the impers. plur.; as if one said, ‘not one of your words pleases me; and never may I feel pleasure:’ (without, ‘in them’).

τἀμά , a general phrase, ‘my views.’ Cp. El. 1050 οὔτε γὰρ σὺ τἄμ’ ἔπη | τολμᾷς ἐπαινεῖν οὔτ’ ἐγὼ τοὺς σοὺς τρόπους.

ἔφυ with partic. (‘are naturally ...’), cp. O. T. 9 πρέπων ἔφυς .

καίτοι marks the transition to another and higher point of view than Creon's. ‘Thou wilt never approve my deed. And yet how could I have won a better claim to the approval of all who judge rightly?’ In καίτοι πόθεν κλέος γ’ the absence of caesura gives a slower movement, just as in v. 44: she communes with her own thought. κλέος … εὐκλεέστερον , like δύσπνοοι πνοαί (587), φρένες δύσφρονες (1261), πόνοι δύσπονοι (1277): Ph. 894 ξύνηθες...ἔθος. Distinguish the case of the adj. compounded with a noun merely cognate in sense to the subst.; above, v. 7 n.

ἐν τάφῳ τιθεῖσα , i.e. symbolically, by sprinkling dust and pouring χοαί: cp. 80, 395, and O. C. 1410 n.— τούτοις πᾶσι λέγοιτο ἄν , by all these it would be said, τοῦτο ἁνδάνειν ( αὐτοῖς), that this seems good to them: for dat. with pres. pass. (a constr. usually restricted to the pf. pass.) cp. Menander Sentent. 511 τἀληθὲς ἀνθρώποισιν οὐχ εὑρίσκεται. If the datives were taken with ἁνδάνειν, λέγοιτο ἄν would be too indefinite. At the same time the proximity of ἁνδάνειν has influenced the construction. ταὐτὸ has been suggested, but there is nothing suspicious in τούτοις τοῦτο, which Nauck groundlessly condemns.—The pres. ἐγκλῄοι is required by the sense, since the act is a continuing one; ἐγκλῄσαι would refer to some given moment or particular occasion. The MSS. favour the aor., but most of the recent edd. rightly give the pres.

ἀλλ’ ἡ τυραννίς . ‘(If these men dared to say what they think, they would applaud me.) But royalty has the advantage of being able to do and say what it pleases, without being opposed in word or deed’:—and so these men are silent. These are two excellent and vigorous lines,—not only free from the slightest internal mark of spuriousness, but admirably suited to their place, both by thought and by expression. It was an extraordinary freak of arbitrary criticism to reject them. The reasons assigned for doing so deserve mention only for their curious weakness; as (a) ἀλλ’ ἡ ought to be ἡ γάρ—Dindorf: (b) Antigone should not mention the advantages of the τυραννίς— JacobA. : (c) Creon could not be reproached with δρᾶν λέγειν θ’ ἂ βούλεται—Nauck: of which last objection Bellermann, in his simple and triumphant vindication of these verses, justly says that it is ‘wholly unintelligible.’ (d) Wecklein, too, has effectively defended them. We may add that Creon's reply in v. 508, which refers primarily to vv. 504 f., does not therefore ignore vv. 506 f., since these two vv. cohere closely with the former: vv. 504—507 express a single thought. For similar references in tragedy to the τυραννίς, as it was viewed by Greeks in the historical age, cp. Aesch. PV 224 f., Eur. Ion 621—632.

μούνη : τῶνδε refers to the Chorus: for the Ionic form, cp. 308, 705.

τοῦτο … ὁρᾷς , seest this,=‘takest this view’; viz., that thy deed is right, and that only my power prevents its being publicly approved. A very rare use of ὁρᾶν: indeed, I know no strictly similar instance, for we cannot compare O. T. 284, where see n.: still, it is natural enough. Cp. Phaedr. 276 A ἄλλον ὁρῶμεν λόγον. So we say, ‘I do not see it,’=‘I cannot take that view.’ μούνη τῶνδε : cp. 101 κάλλιστον...τῶν προτέρων, n.

ὑπίλλουσιν (for the spelling cp. n. in Appendix on 340), lit., ‘turn’ (or ‘roll’) ‘under,’ said of an animal putting its tail between its legs; cp. Eur. fr. 544 (from his Οἰδίπους,—referring to the Sphinx) οὐρὰν δ’ ὑπίλασ’ ὑπὸ λεοντόπουν βάσιν | καθέζετ’. Verg. Aen. 11. 812 (a terrified wolf) caudamque remulcens Subiecit pavitantem utero. Here, ‘keep down’ the utterance of their thoughts; ‘make their lips subservient’ to thee. Cp. σαίνειν, adulari.—Euphony commends, though metre does not require, the ν ἐφελκυστικόν, which L gives. Cp. 571.

σὺ δ’ οὐκ ἐπαιδεῖ ; And art thou not ashamed of it (cp. ἐπαισχύνομαι), if thou thinkest otherwise than they do?— thinkest, namely, that thou art free to act on thy own views, regardless of thy king. For the sake of argument, he concedes their possible sympathy with her, but insists on their loyal behaviour. She answers, ‘No, I am not ashamed, for I am doing nothing shameful.’

ὅμαιμος always of brother and sister in Soph. : O.C. 330 n.

ἐκ μιᾶς τε . The soundness of the text is thoroughly vindicated by Plat. Legg. 627C (quoted by Schneidewin), πολλοὶ ἀδελφοί που γένοιντ’ ἂν ἑνὸς ἀνδρός τε καὶ μιᾶς υἱεῖς, which also confirms the MS. τε against the conjecture γε.

πῶς δῆτ’ : why, then, dost thou render (to Polyneices) a tribute impious in the sight of Eteocles?—i.e., which places the latter on the same level with the former.

ἐκείνῳ , ethic dat., ‘in his judgment’: cp. 904, O. C. 1446 ἀνάξιαι... πᾶσιν , and ib. 810 n., O. T. 40. We cannot well render, ‘impious towards him,’ which would be πρὸς or εἰς ἐκεῖνον: nor can the dat. be one of ‘interest,’ as though δυσσεβῆ were equivalent to βλαβεράν. The next verse agrees well with ἐκεῖνῳ being ethic dat.: ‘he will not so testify,’ =‘he will not say that he thinks my act impious.’

χάριν is usu. explained as acc. of the inner object, like τιμᾷς τιμήν. But it would evidently be awkward to have an objective acc. added, as τιμῶ χάριν αὐτόν. Rather τιμᾷς is here slightly deflected from the sense, ‘to honour by observance,’ ‘to observe duly,’ as Eur. Tro. 1210 οὓς Φρύγες νόμους | τιμῶσιν , Ion 1045 τὴν εὐσέβειαν...τιμᾶν, and means, ‘to render duly,’ as religious observance requires. So I should take it also in the parallel phrase, Eur. Or. 828 πατρῴαν | τιμῶν χάριν , duly rendering grace to thy sire.— ὁ κατθανὼν νέκυς : cp. 26 .

εἴ τοι , siquidem: O. T. 549.— σφε : cp. 44 n.

ἐξ ἴσου , only on a level with, as O. T. 1019. So ἴσον =‘equally little’ (Her. 2.3), or ‘equally vain’ (id. 8. 79): and id. 8. 109 τά τε ἱρὰ καὶ τὰ ἴδια ἐν ὁμοίῳ ἐποιέετο, i.e. made sacred things of (only) the same account as things profane. Cp. 393 .

οὐ γάρ τι δοῦλος . No, Eteocles

cannot complain, for Polyneices was not his slave—his natural inferior—but his brother, and had the same claim on me that he had. Creon insists on the difference between the loyal man and the disloyal. Antigone dwells on the fact that both men had the same claim on her natural piety, and (519) on her sense of religious duty.

πορθῶν δέ : for δέ introducing an objection, cp. O. T. 379: for the partic., ib. 1001, 1011.

ὁ δ’ , but the other (perished) ἀντιστὰς ὑπὲρ τῆσδε γῆς, as this land's champion. ὕπερ is paroxytone as virtually following its case, since the gen. is supplied from τήνδε γῆν. Cp. Ai. 1231 τοῦ μηδὲν ἀντέστης ὕπερ .

τούτους , the reading of the MSS., has been rejected by nearly all modern editors in favour of ἴσους , which the Scholiast mentions as a variant. But the simple τούτους is perfectly suitable, —‘these laws,’ the laws of sepulture (τὸ θάπτειν, as a schol. paraphrases); and everything that ἴσους would convey is already expressed by ὅμως . ‘One was the country's foe, the other its champion —granted. Nevertheless Hades desires these laws,’—i.e. even in the case of the foe. A corruption of ἴσους into τούτους is very improbable. Rather ἴσους was merely one of those conjectures which so often appear in the margin of the MSS., having for their object the supposed improvement of a point. The MS. ἴσος in 520 does not strengthen the case for ἴσους here.

The MS. λαχεῖν ἴσος is usu. explained, ‘equal in respect to obtaining (rites),’ i.e. with an equal claim to rites. The phrase is not only without any parallel, but seems impossible. ἴσος λαχεῖν νόμιμα would be very strange; ἴσος λαχεῖν, absolutely, is stranger still. The train of thought strongly favours ἴσους , as Nauck suggests and Semitelos reads. ‘Hades may desire these rites; but the good man does not (desire) to receive only the same rites as the wicked’: i.e. Eteocles will not be satisfied with the equality merely because Polyneices was his brother (517): he will think of the contrast between that brother's merits and his own. The dead can be said λαγχάνειν νόμους (of burial), in the sense of obtaining that which the νόμοι give. Therefore we need not write ἴσον or ἴσα.

κάτωθεν , simply ‘below’: cp. 1070, Eur. Alc. 424 τῷ κάτωθεν ἀσπόνδῳ θεῷ : Dem. or. 23 § 28 ὁ κάτωθεν νόμος , the law below (=the continuation of a law already cited). We need not understand here, ‘if these things are approved from below.’ κάτω ’στὶν has the MS. authority: but it is most improbable that Soph. would have given such a needlessly unpleasing verse, and the change is sufficiently explained by a later belief that the sense required κάτω.

εὐαγῆ , right in respect to ἄγος, i.e. free from it, pure ( O. T. 921). She means: ‘who can tell if Eteocles, in the world below, will not think it consonant with piety that Polyneices should be honoured?’ Perhaps earthly feuds are made up there. Creon answers, ‘No,—foe once, foe always,— even in death: Eteocles will resent it.’ Cp. Od. 11.543 where the spirit of Ajax in Hades will not speak to Odysseus— κεχολωμένη εἵνεκα νίκης | τήν μιν ἐγὼ νίκησα.—There would be far less point in Creon's words if we took them to mean, ‘my dead foe is still my foe’ (cp. Ai. 1348, 1372).

οὔτοι συνέχθειν . ‘Even if my brothers hate each other still, my nature prompts me, not to join Eteocles in hating Polyneices, but to love each brother as he loves me’: cp. 73 φίλη...φίλου μέτα. Cp. Polybius 1. 14 φιλόφιλον δεῖ εὶ=ναι τὸν ἀγαθὸν ἄνδρα καὶ φιλόπατριν, καὶ συμμισεῖν τοῖς φίλοις τοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ συναγαπᾶν τοὺς φίλους. Eur. imitates our verse, I. A. 407 (Agam. to Menelaus) συσσωφρονεῖν γάρ, οὐχὶ συννοσεῖν ἔφυν, ‘nay, my sympathies are with prudence, not with frenzy.’

νυ^ν , as Ai. 87, Tr. 92, Ph. 1196, but νυ—ν O.T. 658, and oft.— κείνους = τοὺς ἐκεῖ, the dead. Nauck proposes νεκρούς, which would be a deplorable change. For the pause after the emphatic word, cp. 46 n.

καὶ μὴν introducing the new person: O. C. 549 n. At Creon's command (491), two πρόσπολοι had gone to bring Ismene. The door from which she now enters is that by which she had left the stage (99). It is supposed to lead to the γυναικωνῖτις (cp. 578).

εἰβομένη , the correction of Triclinius for the MS. λειβομένη, enables us to keep δάκρυα, instead of changing it to δάκρυ, when φιλάδελφα must be taken as adv. (cp. O. T. 883 n.). The Schol. so took it (he paraphrases by φιλαδέλφως), and it would seem, therefore, that he read δάκρυ λειβομένη. But, though this constr. is quite admissible, it would be far more natural that φιλάδελφα should agree with δάκρυα. In O. C. 1251 we have λείβων δάκρυον: neither λείβω nor εἴβω occurs elsewhere in Soph. ; and the only other place in Tragedy where εἴβω has good support is Aesch. PV 400, where Hermann, by reading δακρυσίστακτον ἀπ’ ὄσσων π(αδινῶν δ’ εἰβομένα π(έος, for the MS. δακρυσίστακτον δ’...λειβομένα, restores the metre. But κατὰ δάκρυον εἴβειν and δάκρυα λείβειν were equally familiar as Homeric phrases; and if an Attic poet could use the latter, there was certainly no reason why he should not use the former. I may remark, too, that κάτω points to a reminiscence of the phrase

with εἴβειν, for Homer never says κατὰ δάκρυα λείβειν. Nothing is more natural than that εἰβομένη should have become λειβομένη in the MSS., the latter word being much the commoner.

κάτω , adv., ‘downwards’: cp. 716, fr. 620 ὦτα κυλλαίνων κάτω. Nauck's objection, that κάτω εἰβομένη could not stand for κατειβομένη, would have force only if κάτω were necessarily a prep., substituted for κατά. He proposes καταὶ (cp. καταιβάτης).

νεφέλη δ’ ὀφρύων ὕπερ , a cloud of grief (resting) on her brow,—as dark clouds rest on a mountain-summit: cp. Eur. Hipp. 173 στυγνὸν δ’ ὀφρύων νέφος αὐξάνεται : Aesch. Theb. 228 τὰν ἀμήχανον | κἀκ χαλεπᾶς δύας ὕπερθ’ ὀμμάτων | κρημναμέναν νεφέλαν : so συννεφής = συνωφρυωμένος. Cp. Deme supercilio nubem ( Hor. Ep. 1. 18. 94). The cloud of sorrow is associated with the rain of tears: cp. Shaksp. Ant. 3. 2. 51 Will Caesar weep?—He has a cloud in 's face.

αἱματόεν , here, ‘suffused with blood,’ darkly flushed. This application of αἱματόεις to the human face seems unparalleled, though in Anthol. P. 6. 154 Leonidas of Tarentum (c. 280 B.C.) has φύλλα τε πεπταμένων αἱματόεντα ῥόδων. Eur. Phoen. 1487 was less daring when he called a dark blush τὸν ὑπὸ βλεφάροις | φοίνικ’ (‘crimson’), ἐρύθημα προσώπου. It recalls the well-known fragment of Ionin Athen. 603 E, where the schoolmaster objects to Phrynichus's ἐπὶ πορφυρέαις παρῇσι, on the principle, οὐ κάρτα δεῖ τὸ καλὸν τῷ μὴ καλῷ φαινομένῳ εἰκάζειν,—and Sophocles makes a lively defence of it. Shaksp. uses ‘bloody’ for ‘blood-red’: Hen. V. 1. 2. 101 unwind your bloody flag.

ῥέθος = πρόσωπον, as H. F. 1203 πάρες ἀπ’ ὀμμάτων | πέπλον, ἀπόδικε, ῥέθος ἀελίῳ δεῖξον. Cp. Eustathius 1090, 27 ἰστέον ὅτι ῥέθεα οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι τὰ μέλη φασίν, Αἰολεῖς δὲ μόνοι, κατὰ τοὺς παλαιούς, τὸ πρόσωπον ῥέθος καλοῦσιν. This suggests that the Attic dramatists had lyric precedent for this use of ῥέθος: as Lycophron (173) may also have had for using it as =σῶμα. The Homeric use is confined to the phrase ἐκ ῥεθέων (thrice in Il., never in Od. ).

αἰσχύνει , i.e. overcasts its sunny beauty: cp. Thomson, Spring 21, Winter ...b <*> his driving sleets Deform the day delightless.

σὺ δ’ with φέρ’, εἰπέ (534).— ὑφειμένη , submissa, ‘lurking,’ as a viper lurks under stones: H. A. 8. 15 αἱ δ’ ἔχιδναι ὑπὸ τὰς πέτρας ἀποκρύπτουσιν ἑαυτάς. H. F. 72 σῴζω νεοσσοὺς ὄρνις ὣς ὑφειμένη, like a cowering hen (ὑφειμένους Kirchhoff). The word may also suggest a contrast between Antigone's bolder nature and the submissive demeanour of Ismene (cp. El. 335 νῦν δ’ ἐν κακοῖς μοι πλεῖν ὑφειμένῃ δοκεῖ , ‘with shortened sail’). But we should not render it by ‘submissive’; its primary reference is to the image of the ἔχιδνα. Others render, ‘having crept in,’ clam immissa. The act. can mean to ‘send in secretly’ (see on ὑφείς, O. T. 387), but the pass. ὑφίεσθαι does not seem to occur in a corresponding sense.

ἔχιδνα : cp. Tr. 770 (the poison works) φοινίας | ἐχθρᾶς ἐχίδνης ἰὸς ὥς. So of Clytaemnestra (Aesch. Cho. 249 ): Eur. Andr. 271 ἐχίδνης καὶ πυρὸς περαιτέρω : cp. Ion 1262.This image for domestic treachery is quaintly illustrated by the popular notions mentioned in Mirab. 165 (p. 846 b 18 Berl. ed.) τοῦ περκνοῦ ἔχεως τῇ ἐχίδνἡ συγγινομένου,

ἡ ἔχιδνα ἐν τῇ συνουσίᾳ τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀποκόπτει. διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὰ τέκνα, ὥσπερ τὸν θάνατον τοῦ πατρὸς μετερχόμενα, τὴν γαστέρα τῆς μητρὸς διαρρήγνυσιν. (Cp. Shaksp. Per. 1. 1. 64 I am no viper, yet I feed On mother's flesh. )

λήθουσά μ’ ἐξέπινες . It seems unnecessary to suppose a confusion of images. The venom from the echidna's bite is here described as working insidiously, and, at first, almost insensibly. So Heracles says of the poison, which he has already ( Tr. 770) compared to the echidna's, ἐκ δὲ χλωρὸν αἷμά μου | πέπωκεν ἤδη, Tr. 1055. Cp. El. 784 ἥδε γὰρ μείζων βλάβη | ξύνοικος ἦν μοι, τοὐμὸν ἐκπίνουσ’ ἀεὶ | ψυχῆς ἄκρατον αἷμα .

ἄτα κἀπαναστάσεις . The dual is commended, as against ἄτας, by a certain scornful vigour; just as at 58 the dual has an emphasis of its own. And the combination with a plural is no harsher than (e.g.) Laches p. 187 A αὐτοὶ εὑρεταὶ γεγονότε. Cp. O. C. 530 αὗται δὲ δύ’ ἐξ ἐμοῦ...παῖδε, δύο δ’ ἄτα.

ἐπαναστάσεις , abstract (like ἄτα) for concrete: so 646 πόνους (bad sons): κεῖνος ἡ πᾶσα βλάβη ( Ph. 622), ὄλεθρος, etc. θρόνων , object. gen. (ἐπανίστασθαι θρόνοις). Creon suspects the sisters of being in league with malcontent citizens (cp. 289), who wish to overthrow his rule.

τὸ μὴ : cp. 443 . [Dem. ] or. 57 § 59 οὐκ ἂν ἐξομόσαιτο μὴ οὐκ εἰδέναι . Plat. Legg. 949A ἐξαρνηθέντι καὶ ἐξομοσαμένῳ .

ὁμορροθεῖ , concurs, consents: fr. 446 ὁμορροθῶ, συνθέλω, | συμπαραινέσας ἔχω. Schol. ad Aristoph. Av. 851 ὁμορροθεῖν δὲ κυρίως τὸ ἅμα καὶ συμφώνως ἐρέσσειν . So Orphic Argonaut. 254 ὁμορροθέοντες, ‘rowing all together’ (cp. above on 259). The image thus agrees with ξύμπλουν in 541. Ismene remembers her sister's words: ‘even if you should change your mind, I could never welcome you now as my fellow-worker’ (69). She says, then, ‘I consider myself as having shared in the deed—if my sister will allow me.’ Nauck sadly defaces the passage by his rash change, εἴπερ ἥδ’· ὁμορροθῶ.

τῆς αἰτίας depends on both verbs. ξυμμετίσχω having prepared the ear for a partitive gen., no harshness is felt in the reference of that gen. to φέρω also. We cannot take the gen. with the first verb only, and regard καὶ φέρω as parenthetic. Some real instances of such a parenthetic construction are given in the n. on 1279 f.; but the supposed examples often break down on scrutiny. Thus in Ai. 274, ἔληξε κἀνέπνευσε τῆς νόσου, the gen. goes with both verbs (cp. on O. C. 1113): for O. C. 1330, see n. there: in Aesch. PV 331 πάντων μετασχὼν καὶ τετολμηκὼς ἐμοί , the pron. might be dat. of interest with the second partic.; but we ought perhaps to read συντετολμηκώς τ’ ἐμοί.

ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐάσει σ’ : cp. O. C. 407 ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐᾷ τοὔμφυλον αἷμά σ’, ὦ πάτερ.

’κοινωσάμην : prodelision of the augment, as 457 (n.): cp. O. C. 1602 ταχεῖ ’πόρευσαν σὺν χρόνῳ .

ξύμπλουν : cp. H. F. 1225 καὶ τῶν καλῶν μὲν ὅστις ἀπολαύειν θέλει, | συμπλεῖν δὲ τοῖς φίλοισι δυστυχοῦσιν οὔ. I. T. 599 ὁ ναυστολῶν γάρ εἰμ’ ἐγὼ τὰς συμφοράς, | οὗτος δὲ συμπλεῖ.

Cp. Ph. 1293 ὡς θεοὶ ξυνίστορες.

λόγοις , and not ἔργοις. Cp. Ph. 307 λόγοις | ἐλεοῦσι, they show compassion in word (only). Theognis 979 μή μοι ἀνὴρ εἴη γλώσσῃ φίλος ἀλλὰ καὶ ἔργῳ.

μή μ’ ἀτιμάσῃς , do not reject me (the word used by the suppliant Oed., O. C. 49, 286), τὸ μὴ οὐ (cp. 443 n.), so as to hinder me from dying with thee, and paying due honour to the dead. ἁγνίσαι τὸν θ . is to make him ἁγνός, i.e. to give him the rites which religion requires; as, conversely, a corpse which is ἄμοιρος and ἀκτέριστος is also ἀνόσιος (1071). Eur. Suppl. 1211 ἵν’ αὐτῶν σώμαθ’ ἡγνίσθη πυρί , where their corpses received the rites of fire, i.e. were burned. Cp. 196 n. If Ismene shares in the penalty of the deed, she will share in the merit.

μή μοι , not μή’ μοί, since the main emphasis is on the verbal notion (‘ share not my death,’ rather than, ‘share not my death’): cp. 83 n. The combination μή μοι...σὺ has a scornful, repellent tone (cp. O. C. 1441 n.). κοινά , adv.: cp. Ai. 577: O. T. 883 ὑπέροπτα (n.).

μηδ’ ἃ μὴ ’θιγες . If this were an instance of θιγγάνω with acc., it would be a solitary instance in Soph. , who has θιγγάνω with genitive in nine passages; in Soph. Ph. 667 παρέσται ταῦτά σοι καὶ θιγγάνειν, ταῦτα is nom. Nor is there any authentic instance of θιγγάνω with acc. in classical Greek. In H. F. 963, πατὴρ δέ νιν | θιγὼν κραταιᾶς χειρὸς ἐννέπει τάδε, νιν depends on ἐννέπει: cp. Ai. 764 ὁ μὲν γὰρ αὐτὸν ἐννέπει· τέκνον , etc. In Theocr. 1. 59 οὐδέ τί πα ποτὶ χεῖλος ἐμὸν θίγεν , the gen. αὐτοῦ is understood with προσέθιγεν, and τι is adv., ‘at all.’ Nor does ψαύω govern an acc. below in 859, 961 (where see notes). Krüger (11. § 47. 12. 2) treats ἅ here as a sort of adverb (ib. 11. § 46. 6. 9), i.e., in a case where you did not put your hand (to the deed, sc. τοῦ ἔργου); but this is very awkward. Rather, I think, there is an unusual kind of attraction, due to the special form of the sentence. We could not say (e.g.) ἃ μὴ ἐρᾷ τις, οὐ θηρᾶται, (ἅ for ταῦτα ὧν). But here μηδ’ ὧν μὴ ’θιγες ποιοῦ σεαυτῆς would have been intolerable, on account of the second gen. after ποιοῦ. For the sake of compactness, and of clearly marking the object to ποιοῦ, the poet has here allowed ἅ to stand for ταῦτα ὧν. I do not compare O. C. 1106, αἰτεῖς ἃ τεύξει, holding that ά there=ταῦτα ἅ (not ὧν): see n.

ποιοῦ σεαυτῆς , a somewhat rare phrase. Her. 1.129 ἑωυτοῦ ποιέεται τὸ Κύρου ἔργον . [Plat. ] Plat. Hipp. min. 372C ἐμαυτοῦ ποιούμενος τὸ μάθημα εἶναι ὡς εὕρημα. Dem. or. 19 § 36 εἰς αὑτὸν ποιούμενος (taking on himself) τὰ τούτων ἁμαρτήματα . In Thuc. 8.9 ἑαυτοῦ...τὸν στόλον ἴδιον ποιήσασθαι , the gen. goes with the adj.

ἀρκέσω in the pers. constr., cp. Ai. 76 ἔνδον ἀρκείτω μένων , and O. T. 1061 n.

σοῦ λελειμμένῃ , bereft of thee. λείπομαί τινος, to lag behind, then, fig., to be deprived of, as El. 474 γνώμας λειπομένα , Eur. Alc. 406 νέος ἐγώ, πάτερ, λείπομαι φίλας | ...ματρός.

φίλος has been groundlessly suspected, for no other reason, seemingly, than because it is masc.

κηδεμών , alluding esp. to v. 47. Cp. Xen. Anab. 3.1.17 ἡμᾶς δέ, οἷς κηδεμὼν...οὐδεὶς πάρεστιν , who would have no one to plead our cause (no ‘friend at court,’ such as the younger Cyrus had in his mother Parysatis). In Il. 23.163 κηδεμόνες are the chief mourners for the dead. In Attic, though sometimes poet. for κηδεστής, the word did not necessarily imply kinship.

ἀλγοῦσα μὲν δῆτ’ , yes, indeed, it is to my own pain that I mock thee,— if I do mock. δῆτα assents ( O. T. 445 n.) to οὐδὲν ὠφελουμένη: there is, indeed, no ὄφελος in it, but only ἄλγος.

ἐν σοί : cp. Ai. 1092 ἐν θανοῦσιν ὑβριστής , ib. 1315 ἐν ἐμοὶ θρασύς .

Heath's εἰ γελῶ γ’ , for εἰ γέλωτ’, is supported by the accent γελῶτ’ in L, and seems right. It smooths the construction; and εἰ γελῶ γ’ better expresses that the taunt sprang from anguish, not from a wish to pain. Then γέλωτα γελῶ, without an epithet for the subst., is unusual.—Cp. Ai. 79 οὔκουν γέλως ἥδιστος εἰς ἐχθροὺς γελᾶν;

ἀλλὰ νῦν , now, at least: O. C. 1276 ἀλλ’ ὑμεῖς γε , n.

κἀμπλάκω , and am I to miss the

fate? i.e. to be dissociated from it: delib. aor. subj., which can be used, not only in asking what one is to do, but also in expressions of despair as to what one must suffer ( Tr. 973 τί πάθω ;). For ἀμπλακεῖν cp. 910, 1234.

εἵλου , alluding to v. 78 f.

ζῆν : for the emphatic pause, cp. Ph. 907 οὔκουν ἐν οἷς γε δρᾷς· ἐν οἷς δ’ αὐδᾷς, ὀκνῶ.

ἐπ’ ἀρρήτοις … τοῖς ἐμ. λ. (but you did not choose death) without my words (my arguments against that course) having been spoken,—referring to vv. 49—68. For ἐπί with the negative verbal (=πρὶν τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους ῥηθῆναι) cp. Eur. Ion 228 ἐπὶ δ’ ἀσφάκτοις | μήλοισι δόμων μὴ πάριτ’ ἐς μυχόν (‘before sheep have been slain, pass not,’ etc.).

σὺ μὲν τοῖς : ‘you seemed wise to the one side (Creon); I, to the other’ (to Hades and the dead). Nauck pronounces the text unsound, objecting to the use of τοῖς: but that it was good Attic is sufficiently shown by Plat. Legg. 701E (cited by Wolff) οὐ συνήνεγκεν οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς (it profited neither party). Cp. O. C. 742, n. on ἐκ δὲ τῶν.—σὺ μὲν σοί , the schol.'s reading, is very inferior.—For the rhetorical χιασμός cp. O. T. 538 n. (and ib. 320).

καὶ μήν , and yet,—though I did shrink from breaking Creon's law,—I am now, morally, as great an offender as you, since I sympathise with your act.

θάρσει is not said with bitterness (that could hardly be, after 551): rather it means, ‘Take heart to live,’ as Whitelaw renders it. These two verses quietly express her feeling that their lots are irrevocably sundered, and exhort Ismene to accept the severance.

ἡ ἐμὴ ψυχή , my life, a periphrasis for ἐγώ, like O. C. 998 τὴν πατρὸς | ψυχὴν...ζῶσαν (n.).

πάλαι , i.e. ever since she resolved to break the edict. (Cp. O. T. 1161.)

ὥστε τοῖς θ. ὠφελεῖν , so as to (with a view to) serving the dead. The dat., as with ἐπαρκεῖν: Ph. 871 ξυνωφελοῦντά μοι: Aesch. Pers. 842 ὡς τοῖς θανοῦσι πλοῦτος οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ : Eur. Or. 665 τοῖς φίλοισιν ὠφελεῖν : Aristoph. Av. 419 φίλοισιν ὠφελεῖν ἔχειν . So ἐπωφελεῖν O. C. 441 .—Dobree proposed to understand σε as subj. to the inf., ‘so that (you) are helping the dead,’ —i.e., your offer of help (552) is made to one who is already as good as dead. But σέ could not be thus understood; and this sense (which it has been sought to obtain by emendations, see cr. n.) would be frigid.

L gives τὼ παῖδε φημὶ as in O. C. 317 καὶ φημὶ , and this may probably be taken as the traditional accentuation, though some modern edd. write τὼ παῖδέ φημι, καί φημι. The justification of the oxytone φημὶ is in the emphasis which falls on it. Similarly it has the accent when parenthetic, as Lucian Deor. Conc. 2 πολλοὶ γάρ, φημί, οὐκ ἀγαπῶντες κ.τ.λ.

τὼ παῖδε … τὴν μὲν … τὴν δέ , partitive apposition: see on 21.

ἀρτίως , because Creon had hitherto regarded Ismene as being of a docile and submissive nature: cp. on 531 ὑφειμένη.

The apology is for her sister as well as for herself: even such prudence (cp. 68 νοῦν) as may have been inborn forsakes the unfortunate under the stress of their misfortunes.

βλάστῃ : cp. El. 238 ἐν τίνι τοῦτ’ ἔβλαστ’ ἀνθρώπων ; O. C. 804 φύσας...φρένας (n.).

τοῖς κ. πράσσουσιν , dat. of interest: Tr. 132 μένει γὰρ οὔτ’ αἰόλα νὺξ | βροτοῖσιν.

ἐξίσταται , stands aside, gives place ( Ai. 672); and so, leaves its proper place, becomes deranged: cp. Eur. Bacch. 928 ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἕδρας σοι πλόκαμος ἐξέστηχ’ ὅδε . The converse phrase is commoner, ἐξίσταμαι τῶν φρενῶν: cp. 1105.—Schneidewin cp. Antigone fr. 165 ἄκουσον· οὐ γὰρ οἱ κακῶς πεπραγότες | σὺν ταῖς τύχαισι τοὺς λόγους ἀπώλεσαν,—which plainly glances at our passage. For similar allusions cp. O. C. 1116 n.

σοὶ γοῦν (cp. 45 n.) sc. ἐξέστη.

κακοῖς , i.e. Antigone: for the plur., cp. 10.

τῆσδ’ ἄτερ explains μόνῃ : cp. on 445.

βιώσιμον is Ionic and poet.; the Attic word was βιωτός. It is needless to change τί (subst.) into πῶς. The more usual phrase was, indeed, impers., as Her. 1.45 οὐδέ οἱ εἴη βιώσιμον : Plat. Crito 47D ἆρα βιωτὸν ἡμῖν ἐστί ; But, just as we can have ὁ βίος οὐ βιωτός ἐστι (cp. O. C. 1691), so also οὐδὲν βιωτόν ἐστι, no form of life is tolerable. Cp. O. T. 1337 τί δῆτ’ ἐμοὶ βλεπτόν, ἢ | στερκτόν, ἢ προσήγορον | ἔτ’ ἔστ’ , etc., where the only difference is that the subst. τί corresponds to an object. accus., and not as here to a cognate (βίον βιῶναι ).

ἀλλὰ … μέντοι , ‘nay, but...’: cp. Ph. 524 ἀλλ’ αἰσχρὰ μέντοι σοῦ γέ μ’ ἐνδεέστερον | ξένῳ φανῆναι.

ἥδε μὴ λέγε , say not ‘ἥδε,’ speak not of her as still with thee, for she is already numbered with the dead. οἵδε are οἱ ἐνθάδε, the living (75), as κεῖνοι (525) are οἱ ἐκεῖ, the dead (cp. 76). The peculiarity is that we should have expected either (a) τήνδε, acc. to λέγε, or ( b) τῆσδε, as a direct quotation from the last verse: cp. Dem. or. 18 § 88 τίς ἦν...; ὑμεῖς, ὦ ἄνδρες Ἀθηναῖοι. τὸ δ’ ὑμεῖς ὅταν λέγω, λέγω τὴν πόλιν . If (e.g.) ὑμῶν had preceded ω ἄνδρες, Dem. would doubtless have said τὸ δ’ ὑμῶν, or else ὑμᾶς δ’. Here, however, no fair objection would remain if we had ἀλλὰ τὸ ἥδε μὴ λέγε, i. e. ‘never use the word ἥδε about her,’—which makes the sense more general than if he said, ἀλλὰ τῆσδε μὴ λέγε, i. e. ‘do not say (that you cannot live without) ἥδε.’ The question, then, seems to resolve itself into this:—Wishing to give the more general sense just indicated, could the poet say ἥδε instead of τὸ ἥδε? To show that the art. was not always required in such quotation, it is enough to cite Aristoph. Eq. 21 λέγε δὴ μόλωμεν , by the side of τὸ μόλωμεν ib. 26. While, then, I cannot produce any exact parallel for this ἥδε, I think it reasonable to suppose that colloquial idiom would have allowed it. Those who deny this have two resources. (1) To point thus: ἀλλ’ ἥδε μέντοι—μὴ λέγ’· i.e. instead of adding οὐκ ἔστιν ἔτι after μέντοι, he breaks off his sentence—‘do not speak of her.’ So Bellermann. (2) Semitelos reads ἀλλ’ ἥδε μέν σοι μὴ λέγ’ ὡς ἄρ’ [for οὐ γὰρ] ἔστ’ ἔτι, ‘do not say that you have her any longer.’ As to σοι, see cr. n. above. Neither of these readings gives such a forcible sense as the vulgate.

νυμφεῖα , sc. ἱερά, ‘nuptials,’ as Tr. 7 (but ib. 920 ‘bridal-chamber,’ as in sing. below, 1205); here=νύμφην. Cp. Eur. El. 481 σὰ λέχεα , thy spouse: and so εὐνή, etc.—Having failed to win Creon's pity for herself, Ismene now appeals to his feeling for his son. Haemon's coming part in the play is thus prepared.

ἀρώσιμοι , a poet. form (only here), analogous to the epic forms of adjectives in which a short vowel is lengthened for metre's sake (cp. on 492). Though the verb was ἀρόω, the adj. with the suffix σιμο would properly be formed from the subst. ἄροσις (cp. O. C. 27 n.). Suidas gives ἀρόσιμον κλίμα· τὸ ἀροτριούμενον. For the metaphor cp. O. T. 1256 μητρῴαν ...ἄρουραν , and ib. 1485, 1497: Lucr. 4. 1107.

οὐχ ὥς γ’ (‘Another marriage is possible for him’). ‘No, not in the sense of the troth plighted between him and her,’—not such a union of hearts as had been prepared there. ἡρμοσμένα ἦν , impers., lit., ‘as things had been adjusted’; cp. on 447: Her. 1.112 ἡμῖν κακῶς βεβουλευμένα ἔσται : id. 6. 83 τέως μὲν δή σφι ἦν ἄρθμια ἐς ἀλλήλους. The choice of the word has been influenced by the Ionic and poet. use of ἁρμόζειν as=to betroth (ἑγγυᾶν): Her. 3.137 ἅρμοσται (perf. pass. as midd.) τὴν Μίλωνος θυγατέρα...γυναῖκα, he has become engaged to her: Pind. P. 9. 127 ἁρμόζων κόρᾳ | νυμφίον ἄνδρα. Cp. 2 Epist. Cor. 11. 2 ἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ παρθένον ἁγνήν.

υἱέσι , the regular Attic dat. plur. (as Plat. Rep. 362E, Aristoph. Nub. 1001, etc.), from the stem υἱυ-, which furnished also the Attic nom. and gen. plur., υἱεῖς, υἱέων; and the dual υἱῆ (or rather υἱεῖ, Meisterhans p. 63), υἱέοιν. The Attic forms of the sing. and the acc. plur. were taken from υἱο-, except that υἱέος, υἱεῖ were alternative forms for the gen. and dat. sing. Here L has the epic υἱάσιν , from a third stem, υἱ-, whence the Homeric forms υἷος, υἷι,

υἷα, υἷε, υἷες, υἷας: cp. Monro Hom. Gr. § 107.—The dat. of interest goes with κακὰς γυναῖκας , not with στυγῶ : cp. Aristoph. Nub. 1161 πρόβολος ἐμός, σωτὴρ δόμοις, ἐχθροῖς βλάβη .

It is not of much moment that L, like the later MSS., gives this verse to Ismene. Errors as to the persons occur not seldom in L (see, e.g., cr. n. to O. C. 837, and cp. ib. 1737); and here a mistake would have been peculiarly easy, as the dialogue from v. 561 onwards has been between Creon and Ismene. To me it seems certain that the verse is Antigone's, and that one of the finest touches in the play is effaced by giving it to Ismene. The taunt, κακὰς γυναῖκας υἱέσι, moves Antigone to break the silence which she has kept since v. 560: in all this scene she has not spoken to Creon, nor does she now address him: she is thinking of Haemon,—of the dishonour to him implied in the charge of having made such a choice, —ὡς αἰεὶ τὸν ὁμοῖον ἄγει θεὸς ὡς τὸν ὁμοῖον. How little does his father know the heart which was in sympathy with her own. This solitary reference to her love heightens in a wonderful degree our sense of her unselfish devotion to a sacred duty. If Ismene speaks this verse, then τὸ σὸν λέχος in 573 must be, ‘the marriage of which you talk’ (like El. 1110 οὐκ οἶδα τὴν σὴν κλῄδον '), which certainly is not its natural sense.

Αἷμον . L has αἵμων. Soph. would have written AIMON: hence the tradition is subject to the same ambiguity as in KPEON. The analogy of δαῖμον would probably have recommended the form in ο.

ἄγαν γε λυπεῖς , ‘Nay, thou art too troublesome,’—the impatient phrase of one who would silence another, as Ai. 589 (Ajax to Tecmessa) ἄγαν γε λυπεῖς· οὐ κάτοισθ’, etc.: so ib. 592 πόλλ’ ἄγαν ἤδη θροεῖς .

The MSS. give this verse to Ismene; but Boeckh is clearly right in giving it to the Chorus. Ismene asked this question in 568, and Creon answered: she rejoined to this answer (570), and Creon replied still more bitterly. She could not now ask her former question over again. But there is no unfitness in the question being repeated by a new intercessor, since to ask it thus is a form of mild remonstrance.

ἐμοί , L's reading, is right. Creon has been asked,—‘Can you indeed mean to deprive your son of his bride?’ He grimly replies, ‘I look to the Death-god to break off this match.’ The ἔφυ in the later MSS. was obviously a mere conjecture,—and a weak one.

This verse clearly belongs to the Chorus, to whom L assigns it. The first words of the next verse show this. Hermann objected that in similar situations the Chorus usually has two verses. It is true that this is usually the case. But O. T. 1312 is enough to show that there was no rigid rule; why, indeed, should there be? And, here, surely, πλέον ἥμισυ παντός.

δεδογμένα (ἐστί), = δέδοκται: cp. on 570 ἡρμοσμένα, 447 κηρυχθέντα. Cp. Menander Ἀρρηφόρος 1. 3 δεδογμένον τὸ πρᾶγμ’· ἀνερρίφθω κύβος .

καὶ σοί γε κἀμοί , sc. δεδογμένα. It is settled, for both of us: i.e., I shall not change my mind, and it is vain for thee to plead. The datives are ethic. We might also understand, ‘settled by thee, as by me,’—alluding to the words of the Chorus in v. 211 and in v. 220. But I now feel, with Mr T. Page, that this would be somewhat forced.—We must not point thus: καὶ σοί γε. καί μοι μὴ τριβάς, etc. (so Semitelos). This would be more defensible if, in 576, σοί had stood with δεδογμένα: but, as it is, the vagueness of the latter confirms καὶ σοί γε κἀμοί. Bellermann, giving 576 to Ismene, adopts Kern's καὶ σοί γε κοινῇ (‘yes, and she shall die with you’).

μὴ τριβάς , sc. ποιεῖσθε: cp. Aristoph. Ach. 345 ἀλλὰ μή μοι πρόφασιν, ἀλλὰ κατάθου τὸ βέλος : Vesp. 1179 μή μοί γε μύθους.

νιν , plur., as O. T. 868 (masc.), O. C. 43 (fem.), El. 436 (neut.), etc.

ἐκ δὲ τοῦδε , κ.τ.λ. Compare 484 ἦ νῦν ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ, αὕτη δ’ ἀνήρ: 525 ἐμοῦ δὲ ζῶντος οὐκ ἄρξει γυνή: also 678 ff. This much-vexed passage is sound as it has come down to us. Creon means: ‘henceforth they must be women, and must not roam unrestrained.’ The fact that a woman has successfully defied him rankles in his mind. Hence the bitterness of γυναικας here. The Attic notions of feminine propriety forbade such freedom as ἀνειμένας denotes. Cp. El. 516 (Clytaemnestra finding Electra outside the house) ἀνειμένη μέν, ὡς ἔοικας, αὖ στρέφει: Electra should be restrained, μή τοι θυραίαν γ’ οὖσαν αἰσχύνειν φίλους. So pseudoPhocyl. 216 (keep a maiden in-doors), μηδέ μιν ἄχρι γάμων πρὸ δόμων ὀφθῆμεν ἐάσῃς. Aristoph. Lys. 16 χαλεπή τοι γυναικῶν ἔξοδος . The emphasis of γυναῖκας here is parallel with the frequent emphasis of ἀνήρ (as Eur. El. 693 ἄνδρα γίγνεσθαί σε χρή , a man). Cp. O. C. 1368 αἵδ’ ἄνδρες, οὐ γυναῖκες, εἰς τὸ συμπονεῖν .—All the emendations are weak or improbable. See Appendix.

χοἱ θρασεῖς . Remark how well the use of the masc. here suits the taunt conveyed in the last verse. πέλας (ὄντα )... εἰσορῶσι : cp. O. C. 29 πέλας γὰρ ἄνδρα τόνδε νῷν ὁρῶ : and see ib. 586 n.

582-625

Second στάσιμον. 1st strophe, 582—592,=1st antistr., 593— 603. 2nd strophe, 604—614,=2nd antistr., 615—625. See Metrical Analysis.

The sentence of death just passed on Antigone leads the Chorus to reflect on the destiny of her house, and on the power of fate generally.—When a divine curse has once fallen upon a family, thenceforth there is no release for it. Wave after wave of trouble vexes it. Generation after generation suffers. These sisters were the last hope of the race; and now an infatuated act has doomed them also. —What mortal can restrain the power of Zeus? Human self-will and ambition may seem to defy him, but he is drawing them on to their ruin.—Anapaests (626— 630) then announce the approach of Haemon.

κακῶν ἄγευστος , act., cp. O. T. 969 ἄψαυστος ἔγχους n. Eur. Alc. 1069 ὡς ἄρτι πένθους τοῦδε γεύομαι πικροῦ . Her. 7.46 ὁ...θεὸς γλυκὺν γεύσας τὸν αἰῶνα (having allowed men to taste the sweetness of life).

σεισθῇ θεόθεν , i.e. by an ἀρά (likened to a storm, or earthquake, that shakes a building): when a sin has once been committed, and the shock of divine punishment has once been felt. In the case of the Labdacidae the calamities were traced to the curse called down on Laïus by Pelops, when robbed by him of his son Chrysippus ( O. T. p. xix.).

ἄτας οὐδὲν ἐλλείπει , (for these men, οἷς = τούτοις οἷς) no sort of calamity is wanting. Some join ἐλλείπει with ἕρπον, on the analogy of παύεσθαι with part., ‘never fails to go’; but this constr. is at least very rare. In a probably spurious ψήφισμα ap. Dem. or. 18 § 92 we have οὐκ ἐλλείψει εὐχαριστῶν: but Xen. Mem. 2. 6§ 5 (adduced by Wecklein) is not an example, for there μὴ ὲλλείπεσθαι εὖ ποιῶν=‘not to be outdone in generosity.’ Then in Phaedr. 272 B ὅ τι ἂν αὐτῶν τις ἐλλείπῃ λέγων =simply ‘omit in speaking.’

γενεᾶς ἐπὶ πλῆθος . The phrase is bold, and somewhat strange; but I do not think that it is corrupt. γενεᾶς here is the whole race, not (as in 596) a generation of the race. The words mean literally, ‘over a multitude of the race’; i.e., the ἄτη does not cease with the person who first brought it into the family, or with his generation, but continues to afflict succeeding genera tions. The collective noun γενεᾶς justifies the use of πλῆθος: as he might have said, ἀπογόνων πλῆθος. It is needless, then, to write γενεᾶν. We cannot understand, ‘to the fulness of the race,’ i.e. till the race has been exhausted.

ὅμοιον , adv.: Plat. Legg. 628D ὅμοιον ὡς εἰ...ἡγοῖτό τις.

ποντίαις (see cr. n.) is far the most probable reading. The loss of the second ι, leaving ποντίας, would easily have brought in ἁλός, which the metre shows to be superfluous. In Greek poetry there is no objection to the three epithets with πνοαῖς : the whole phrase would be felt as meaning, ‘stormy seawinds from Thrace.’ Construe: ὅταν οἶδμα , when a surge, ποντίαις δυσπν. Θρ. πνοαῖς , driven by stormy sea-winds from Thrace (instr. dat., cp. on 335 νότῳ), ἐπιδράμῃ ἔρεβος ὕφαλον , rushes over the dark depths of the sea (lit., the darkness under the surface of the sea). For δυσπν. πνοαῖς, cp. 502 n.: for Θρῄσσαισιν , Aesch. Ag. 192 πνοαὶ δ’ ἀπὸ Στρυμόνος μολοῦσαι , ib. 654 Θρῄκιαι πνοαί (and 1418): Il. 9.5 (where the tumult in the breasts of the Greeks is likened to a storm) Βορέης καὶ Ζέφυρος, τώ τε Θρῄκηθεν ἄητον.

κελαινὰν θῖνα , the dark-coloured mud or sand that the storm stirs up from the bottom of the sea. θίς is masc. in Homer, Ar. , and Arist. , and that was prob. its usual gender. Soph. has it fem. again in Soph. Ph. 1124, and so it is in later writers. In the ιλ.θίς is always the sea-shore; in Od.that is its regular sense, but once (12. 45) it means ‘heap.’ It is used as here by Aristoph. Vesp. 696 ὥς μου τὸν θῖνα ταράττεις (my very depths). Verg. G. 3. 240 at ima exaestuat unda Vorticibus, nigramque alte subiectat arenam.

δυσάνεμοι should be read. δυσάνεμον could not here be adv. with βρέμουσιν, and must therefore be epithet of θῖνα, when it could mean only τὴν ὑπὸ ἀνέμων ταραχθεῖσαν (schol.), i.e. ‘stirred up by the storm,’—a strained sense for it. Cp. Apoll. Rhod. 1. 593 ἀκτήν τ’ αἰγιαλόν τε δυσήνεμον.

στόνῳ βρ.· cp. 427.

ἀντιπλῆγες (only here) ἀκταί , headlands which are struck in front, struck full, by the waves; in contrast with παραπλῆγες, ‘struck obliquely’: see Od. 5.417 (Odysseus seeking a place to land) ἤν που ἐφεύρω | ἠτονάς τε παραπλῆγας λιμένας τε θαλάσσης (‘shores where the waves strike aslant’). Soph. was doubtless thinking of the Homeric phrase.—Not (1) ‘beating back the waves,’ ἀντίτυποι: nor (2) ‘beaten again,’—i.e. by the everreturning waves. This last is impossible. —Cp. O. C. 1240 where Oed. is likened to a βόρειος...ἀκτὰ κυματοπλήξ. Oppian Cyn. 2. 142 κρημνοῖσι καὶ ὑδατοπλήγεσιν ἄκραις.

ἀρχαῖα , predicate: I see that, from olden time, the house-troubles (οἴκων πήματα) of the (living) Labdacidae are heaped upon the troubles of the dead. The dead are now Laïus, Oedipus, and his two sons. ἀρχαῖα carries us back to the starting-point of the troubles, —the curse pronounced on Laïus by Pelops (cp. on 583).

ὁρῶμαι , midd., as in Homer and Attic Comedy, but not in Attic prose; which, however, used the midd. περιορᾶσθαι (Thuc. 6.103) and προορᾶσθαι (Dem. or. 18 § 281, etc.). Soph. has ὁρωμένη, midd., Tr. 306 (dial.); and so, too, εἰδόμην Ph. 351(dial.), etc. Though οἴκων answers metrically to the first two syllables of ἄγευστος in 582, it is not suspicious, because the second syllable of the trochee can be irrational (a long for a short): see Conversely Anal., φθι^τῶν is metrically admissible, though its first syllable answers to the first of σεισθῇ in 583. This correction of φθιμένων is strongly confirmed by the similar error of the MSS. in Eur. Alc. 100 (see cr. n.).

ἀπαλλάσσει , releases (by exhausting the malignity of the ἀρά): so'oft. ἀπαλλάσσω τινὰ κακῶν, φόβου, etc.

γενεὰν γένος : cp. 1067 νέκυν νεκρῶν: Ai. 475 παρ’ ἦμαρ ἡμέρα .—The subject to ἔχει (ἀλλ’ ἐρείπει θεῶν τις being parenthetical) is ‘the Labdacid house,’ i.e. γενεά in the larger sense (585), supplied from γενεάν just before. This is simpler than to supply πήματα as subject.

λύσιν , deliverance from trouble, as O. T. 921, Tr. 1171.

νῦν γὰρ ἐσχάτας κ.τ.λ. (1) The first question is,—are we to read ὃ τέτατο or ἐτέτατο ? If ἐτέτατο, then the sentence is complete at δόμοις. A new sentence beginning with κατ’ αὖ would be intolerably abrupt: yet neither κᾆτ’ nor καὶ ταύταν appears probable. This difficulty would be avoided by changing ὑπέρ to ὅπερ : but then ῥίζας φάος must mean, ‘the comfort (or hope) afforded by the ῥίζα,’—a strange phrase. And τέτατο confirms ὑπέρ as well as φάος. I therefore prefer ὃ τέτατο . (2) The next point concerns νιν . Reading ὃ τέτατο, Wecklein still refers νιν to ῥίζας, not to φάος, saying that the constr. is as though ἇς ὑπὲρ ἐσχάτας ῥίζας had preceded. This is a grammatical impossibility. With ὃ τέτατο, νιν can refer only to φάος . Can this be justified? Thus, I think. The ἐσχάτη ῥίζα of the family is the last remaining means of propagating it. A light of hope ( φάος ) was ‘spread above’ this ‘last root,’—as sunshine above a plant,—because it was hoped that the sisters would continue the race. The sisters themselves are, properly speaking, the ἐσχάτη ῥίζα. But as the word ῥίζα can also have an abstract sense, denoting the chance of propagation, the sisters can here be identified with the hope, or φάος, which shines above the ῥίζα. In Greek this is the easier since φάος was often said of persons, as Il. 18.102 οὐδέ τι Πατρόκλῳ γενόμην φάος , Eur. Hec. 841 ὦ δέσποτ’, ὦ μέγιστον Ἕλλησιν φάος . To say καταμᾶν φάος (δόμων) is like saying, ‘to mow down the hope of the race,’—in this case, the two young lives. A further reason against referring νιν to ῥίζα is that the verb should then be, not καταμᾷ, but ἐξαμᾷ, as Ai. 1178 γένους ἅπαντος ῥίζαν ἐξημημένος : a root is not ‘mowed down,’ in such a case, but cut out of the ground. The proposed change of φάος into θάλος , though not difficult in a palaeographical sense, is condemned by τέτατο , which does not suit θάλος, but exactly suits φάος. Cp. Ph. 831 τάνδ’ αἴγλαν ἃ τέταται τανῦν. Od. 11.19 ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ νὺξ ὀλοὴ τέταται δειλοῖσι βροτοῖσι : Hes. Op. 547 ἀὴρ πυροφόρος τέταται μακάρων ἐπὶ ἔργοις (rich men's fields): Theogn. 1077 ὄρφνη γὰρ τέταται. Plat. Rep. 616B διὰ παντὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς τεταμένον φῶς . As to the proposed substitution of θάλος for ὑπέρ, (with φάος retained,) it would be as violent as needless.—For ῥίζας cp. Pind. O. 2. 46 ὅθεν σπέρματος ἔχοντα ῥίζαν: El. 765 πρόρριζον...ἔφθαρται γένος : Lucian Tyr. 13 πανωλεθρία παντὸς τοῦ γένους καὶ ῥιζόθεν τὸ δεινὸν ἅπαν ἐκκεκομμένον.

κατ’ αὖ … ἀμᾷ, = καταμᾷ αὖ, ‘mows down in its turn’ (not, ‘otherwise than we hoped’). In my first edition I adopted the conjecture κοπίς . Prof. Tyrrell's able defence of the MS. κόνις (Classical Review, vol. 11. p. 139), though it has not removed all my difficulties, has led me to feel that more can be said for that reading than I had recognised. I now prefer, therefore, to leave κόνις in the text, and to re-state here the arguments for and against it.

(1) If κόνις be right, κόνις θεῶν τῶν νερτέρων is the dust, belonging (due) to the gods infernal, which Antigone strewed on her brother's corpse; it is φοινία, because the corpse was gory. The strongest point in favour of κόνις is that it is in harmony with the following words, λόγου τ’ ἄνοια καὶ φρενῶν ἐρινύς. The whole sense then is: ‘She, too—the last hope of the race—is now to die,—for a handful of blood-stained dust (i.e., for a slight, yet obligatory, act of piety towards her slain brother)—and for those rash words to Creon,—the expression of her frenzied resolve.’ On the other hand, the objection to κόνις is the verb καταμᾷ , which implies the metaphor of reaping. (See Appendix.) The proposed version, ‘covers,’ is impossible, and, if possible, would be unsuitable. What we want is a verb meaning simply ‘destroys,’ or ‘dooms to death.’ Now it is true that Greek lyric poetry often tolerates some confusion of metaphor (see on v. 117, and cp. O. T. p. lviii): the question is whether this example of it be tolerable. Prof. Tyrrell holds that it is excused by the tumult of feeling in the mind of the Chorus. That is, the metaphor of a young life ‘mowed down’ is not completed by a mention of the agent, the Destroyer: it is swiftly succeeded in the speaker's thought by a dramatic image of the cause, Antigone sprinkling the dust, and defying Creon. This is conceivable; but it is at least extremely bold.

(2) If we read κοπίς , then καταμᾷ is appropriate, and φοινία also has a more evident fitness. The great objection is the want of unison with λόγου τ’ ἄνοια καὶ φρενῶν ἐρινύς. If the τ’ after λόγου means ‘both,’ the κοπὶς νερτέρων is the deadly agency as seen in the girl's rash speech and resolve: if the τ’ means ‘and,’ it is an agency to which these things are superadded. On either view the language is awkward. This must be set against the gain in unity of metaphor.

It has further been urged against κοπίς that the word is too homely. This may be so; but we lack proof. κοπίς seems to have been a large curved knife, known to the Greeks chiefly as (a) a butcher's or cook's implement, (b) an oriental military weapon. It does not follow, however, that the effect here would be like that of ‘chopper,’ or of ‘scimitar,’ in English. The dignity of a word may be protected by its simplicity; and κοπίς is merely ‘that which cuts.’ Pindar was not afraid of homeliness when he described a chorus-master as a κρατήρ, or an inspiring thought as an ἀκόνα (cp. O. C. 1052 n.). Nicander could say, of the scorpion, τοίη οἱ κέντροιο κοπίς ( Ther. 780). If κοπίς be right, the change to κόνις may have been caused, not by a misreading of letters, but by mere inadvertence,—the copyist having the word κόνις in his thoughts at the moment: it has already occurred frequently (247, 256, 409, 429).—See Appendix.

λόγου … ἄνοια , folly shown in speech (defining gen.),—Antigone's answer to Creon (450 ff.): cp. 562 (ἄνουν), 383 (ἀφροσύνῃ). φρενῶν ἐρινύς , an erinys of (or in) the mind: i.e. the infatuated impulse which urged Antigone to the deed is conceived as a Fury that drove her to her doom. Schol. ὅτι οἰστρηθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῶν ἐρινύων...τοῦτο τετόλμηκεν.

τεάν , epic and Ion. (Hom. , Hes. , Her., Pind. , etc.); admitted by Aesch. and Eur. in lyrics.

δύνα^σιν : cp. 951. A poetical form used by Pind. , Eur. (in dial. as well as in lyr.), etc.

κατάσχοι . Epic usage admits the optat. (without ἄν) where an abstract possibility is to be stated, as Il. 19.321 οὐ μὲν γάρ τι κακώτερον ἄλλο πάθοιμι , ‘for I could not (conceivably) suffer anything worse.’ The Homeric instances are chiefly in negative sentences ( Od. 3.231 being a rare exception, ῥεῖα θεός γ’ ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι). Attic verse affords some certain examples,—all in negative sentences, or in questions when (as here) a negative answer is expected. So Aesch. PV 291 οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ | μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ’ ἢ σοί . Other instances are Aesch. Ch. 172, Aesch. Ch. 595: Aesch. Ag. 620 : Eur. Alc. 52. Our passage is undoubtedly another genuine instance, and the attempts to alter it (see cr. n.) are mistaken. Attic prose, on the other hand, supplies no trustworthy example: in most of those which are alleged ἄν should be supplied. I have discussed this question in O. C. , Appendix on v. 170, p. 273.—Men may overstep their due limits: but no such ὑπερβασία can restrict the power of Zeus. He punishes the encroachment.

The MS. παντογήρως is unquestionably corrupt. Sleep, the renewer of vigour, could not be described as ‘bringing old age to all.’ Nor can the epithet be explained as ‘enfeebling all,’ in the sense of ‘subduing them’; nor, again, as ‘attending on all, even to old age.’ The neighbourhood of ἀγήρως is not in favour of παντογήρως, but against it; in the case of παντοπόρος—ἄπορος (360), and of ὑψίπολις—ἄπολις (370), there is a direct contrast between the two words. Either πάντ’ ἀγρῶν or πανταγρεὺς (see cr. n.) would be good, if οὔτ’ could be taken from the next verse, and added to this. But οὔτ’ clearly belongs, I think, to the next verse,—as will be seen presently. Bamberger proposed παντοθήρας , or παντόθηρος . The former would be a subst. like ἰχθυοθήρας, ‘fisherman,’ ὀρνιθοθήρας, ‘fowler’: the latter (which I should prefer), an adj. like πολύθηρος, ‘catching much’ (Heliodorus 5. 18), εὔθηρος, ‘having good sport.’ παντόθηρος would suit the sense well. But its probability depends on the way in which we conceive the corrupt παντογήρως to have arisen. It is evident that the genuine ἀγήρως in the next line had something to do with it. It seems most likely that the eye of the transcriber who first wrote παντογήρως had wandered to ἀγήρως, and that by a mere inadvertence he gave a like ending to the earlier word. Now this might most easily have happened if the sixth letter of the earlier series had been Γ, but would obviously have been less likely if that letter had been Θ. I therefore think it more probable that παντογήρως arose from πάντ’ ἀγρεύων than from παντόθηρος. It is immaterial that the last four letters of the latter are nearer to the MS., since, on the view just stated, the transcriber's error arose from the fact that the consecutive letters ἀγ were common to ἀγρεύων and ἀγήρως, and that, from these letters onwards, he accidentally copied ἀγήρως. It may be added that such an error would have been easier with a separate word like ἀγρεύων than with the second part of a compound like παντόθηρος.—The verb ἀγρεύω, ‘to catch’ (common both in verse and in prose) is used by Soph. in fr. 507.— Soph. was thinking of Il. 14.244 ff. (Ὕπνος speaking to Hera), ἄλλον μέν κεν ἔγωγε θεῶν αἰειγενετάων | ῥεῖα κατευνήσαιμι... | Ζηνὸς δ’ οὐκ ἂν ἔγωγε Κρονίονος ἆσσον ἱκοίμην, | οὐδὲ κατευνήσαιμ’, ὅτε μὴ αὐτός γε κελεύοι.

The MS. οὔτ’ ἀκάματοι θεῶν should answer metrically to 618 εἰδότι δ’

οὐδὲν ἕρπει. Far the best emendation is οὔτε θεῶν ἄκματοι (Hermann ἄκμητοι). This supposes merely a transposition of two words, of which L affords undoubted instances (cp. on 107), and the very natural development of ἀκάματοι out of the rarer form ἄκματοι. For the latter cp. Hom. hymn. Apoll. 520 ἀκμήτοις δὲ λόφον προσέβαν ποσίν. The word θεῶν seems to me clearly genuine. Many recent editors have condemned it, because Zeus is the marshaller of the seasons ( Il. 2.134 Διὸς μεγάλου ἐνιαυτοί , Od. 24.344 Διὸς ὧραι , Plat. Prot. 321A τὰς ἐκ Διὸς ὥρας ). How, then, could the poet say that Zeus is not subdued by ‘the months of the gods’? The simple answer is that the term θεῶν is not opposed to Zeus, but includes him. Though Zeus (the Sky Father) was more especially the ταμίας ὡρῶν, that function can also be ascribed to the gods collectively: see e.g. Plat. Legg. 886A οὐκοῦν, ὦ ξένε, δοκεῖ ῥᾴδιον εἷναι ἀληθεύοντας λέγειν ὡς εἰσὶ θεοί;— πῶς;—πρῶτον μὲν γῆ καὶ ἥλιος ἄστρα τε τὰ ξύμπαντα καὶ τὰ τῶν ὡρῶν διακεκοσμημένα καλῶς οὕτως, ἐνιαυτοῖς τε καὶ μησὶ διειλημμένα . Cp. ib. 809 D, as illustrating another reason which made the phrase θεῶν μῆνες so natural—the fact, namely, that the ἑορταί were the land-marks of the Calendar: τίνων δὴ πέρι λέγομεν; ἡμερῶν τάξεως εἰς μηνῶν περιόδους καὶ μηνῶν εἰς ἕκαστον τὸν ἐνιαυτόν, ἵνα ὧραι καὶ θυσίαι καὶ ἑορταὶ τὰ προσήκοντα ἀπολαμβάνουσαι ἑαυταῖς ἕκασται... θεοῖς μὲν τὰς τιμὰς ἀποδιδῶσι κ.τ.λ. And, if θεῶν be genuine, then οὔτε belongs to this verse, and we gain a fresh argument against those emendations which would append οὔτ’ to v. 606: for οὔτ’ | ἀκάματοι θεῶν <νιν> is certainly not probable. See Appendix.—All the immortals have a life which is not worn out by those months which they themselves control. The distinction of Zeus is that his supremacy over gods and men is unalterable.

ἄκματοι , untiring in their course: cp. Il. 18.239 ἠέλιον δ’ ἀκάμαντα : Eur. fr. 597 ἀκάμας τε χρόνος.

I doubt whether the dat. χρόνῳ could be instrumental or causal here (‘not made old by time’). It rather seems to be an adverbial dat. of circumstance, ‘not growing old with time’ (as time goes on). χρόνῳ oft.=‘at length’ ( O. C. 437).

μαρμαρόεσσαν (only here) =μαρμαρέαν. μαρμαίρω and its cognate adj. are applied to any sparkling or flashing light (as of sun or stars, bright eyes, gleaming metal). Cp. Il. 1.532 ἀπ’ αἰγλήεντος Ὀλύμπου . Blackwall A. compares the language of St Paul in 1 Tim. 6. 15 ὁ μακάριος καὶ μόνος δυνάστης...φῶς οἰκῶν ἀπρόσιτον .

τό τ’ ἔπειτα (acc. of duration) is what will immediately follow the present moment (cp. Plat. Parm. 152C τοῦ τε νῦν καὶ τοῦ ἔπειτα), and is here distinguished from τὸ μέλλον , the more distant future; Plaut. Pers. 778 (quoted by Schneid.) qui sunt, quique erunt (τὸ ἔπειτα), quique fuerunt, quique futuri sunt posthac (τὸ μέλλον) . It is much as if we said, ‘to-morrow, and for all time.’ Many have compared Eur. I. T. 1263 τά τε πρῶτα | τά τ’ ἔπειθ’ ἅ τ’ ἔμελλε τυχεῖν : but even if Seidler's ἅ τ’, rather than ὅσ’, be there the true correction of the MS. ὅσα τ’, the parallelism is not strict, since τὰ ἔπειτα would then mean ‘what followed τὰ πρῶτα,’ not, ‘what is to follow τὰ νῦν.’

καὶ τὸ πρίν is usu. explained as a compressed form of ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ πρὶν ἐπήρκεσε: but this is at least much bolder than the examples which are brought to support it, as Dem. or. 18 § 31 καὶ τότε καὶ νῦν καὶ ἀεὶ ὁμολογῶ , which would be parallel only if it were καὶ νῦν καὶ ἀεὶ καὶ τότε ὁμολογῶ: and νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ (181) is irrelevant, since πάλαι can take the pres. (279). Rather, perh., ἐπαρκέσει , ‘will hold good,’ means, ‘will be found true,’—both in the future, and if we scan the past.—For το— before πρίν, cp. O. C. 180 ἔτι—; προβίβαζε. ἐπαρκέσει , will hold out, hold good,=διαρκέσει: so only here, perhaps, for in Solon fr. 5. 1 δήμῳ μὲν γὰρ ἔδωκα τόσον κράτος ὅσσον ἐπαρκεῖ, we must surely read ἀπαρκεῖ, with Coraës.

πάμπολύ γ’ (Heath), for πάμπολις, is not only the best emendation, but (in my belief) a certain one. I do not know whether it has been noticed that πάμπολϋν in one of the late MSS. (see cr. n.), —a mere blunder for πάμπολις,—forcibly illustrates the ease with which the opposite change of πάμπολύ γ’ into πάμπολις could have occurred. The νόμος, then, is:— ‘Nothing vast comes to (enters into) the life of mortals, ἐκτὸς ἄτας, free from a curse (cp. ἔξω...αἰτίας, 445)’—without bringing ἄτη. Cp. Plat. Rep. 531D πάμπολυ ἔργον , Legg. 823 B πάμπολύ τι πρᾶγμα, ib. 677 E γῆς δ’ ἀφθόνου πλῆθος πάμπολυ . Too much power, or wealth, or prosperity —anything so great as to be μὴ κατ’ ἄνθρωπον—excites the divine φθόνος: the man shows ὕβρις, and this brings ἄτη. Cp. Her. 7.10 ὁρᾷς τὰ ὑπερέχοντα ζῷα ὡς κεραυνοῖ ὁ θεὸς οὐδὲ ἐᾷ φαντάζεσθαι, τὰ δὲ σμικρὰ οὐδέν μιν κνίζει; ὁρᾷς δὲ ὡς ἐς οἰκήματα τὰ μέγιστα αἰεὶ καὶ δένδρεα τὰ τοιαῦτα ἀποσκήπτει τὰ βέλεα; φιλέει γὰρ ὁ θεὸς τὰ ὑπερέχοντα πάντα κολούειν . L. Diog. 1. 3. 2(Zeus) τὰ μὲν ὑψηλὰ ταπεινῶν, τὰ δὲ ταπεινὰ ὑψῶν. Soph. fr. 320 καλὸν φρονεῖν τὸν θνητὸν ἀνθρώποις ἴσα.

ἕρπει : cp. Ai. 1087 ἕρπει παραλλὰξ ταῦτα (come to men): for the dat., cp. above, 186. The inf. ἕρπειν would be admissible after οὐδέν, since this is not a precept (like μὴ πλουτεῖν ἀδίκως), but a statement of fact. In 706 L has ἔχει by mistake for ἔχειν, and such errors are frequent. And δοκεῖν in 622 might seem to recommend ἕρπειν here. Yet ἕρπει seems right. For this is not what the νόμος says,—as δοκεῖν in 622 depends on ἔπος πέφανται, and δράσαντι παθεῖν in Aesch. Cho. 313 on μῦθος...φωνεῖ. The constant fact, οὐδὲν ἕρπει, is the νόμος. Cp. Ph. 435 λόγῳ δέ σ’ ἐν βραχεῖ | τοῦτ’ ἐκδιδάξω· πόλεμος οὐδέν’ ἄνδρ’ ἑκὼν | αἱρεῖ πονηρόν.

πάμπολις is impossible. For the attempts to explain it, and for other conjectures, see Appendix.

615-625

ἁ γὰρ δή κ.τ.λ. The γάρ introduces an explanation of the law just stated. ‘No inordinate desire comes to men without bringing ἄτη. For hope, which can be a blessing, can also be a curse, by luring a man to pursue forbidden things; and then he sins blindly, till the gods strike him. The gods cause him to mistake evil for good; and his impunity is of short duration.’ Creon is destined to exemplify this. πολύπλαγκτος , roaming widely—as a mariner over unknown seas—in dreams of the future. Soph. was perh. thinking of Pind. O. 12. 6 αἵ γε μὲν ἀνδρῶν | πόλλ’ ἄνω, τὰ δ’ αὖ κάτω ψεύδη μεταμώνια τάμνοισαι κυλίνδοντ’ ἐλπίδες, ‘at least, the hopes of men are

oft tossed up and down, ploughing a sea of vain deceits.’—πολύπλαγκτος might also be act., ‘causing men to err greatly’; but this is less fitting here.

πολλοῖς μὲν ὄνασις , by cheering them, and inciting to worthy effort. This clause is inserted merely for the sake of contrast with the next. When Greek idiom thus co-ordinates two clauses, the clause which we should subordinate to the other is that which has μέν; as here, ‘ though a blessing to many.’ So O. C. 1536 (n.), εὖ μὲν ὀψέ δ’, ‘late, though surely.’

ἀπάτα … ἐρώτων . The gen. is best taken as subjective, a cheating (of men) by desires; i.e., ἔρωτες ἀπατῶσι. The ἐλπίς is such an ἀπάτη, because it ends in that. If the gen. were objective, the sense would be ἐλπὶς ἀπατᾷ ἔρωτας. This is equally possible, but hardly so natural. In 630, ἀπάτας λεχέων, the gen. is neither of these, but one of relation (a deceiving of him about his marriage). Cp. Hes. Op. 460 νεωμένη οὔ σ’ ἀπατήσει, when ploughed again, the soil will not disappoint thee.

κουφονόων : see on 343.

The ἀπάτη, or final frustration of his desires, ἕρπει , creeps on him, οὐδὲν εἰδότι , knowing nothing. Others construe, οὐδὲν ἕρπει εἰδότι, nothing comes to him aware of it; i.e. he understands the true meaning of nothing that happens to him. This is somewhat forced; and that οὐδέν is object to εἰδότι is confirmed by Antiphon or. 1 § 29 οἱ δ’ ἐπιβουλευόμενοι οὐδὲν ἴσασι πρὶν ἐν αὐτῷ ὦσι τῷ κακῷ γ’ ἤδη. Cp. Ai. 964 τἀγαθὸν χεροῖν | ἔχοντες οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ .

πρὶν … προσαύσῃ . Attic, like epic, poetry can use simple πρίν, instead of πρὶν ἄν (308), with subjunct.: so Ai. 965 (see last n.), Ph. 917, Tr. 608, 946, etc.

προσαύσῃ (only here), ‘burn against.’ The simple verb occurs Od. 5.490 ἵνα μή ποθεν ἄλλοθεν αὔοι (sc. πῦρ), ‘kindle.’ Attic had ἐναύω, ‘kindle,’ and ἀφαύω, ‘parch.’ The image here seems to be that of a man who walks, in fancied security, over ashes under which fire still smoulders (cp. Lucr. 4. 927 cinere ut multo latet obrutus ignis , Hor. c. 2. 1. 7 incedis per ignes Suppositos cineri doloso ). There was a prov., ἐν πυρὶ βέβηκας (Suidas, etc.).

πόδα : cp. Aesch. Ch. 697 ἔξω κομίζων ὀλεθρίου πηλοῦ πόδα: Aesch. P. V. 263 πημάτων ἔξω πόδα | ἔχει (and so Soph. Ph. 1260 ἐκτὸς κλαυμάτων, Eur. Her. 109 ἔξω πραγμάτων ).—Some render προσαύσῃ ‘bring to,’ assuming an αὔω equiv. in sense to αἴρω: but the evidence for this is doubtful: see Appendix.

σοφίᾳ , modal dat.,=σοφῶς: cp. El. 233 εὐνοίᾳ γ’ αὐδῶ : so ὀργῇ ( O. T. 405), θυμῷ ( O. C. 659), etc.

ἔκ του , i.e. by some wise man of olden time:—not like the οὐκ ἔφα τις in Aesch. Ag. 369 (alluding to Diagoras). Cp. frag. adesp. 383 (schol. on Tr. 296) καὶ τοῦτο τοὔπος ἐστὶν ἀνδρὸς ἔμφρονος, | ὅταν καλῶς πράσσῃ τις, ἐλπίζειν κακά. For similar γνῶμαι in tragic lyrics, cp. Aesch. Ag. 750 , Ch. 313.

πεφάνται : Tr. 1 λόγος μὲν ἔστ’ ἀρχαῖος ἀνθρώπων φανείς : O. T. 525, 848.

τὸ κακὸν δοκεῖν ποτ’ κ.τ.λ. The sense of ποτέ here is not ‘sometimes,’ but ‘at one time or another,’ ‘at length,’ as Ph. 1041 ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ ποτέ. A moment arrives when he makes the fatal error. ἄτη (ἀάω), as the heaven-sent influence that leads men to sin, is properly ‘hurt done to the mind.’ Milton, Samson

1676 Among them he a spirit of phrenzy sent, Who hurt their minds. Cp. βλαψίφρων, φρενοβλαβής. Il. 19.137 ἀλλ’ ἐπεὶ ἀασάμην, καί μευ φρένας ἐξέλετο Ζεύς . Theognis 403 σπεύδει ἀνήρ, κέρδος διζήμενος, ὅν τινα δαίμων | πρόφρων εἰς μεγάλην ἀμπλακίην παράγει, | καί οἱ ἔθηκη δοκεῖν, ἃ μὲν ᾖ κακά, ταῦτ’ ἀγάθ’ εἶναι, | εὐμαρέως, ἃ δ’ ἂν ᾖ χρήσιμα, ταῦτα κακά. Lycurgus in Leocr. § 92 οἱ γὰρ θεοὶ οὐδὲν πρότερον ποιοῦσιν ἢ τῶν πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων τὴν διάνοιαν παράγουσι· καί μοι δοκοῦσι τῶν ἀρχαίων τινὲς ποιητῶν ὥσπερ χρησμοὺς γράψαντες τοῖς ἐπιγιγνομένοις ταῦτα τὰ ἰαμβεῖα καταλιπεῖν· ὅταν γὰρ ὀργὴ δαιμόνων βλάπτῃ τινά, | τοῦτ’ αὐτὸ πρῶτον, ἐξαφαιρεῖται φρενῶν | τὸν νοῦν τὸν ἐσθλόν, εἰς δὲ τὴν χείρω τρέπει | γνώμην, ἵν’ εἰδῇ μηδἐν ὧν ἁμαρτάνει. The schol. on our verse quotes an unknown poet's lines, ὅταν δ’ ὁ δαίμων ἀνδρὶ πορσύνῃ κακά, | τὸν νοῦν ἔβλαψε πρῶτον, ᾧ βουλευεται. (‘Quem Iuppiter vult perdere, dementat prius.’ See n. in Appendix.)— The epic ἔμμεν (used also by Pind. and Sappho) occurs nowhere else in tragedy.

ὀλίγιστον , a superl. used not only in epic poetry but also by Attic writers (as Ar. and Plat. ), is right here. The MS. ὀλιγοστόν cannot be defended by Aristoph. Pax 559 πολλοστῷ χρόνῳ , which is merely another form of πολλοστῷ ἔτει (Cratinus jun. Χείρ. 1); i.e. πολλοστός has its proper sense, ‘one of many’ (multesimus), and the χρόνος, like the ἔτος, is conceived as the last of a series. So ὀλιγοστὸς χρόνος would mean, not, ‘a fraction of time,’ but, ‘one in a small number of χρόνοι’ or periods. In Arist. Metaph. 9. 1. 14 most MSS., and the best, have ὀλίγιστον...χρόνον: while Ab (cod. Laur. 87. 12) is the only MS. cited in the Berlin ed. (p. 1053 a 9) for ὀλιγοστόν. And otherwise ὀλιγοστός occurs only in later Greek, as Anton. 51 καταβὰς ὀλιγοστός, ‘having gone to the coast with a small retinue’; Caes. 49 ὀλιγοστῷ τοσαύτην ἀμυνομένῳ πόλιν ‘fighting so great a State with a small force.’— πράσσει … ἐκτὸς ἄτας , like πράσσει καλῶς: so πράσσειν κατὰ νοῦν (Plat. Rep. 366B, Aristoph. Eq. 549 ). ἄτας is here ‘calamity’ (as in 584, 614), while in the last verse ἄταν is rather ‘infatuation.’—Donaldson changed ἄτας here to ἄλγους, because the strophe (614) also ends with ἐκτὸς ἄτας. On the other hand Dindorf ejects ἐκτὸς ἄτας from 614 (leaving a lacuna). But I believe ἐκτὸς ἄτας to be genuine in both places, as οὐδὲν ἕρπει also is both in 613 and in 618. We have to remember, first, that Soph. (like other ancient poets) easily tolerated repetition of words (see on O. C. 554); secondly, that tragic lyrics could admit refrains, and might, by a kindred instinct, permit such verbal echoes as these.

μήν instead of the usu. καὶ μήν (526).

νέατον , ‘youngest and last,’ Megareus being dead (1303): cp. 807 τὰν νεάταν ὁδόν; so 808, Ai. 1185. As applied

to a person, νέατος could not be said of a sole survivor unless he was also the latest-born. γέννημ’ : cp. 471 n.

ἀχνύμενος with μόρον as internal acc.: cp. Il. 5.361 ἄχθομαι ἔλκος .

In the MS. reading (see cr. n.) νύμφης is a gloss on τάλιδος : but τῆς μελλογάμου should be retained. Except in the lexicons, τᾶλις occurs only here and in a verse of Callimachus, αὐτίκα τὴν τᾶλιν παιδὶ σὺν ἀμφιθαλεῖ, quoted by the Schol., who says, τᾶλις λέγεται παρ’ Αἰολεῦσιν ἡ ὀνομασθεῖσά τινι νύμφη. Hesychius has, τᾶλις· ἡ μελλόγαμος παρθένος καὶ κατωνομασμένη τινί· οἱ δὲ γυναῖκα γαμετήν· οἱ δὲ νύμφην. This shows that τᾶλις could mean, not only an affianced bride, but also a bride after marriage: just as νύμφη can mean either. The epithet τῆς μελλογάμου is not, then, superfluous; and τῆς μελλονύμφου in 633 is no argument against it. On the other hand τάλιδος , without the epithet, would have a crude effect. A passage in Pollux (3. 45) has been taken to prove that he had τῆς μελλογάμου in his text. It does not prove this,—nor the reverse. τῆς μελλογάμου in Pollux should be (as Semitelos saw) τὴν μελλόγαμον, and we should refer his words solely to v. 633. His point is simply that ἡ μελλόνυμφος is more correct than ἡ μελλονύμφη.—Curtius connects τᾶλις with τέρ‐ην, tender; θρόνα, flowers: Sanskrit ta/r-una-s, youthful, tender, ta/l-unI, girl, young woman. He supposes the first idea to be that of a plant sprouting or blossoming (cp. θάλος). This at least agrees well with what we know as to the usage of τᾶλις.

ἀπάτας (gen. sing.) λεχέων , a deceit practised on <*> disappointment, in regard to his <*>. The gen. λεχέων is one of relation <*>ed, perhaps, by the idea of privation <*> ἀπάτη were ἀποστέρησις).

631-780

Third ἐπεισόδιον. Haemon vainly intercedes with his father. They quarrel, and the son abruptly leaves the scene (765). Creon then commands that Antigone shall at once be immured in a rocky vault.

μάντεων ὑπέρτερον = βέλτιον ἢ μάντεις ἴσασιν (better, therefore, than they could tell <*> Schol. ὁ λόγος παροιμιακῶς, ὁπότε μὴ <*>σμῷ χρώμεθα, ἀλλ’ αὐτόπται τῶν πρ<*> γινόμεθα. H. F. 911 ΑΓ. <*> δόμοισι.—ΧΟ. μάντιν οὐχ ἕτερον <*>. ‘I will not bring a seer, other than <*>self’ (cp. O. T. 6), i.e. ‘I need no <*> tell me that’:— imitated by the <*> of the Rhesus 949 σοφιστὴν δ’ ἄλλον <*>τάξομαι, who also has 952 ᾔδη <*>δὲν μάντεως ἔδει φράσαι. Cp. O. <*> <*>.

τελείαν He announces that he will not yield.

ψῆφο<*> 60.

ἆρα μή , like μῶν, ‘can it be <*>’ El. 446.

τῆς μελλονύμφου : for <*> gen., cp. Thuc. 1.140 τὸ Μεγαρέων <*>ισυα , and n. on 11.

λυσσαίνων , the <*>ing of the MSS., is a word not extant e<*>where, but as correctly formed as <*> χαλεπαίνω, etc. At first sight it <*> strong: λύσσα is ‘raving.’ But <*>ain vehemence of language characte<*> Creon (cp. 280 ff.). Instead of saying <*>, ‘have you come here in displeas<*> he says, ‘have you come here to sto<*> me?’ As σοὶ μέν shows, there is a <*> contrast with the sisters: he had des<*> Ismene as λυσσῶσαν (492). I therefore think λυσσαίνων genuine, and a finer reading than the variant noted in L, θυμαίνων . The latter word is used by Hesiod, and in Attic comedy. Some recent edd. place it in the text.

σοὶ μέν : cp. 498.

πανταχῇ δρῶντες , ‘however I may act.’ Ai. 1369 ὡς ἂν ποιήσῃς, πανταχῇ χρηστός γ’ ἔσει . Her. 9.27 πάντῃ γὰρ τεταγμένοι (wherever we may be posted) πειρησόμεθα εἶναι χρηστοί: id. 8. 110 πάντως ἕτοιμοι ἦσαν λέγοντι πείθεσθαι (‘ready in every case’).

σός : cp. O. C. 1323.

γνώμας ἔχων χρηστάς , having good counsels, ἀπορθοῖς (αὐτάς ) μοι , thou settest them before me as rules. ἀπορθόω (a rare word) means, like ἀπευθύνω, (1) ‘to straighten out.’ and then (2) ‘to guide in a straight course.’ Plat. Legg. 757E (praying the gods) ἀπορθοῦν τὸν κλῆρον πρὸς τὸ δικαιότατον, ‘to direct the lot (for magistracies) in the best interests of justice.’ Here the γνῶμαι are the κανόνες, regulae, which are to guide the youth's course: cp. fr. 430 ὥστε τέκτονος | παρὰ στάθμην ἰόντος ὀρθοῦται κανών. Eur. El. 52 γνώμης πονηροῖς κανόσιν ἀναμετρούμενος | τὸ σῶφρον .—Others understand: (1) ἀπορ<*> γνώμας μοι, thou guidest my views, <*>στὰς ἔχων, having good views (of thine own). Or (2) ‘Having good views, thou guidest me,’ supplying με with ἀπορθοῖς (like O. T. 104 ἀπευθύνειν πόλιν ). But μοι would then be awkward. Cp. Plaut. Trin. 304 (a son to his father) sarta tecta tua praecepta usque habui mea modestia.

ἀξιώσεται , pass.; cp. 210, O. C. 581 δηλώσεται , O. T. 672 στυγήσεται (n.). ἀξ. μείζων φέρεσθαι , will be esteemed more important to win (cp. 439 ἥσσω λαβεῖν): so Plat. Theaet. 161D ὥστε καὶ ἄλλων διδάσκαλος ἀξιοῦσθαι δικαίως, ‘to be justly ranked as a teacher.’ The same use is implied in Legg. 917 D ὁπόσης ἂν τιμῆς ἀξιώσῃ τὸ πωλούμενον (at whatever price he may value...).—L's reading, ἀξίως ἔσται , though tenable, seems slightly less probable, when we observe that this adv. is regularly used either (a) with gen., ἀξίως ἑαυτῶν, etc., or (b) absol., in such phrases as Thuc. 3.40 κολάσατε...ἀξίως τούτους , ‘according to their deserts.’ (So O. T. 133 ἀξίως =‘as the case required.’) Thus we could say, οὗτος ὁ γάμος ἀξίως ἔσται μείζων φ., ‘will deservedly (=on its merits) be a greater prize.’ But it is less natural to say, οὐδεὶς γάμος ἀξίως ἔσται μ. φ., ‘no marriage will rightly be preferred,’ etc., where ἀξίως becomes a mere equiv. for δικαίως or προσηκόντως. The change of ἀξιώσεται into ἀξίως ἔσται would have been the easier, since the ordinary fut. was ἀξιωθήσομαι.

σοῦ καλῶς ἡγουμ. , (with μείζων ), than thy good guiding: cp. Her. 1.34 μετὰ δὲ Σόλωνα οἰχόμενον . —It is a mistake (I think) to detect a mental reserve in the participle (‘than thy guiding, if, or when, it is good’). Haemon knows that his one chance of saving Antigone is first to mollify his father, and then to urge the argument from public opinion (688 ff.). His deference is unqualified.

γάρ in assent ( O. T. 1117).

διὰ στέρνων ἔχειν , lit., ‘to be disposed in one's breast,’=φρονεῖν, or διακεῖσθαι. The phrase differs in two points from others which seem like it. (1) The gen. with διά in such phrases regularly denotes a state or act of the mind, whereas στέρνων represents the mind itself. (2) ἔχειν in such phrases is always trans., the intrans. verb being εἶναι. Thus ἔχω τινά (or τι) δῑ αἰσχύνης, αἰτίας, ὀργῆς, φυλακῆς, etc. But εἰμὶ δῑ ἡσυχίης (Her. 1.206), διὰ φόβου (Thuc. 6.59), δῑ ὄχλου (Aristoph. Eccl. 888). Here οὕτω , going with ἔχειν , shows that the verb is intrans.,—not trans., with ταῦτα understood.

(One ought to think thus),—that is, ὄπισθεν ἑστάναι πατρ. γνώμης , one ought to place oneself under the guidance of a father's counsel, πάντα , in all things (adv. neut. pl., O. T. 1197 etc.). Thus ἑστάναι depends on χρή,—the indefinite subject of ἔχειν (τινά) being continued with it; and the whole clause explains οὕτω. The image from a soldier posted behind his leader suits the military tone in which Creon presently enforces the value of discipline (670). Cp. Plat. Rep. 471D εἴτε καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ τάξει εἴτε καὶ ὄπισθεν ἐπιτεταγμένον . The phrase ὄπισθεν ἑστάναι γνώμης is a poetical equiv. for ἀκολουθεῖν τῇ γνώμῃ (Thuc. 3.38).—We could also render,—‘that all things rank second to a father's will’: when ἑστάναι would depend on διὰ στέρνων ἔχειν as=νομίζειν. But ἑστάναι applies to the τάξις of persons more naturally than to the estimation of things: cp. Her. 9.27 ἵνα δοκέει ἐπιτηδεότατον ἡμέας εἶναι ἑστάναι (in battle): and the constr. is also less simple. ἱστάναι (which Musgrave proposed) would suit that view better.

ὡς without ἄν, as 760, O. T. 359, and oft.

ἀνταμύνωνται , a neutral word: thus Thuc. 2.67 τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἀμύνεσθαι , to retaliate; but 1. 42 τοῖς ὁμοίοις ἡμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι, to reward: here κακοῖς defines it.— ἐξ ἴσου πατρί = ὥσπερ ὁ πατήρ (cp. 516): O. C. 171 ἀστοῖς ἴσα χρὴ μελετᾶν .—The son's part is τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ φίλους νομίζειν,—the definition of a ξυμμαχία as dist. from a merely defensive ἐπιμαχία, Thuc. 1.44. Cp. 523 n.: Pind. P. 2. 83 φίλον εἴη φιλεῖν· | ποτὶ δ’ ἐχθρὸν ἅτ’ ἐχθρὸς ἐὼν λύκοιο δίκαν ὑποθεύσομαι.

ἄλλο is most simply taken as governed by φῦσαι , though, if we had ἤ instead of πλήν , Greek idiom would rather lead us to supply ποιῆσαι: see on 497, and cp. Ai. 125 οὐδὲν ὄντας ἄλλο πλὴν | εἵδωλ '. This is better than to make ἄλλο object to εἴποις (‘what could one say of him,’ etc.).

πόνους : cp. 533.—

γέλων : cp. El. 1153 γελῶσι δ’ ἔχθροι : Ai. 79 οὔκουν γέλως ἥδιστος εἰς ἐχθροὺς γελᾶν ; 961 οἱ δ’ οὖν γελώντων κἀπιχαιρόντων κακοῖς.

τὰς φρένας γ’ . Recent edd. have usually scorned the simple insertion of γε , by which Triclinius healed the metre. But it should be noticed that γε may emphasise τὰς φρένας ἐκβάλης, and not merely τὰς φρένας: cp. 747: O.C. 1278 τοῦ θεοῦ γε προστάτην, where γε emphasises the whole phrase, not merely the word θεοῦ. The deprecatory force of γε, as seen in μὴ σύ γε ( O. C. 1441 n.), also recommends it, even when we have not σύ. Cp. Eur. Hipp. 503 καὶ μή γε πρὸς θεῶν, εὖ λέγεις γάρ, αἰσχρὰ δέ, | πέρα προβῇς τῶνδ’ . Without, then, thinking φρένας γ’ certain, I think it far more probable than the next best remedy, φρένας σύ γ’ ἡδονῇ . As to a third conjecture, σύ γ’ ἡδονῆς, the phrase οὕνεκα ἡδονῆς γυναικός (pleasure in her) would be very awkward. Some strange emendations have been proposed: see Appendix.

φρένας … ἐκβάλῃς , cast off the restraint of reason, as O. T. 611 φίλον... ἐσθλὸν ἐκβαλεῖν , O. C. 631 εὐμένειαν ἐκβάλοι (reject friendship). The first idea is that of casting out of house or land, banishing. Somewhat similar is Plat. Crito 46B τοὺς δὲ λόγους, οὓς ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν ἔλεγον, οὐ δύναμαι νῦν ἐκβαλεῖν (reject). Cp. 683.

ὑφ’ ἡδονῆς : Ai. 382 ἦ που πολὺν γέλωθ’ ὑφ’ ἡδονῆς ἄγεις . Here the word denotes sensuous impulse: cp. Eur. Phoen. 21 ἡδονῇ δούς : Thuc. 3.38 ἀκοῆς ἡδονῇ ἡσσώμενοι .

ψυχρόν , frigid, joyless: Eur. Alc. 353 ψυχρὰν μέν, οἶμαι, τέρψιν.

παραγκάλισμα : so Tr. 540 ὑπαγκάλισμα (of a wife); and so ἀγκάλισμα, ἐναγκάλισμα. The neuter gives a contemptuous tone. Cp. 320 λάλημα, 756 δούλευμα. Eur. Or. 928 τἄνδον οἰκουρήματα (of women), Aesch. Ag. 1439 Χρυσηΐδων μείλιγμα (Agamemnon).

δόμοις . For the full stop after the 5th foot cp. O. T. 800.

ἕλκος , esp. an ulcer; said in Il. 2.723 of a serpent's venomous bite; hence fitting here in ref. to the false friend, the ἔχιδνα in the house (531). So civil strife (στάσις ἔμφυλος) is described by Solon as πάσῃ πόλει...ἕλκος ἄφυκτον (4. 17).

φίλος is any one near and dear to us; the masc. is used, though the reference is to a wife, because the thought of domestic treason is put in the most general way: so (though with ref. to a woman) 464 κατθανών, 496 ἁλούς. Cp. Eur. Alc. 355 ἡδὺ γὰρ φίλους | κἀν νυκτὶ λεύσσειν, ὅντιν’ ἂν παρῇ χρόνον (Admetus speaking of his wife: we might read φίλος).

πτύσας , with loathing: Aesch. PV 1069 (speaking of treason) κοὐκ ἔστι vόσος | τῆσδ’ ἥντιν’ ἀπέπτυσα μᾶλλον.

ὠσεί τε δυσμενῆ ( οὖσαν), and as if she were a foe. For πτύσας connected by τε with an adj. in a different case, see n. on 381 σέ γ’ ἀπιστοῦσαν...ἄγουσι...καὶ...καθελόντες. In El. 234 we have μάτηρ ὡσεί τις πιστά: but nowhere in Attic poetry do we find the epic and lyric use of ὡσεί τε as merely=ὡσεί ( Il. 2.780, Pind. 1. 44, etc.). And, as we have seen, it is needless to assume it here. Yet supposed difficulties about φίλος and ὡσεί τε have led Nauck to propose that vv. 652—654 should be made into two, thus: γένοιτ’ ἂν ἕλκος μεῖζον; ἀλλ’ ἀποπτύσας | τὴν παῖδ’ ἐν Ἅιδου τήνδε νυμφεύειν μέθες.

νυμφεύειν here= γαμεῖσθαι, nubere, as 816. But it also=γαμεῖν, uxorem ducere: Eur. I.A. 461 Ἅιδης νιν, ὡς ἔοικε, νυμφεύσει τάχα .

ἀπιστήσασαν : cp. 219.— ψευδῆ : referring to his solemn and public declaration, 184—210.

κτενῶ . For the emphatic pause, cp. 72 θάψω, and n. on 46.

πρὸς ταῦτ ', after an announcement of resolve, and before a defiant imperative, as O. T. 426, O. C. 455, El. 820, Aesch. PV 992, Aristoph. Ach. 959 etc. Similarly πρὸς οὖν τάδε, Aristoph. Nub. 1030.

ἐφυμνείτω , repeatedly invoke (a scornful word): cp. 1305, O. T. 1275 n.

Δία ξύναιμον : see on 487.

τά γ’ ἐγγ. φύσει , those who, by birth, are relatives: for the place of the adverbial φύσει, cp. El. 792 τοῦ θανόντος ἀρτίως , Aesch. PV 216 τῶν παρεστώτων τότε . For the neut., instead of τοὺς ἐγγενεῖς, cp. Ph. 448 τὰ μὲν πανοῦργα καὶ παλιντριβῆ...τὰ δὲ | δίκαια καὶ τὰ χρήστ’.

ἄκοσμα , unruly: so of Thersites, Il. 2.213 ὅς ῥ’ ἔπεα φρεσὶν ᾗσιν ἄκοσμά τε πολλά τε ᾔδη, | μάψ, ἀτὰρ οὐ κατὰ κόσμον, ἐριζέμεναι βασιλεῦσιν . Cp. 730.

θρέψω with predicative adj., as 1080, O. T. 98, etc.

κάρτα τοὺς ἔξω γ. , sc. ἀκόσμους θρέψω. It is needless to supply a more general verb, like ποιήσω: the ruler's relation to his people justifies θρέψω: cp. O. T. 1 ὦ τέκνα . ‘If I allow my own kindred to be unruly, I shall be obliged to tolerate unruliness in the citizens at large. For my authority as a ruler will be gone.’

661-671

Seidler transposes vv. 663—667, placing them after 671. The object is to bring vv. 668—671 into immediate connection with 662. In this there is one slight grammatical gain; since, as the vv. stand in the MSS., τοῦτον ...τὸν ἄνδρα (668) means, ‘the man who acts thus’ (viz., as described in vv. 666 f.). But the order given in the MSS. is right. The transposition obliterates one of the finest touches in the speech. Creon demands that the obedience of the citizens to the ruler shall be absolute (666 f.). And then he supplements this demand with a remark on the dignity of such obedience. The man who so obeys gives the best proof that he could also rule (668 ff.). Seidler destroys the point of vv. 668 ff. by placing them after 662.

The connection of thought in the whole passage—which is slightly obscured by compression—may be most clearly shown by taking the verses in small consecutive groups. (1) 659 f. If I tolerate disloyalty

in my own relatives, I shall encourage it in other citizens. (2) 661 f. For (γάρ) only a man who is firm (χρηστός) where his own relatives are concerned will be found to uphold justice in the State (i.e. will have the authority necessary for doing so). (3) 663 f. Now, I recognise disloyalty in any one who breaks the law and defies the government, as Antigone has done. (4) 666 f. Instead of so doing, the citizen is bound to obey the government in everything. (5) 668—671. There is nothing slavish in that; on the contrary, it shows that the citizen is not only a good subject, but would, if required, be a good ruler;—as he would also be a good soldier.—Then comes the general censure on unruliness (672—676). And then the conclusion:—I must vindicate my authority, and punish Antigone (677 —680).

ὑπερβάς , absol., having transgressed: Il. 9.501 ὅτε κέν τις ὑπερβήῃ καὶ ἁμάρτῃ : so Plat. Rep. 366A ὑπερβαίνοντες καὶ ἁμαρτάνοντες.

τοὐπιτάσσειν , prop. said of a master giving orders to slaves ( O. C. 839): so ἐπιτάγματα are a despot's commands (Arist. Pol. 4.4. 28). For the art., cp. 78.

νοεῖ , as 44.—Antigone ‘did violence to the laws’ by her deed: she seemed ‘to dictate to her rulers’ when she proclaimed a law superior to theirs (450 ff.). Cp. 482 ff.

στήσειε : the optat. (instead of ὃν ἂν στήσῃ) puts the case in the most general way: any one whom she might conceivably appoint. Hence this optat. suits γνῶμαι: cp. 1032 : Tr. 92 τό γ’ εὖ | πράσσειν, ἐπεὶπύθόιτο, κέρδοσἐμπολᾷ : O.T. 315 (n.), ib. 979.

καὶ τἀναντία , i.e. καὶ μεγάλα καὶ ἄδικα. So oft. in euphemisms, Thuc. 4.62 ἀγαθὸν ἢ...τὰ ἐναντία : Plat. Rep. 472C εὐδαιμονίας τε πέρι καὶ τοῦ ἐναντίου . Cp. Leutsch Paroem. App. 1. 100 κρεισσόνων γὰρ καὶ δίκαια κἄδικ’ ἔστ’ ἀκούειν: and the verse cited by schol. on Aesch. PV 75 δοῦλε, δεσποτῶν ἄκουε καὶ δίκαια κἄδικα .

τοῦτον … τὸν ἄνδρα refers to the indefinite subject of κλύειν in 666:—the man who thus obeys. The looseness of grammatical connection would hardly be felt when the sense was so clear. Cp. 1035 (τῶν δ’). So in O. C. 942 αὐτούς refers to τὴν πόλιν in 939.

καλῶς...εὖ : for the change of word in the epanaphora cp. O. C. 1501 σαφὴς μὲν ἀστῶν ἐμφανὴς δὲ τοῦ ξένου (n.).

ἄν with ἄρχειν (=ὅτι ἄρχοι ἄν) as well as θέλειν .

δορὸς … χειμῶνι . Eur. Suppl. 474 πολὺς κλύδων | ἡμῖν τε καὶ σοὶ ξυμμάχοις τ’ ἔσται δορός.

προστεταγμένον , the regular term for placing soldiers at their posts: Thuc. 2.87 ἕπεσθε, χώραν μὴ προλείποντες ᾗ ἄν τις προσταχθῇ.

παραστάτην , one who stands beside one in the ranks (as προστάτης in front and ἐπιστάτης behind): Xen. Cyr. 3.3.21 (the gods are invoked as) παραστάτας ἀγαθοὺς καὶ συμμάχους. The Attic ἔφηβος, on beginning, at eighteen, his term of service as a περίπολος, took an oath, οὐ καταισχυνῶ ὅπλα τὰ ἱερὰ [the arms given to him by the State], οὐδ’ ἐγκαταλείψω τὸν παραστάτην ὅτῳ ἂν στοιχήσω (by whose side he should be placed): Serm. 43. 48. Thus for an Athenian audience this verse would be effective, and would seem peculiarly appropriate when addressed to the youthful Haemon.

πόλεις ὄλλυσιν, ἥδ’ is far better and more spirited than πόλεις τ’ ὄλλυσιν ἠδ’ : it is also strongly confirmed by the similar passage, 296 ff., where we have τοῦτο—τόδ’—τόδ’, just as here αὕτη...ἥδ’... ἥδ’. When πόλεις had become, as in L, πόλις,—a corruption found also in Aesch. Pers. 489,—τ’ may have been added for metre's sake. To ἠδέ itself there is no objection: it was certainly used in iambics by Soph. (fr. 253, fr. 503), no less than by Aesch. ( Aesch. Cho. 1025 , Aesch. Eum. 414), and by Eur. ( Eur. Hec. 323 , H. F. 30).— Campb. reads πόλεις τ’ … ἥδ’ , and regards the anacoluthon as making the lines ‘more expressive.’

συμμάχου is a certain correction of L's συμμάχηι . The meaning is, ‘Disobedience causes allied forces (σύμμαχον δόρυ) to break up in flight.’ It turns union into disunion,—the hope of victory into defeat. With σὺν μάχῃ the sense would be, ‘Disobedience, aiding the spear (of the foe), causes rout.’ But this would represent disobedience as merely one cause of defeat,—an incident that turns the scale. It is evidently more forcible to represent it as breaking up an army which might otherwise have stood united and firm.

τροπὰς καταρρήγνυσι , lit., causes rout to break forth, i.e. breaks up the army in rout. Cp. Athen. 130 C ὁ γελωτοποιὸς εἰσῆλθε...καὶ πολλοὺς κατέρρηξεν ἡμῶν γέλωτας, ‘and caused shouts of laughter to break forth among us’: (not, ‘wreaked many witticisms upon us,’—as Casaubon took it.) The only peculiarity in the use of the verb is that it is here equiv. to ποιεῖ καταρρήγνυσθαι. We cannot compare Theocr. 22. 172 νεῖκος ἀναρρήξαντας , ‘having broken into strife’ (said of the parties to it), which is merely like ῥῆξαι φωνήν, etc.

τῶν δ’ ὀρθουμένων (masc.), of those who have a prosperous course: Thuc. 2.60 πόλιν...ὀρθουμένην , opp. to σφαλλομένην: 8. 64 ξυνέβη...τὴν πόλιν ἀκινδύνως ὀρθοῦσθαι. Cp. 163, 167.— τὰ πολλὰ σώματα , ‘the greater number of lives,’ differing from τοὺς πολλούς only by bringing out the notion of personal safety more vividly. Cp. Ai. 758 where the masc. ὅστις follows τὰ...σώματα.

ἡ πειθαρχία : called τῆς εὐπραξίας | μήτηρ by Aesch. Th. 225.The schol. quotes Il. 5.531 αἰδομένων δ’ ἀνδρῶν πλέονες σόοι ἠὲ πέφανται .

ἀμυντέ’ , the impers. neut. plur., as Her. 9.58 ἐκείνοισι ταῦτα ποιεῦσι οὐκ ἐπιτρεπτέα ἐστί, ἀλλὰ διωκτέοι εἰσί : I. Thuc. 86 τιμωρητέα , Thuc. 88 πολεμητέα, Thuc. 118 ἐπιχειρητέα, etc.: so O. C. 495 ὁδωτά . Cp. 447, 576. Eur. Or. 523 ἀμυνῶ δ’, ὅσονπερ δυνατός εἰμι, τῷ νόμῳ . Thuc. 1.140 τοῖς κοινῇ δόξασι βοηθεῖν.

τοῖς κοσμουμένοις (neut.), the regulations made by οἱ κοσμοῦντες, the rulers: meaning here, his own edicts. For the act. κοσμεῖν, cp. Her. 1.59 (Peisistratus) ἔνεμε τὴν πόλιν κοσμέων καλῶς τε καὶ εὖ. And for the pass. thus used, ib. 100 ταῦτα μὲν κατὰ τὰς δίκας ἐποίεε (deïoces), τάδε δὲ ἄλλα ἐκεκοσμέατό οἱ : ‘and the following regulations had also been made by him.’— Another view (also noticed by the Schol.) makes τοῖς κ. dat. of οἱ κοσμούμενοι, ‘the rulers.’ But (a) the only place which might seem to favour this use of the midd. is Thuc. 8.24 (the Chians, the more they prospered) τόσῳ καὶ ἐκοσμοῦντο ἐχυρώτερον: but there the verb may well be pass., ‘the more securely was their government organised.’ (b) As Creon is himself at once ὁ ἀμύνων and ὁ κοσμῶν, it is more natural that he should speak of his own edicts than of ‘the rulers.’—κόσμος was said of a constitution, esp. oligarchical ( Thuc. 4.76 μεταστῆσαι τὸν κόσμον καὶ ἐς δημοκρατίαν...τρέψαι : 8. 72 μένειν ἐν τῷ ὀλιγαρχικῷ κόσμῳ ). The Cretan κόσμοι were oligarchical magistrates, with military as well as civil powers (Arist. Pol. 2.10 ).

κοὔτοι … ἡσσητέα : Aristoph. Lys. 450 ἀτὰρ οὐ γυναικῶν οὐδέποτ’ ἔσθ’ ἡττητέα | ἡμῖν . (Cp. Milton, Samson 562 ‘Effeminately vanquished.’) Since ἡσσᾶσθαι is only pass., its verbal in τέος can be only pass.: as ἁλωτέον could mean only, ‘one must be taken.’ But even in other cases the verbal in τέος sometimes answers to the pass., not to the act., sense of the verb: as Xen. Oec. 7§ 38 ὅταν ἐκείνη (the queen-bee) ἐκλίπῃ, οὐδεμία οἴεται τῶν μελιττῶν ἀπολειπτέον εἶναι, ἀλλ’ ἕπονται πᾶσαι: i.e. ὅτι δεῖ ἀπολείπεσθαι (pass.), ‘to be left behind’: (for the stationary bees could not be said ἀπολείπειν the emigrant.)

δεῖ : for the pause, cp. 555.— ἐκπεσεῖν : here absol., to be displaced,

thrust out: oft. of dethronement (ἐκπ. τυραννίδος, ἀρχῆς, κράτους, Aesch. ), or of exile ( χθονός, O. C. 766).

κοὐκ ἂν...καλοίμεθ’ ἄν : the doubled ἄν, as oft. in emphatic or excited utterances ( O. T. 339 n.). —These two verses (like so many others) have been suspected merely because they are not indispensable. A defence is perhaps hardly needed. It is enough to remark that Creon's irritation under a woman's defiance (484, 525, 579) naturally prompts this further comment on the word γυναικός in 678. And the phrase γυναικῶν ἥσσονες (680) has a peculiar force as spoken to Haemon,— whom Creon afterwards taunts as γυναικὸς ὕστερον (746).

μέν : 498, 634.

τῷ χρόνῳ , by our age: cp. 729 τὸν χρόνον, ‘my years’: O. T. 963.

κεκλέμμεθα , are deceived: so 1218: Tr. 243 εἰ μὴ ξυμφοραὶ κλέπτουσί με .

δοκεῖς λέγειν φρονούντως περὶ (τούτων περὶ) ὧν λέγεις. At first sight it is natural to wish, with Herm. , for δοκεῖς... ὧν λέγεις λέγειν πέρι. Cp. 1057 ἃν λέγῃς λέγων. But here it is fitting that λέγειν should have the prominence of the first place. And the undoubted harshness of the order may be partly excused by observing that ὧν λέγεις is practically equiv. to τούτων.

θεοί . Creon had urged that filial piety demands the submission of the son's judgment to the γνώμη πατρῴα (640); and had warned Haemon against disregarding the voice of reason (648). Haemon replies: ‘Reason is the gift of the gods. I dare not suggest that your reasonings are wrong; but other men, too, may sometimes reason soundly. Now, I know what the Thebans are saying of your action; and, as a son devoted to your welfare, I ought to tell you.’—The tact and deference which mark this speech place Creon's αὐθάδεια in a stronger light.

κτημάτων : cp. 1050: O. T. 549: Her. 5.24 κτημάτων πάντων ἐστὶ τιμιώτατον ἀνὴρ φίλος ξυνετός τε καὶ εὔνοος .

ἐγὼ δ’ ὅπως : lit., ‘I should not be able to say (and may I never be capable of saying!) in what respect (ὅπως) thou dost not say these things rightly.’ He could not, if he would—and would not, if he could—impugn his father's reasonings. He only suggests that the case may have also another aspect, which Creon has not considered.

μὴ after ὅπως is generic, as after ὅς, ὅστις (691, 696): I could not say what point in thy argument is such as not to be true:—just as we could have, οὐκ οἶδα ὃ (or ὅ τι ) μὴ ἀληθεύεις. The μή might be taken with ὀρθῶς (‘how thou sayest otherwise than rightly’), but the order of words is against this. [It cannot be explained as substituted for οὐ through the influence of the optatives.]

μήτ’ ἐπισταίμην . For this verb as=‘to be capable of,’ cp. 472, Tr. 543 ἐγὼ δὲ θυμοῦσθαι μὲν οὐκ ἐπίσταμαι | νοσοῦντι κείνῳ . For the wish co-ordinated with the statement of fact, cp. 500: Tr. 582 κακὰς δὲ τόλμας μήτ’ ἐπισταίμην ἐγὼ | μήτ’ ἐκμάθοιμι, τάς τε τολμώσας στυγῶ : and ib. 143.

καλῶς ἔχον ( sc. τι: cp. O. T. 517 εἰς βλάβην φέρον ), something good, some true thought, γένοιτο ἂν καὶ ἑτέρῳ , might come to (accrue to) another also. For γένοιτο cp. Plat. Symp. 211D εἴ τῳ γένοιτο αὐτὸ τὸ καλὸν ἰδεῖν . (The phrase γένοιτο μέντἂν occurs also Ai. 86.)—Not: ‘Yet it might be found well for another’ (to say that you were wrong). Haemon seeks to propitiate his father; but that purpose would scarcely be served by such a speech as this—‘Being your son, I do not contradict you myself, though I think that other people might very reasonably do so.’

σοῦ δ’ οὖν : ‘but in any case (i.e., whatever may be the worth of opinions different from yours) it is my natural part to watch on your behalf,’ etc. For δ’ οὖν cp. 722, 769: O. C. 1205 ἔστω δ’ οὖν ὅπως ὑμῖν φίλον .—The gen. σοῦ is supported by the use of the gen. with προκήδομαι (741), προταρβῶ (83), προνοῶ, etc., and expresses the idea, ‘in thy defence,’ better than σοί would do. Cp. Eur. Med. 459 τὸ σὸν...προσκοπούμενος .— Herm. adopted the v.l. of the schol. in L, σὺ δ’ οὐ πέφυκας , which Ellendt approves: but ( a) πέφυκας is then less fitting, and (b) δ’ οὖν commends the vulgate as genuine.—For the repeated τις , cp. Aesch. Eum. 889 μῆνίν τιν’ ἢ κότον τιν '. Thuc. 4.62 εἴ τῴ τι ἔστιν ἀγαθὸν ἢ εἴ τῳ τὰ ἐναντία . (Distinguish Eur. Or. 1218 ἤν τις,... | ἢ σύμμαχός τις ἢ κασίγνητος ,— anyone,—be he ally or brother: and Andr. 733 ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω | Σπάρτης πόλις τις, which, if sound, is a mere pleonasm.)

τὸ γὰρ σόν , not τὸ σὸν γάρ: so O. T. 671 τὸ γὰρ σόν, οὐ τὸ τοῦδ’ : ib. 1024 ἡ γὰρ πρὶν...ἀπαιδία . In the case of σόν, at least, this order seems to strengthen, rather than diminish, the emphasis. ὄμμα : cp. O. T. 447 οὐ τὸ σὸν | δείσας πρόσωπον . Jeremiah i. 8 ‘Be not afraid of their faces.’

δημότῃ , the ordinary Theban citizen: cp. O. C. 78 n.

λόγοις τοιούτοις , causal dat.: thy face is terrible to the citizen on account of such words as shall displease thee: i.e. the citizen imagines the stern king's face growing darker at the sound of frank speech, and restrains his lips. (Cp. 509.) Doubts as to the dat. λόγοις τ. led Dindorf to suppose the loss of one verse (or more) after 690. Herwerden has suggested something like κοὐδείς ποτ’ ἀστῶν ἐμφανῶς χρῆται, πάτερ, | λόγοις τοιούτοις κ.τ.λ. Nauck thinks that either v. 691 is wholly spurious, or that the words λόγοις τοιούτοις are corrupt. But, while the dat. is certainly bold—esp. with ἀνδρὶ δ. preceding it—it is (I think) quite within the possibilities of classical idiom. We should remember that Athenians were accustomed to use a simple dat. (of ‘time’ or ‘occasion’) in speaking of festivals,—as τραγῳδοῖς καινοῖς: cp. (e.g.) Plat. Symp. 174A χθὲς γὰρ αὐτὸν διέφυγον τοῖς ἐπινικίοις , ‘I eluded him yesterday when he was holding his sacrifice for victory.’ So, here, the dat. λόγοις τοιούτοις , though properly causal, might sound to a Greek ear like, ‘at such words,’ i.e. ‘when such words are spoken.’ The causal dat. in 391, ταῖς σαῖς ἀπειλαῖς, is similar. Cp. also Thuc. I. 84 εὐπραγίαις...οὐκ ἐξυβρίζομεν, where the notion, ‘by reason of successes,’ is similarly blended with the notion, ‘in seasons of success.’

οἷς with τέρψει (cp. O. C. 1140, Ph. 460), κλύων epexegetic. If, however, the order had been κλύων τέρψει, then οἷς might have been for οὕς, by attraction. The μή is generic (‘such that not...’), cp. 696. For the fut. midd. τέρψομαι (with pass. sense) cp. fr. 612 ὅπου γε μὴ δίκαια τέρψεται, and [Eur.] Rhes. 194. For the fut. ind. after a relative with μή, cp. O. T. 1412 n. —Nauck reads τέρψῃ (aor. midd.). This rare aor. ἐτερψ)άμην is epic, as Od. 12.188 τερψάμενος (‘having had delight’). It is not Attic, the Attic aor. in that sense being ἐτέρφθην ( O. C. 1140).

ὑπὸ σκότον goes with ἀκούειν more naturally than, with ὀδύρεται , and the sense is the same: i.e., he is in the σκότος where the things are said: for the gen., cp. 65 n., and Tr. 539 μίμνομεν μιᾶς ὑπὸ | χλαίνης , which shows that we need not here conceive the sounds as ‘coming from under’ the darkness. Cp. Xen. Cyr. 4.6.4 κατέσχεν ὑπὸ σκότου τὸν φθόνον . Eur. Or. 1457 ὑπὸ σκότου | ξίφη σπάσαντες . But ὑπὸ σκότῳ also occurs (Aesch. Ag. 1030, Eur. Phoen. 1214).

κάκιστ’ … εὐκλεεστάτων : cp. O. T. 1433 ἄριστος ἐλθὼν πρὸς κάκιστον . Plat. Apol. 30A τὰ πλείστου ἄξια περὶ ἐλαχίστου ποιεῖται.

ἀπ’ ἔργων , as their result: Ai. 1078 πεσεῖν ἂν κἂν ἀπὸ σμικροῦ κακοῦ .

ἥτις with causal force ( O. C. 962); hence, too, the generic μήθ’ … μήθ’ which belong to εἴασε (understood with the second μήθ’), not to ὀλέσθαι : ‘being one who did not allow’ (quae non permiserit).

αὐτάδελφον : cp. 1.

ἐνφοναῖς : cp. 1314. The phrases ἐν φονῇσιν and ἀμφὶ φονῇσιν are Homeric, and Her.uses the former (with art., Her. 9. 76 ἐν τῇσι φονῇσι ἐόντας). The phrase ἐν φοναῖς is used by Pindar, Aesch. , Eur. , and (in parody) by But Ar. v. 1003 of this play— the only play of Soph. which contains the word—seems a solitary Attic instance of φοναῖς without ἐν.

χρυσῆς , a general epithet for what is brilliant or precious: thus Pind. P. 3. 73 ὑγίειαν...χρυσέαν, and even ( Pind. O. 10. 13) στεφάνῳ χρυσέας ἐλαίας (the wreath of natural olive), as Olympia is μάτηρ χρυσοστεφάνων ἀέθλων ( Pind. O. 8. 1) in a like sense. Cp. O. T. 157 (‘golden’ hope), O. C. 1052 (the ‘golden’ bliss of initiation).—There is no allusion to a χρυσοῦς στέφανος.

λαχεῖν can take either gen. or acc., the latter being more freq. ( O. C. 450 n.). But here the inf. is rather epexegetic (cp. 1098 λαβεῖν), the gen. depending on ἀξία .

ἐπέρχεται , spreads over (the town). Cp. Od. 1.299 οἷον κλέος ἔλλαβε... | πάντας ἐπ’ ἀνθρώπους . Cp. ὑφέρπειν, of secret rumour, O. T. 786 n.

θάλλοντος , prospering, as Ph. 419 μέγα | θάλλοντές εἰσι νῦν ἐν Ἀργείων στρατῷ.

μεῖζον εὐκλείας = μεῖζον ἢ εὔκλεια.

πρὸς παίδων , on their part, from their side: cp. Tr. 738 τί δ’ ἔστιν, ὦ παῖ, πρός γ’ ἐμοῦ στυγούμενον ; We understand μεῖζον ἄγαλμά ἐστι τῆς ἐκείνων εὐκλείας. —The conjecture εὐκλεία is attractive, (a) because θάλλω so oft. takes a dat. of respect, as Hes. Op. 234(ἀγαθοῖσι), Pind. O. 9. 16(ἀρεταῖσιν), etc.: ( b) because the strong sigmatism of the verse is thus modified. But the words πρὸς παίδων confirm εὐκλείας, since with εὐκλείᾳ we should have expected παίδων alone. It is true that πατὴρ θάλλων εὐκλείᾳ could mean ‘a father's fame’ (cp. 638); but one could not havé, πρὸς παίδων τί μεῖζον ἄγαλμα παίδων εὐκλείᾳ θαλλόντων;— Triclinius wrongly joined εὐκλείας ἄγαλμα, thinking of εὐκλείας γέρας ( Ph. 478) and στέφανον εὐκλείας μέγαν ( Ai. 465).

νυν : cp. 524 .

φόρει : Aristoph. Eq. 757 λῆμα θούριον φορεῖν : Eur. Hipp. 118 σπλάγχνον ἔντονον φέρων . So Shaksp. Cymb. 3. 4. 146 ‘if you could wear a mind | Dark as your fortune is’ : Caes. 5. 1. 113 ‘He bears too great a mind.’

ἦθος =a way of thinking: the inf. depends on it, as on ‘do not think.’ ὡς φὴς σύ , your way of speaking,=ὃ σὺ φής: cp. O. C. 1124 (n.) καί σοι θεοὶ πόροιεν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω.

κοὐδέν , not καὶ μηδέν: it is merely oratio obliqua for ὅτι τοῦτο καὶ οὐδὲν ἄλλο ὀρθῶς ἔχει. The imperative μὴ...φόρει does not affect this: cp. Ai. 1085 καὶ μὴ δοκῶμεν δρῶντες ἃν ἡδώμεθα | οὐκ ἀντιτίσειν αὖθις ἃν λυπώμεθα . But καὶ μηδέν could also have stood here, since v. 705 could be regarded as equiv. to, ‘do not feel confident that...’: see n. on O. T. 1455.

τοῦτο , antecedent to ὡς φης, emphatically placed: cp. O. T. 385.

μόνος with φρονεῖν only.— ψυχήν : cp. 176. Theognis 221 ὅστις τοι δοκέει τὸν πλησίον ἴδμεναι οὐδέν, | ἀλλ’

αὐτὸς μοῦνος ποικίλα δήνε’ (devices) ἔχειν, | κεῖνός γ’ ἄφρων ἐστί, νόου βεβλαμμένος ἐσθλοῦ, | ἴσως γὰρ πάντες ποικίλ’ ἐπιστάμεθα. Isocr. or. 3 § 43 joins Theognis, Hesiod and Phocylides as ἀρίστους...συμβούλους τῷ βίῳ τῷ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. They were read in schools.

οὗτοι after the collective ὅστις: Xen. Oec. 7. 37 ὃς ἂν κάμνῃ τῶν οἰκετῶν, τούτων σοι ἐπιμελητέον πάντων.

διαπτυχθέντες , when laid open. Cp. Eur. Hipp. 984 τὸ μέντοι πρᾶγμ’, ἔχον καλοὺς λόγους, | εἴ τις διαπτύξειεν, οὐ καλὸν τόδε . Andr. 330 ἔξωθέν εἰσιν οἱ δοκοῦντες εὖ φρονεῖν | λαμπροί, τὰ δ’ ἔνδον πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἴσοι. Also σκόλιον no. 7 in Bergk Poet. Lyr. (from Athen. 694 C, etc.) εἴθ’ ἐξῆν ὁποῖός τις ἦν ἕκαστος | τὸ στῆθος διελόντ’, ἔπειτα τὸν νοῦν | ἐσιδόντα, κλῄσαντα πάλιν, | ἄνδρα φίλον νομίζειν ἀδόλῳ φρενί. The image might be suggested by various objects,— a casket, tables, fruit, or the like.—Cp. Shaks. Rom. 3. 2. 83(of Romeo) ‘Was ever book containing such vile matter So fairly bound?’

κενοί , sc. ὄντες: cp. 471.

ἄνδρα , subject to μανθάνειν , as O. T. 314 ἄνδρα δ’ ὠφελεῖν κ.τ.λ. : for the place of τό , cp. 723 , Tr. 65 σὲ... | τὸ μὴ πυθέσθαι instead of τὸ σὲ μὴ πυθέσθαι.

κεἰ … ᾖ : see O. T. 198 n.

τείνειν , absol., here, like τείνειν τόξον or τείνειν πόδα, ‘to strain the cord too tight,’—to be overrigid in maintaining one's own views. This poet. use should be distinguished from the ordinary intrans. use of τείνω, like tendere, ‘to have a direction,’ or ‘take one's way’ ( Xen. Anab. 4.3.21 ἔτεινον ἄνω πρὸς τὸ ὄρος ).

παρὰ ῥείθρ. : for ā before initial ῥ, cp. O. T. 847 (ἐμὲ ῥέπον), O. C. 900 ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος.

χειμάρροις , here a neut. adj., as Eur. Tro. 449 ὕδατι χειμάρρῳ : usu. ὁ χειμάρρους (sc. ποταμός). Tozer, Geo. Gr. p. 84: ‘The numerous torrents (χειμάῤῥοι) are the natural result of the configuration of the country, for the steep limestone mountains have but little of a spongy surface to act as a reservoir for the rain... It is especially at the time of the autumn rains that the greatest floods take place, and the sudden swelling and violent rush of the stream has furnished Homer with some of his finest similes.’ ( Il. 4.452 ff., 16, 384 ff.: imitated by 2. 305 ff., 12. 523.)—Antiphanes (c. 380 B.C.) parodies these verses (fr. incert. 10: Athen. 22 F).

ὑπείκει . Cp. Babrius fab. 36: an oak, torn up by the roots, is being swept down by a boiling torrent, and asks the reeds how they have managed to escape; when a reed ( κάλαμος) answers;—σὺ μὲν μαχομένη ταῖς πνοαῖς ἐνικήθης, | ἡμεῖς δὲ καμπτόμεσθα μαλθακῇ γνώμῃ, | κἂν βαιὸν ἡμῶν ἄνεμος ἄκρα κινήσῃ.

αὐτόπρεμνα = αὐτόρριζα, πρόρριζα; Il. 9.541 χαμαὶ βάλε δένδρεα μακρὰ | αὐτῇσιν ῥίζῃσι .

αὔτως , adv. from αὐτός (with ‘Aeolic’ acc.); see on O. T. 931.

ναός , Doric for νεώς, allowed by tragedy even in iambics, as Ai. 872, Aesch. Th. 62, Eur. Med. 523: though νᾶες (953) and ναΐ occur only in lyrics. So ναός, temple (286), Ἀθάνα, κυναγός, ὁδαγός, ποδαγός (1196): and even in Att.prose λοχαγός, οὐραγός, ξεναγός.

ἐγκρατῆ , proleptic: cp. 475 περισκελῆ.

πόδα , the sheet: the πόδες were ropes attached to the two lower corners of the sail, whence their name. Eur. Or. 706 καὶ ναῦς γάρ, ἐνταθεῖσα πρὸς βίαν ποδί, | ἔβαψεν, ἔστη δ’ αὖθις, ἢν χαλᾷ πόδα : a ship dips when strained too hard by the sheet (i.e. when the sheet is hauled too taut), but rights again, if one slackens.

μηδέν , generic (such an one as does not...).

κάτω στρέψας , sc. ναῦν, easily supplied from ναός: for κάτω, cp. 527: for στρέφω = ἀναστρέφω, O. C. 1453. Hermann's τὸ πλοῖον for τὸ λοιπόν is not only needless, but spoils the force of the phrase: ‘thenceforth voyages,’ is an ironical way of saying that the voyage comes to an abrupt end: cp. 311.

σέλμασιν , the rowers' benches: thus ὑπτίοις vividly suggests the moment of capsizing.

εἶκε θυμοῦ , ‘cease from wrath,’ lit., recede from it. The θυμός is conceived as ground from which he retires; so θυμοῦ περᾶν=‘to go far in wrath,’ and is contrasted with εἴκειν: O. T. 673 στυγνὸς μὲν εἴκων δῆλος εἶ, βαρὺς δ’, ὅταν | θυμοῦ περάσῃς . For the gen., cp. Il. 4.509 μηδ’ εἴκετε χάρμης | Ἀργείοις : ib. 5. 348 εἶκε, Διὸς θύγατερ, πολέμου καὶ δηϊοτῆτος : Her. 2.80 εἴκουσι τῆς ὁδοῦ : id. 7. 160 ὑπείξομεν τοῦ ἀρχαίου λόγου : Aristoph. Ran. 790 ὑπεχώρησεν αὐτῷ τοῦ θρόνου . Eur. has a somewhat similar phrase, Eur. Hipp. 900 ὀργῆς δ’ ἐξανεὶς κακῆς, ἄναξ | Θησεῦ, τὸ λῷστον σοῖσι βούλευσαι δόμοις, where the sense is, ‘having remitted thy wrath,’ ἐξανεὶς [σεαυτὸν] ὀργῆς.

καὶ μετάστασιν δίδου , ‘and concede a change’: allow our pleading to change your mood. A change in Creon's mood implies a change in the whole situation. For the notions thus blended in μετάστασιν here, cp. Alexis fr. incert. 46 τῶν μετρίων αἱ μείζονες | λῦπαι ποιοῦσι τῶν φρενῶν μετάστασιν: Andoc. or. 2 § 18 οἴσειν ἔμελλεν...τοῦ τότε παρόντος κακοῦ μετάστασιν.

δίδου : a verb oft. used of concession to the remonstrance of friends: Ai. 483 παῦσαί γε μέντοι καὶ δὸς ἀνδράσιν φίλοις | γνώμης κρατῆσαι : Tr. 1117 δός μοι σεαυτόν, μὴ τοσοῦτον ὡς δάκνει | θυμῷ δύσοργος .—Others place a comma or point at εἶκε , taking καί as= ‘also’; ‘yield, also permitting thy wrath to change’ (with διδούς); or ‘yield: also permit,’ etc. (an asyndeton, with δίδου). On this view, either θυμῷ or θυμοῦ is possible. But the fatal objection to it is the weakness of καί , whether the ‘also’ is explained ( a) as by Campbell (with δίδου) —‘if you are angry, be also placable’; or (b) as by Wecklein (with διδούς)—‘it is possible not only to moderate one's passion, but also to desist from it,’ which implies that he might yield while still angry.—See Appendix.

εἴ τις γνώμη πρόσεστι καὶ ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ ν. (ὄντος), i.e., if I also, younger though I am, can contribute a sound opinion. Cp. O. C. 292 τἀνθυμήματα | ...τἀπὸ σοῦ , the thoughts urged on thy part. El. 1464 τελεῖται τἀπ’ ἐμοῦ . For the modest καί , cp. O. T. 1100 εἰ χρή τι κἀμὲ...σταθμᾶσθαι : Ph. 192 εἴπερ κἀγώ τι φρονῶ.—If κἀπ’ were taken as καὶ ἐπί, it must mean, ‘in my case also.’ Plat. Rep. 475A ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ λέγειν (to take me as an instance). In El. 1469 I formerly thus took κἀπ’ ἐμοῦ θρήνων τύχῃ, but now think that there, too, it is καὶ ἀπό.

πρεσβεύειν = πρεσβύτατον εἶναι, to be the best thing: Eur. Her. 45 οἶσι πρεσβεύει γένος , whose birth has precedence (=the eldest): cp. O. T. 1365 ( πρεσβύτερον) n.

φῦναι , should be by nature: Pind. O. 9. 107 τὸ δὲ φυᾷ κράτιστον ἅπαν (opposed to διδακταὶ ἀρεταί).

πάντ’ , adv.: Tr. 338 τούτων ἔχω γὰρ πάντ’ ἐπιστήμην ἐγώ : O. T. 475 n.—The merit of listening to good advice is often thus extolled: Hes. Op. 291 οὗτος μὲν πανάριστος, ὃς αὐτὸς πάντα νοήσῃ· | ἐσθλὸς δ’ αὖ κἀκεῖνος, ὃς εὖ εἰπόντι πίθηται. Her. 7.16 ἴσον ἐκεῖνο, ὦ βασιλεῦ, παρ’ ἐμοὶ κέκριται, φρονέειν τε εὖ καὶ τῷ λέγοντι χρηστὰ ἐθέλειν πείθεσθαι . Cp. pro Cluentio 31: Livy 22. 29.

εἰ δ’ οὖν , sc. μὴ ἔφυ τοιοῦτος. This is better than to suppose that φιλεῖ γάρ has changed the form of the sentence (εἰ δ’ οὖν τοῦτο μὴ ταύτῃ ῥέπει), since this elliptical εἰ δ’ οὖν was a familiar Attic idiom: see Plat. Apol. 34D εἰ δή τις ὑμῶν οὕτως ἔχει—οὐκ ἀξιῶ μὲν γὰρ ἔγωγε, εἰ δ’ οὖν [sc. οὕτως ἔχει]—ἐπιεικῆ ἄν μοι δοκῶ πρὸς τοῦτον λέγειν: ‘If any one of you is so disposed—I do not think that he ought to be so, but suppose that he is—I think that I might fairly say to him,’ etc. Eur. Hipp. 507 εἴ τοι δοκεῖ σοι, χρῆν μὲν οὔ σ’ ἁμαρτάνειν· | εἰ δ’ οὖν [sc. ἥμαρτες], πιθοῦ μοι (‘you ought not to have erred,—but if you have’). So, without ellipse, Aesch. Ag. 1042 εἰ δ’ οὖν ἀνάγκη τῆσδ’ ἐπιρρέποι τύχης , ‘but if one should be doomed to slavery’ (then worthy masters are best). Eur. fr. 463 λύπη μὲν ἄτῃ περιπεσεῖν...| εἰ δ’ οὖν γένοιτο, κ.τ.λ. Cp. δ’ οὖν in 688 (n.).

τοῦτο … ταύτῃ : cp. Ai. 950 τάδ’ ἔστη τῇδε : Aesch. PV 511 οὐ ταῦτα ταύτῃ. μή is generic, going with ταύτῃ : in a way other than this.

ῥέπειν to incline (as the scale of a balance does): so Plat. Legg. 862D τῇδε ῥέπειν , Tim. 79 E ἐκείνῃ ῥέπον (to incline, or tend, in that direction).

καὶ τὸ τῶν εὖ λεγόντων μανθάνειν καλόν (ἐστι): for the place of εὖ, cp. 659: for that of τό, 710. The simple gen., as O. T. 545, etc.

σέ τ’ doubled: cp. 1340, O. T. 637.—L's διπλᾶι really favours διπλᾶ rather than Hermann's διπλῇ : for ι subscript is oft. wrongly added or omitted (cp. 726 cr. n.); whereas ῆι was not likely to become ᾶι here. Either word is admissible; but I slightly prefer διπλᾶ, for this reason. It is true that the plur. of διπλοῦς in poetry usu.=simply ‘two’ (51, 1232, 1320, O. T. 20, 1135). But Soph. has at least one instance of the distributive sense (‘two sets’), viz., O. T. 1249, where διπλοῦς=a twofold brood, i.e. Oed., and his children. (I do not add O. T. 288 διπλοῦς | πομπούς , taking it to mean merely ‘two,’ not ‘two sets.’) And in Attic prose the distributive use is not rare: thus in Plat. Legg. 722E διπλοῖ... νόμοι are not ‘two laws,’ but ‘two sets of laws.’ We have, then, good warrant for διπλᾶ here as=‘two sets of arguments.’

On the other hand, διπλῇ is strange (though possible) as=‘in two ways,’ i.e. ‘on both sides.’ It usu. means, ‘doubly’ ( Eur. Ion 760 κεἰ θανεῖν μέλλω διπλῇ ); or ‘twice as much’ ( Plat. Rep. 330C διπλῇ ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι ). So, here, it would more naturally mean, ‘twice over.’

καὶ with διδαξ. , shall we indeed be taught: El. 385 ἦ ταῦτα δή με καὶ βεβούλευνται ποιεῖν ; O. T. 772 n. For διδαξ. as pass., cp. 637.

δή , an indignant ‘then’: the word ends a verse also in 923, Tr. 460, Ph. 1065, Eur. Suppl. 521, Hipp. 1093.

τὴν φύσιν , birth, and so age; O. C. 1295 ὢν φύσει νεώτερος .

μηδέν , sc. διδάσκου: τὸ μὴ δίκ. = ὃ μὴ δίκαιόν ἐστι: see on 360 οὐδὲν...τὸ μέλλον.

τὸν χρόνον , my years: cp. 681.— The change of τἄργα into τοὔργον (adopted by Nauck) is no gain. The sing. is taken as ‘the cause’ (which he defends). But he means, ‘you should consider, not my age, but my conduct,—my merits’: and this is expressed by τἄργα, just as in O. C. 265 ὄνομα μόνον δείσαντες· οὐ γὰρ δὴ τό γε | σῶμ’ οὐδὲ τἄργα τἀμά . Cp. Menander fr. incert. 91 μὴ τοῦτο βλέψῃς, εἰ νεώτερος λέγω, | ἀλλ’ εἰ φρονούντων τοὺς λόγους ἀνδρῶν λέγω (v.l. φρονοῦντος...ἀνδρός: Bentley, φέρω).

ἔργον . Haemon has asked that his ἔργα may be considered. Creon asks scornfully, ‘Do you consider it an ἔργον— something which you can urge in your favour—to be the champion of a rebel?’ ἔργον would not have been thus used alone, but for the desire to give τἄργα a derisive echo. The Attic associations of the word help, however, to explain this use. Thus ἔργον meant ( a) a thing worth doing, as Aristoph. Lys. 424 οὐδὲν ἔργον ἑστάναι , it is no use...(cp. Ai. 852); so οὐδὲν προὔργου ἐστί, non operae pretium est: or (b), one's allotted task, as Aristoph. Av. 862, ἱερεῦ, σὸν ἔργον, θῦε. So here, without meaning so much as ‘achievement’ ( El. 689), it could mean, ‘useful act,’ ‘worthy task.’

τοὺς ἀκοσμοῦντας : so Ph. 387: cp. above 660, Ph. 677.

σέβειν , as 511.

οὐδ’ , not even: O. C. 1429 (n.) οὐδ’ ἀγγελοῦμεν φλαῦρα. So far am I from showing honour to evil-doers, that I would not even wish others to do so. Without directly denying that Antigone can be described as ἀκοσμοῦσα, he denies that she is κακή. This involves the whole question between the divine and the human law.

τοιᾷδε … νοσῳ , that of being κακή. Others understand, τῷ εἰς τοὺς κακοὺς εὐσεβεῖν. But the sense of the dialogue runs thus:—‘C. Do you approve of honouring law-breakers?—H. I should not dream of honouring wrong-doers.—C. Is not she<*> then, a wrong-doer?’ Doubtless, Creon could also say,—‘Does not she, then, honour wrong-doers (Polyneices)?’ Here, however, his point is that she is a rebel,— not, that her brother was a traitor.—For the fig. use of νόσος, cp. 1052, and n. on 653.

ἐπείληπται , attacked, as by a disease: so the act., Thuc. 2.51 (ἡ νόσος) δὶς...τὸν αὐτὸν...οὐκ ἐπελάμβανε. (Distinguish the sense of ἐπίληπτος in 406.)

Θήβης , possessive gen., not gen. with ὁμόπτολις , which=‘of the same city’: the sense is, ‘the united folk of Thebes,’=the whole city, πάνδημος πόλις (7). Cp. 693. The epic πτόλις is used both in lyr. and in dial. by Aesch. and Eur. , but in neither by

ἡμῖν , plur. (instead of ἐμοί), combined with the sing. ἐμέ : cp. 1194 : Ai. 1400 εἰ δὲ μή ’στι σοὶ φίλον | πράσσειν τάδ’ ἡμᾶς, εἶμ’, ἐπαινέσας τὸ σόν : Ph. 1394 εἰ σέ γ’ ἐν λόγοις | πείσειν δυνησόμεσθα μηδὲν ὦν λέγω (and ib. 1219 ff.): H. F. 858 ἥλιον μαρτυρόμεσθα δρῶσ’ ἃ δρἆν οὐ βούλομαι : Ion 391 κωλυόμεσθα μὴ μαθεῖν ἃ βούλομαι.

ὡς ἄγαν νέος —despite the difference between your age and mine (726).

Dobree's με for γε is clearly right; γε would throw a false emphasis on χρή (‘Now, ought I to rule...?’): the sense requires the stress to fall on ἄλλῳ ἢ ’μοί . This dat. ‘of interest’ does not mean, ‘for my own advantage’ (or gain), but, ‘to my own satisfaction,’ i.e. ‘according to my own views.’ Haemon has made light of Creon's protest against dictation from Thebes. Creon rejoins, ‘What, am I to rule Thebes in dependence on any other judgment than my own?’ In Eur. Suppl. 410 Creon's herald says, πόλις γὰρ ἧς ἐγὼ πάρειμ’ ἄπο | ἑνὸς πρὸς ἀνδρός, οὐκ ὄχλῳ, κρατύνεται.—For ἐμοί instead of ἐμαυτῷ, cp. Plat. Gorg. 474B ἐγὼ γὰρ δὴ οἶμαι καὶ ἐμὲ καὶ σὲ...ἡγεῖσθαι .—Though χρή γε is untenable, the dat. is no argument against it: χρή could be absolute, the dat. being still a dat. of interest. There is no certain Attic instance of χρή with dat. In Ión 1317 τοῖσι δ’ ἐνδίκοις | ἱερὰ καθίζειν, ὅστις ἠδικεῖτ’, ἐχρῆν, Dobree's τοὺς δέ γ’ ἐνδίκους is needless: the sense is, ‘in the interest of the just, it was right,’ etc. In Lys. or. 28 § 10 τοῖς ἄρχουσι τοῖς ὑμετέροις ἐπιδείξετε πότερον χρὴ δικαίοις εἶναι , we should read δικαίους, and just afterwards ὑφελομένους. Xenophon has δεῖ with dat. and infin., if the text is sound in Xen. An. 3. 4. 35.

πόλις γὰρ οὐκ ἔσθ’ . Cp. Arist. Pol. 3.16 περὶ δὲ τῆς παμβασιλείας καλουμένης,—αὔτη δ’ ἐστὶ καθ’ ἣν ἄρχει πάντων κατὰ την ἑαυτοῦ βούλησιν ὁ βασιλεύς,— δοκεῖ δέ τισιν οὐδὲ κατὰ φύσιν εἶναι τὸ κύριον ἕνα πάντων εἶναι τῶν πολιτῶν, ὅπου συνέστηκεν ἐξ ὁμοίων ἡ πόλις . For Plato, the

τυραννίς is ἔσχατον πόλεως νόσημα, Rep. 544C. de Rep. 3. 31 ubi tyrannus est, ibi...dicendum est nullam esse rempublicam.

νομίζεται with gen., as O. C. 38 (n.).—In a different sense (and rather with an allusion to demagogues) it is said in Ph. 386 πόλις γὰρ ἔστι πᾶσα τῶν ἡγουμένων (like ἔστι τοῦ λέγοντος, O. T. 917).

καλῶς ἐρήμης γ’ (L) is much better than καλῶς γ’ ἐρήμης (Blaydes and Nauck): Soph. often thus adds γε to the emphatic adj., as El. 365 οὐδ’ ἂν σύ, σώφρων γ’ οὖσα : ib. 518 θυραίαν γ’ οὖσαν : Ph. 811 οὐ μήν σ’ ἔνορκόν γ’ ἀξιῶ θέσθαι.

Though at least one late MS. (Paris E) has συμμαχεῖν, it is needless to assume here the same mixed constr. as Tr. 1238 ἁνὴρ δ’ ὅδ’, ὡς ἔοικεν, οὐ νεμεῖν ἐμοὶ | φθίνοντι μοῖραν .

οὖν , indeed, in fact: cp. 489.— προκήδομαι : cp. on προσκοπεῖν, 688.

ὦ παγκάκιστε : so Heracles to his son Hyllus, Tr. 1124. Cp. O. C. 743 πλεῖστον...κάκιστος.

διὰ δίκης ἰὼν πατρί , engaging in controversy with him, bandying arguments with him. Thuc. 6.60 ἀρνηθέντι διὰ δίκης ἐλθεῖν , to deny the charge, and stand a trial. Xen. Anab. 3.2.8 πάλιν αὐτοῖς διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι...διὰ παντὸς πολέμου αὐτοῖς ἰέναι . So διὰ μάχης (Her. 6.9), δῑ ἔχθρας (Eur. Phoen. 479).— Cp. Plut. Mor. 483C (a brother, in a brother's defence, ought to brave the displeasure of parents): αἱ δὲ ὑπὲρ ἀδελφοῦ παρ’ ἀξίαν κακῶς ἀκούοντος ἢ πάσχοντος ἀντιδικίαι καὶ δικαιολογίαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς (the parents) ἄμεμπτοι καὶ καλαί· καὶ οὐ φοβητέον ἀκοῦσαι (to have said to one) τὸ Σοφόκλειον· ὦ παῖ κάκιστε (quoting this v.)...καὶ γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἡ τοιαύτη δίκη (controversy) τοῖς ἐλεγχομένοις ποιεῖ τὴν ἧτταν ἡδίω τῆς νίκης.

ἀρχάς , the king's powers or prerogatives, like κράτη (60, 166, 173): cp. 177, 797. Cp. Aesch. Ch. 864 ἀρχάς τε πολισσονόμους | πατέρων θ’ ἕξει μέγαν ὄλβον (Orestes). Eur. I. A. 343 ἐπεὶ κατέσχες ἀρχάς (Agamemnon).

οὐ γὰρ σέβεις : ‘(that plea is void), for,’ etc.: i.e. ‘nay, but thou dost not...’ Creon has asked, ‘Do I wrong, when I reverence my royal office?’ Haemon answers, ‘Nay, there can be no such reverence, when you dishonour the gods.’ A king rules by the divine grace. He sins against his own office when he uses his power to infringe the majesty of the gods.

τιμάς , esp. sacrifices (as in this case the offerings to the νέρτεροι): cp. O. T. 909 n.

ὦ μιαρόν . In Haemon's last words Creon hears an echo of Antigone's doctrine—that the θεῶν νόμιμα rank above the human king's edict (453). Hence γυναικὸς ὕστερον , ‘inferior to her,’ ranking after her; so Ai. 1366, Ph. 181.Not, ‘unable to resist her influence’ (through love), as though it were γυναικὸς ἧσσον: a meaning which ὕστερος could not have. The general sense is, however, the same, —viz., that he ranks behind a woman, who leads him.

‘I may be inferior to a woman, but at least you will never find me yielding to base temptations.’ It would have been αἰσχρόν if he had allowed fear or self-interest to deter him from pleading this cause. (Cp. 509.) Cp. Tr. 489 ἔρωτος...ἥσσων : fr. 844 ἥσσων...ὀργῆς.

οὔ τἄν is a certain correction of οὐκ ἄν (cp. O. T. 1445, 1469: O. C. 1351: Tr. 279: Ai. 456, 534, etc.). Against the weak conjecture οὐκ ἄν γ’ is the repetition of γε: cp. on O. C. 387. Where τἄν has been corrupted in our MSS., it has most often become τ’ ἄν, sometimes γ’ ἄν or δ’ ἄν. But a change of οὔ τἄν into οὐκ ἄν would also be easy in writing where, as in that of L, the κ of οὐκ was often attached to the next word (see cr. n.).

γε emphasises the whole phrase, ἥσσω τῶν αἰσχρῶν, not ἥσσω alone: cp. 648 n.

γοῦν : cp. O. C. 24 n. To plead her cause is to be ἥσσων τῶν αἰσχρῶν.

καὶ σοῦ γε . Creon is concerned, not merely as a king whose city will be punished by the gods, but as a man who is to be saved from incurring guilt.

750-757

Objections have been made to the traditional order of these verses, chiefly in two respects. (1) 755 εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ’ is—it is argued—the strongest thing said by Haemon, and ought therefore to come immediately before Creon's final outburst, ἄληθες; (758). How could it be followed by merely so mild a phrase as μὴ κώτιλλέ με?—We may reply:— Haemon says that, if Creon were not his father, he would have thought him mad. It is to this that μὴ κώτιλλέ με refers, meaning, ‘Do not seek to deceive me by an affectation of filial deference.’ (2) 757 βούλει λέγειν τι is too mild a remark—it is said—to form the climax of provocation to Creon's anger. We may reply:—It is in substance, if not in form, such a climax, —for a father who holds that unquestioning obedience (640) is a son's first duty. It asserts Haemon's right to maintain his own views against his father's,—διὰ δίκης ἰέναι, as Creon put it (742). The traditional order seems, therefore, to be right.

Three modes of transposition have been proposed. (1) Enger puts 756 and 757 after 749. Then κώτιλλε (756) refers to Haemon's plea that he has his father's cause, and that of religion, at heart. We lose nothing by such a transposition; but neither do we gain.

(2) Donner (in his transl., ed. 1863) simply transposed verses 755 and 757, leaving the rest as they stand. For this it may fairly be said that 757 comes very fitly after 754. On the other hand it seems to me that 756 does not aptly follow 757.

(3) Pallis arranges thus:—749, 756, 755, 754, 757, 750—753. Thus κενὰς γνώμας (753) becomes the last sting.— The fact is that, in a stormy altercation, we do not look for a closely logical texture and a delicately graduated crescendo. The MS. order is (to my mind) the best; but other arrangements are possible, and would be nearly as good.

Creon, instead of replying to v. 749, abruptly repeats his resolve. οὐκ ἔστιν ὡς ταύτην ἔτι ζῶσαν γαμεῖς (fut.) ποτέ, it cannot be that you shall ever wed her while she yet lives; i.e. she is to die at once, and can become your bride, if ever, only ἐν Ἅιδου (654). Cp. 1240.— ὡς for the more usual ὅπως: so Ph. 196 οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὡς οὐ.—The strange place of ποτέ is explained by the strong emphasis on ταύτην (‘her, at any time, it is impossible that thou shouldest wed’). Soph. often admits bold arrangements of words (cp. O. T. 1245, 1251: O. C. 1428).

ἥδ’ referring to ταύτην (cp. 296 f.). At first sight ἡ δ’ is attractive; but that phrase is properly used with the imperat., and has a defiant or scornful tone ( O. T. 669 ὁ δ’ οὖν ἴτω : Ai. 961 οἱ δ’ οὖν γελώντων : Aristoph. Ach. 186 οἱ δ’ οὖν βοώντων ). The quiet ἥδ’ is more impressive here.— ὀλεῖ τινά , i.e. ἐμέ: Creon understands him to mean σέ. As vv. 763 f. show, Haemon is resolved not to survive Antigone. But he has no thought of threatening his father's life: his frantic action at v. 1231 was a sudden impulse, instantly followed by remorse (1245). For the sinister τις, cp. Ai. 1138 τοῦτ’ εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεταί τινι . Aristoph. Ran. 552 ff. κακὸν ἥκει τινί...δώσει τις δίκην . Thuc. 4.68 εἰ...μὴ πείσεταί τις, αὐτοῦ τὴν μάχην ἔσεσθαι .

ἦ ἐπεξέρχει και ἐπαπειλῶν ὧδε θρασύς; Dost thou go the length of e'en threatening so boldly? The participial clause defines the manner of ἐπεξέρχει, and so is practically equiv. to ὥστε καὶ ἐπαπειλεῖν etc. The καί here belongs to the partic. (distinguish the composite ἦ καί in question, O. T. 368). Eur. Bacch. 1346 ἀλλ’ ἐπεξέρχει λίαν , (we have erred,) but thou goest too far (in vengeance). Cp. O. C. 438 τὸν θυμὸν ἐκδραμόντα μοι | μείζω κολαστήν .

κλαίων , as O. T. 401, 1152.

φρενώσεις , a poet. word, used by Xen. Mem. 4.1.5 τοὺς ἐπὶ πλούτῳ μέγα φρονοῦντας...ἐφρένου λέγων .

οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν , as angrily refusing (754) to hear reason.

δούλευμα : cp. on 650.

μὴ κωτιλλέ με , ‘do not seek to cajole me,’— referring to εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ’, as expressive of filial respect. Creon means, ‘do not pretend that you have any of the feelings with which a son ought to regard a father.’

Cp. Theognis 363 εὖ κώτιλλε τὸν ἐχθρόν (cajole)' ὅταν δ’ ὑποχείριος ἔλθῃ, | τῖσαί νιν, πρόφασιν μηδεμίαν θέμενος: id. 851 Ζεὺς ἄνδρ’ ἐξολέσειεν Ὀλύμπιος, ὃς τὸν ἑταῖρον | μαλθακὰ κωτίλλων ἐξαπατᾶν ἐθέλει.

λέγειν … κλύειν; do you wish to speak, and yet not to hear? λέγειν τι has a euphemistic tone (‘to say something strong, or harsh’), like δρᾶν τι ( El. 336), but the τι could hardly be represented in translation without exaggerating it. λέγειν καὶ ἀκούειν was a familiar phrase for fair discussion ( Thuc. 4.22 λέγοντες καὶ ἀκούοντες περὶ ἑκάστου ξυμβήσονται : cp. O. C. 189). El. 628 πρὸς ὀργὴν ἐκφέρει, μεθεῖσά μοι | λέγειν ἃ χρῄζοιμ’, οὐδ’ ἐπίστασαι κλύειν : ib. 990 ἡ προμηθία | καὶ τῷ λέγοντι καὶ κλύοντι σύμμαχος . The words imply a claim of equality, and are also full of scorn: hence Creon's outburst. —Not: ‘do you wish to taunt and not to be taunted in return?’—as if κλύειν=‘to have things said to one’ ( Ai. 1322 κλύοντι φλαῦρα συμβαλεῖν ἔπη κακά : El. 523 κακῶς δέ σε | λέγω κακῶς κλύουσα πρὸς σέθεν θαμά ).

ἄληθες; the word which marks that Teiresias can no longer restrain his wrath against Oedipus ( O. T. 350).

οὐ τόνδ’ Ὄλ. , without μά: O. T. 660, 1088. Cp. Ai. 1389 Ὀλύμπου τοῦδ’ ὁ πρεσβεύων πατήρ : O. C. 1655.

ἴσθ’ ὅτι , adverbial: cp. 276 n.

χαίρων , impune, as O. T. 363, Ph. 1299.

ἐπὶ ψόγοισι δεννάσεις , lit., revile me with (continual) censures: ψόγος is merely censure, fault-finding, not necessarily implying offensive speech (cp. 689). δεννάζω, to reproach or revile: Ai. 243 κακὰ δεννάζων ῥήμαθ’ : [Eur.] Rhes. 925 (the Muse speaking of Thamyris) ὃς ἡμῶν πόλλ’ ἐδέννασεν τέχνην. So Theogn. 1211 (if the verse be his, and not Anacreon's) μή μ’ ἀφελῶς [ἀφίλως?] παίζουσα φίλους δένναζε τοκῆας, alluding to her saying that they had been slaves. Her. 9.107 παρὰ δὲ τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι γυναικὸς κακίω ἀκοῦσαι δέννος μέγιστός ἐστι . This ἐπί with dat. is not merely ‘with,’ but implies a continuing strain of utterance: El. 108 ἐπὶ κωκυτῷ τῶνδε πατρῴων | πρὸ θυρῶν ἠχὼ πᾶσι προφωνεῖν : Eur. Tro. 315 ἐπὶ δάκρυσι καὶ | γόοισι τὸν θανόντα πατέρα... καταστένουσ’ ἔχεις (thou art ever lamenting).—Others explain ἐπί as (a) ‘in addition to,’ which implies too sharp a contrast with δεννάσεις, esp. without καί: ( b) ‘with a view to,’ i.e. ‘in order to blame me.’ Cp. Eur. Phoen. 1555 οὐκ ἐπ’ ὀνείδεσιν οὐδ’ ἐπὶ χάρμασιν | ἀλλ’ ὀδύναισι λέγω (‘not for insult or spiteful joy, but in pain’). Here, however, that sense would be weak. —For Dobree's ἔτι , cp. Plut. 64 οὔτοι μὰ τὴν Δήμητρα χαιρήσεις ἔτι. It is plausible, and may be right. But I prefer ἐπὶ ψόγοισι, because (in the sense explained above) it is so fitting when an impatient man breaks off a dialogue which has irritated him throughout.

ἄγετε . The plur. is addressed to the two πρόσπολοι who had ushered the sisters into the house (578, κομίζετ’ εἴσω, δμῶες). So at 491 the plur. is used, καλεῖτ’. And, in general, such orders are usu. given in the plur., or by τις with 3rd pers. (as O. T. 1069). Cp. 931 τοῖσιν ἄγουσιν. This is against Wecklein's ἄγ’ ἄγε . The objection to L's ἄγαγε is not only the sing. number, but also the fact that the 2nd aor. imperat. act. (and midd.) of ἄγω does not seem to have been used in

τὸ μῖσος : Ph. 991 ὦ μῖσος (Odysseus): so μίσημα, στύγος, στύγημα.

κατ’ ὄμματ’ : Xen. Hier. 1. 14 οὐδεὶς... ἐθέλει τυράννου κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς κατηγορεῖν (‘to his face’).

παρόντι … πλησία . The accumulation of words for ‘presence’ marks his vehement anger: cp. Haemon's pleonasm in 764, and O. T. 430.

ἔμοιγε is placed as if it were to be common to both the clauses (οὔτε... τε), but the constr. changes: cp. El. 913 ἀλλ’ οὐδὲ μὲν δὴ μητρὸς οὔθ’ ὁ νοῦς φιλεῖ | τοιαῦτα πράσσειν οὔτε δρῶσ’ ἐλάνθανεν .— For οὔτε followed by τε cp. O. C. 1397 (n.).

οὐδαμά , neut. plur. adv.: this form is required by metre in 830, as οὐδαμᾷ (Doric) in 874: L always gives οὐδαμᾶι: see on O. C. 1104.

ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς , with them (the instrumental ἐν, 962, 1003, 1201): an epic phrase, Il. 1.587 ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἴδωμαι , etc.: so oft. ἐν ὄμμασιν ( Tr. 241).

ὡς : cp. 643 .

τοῖς θέλουσι , i.e. any who can endure it. Cp. the words of Teiresias, 1087.—Haemon now finally quits the scene. The deuteragonist is thus set free for the parts of the Ἄγγελος and the Ἐξάγγελος.

ἐξ ὀργῆς ταχύς , in haste caused by wrath: cp. Il. 7.111 μηδ’ ἔθελ’ ἐξ ἔριδος σεῦ ἀμείμονι φωτὶ/ μάχεσθαι , out of mere rivalry.

βαρύς , resentful: cp. O. T. 673 βαρὺς δ’, ὅταν | θυμοῦ περάσῃς ; so as epith. of μῆνις ( O. C. 1328) and ὀργή ( Ph. 368). The sense of βαρύ in 1251 is different.

μεῖζον ἢ κατ’ ἄνδρα is said in answer to their hint of fear:—let his passion touch the human limit, aye, or overpass it. O. C. 598 τί γὰρ τὸ μεῖζον ἢ κατ’ ἄνθρωπον νοσεῖς ; For ἀνήρ = ἄνθρωπος, ib. 567.

ἰών : Ph. 351 εἰ τἀπὶ Τροίᾳ πέργαμ’

αἱρήσοιμ’ ἰών: Ai. 304 ὅσην κατ’ αὐτῶν ὕβριν ἐκτίσαιτ’ ἰών . So here it scornfully suggests some daring enterprise.

For δ’ οὖν cp. 688, 722.

τὼ … τώδε : cp. 561 (τώ), O. T. 1472 (τοῖν ), O. C. 1600 (τώ ), El. 977 (τώδε τώ)—all fem.—Attic inscriptions of c. 450— 320 B.C. present numerous instances of fem. dual τώ, τοῖν, τούτοιν, οἶν, but no instance of fem. dual τά, ταῖν, ταύταιν, or αἷν. (Meisterhans p. 50.) Hitherto the gen. and dat. ταῖν, ταῖνδε, ταύταιν have been retained even by those edd. who give τώ, τώδε, etc. (cp. O. T. 1462, 1504: O. C. 445, 859, 1149, 1290, etc.). But, so far as epigraphic evidence goes, the distinction is arbitrary.

καί with the whole phrase κατακτ. νοεῖς rather than with κατακτ . alone (for no minor penalty is in view): cp. 726.

θιγοῦσαν : cp. 546.

γὰρ οὖν : cp. 489, 741.

καί with βουλεύει ; (her doom having been fixed,) by what fate do you purpose to slay her? For καί thus following the interrog., cp. 1314. Aesch. Ag. 278 ποίου χρόνου δὲ καὶ πεπόρθηται πόλις ; Eur. Hec. 515 πῶς καί νιν ἐξεπράξατ’;

σφε = αὐτήν, Antigone: cp. 44 n.

ἔνθα = ἐκεῖσε ἔνθα, as O. T. 796: so O. C. 188 ἄγε...με... | ἵν’ ἄν etc. Cp. Ph. 486 μή μ’ ἀφῇς | ἔρημον οὕτω χωρὶς ἀνθρώπων στίβου.

πετρώδει … ἐν κατώρυχι , ‘in a rocky cavern’; schol., ἐν ὑπογείῳ σπηλαίῳ. Verse 773 shows that Creon is not yet thinking of any particular spot. And κατῶρυξ shows that he is not thinking of some merely natural grotto or cavern. This word, usu. an adj., here a subst., means a cavern, or chamber, excavated by man's hand: cp. Eur. Hec. 1002 χρυσοῦ παλαιαὶ Πριαμιδῶν κατώρυχες . So the place is described by κατασκαφής (891). The κατῶρυξ actually used was near the furthest and highest part of the plain, where Polyneices lay (1197). What, then, was the poet's conception? He seems to suppose the existence of tombs artificially constructed in the rocky πάγοι (411) which bordered on the Theban plain. In one of these tombs— chosen for the remoteness of its situation (773)—Antigone is to be immured. The general type of sepulchral chamber supposed here can be illustrated from actual remains which have been discovered in Greece: see below on vv. 1216 ff.

ὡς ἄγος μόνον , sc. εἶναι, so much as to be barely an expiation; only just enough to avoid the μίασμα. The conjectural change of ὡς into ὅσον (adopted by several edd.) would be necessary if the indic. ἐστί had to be supplied, since we could not say τοσοῦτον ὡς (instead of ὅσον) ἄγος ἐστί. That change is unnecessary, because it is the inf. εἶναι that is understood. Cp. Xen. An. 7. 3§ 22 ὅσον μόνον γεύσασθαι, and see n. on O. C. 790 for other instances where the inf. is expressed. The inf. is understood, as here, in Xen. An. 7. 8§ 19 ἔχοντες πρόβατα ὅσον θύματα (sc. εἶναι): so ib. 7. 3 § 20 ἔχων...ὅσον ἐφόδιον.

ἄγος was used by Soph. in his lost Phaedra to denote ἅγνισμα θυσίας (Hesych. 1. 63), i.e. ‘an expiatory sacrifice’ (cp. Aesch. Eum. 325 ἅγνισμα φόνου ). In Aesch. Cho. 154 also ἄγος has been taken as=‘expiation,’ but there it seems rather to be ‘pollution.’ Cp. the schol. here: ἔθος παλαιόν, ὥστε τὸν βουλόμενον καθειργνύναι τινὰ ἀφοσιοῦσθαι βραχὺ τιθέντα τροφῆς, καὶ ὑπενόουν κάθαρσιν τὸ τοιοῦτο, ἵνα μὴ δοκῶσι λιμῷ ἀναιρεῖν· τοῦτο γὰρ ἀσεβές.—Curtius, Etym. 5th ed., § 118, would write ἅγος here. He distinguishes two roots. (1) ἀγ‐, ἄγος, ‘guilt,’ ἐναγής, ‘accursed’; Sanskr. Aa/g-as, ‘vexation,’ etc. (2) ἁγ‐, ἅγος, ‘consecration, sacrifice,’ ἅγιος, etc.: Sanskr. jag-. On the other hand the analogy of piaculum suggests that ἄγος might combine the sense of ‘expiation’ with that of ‘pollution.’

Creon's edict had announced that the transgressor would be publicly stoned to death (36). It is to this that the anxious question of the Chorus alludes (772). Creon had already said that Antigone's doom was to be κάκιστος (489). But now, at least, he feels that he cannot inflict such a death on the maiden, his kinswoman. She shall die, not by stoning, but by starvation. The choice is not prompted by cruelty, but simply by the desire to avoid physical violence.

The danger of a μίασμα—to be avoided by a dole of food—has no relation to the special circumstances,—Antigone's royal birth, and the nature of her offence. In the ancient belief, that danger existed whenever a person was put to death by starvation. Two notions were probably blended; (a) that, if a little food was given, the death was nature's work, not man's; (b) that the νέρτεροι claimed an indemnity for the usual ἐναγίσματα. So the Greeks put Philoctetes ashore on desolate Lemnos, —ῥάκη προθέντες βαιὰ καί τι καὶ βορᾶς | ἐπωφέλημα σμικρόν ( Ph. 274). So, too, when a Vestal was to be buried alive, the small vault in the Campus Sceleratus was furnished with a couch, a burning lamp, and a small table, on which the dole was placed,—bread, olives, milk, and a jug of water ( Plut. Num. 10).

πᾶσ’ : cp. on 178. The sense is, ‘in order that the whole city may not be defiled’ (as it otherwise would be): μίασμ’ ὑπεκφύγῃ = μὴ μιανθῇ.

ὃν μόνον σέβει . Polyneices had come to destroy the shrines of the θεοὶ

ἐγγενεῖς (199). By honouring him, and Hades (519), she has dishonoured those other gods.

τὸ μὴ θανεῖν in acc. with τεύξεται : cp. Aesch. Ch. 711 τυγχάνειν τὰ πρόσφορα: O. C. 1106 (n.): fr. 824 καὶ τὰ καὶ τὰ τυγχάνων. This comparatively rare constr. has here been influenced by αἰτουμένη: though it is unnecessary to refer the acc. to the partic. only, or to understand, ‘will successfully ask.’ See, however, Her. 5.23 τὴν παρὰ Δαρείου αἰτήσας ἔτυχε...δωρεήν : 9. 109 πάντα γὰρ τεύξεσθαι αἰτήσασαν: where, in both instances, the acc. depends on the partic. only.—We could not well take τὸ μὴ θανεῖν here as=ὥστε μὴ θανεῖν (like κωλύω τὸ μὴ ποιεῖν τι).

ἀλλὰ τηνικαῦτα : cp. 552.— τἀν , instead of τοὺς ἐν, Ἅιδου: 659.

781-800

Third stasimon. Strophe 781—790=antistr. 791—800.

After Creon's and Haemon's speeches, the comment of the Chorus was in a neutral tone (724). When Haemon departed in anger, they spoke words implying that allowance must be made for the heat of youth (767). This beautiful ode is in a kindred strain. If Haemon has sinned against great θεσμοί—loyalty to country and to father—at least he is under the influence of a god whom none can withstand.

The pathos of the maiden's fate is heightened by this plea for her lover. When she is led in by the guards, on her way to death, the Chorus avow that pity works with them even as love with Haemon (801—805). A perfect preparation is thus made for the lyric dialogue between the Chorus and Antigone (806—882).

ἀνίκατε μάχαν : Tr. 441 Ἔρωτι μέν νυν ὅστις ἀντανίσταται, | πύκτης ὅπως ἐς χεῖρας, οὐ καλῶς φρονεῖ . Eur. fr. 433 Ἔρωτα, πάντων δυσμαχώτατον θεόν. Plat. Symp. 196D καὶ μὴν εἴς γε ἀνδρίαν Ἔρωτι οὐδὲ Ἄρης ἀνθίσταται· οὐ γὰρ ἔχει Ἔρωτα Ἄρης, ἀλλ’ Ἔρως Ἄρη .

ἐν κτήμασι πίπτεις, who fallest upon men's possessions; who makest havoc of their wealth and fortunes. Cp. Od. 24.526 ἐν δ’ ἔπεσον προμάχοις , ‘they fell on the fore-fighters’: so ἐμπίπτειν is oft. said of the attacks of disease or passion. Love makes men reckless of possessions: it can bring ruin on great houses and proud cities. Sophocles himself has given us the best commentary: see Tr. 431, referring to the capture of Oechalia by Heracles, who loved Iolè, the daughter of its king, Eurytus: ὡς ταύτης πόθῳ | πόλις δαμείη πᾶσα, κοὐχ ἡ Λυδία | πέρσειεν αὐτήν, ἀλλ’ ὁ τῆσδ’ ἔρως φανείς. The same thought is finely expressed by Eur. , in a choral ode to Ἔρως, which this passage has certainly helped to inspire ( Eur. Hipp. 525 ff.): Ἔρωτα δέ, τὸν τύραννον ἀνδρῶν, | ...οὐ σεβίζομεν, | πέρθοντα καὶ διὰ πάσας | ἰόντα συμφορᾶς | θνατοῖς, ὅταν ἔλθῃ. Troy was sacked for the sake of Helen,—ἑλέναυς, ἕλανδρος, ἑλέπτολις. Medea betrayed her father's treasure to Jason (cp. Eur. Med. 480). The resistless power of Love is the central thought of this ode. All that men prize most becomes his prey.—See Appendix.

ἐν μαλακαῖς παρειαῖς . Ionof Chios (ap. Athen. 603 E) describes Soph. as saying, ὡς καλῶς Φρύνιχος (the tragic poet, flor. c. 490) ἐποίησεν εἴπας· λάμπει δ’ ἐπὶ πορφυρέαις παρῇσι φῶς ἔρωτος. Plut. Mor. 760D σκόπει τοίνυν...τοῖς ἀρηΐοις ἔργοις ὅσον Ἔρως περίεστιν, οὐκ ἀργὸς ὤν, ὡς Εὐριπίδης ἔλεγεν, οὐδὲ ἀστράτευτος, οὐδ’ ἐν μαλακαῖσιν [ἐννυχεύ]ων παρειαῖς νεανίδων.

ἐννυχεύεις , keepest thy vigil: perh. here an image suggested by a soldier's night-watch (like Horace's pulcris excubat in genis, sc. Cupido, C. 4. 13. 8); cp. Xen. Anab. 6.4.27 ἐν δὲ τοῖς ὅπλοις ἐνυκτέρευον , and so νυκτοφυλακεῖν. Shaksp. Rom. 5. 3. 94 ‘beauty's ensign yet Is crimson in thy lips and in thy cheeks.’ Gray, Progress of Poesy 1. 3. 16 ‘O'er her warm cheek and rising bosom move The bloom of young desire and purple light of love.’

ὑπερπόντιος : cp. 1301: so ἐκτόπιος (O.T. 1340), θαλάσσιος ( ib. 1411), θυραῖος ( El. 313), παράκτιος (Eur. I. T. 1424), etc. So Eur. fr. 434 (Ἔρως) κἀπὶ πόντον ἔρχεται. Plut. Mor. 760D quotes an unknown poet, on Ἔρως:—πῦρ καὶ θάλασσαν καὶ πνοὰς τὰς αἰθέρος | περᾶν ἕτοιμος. Lucr. 1. 18(Venus moves) per maria ac montes fluviosque rapaces Frondiferasque domos avium camposque virentes.

ἔν τ’ ἀγρ. αὐλαῖς . ἀγρόνομοι αὐλαί =dwellings in ἀγρὸς νεμόμενος, pastoral wilds: cp. 349 ἀγραύλου: O. T. 1103 πλάκες ἀγρόνομοι , upland pastures. El. 181 ἀκτὴ βούνομος , a shore on which oxen are pastured (cp. O. T. 26).—Some take the sense to be, ‘Love conquers not man only, but fishes and wild beasts’; cp. fr. 856.9 (Κύπρις) εἰσέρχεται μὲν ἰχθύων πλωτῷ γένει, | ἔνεστι δ’ ἐν χέρσου τετρασκελεῖ γονῇ. (How could ὑπερπόντιος imply a visit to the fish?) Others find a reference to Paris carrying Helen over the Aegean, Aphrodite visiting Anchises in the pastures of Ida, etc. Rather the poet is merely saying, quite generally, how boundless is the range of Love.

οὔτ’ ἀθανάτων : Tr. 443 (of Love) οὗτος γὰρ ἄρχει καὶ θεῶν ὅπως θέλει: fr. 856. 13 (Κύπρις) τίν’ οὐ παλαίουσ’ ἐς τρὶς ἐκβάλλει θεῶν; Eur. fr. 434 Ἔρως γὰρ ἄνδρας οὐ μόνους ἐπέρχεται, | οὐδ’ αὖ γυναῖκας, ἀλλὰ καὶ θεῶν ἄνω | ψυχὰς χαράσσει.

σὲ … φύξιμός ἐστι , = σὲ δύναται φεύγειν. Cp. Aesch. PV 904 ὁ πόλεμος ἄπορα πόριμος : Ag. 1090(στέγην ) πολλὰ ξυνίστορα | ...κακά: Xen. Cyr. 3.3.9 ἐπιστήμονες δ’ ἦσαν τὰ προσήκοντα : Isae. or. 5 § 26 ἔξαρνοί εἰσι τὰ ὡμολογημένα: [Plat. ] Alcib. II. 141 D οἶμαι δέ σε οὐκ ἀνήκοον εἶναι ἔνιά γε...γεγενημένα. Similarly with a subst., Plat. Apol. 18B τὰ μετέωρα φροντιστής.

σέ γ’ : for γε with the repeated σε, cp. O. T. 1101, Ph. 1116.—The MS. ἐπ’ could mean only, ‘in the case of’ (and so, ‘among’): a use which is not adequately supported by Aristeid. Pan. 1. 96 μόνῃ τῇ πόλει ἐπὶ τῶν Ἑλληνικῶν, where he means, ‘in the case of’ (i.e., ‘so far as they are concerned’). Nor could ἐπ’ be an adverb (‘moreover,’ O. T. 181), as some take it.

ὁ δ’ ἔχων : Phaear. 239 C ἀνὴρ ἔχων ἔρωτα.

ἀδίκους proleptic: cp. on 475: Tr. 106 εὐνάζειν ἀδακρύτων βλεφάρων πόθον (so that they shall not weep).— παρασπᾷς (cp. 298), a metaphor from a driver jerking his horses aside out of their course: El. 732 (the charioteer) ἔξω παρασπᾷ (sc. τοὺς ἵππους), pulls them aside, out of the crowd of chariots. The word is fig. again in O. C. 1185 οὐ γάρ σε... παρασπάσει | γνώμης , pluck thee from thy resolve.

ξύναιμον , not ξυναίμων, since νεῖκος‐ἀνδρῶν forms one notion: cp. 862: El. 1390 τοὐμὸν φρενῶν ὄνειρον : Ph. 952 σχῆμα πέτρας δίπυλον: Aesch. Eum. 325 ματρῷον ἅγνισμα...φόνου.

ἔχεις with aor. part.: cp. 22.

ταράξας , excitasti. Dem. or. 18 § 153 ἵν’ εἰδῆτε ἡλίκα πράγματα ἡ μιαρὰ κεφαλὴ ταράξασα αὕτη δίκην οὐκ ἔδωκεν . In this sense later prose has also συνταράττω .

ἐναργής , ‘clearly seen,’ ‘present to the lover's sight,’ marks the vivid appeal to the senses, in contrast with the invisible and spiritual majesty of the θεσμοί which Love overrides. For ἐναργής as =‘before our eyes,’ ‘in bodily presence,’ cp. O. C. 910; Tr. 11, 224.

βλεφάρωνἵμερος , love-influence from the eyes, εὐλέκτρου νύμφας , of the fair bride. Both genitives are possessive, but βλεφάρων goes more closely with ἵμερος, denoting the latter's source. Cp. 929: O. C. 729 ὀμμάτων... | φόβον...τῆς ἐμῆς ἐπεισόδου , fear, shown in your eyes (possess. gen.), of my entrance (objective gen.). In Phaedr. 251 B Plato describes ἵμερος as the desire infused into the soul by an emanation of beauty (κάλλους ἀπορροή) proceeding from the beloved, and received through the eyes of the lover (διὰ τῶν ὀμμάτων). So the soul is spoken of ( ib. E) as ἐποχετευσαμένη ἵμερον, ‘having refreshed herself with the love-shower’ or ‘effluence of beauty.’ And ἵμερος itself receives fanciful derivations, as ib. 251 C, ἐκεῖθεν μέρη ἐπιόντα καὶ ῥέοντα, ἃ δὴ διὰ ταῦτα ἵμερος καλεῖται (i.e. from ἰέναι μέρη and ῥεῖν): while in Crat. 419E it is explained by ἱέμενος ῥεῖ. The real origin of the word is prob. from rt. ἰς, ‘wish,’ whence ἰότητι, and Ἰς‐μήνη , Desiderata. Curt. § 617. So Soph. fr. 161 ὀμμάτων ἄπο | λόγχας ἵησιν: 733 ὀμμάτειος πόθος: 430 (Hippodameia speaking of Pelops), τοιάνδ’ ἐν ὄψει λίγγα θηρατηρίαν | ἔρωτος, ἀστραπήν τιν’ ὀμμάτων, ἔχει (‘such a subduing arrow of love, a lightning from the eyes’): Aesch. Ag. 742 μαλθακὸν ὀμμάτων βέλος, | δηξίθυμον ἔρωτος ἄνθος : Suppl. 1004 ὄμματος θελκτήριον | τόξευμ’ ἔπεμψεν, ἱμέρου νικώμενος: Eur. Hipp. 525 Ἔρως, Ἔρως ὃ κατ’ ὀμμάτων | στάζεις πόθον, εἰσάγων γλυκεῖαν | ψυχαῖς χάριν οὓς ἐπιστρατεύσῃ [i.e. ‘on the eyes’ of mortals: better ὁ...στάζων, or else ὃς ἀπ’—.]

εὐλέκτρου , epithet of Κύπρις in Tr. 515. Cp. Anthol. P. 7. 649 εὐλεγχέος θαλάμου (happy nuptials).

πάρεδρος ἐν ἀρχαῖς . I leave these words in the text, without marking them as corrupt, because the case against them is not decisive, while no emendation is certain. But I strongly suspect them. If sound, they mean that the love inspired by the maiden's eyes is a power ‘enthroned in sway by the side of the great laws.’ The great laws are those ‘unwritten’ moral laws which most men feel and acknowledge (cp. on 454 f.); here, especially, the law of loyalty to country, the law of obedience to parents. In Haemon's case, love has shown that it is at least of equal force with these θεσμοί. For πάρεδρος , cp. O. C. 1267 Ζηνὶ σύνθακος θρόνων | Αἰδώς : ib. 1382 Δίκη ξύνεδρος Ζηνὸς ἀρχαίοις νόμοις . Pind. O. 8. 21 Διὸς ξενίου πάρεδρος | ...Θέμις. For ἐν ἀρχαῖς , Eur. Andr. 699 σεμνοὶ δ’ ἐν ἀρχαῖς ἥμενοι κατὰ πτόλιν : Or. 897 ὃς ἂν δύνηται πόλεος ἔν τ’ ἀρχαῖσιν ᾖ. Cp. also on 744.

The words answer metrically to φύξιμος οὐδείς (788). The first two syllables of πάρεδρος therefore represent a resolved long syllable. Pindar affords some instances of such resolution (see Appendix), and there is a probable example below (970 ἀγχίπολις Ἄρης, where see n.). But it is rare, and certainly unpleasing. As

a whole, too, the phrase πάρεδρος ἐν ἀρχαῖς is suspicious. A yet stronger objection is the strangeness of describing the power which is in conflict with the θεσμοί as their assessor, or peer, in sway; an expression which would seem appropriate only if that power was working in harmony with them; as when Eur. ( Eur. Med. 843) speaks of σοφίᾳ παρέδρους...ἔρωτας, | παντοίας ἀρετᾶς ξυνεργούς,—‘the loves that sit with wisdom, co-workers of all excellence,’—those aspirations of the soul which assist intellectual effort.

The best line of emendation yet suggested is that of Semitelos, who writes ὥστε πέρα δρᾶν . He supposes that πέρα δρᾶν became, first, πάρεδρον (ΠΕΡΑΔΡΑΝ— ΠΑΡΕΔΡΟΝ). Then, πάρεδρον θεσμῶν seeming obscure, a marginal gloss ἐν ἀρχαῖς was added. This gloss came into the text, dislodging ὥστε: and πάρεδρον became πάρεδρος, to agree with ἵμερος. The original sense, then, was: ‘the ἵμερος prevails, so that one transgresses the great θεσμοί.’ Cp. El. 1506 ὅστις πέρα πράσσειν γε τῶν νόμων θέλει . This suits, too, the following lines, where the Chorus says, καὐτὸς (i.e., like Haemon) θεσμῶν | ἔξω φέρομαι.—See Appendix.

ἐμπαίζει , ‘wreaks her will’ in that contest which νικᾷ implies. We find ἐμπαίζω with a dat. (1) of the object, as Her. 4.134 ἐμπαίζοντας ἡμῖν , ‘mocking us’: (2) of the sphere, as Ar. Th. 975 χοροῖσιν ἐμπαίζει, ‘sports in dances.’ The ἐν of ἐμπαίζει here might also be explained as ( a) in the ἴμερος, or the βλέφαρα, i.e. by their agency: or ( b) ‘on her victim.’ But the interpretation first given appears simpler. (Cp. Vergil's absol. use of illudere, G. 1. 181, Tum variae illudant pestes. )

καὐτὸς θεσμῶν ἔξω : i.e. like Haemon, I also am moved to rebel against Creon's sentence, and to take Antigone's part.

φέρομαι , a proverbial image from the race-course: Aristoph. Ran. 993 μόνον ὅπως | μή σ’ ὁ θυμὸς ἁρπάσας | ἐκτὸς οἴσει τῶν ἐλαῶν , because some olives marked the limits of the course at the end of the race-course (schol. ad loc.), where the chariots turned, and where the horses were most likely to swerve or bolt. Plat. Crat. 414B οὐ γὰρ ἐπισκοπεῖς με ὥσπερ ἐκτὸς δρόμου φερόμενον, ἐπειδὰν λείου ἐπιλάβωμαι (when I get on smooth ground). Aesch. PV 883 ἔξω δὲ δρόμου φέρομαι λύσσης | πνεύματι μάργῳ . Eur. Bacch. 853 ἔξω δ’ ἐλαύνων τοῦ φρονεῖν.

ἴσχειν δ’ : cp. 817 ἔχουσ’: 820 λαχοῦσ’, by the rule of continuity (συνάφεια) in anapaestic systems. In lyrics such elision is rarer (see on 350).

πηγάς , not, the sources or springs, but the streams, of tears: so Tr. 852 ἔρρωγεν παγὰ δακρύων , and oft.: cp. O. C. 479, where πηγάς=the water gushing from the bowl. On the other hand in fr. 658 νυκτός...πηγάς=‘the sources of night’ (the west).

παγκοίτην . The question between Doric and Attic forms in tragic anapaests cannot be decided by a rigid rule. It depends on the presence or absence of a lyric character. Thus in 110 f. the Doricisms are justified by the purely lyric stamp of the anapaests. Here, Attic forms are preferable. The lyric strains

of Antigone are brought into finer relief by the different tone of the choral anapaests. Cp. 822, and see Appendix on 110.—Cp. O. C. 1578 (Death) τὸν αἰένυπνον. The word θάλαμον here has ref. to its special sense, ‘bridal-chamber’: cp. 891 νυμφεῖον, 1207 παστάδα. So oft. in epitaphs on the unmarried; Anthol. P. 7. 489 (by Sappho) Τιμάδος ἅδε κόνις, τὰν δὴ πρὸ γάμοιο θανοῦσαν | δέξατο Περσεφόνας κυάνεος θάλαμος. Kaibel Epigrammata 241 (on two young brothers) οἱ δισσοὶ συνόμαιμοι, ἰὼ ξένε, τῷδ’ ὑπὸ τύμβῳ | ἄψαυστοι τέκνων κείμεθα κουριδίων· | Ἱκέσιος κἀγὼ νεαρὰν πληρούμενος ἥβαν | Ἕρμιππος κρυερὸν τόνδ’ ἔχομεν θάλαμον.

ἀνύτουσαν with acc. of place, as Ai. 607 (ἀνύσειν ), O. C. 1562 (ἐξανύσαι ): cp. 231.

806-943

Fourth ἐπεισόδιον. Antigone has now been brought out of the house by two of Creon's servants (οἱ ἄγοντες, 931) who are about to conduct her to her doom. She speaks of her fate to the Chorus, and they seek to comfort her,—while they intimate that she alone is to blame (853, 875). Creon enters (883); and, in obedience to his peremptory command, Antigone is presently led forth to death (943).

The structure of the κομμός (806—882) is as follows. 1st strophe (806—816)=1st ant. (823—833). A system of choral anapaests (817—822) comes after the strophe, and a similar system (834—838) after the antistrophe.—2nd strophe (839—852) = 2nd ant. (857—871).—3rd str. (853—856) =3rd ant. (872—875).—An epode forms the close (876—882). See Metrical Analysis.

νεάταν … νέατον δέ . In such an epanaphora μέν regularly precedes δέ (as O. T. 25, 259; O. C. 5, 610, etc.); but there are numerous exceptions in Soph. , as O. C. 1342 στήσω σ’ ἄγων, | στήσω δ’ ἐμαυτόν : Ph. 633 πάντα λεκτά, πάντα δὲ | τολμητά: Tr. 517 τότ’ ἦν χερός, ἦν δὲ τόξων πάταγος : ib. 1147 κάλει τὸ πᾶν μοι σπέρμα σῶν ὁμαιμόνων, | κάλει δὲ τὴν τάλαιναν Ἀλκμήνην.

νέατον , in contrast with αὖθις, is best taken as adv.: Eur. Tro. 201 νέατον τεκέων σώματα λεύσσω : cp. the adv. τελευταῖον ( O. T. 1183), ἔσχατον ( O. C. 1550), πανύστατον, etc.

κοὔποτ’ αὖθις , sc. ὀψομένην: Ai. 857 Ἥλιον προσεννέπω | πανύστατον δὴ κοὔποτ’ αὖθις ὕστερον .—Cp. the passage in Swinburne's Erechtheus where the maiden Chthonia, being about to die, speaks with the Chorus of Athenian Elders:—‘People, old men of my city, lordly wise and hoar of head, | I, a spouseless bride and crownless, but with garlands of the dead, | From the fruitful light turn silent to my dark unchilded bed.’

παγκοίτας = ὁ πάντας κοιμίζων. Ai. 831 καλῶ θ’ ἅμα | πομπαῖον Ἑρμῆν χθόνιον εὖ με κοιμίσαι . Blaydes conjectures πάγκοινος , very plausibly. Cp. El. 138 τόν γ’ ἐξ Ἀΐδα | παγκοίνου λίμνας. But these points may be noted. (1) Though we have had παγκοίτην so lately as in v. 804, such a repetition is no safe argument for spuriousness: see on 76. (2) The 2nd and 3rd syllables of παγκοίτας = καί νιν in 828, and πάγκοινος therefore gives a more exact correspondence; but this proves nothing, since a spondee and a trochee are equally admissible. (See Analysis. Metr.) (3) παγκοίτας is here a more expressive epithet than πάγκοινος (‘receiving all’): eyes still bright with life and youth are to suffer the ἀτέρμονα νήγρετον ὕπνον.

ἄγει … ἀκτάν , a rare poet. constr. with ἄγω, as Ph. 1175 Τρῳάδα γᾶν μ’ ἤλπισας ἄξειν: Aesch. Pers. 861 νόστοι... | εὖ πράσσοντας ἆγον οἴκους (so Porson for ἐς οἴκους). Cp. O. T. 178 ἀκτὰν πρὸς ἑσπέρου θεοῦ .

οὔθ’ ὑμεναίων … οὔτ’ ἐπινύμφειος … ὕμνος . The ὑμέναιος has not been sung by friends escorting bride and bridegroom to their home; nor has the ἐπιθαλάμιον been sung in the evening at the door of the bridal chamber. (1) For the procession-song, cp. Il. 18.492 νύμφας δ’ ἐκ θαλάμων, δαΐδων ὕπο λαμπομενάων, | ἠγίνεον ἀνὰ ἄστυ· πολὺς δ’ ὑμέναιος ὀρώρει . Aristoph. Pax 1332 ff. gives a specimen, with the refrain Ὑμήν, Ὑμέναῑ ὦ. Cp. also Av. 1736.This was specially called the ἁρμάτειον μέλος (from the carriage conveying the newly-married couple), Etym. M. p. 145. (2) As to the ἐπιθαλάμιος (ὕμνος), or ἐπιθαλάμιον (μέλος), sung in the evening, see Phot. Bibl.p. 321 καὶ τὰ ἐπιθαλάμια δὲ τοῖς ἄρτι θαλαμευομένοις ἅμα οἱ ἠΐθεοι καὶ αἱ παρθένοι ἐπὶ τῶν θαλάμων ᾖδον. Extant specimens are Theocritus Idyll. 18 (for Helen and Menelaus), Catullus 61 and 62: for a burlesque, see Lucian Symp. 41.The word ὑμέναιος, though more specially denoting the procession-song, was a general term for a γαμήλιον ᾆσμα, and could denote the ἐπιθαλάμιος, in which Ὑμὴν ὦ Ὑμέναιε was the usual refrain (Theocr. 18. 58, Catull. 61. 4 etc.): so Pindar P. 3. 17 οὐδὲ παμφώνων ἰαχὰν ὑμεναίων, ἅλικες οἷα παρθένοι φιλέοισιν ἑταῖραι ἑσπερίαις ὑποκουρίζεσθ’ ἀοιδαῖς : Apollon. Rhod. 4. 1160 νυμφιδίαις ὑμέναιον ἐπὶ προμολῇσιν (threshold) ἄειδον.

οὔτε … ἔγκληρον, … οὔτε … ὕμνησεν : we expected οὔτε ὑμνηθεῖσαν: a finite verb is substituted for the second participial clause: cp. 255 f.: O.C. 348 πολλὰ μὲν...ἀλωμένη, | πολλοῖσι δ’ ἡγεῖται, with n. there on 351.

ἐπινύμφειος , Dindorf's correction of ἐπινυμφίδιος , is strongly supported by these facts. (1) In O. C. 1088 Soph. certainly used ἐπινικείῳ instead of the usual ἐπινικίῳ. Cp. above, Soph. 358, ἐναίθρεια. (2) In Aesch. Cho. 334 ἐπιτύμβιος (restored with certainty by Herm. ) had been corrupted into ἐπιτυμβίδιος. Bergk's ἐπὶ νυμφείοις (‘for crown of nuptials’) is quite possible (cp. n. on 568); but an epithet for ὕμνος is decidedly preferable here. Bergk relies on the schol., λείπει θύραις ἢ κοίταις, which suggests that the Schol. read ἐπὶ νυμφιδίοις (or νυμφείοις); but, if this were so, the fact would have little weight. The corruption would have been easy.— SchHerm. ütz defends ἐπινυμφίδιος as metrically possible. But, though it is possible that a logaoedic dactyl might replace a spondee here, the latter is at least better suited to the grave and mournful rhythm. The antistrophic verse (831) ends with παγκλαύτοις. So v. 816 ends with νυμφεύσω, and 833 with κατευνάζει.

Ἀχέροντι νυμφεύσω : cp. on 654.

ξιφέων (possessive gen.) ἐπίχειρα , ‘the wages of swords,’ i.e. the reward of strife with the sword,—viz. a violent death. The gen. after ἐπίχειρα always denotes that for which the reward is given, as Aesch. PV 318 ὑψηγόρου | γλώσσης , Aristoph. Vesp. 581 ταύτης (sc. τῆς δίκης), Plat. Rep. 608C ἀρετῆς , [Dem. ] Epist. p. 1484. 4 τῶν...πεπονημένων . Here, ξιφέων can hardly be a subjective gen., ‘the reward which the sword gives’; though the meaning is the same. The ironical sense of ἐπίχειρα occurs in Attic prose as well as verse; Antiphon or. 1 § 20 ἡ μὲν διακονήσασα (in the murder) ἔχει τὰ ἐπίχειρα ὦν ἀξία ἦν (torture and death). Cp. El. 1382 τἀπιτίμια | τῆς δυσσεβείας. ξιφέων might be poet. plur. for sing., as in Eur. Andr. 812 ἔκ τε δεξιᾶς | ξίφη καθαρπάζουσιν , and Or. 1398(cp. σκῆπτρα, etc.); but it is rather an ordinary plural.

αὐτόνομος , i.e. of your own free will. No one constrained her to do the act for which she suffers. She knew that death would be the consequence, and she chose it. The word is fitting, since she has set her laws (the θεῶν νόμιμα) above Creon's. The implied contrast is with the helpless victims of disease or of war.—The word could not mean, ‘by an ordinance peculiar to your case,’ i.e. ‘by the unique doom of a living death.’

δή strengthens μόνη , as Tr. 1063.— Ἀΐδην seems preferable to Ἅιδην in the paroemiac. Cp. on 804.— Acc. of motion, like δόμους στείχειν ( O. C. 643).

ἤκουσα δή . The Chorus has said, ‘No mortal's fate was ever like thine.’ She continues: ‘I have heard before now (δή) how Niobe perished,—by a doom like mine.’ To which the Chorus reply that Niobe was not a mere mortal (834).—The Theban princess remembers the fate of the Theban queen. Niobe, daughter of Tantalus, married Amphion, king of Thebes. She vaunted that she had borne many children, while Leto had borne only two. Wherefore those two, Apollo and Artemis, slew all her sons and daughters,—at Thebes, as said the Theban story; but Niobe returned to her old home at Mount Sipylus, and was there turned to stone. (Ovid, Met. 6. 310, represents her as carried to Sipylus after the change.) Νιόβη was the title of lost plays by Aesch. and

λυγροτάταν , adverbial: cp. 305 (ὅρκιος ): Ai. 966 ἐμοὶ πικρὸς τέθνηκεν.

ξέναν , in relation to Thebes; the foreign wife of the Theban king. Pindar wrote a παιάν on Niobe's marriage, and said that the Lydian ἁρμονία was first used at Thebes on that occasion. ( de Mus. 15.)

Ταντάλου , gen. of parentage: cp. 486, Ai. 172 Διὸς Ἄρτεμις : 952 Ζηνὸς ἡ δεινὴ θεός. Tantalus, son of Zeus, had his royal seat on Mount Sipylus, which belonged to Phrygia in the older and larger sense of that term. In αεσξη. Νιόβη (fr. 153) he describes his realm as extending ‘twelve days journey’ from Sipylus westward to Ida.

Σιπύλῳ . Mount Sipylus is in the country once called Maeonia, and afterwards Lydia. It is a branch of the Tmolus range (N. of which stood Sardis), and extends in a N.W. direction to the Hermus. Magnesia ‘ad Sipylum’ was on that river's left bank. From a remote age volcanic forces were active in this region, known to the Greeks as the κατακεκαυμένη. Cp. Arist. Meteor. 2.8 γενομένου σεισμοῦ τὰ περὶ Σίπυλον ἀνετράπη . A city called Tantalis, once situated at Sipylus, was said to have perished by an earthquake, which made a lake. Tantalus, like Niobe, is a type of prosperity plunged by ὕβρις into misery. Here, as in the case of Sodom and Gomorrah, some physical catastrophe was at the root of the tradition.—See on 831.

ἀτενής , prop. ‘strained,’ ‘intent’ (e.g. ἀτενὴς ὄψις), or ‘intense’ (as ἀτενεῖς ὀργαί): here it denotes the close embrace of the ivy. Cp. hederae sequaces (Persius prol.).

πετραία βλάστα δάμασεν , the ‘growth of stone’ (the process of petrifaction) ‘subdued her,’ i.e. passed gradually over her whole form: cp. Ovid, Met. 6. 301: Orba resedit | Exanimes inter natos, natasque, virumque, | Diriguitque malis. Nullos movet aura capillos. | In vultu color est sine sanguine: lumina maestis | Stant immota genis: nihil est in imagine vivi. | Ipsa quoque interius cum duro lingua palato | Congelat, et venae desistunt posse moveri. | Nec flecti cervix, nec bracchia reddere gestus, | Nec pes ire potest: intra quoque viscera saxumst. For αι^ in πετραία , cp. 1310 n.

καί νιν ὄμρροι , κ.τ.λ. The poet is thinking of Niobe's petrified form among the lonely mountain-crags ( Il. 24.614 νῦν δέ που ἐν πέτρῃσιν, ἐν οὔρεσιν οἰοπόλοισιν, | ἐν Σιπύλῳ ). ‘The rain and the snow never leave her, as she pines with grief’: i.e. she is amid the storms that visit snow-crowned Sipylus throughout the year. By these words the poet wishes to call up a general image of bleak and stormbeaten solitude. Niobe's own weeping is then described by τέγγει δ’ , etc. Now, if we kept the MS. ὄμβρῳ , that dat. would go closely with τακομέναν : ‘as she melts, flows down, with rain’ (or ‘with water’), ‘the snow never leaves her.’ Thus τέγγει … δειράδας would be anticipated, and in a prosaic manner; viz., by words suggesting that the appearance of weeping is due to water trickling down the rock. This is the true reason for preferring ὄμβροι to ὄμβρῳ . It is no argument against ὄμβρῳ that χιών τ’ would answer to τέγγει θ’ (for τε irregularly placed, cp. O.T. 258 n.). With ὄμβροι, θ’ could still follow τέγγει, but δ’ is better.—For the constr. ὄμβροι...χιών τ’ οὐ λείπει (verb agreeing in number with nearest subject) cp. 1132 f.: O.C. 7 στέργειν γὰρ αἱ πάθαι με χὡ χρόνος ξυνὼν | μακρὸς διδάσκει (n.).

χιών is taken by Wecklein as=‘snowwater’ (Eiswasser). The only passage which seems to favour that sense is Eur. Tro. 1066 Ἰδαῖα...νάπη | χιόνι κατάρυτα ποταμίᾳ , but there the adj. makes the difference: ‘snow carried down streams’ can be only ‘snow-water.’ In Andr. 215 Θρῄκην χιόνι τὴν κατάρρυτον means merely, ‘on which snow falls thickly.’ Cp. Quintus Smyrnaeus 1. 293 ὑπαὶ Σιπύλῳ νιφόεντι.

οὐδαμά : cp. 763.

τέγγει δ’ ὑπ’ ὀφρύσι … δειράδας . Though ὀφρύς and δειράς could be said of a mountain, Soph. is here thinking simply of the human form. παγκλαύτους (L) might be proleptic (cp. n. on ἀδίκους, Soph. 791), but παγκλαύτοις is better, since ὀφρύσι seems to need an epithet.

The Niobe of Sipylus has usually been identified with a colossal rock-image on the N. side of the range. It is rudely carved in relief, within a rectangular niche on the face of a limestone cliff, and represents a woman seated on a throne. (See Stark, Niobe, pl. 1, Leips. 1863: cp. Baumeister, Denkm. p. 1029). Prof. W. M. Ramsay, however, holds that this image is the ‘very ancient’ ἄγαλμα of Cybele mentioned by Paus. 3.22.4. In two respects it differs from the ancient accounts of the Niobe (quoted below): (a) it does not ‘weep,’—for the rainwater drops from the front of the niche, clear of the figure; and (b) the likeness to a human form grows, instead of vanishing, as one approaches. (Journ. Hellen. Studies III. 61 ff., 1882.) This has been confirmed by another traveller, Herr Schweisthal (as reported in the Berl. Phil. Wochenschr., May 28, 1887, p. 704). He finds the true Niobe at no great distance from the Cybele, but nearer Magnesia, and in the vicinity of a stream (the Jarikkaia) which Humann, in his ‘Excursion into Sipylus’ (1881), had already identified with the Achelous of Il. 24.616. It is a natural phenomenon,—the semblance—as seen from a distance—of a draped woman, seated high on the rocks; she looks towards the right, and lifts her right arm, as if in lament.

The best ancient description is by a poet whose native place was in that neighbourhood,—Quintus Smyrnaeus (1. 293— 306):—‘Her streaming tears still fall from the heights of the rugged cliff; and in sympathy with her the sounding waters of the Hermus make lament, and the lofty peaks of Sipylus, over which the mist that shepherds dread floats evermore. A great marvel is she to passers by, because she is like a sorrowful woman, who mourns some cruel grief, and weeps without stint. Such verily seems the figure, when thou gazest at it from afar; but when thou drawest near, lo, 'tis but a sheer rock, a cliff of Sipylus’ (φαίνεται αἰπήεσσα πέτρη, Σιπύλοιό τ’ ἀπορρώξ).

Nonnus was thinking of the effect from the road, when he wrote (2. 160), ἕσσομαι ὡς Νιόβη καὶ ἐγὼ λίθος, ὄφρα καὶ αὐτὴν | λαϊνέην στενάχουσαν ἐποικτείρωσιν ὁδῖται. Pausanias, too, says that, at a certain distance from the cliff, δεδακρυμένην δόξεις ὁρᾶν καὶ κατηφῆ γυναῖκα, but that the illusion vanishes on a nearer approach (1. 21 § 3).

ὁμοιοτάταν , because the stone into which Niobe was changed may be likened to Antigone's rocky tomb: cp. El. 150 ἰὼ παντλάμων Νιόβα, σὲ δ’ ἔγωγε νέμω θεόν, | ἅτ’ ἐν τάφῳ πετραίῳ | αἰαῖ δακρύεις .—The Niobe in the Uffizi Gallery at Florence will occur to many as offering an ideal type of majestic sorrow and beauty not unworthy to be associated with Antigone, and yet suggesting a contrast no less than a resemblance; the contrast between the desolate mother, and the maiden who is going to join those whom she loves (897); between pride steadfast under divine anger, and the piety that has dared to offend man.

834-838

ἀλλὰ … θανοῦσαν . The Chorus desire to console Antigone. There is no element of reproof in their words here. She has likened herself to Niobe. ‘And yet Niobe’—the Chorus say—‘was a goddess, while thou art a mortal. But ( καίτοι ) it will be a great glory for thy memory that thy fate was as the fate of a goddess, in life and in death.’ ‘In life’ ( ζῶσαν ), and not only in death ( θανοῦσαν ), because Niobe, like Antigone, was in the fulness of her vitality when she met her doom. The moments of life through which Antigone is now passing are like the moments through which Niobe passed as she felt the beginning of the change into stone.—Why does Antigone rejoin, οἴμοι γελῶμαι ? Because her thought had been, ‘my doom is terrible and miserable as Niobe's’; but the Chorus had answered, ‘It is indeed glorious for thee to be as Niobe.’ She had looked for present pity. They had comforted her with the hope of posthumous fame. —See Appendix.

θεός , sc. ἐκείνη μέν ἐστι (cp. 948). The absence of a pron., to balance ἡμεῖς, is unusual, but it is easy to carry on the subject of τέγγει in 831. Niobe is of divine race, since her father was the son of Zeus, and her mother the Pleiad Taygetè (or Dionè, one of the Hyades). So in αεσξη. Νιόβη (fr. 157) her family is described as οἱ θεῶν ἀγχίσποροι (near kin), ...κοὔπω νιν ἐξίτηλον αἷμα δαιμόνων.

θεογεννής , god-begotten. The peculiarity is that the word is formed directly from γέννα, and not from the stem of the pass. aor. in use: i.e., we should expect θεογέννητος. But Pindar could coin θεότιμος (I. 5. 13) as= θεοτίμητος. Why, then, should not a poet coin θεογεννής as= θεογέννητος? It is of little moment that the extant classical literature happens to present no strictly parallel compound with γέννα (ποντογεννής and πρωτογεννής being late Byzantine). θειογενής occurs in Orac. Sibyll. (5. 261), but is not classical. The Schol.'s paraphrase, θειοτέρου γένους τυγχάνουσα, is no token (as some fancy) that he read a gen., such as θείου τε γένους.

καίτοι has an illative force, introducing the next step in the reasoning: cp. 949, O. T. 855.—L's φθιμένα should prob. be φθιμένῃ (see on παγκοίτην 804). The variant φθιμένῳ (noted in L) is warrantable as the masc. of general statement (cp. 463): but it would be extremely harsh, when ζῶσαν...θανοῦσαν refers to the same person.

κἀκοῦσαι , ‘e'en to have it said of her’ (καί meaning, ‘even if there is no other comfort’). This seems a little more expressive than τἀκοῦσαι (Wecklein), and also slightly more probable palaeographically (cp. O. C. 172 cr. n.). The MS. μέγ’ ἀκοῦσαι is certainly wrong, since a paroemiac could not begin a new sentence. For ἀκούω (=λέγομαι , audio) with inf., cp. Her. 3.131 Ἀργεῖοι ἤκουον μουσικὴν εἶναι Ἑλλήνων πρῶτοι .

τοῖς ἰσοθέοις σύγκληρα , a lot shared by demigods. Plut. Mor. 103 F χρὴ γὰρ οὐ μόνον ἑαυτὸν εἰδέναι θνητὸν ὄντα τὴν φύσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅτι θνητῷ σύγκληρός ἐστι βίῳ καὶ πράγμασι ῥᾳδίως μεθισταμένοις πρὸς τοὐναντίον: i.e. that one shares the lot of humanity at large.—The decisive objection to the MS. reading ἔγκληρα is the sense of the adj.; for ἔγκληρος always means either (1) act., having a share in, as Eur. I. T. 682 ἔγκληρον... κασιγνήτην , ‘heiress,’=ἐπίκληρον, and so

Hipp. 1011: or (2) pass., included in one's κλῆρος, as H. F. 468 ἔγκληρα πεδία ...κεκτημένος (‘by inheritance’). Here, ἔγκληρα was perh. partly due to a reminiscence of ἔγκληρον in 814.—The change of τοῖς ἰσοθέοις into τοῖσι θεοῖσιν , though easy, is needless. The epic ι— of ἰσόθεος might well be allowed in tragic lyrics or anapaests, like the α— of ἀθάνατος (cp. 339 n.): and Aesch. once uses it, Aesch. Pers. 80 ἰσόθεος φώς. [But ἰσόθεος has ι^ in Eur. Tro. 1169, I. A. 626 (dial.), as ἰσόνειρον has in Aesch. PV 547.] Note that the MS. τοῖς ἰσοθέοις ἔγκληρα would have arisen more easily from ΤΟΙΣΙΣΟΘΕΟΙΣΣΥΓΚΛΗΡΑ than from ΤΟΙΣΙΘΕΟΙΣΙΝΣΥΓΚΛΗΡΑ.

ζῶσαν … θανοῦσαν . The constr., φθιμένῃ μέγα ἐστίν, ἀκοῦσαι ζῶσαν σύγκληρα λαχεῖν (instead of ζώσῃ), is not rare: cp. Xen. An. 1. 2§ 1 Ξενίᾳ τῷ Ἀρκάδι ἥκειν παραγγέλλει λαβόντα τοὺς ἄνδρας [though shortly before, παραγγέλλει τῷ Κλεάρχῳ λαβόντι ἥκειν]: ib. 3. 1. 5 συμβουλεύει τῷ Ξενοφῶντι ἐλθόντα εἰς Δελφοὺς ἀνακοινῶσαι : ib. 3. 2. 1 ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς προφυλακὰς καταστήσαντας συγκαλεῖν τοὺς στρατιώτας . The dat. with the inf. is, in such cases, equally right, but the acc. sometimes excludes an ambiguity. (Cp. on O. T. 913.) El. 479 ὕπεστί μοι...κλύουσαν is not similar.—I can see no reason to suppose the loss of a verse. The fact that six anapaestic verses (817—822) follow the strophe proves nothing. Cp. on 110 f., and Append. on 155 ff.

γελῶμαι : see on 834 ff. Cp. Job xvii. 2: ‘Are there not mockers with me?’

πολυκτήμονες , an epith. which also implies εὐγενεῖς: cp. O. T. 1070 πλουσίῳ χαίρειν γένει . So these Theban elders are called κοιρανίδαι (940), and in O. T. 1223 ὦ γῆς μέγιστα τῆσδ’ ἀεὶ τιμώμενοι : as Thebes itself, ἀγλααί ( O. T. 153) and μεγάλαι ( ib. 1203).

κρῆναι : so Polyneices appeals to Oed., πρός νύν σε κρηνῶν καὶ θεῶν ὁμογνίων ( O. C. 1333, where see n.): and the dying Ajax invokes the κρῆναι of Troy ( Ai. 862).

εὐαρμάτου : see n. on 148 f.

ἄλσος : cp. El. 5 (Argos) τῆς οἰστροπλῆγος ἄλσος Ἰνάχου κόρης, as the scene of Io's visitation by Hera. So Thebes is the ‘sacred precinct’ of Dionysus (cp. 154, 1137) and the other θεοὶ ἐγχώριοι.

ἔμπας , even if human sympathy fails me. Soph. has ἔμπας (=ὅμως) also in Ai. 122, 1338, and ἔμπα^ ib. 563 (dial.).

ὔμμ’ (Aeolic and epic), as Aesch. Eum. 620: so dat. ὔμμι O. C. 247 (n.).

ἐπικτῶμαι , acquire, win: Aesch. Eum. 671 (ὅπως) καὶ τόνδ’ ἐπικτήσαιο σύμμαχον, θεά. In this general sense the ἐπί is not inconsistent with what ἔμπας implies, viz. that she fails to win human sympathy.

οἵα : cp. on 823 ( λυγροτάταν).—

φίλων ἄκλαυτος : cp. 1034: Ai. 910 ἄφαρκτος φίλων , and O. C. 1722 n.

ἕργμα τυμβόχωστον , an enclosure (prison) with a sepulchral χῶμα. The ἕργμα is the chamber in the rock, πετρώδης κατῶρυξ (774), in which she is to be immured: the χῶμα consists of the stones heaped up at the entrance, so as to close it: cp. 1216 ἁρμὸν χώματος λιθοσπαδῆ. For ἕργμα (εἵργω, to shut in) cp. Part. Anim. 2. 15. 1, where it is said that the eyelashes ( βλεφαρίδες) protect the eyes, οἷον τὰ χαρακώματα ποιοῦσί τινες πρὸ τῶν ἑργμάτων, like the palings sometimes placed in front of fences (or hedges). The Berlin ed. (p. 958 b 18) there gives ἐργμάτων from the MSS. just as here L has ἔργμα, and as, conversely, MSS. of Pindar ( I. 1. 27 etc.) give ἕργμα for ἔργμα = ἔργον. The old edd. of Arist. give ἐρυμάτων.—The reading ἕρμα (from ἐρείδω)=‘mound’: C. I. 4599 ἐρισθενὲς ἕρμα θανοῦσιν: Kaibel Epigr. 1063. 4 κἀγήραον ἕρμα. But this seems less fitting here than the notion of ‘prison’: cp. 886 περιπτύξαντες, 892 ἀείφρουρος .

ποταινίου , usu., ‘recent,’ ‘fresh’: here, ‘of a new kind’: cp. fr. 154. 5 ἡδονὰς ποταινίους. A tomb destined for the dead is to receive the living (cp. 821).

Though every treatment of this verse must remain subject to doubt, far the most probable (to my mind) is Seyffert's modification of Boeckh's βροτοῖς οὔτ’ ἐν νεκροῖς κυροῦσα . This gives an exact correspondence with 870, κασίγνητε γάμων κυρήσας, and there is every reason to think that 870 is sound. Further, the origin of L's reading is elucidated. The first οὔτε is omitted ( Aesch. Ag. 532 Πάρις γὰρ οὔτε συντελὴς πόλις , cp. O. T. 239); and this poetical license might easily have led a corrector to suppose that the first οὔτε had been lost. Again, the loss of κυροῦσα would have been easy after νεκροῖς .

μέτοικος : cp. 868, 890: see on O. C. 934. It is her doom, ζῶσα τυμβεύειν (888). She is not a dweller with the living, because her abode is the grave; nor with the dead, because she lives.— The similar phrase—perhaps imitated from this—in Eur. Suppl. 968 f., οὔτ’ ἐν τοῖς φθιμένοις | οὔτ’ ἐν ζῶσιν ἀριθμουμένα (Musgrave κρινομένα) has no such special point: the Argive widows merely mean that their life is a living death.

προβᾶσ’ … πολύ : having advanced to the furthest limit of rashness, thou hast struck heavily (πολύ) against the lofty pedestal of Justice. We are to imagine the daring offender as going forward to a boundary where Justice sits enthroned, forbidding all further advance. Instead of pausing there, the rebel still rushes on, to cross the boundary—and, in doing so, dashes herself against the throne of the goddess. For βάθρον cp. Her. 1.183 (a sitting statue of Zeus) καὶ τὸ βάθρον (pedestal) οἱ καὶ ὁ θρόνος χρύσεός ἐστι. For προσέπεσες , Polyb. 1. 39 προσπεσόντες εἴς τινα βραχέα (having struck on some shallows—in sailing). Cp. Aesch. Theb. 409 μάλ’ εὐγενῆ τε καὶ τὸν Αἰσχύνης θρόνον | τιμῶντα καὶ στυγοῦνθ’ ὑπέρφρονας λόγους . Ag. 383 λακτίσαντι μέγαν Δίκας βωμόν. Eum. 539 βωμὸν αἴδεσαι Δίκας, | μηδέ νιν κέρδος ἰδὼν ἀθέῳ ποδὶ λὰξ ἀτίσῃς. Solon fr. 4. 14 οὐδὲ φυλάσσονται σεμνὰ θέμεθλα Δίκης.

πολύ (adv.) = σφόδρα, violently.—Bellermann, adopting Kvíčala's general view, and also Kern's ἐσχάτου , renders: ‘having advanced, with extreme rashness ( Dem. or. 18 § 17 οὔτε δικαίως οὔτ’ ἐπ’ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα ), to the lofty threshold (βάθρον) of Justice, thou hast fallen heavily down’ : i.e., ‘ while, with the utmost boldness, thou wast obeying the command of Justice, thou hast been hurled to destruction.’ But (1) προσέπεσες could not mean this: we must at least have κατέπεσες. (2) The Chorus feel pity, indeed, for Ant. , and recognise the praise of piety, which she has won (817, Ant. 872). But they also regard her collision with the city's law as an act of frantic folly (λόγου τ’ ἄνοια καὶ φρενῶν ἐρινύς, Ant. 603); and they presently tell her that she has left Creon no choice but to punish her (874). By Δίκη they understand the law of the State,—not those θεῶν νόμιμα which Ant. preferred to obey.

πατρῷόν τινα … ἆθλον , ‘some ordeal inherited from thy sire’ (v. 2); τινά softens a statement into a conjecture; it is perhaps the work of the fate which he bequeathed. This is better than to take τινά closely with πατρῷον as=‘of the paternal kind.’

ἐκτίνεις , art paying (to the fates which exact it), like ἐκτίνω δίκην, τίσιν, ἄποινα.

μερίμνας , gen. sing.: οἶκτον , acc. depending on ἔψαυσας...μερίμνας as =ἐποίησάς με μεριμνᾶν: cp. El. 122 τίνα | τάκεις ὧδ’ ἀκόρεστον οἰμωγὰν | τὸν πάλαι ἐκ δολερᾶς ἀθεώτατα | ματρὸς ἁλόντ’ ἀπάταις Ἀγαμέμνονα , where τὸν...Ἀγαμέμνονα is governed by τίνα τάκεις...οἰμωγάν as =τί οἰμώζεις; see other examples in n. on 211 f. πατρός and πότμου are objective genitives with οἶκτον .—The objection

to taking οἶκτον as acc. in apposition with ἔψαυσας...μερίμνας is that this would imply τό (σε) ψαῦσαι ἀλγ. ἐμοὶ μερίμνης οἶκτός ἐστιν: as Eur. Or. 1105 Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν, Μενέλεῳ λύπην πικράν , implies, τὸ Ἑλένην κτανεῖν Μενέλεῳ λύπη πικρὰ ἔσται: Aesch. Ag. 224 ἔτλα δ’ οὖν | θυτὴρ γενέσθαι θυγατρός, γυναικοποίνων πολέμων ἀρωγάν , implies, τὸ θυτῆρα γενέσθαι ἀρωγὴ ἦν. Now, if we had, for instance, ἀνεμνήσθην μερίμνης, it is conceivable that οἶκτον, as acc. in appos., should mean οἴκτου ἀφορμήν or ἔγερσιν. But when, as here, the subject of ἔψαυσας is distinct from the person who makes the lament, it seems impossible that οἶκτον should have this pregnant sense.

ἀλγ. μερίμνας is certainly not acc. plur. See on 546 and 961. No Greek hearer of these lyrics could take μερίμνας for anything but the usual gen. after ψαύω. If Soph. had intended the acc., he would at least have written ἀλγεινοτάταν...μέριμναν.—The interpretation given above would admit the reading οἶτον , ‘doom,’ which has, however, less authority (cr. n.). El. 166 τὸν ἀνήνυτον | οἶτον ἔχουσα κακῶν . But, as οἶτον πότμου is an impossible pleonasm, it would then be necessary to take τοῦ τε ...πότμου as depending on ἔψαυσας: for τριπόλιστον οἶτον could not be a parenthetic acc. in apposition with ἔψαυσας... μερίμνας πατρός. This would be very awkward. Further, οἶκτον is clearly the right word to introduce the lament ἰώ, etc., which actually follows.

τριπόλιστον ( οἶκτον), a lament which has often been renewed; a thrice-told tale of sorrow. πολέω=to turn up the soil with the plough: ἀναπολέω, to plough anew: then fig., to ‘go over the same ground’ again. Pind. N. 7. 104 ταὐτὰ...τρὶς τετράκι τ’ ἀμπολεῖν: Soph. Ph. 1238 δὶς ταὐτὰ βούλει καὶ τρὶς ἀναπολεῖν μ’ ἔπη; No πολίζω as =πολέω occurs, but Pind. once has ἀναπολίζω as= ἀναπολέω ( Pind. P. 6. 3). Similarly a poet might well use τριπόλιστος as if πολίζω existed. It is needless to write τριπόλητον. The epic adj. is τρίπολος.

κλεινοῖς Λαβδακίδαισιν , dat. of interest after πότμου , all the fate for (i.e. appointed for) us, the Labdacidae, instead of the possessive gen., κλεινῶν Λαβδακιδᾶν. Cp. Eur. Phoen. 17 ὦ Θήβαισιν εὐίπποις ἄναξ . It is needless to explain the dat. by pressing the deriv. of πότμος from πίπτω (‘what falls to one’). Cp. on 571, and on 865 (ἐμῷ πατρί).

ἁμετέρου (=ἡμῖν) is here joined with the dat. of interest, as the possessive pron. is oft. joined with the gen. of the pers. pron. (τἀμὰ δυστήνου κακά, O. C. 344).

ματρῷαι λέκτρων ἆται = ματρῴων λ. ἆται (see n. on 793), calamities of the mother's bed, i.e. springing from marriage with a mother. (So O. C. 526 γάμων . . ἄτᾳ .) For the plur. ἆται in this sense, cp. O. C. 1244, El. 215.—L's πατρῷαι (‘calamities of my father's marriage’) is possible, but less good, since (a) the epithet μητρῷα denotes the bed to which he came: cp. O. T. 976 καὶ πῶς τὸ μητρὸς

λέκτρον οὐκ ὀκνεῖν με δεῖ; and (b) with πατρῷαι the explanation by ἐμῷ πατρί, etc., would have been less needed.

κοιμήματα . . αὐτογέννητα . . ματρός , the mother's union with her own offspring; the adj.=μετὰ τοῦ αὑτῆς γεννήματος: cp. O. C. 1463 κτύπος . . διόβολος (=κτύπος τοῦ ἐκ Διὸς βέλους): Aesch. Eum. 212 ὅμαιμος (=συγγενοῦς) αὐθέντης φόνος.

ἐμῷ πατρί , dat. of interest, ‘ for my sire’ (i.e. to his misery); the whole phrase being equiv. to, ‘a mother's incestuous union with our father.’ The dat. goes with the whole preceding phrase, not with αὐτογέννητα only (‘incestuous in relation to him’), nor with κοιμήματα only (‘sleep with him’). The latter, which Wecklein assumes, implies κοιμᾶσθαί τινι as=συγκ. τινί, an unproved constr.; for Hes. Th. 213 οὔτινι κοιμη·θεῖσα θεὰ τέκε Νὺξ ἐρεβεννή is of doubtful genuineness, and even there οὔτινι could go with τέκε.

δυσμόρου is far better than δυσμόρῳ: without it, the words could imply that only the father's sin merited pity.

οἵων (masc.) ποτέ is exclamatory: ‘from what manner of parents’ (for the gen., cp. 38). The exclamatory οἷος is freq. in Soph. (cp. 1228, Tr. 997, etc.), and ποτέ strengthens it just as it strengthens the interrogative τίς or ποῖος ( O. T. 754, Ph. 222, etc.). So the exclamatory οἶος is strengthened by ἄρα ( Ai. 367, 910).—Most commentators make οἵων neut. relative to κοιμήματα: ‘such (wedlock) as that from which I sprang.’ But ποτέ is fatal to this; for (a) it cannot here mean, ‘in former days’; that would be too weak: ( b) nor can οἵων ποτέ mean, ‘of whatever kind they may have been’— like ὅστις ποτέ. Besides, the masc. οὕς most naturally refers to persons denoted by οἵων . I have therefore pointed at ματρός.—ἀραῖος , fem.: elsewhere this adj. is always of three terminations. So Attic tragedy uses κοινός, ποθεινός, πτωχός, φανερός, etc., as fem.: see O. C. 751 n.

μέτοικος : see on 852.

κασίγνητε . Polyneices. His marriage with Argeia, daughter of the Argive king Adrastus, was the seal of the armed alliance against Thebes, and thus the prime cause of Antigone's death ( O. C. 378).—Not Oedipus. Such an allusion would be too repulsive here. In O. C. 535 ἀδελφεαί marks the climax of horror, and the word is wrung from unwilling lips. Further, as the doom of the whole race is in question (859), the brother is fitly mentioned.

θανὼν ἔτ’ οὖσαν : so Electra says of her brother Orestes, ὥς μ’ ἀπώλεσας θανών. Cp. on O. T. 1453.

κατήναρες . This act. aor. occurs in later poetry. The epic form of the compound is κατεναίρομαι, aor. κατενηράμην. Eur. uses the epic ἐναίρω, ἤναρον, but only in lyrics. Soph. has κατηναρισμένας (κατεναρίζω) in dial., Ai. 26.

σέβειν . ‘Reverent action’ (meaning her loyalty to Polyneices) ‘is, in a

sense, εὐσέβεια’: i.e. though it is not complete εὐσέβεια—which the Chorus regard as including loyalty to the State's laws— yet, so far as it goes, it deserves praise of the same kind. Cp. 924 τὴν δυσσέβειαν εὐσεβοῦσ’ ἐκτησάμην: by practising εὐσέβεια towards the dead, she had come to be thought, on the whole, δυσσεβής—as a law-breaker. The Chorus is here the apologist of Creon, and this concession is meant to emphasise the next sentence. Hence the purposed vagueness of σέβειν . The speaker avoids a direct reference to the peculiarly sacred and tender duty which Ant. had fulfilled. The proposed emendations (see cr. n.) would obliterate this touch.

κράτος δὲ οὐδαμᾷ παραβατὸν πέλει ( τούτῳ ), ὅτῳ κράτος μέλει: but an offence against authority cannot be permitted by him who has authority in his keeping. The antecedent to ὅτῳ , viz. τούτῳ, is an ethic dat., ‘in his sight’; he must not look on and see the law broken. For this dat., cp. 904.

οὐδαμᾷ (Dor.): cp. 763.—For μέλει cp. 1335: Il. 2.25 ᾧ λαοί τ’ ἐπιτετράφαται καὶ τόσσα μέμηλεν . The Chorus echoes Creon's saying (677).

αὐτόγνωτος , act., deciding for oneself, αὐτὴ γιγνώσκουσα , like μεμπτός, ‘blaming,’ ὕποπτος, ‘suspecting,’ etc. ( O. C. 1031 n.). Not pass., ‘resolved upon’ (i.e. here, ‘adopted’) ‘by one's own choice,’ as Ellendt takes it (‘ultro susceptus’), and as the Schol. perh. did, who gives, αὐθαίρετος καὶ ἰδιογνώμων τρόπος.

ὀργά , disposition: see n. on 354 ff. (ὀργάς).

ἑτοίμαν , imminent, i.e. for which everything is prepared; Il. 18.96 αὐτίκα γάρ τοι ἔπειτα μεθ’ Ἕκτορα πότμος ἑτοῖμος : Plut. Mor. 706C ἕτοιμον τὸ διαφθαρῆναι τοῖς μὴ βοηθοῦντα·. . .τὸν λογισμὸν ἔχουσι (corruption is imminent for those who have not reason to aid them). Cp. 936 .

τόδε λ. ἱρὸν ὄμμα = τῆσδε ἱερᾶς λαμπάδος ὄμμα (793 n.). Cp. Eur. I. T. 194 ἀλλάξας... | ἱερὸν...ὄμμ’ αὐγᾶς | ἅλιος . Ion 1467 ἀελίου δ’ ἀναβλέπει λαμπάσιν.

ἀδάκρυτον , predicate, with proleptic force: no friend mourns my fate,

(and so it remains) unwept. Soph. has several instances of the predicative adj. thus added to a subst. which has the art. and possessive pron.; as O. T. 671 τὸ γὰρ σόν, οὐ τὸ τοῦδ’, ἐποικτίρω στόμα | ἐλεινόν (n.): El. 1143 τῆς ἐμῆς πάλαι τροφῆς | ἀνωφελήτου . Cp. 791.

ἆρ’ ἴστε , ὡς, εἰ χρείη λέγειν ἀοιδὰς καὶ γόους πρὸ τοῦ θανεῖν, οὐδ’ εἶς ἂν παύσαιτο (λέγων); The constr. would have been clearer with λέγων instead of λέγειν , but the latter has naturally been conformed to χρείη. The conject. παύσειεν is admissible (cp. O. C. 1751 παύετε θρῆνον, παῖδες ), but unnecessary, and scarcely probable. Prof. Postgate's suggestion, that ἀοιδὰς καὶ γόους are objects to ἴστε , is tenable; but against it is the fact that in such cases the object of the principal verb is almost invariably the anticipated subject of the dependent clause (as O. C. 1197 γνώσει κακοῦ | θυμοῦ τελευτὴν ὡς κακὴ προσγίγνεται ); as if here we had, ἆρ’ ἴστ’ ἀοιδὰς ὡς μακραί εἰσι; An object is very rarely so anticipated, as in Isae. or. 10 § 18, ἴσως οὖν ἄν τις...τὸν χρόνον ὑμῶν θαυμάσειε, πῶς ποτε πολὺν οὕτως εἰάσαμεν.

οὐδ’ ἂν εἷς , more emphatic than οὐδεὶς ἄν: O. T. 281 n.

οὐκ ἄξεθ’ . When the first of two or more commands is given by οὐ with fut. indic., that constr. is usually continued, either (a) with καί, as Eur. Andr. 1066 οὐχ ὅσον τάχος | χωρήσεταί τις...καὶ... λέξει... ; or (b) with repeated οὐ, as Aristoph. Lys. 459 οὐχ ἕλξετ’, οὐ παιήσετ’, οὐκ ἀράξετε ; Here a direct imperat. follows (887), and a note of interrogation must therefore be placed after τάχιστα.—κατηρεφεῖ , prop. ‘roofed over,’ oft. an epithet of a natural cave ( Od. 13.349 σπέος , Soph. Ph. 272 ἐν κ. πέτρᾳ), and in El. 381 of a chamber ( στέγη) like this κατῶρυξ. The fact that Nauck wishes to change it into κατώρυχι (or κατωρυχεῖ) is a strong instance of μεταβολὴ πάντων γλυκύ .

περιπτύξαντες : see on 848 (ἕργμα). Cp. Eur. Phoen. 1357 τειχέων περιπτυχαί . Kaibel Epigr. 468 λαΐνεος στήλη με πέριξ ἔχει.

χρῇ , wishes: 3rd pers. pres. ind. of χράω, with contraction into ῆ instead of ᾶ, as in διψῆν, ζῆν, κνῆν, πεινῆν, σμῆν, χρῆν (to give an oracle), χρῆσθαι, ψῆν. Schol., εἰ χρῄζει καὶ θέλει. If the nom. ζῶσα is sound, as it seems to be, in the next v., then χρῇ is certain: for εἰ χρῄζει has no probability. Only one other passage, however, gives unambiguous support to the forms χρῇς, χρῇ,—viz. Aristoph. Ach. 778, (the Megarian) οὐ χρῆσθα; σιγῇς, ὦ κάκιστ’ ἀπολουμένα; ‘will you not make a sound?' (οὐ θέλεις, sc. φωνεῖν;). There, indeed, Blaydes writes οὐ χρή τυ

σιγῆν; but the MSS. are supported by the testimony of Suidas and Hesychius to χρῇς as=χρῄζεις. In the other four places where these forms are usu. read, they are not indispensable, χρή being possible; but in two, at least, they are much better than χρή, viz. El. 606 κήρυσσέ μ’ εἰς ἅπαντας, εἴτε χρῇς κακήν, | εἴτε στόμαργον, κ.τ.λ. : and Ai. 1373 σοὶ δὲ δρᾶν ἔξεσθ’ ἃ χρῇς . In the other two, χρή might well stand: Eur. fr. 910 πρὸς ταῦθ’ ὅ τι χρῇ καὶ παλαμάσθω | καὶ πᾶν ἐπ’ ἐμοὶ τεκταινέσθω: Cratinus Νόμοι fr. 2 νῦν γὰρ δή σοι πάρα μὲν θεσμοὶ | τῶν ἡμετέρων, πάρα δ’ ἄλλ’ ὅ τι χρῇς. Except in Ach. 778, the MSS. everywhere give χρή: and the variants in the next v. (see cr. n.) show that χρῇ was strange to the copyists, though known to the Scholiast.

ζῶσα τυμβεύειν , to live entombed. Elsewhere τυμβεύω=to entomb ( Ai. 1063 σῶμα τυμβεῦσαι τάφῳ ); or to bring as a funeral offering, El. 406 πατρὶ τυμβεῦσαι χοάς . Here it is intrans.,=ἐν τύμβῳ εἶναι. Cp. σαλεύω, which means either (1) to put others on a σάλος,—to toss them: or (2) intrans., to be on a σάλος. So the intrans. θαλασσεύω=to be on the sea. παρθενεύω, which is trans. in classical Gk. (‘to bring up a maiden’), is intrans. in Heliod. 7. 8 τὸ...παρθενεῦον τοῦ ἄστεος. —The conject. νυμφεύειν is not right. That taunt would be quite out of place here. Creon says simply, ‘I immure her,—I do not kill her; she can either die, or live,—but in the tomb.’

στέγῃ , iron.: cp. El. 381 ζῶσα δ’ ἐν κατηρεφεῖ | στέγῃ χθονὸς τῆσδ’ ἐκτὸς ὑμνήσεις κακά , i.e. in a cave, or subterranean cell.

ἁγνοί : see on 775. His thought is: (1) she had warning: (2) no blood has been shed.

τοὐπὶ τήνδε , in what concerns her. In this phrase with the acc., ἐπί more often means, ‘so far as depends on one’: Eur. Hec. 514 ἡμεῖς δ’ ἄτεκνοι τοὐπὶ ς ': Or. 1345 σώθηθ’ ὅσον γε τοὐπ’ ἔμ’: Thuc. 4.28 (he told Cleon to try) τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι (so far as the generals were concerned): Xen. Cyr. 1.4.12 ἄλλου τινὸς τὸ ἐπὶ σὲ ἀνάγκη ἔσται δεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς . In all these places ἐπί with dat. would equally suit the sense; but not so in this verse. Cp. 1348 τά γ’ εἰς θεούς.

μετοικίας , cp. 852.

δ’ οὖν , 688.

στερήσεται , 637.

ὦ τύμβος , nom for voc.: cp. 379.

νυμφεῖον : cp. 1205.

κατασκαφής : see on 774.... ἀείφρουρος = ἣ ἀεὶ φρουρήσει με, not, ἣν ἐγὼ ἀεὶ φρουρήσω (like Aesch. PV 31 τήνδε φρουρήσεις πέτραν ): cp. 886.

ἀριθμὸν … πλεϊστον : she thinks of Laïus, her father and mother, and her two brothers.

ἐν νεκροῖς with δέδεκται : the queen of the nether world has greeted them as they passed through the πολύξενοι

πύλαι to Hades ( O. C. 1569 f.). So Oedipus is led by Ἑρμῆς ὁ πομπὸς ἥ τε νερτέρα θεός ( ib. 1548). As ἡ ἀφανὴς θεός she is associated with Hades ( ib. 1556).

Φερσέφασσα has L's support here. That form occurs also in Eur. Helen 175, but Περσέφασσα in Aesch. Cho. 490. The Il.and Od.have only Περσεφόνεια. Φερσεφόνεια occurs in Hom. Hymn. 13.2. Pindar uses Φερσεφόνα. Plato attests that, in his day, the popular form was Φερρέφαττα, which he explains as the goddess of wisdom, who enables men φερομένων ἐφάπτεσθαι, to grasp changing phenomena. People were afraid to utter the name Φερσεφόνη ( Crat. 404C). Attic inscrr. of the 4th cent. B.C. give Περσεφόνη, Φερσεφόνη, Φερρέφαττα (Meisterhans pp. 36 ff.). MSS. have Φερσέφαττα (which should perh. be Φερρέφαττα) in Aristoph. Ran. 671, Th. 287.A vase ascribed to c. 435 B.C. gives ΠΕΡΣΩΦΑΤΑ (sic, Baumeister Denkm. p. 424). Welcker cites ΦΕΡΕΦΑΣΑ from an Agrigentine vase (Götterl. 1. 393). We may infer that Soph. , c. 440 B.C., might have used either Περσέφασσα or Φερσέφασσα. The testimony of our oldest and best MS., L, may therefore be allowed to turn the scale.— In Περσεφόνη, the φον is certainly φαν, as in Ἀργειφόντης, and this comes out more clearly in Περσέφασσα: cp. Τηλεφᾶσσα = Τηλεφάεσσα, Apollod. 3. 1. 1.The first part of the word is prob. φερ, φέρω; and the name meant originally, ‘she who brings (vegetation) to the light.’ The initial II would then have been due to the following φ (cp. πέ‐φυκα for φέ‐φυκα). The replacement of the initial Φ may have been prompted by a wish to mitigate the δυσφημία of the name by avoiding an association with πέρθω.

κάκιστα , as a law-breaker (cp. 59): δή with superl., see 58 n.

μοῖραν … βίου : cp. 461. ἐξήκειν of time, as Ph. 199.

ἐν ἐλπίσιν τρέφω = ἐλπίζω. ἐν ἐλπίδι (or ἐλπίσιν) εἰμί was a common phrase. Cp. ἐν πόθῳ λαβεῖν τι ( O. C. 1678).— φίλη μὲν … προσφιλὴς δέ : cp. 669 καλῶς μὲν...εὖ δέ, n.

κασίγνητον κάρα . Eteocles. Whatever view may be taken of vv. 904—920, few would question the genuineness of 900—903: and if the latter are genuine, νῦν δέ shows that Polyneices is not meant here. She speaks first of those kinsfolk to whom she had rendered pious offices in the usual manner. Then she comes to him who is uppermost in her thoughts,—the brother whose case was different from that of the others. In v. 23 she spoke of the rumour that Eteocles had been duly buried. But nothing here implies her presence at his ἐκφορά. ἔλουσα κἀκόσμησα were acts preparatory to the πρόθεσις. The χοαί could be rendered afterwards. She loved both brothers (cp. on 523). If father and mother were named here, without any mention of Eteocles, the omission would suggest that from him she could expect no welcome,—a contradiction of her real feeling (515). Further, the brevity of this reference to Eteocles heightens the effect of what follows.

ὑμᾶς . This play supposes Oedipus to have died at Thebes: see on 50.

ἔλουσα κἀκόσμησα : see nn. on O. C. 1602 f. λουτροῖς τέ νιν | ἐσθῆτί τ’ ἐξήσκησαν ᾗ νομίζεται. Cp. below, 1201.

χοάς : cp. 431 .

περιστέλλουσα : here, of sprinkling the dust and pouring the χοαί: cp. the general sense of the word in Ai. 1170 τάφον περιστελοῦντε . More oft. of laying out the dead (like κοσμεῖν here, and συγκαθαρμόζειν in Ai. 922): Od. 24.292 οὐδέ ἑ μήτηρ | κλαῦσε περιστείλασα . Verg. Aen. 9. 485 canibus date praeda Latinis | Alitibusque iaces: nec te tua funera mater | Produxi, pressive oculos, aut vulnera lavi, | Veste tegens.

δέμας : 205.

904-920

Few problems of Greek Tragedy have been more discussed than the question whether these vv., or some of them, are spurious. Arist. ( Arist. Rhet. 3. 16§ 9) quotes vv. 911, 912, and certainly had the whole passage in his text of The Soph. interpolation, then, if such it be, must have been made soon after the poet's death; and has been imputed to his son Iophon (ὁ ψυχρός), or some other sorry poet; or to the actors. I confess that, after long thought, I cannot bring myself to believe that Soph. wrote 905—912: with which 904 and 913—920 are in organic unity, and must now stand or fall. Some remarks will be found in the Appendix.

The main points (to my mind) are briefly these. (1) The general validity of the divine law, as asserted in 450— 460, cannot be intelligibly reconciled with the limitation in vv. 905—907. (2) A still further limitation is involved in 911 f. She has buried her brother, not simply as such, but because, while he lived, he was an irreplaceable relative. Could she have hoped for the birth of another brother, she would not, then, have felt the duty to be so binding. (3) The composition of vv. 909—912 is unworthy of Sophocles.

’τίμησα (cp. ’φάνη, 457 n.), with εὖ (last word of v., as O. C. 642), I honoured thee rightly, τοῖς φρονοῦσιν , in the judgment of the wise; ethic dat. (25 n.): cp. 514.

ἐτήκετο , lay mouldering: Plat. Tim. 82E ὅταν...τηκομένη σὰρξ ἀνάπαλιν εἰς τὰς φλέβας τὴν τηκεδόνα ἐξιῇ . So tabum of corpses, Verg. Aen. 8. 487.

βίᾳ πολιτῶν . This was Ismene's phrase (79). Antigone had believed hat the city was on her side (509). This has been noted as a mark of spuriousness in the verse. But it cannot (I think) be fairly claimed as such; for, since the Chorus had seemed to fail in sympathy (838), she had regarded herself as ἄφιλος (876) in Thebes.

πρὸς χάριν : see on 30.

Cp. Her. 3.119, which clearly supplied, not merely the thought, but the form, of these verses:— ἀνὴρ μέν μοι ἂν ἄλλος γένοιτο, εἰ δαίμων ἐθέλοι, καὶ τέκνα ἄλλα, εἰ ταῦτα ἀποβάλοιμι· πατρὸς δὲ καὶ μητρὸς οὐκέτι μοι ζωόντων, ἀδελφεὸς ἂν ἄλλος οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ γένοιτο (3.119.6) . Arist. Rhet. 3.16 § 9 (if you introduce a trait of character which will seem improbable, the reason ofit should be added): ἂν δ’ ἄπιστον ᾖ, τότε τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπιλέγειν, ὥσπερ Σοφοκλῆς ποιεῖ παράδειγμα τὸ ἐκ τῆς Ἀντιγόνης, ὅτι μᾶλλον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ἐκήδετο ἢ ἀνδρὸς ἢ τέκνων· τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἂν γενέσθαι ἀπολόμενα [this=vv. 909, 910]: μητρὸς δ’ ἐν ᾅδου κ.τ.λ. (he then quotes 911 f., with βεβηκότων,—a mere slip of memory: see on 223).

Three points in these vv. are strange. (1) The gen. abs. κατθανόντος , for which a gen. has to be evolved from πόσις . The gen. of that word was not in Attic use (‘mihi non succurrit exemplum ubi πόσεος aut πόσεως legatur,’ Pors. Med. 906). Why was not ἀνδρός used? Itlooks as if the composer who made up these verses from Her. 3.119 (see above) had sought to impart a touch of tragic dignity by substituting πόσις for the historian's word, ἀνήρ. The gen. κατθανόντος cannot be taken (as some wish) with ἄλλος, ‘different from the dead’ (!). (2) ἀπ’ ἄλλου φωτός . Why is it assumed that the first husband died before, or with, his child? The two hypotheses of loss should have been kept separate. We wanted something like καὶ παῖς ἂν ἄλλος, παιδὸς ἐστερημένῃ. (3) τοῦδ’ means the first husband's child, but is most awkward.—As to οὐκ ἔστ’ ἀδελφός κ.τ.λ., it may be somewhat inelegant; but it is not (as some urge) incorrect, since οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις = οὐδείς.

ἐκπροτιμήσασ’ , ‘having singled thee out for honour,’ with ref. to the supposed cases in which she would not have paid the burial rites. The double compound occurs only here,—as ἐξαφοράω only in O. C. 1648.

διὰ χερῶν … λαβών , i.e., by forcible arrest, as though I were a criminal. Cp. O. C. 470 δῑ ὁσίων χειρῶν θιγών (=‘with’), Aesch. Suppl. 193 (ἱκτηρίας) ἔχουσαι διὰ χερῶν.

ἀνυμέναιον : see on 813.

ἀλλ’ : cp. on 810.

πρὸς φίλων with ἔρημος (not with ἔρχομαι), forsaken on the part of my friends. The sense of πρός in Ph. 1070 is similar, though there it goes with the verb; ἦ καὶ πρὸς ὑμῶν ὧδ’ ἔρημος, ὦ ξένοι, | λειφθήσομαι δή...;

δαιμόνων δίκην , that which the gods recognise (451), as distinguished from the human δίκη (854) which she has offended.

If the gods allow her to suffer for obeying them, is it not vain for her to invoke them?

βλέπειν εἴς τινα (for help), as Ai. 398, 514, El. 959.

τίνα … ξυμμάχων , what ally (of all conceivable allies)?

ἐπεί γε δή : cp. Tr. 484 ἐπεί γε μὲν δή . For the place of δή, cp. 726.

τὴν δυσσέβειαν , the repute of it; El. 968 εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς | θανόντος οἴσει : Eur. I. T. 676 καὶ δειλίαν γὰρ καὶ κάκην κεκτήσομαι : Med. 218 δύσκλειαν ἐκτήσαντο καὶ ῥᾳθυμίαν: Ion 600 γέλωτ’ ἐν αὐτοῖς μωρίαν τε λήψομαι.

The gods are allowing her to perish. But it does not follow that they approve of her doom: for they are sometimes slow in punishing wrong ( O. C. 1536). Hence the dilemma, introduced

by ἀλλ’ οὖν (‘well then’). (1) If the gods approve of my doom, then, after suffering it, I shall become conscious (in the other world) that I have sinned. (2) But if they disapprove of it, and regard Creon as the sinner, then they will punish him at last. And I could wish him no sorer doom than mine.

ἐν θεοῖς : cp. 459.

ξυγγνοῖμεν = συνειδείημεν. Lys. or. 9 § 11 συνέγνωσαν δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ σφίσιν ὡς ἠδικηκότες , ‘became conscious that they had done wrong.’ The word could also mean, ὁμολογήσαιμεν, ‘confess’: but in that sense it regularly takes either an inf., as Her. 1.91 συνέγνω ἑωυτοῦ εἶναι τὴν ἁμαρτάδα : or a dependent clause, as Plat. Legg. 717D ξυγγιγνώσκοντα ὡς εἰκότως...θυμοῖτ’ ἄν.

ἡμαρτηκότες belongs more closely to the verb than does παθόντες : cp. Plat. Phaedo 70A (ἡ ψυχὴ) διασκεδασθεῖσα οἴχηται διαπτομένη. For the tragic masc. plur., when a woman speaks of herself, cp. El. 399.

οἵδε , Creon: cp. 10.

μὴ πλείω , i.e. she will be content if they suffer ἴσα. She can imagine no worse fate. The tame conjecture μείω would not express this bitter feeling.— καὶ δρῶσιν, do on their part: O. C. 53 n.

ἀνέμων‐ῥιπαὶ ψυχῆς , stormgusts of the soul: both genitives are possessive: cp. 795 βλεφάρων‐ἵμερος...νύμφας —Dindorf's expulsion of αὑταὶ | ψυχῆς (cr. n.) is unwarranted. ψυχῆς interprets the figurative sense; for αὑταί after τῶν αὐτῶν cp. n. on 155 ff. (νέοχμος νεαραῖσι).

τούτων , neut., causal gen. ( O. T. 48). After τήνδε γ’, this is better than ταύτην would be: τοιγάρτοι (whether with καί or with νιν) would be unpleasing.

κλαύμαθ’ : cp. 754: so Ph. 1260 ἐκτὸς κλαυμάτων.

ὕπερ = ἕνεκα ( O. T. 165 n.). οἴμοι follows, but the change of person excuses the breach of synapheia: so O. C. 139 τὸ φατιζόμενον is followed by ἰώ, and ib. 143 πρέσβυς by οὐ.

This threat (to the guards) ‘has come very near to death,’ i.e., ‘portends imminent death for me.’ The phrase is not fig., ‘is bitter as death to hear’ (being a prelude to death).

Said by Creon, clearly—not by the Chorus. ‘I can give thee no encouragement (οὐδέν adv.) to hope that

the doom is not to be ratified on this wise’ (i.e., by death). μὴ οὐ , not μή, on account of οὐδέν (443 n.).

κατακυροῦσθαι , pres. denoting what is to be; Ph. 113 αἱρεῖ τὰ τόξα ταῦτα τὴν Τροίαν μόνα. Attic prose used κυροῦν or ἐπικυροῦν (γνώμην, νόμον, ψήφισμα, etc.). Cp. Creon's peremptory word τελείαν in 632.

ταύτῃ (722) combined with τάδε : cp. 39 .

θεοὶ προγενεῖς , ancestral, not merely as protectors of the race, but also as progenitors. She thinks esp. of Ares and Aphrodite, the parents of Harmonia, wife of Cadmus: Aesch. Theb. 135 σύ τ’, Αρης, πόλιν Κάδμου ἐπώνυμον | φύλαξαι κήδεσαί τ’ ἐναργῶς. | καὶ Κύπρις, ἅτ’ εἶ γένους προμάτωρ, | ἄλευσον . Dionysus, the son of ‘Cadmean’ Semele (1115), is another of the deities meant. προγενής, born before one, a poet. word, unfamiliar to good Attic prose, but used by Aristotle and later writers, usu. in comparat. (as οἱ προγενέστεροι, ‘those who have gone before us’): so οἱ μεταγενέστεροι.

δή = ἤδη ( O. T. 968), as in καὶ δή.

κοὐκέτι μέλλω , and am no longer (merely) about to be led away: cp. O. C. 1074 ἔρδουσ’ ἢ μέλλουσιν; Ph. 1255 κἀμέ τοι | ταὐτὸν τόδ’ ὄψει δρῶντα κοὐ μέλλοντ’ ἔτι. Meineke's conjecture μελλώ (=μέλλησις, Aesch. Ag. 1356) was needless.— Seyffert understands, ‘I make no more delay,’—said firmly and proudly: she scorns to bring punishment on her guards by detaining them longer. But this does not suit ἄγομαι δή.

οἱ κοιρανίδαι , the Theban εὐπατρίδαι of the Chorus: see on 843. The nom. with art., instead of voc.,=‘ye who are princes of Thebes,’ and so brings out the implied reproach to their apathy. This constr. usu. has a somewhat peremptory tone, as Plat. Symp. 218B οἱ δὲ οἰκέται...πύλας...τοῖς ὠσὶν ἐπίθεσθε . It is different when a voc. precedes the art. and partic., as Aristoph. Av. 30 ὦνδρες οἱ παρόντες ἐν λόγῳ : cp. on 100 f.

βασιλειδᾶν , i.e., of the race of the Labdacidae. This correction of βασιλίδα is certain. In Plat. Critias 116C, τὸ τῶν δέκα βασιλειδῶν γένος, the same corruption, βασιλίδων, occurs in the MSS. Suidas has βασιλείδης· ὁ τοῦ βασιλέως (where Küster wrongly proposed ὁ τοῦ Βασιλείου). In adding the patronymic suffix ιδα— to a stem in ευ ( βασιλευ), the υ is dropped, as in the gen. plur. (βασιλέ‐ων): hence βασιλε‐ίδης, βασιλείδης: cp. Πηλείδης.

μούνην , ignoring Ismene; not in bitterness (cp. on 559), but because she feels that, in spirit at least, she herself is indeed the last of the race. It is otherwise when Oed. speaks of his daughters as his only children ( O. C. 895); and when Electra says that she is ἄνευ τοκέων (187),— since Clytaemnestra is a μήτηρ ἀμήτωρ (1154).

εὐσεβίαν . Epic and lyric poetry could substitute - ια for - εια in fem. nouns from adjectives in -ης: so O. C. 1043 προμηθίας : Pind. P. 12. 4 εὐμενίᾳ: Aesch. Eum. 534 δυσσεβίας : H. F. 696

εὐγενίας. The motive was metrical convenience. Such forms are not Ionic, as Triclinius called them (cr. n.): thus Herod. used ἀληθείη, not ἀληθίη: though there are other cases in which Ionic substitutes ε for ει (as βαθέα, ἐπιτήδεος, etc.).— σεβίσασα , of respecting a law or custom: so O. C. 636, Ai. 713 ( θέσμια...σέβων).

944-987

Fourth stasimon. 1st strophe 944—954=1st antistrophe 955— 965. 2nd str. 966—976=2nd antistr. 977—987. See Metrical Analysis.

As Antigone spoke the verses ending at 943, the guards were in the act of leading her forth. The choral ode may have begun before she had vanished; but she is not to be conceived as still present when she is apostrophised (949, 987).

A princess is about to be immured in a rocky cell. The Chorus remember three other royal persons who have suffered a like fate—Danaë, Lycurgus and Cleopatra. The only points which these cases have in common with Antigone's are the facts of noble birth and cruel imprisonment.

All four cases illustrate the same general truth—no mortal can resist fate. Danaë and Cleopatra were innocent; Lycurgus was guilty. But the Chorus do not mean to suggest Antigone's guilt or innocence; still less, to foreshadow the punishment of Creon. On this side, the ode is neutral, purely a free lyric treatment of the examples. Such neutrality suits the moment before the beginning of the περιπέτεια. Teiresias is soon to come.

Acrisius, the father of Danaë, was king of Argos. The oracle at Delphi told him that he was to be slain by his daughter's son. He therefore immured the maiden in a chamber built for that purpose within the precincts of his house at Argos. Here Zeus visited her in the golden rain; she bore Perseus; and Acrisius sent mother and child adrift on the Aegean in a chest; but Zeus heard her prayer, and brought them safely to the island of Seriphus. Both Soph. and Eur. wrote a Δανάη: Soph. wrote also an Ἀκρίσιος.

καὶ Δανάας δέμας ἔτλα ἀλλάξαι οὐράνιον φῶς : note the bold order of words, and cp. Ph. 598 f. ( τίνος...πράγματος). ἔτλα καί is a Homeric echo, from Il. 5.382 ff. Aphrodite has been wounded by Diomede: her mother Dionè comforts her by saying that Ares, Hera, and Hades have also suffered wounds: τέτλαθι, τέκνον ἐμόν... | τλῆ μὲν Ἄρης... | τλῆ δ’ Ἥρη... | τλῆ δ’ Ἀΐδης. So here we have three examples—Danaë, Lycurgus, Cleopatra.

δέμας in periphrasis ( Tr. 908) here suggests her youthful beauty.— ἀλλάξαι οὐρ. φῶς ἐν χαλκοδ. αὐλαῖς, ‘to give up light, (so as to be) in a prison,’ i.e. to exchange the light for the darkness of a prison. ἀλλάσσω τί τινος can mean either to give, or to take, one thing in exchange for another. When ἀλλάσσω is used absolutely, with ref. to place, it more naturally means ‘to go to’ ( Eur. Hec. 483 ἀλλάξασ’ Ἅιδα θαλάμους ), not, as here, ‘to leave’: but ἀμείβω is freq. in both senses. Cp. Ph. 1262 ἀμείψας...στέγας (having quitted them).

χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς , ‘a brass-bound dwelling’: poet. pl. for sing., like δώματα, etc.: cp. 785. Pherecydes (ap. schol. Apoll. Rhod. 4. 1091) describes it as ‘a brazen chamber ( θάλαμον...χαλκοῦν) made under ground, in the court-yard (αὐλή) of his house.’ Paus. (2. 23. 7) says that he saw at Argos κατάγεων οἰκοδόμημα, ἐπ’ αὐτῷ δὲ ἦν ὁ χαλκοῦς θάλαμος (made by Acrisius): i.e. the θάλαμος itself was above ground;—as Horace calls it turris aenea (C. 3. 16. 1). By the epithet χαλκοῦς the legend evidently meant to denote the strength and security of the prison,—as though the doors were of bronze. But it is very probable that this epithet originally came into the story through a reminiscence of a tomb (like the ‘treasury of Atreus’ at Mycenae), to the walls of which bronze plates had been nailed. (Cp. Introd. to Homer, ch. 11. § 25.) In Simonides fr. 37. 7 χαλκεογόμφῳ is said of the chest in which Danaë was sent adrift,—not of the θάλαμος .

τυμβήρει : cp. on 255.

κατεζεύχθη : was brought under the yoke, i.e., was strictly confined. Her. 8.22 εἰ... ὑπ’ ἀναγκαίης μέζονος κατέζευχθε ἢ ὥστε ἀπίστασθαι , if ye are in the bondage of a control too severe, etc. Cp. ζεύχθη, 955.

τίμιος , sc. ἦν: cp. 834. Hermann's καίτοι καί is preferable to Wieseler's καίτοι γ’ ἦν, because the doubled καί is forcible, while καὶ Ζηνός (without a previous καί) would be somewhat weak.

ταμιεύεσκε , as a precious charge. Cp. Aesch. Eum. 660 τίκτει δ’ ὁ θρώσκων : ἡ δ’ (the mother) ἅπερ ξένῳ ξένη | ἔσωσεν ἔρνος. The iterative form occurs in only three other places of trag.: 963: Aesch. Pers. 656 ἔσκεν , Aesch. fr. 305 κλαίεσκον.

χρυσορύτους , for metre's sake, like Ai. 134 ἀμφιρύτου : ρρ regularly follows a simple vowel, but ρ a diphthong ( O. C. 469).—A bowl ( κρατήρ) from Caere, of the 5th cent. C.B. , shows the golden rain descending on Danaë; she is sitting on the bed in her chamber, and preparing to retire to rest. A second scene, on the same bowl, represents the moment when she is about to be placed, where Simonides imagines her, λαρνακι ἐν δαιδαλέᾳ. Both paintings are reproduced by Baumeister ( Denkm. p. 407).

ἁ μοιριδία τις κ.τ.λ. The peculiar place of τις makes it really equiv. to a parenthetic thought: ‘the power of fate (whatever it may be) is a dread power.’ So, while the general sense is what would be ordinarily given by ἁ μοιριδία δύνασις δεινά τις (δύνασίς ) ἐστιν, the actual order of the words is more expressive. This is not merely an instance of τις preceding the adj. (as though τις δεινά stood for δεινά τις, cp. Ph. 519). Nor, again, is it strictly parallel with ὅταν δ’ ὁ κύριος | παρῇ τις ( O.C. 288), where art. and subst. precede; though it is similar.

οὔτ’ … ὄλβος : wealth cannot buy off fate; arms cannot vanquish it; walls cannot keep it out; flight beyond sea cannot elude it.—Bacchylides fr. 36

θνατοῖσι δ’ οὐκ αὐθαίρετοι | οὔτ’ ὄλβος οὔτ’ ἄκαμπτος Ἄρης οὔτε παμφθέρσης στάσις, | ἀλλ’ ἐπιχρίμπτει νέφος ἄλλοτ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλαν | γαῖαν ἁ πάνδωρος αἶσα.

πύργος , ◌̣ citywalls, with their towers ( O. T. 56).

οὔτ’ … οὔτ’ , followed by οὐ … οὐχ : so even when only one οὔτε has been used, 249 n.

ζεύχθη , was brought under the yoke. As κατεζεύχθη in 946 better suited the sense, ‘was strictly confined,’ so here the simple ζεύχθη better suggests the idea, ‘was tamed by imprisonment.’

ὀξύχολος κ.τ.λ. = ὁ Δρύαντος ὀξύχολος παῖς: the adj. is epithet, not predicate. Verg. Aen. 3. 13 Terra procul vastis colitur Mavortia campis, | Thraces arant, acri quondam regnata Lycurgo.

The Ἠδωνοί, or Ἠδῶνες (Thuc. 2.99), occupied in historical times the part of Thrace E. of the Strymon and W. of the Nestus. In earlier times they had dwelt further west, but had been driven eastward by the Macedonian conquest of Mygdonia.

Dionysus, when he came from Asia with his new rites, was opposed by Lycurgus in Thrace, as by Pentheus at Thebes. The Λυκούργεια of Aeschylus is known from the schol. on Ar. Th. 135.This trilogy consisted of Ἠδωνοί, Βασσαρίδες, Νεανίσκοι, with Λυκοῦργος as satyric drama. In Il. 6.130 ff. Dionysus, pursued by Lycurgus, dives beneath the sea; Thetis receives him; and Zeus blinds Lycurgus.

κερτομίοις ὀργαῖς , causal dat. with ζεύχθη: was subjugated by reason of the bursts of fury in which he reviled Dionysus. For the dat., cp. 391, 691: El. 838 χρυσοδέτοις ἕρκεσι κρυφθέντα γυναικῶν , (Amphiaraus) buried alive, by reason of a woman's golden snares. ὀργαῖς might be general, ‘moods’ (355), but here has its special sense, though plur.: cp. Aesch. Eum. 848 ὀργὰς ξυνοίσω σοι . The dat. could be taken as a modal dat. with ὀξύχολος (‘in,’ or ‘with,’ his ὀργαί), but this is less good.—We could not take ζεύχθη...ὀργαῖς as=‘was enslaved to (his own) fierce moods.’—The recurrence of κερτομίοις in 961 is noteworthy, but not a ground for suspicion (76 n.): cp. 613 οὐδὲν ἕρπει with 618: and 614 ἐκτὸς ἄτας with 625. The idea of κερτόμιος is mockery, or bitter jest: cp. Ph. 1235 κερτομῶν λέγεις τάδε; with the answer, εἰ κερτόμησίς ἐστι τἀληθῆ λέγειν. The word is illustrated by the whole scene in which Pentheus mocks and taunts Dionysus (Eur. Bacch. 451—514). So Aesch. fr. 59 made Lycurgus ask, ποδαπὸς ὁ γύννις; (‘whence comes this womanish youth?’).

ἐκ Διονύσου , by his command ( O. C. 67 n.). Lycurgus, having been driven mad by Dionysus, did many violent deeds, until at last the Edonians were commanded by an oracle to imprison him in a cave on Mount Pangaeus ( Apollod. 3. 5. 1). He was afterwards torn asunder by wild horses (ib.), or devoured by panthers (Hyginus Fab. 132).

πετρώδει … δεσμῷ , the cave. Cp. Plat. Legg. 864E ἐν δημοσίῳ δεσμῷ δεθείς.

κατάφαρκτος : for the spelling, cp. on 241.

οὕτω , i.e., under the discipline of the rocky prison.

ἀνθηρόν , bursting into flower, hence, fig., exuberant, or at its height: cp. Plat. Polit. 310D πέφυκεν ἀνδρία...κατὰ μὲν αρχὰς ἀκμάζειν ῥώμῃ, τελευτῶσα δὲ ἐξανθεῖν παντάπασι μανίαις : Aesch. Pers. 821 ὕβρις...ἐξανθοῦς '. So oft. ἄνθος = ἀκμή, as Tr. 998 τόδ’ ἀκήλητον | μανίας ἄνθος.

ἀποστάζει = ἀπορρεῖ, ‘trickles away,’ so ‘gradually passes off.’ The fig. use of ἀνθεῖν being so familiar, the change of metaphor in ἀποστάζει would hardly be felt. Wecklein, indeed, conceives that the poet is thinking of a tumour, which bursts when it has attained its full size. Unity of metaphor can be bought too dearly.—Others understand: ‘so dread and exuberant is the rage that flows from madness’: i.e., ‘so dreadful was the excess of impiety into which L. had been led by his madness.’ But here we look rather for some direct comment on his punishment. His abasement (ζεύχθη) is the theme of these verses. The reference to his crime comes later (962).

ἐπέγνω τὸν θεόν, μανίαις ψαύων ( αὐτοῦ) ἐν κ. γλώσσαις: he came to know the god, when in madness he assailed him with taunts. He had mistaken Dionysus for an effeminate mortal (see on 955 f.). Cp. Od. 24.216 πατρὸς πειρήσομαι... | αἴ κέ μ’ ἐπιγνώῃ (recognise). ψαύω nowhere else takes an acc. in class. Greek (see on 546, 859), and it is unnecessary to regard this passage as a solitary example. Poetry, esp. lyric, allowed occasional boldness, and even harshness, in the arrangement of words (cp. 944: O. T. 1251 n.: O. C. 1428). Even in prose we could have (e.g.) ἐνίκησαν ἄφνω ἐπιπεσόντες τοὺς πολεμίους, though the partic. could not govern an acc. Here the order is only so far bolder, that τὸν θεόν divides ψαύων from ἐν κ. γλώσσαις: as if, in our example, a second qualification of ἐπιπεσόντες (such as νύκτωρ) followed τοὺς πολεμίους. But, since the meaning of ψαύων is already indicated by μανίαις, we are not mentally straining forward for a clue to be given by ἐν κερτ. γλώσσαις. That is, we are not forced to bind the words, ψαύων τὸν θεόν, closely together in our thought, but can easily take the sentence as though it were pointed thus:— ἐπέγνω, μανίαις | ψαύων, τὸν θεόν, έν κερτ. γλώσσαις.

μανίαις , modal (rather than causal) dat.

ψαύων like καθαπτόμενος (ἀντιβίοις ἐπέεσσι , Od. 18.415), but also suggesting profanation,—ἀθίκτου θιγγάνων.

ἐν =‘with’ (764 n.).

γλώσσαις , a bold use of the plur., due to the fact that the sing., with an adj., could so easily be fig., e.g. κακὴ γλῶσσα=‘slander’: so κερτόμιοι γλῶσσαι=‘taunts.’

παύεσκε : see on 950.

ἐνθέους γυναῖκας : the Maenads attendant on Dionysus, cp. 1128, 1150, O. T. 212, O. C. 680.

εὔιον … πῦρ , the torches which the Bacchanals swing while they raise the cry εὐοῖ. In O. T. 211 the god himself is εὔιος. Cp. Eur. Bacch. 307 (Dionysus by night on Parnassus) πηδῶντα σὺν πεύκαισι δικόρυφον πλάκα.

Μούσας . An interesting illustration is afforded by a sarcophagus in Baumeister's Denkmaeler, p.837. In the centre of the group is the raging Lycurgus, with uplifted axe, about to slay the Dionysiac nymph Ambrosia, who cowers at his feet. A Fury is on each side of him, urging him on. To the right is Dionysus.—about to

save the nymph by changing her into a vine; and behind him stand his followers. At the extreme left are three Muses—Urania, with globe; Clio, with roll; Euterpè, prob. with flutes. (Zoega seems clearly right in thus explaining the three women: others have made them Moirae.)—The close relation of Dionysus with the Muses is marked by one of his Attic titles, Μελπόμενος (Paus. 1.2.5), as conversely Apollo had the title Διονυσόδοτος (id. 1. 31.4). Muses were sometimes said to have nursed him. (Cp. Welcker, Götterl. 2. 611.)

The monuments relating to the myth of Lycurgus have been critically treated by Michaelis (Annal. Inst. 1872, pp. 248— 270). The Italian vase-paintings follow a version different from that of Soph. , viz. that the frenzy of Lycurgus was wreaked on his own son and wife. A large Neapolitan vase gives two pictures: in one, we see his murderous rage; in the other, Dionysus sits on his throne in calm majesty, stroking his panther.

Cleopatra is the third example. Her father was the wind-god, Boreas: her mother, the Athenian Oreithyia, whom he carried off to his wild home in Thrace. Cleopatra married Phineus, king of the Thracian Salmydessus, on the W. coast of the Euxine, not far from the entrance to the Bosporus. She bore him two sons. He afterwards put her away, and imprisoned her. Her imprisonment is not directly mentioned here: but cp. Diod. 4. 44, who says of Heracles, when serving with the Argonauts, τὴν Κλεοπάτραν ἐκ τῆς φυλακῆς προαγαγεῖν. Phineus then married Eidothea, sister of Cadmus. Eidothea put out the eyes of Cleopatra's two sons, and caused them also to be imprisoned.

It is the fate of Cleopatra herself which Soph. means to compare with Antigone's: this is plain from 986. The fate of the sons is made so prominent only because nothing else could give us so strong a sense of the savage hatred which pursued the mother.

Soph. supposes the outline of the story to be familiar. Cleopatra has already been divorced and imprisoned. The poet chooses the moment at which Cleopatra's sons are being blinded by Eidothea, with the sharp shuttle in her blood-stained hands. Ares, the god of cruel bloodshed, beholds with joy a deed so worthy of his Thracian realm.

The name of Cleopatra (like that of Capaneus, 133) is not mentioned. Two strophes are given to this theme, partly, perh., as having an Attic interest (982). Soph. wrote two plays called Φινεύς. We know only that Cleopatra's sons were there called Ὄαρθος (?Παρθένιος H. Weil) and Κράμβος: and that the subsequent blindness of Phineus was represented as a punishment of his cruelty (schol. Apoll. Rhod. 2. 178). Eidothea was mentioned by Soph. in his Τυμπανισταί (schol. on 980),—a play which perh. concerned the Dionysiac worship, since the τύμπανον (kettle-drum) was used in his ὄργια as well as in those of Cybelè. Another version called her Idaea, daughter of Dardanus.

παρὰ δὲ Κυανεᾶν πελάγει δ. ἁλός . For the double possessive gen., cp.795,929. πελάγει...ἁλός, as Eur. Tro. 88 πέλαγος Αἰγαίας ἁλός , the Homeric ἁλὸς ἐν πελάγεσσιν, etc. The rocky islets on the N. side of the entrance from the Euxine to the Bosporus were regularly called Κυάνεαι simply (without νῆσοι or πέτραι, Her. 4.85). L's πετρῶν has long been recognised as a gloss. But Wieseler's change

of πελαγέων into σπιλάδων is also erroneous.

L's accent, πελάγεων , points to the truth,—as similar small hints in that MS. have been found to do elsewhere also (cp. O. C. 1113 n.). The correction, πελάγει , is so easy that it may well have occurred to others; but I have not met with it. It removes the difficulty (insuperable, to my mind) of παρά with the genitive here. Those who read κυανεᾶν σπιλάδων, or κυανέων πελαγέων, are forced to take παρά as=‘extending from the dark rocks (etc.) are the coasts.’ But such a use is wholly unparalleled. As to 1123, see n. there. In Pind. P. 1. 75 ἀρέομαι | πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν=‘from Salamis’ (i.e., by celebrating it). In Aristoph. Ach. 68 the Ravenna has ἐτρυχόμεσθα παρὰ Καΰστρίων | πεδίων ὁδοιπλανοῦντες, while other MSS. have διὰ (also with gen. plur.); but there παρὰ Καΰστριον | πεδίον (Dindorf) is certain. In Pind. P. 3. 60 γνόντα τὸ πὰρ ποδός, ‘having learned one's nearest business’ (cp. Pind. P. 10. 63 ), παρά has its normal sense,—‘that which begins from one's foot,’=which is directly before one in one's path. The corruption of πελάγει into πελαγέων naturally followed that of Κυανεᾶν into κυανέων.

ἀκταὶ Βοσπόριαι , sc. εἰσί (cp. 948 n.). The Κυάνεαι are at the point where the coast of the Bosporus joins the western coast of the Euxine. The city Salmydessus stood just S. of the promontory of Thynias, about 60 miles N.W. of the entrance of the Bosporus, near the modern Midjeh. The name Salmydessus was given also to the tract of coast extending S. of the town.—After Θρῃκῶν a cretic has been lost (=-τον γονάν in 980). Boeckh supplies it with ἄξενος , which is at least simple and fitting. Cp. Aesch. PV 726 τραχεῖα πόντου Σαλμυδησσία γνάθος | ἐχθρόξενος ναύταισι, μητρυιὰ νεῶν . Schütz, referring to the schol. on 969, πέλαγος δέ ἐστι δυσχείμερον περὶ Θρᾴκην, proposes δύσχιμος (‘dangerous’), a word used by Aesch. and Eur. , though not by Soph. But the want of a verb is somewhat awkward. Can the missing word be κλῄζεται ? (Cp. O. T. 1451 n.: and for the sing., below, 1133.) Ships often grounded on the shallows ( τέναγος) which stretched from Salmydessus into the Euxine. The Thracians had set up slabs (στῆλαι), marking off the coast into allotments for wrecking purposes. Before this was done, there had been much bloodshed between rival wreckers (Xen. Anab. 7.5.13).—The MS. † ἠδ’ cannot be right. A short syll. is required (=the last syll. of ἔχοντες in 980). In my first ed. I adopted ἰδ’ , the conjecture of Triclinius. Prof. Tyrrell remarks (Class. Review vol. 11. p. 141) that ἰδέ is not elsewhere elided in classical poetry. As ἠδέ could be elided, that may be accidental. Still, it should be noted along with the other facts,—that ἰδέ occurs nowhere else in tragedy, and that the hiatus after Βοσπόριαι must be excused, as in epic verse, by the ictus before caesura (Introd. to Homer p. 194): cp. Il. 14.175 ἀλειψαμένη, ἰδὲ χαίτας | πεξαμένη . On the whole, I now prefer to leave ἠδ’ , with an obelus. Either Βοσπόριαι καὶ ὁ or Βοσπόριαί θ’ ὅ τε would be possible.

ἀγχίπολις Ἄρης . This reading (L's) agrees metrically with the antistrophe (981 ἀρχαιογόνων), if we suppose the 2nd and 3rd syllables of ἀγχίπολις to represent a resolved long syllable. Such a resolution is rare, but not unexampled: see on 797 f.. We could avoid it by reading, with Gleditsch, ἀκταὶ Βοσπόριαι, ἵν’ ὁ Θρῃκῶν ἄξενος | Σαλμυδησσὸς Ἄρης τ’ ἀγχίπολις. But (a) this does not explain how ἠδ’ came into the MSS.: and ( b) it is evidently better to say, ‘where Ares saw,’ than, ‘where Salmydessus and Ares saw.’ The reference to the god's cruel joy would thus lose much of its force. If, on the other hand, ἀγχίπτολις is read, then Ἄρης has α—, and in 981 we must suppose the loss of a syllable after ἀρχαιογόνων . But such a loss is very improbable: that verse appears sound. Neither ἄγχουρος nor ἀρχέπολις has any likelihood.—Ares is ‘neighbour to the city’ of Salmydessus because his home is in Thrace ( Il. 13.301, etc.). There may also be a special reference to some local shrine. ‘He saw the wound dealt’: i.e., it was a deed such as he loves to see.

Φινεΐδαις , dat. of interest, with τυφλωθέν.

ἀρατόν , accursed, bringing a curse on the authors of the wound. In his dramatic treatment of the story, Soph. had connected this blinding of the sons with the punishment of blindness which the gods afterwards inflicted on Phineus himself (schol. Apoll. Rhod. 2. 178).

ἕλκος τυφλωθέν . τυφλοῦν ἕλκος=to inflict a blinding wound. Cp. Ai. 55 ἔκειρε... φόνον , he dealt death by hewing down. Eur. Suppl. 1205 τρώσῃς φόνον , (wherever) thou dealest the death-wound. Verg. Aen. 11. 82 caeso sparsuros sanguine flammam (caedere sanguinem = to shed blood by cutting). In such pregnant idioms the special verb=a general verb plus the partic. of the special verb used instrumentally: e.g., τυφλῶ ἕλκος = ποιῶ ἕλκος τυφλῶν.

ἐξ here=ὑπό of the direct agent: for, as κερκίδων indicates, she did it with her own hand. Distinguish ἐκ Διονύσου in 957 (by his order).

ἀλαὸν … κύκλοις , sightless for the orbs, i.e., making them sightless. Cp. Pind. O. 1. 26 καθαροῦ λέβητος, the purifying cauldron.

ἀλαστόροισιν . The form ἀλάστορος was used by Aesch. as =ἀλάστωρ (fr. 87 πρευμενὴσἀ., fr. 286 μέγαν ἀ.). The form may have been generally current, since Pherecydes used Ζεὺς Ἀλάστορος instead of Ζ. Ἀλάστωρ (Cramer Anecd. 1. 62). The blind orbs are ἀλάστοροι, ‘avenging spirits,’ in the sense that they mutely appeal to the gods for vengeance.—For the παρήχησις ( O. T. 371) Wolff cp. Il. 6.201 κὰπ πεδίον τὸ Ἀλήϊον οἶος ἀλᾶτο .

ἀραχθέντων . So ἀράσσω is used of Oed. striking his eyes with the περόναι ( O. T. 1276).

ὑπό with dat. of the instrument, as in the epic ὑπὸ χερσὶ δαμῆναι, O. T. 202 ὑπὸ σῷ φθίσον κεραυνῷ .

κερκίδων , poet. plur. for sing., like βωμοί, σκῆπτρα, etc.—The κερκίς (κρέκω, to strike the web in weaving) was ‘like a large netting needle’ (Rich s.v. radius), ‘rather longer than the breadth of the web.’ It was used for two purposes. (1) As a rod with which to strike the threads of the woof, in order to condense them. The flat blade called σπάθη was a later substitute. In the modern loom this is done by the moveable bar called the ‘batten.’ (2) As a shuttle, i.e., an instrument for shooting the threads of the woof (κρόκη) from one side of the loom to the other, between the threads of the warp (στήμων). In the East weavers sometimes use a long reed for both these purposes. Eur. Tro. 198 οὐκ Ἰδαίοις ἱστοῖς κερκίδα | δινεύουσ’ ἐξαλλάξω (‘no more,

at the loom, will I send the shuttle flying across the warp’).—Cp. Eur. Hec. 1170, where the women blind Polymestor with their brooches (πόρπαι = περόναι); and O. T. 1269 n.

κατά in tmesis, as O. T. 1198, O. C. 1689, etc.— κατατακόμενοι alludes to their imprisonment; cp. schol. on 980 τυφλώσασα τοὺς Κλεοπάτρας παῖδας ἐν τάφῳ καθεῖρξεν.

μέλεοι μελέαν : cp. 156: O. T. 479.

ματρὸς ἔχοντες ἀν. γονάν , having their origin from an unhappily-married mother. The epithet is made to agree with γονάν , not with ματρός , as in 793, νεῖκος‐ἀνδρῶν ξύναιμον: i.e., μητρὸσγονή, mother-source, forms one notion. For γονὰς ἔχειν cp. O. C. 972 ὃς οὔτε βλάστας πω γενεθλίους πατρός, | οὐ μητρὸς εἶχον . For ἀνύμφ. , cp. Tr. 144 ἄλοχοι μέλεαι...καὶ δύσνυμφοι : Hipp. 757 κακονυμφοτάταν ὄνασιν (‘to bless her with a marriage most unblest’). O. T. 1214 ἄγαμον γάμον .—The comma should not be placed after ματρός , which is inseparable from the following phrase. Without ματρός, the words ἔχοντες ἀνύμφευτον γονάν could still mean, ‘born from one who was unhappily married,’ but would be harsh and obscure. The word πάθαν refers to their own fate. Then ματρὸς … γονάν supplements this by indicating that they mourn for their mother's fate also.

σπέρμα , acc. of respect; Od. 15.267 ἐξ Ἰθάκης γένος εἰμί.

ἀρχαιογ. : Ai. 202 γενεᾶς χθονίων ἀπ’ Ἐρεχθειδῶν.

ἄντασ’ Ἐρ. , attained unto them, could trace her lineage to them,—her mother Oreithyia being the daughter of Erechtheus. Remark that the acc. σπέρμα mitigates the boldness of ἄντασε, and also suggests its primary meaning—viz., that the genealogy is carried back to a point at which it meets the Erechtheid line. Cp. Her. 2.143 (Hecataeus) γενεηλογν/σαντί τε ἑωυτὸν καὶ ἀναδήσαντι τὴν πατριὴν ἐς ἑκκαιδέκατον θεόν .

τηλεπόροις , merely poet. for ‘distant’; lit., to which it is a far journey. Not (I think), ‘spacious’ (i.e. ‘ in which one can go far’): nor, ‘extending far into the mountains.’ So in Ai. 564, τηλωπὸς οἰχνεῖ, the adj. is merely ‘distant’; it has not its full sense, ‘seen afar.’ Boreas carried Oreithyia to a region of Thrace which the poets called ‘Sarpêdon’ (we see the association with ἁρπάζω)—not, seemingly, the promontory called ‘Sarpedonion,’ on the S. coast, but in the wilds of Haemus. It is of this that Soph. is thinking here: cp. fr. 575 ἡμεῖς δ’ ἐν ἄντροις, ἔνθα Σαρπηδὼν πέτρα. That verse is from the Τυμπανισταί, in which the story of Cleopatra was noticed (cp. on 966); and she was probably the speaker. Oreithyia bore two sons to Boreas, Calais and Zetes; and, besides Cleopatra, another daughter, Chionè.

ἅμιππος , swift as horses. Cp. O. T. 466 ἀελλάδων | ἵππων , ‘storm-swift steeds.’ In prose ἅμιπποι=foot-soldiers who, in the Boeotian army, were sometimes told off to run alongside the cavalry (Thuc. 5.57, Xen. Hellen. 7.5.23). Cp. Theogn. 715 ὠκύτερος δ’ εἴησθα πόδας ταχεῶν Ἁρπυιῶν | καὶ παίδων Βορέω.

ὀρθόποδος , steep. ὀρθόπους, ‘erect upon one's feet,’ seems to be here merely a poet. equiv. (suggested by metrical convenience) for ὄρθιος. This was the more natural, since πούς, κνήμη, etc., were so oft. said of mountains. In O. T. 866 ὑψίποδες , said of the eternal νόμοι, differs from ὀρθόπους here by implying movement (‘of sublime range’). We need not, then, explain ὀρθόπους as=ὄρθιος τοῖς τοῦ ἀναβαίνοντος ποσί.

κἀπ’ ἐκείνᾳ … ἔσχον = καὶ ἐκείνῃ ἔπεσχον, from the intrans. ἐπέχω as=‘to direct (one's course) against a person,’ ‘to attack him’: cp. Od. 19.71 τί μοι ὦδ’ ἐπέχεις κεκοτηότι θυμῷ ; (‘assail me’): ib. 22. 75 ἐπ’ αὐτῷ πάντες ἔχωμεν (‘let us all have at him’).—Others understand, ‘extended even to her,’ ‘reached her,’ which mars the personification.— μακραίωνες : Aesch. Eum. 172 παλαιγενεῖς... Μοίρας.

988-1114

Fifth ἐπεισόδιον. Teiresias denounces the divine wrath. Creon, terror-stricken, hastens to bury Polyneices and to release Antigone.

ἄνακτες : cp. 843, 940.— δύ’ ἐξ ἑνὸς βλ., two seeing by the agency of one (ἐκ as in 973): cp. O. C. 33 τῆς ὑπέρ τ’ ἐμοῦ | αὑτῆς θ’ ὁρώσης . The words would usu. mean, ‘two seeing, where only one saw formerly.’ Cp. O. C. 1764, where the regular sense of πράσσειν καλῶς, ‘to fare well,’ has not hindered the poet from using it as=‘to do rightly.’

αὕτη κ. , the blind have this kind of walking appointed for them,— viz., walking with the help of a guide. αὕτη κ. = αὕτη ἡ κ. ( O. C. 471): κέλευθος is not predicate (like παῦλαν in O. C. 88), as if the sense were, ‘this (αὕτη for τοῦτο) is walking for the blind,—viz. to walk with a guide.’ We do not need the art. ἡ with ἐκ, because πέλει =not simply ‘is,’ but, ‘is possible.’ Cp. O. C. 848 οὔκουν ποτ’ ἐκ (by means of) τούτοιν γε μὴ σκήπτροιν ἔτι | ὁδοιπορήσῃς (the blind Oed.'s daughters).

τί δ’ ἔστιν : cp. 20 n.

οὔκουν … γε : cp. 321 n.

δῑ ὀρθῆς , sc. ὁδοῦ. A rare instance of the fem. adj. in such a phrase with διά, which regularly takes a subst. (742 n.); but it follows the analogy of the freq. phrases with ἐκ, as ἐξ εὐθείας: Tr. 395 ἐκ ταχείας , 727 ἐξ ἑκουσίας: Thuc. 3.92 ἐκ καινῆς : Her. 5.116 ἐκ νέης , 6. 85 ἐξ ὑστέρης, 8. 6 ἐκ τῆς ἀντίης, etc.

ἐναυκλήρεις is right. The seer hopes, indeed, that the mischief can still be repaired (1025 ff.), but he thinks that Creon has made a disastrous mistake (1015). He could hardly say, then, δῑ ὀρθῆς...ναυκληρεῖς . Creon has only just become king; but he had formerly been regent for some years (cp. O. T. 1418). Aesch. has the verb in this fig. sense ( Aesch. Th. 652 ). Cp. 167 ὤρθου : O. T. 104 ἀπευθύνειν : ib. 923 κυβερνήτην .

πεπονθὼς ὀνήσιμα, ἔχω μαρτυρεῖν (πεπονθέναι). We could say, μαρτυρῶ σοι εὐεργετήσαντι (like σύνοιδα): but less well, μαρτυρῶ εὖ πεπονθώς. Cp. O. C. 1128 εἰδὼς δ’ ἀμύνω τοῖσδε τοῖς λόγοις τάδε , with like emphasis on the partic., ‘I have felt these benefits which I thus requite.’

φρόνει βεβώς , bethink thee that thou art placed. O. C. 1358 ἐν πόνῳ | ... βεβηκώς , n. Il. 10.173 νῦν γὰρ δὴ πάντεσσιν ἐπὶ ξυροῦ ἵσταται ἀκμῆς, | ἢ μάλα λυγρὸς ὄλεθρος Ἀχαιοῖς, ἠὲ βιῶναι . H.F. 630 ὦδ’ ἔβητ’ ἐπὶ ξυροῦ; Helen. 897 ἐπ’ ἀκμῆς εἰμὶ κατθανόντ’ ἰδεῖν.

τύχης , interpreting ξυροῦ, adds dignity and solemnity to the phrase.

ὡς , exclamatory. El. 1112 τί δ’ ἔστιν, ὦ ξέν’; ὥς μ’ ὑπέρχεται φόβος .

θᾶκον . Paus. (9. 16. 1) saw at Thebes, near the temple of Zeus Ammon, οἰωνοσκοπεῖον...Τειρεσίου καλούμενον. Near it was a shrine of Τύχη.

λιμήν , a place to which the birds came: schol. ὅρμος καὶ ἕδρα, ὅπου πάντα τὰ ὄρνεα προσέρχονται. Cp. Eur. Or. 1077 καὶ δῶμα πατρὸς καὶ μέγας πλούτου λιμήν (‘receptacle’): Aesch. applied the same phrase to Persia ( Aesch. Pers. 250). Omens were taken, not only from the flight of birds, but also from the positions in which they settled,—from their sounds, —and from their mode of feeding. The λιμήν means a place to which they were lured by food, so that their συνεδρίαι (Aesch. PV 492), and the other signs, could be noted. Cp. H. A. 9. 1 ὅθεν καὶ τὰς διεδρίας καὶ τὰς συνεδρίας οἱ μάντεις λαμβάνουσι, δίεδρα μὲν τὰ πολέμια τιθέντες, σύνεδρα δὲ τὰ εἰρηνοῦντα πρὸς ἄλληλα.—Herwerden conjectures οὐρανοῦ λιμήν, understanding a space of sky chosen as a field of augural observation (templum).

κακῷ , ill-omened (O.C. 1433).

οἴστρῳ , ‘gad-fly,’ then fig., ‘rage,’ a word which often suggests divine stimulation: as Heracles asks, ποῦ δ’ οἶστρος ἡμᾶς ἔλαβε; ( H. F. 1144).

κλάζοντας , since φθόγγον ὀρνίθων = ὄρνιθας φθεγγομένους: Il. 17.755 τῶν δ’ ὥστε ψαρῶν νέφος ἔρχεται ἠὲ κολοιῶν | οὖλον κεκλήγοντες : Od. 12.181 ἀλλ’ ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν (sc. ἡ νηῦς ) ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας, | ῥίμφα διώκοντες.

βεβαρβαρωμένῳ . To the seer, the voices of birds were usually εὔσημοι (1021). Conversely the sound of a strange language is likened to the twittering of birds: Her. 2.57 ἕως δὲ ἐβαρβάριζε (ἡ γυνή), ὄρνιθος τρόπον ἐδόκεέ σφι φθέγγεσθαι. Aesch. used χελιδονίζειν as= βαρβαρίζειν (fr. 440, cp. Aesch. Ag. 1050).

ἐν χηλαῖσιν , ‘with’ them: 764 n. — φοναῖς , an adverbial dat. of manner, murderously.’ Cp. O. C. 1318 εὔχεται κατασκαφῇ | Καπανεὺς τὸ Θήβης ἄστυ δῃώσειν πυρί, where the first dat. is one of manner, like φοναῖς here, and the second (instrumental) answers to ἐν χηλαῖσιν. Elsewhere the Attic use of the subst. is limited to the phrase ἐν φοναῖς (696 n.). The Schol. has φοναῖς· ταῖς αἱμακτικαῖς: as though it were from an adj. φονός. So some recent edd. take it. Such an adj. could have come from the rt. φεν, but there is no trace of it.

The feuds and friendships of birds ( ἔχθραι τε καὶ στέργηθρα Aesch. PV 492 ) were among the signs noted by augurs. In this case there was a vague omen of bloodshed (φοναῖς), but no clear sign. The seer now sought further light by another mode of divination.

ἐμπύρων , sc. ἱερῶν, burnt-sacrifice; where the omen was given by the manner in which the fire dealt with the offering. Eur. Suppl. 155 μάντεις δ’ ἐπῆλθες, ἐμπύρων τ’ εἶδες φλόγα ; Phoen. 954 ἐμπύρῳ χρῆται τέχνῃ. I. T. 16 εἰς ἔμπυρ’ ἦλθε (had recourse to). This was ἡ δῑ ἐμπύρων μαντεία, ignispicium, while ἱεροσκοπία= haruspicina, divination by inspecting entrails. In , Aesch. P. V. 488—499, vv. 488—492 concern ὀρνιθομαντεία : vv. 493—5, ἱεροσκοπία: and vv. 496—9, ἔμπυρα.

ἐγευόμην , proceeded to make trial of: Tr. 1101 μόχθων μυρίων ἐγευσάμην : Plat. Rep. 475C παντὸς μαθήματος γεύεσθαι .

παμφλέκτοισι , fully kindled. Fuel was placed around the offerings on the altar, and ignited at several points. The epithet marks that the failure of the rite was not due to any negligence.— θυμάτων . The offering consisted of thighbones cut from a sheep (or ox), with some of the flesh adhering to them, and wrapped round with a double covering of fat. On the top of these thigh-bones were laid parts of the victim's intestines (σπλάγχνα), including the gall-bladder (χολή).

Ἥφαιστος = πῦρ (n. on 120 ff.). It was a good sign if the fire at once seized on the offering, and blazed up in clear flames (Apoll. Rhod. 1. 436 σέλας... | πάντοσε λαμπόμενον θυέων ἄπο). It was

a bad sign, if the fire was smothered in smoke, or played feebly around the flesh without consuming it. See Eur. Phoen. 1255 μάντεις δὲ μῆλ’ ἔσφαζον, ἐμπύρους τ’ ἀκμὰς | ῥήξεις τ’ ἐνώμων, ὑγρότητ’ ἐναντίαν, | ἄκραν τε λαμπάδ’, ἣ δυοῖν ὅρους ἔχει, | vίκης τε σῆμα καὶ τὸ τῶν ἡσσωμένων : the seers ‘were watching for points of flame, or for breaks in it,—such flickering as portends evil’; i.e., they were watching to see whether it would blaze up or die down. The ἄκρα λαμπάς is prob. the highest point of the fire, which, if towards the right side, meant victory; if towards the left, defeat. So Statius, Theb. 10. 599, where Teiresias offers ἔμπυρα, and his daughter reports the signs to him (as the παῖς does here): Sanguineos flammarum apices (=ἐμπύρους ἀκμάς) geminumque per aras | Ignem, et clara tamen mediae fastigia lucis (=ἄκραν λαμπάδα) | Orta docet: tunc in speciem serpentis inanem | Ancipiti gyro volvi (‘as if creeping on its way without an aim, the fire played timidly around the offering’). In Seneca Oed. 307 Teiresias asks, Quid flamma? Larga iamne comprendit dapes? | Utrumne clarus ignis et nitidus stetit, | Rectusque purum verticem caelo tulit, | An latera circum serpit incertus viae, | Et fluctuante turbidus fumo labat?

The fat wrapped about the thigh-bones ought to have caught fire, when the flesh on the bones would have been burned, and the bones themselves calcined. But here there was no flame; the kindled fuel lay in smouldering embers (σποδός). The heat caused a fatty moisture to exude from the covering of the thigh-bones. Trickling forth on the embers, this moisture emitted smoke, and sputtered as it threw particles of the fat upwards. The gall-bladder, too, which lay on the top of the thighbones, instead of catching fire, was gradually inflated by the heat, till it burst, scattering the gall into the air. And now the melting of the fat which covered the thigh-bones had gone so far that it was no longer a covering, but merely a liquid that was streaming off them, while they themselves were left naked and intact. So utterly had the gods refused the offering.

μυδῶσα : cp. 410: O. T. 1278 φόνου μυδώσας σταγόνας.

κηκὶς μηρίων , a moisture exuding from them. For μηρία see on 1011. Cp. Aesch. Cho. 268 ἐν κηκῖδι πισσήρει φλογός , pitchy ooze of flame, i.e., the funeral-fire of pine-wood from which pitch oozes. We might perh. join μηρίων ἐτήκετο, ‘was distilled from them’: but the other constr. is simpler, and τήκεσθαί τινος is not found elsewhere.

ἐτήκετο here=exuded: it goes with ἐπὶ σποδῷ (the embers of the fuel placed around the offering).

ἀνέπτυε , as particles of the fat crackled and were tossed upward on contact with the smouldering fire.

χολαί . Arist. always uses the sing. χολή for the gall-bladder. In Plat. Tim. 82E χολάς =‘kinds of bile,’ the χολῆς εἴδη of 83 C. Here there was a metrical motive (διεσπείροντο) for the plur., which denotes not merely the gallbladder, but also the gall dispersed from it. The gall-bladder, and the lobe of the liver, afforded omens, by colour and form, in ἱεροσκοπία (1005 n.): Aesch. PV 495 χολῆς λοβοῦ τε ποικίλην εὐμορφίαν : cp. Eur. El. 827 ff. But here, in ἔμπυρα, the χολή was simply a part of the burnt-offering,—added to the μηρία, because otherwise associated with divination. Cp. the unknown poet in Clemens Strom.p. 851 (it is vain to think that the gods rejoice) ὀστῶν ἀσάρκων καὶ χολῆς πυρουμένης. So, too, Menander ap. Athen. 146 E οἱ δὲ τὴν ὀσφὺν ἄκραν | καὶ τὴν χολὴν ὀστᾶ τ’ ἄβρωτα τοῖς θεοῖς | ἐπιθέντες αὐτοὶ τἄλλα καταπίνουσ’ ἀεί.

καταρρυεῖς , running down, dripping, with the fat which was melting off them: Schol. καταρρεόμενοι, καθυγραινόμενοι. This use of the adj. is parallel with a frequent use of the verb, as Eur. Tro. 15 θεῶν ἀνάκτορα | φόνῳ καταρρεῖ : Il. 8.65 ῥέε δ’ αἴματι γαῖα : Eur. Bacch. 142 ῥεῖ δὲ γάλακτι πέδον , etc.—καταρρυεῖς could also mean, ‘slipping down’; but it does not appear that the μηροί were displaced; they were merely bared.

μηροί … μηρίων in 1008,—thighbones, with some flesh on them. μηρός is the ordinary word for ‘thigh.’ μηρία was the sacrificial word, denoting thighbones, with so much flesh as the sacrificer chose to leave upon them. The tendency to give the gods more bone than meat is noticed by the poets quoted on v. 1010 (ὀστῶν ἀσάρκων—ὀστᾶ ἄβρωτα), and by Hes. Th. 556(where men offer ὀστέα λευκά to the gods),— as it is implied in the story there told, of Prometheus giving the worst parts of the ox to Zeus, and keeping the best for men. Since the bone was an essential part of the offering, μηρία cannot be merely, ‘slices cut from the thighs.’ In the Homeric phrase, κατὰ πίονα μηρία καίειν, the word means, like μηροί here, thigh-bones wrapped in fat, the κνίσῃ... κῶλα συγκαλυπτά of Aesch. PV 496. In Od. 3.456 ἐκ μηρία τάμνον | πάντα κατὰ μοῖραν , the phrase is equiv. to the μηροὺς ἐξέταμον of the Il.(1. 460 etc.); i.e., μηρία includes the bones. Only one ox is there in question, but πάντα=‘completely.’ The ηομ. μῆρα = μηρία ( Il. 1.464).

καλυπτῆς =‘which had been wrapped round them’; cp. Il. 21.321 τόσσην οἱ ἄσιν καθύπερθε καλύψω , ‘so thick a covering of silt will I lay on him.’ This is better than to make the adj. active, ‘covering,’ like μεμπτός, ‘blaming’ ( Tr. 446: cp. O. T. 969 n.).

πιμελῆς (πίων), prop., soft fat (adeps), as dist. from στέαρ, stiff fat, tallow (sebum). The fat was laid in a double layer round the μηρία: Il. 1.460 μηρούς τ’ ἐξέταμον κατά τε κνίσῃ ἐκάλυψαν, | δίπτυχα ποιήσαντες . So human bones are wrapped δίπλακι δημῷ, Il. 23.243.— ἐξέκειντο , lay outside of, i.e., had been bared of, the fat.

τοιαῦτα , adverbially with φθίνοντα: cp. 848 οἵα n.

ὀργίων μαντεύματα , ‘oracles derived from rites,’ —the predictions which he could have made if the rites had given him a sign. They gave none; and so his hopes of reading the future came to nought ( φθίνοντα : cp. O. T. 906 φθίνοντα... | θέσφατα ). Cp. Tr. 765 (where Heracles offers burnt sacrifice) ὅπως δὲ σεμνῶν ὀργίων ἐδαίετο | φλὸξ αἱματηρά.

ἀσήμων , not giving the φλογωπὰ σήματα ( Aesch. PV 498) which burnt offerings can yield. Such signs might be good or evil, according to the aspects of the fire (cp. 1007 n.). But here the fire had refused to burn at all. Like the birds, these rites also had left him without any definite sign—though with a strengthened presentiment of evil.

ἡγεμών . Cp. Statius Theb. 10. 603: the daughter of Teiresias describes the omens to him, patriasque illuminat umbras.

ἐκ , of cause, as O. C. 620 ἐκ σμικροῦ λόγου . Cp. 957, 973.

φρενός , counsel, as 993.

νοσεῖ , i.e., has incurred a μίασμα: cp. 1141 .

βωμοί , the public altars of the gods, usu. raised on a base (κρηπίς) with steps (cp. 854, O. T. 182).

ἐσχάραι , portable braziers, used in private houses either for sacrifice to household deities (esp. Ἑστία), or for purposes of cooking. Harpocration s.v. quotes Ammonius of Lamprae (an Attic writer of the 1st cent. A.D. , who left a treatise Περὶ βωμῶν καὶ θυσιῶν):—ἐσχάραν φησὶ καλεῖσθαι τὴν μὴ ἔχουσαν ὕψος,...ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ γῆς ίδρυμένην. It stood on four legs, instead of having a pedestal like the βωμός (Ross Inscrr. 3. 52 ἐσχάραν τετράποδον). It was used in sacrifice to the ἥρωες, who, not being θεοί, had no claim to βωμοί: Pollux 1. 8 ἐσχάρα δ’ ἰδικῶς δοκεῖ ὠνομάσθαι, ἐφ’ ἧς τοῖς ἥρωσιν ἀποθύομεν.

παντελεῖς , in their full tale, ‘one and all.’ So ὁλόκληροι or ὁλοσχερεῖς could be used, where the notion was that of a total to which no unit was lacking.—Not, ‘receiving ἱερὰ τέλεια’; nor, ‘serving for all rites’ (τέλη).

πλήρεις (εἰσίν) are defiled, ὑπ’ οἰων. κ. κυνῶν , by birds and dogs, βορᾶς τοῦ...Οἰδ. γόνου , with their food, (torn) from the son of Oed. This sense of πλήρης belongs also to πλέως and μεστός, but esp. to ἀνάπλεως, as to ἀναπίμπλημι. The fig. sense of πλήρεις might here allow us to take ὑπό with βορᾶς, but it goes more naturally with the agents. For the gen. γόνου , describing the source or material of the βορά, cp. Aesch. Ag. 1220 κρεῶν...οἰκείας βορᾶς , food supplied by their own flesh (οἰκείας instead of οἰκείων: cp. above, 793). δυσμόρου , adverbially with πεπτῶτος , instead of δυσμόρως: cp. 823 λυγροτάταν ὀλέσθαι, n. —Two other constructions are possible. (1) τοῦ … γόνου in appos. with βορᾶς : ‘their food,—viz., the son’: cp. 1040 βορὰν | φέρειν νιν. But this seems forced, when the reference is to dispersed morsels of his flesh. (2) τοῦ … γόνου as gen. absol., ‘as,’ or ‘since,’ he has fallen. Such a gen, absol., however, ought here to express, not, ‘as he has fallen,’ but, ‘as he has been left unburied.’

κᾆτ’ , ‘and then,’ here=‘and so.’ It usually means, ‘and after that,’ i.e., ‘and nevertheless’ ( O. C. 418).

θυστάδας , accompanying sacrifice: Aesch. Theb. 269 Ἑλληνικὸν νόμισμα θυστάδος βοῆς . Cp. Il. 9.499 καὶ μὲν τοὺς (the gods) θυέεσσι καὶ εὐχωλῇς ἀγανῇσιν | λοιβῇ τε κνίσῃ τε παρατρωπῶσ’ ἄνθρωποι | λισσόμενοι.

ὅρνι^ς , as Il. 24.219; El. 149; H. F. 72, fr. 637: Ar. Av. 168 (v.l. τίς ὄρνις οὗτος, a quotation from tragedy: v.l. τίς οὗτος ὄρνις;). But ὄρνι—ς (Eur. Bacch. 1364, Aristoph. Av. 833, etc.) is said to have been normal in Attic. —The ruggedness of the rhythm gives a certain impressive slowness, perhaps purposed. When an iambic verse has no caesura in the 3rd or in the 4th foot, it almost always has the ‘quasi-caesura’ (elision) after the 3rd foot (as if εὐσήμους were εὐφημοῦσ’). For other exceptions, cp. Ai. 1091 Μενέλαε, μὴ γνώμας ὑποστήσας σοφάς : Ph. 101, Ph. 1064, Ph. 1369: Aesch. Pers. 509 Θρῄκην περάσαντες μόγις πολλῷ πόνῳ.

εὐσήμους : cp. on 1002.

βεβρῶτες , as if πάντες ὄρνιθες σιγῶσι had preceded. Cp. Her. 1.87 ὡς ὥρα πάντα μὲν ἄνδρα σβεννύντα τὸ πῦρ, δυναμένους δὲ οὐκέτι καταλαβεῖν.

ἀνδροφθόρου . ἀνδρόφθορον αἷμα = ἀνδρὸς ἐφθαρμένου αἷμα: cp. Ph. 208 αὐδὰ τρυσάνωρ : O. C. 711, n. on αὔχημα εὔιππον.

ἐπεί , instead of ἐπάν, with subjunct.: O. C. 1225. The subject to ἁμάρτῃ (ἀνήρ, or τις) is quickly supplied by the next clause.

ἄνολβος , of folly, as Ai. 1156: so δύσποτμος, O. T. 888.

ἀκεῖται . Il. 13.115 ἀλλ’ ἀκεώμεθα θᾶσσον· ἀκεσταί τοι φρένες ἐσθλῶν.

ἀκίνητος : cp. O. T. 336 ἄτεγκτος . Plat. Tim. 51E τὸ μὲν ἀεὶ μετὰ ἀληθοῦς λόγου, τὸ δὲ ἄλογον· καὶ τὸ μὲν ἀκίνητον πειθοῖ, τὸ δὲ μεταπειστόν . Il. 15.203 ἤ τι μεταστρέψεις; στρεπταὶ μέν τε φρένες ἐσθλῶν .

αὐθαδία (poet. for αὐθάδεια), self-will, incurs the reproach of σκαιότης (for ὀφλισκάνει cp. 470). As δεξιός is a quick-witted man, of flexible and receptive mind, so σκαιός is one whose mental clumsiness makes him unapt to learn. σκαιότης, ‘ineptitude,’ is often associated with ignorance and with inaccessibility to new ideas. Cp. Plat. Rep. 411E; one who omits to cultivate his mind acts βίᾳ...καὶ ἀγριότητι, ὥσπερ θηρίον..., καὶ ἐν ἀμαθίᾳ καὶ σκαιότητι μετὰ ἀρρυθμίας τε καὶ ἀχαριστίας ζῇ. Lys. or. 10 § 15 ἡγοῦμαι...τοῦτον...οὕτω σκαιὸν εἷναι ὥστε οὐ δύνασθαι μαθεῖν τὰ λεγόμενα . Aristoph. Vesp. 1183 ὦ σκαιὲ κἀπαίδευτε . So here σκαιότης expresses a stupidity that is deaf to remonstrance.

εἶκε τῷ θανόντι , ‘make a concession to the dead,’ i.e., give him the burial rites which are his due. It is not as if he were a living foe, and prowess ( ἀλκή) could be shown by resisting his claim. The words τῷ θανόντι have been groundlessly suspected (see cr. n.).

κέντει , stab. Cp. the scene in the Iliad where the Greeks prick Hector's corpse with their swords; Il. 22.371 οὐδ’ ἄρα οἵ τις ἀνουτητί γε παρέστη : and ib. 24. 421. For κεντεῖν of cowardly or treacherous wounding, cp. Ai. 1244 ἡμᾶς ἢ κακοῖς βαλεῖτέ που | ἢ σὺν δόλῳ κεντήσεθ’ οἱ λελειμμένοι.

ἐπικτανεῖν , ‘slay anew.’ In comp. with verbs of killing, ἐπί usu.= either ‘in addition’ ( O. C. 1733 ἐπενά<*>οιξον , n.), or ‘over’ a grave, etc., as usu. <*>πισφάττειν: but cp. 1288: Laert. Diog. 2. 17§ 135 (Menedemus) Βίωνος...ἐπιμελῶς κατατρέχοντος τῶν μάντεων νεκροὺς αὐτὸς ἐπισφάττειν ἔλεγε. Cp. Soph. Ph. 946 ἐναίρων νεκρόν.

εὖ φρονήσας , having conceived kindly thoughts; a very rare use of the aor. part. in this sense, instead of εὖ φρονῶν. The aor. part. of φρονέω usu. means, (1) ‘having come to a sound mind,’ O. T. 649, and so Isocr. or. 8. § 141, εὖ φρονήσαντας : (2) ‘having formed a project,’ as Her. 7.145: (3) in the phrase τὠυτὸ (or τὰ αὐτὰ) φρονήσαντες, ‘having come to an agreement,’ Her. 1.60, 5. 72.

μανθάνειν δ ': for the elision (ἐπισυναλοιφή) see O. T. 29 n.: and cp. above, 350.

εἰ … λέγοι : for the optative in the γνώμη, see 666 n. With ἥδιστον we supply ἐστί, as in O. T. 315.

ὥστε = ὡς : O.C. 343.— σκοποῦ , sc. τοξεύουσι: the gen. as with στοχάζομαι: so Il. 4.100 ὀΐστευσον Μενελάου : 14. 402 Αἴαντος δὲ πρῶτος ἀκόντισε. Cp. 241.

κοὐδὲ μαντικῆς κ.τ.λ.: not even by seer-craft do ye leave me unattempted: in your plots against me ye resort even to seer-craft. Two points in this phrase are notable. (1) ἄπρακτος =‘not worked,’ in the sense of, ‘not plotted against.’ πράσσειν oft.=‘to intrigue’; and ‘to intrigue against one’ might be expressed by πράσσειππερί τινος, or ἐπί τινι, though ἐπιβουλεύο τινί is the usu. phrase. But, while ἐπιβουλεύομαι had a personal pass. use (to be plotted against’), we could not say πράσσονται, ‘they are the objects of an intrigue.’ ἄπρακτος is therefore bolder than its prose equivalent, ἀνεπιβούλευτος. Still, for poetry, it seems possible. (2) μαντικῆς . Such a gen., joined to a verbal adj. with α privative, more often denotes the agent, answering to a gen. with ὑπό after a pass. verb, or to the subject of an act. verb: cp. 847: Tr. 685 ἀκτῖνος...ἄθικτον (untouched by the ray). Here, the instrument, μαντική, is, in fact, personified as the agent: i.e., μαντικῆς does not correspond to the instrum. dat. in καὶ μαντικῇ πράσσετε περὶ ἐμοῦ, but to the nom. in καὶ μαντικὴ πράσσει περὶ ἐμοῦ ὑμῖν (ye have even seer-craft practising on me). An easier reading would be μαντικῇ . The instrumental dat. is often retained with the negative verbal; as Plat. Symp. 219E χρήμασι...μᾶλλον ἄτρωτος ἢ σιδήρῳ : fr. com. anon. 52 ἀνεπιβουλεύτου φθόνῳ. But poetical usage seems to warrant μαντικῆς.—The conjecture ἄπρατος (see Appendix) would forestall the taunt which now forms the climax, ἐξημπόλημαι.

τῶν δ’ ὑπαὶ γένους , ‘by the tribe of those men.’—the μάντεις implied in μαντικῆς. Creon, though he addresses Teiresias, is speaking as much to the Chorus as to him. If we read τῶν (without δ’ ), as relative, it would naturally

refer to ὑμῖν : it could hardly refer to μαντικῆς . The conjecture of Semitelos, μαντικοῖς , would then be attractive. But such a substitute for μάντεσι would be very strange. And, if we keep L's τῶν δ’ , the scornful demonstrative sufficiently interprets the reference to μάντεις.

ὑπαί in trimeters, as El. 711: Aesch. Ag. 892, 944, Eum. 417.

γένους : cp. 1055.—For other views of the passage, see Appendix.

ἐξημπόλημαι . Creon means: ‘The Thebans have bribed Teiresias to frighten me. He has taken their money. In return, he is to deliver me into their hands. I am like a piece of merchandise which has been sold for export, and put on board the buyer's ship.’ Cp. 1063. Her. 1.1 ἐξεμπολημένων (Ion.) σφι σχεδὸν πάντων, when they had sold off almost everything.—Neither ἐμφορτίζομαι nor ἐκφορτίζομαι occurs elsewhere, except that an old glossary (cited by Dind.) gives ἐξεφορτίσατο, exoneravit (‘unladed’). In later Greek we find ἐμφορτοῦσθαι ναῦν, ἔμφορτος, and ἐκφορτοῦν (both act. and midd.). Here, ἐμπεφόρτισμαι , the reading of the first hand in L, marks the completion of the sale by the delivery of the goods. The Schol. quotes Callimachus (fr. 529), ἐποιήσαντό με φόρτον.—The correction in L, ἐκπεφόρτισμαι , is far inferior. It would mean, ‘unladed (as a cargo) from a ship’: not, ‘made into a cargo,’ nor, ‘exported as a cargo.’—In Tr. 537 there is a like association of ἐμπόλημα and φόρτος (though the passage is not otherwise similar). Cp. Shaks. Com. Err. 3. 1. 72 ‘It would make a man mad as a buck, to be so bought and sold.’

τἀπὸ Σάρδεων ἤλεκτρον : electron, or silver-gold, from the goldmines of Tmolus in Lydia, the range s. of Sardis. Croesus dedicated at Delphi a lion of refined gold (χρυσὸς ἄπεφθος), standing on a pedestal formed by 117 half-plinths, or ingots, of gold,—four being of refined gold, and the rest of this electron, or ‘white gold’ (λευκὸς χρυσός); Her. 1.50. The celebrity of this ἀνάθημα in Greece helps to explain the poet's phrase. Stein on Her.l.c. shows that the ratio of silver to gold in electron was about 3 to 7. Pliny, who makes the ratio only 1 to 4, describes electron both as a natural blend of metals, and as an artificial product (fit et cura, … addito argento, Her. 33.80).— Paus. 5. 12§ 7 distinguishes the two senses of ἤλεκτρον, (1) silver-gold, (2) amber. The latter is the ἤλεκτρον of Herodotus (3. 115), and of Od. 15.460, where a Phoenician brings a golden ὅρμος, —μετὰ δ’ ἠλέκτροισιν ἔερτο (‘strung with amber beads’).

τἀπὸ is a certain correction of L's τὰ προ (cr. n.): in class. Greek ἤλεκτρον is always neut., as it is in Paus. also.

Ἰνδικὸν χρυσόν : Her. 3.94 speaks of the Ἰνδοί as sending Dareius an annual tribute of 360 talents in gold dust (ψῆγμα).

οἱ Ζηνὸς αἰετοί : Il. 24.310 ὅς τε σοὶ αὐτῷ | φίλτατος οἰωνῶν, καί εὑ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον . Pind. P. 4. 4(the Delphian priestess) χρυσέων Διὸς αἰητῶν πάρεδρος (the golden eagles on the ὀμφαλός). Hor. Carm. 4. 4. 1 ministrum fulminis alitem.

οὐδ’ ὥς , not even (I say) in that case,—repeating the supposition, οὐδ’ εἰ θέλουσ’. Cp. Il. 9.379 ff. οὐδ’ εἴ μοι δεκάκις τε καὶ εἰκοσάκις τόσα δοίη, | ... οὐδέ κεν ὣς ἔτι θυμὸν ἐμὸν πείσεῑ Ἀγαμέμνων . Od. 22.61 ff. οὐδ’ εἴ μοι πατρώϊα πάντ’ ἀποδοῖτε | ...οὐδέ κεν ὣς ἔτι χεῖρας ἐμὰς λήξαιμι φόνοιο.—Attic prose, too, used καὶ ὥς, ‘even in that case’ (Thuc. 1.44), οὐδ’ ὥς (id. 1. 132), etc.— παρήσω. οὐ μή, with the 2nd pers. fut. ind., prohibits; but with the 1st or 3rd pers. it can be used in emphatic denial, though the aor. subjunct. is more usual: El. 1052 οὔ σοι μὴ μεθέψομαί ποτε : see n. on O. C. 177. There is no reason, then, for suspecting the text (see cr. n.).

θεοὺς μιαίνειν . Teiresias had said that the altars were defiled (1016). Creon replies that he will not yield, even if birds fly with the carrion up to the very throne of Zeus;—‘for no mortal can pollute the gods.’ Campbell takes this to be an utterance of scepticism, like οὐκ ἔφα τις | θεοὺς βροτῶν ἀξιοῦσθαι μέλειν (Aesch. Ag. 369),—anticipating the Epicurean conception of gods who are neither pleased nor angered by men.

This view seems to do some injustice to the poet's dramatic psychology. I read the words quite differently. The most orthodox Greek piety held that ‘no mortal could pollute the gods.’ See, for example, H. F. 1232. Heracles, having recovered sanity after slaying his children, has covered his face, to hide it from the holy light of the sun. Theseus —who is a type of normal εὐσέβεια— makes him uncover, saying,—τί δ’; οὐ μιαίνεις θνητὸς ὢν τὰ τῶν θεῶν. The sungod cannot be polluted by a mortal. The idea of religious μίασμα was that a mortal had contracted some impurity which disqualified him for communion with the gods. The tainting of an altar cut off such communion by bringing uncleanness to the very place where men sought to be cleansed. Creon excitedly imagines a seemingly worse profanation, and then excuses his apparent impiety by a general maxim which all would admit:—‘no man can pollute the gods.’

‘The sky-throne of Zeus is still more sacred than his altar on earth: if defilement cannot reach him there, much less here.’ The sophism is of the kind with which an honest but stubborn and wrongheaded man might seek to quiet his conscience. Creon reveres Zeus (304): he feels for the majesty of the gods, and refuses to believe that they can honour the wicked (284 ff.). But his religious sense is temporarily confused by his anger.

πολλά , adv.,=‘very,’ with adj.: O. C. 1514 n.

καλῶς , = εὐπρεπῶς, in a bad sense: Eur. Hipp. 505 τᾀσχρὰ δ’ ἢν λέγῃς καλῶς : Thuc. 5.89 μετ’ ὀνομάτων καλῶν . So Eur. Hec. 1191 τἄδικ’ εὖ λέγειν : cp. O. C. 807.

ἆρ’ οἶδεν κ.τ.λ. Instead of being angered by Creon's bitter words, Teiresias is communing with the mournful thought which they suggest—the thought of human folly. His sorrowful exclamation here is like his πάντες γὰρ οὐ φρονεῖτ’ in the scene with Oedipus ( O. T. 328).

τί χρῆμα ; Cp. Eur. Hec. 754 (Hecuba having said, ἱκετεύω,) ΑΓ. τί χρῆμα μαστεύουσα; So oft. in questions, as Ai. 228, Ph. 1231.

πάγκοινον , a sneer at the generality of the seer's exordium. What aphorism is this to be? But the seer's thought has a terribly definite point, as Creon is soon to feel (1066).

κτημάτων : cp. 684.

ὅσῳπερ with superl., as O. C. 743 n. By μὴ φρονεῖν Creon hints that the seer's cleverness has outrun his prudence (1046).

νόσου : cp. 732: πλήρης , 1017.

In ἀντειπεῖν κακῶς, ἀντί qualifies the whole phrase: i.e., it means, ‘to revile in return,’ ἀντιλοιδορεῖν, as ἀντιδρᾶν κακῶς ( O. C. 1191)= ἀνταδικεῖν .

καὶ μήν , ‘and verily,’ meaning here, ‘and yet,’—the adversative force arising from the contrast between Creon's profession and his practice. Cp. 221.— λέγεις , sc. κακῶς τὸν μάντιν.—For the metre, cp. 44, 502.

γένος : 1035. Cp. Eur. I. A. 520 τὸ μαντικὸν πᾶν σπέρμα φιλότιμον κακόν . Helen. 755 (of μαντική ), βίου γὰρ ἄλλως δέλεαρ ηὑρέθη τόδε, | κοὐδεὶς ἐπλούτησ’ ἐμπύροισιν ἀργὸς ὤν,—i.e., the seer's client is never enriched (though the seer himself is).

τὸ δ’ ἐκ τυράννων . The text is sound. Instead of saying, ‘the race of tyrants’ (i.e., all the tyrants who exist), he says, with more rhetorical force, ‘the race bred of tyrants,’ i.e., the tyrants whose progenitors have also been tyrants. Thus ἐκ expresses that the love of ‘base gain’ is hereditary. For τύραννος in the bad sense, see O. T. 873 n.

αἰσχροκέρδειαν : not in the literal sense in which Creon imputed it to his servants (313), but in this, that Creon secures an unworthy personal triumph by trampling on religion and silencing just remonstrance (505 ff.). Cp. Ai. 1349 μὴ χαῖρ’, Ἀτρείδη, κέρδεσιν τοῖς μὴ καλοῖς .

ἆρ’ οἶσθα λέγων ταγοὺς ὄντας ἃ ἂν λέγῃς; knowest thou that whatever it pleases thee to say is said of men who are rulers? λέγω τινά τι=to say something of him. ἃ ἂν λέγῃς is a scornful euphemism, implying that he indulges in random abuse. ταγούς : only here in Soph. : oft. in Aesch. (in Aesch. P. V. 96Zeus is ὁ νέος ταγὸς μακάρων); once in Eur. , I. A. 269 (Adrastus). Here the word is not specially=στρατηγός (8), but simply =βασιλεύς.

ἐξ ἐμοῦ : cp. O. T. 1221 ἀνέπνευσα ...ἐκ σέθεν.

ἔχεις σώσας , merely=σέσωκας (cp. 22). The rare position of ἔχεις might suggest the prose sense (‘thou hast saved, and keepest’); but that position occurs where ἔχω is merely the auxiliary (794; Ai. 22 ἔχει περάνας ).

τἀκίνητα διὰ φρενῶν , = τὰ διὰ φρενῶν ἀκίνητα, those secrets in my soul which ought to be let alone. Cp. O. C. 1526 ἃ δ’ ἐξάγιστα μηδὲ κινεῖται λόγῳ , n. For the place of the adv. διὰ φρενῶν, cp. 659 n.: for διά, 639 n.: Aesch. Th. 593 βαθεῖαν ἄλοκα διὰ φρενὸς καρπούμενος.

κίνει : a word used esp. of sacrilege: Her. 6.134 κινήσοντά τι τῶν ἀκινήτων (in a temple): Thuc. 4.98 ὕδωρ...κινῆσαι (to profane, by secular use, water reserved for sacrifices).

μόνον δέ , sc. κίνει.

ἐπὶ κέρδεσιν , i.e., with a view to receiving money from the Thebans for persuading me to bury Polyneices. So Oed. ( O. T. 388) calls the seer, δόλιον ἀγύρτην, ὅστις ἐν τοῖς κέρδεσιν | μόνον δέδορκε.

οὕτω γὰρ ἤδη : ‘indeed, as matters stand (ἤδη), καὶ δοκῶ (λέξειν), I think that I shall speak thus—i.e., not for gain—so far as thou art concerned.’ The seer, with grave irony, gives a new turn to Creon's phrase, μὴ ἐπὶ κέρδεσιν, and says that the admonition is superfluous. The message which he has to utter is fraught with no κέρδη—for Creon. For the plur. κέρδη in this general sense, cp. 1326. τὸ σὸν μέρος here=quantum ad te attinet: a sense quite as correct for it as the more usual quantum in te est ( O. T. 1509, O. C. 1366, Tr. 1215). For καί emphasising δοκῶ (λέξειν), cp. 726. Creon's reply (1063) refers to the covert threat: ‘say what thou wilt, thou shalt not shake my purpose.’— The choice lies between this view and that of the Scholiast, who makes the verse interrogative:—οὕτω νομίζεις, ὅτι ἐπὶ κέρδεσι λέγω; i.e., ‘what, do I seem now— on thy part—to be speaking for money?’ The points in favour of the Scholiast's interpretation are:—(a) The combination γάρ...καί (before the verb) suits an indignant question: cp. 770, Tr. 1124. (b) The tone of rising anger—which began at 1060—fitly preludes the outburst at 1064: cp. O. T. 343—350. But on the other hand:—( a) The indignation comes late, seeing that Creon has already used the same taunt four times (1036, 1047, 1055, 1059); not, indeed, in so directly personal a form, yet still openly enough. ( b) Though the seer is angered (1085), it is dramatically better to conceive him as speaking here with a stern calmness. ( c) It would be correct to say (e.g.) πέφασμαι λέγων, τὸ σὸν μέρος (‘I have been represented as speaking..., so far as you could create such a belief’): but hardly, δοκῶ τὸ σὸν μέρος, as merely=δοκῶ σοί.— On the whole, then, the first view is best. —Others, which may be rejected, are:— (1) ‘I think that I shall speak for your good.’ But, if we are thus to supply ἐπὶ κέρδεσιν, and not οὐκ ἐπὶ κέρδεσιν, the verse must be interrogative. (2) ‘So far as you are concerned, I do not expect to speak for my own profit’; i.e., I shall receive no thanks from you. (3) ‘Do you really think that I shall find any satisfaction in speaking?’—i.e., it will be only pain for you, without advantage for me.

ἴσθι ὡς μὴ ἐμπ. , rest assured that thou art not to trade (1037) on my resolve; i.e., to make profit out of it (from the Thebans) by persuading me to surrender it. ὡς (which might have been absent) adds emphasis by marking the point of view at which he is to place himself. In such phrases it is more often added to a partic. in the accus., the object of the imperat. verb: Ph. 253 ὡς μηδὲν εἰδότ’ ἴσθι μ’ ὧν ἀνιστορεῖς: O. T. 848 n. But cp. Her. 1.91 ἐπιστάσθω Κροῖσος ὡς ὕστερον...ἁλοὺς τῆς πεπρωμένης.

φρένα : cp. 993.

ἀλλ’ εὺ= γέ τοι : 473 n.

μη … τελῶν , that thou art not to accomplish, i.e., live through: μή is due to the imperat. κάτισθι ( O. C. 78 n.). The easy correction, ἥλιον τελεῖν , has been received by some recent edd. ( κάτισθι then has the constr. with inf., as 473 ἴσθι ...πίπτειν). It may be right. But τελῶν , if not a usual phrase, is a natural one; and it is more impressive here to say, ‘thou shalt not live through many days,’ than, ‘the sun shall not fulfil many days.’

τρόχους = δρόμους, ‘courses.’ The MS. τροχους =‘runners,’ i.e., κύκλους, wheels. The authority for this Attic distinction goes back at least to the Augustan age: see Chandler § 332 n. 1 (2nd ed.), who cites Ammonius p. 137 τροχοὶ ὀξυτόνως καὶ τρόχοι βαρυτόνως διαφέρουσι παρὰ τοῖς Ἀττικοῖς. φησὶ Τρύφων (in the Augustan age) ἐν δευτέρᾳ περὶ Ἀττικῆς προσῳδίας. τοὺς μὲν γὰρ περιφερεῖς τροχοὺς ὁμοίως ἡμῖν προφέρονται ὀξυτονοῦντες· τρόχους δὲ βαρυτόνως λέγουσι τοὺς δρόμους. This passage helps to explain why our MSS. all give τροχούς here. When Ammonius wrote (towards the end of the 4th cent. A.D. ) τρόχος, ‘course,’ was known only as an Atticism, while τροχός, ‘wheel,’ was a common word.

ἁμιλλητῆρας , racing, rapid: Eur. Or. 456 γέροντι δεῦρ’ ἁμιλλᾶται ποδί . Xen. Anab. 3.4.44 ὥρμησαν ἁμιλλᾶσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον .—The Schol. explains, τοὺς ἀλλήλους διαδεχομένους, ‘successive’; perh. taking the word to mean, ‘competitors,’ i.e., ‘vying in swiftness.’ But that does not warrant his version.

ἐν οἷσι = ἐντὸς ὧν, i.e., before they have elapsed: cp. O. C. 619 n.

τῶν σῶν … ἐκ σπλάγχνων ἕνα , a strong fig. phrase, one whose life is nourished by thine own heart's blood,—the son begotten of thee. If the ref. were to the mother, σπλάγχνα could mean ‘womb’: cp. Kaibel Epigr. 691 ζωὴ δὲ πλείων μητρὸς ἐν σπλάγχνοις ἐμή (of a babe who died just after birth). So brothers and sisters are ὁμόσπλαγχνοι (511).

νέκυν νεκρῶν : 596 n. The νεκροί are Polyneices and Antigone.— ἀντιδοὺς ἔσει , fut. perf.: cp. O. C. 816 n.

ἀνθ’ ὧν here=ἀντὶ τούτων ὅτι, ‘because’: so Plut. 434. The phrase more often means ‘wherefore’ ( O. C. 1295): cp. O. T. 264 n.

ἔχεις βαλὼν κάτω τῶν ἄνω (τινά), thou hast thrust to the grave (one) of the living. For the omission of τις after the partitive gen., cp. El. 1322 κλύω | τῶν ἔνδοθεν χωροῦντος .

Bothe, omitting τε after ψυχήν , takes the latter with τῶν ἄνω , ‘a life belonging to the upper world.’ We could then read either (a ) ἀτίμως...κατοικίσας, or (b) with Bergk, ἀτίμως τ’...κατοικίσας or κατῴκισας. But I prefer the MS. reading, because (a) τῶν ἄνω as=τῶν ἄνω τινά has a certain tone of solemnity and mystery which befits the utterance: (b) τῶν ἄνω … ψυχήν is somewhat weak: (c) the words ψυχήν τ’ … κατῴκισας , both by rhythm and by diction, naturally form one clause, —paraphrasing and interpreting the darker utterance in v. 1068.—Schütz takes ἀνθ’ ὧν as=ἀντὶ τούτων οὕς, and τῶν ἄνω as by attraction for τοὺς ἄνω: i.e., ‘on account of those persons whom, being alive, thou hast entombed.’ Kern, too, so takes ἀνθ’ ὧν, but makes τῶν ἄνω partitive (‘on account of those among the living whom’); and so, I think, it must be on any view. But the parallelism of ἔχεις μέν...ἔχεις δέ plainly requires that ἀνθ’ ὧν should apply in the same sense to both clauses. Schütz, however, has to supply it with ἔχεις δέ in the changed sense of ἀντὶ τούτων (neut.) ὅτι.—For οἱ ἄνω = οἱ ἐν φάει, cp. 890: Ph. 1348 ὦ στυγνὸς αἰών, τί μ’ ἔτι δῆτ’ ἔχεις ἄνω | βλέποντα, κοὐκ ἀφῆκας εἰς Ἅιδου μολεῖν;—Some take τῶν ἄνω as=τῶν ἄνω θεῶν: ‘one belonging to the gods above.’ This is too forced.

ἀτίμως , ruthlessly: cp. O. C. 428, El. 1181.

ἔχεις δέ = κατέχεις δέ. Since in ἔχεις μέν...ἔχεις δέ the rhetorical effect depends simply on the repetition (ἐπαναφορά), the change of sense is immaterial. — τῶν κάτωθεν θεῶν , possess. gen. with νέκυν , a corpse belonging to them. For κάτωθεν = κάτω, 521 n.

ἄμοιρον , without its due μοῖρα of burial rites: Ai. 13-7 νεκρὸν ταφῆς | ἄμοιρον. Others take τῶν

κ. θεῶν with ἄμοιρον: ‘without a portion in the gods below,’ i.e., not admitted to communion with them. But the phrase is a strange one; and the leading thought here is that the νέρτεροι are robbed of one who belongs to them.

ἀκτέριστον (1207), without offerings at the grave, κτερίσματα ( O. C. 1410): cp. 204.

ἀνόσιον , ‘unhallowed,’ sums up the state of the dead who has received no rites: cp. 545 n. Cp. Shaksp. Haml. 1. 5. 77 ‘Unhousel'd, disappointed, unanel'd’ [without sacrament—unprepared for death—without extreme unction].

ὧν , sc. τῶν νεκρῶν, suggested by νέκυν. Others make it neut., ‘such acts as these.’ It cannot refer to οἱ κάτωθεν θεοί.

βιάζονται , sc. οἱ ἄνω θεοί: because it was an offence against the pure οὐράνιοι θεοί to keep a μίασμα in their presence. Cp. O. T. 1425 τὴν γοῦν πάντα βόσκουσαν φλόγα | αἰδεῖσθ’ ἄνακτος Ἡλίου , and see n. there on 1427. The subject to βιάζονται might, indeed, be οἱ κάτωθεν θεοί, for Greek idiom is often bold in such transitions: but the verb suits a positive better than a negative wrong.

τούτων , neut., causal gen.: cp. 931 n.

λωβητῆρες , though the subject is fem.: so El. 850 ἴστωρ : Aesch. Ag. 111 χερὶ πράκτορι : ib. 664 τύχη...σωτήρ : Suppl. 1040 θέλκτορι Πειθοῖ.

ὑστεροφθόροι , destroying after (though not, here, long after) the crime. Aesch. Ag. 58 (Zeus) ὑστερόποινον | πέμπει παραβᾶσιν Ἐρινύν. Anthol. 12. 229 ὑστερόπουν ἁζόμενοι Νέμεσιν.

λοχῶσιν : El. 490 ἁ δεινοῖς κρυπτομένα λόχοις χαλκόπους Ἐρινύς.

Ἅιδου καὶ θεῶν , possess. gen.; the Erinyes are their ministers, avenging their wrongs: so oft. πατρός, μητρός, Ἐρινύες. In El. 112 the Erinyes are σεμναὶ...θεῶν παῖδες.

ληφθῆναι , inf. of result: cp. 64 ἀκούειν. The omission of ὥστε is somewhat bold, since the subject of the inf. is not that of λοχῶσιν. Cp. O. C. 385 ἐμοῦ θεοὺς | ὤραν τιν’ ἕξειν ὥστε σωθῆναί ποτε .

κατηργ. , prop., overlaid with silver (Her. 1.98); hence, fig., bribed. Cp. Pind. P. 11. 41 μισθοῖο συνέθευ παρέχειν | φωνὰν ὑπάργυρον (a word prop. said of a gilded surface, with silver below). — οὐ μακρ. χρόν. τριβή =a time for which thou wilt not have long to wait. Some, less naturally, make these words a parenthesis with ἔσται understood, and supply ταῦτα as subject to φανεῖ . Cp. Aristoph. Ran. 156 θιάσους εὐδαίμονας | ἀνδρῶν γυναικῶν .

1080-1083

The πόλεις are the cities which had furnished contingents to the Argive expedition against Thebes. These cities are stirred with passionate hatred against Creon by the tidings that burial has been refused to their fallen warriors. There is no direct allusion to the war of the Epigoni,—the expedition which the sons of the fallen chiefs led against Thebes, and in which they destroyed it. Bergk's συνταράξονται might suggest such an allusion; but the pres. συνταράσσονται is right. The reference is to the feelings which now agitate the cities. Those feelings are one day to produce the new war. Here the prophet notes them only as signs of a still distant storm. Having foretold a domestic sorrow for the father, he now foreshadows a public danger for the king.

It has been objected that the play contains no hint of burial having been denied to any one except Polyneices. This is not exactly the case: the phrase τῶν ἐχθρῶν κακά in v. 10 is such a hint. But it was unnecessary for the poet to state a fact which all his hearers would assume. Every one knew how Creon had refused burial to the Argives, and how Theseus had recovered their corpses by force of arms. In the Supplices of Eur. the Chorus consists of widows and mothers of the unburied warriors. No Athenian exploit was more famous (Her. 9.27; Isocr. Paneg. § 52, Encom. Helen. § 31, Panath. § 168; Plat. Menex. 244; [Lys. ] or. 2 §§ 4 ff.: [Dem. ] or. 60 §§ 7 ff.). The war of the Epigoni, which was included in the epic Thebais ( Paus. 9. 9§ 5), was dramatised both by Aesch. and by Soph. (Ἐπίγονοι).

Just as, in the O. C. (1410 n.), Soph. glances at the theme of his Antigone, so here he might naturally glance—however indirectly—at a later chapter of the Theban story,—whether his Epigoni already existed, or was still in the future. Dramatically, the reference is the more fitting, since the legend represented Teiresias as still living, and still zealous for Theban welfare, when the Epigoni came.—For other views of the passage, see Appendix.

ὅσων (fem.) σπαράγματα, mangled bodies belonging to them, as being the corpses of their citizens. The possessive gen. in this sense is quite justifiable, since σπαράγματα = σώματα ἐσπαραγμένα, just as πτώματα = σώματα πεπτωκότα. (It would be possible, but harsh, to make ὅσων masc., as=ἐπεὶ τοσούτων: cp. O. C. 263 n.)

L's καθήγνισαν =‘hallowed’ them, in the sense of, ‘gave burial rites to them’: cp. Eur. Or. 40 μήτηρ πυρὶ καθήγνισται δέμας (has had the funeral rite of fire): Suppl. 1211 ἵν’ αὐτῶν σώμαθ’ ἡγνίσθη πυρί. The v.l. καθήγισαν reaches the same meaning (‘buried’) by a different channel. καθαγίζω was properly ‘to devote’ or ‘dedicate’: Her. 1.86 ἀκροθίνια ...καταγιεῖν θεῶν ὅτεῳ δή . Then, fig., to devote to the gods below by the funeral fire; Anton. 14 τὸ...σῶμα τοῦ Καίσαρος ἐν ἀγορᾷ καθαγίσαι (‘solemnly burn’). Either καθήγνισαν or καθήγισαν , then, is admissible. But (apart from L's support) καθήγνισαν seems preferable on two grounds: (a) its primary sense lends force to the grim irony: (b) the funereal sense of καθαγίζω has only post-classical evidence.—Hesychius (καθαγίσω) says that Soph. used καθαγίζω, not in the sense of καθιερόω, but in that of μιαίνω:—a statement perh. founded on a misunderstanding

of καθήγισαν here. The Schol. read the latter (μετὰ ἄγους ἐκόμισαν). But the fact that L has καθήγνισαν must be set against these doubtful testimonies.—For the irony, cp. El. 1487 πρόθες | ταφεῦσιν, ὧν τόνδ’ εἰκός ἐστι τυγχάνειν (as Gorgias called vultures ἔμψυχοι τάφοι, λονγιν. π. ὕψους 3 § 2): Aesch. Th. 1020 ὑπ’ οἰωνῶν ... | ταφέντ’ ἀτίμως: Ennius Ann. 142 volturu' crudeli condebat membra sepulcro: Lucr. 5. 993 viva videns vivo sepeliri viscera busto.

ἑστιοῦχον … πόλιν , the city containing the ἑστίαι of those on whose flesh the bird has fed. The sing. is used, although several πόλεις are concerned, since the case of one city is the case of all. For the adj., cp. Aesch. Pers. 510 ἥκουσιν ἐκφυγόντες, οὐ πολλοί τινες, | ἐφ’ ἑστιοῦχον γαῖαν , ‘the land of their homes.’ Eur. Andr. 283 ἑστιοῦχον αὐλάν , the abode that contains his hearth. Here, the word serves to suggest a pollution of hearth and altar (1016). Pollution, in a ceremonial sense, could be brought by the ὀσμή, even without an actual transport of carrion. And it is only the birds that are said to carry the taint.—See Appendix on 1080 ff.

σου , ‘at thee,’ with ἀφῆκα : 1033 n.

θυμῷ , modal dat.: 620 n.— καρδίας τοξεύματα , heart-arrows, i.e., arrows for thy heart. Cp. Eur. Hec. 235 καρδίας δηκτήρια : Med. 1360 τῆς σῆς γάρ, ὡς χρῆν, καρδίας ἀνθηψάμην.—Not, arrows from my (angry) heart, like ὄμματος... τόξευμα (Aesch. Suppl. 1004).— τῶν = ὧν: cp. O. C. 747 n.

ὦ παῖ . Cp. O. T. 444 ἄπειμι τοίνυν· καὶ σύ, παῖ, κόμιζέ με .

τρέφειν : cp. 660 n.

ἡσυχωτέραν , the MS. reading, has been prudently retained by most of the recent edd. In Plat. Charm. 160A the MSS. give ὁ ἡσυχώτατος, though two lines before they give ὡς ἡσυχαίτατα. A grammarian in Bekker Anecd. 98. 19 quotes ἡσυχώτερον. In Aesch. Eum. 223 the MSS. give ἡσυχαιτέραν, and in Plat. Phileb. 24C ἡσυχαιτέρου . It is true that our MSS. have no great weight on such a point, and that, if the ω form had been the current one in later Greek, it would have been likely to oust an older form in αι . But we see that sometimes, at least, the MSS. could preserve the αι and the ω forms side by side. It seems safer, then, to suppose that the normal ω form and the irregular αι form were both in Attic use, than to assume that the αι form alone was tolerated. The dictum of Thomas Magister, (quoted by Dindorf,) p. 426 ἡσυχαίτερον· οὐχ ἡσυχώτερον, is indecisive without more evidence than we possess.

τὸν νοῦν … τῶν φρενῶν ἀμείνω ( τρέφειν) ἢ νῦν φέρει (αὐτόν). Cp. Il. 18.419 τῇς ἐν μὲν νόος ἐστὶ μετὰ φρεσίν , there is understanding in their breasts: 22. 475 ἐς φρένα θυμὸς ἀγέρθη , the soul returned to her breast. The word φρήν being thus associated with the physical seat of thought and feeling, ὁ νοῦς τῶν φρενῶν was a possible phrase. So trag. adesp. fr. 240 (when divine anger visits a man) ἐξαφαιρεῖται φρενῶν | τὸν νοῦν τὸν ἐσθλόν. (Cp. 176 n. ad fin.)

φέρει : 705 n.—If we took τῶν φρενῶν with ἀμείνω , then ἢ must be changed to ὧν , with Brunck. In so compact a clause, ἤ could not be an irregular substitute for ὧν. Nor could ἢ νῦν φέρει be an epexegesis: ‘better than his (present) mind,—(that is, better) than he now bears it.’

ἐξ ὅτου : cp. 12 n.

λευκὴν … ἐκ μελαίνης . The words could mean either: (1) ‘since this hair which clothes my head, once dark, has been white’: or (2) ‘since this hair,—once dark, now white,—has clothed my head,’ i.e., from infancy. The first is the sense intended here. There is a certain looseness of expression, since the thought is, ‘though I am old, I can recall no such case’; whereas the period actually described might be a comparatively short one. So we can say, ‘he has grown grey in the service of his country,’ meaning, ‘he has served it all his life.’

ἀμφιβάλλομαι : cp. Rhianus (the elegiac poet of Crete, c. 225 B.C.) Anthol. P. 12. 93 χαίρετε, καλοὶ παῖδες, ἐς ἀκμαίην δὲ μόλοιτε | ἥβην, καὶ λευκὴν ἀμφιέσαισθε κόμην. For the 1st pers. sing. following ἐπιστάμεσθα, see 734 n.

μὴ . We might have had the οὐ of oratio obliqua with λακεῖν, = ὅτι οὐκ ἔλακε. But here we have μή, as after πιστεύω and like verbs. So O. T. 1455 οἶδα, μήτε μ’ ἂν νόσον | μήτ’ ἄλλο πέρσαι μηδέν (n.). Cp. O. C. 656 n., 797 n. In such cases μή seems to add a certain emphasis to the statement of fact (like saying, ‘I protest that I know no instance’).

λακεῖν , infin. (instead of the more usual partic.) after ἐπιστάμεσθα: 293 n. This verb is esp. used of prophecy: cp. Tr. 822 (where τοὔπος τὸ θεοπρόπον is subject to ἔλακεν ): Aesch. Ag. 1426 (of Clytaemnestra) περίφρονα δ’ ἔλακες. The ref. is esp. to the seer's denunciation of Oedipus, and his command regarding Megareus (1303 n.).

ἔγνωκα , I have noted it=I know it well; more emphatic than οἶδα: cp. O. C. 553 n.

For τε … δέ , instead of τε...τε, cp. Tr. 285 ταῦτα γὰρ πόσις τε σὸς ἐφεῖτ’, ἐγὼ δὲ πιστὸς ὢν κείνῳ τελῶ : ib. 333 ὡς σύ θ’ οἷ θέλεις | σπεύδῃς, ἐγὼ δὲ τἄνδον ἐξαρκῆ τιθῶ . See also O. C. 367 n., 442 n.: Ph. 1312 f. Here, δέ is accentless in L, and the first hand has written τ above; but, if the genuine reading had been τε … τε , the change to τε … δέ was not likely to occur; and the antithesis makes δέ very natural. Cp. Aesch. Ag. 206 βαρεῖα μὲν κὴρ τὸ μὴ πιθέσθαι, | βαρεῖα δ’, εἰ τέκνον δατξω .

ἄτῃ πατάξαι (170 n.) θυμὸν , to smite my proud spirit with a curse. ἀντιστάντα implies that he is stationary: the image is not, then, like that in 854 (ἐς Δίκας βάθρον | προσέπεσες). Rather the ἄτη is to be conceived as sweeping down on him, like the torrent which destroys trees that resist it (712).

ἐν δεινῷ πάρα (= πάρεστιν), it is open to me, as the dreadful alternative; lit., as a thing in the region of τὸ δεινόν. For ἐν δεινῷ cp. El. 384 νῦν γὰρ ἐν καλῷ φρονεῖν ('tis opportune). Eur. Her. 971 οὐκοῦν ἔτ’ ἐστὶν ἐν καλῷ δοῦναι δίκην : I.A. 969 ἐν εὐμαρεῖ τε (sc. ἐστί ) δρᾶν: Helen. 1277 ἐν εὐσεβεῖ γοῦν νόμιμα μὴ κλέπτειν νεκρῶν ('tis a matter of piety). Here, the only peculiarity arises from the fusion of two propositions, viz. (1) πάρεστιν, and (2) ἐν δεινῷ ἐστιν. The phrase would have been clearer if ὄν had been added to ἐν δεινῷ: cp. 471 n. It may be noticed that elsewhere also Soph. uses πάρεστι and παρόν of an evil lot: Ai. 432 νῦν γὰρ πάρεστι καὶ δὶς αἰάζειν ἐμοί : El. 959 ᾗ πάρεστι μὲν στένειν... | πάρεστι δ’ ἀλγεῖν : Ph. 283 ηὕρισκον οὐδὲν πλὴν ἀνιᾶσθαι παρόν. This is a point in favour of the traditional πάρα .—Seyffert's ἓν δεινοῦ πέρα would be excellent, were it not for ἕν, which cannot be justified by the use of εἷς with superlatives ( O. C. 563 n.). Cp. [Dem. ] or. 45 § 73 δεινόν, ὦ γῆ καὶ θεοί, καὶ πέρα δεινοῦ . Wecklein conjectures ἐπὶ (for ἐν) δεινῷ: ‘by resisting, it is possible that, in addition to the difficulty (of resistance), I may incur calamity.’ But, apart from the risk of calamity, there was nothing in resistance that he could call δεινόν. There is no likelihood in conjectures which displace θυμόν, such as Nauck's (see cr. n.).

The question between L's λαβεῖν , and the Κρέον of later MSS., is not an easy one to decide. If λαβεῖν is an error, then it must be explained by the scribe's eye having wandered to v. 1094. But it has not been noticed (I think) that the argument from v. 1094 is two-edged. There, the scribe of L wrote λαβεῖν, which was afterwards corrected to λακεῖν, either by his own hand or by another. It might be held, then, that he wrote λαβεῖν, by an error of the eye, in 1094, because his archetype had λαβεῖν in 1098. The epexegetic construction of the inf. (= ὥστε λαβεῖν αὐτήν, see examples on 489 f.) may have been a stumblingblock, leading transcribers to think it a redundant gloss; when Κρέον would have been the obvious resource. Everything considered, I prefer to retain λαβεῖν.

κατώρυχος : 774 n.—κτίσον is here more than ποίησον, as it implies observance of solemn rites: cp. 1201 ff.: Aesch. Cho. 483 οὕτω γὰρ ἄν σοι δαῖτες ἔννομοι βροτῶν | κτιζοίατ '.

I read the impers. δοκεῖ : ‘and does it seem good (to you) that I should yield?’ The dat. can be understood, as in Ph. 526 ἀλλ’, εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν, and ib. 645. This correction is confirmed by Aesch. Th. 650 σὺ δ’ αὐτὸς ἤδη γνῶθι, τίνα πέμπειν δοκεῖ, where L has δοκεῖ with an accent erased over the ο,—showing that the use of the impers. verb without a dat., seeming strange, had suggested δόκει (imperat.). There, some of the later MSS. have δοκεῖς. Here, L shares the error of the rest, and has δοκεῖς —generated, doubtless, from δοκεῖ by the same misapprehension as in Aesch. l. c. The decisive objection to δοκεῖς here is that it could mean only, ‘art thou minded to yield?’ ( Aesch. Ag. 16 ὅταν δ’ ἀείδειν ἢ μινύρεσθαι δοκῶ ); not, ‘dost thou think it right that I should yield?’

παρεικαθεῖν : for the form, see on O. T. 651.

συντέμνουσι … τοὺς κ. , cut them (i.e., their careers) short, ‘cut them off.’ The compressed phrase, though not strictly correct, is natural.

ποδώκεις : cp. Il. 9.505 ἡ δ’ Ἄτη σθεναρή τε καὶ ἀρτίπος : Ai. 837 Ἐρινῦς τανύποδας (who are ταχεῖαι, ib. 843): O. T. 418 δεινόπους ἀρά.

βλάβαι , ‘harms,’ ‘mischiefs,’ with ref. to the primary sense of βλάπτω, to disable, or stop: Il. 6.39 (horses) ὄζῳ ἐνί βλαφθέντε μυρικίνῳ, ‘caught in’ a tamarisk branch: Aesch. Ag. 120 (a hare) βλαβέντα λοισθίων δρόμων, ‘stopped’ from running further. The βλάβαι θεῶν cannot, however, be properly regarded as personified beings; and therefore we should not write Βλάβαι. In Aesch. Eum. 491 εἰ κρατήσει δίκα τε καὶ βλάβα | τοῦδε μητροκτόνου , where some write Δίκα—Βλάβα, the sense is, ‘if the cause and the wrong (=the wrongful cause) of Orestes shall prevail.’

κακόφρονας : for the ο— before φρ , cp. 336 n.

μόλις μέν ( ἐξίστ.), ἐξίστ. δέ: cp. Eur. Phoen. 1421 μόλις μέν, ἐξέτεινε δ’ εἰς ἧπαρ ξίφος : Aristoph. Nub. 1363 κἀγὼ μόλις μέν, ἀλλ’ ὅμως ἠνεσχόμην.

ἐξίσταμαι καρδίας , resign my cherished resolve: Phaedr. 249 D ἐξιστάμενος...τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων σπουδασμάτων, καὶ πρὸς τῷ θείῳ γιγνόμενος. This use of καρδία was suggested by the similar use of θυμός, with which Homer associates it as the seat of desire or passion ( Il. 13.784 νῦν δ’ ἄρχ’, ὅππη σε κραδίη θυμός τε κελεύει ): thus πληροῦσα θυμόν ( Eur. Hipp. 1328)= πληροῦσα ἐπιθυμίαν.

τὸ δρᾶν , acc. of inner object, defining the concession: Ph. 1252 ἀλλ’ οὐδέ τοι σῇ χειρὶ πείθομαι τὸ δρᾶν.

δυσμαχητέον : Tr. 492 θεοῖσι δυσμαχοῦντες .

ἐπ’ ἄλλ’. τρέπε = ἄλλοις ἐπίτρεπε: Aesch. Eum. 434 ἦ κἀπ’ ἐμοὶ τρέποιτ’ ἂν αἰτίας τέλος ; (‘would ye commit the decision of the charge to me’?) This is ‘tmesis’ in the proper sense,—where the prep. determines the special sense of the verb: cp. Il. 8.108 οὕς ποτ’ ἀπ’ Αἰνείαν ἑλόμην = ἀφειλόμην .

ὡς ἔχω , i.e., forthwith: 1235: Ph. 819 δέξαι θανάσιμόν μ’ ὅπως ἔχω.

στείχοιμ’ ἄν , optat. with ἄν expressing a fixed resolve: O. T. 343 οὐκ ἂν πέρα φράσαιμι : O. C. 45 οὐχ...ἂν ἐξέλθοιμ’ ἔτι.

ἴτ’ ἴτ’ . The rhythm given by the tribrach suits this agitated utterance. εἶ’ would be no improvement (see cr. n.).

οἵ τ’ ὄντες οἵ τ’ ἀπόντες , one and all. This was doubtless a familiar phrase: cp. 40 n. El. 305 τὰς οὔσας τέ μοι | καὶ τὰς ἀπούσας ἐλπίδας διέφθορεν . Plaut. Trin. 360 comedit quod fuit quod non fuit.

ἀξίνας . In Xen. Anab. 1.5.12 the ἀξίνη is used by one who is ξύλα σχίζων. Here it has usually been supposed that the ἀξῖναι were to cut wood for the burning of the corpse. But no regular πυρά was made; the remains of the corpse were burned with νεοσπάδες θαλλοί, branches freshly plucked from the trees in the plain (1201). On the other hand, some implement was needed to raise the τύμβος ὀρθόκρανος of earth (1203). It seems, then, as if Soph. referred to some kind of axe which could serve like the γενῄς of v. 249 (n.). No tool was used to break open Antigone's tomb; the stones were dragged away (1216).

ἐπόψιον , pass., looked-upon, beheld, from here: hence= φανερόν (schol.), ‘in view.’ Cp. O. C. 1600 εἰς προσόψιον | πάγον , the hill which was in view. —As Creon speaks, he points with his hand in a direction to the left of the spectators. The region meant is the furthest and highest part of the Theban plain (1197), where the body of Polyneices still lay. In the πάγοι adjacent to it was the rocky tomb of Antigone (774 n.).—Hermann assumed the loss of some vv. after 1110, in which Creon described the ἐπόψιος τόπος,—explaining that he would first bury Polyneices, and then free Antigone. But what need was there for this, when he was himself to accompany his servants? Besides, his men, like all the other Thebans, might be supposed to know the place meant; and the Chorus had already said what was to be done there. Equally baseless is Bergk's theory that vv. 1111 —1114 are an interpolation, designed to fill a gap in the original text. See the notes on them. Dindorf agrees with Bergk only so far as to suspect vv. 1111, 1112.

ἐγὼ δ’ . The sense is not: ‘do you go and bury Polyneices, while I release Antigone.’ Creon takes part in both acts (1196 ff.). But at this moment his foremost thought is of saving Antigone. If she dies, his son must die (1066). Therefore, while he glances at the burial-rites by telling his men to bring axes, he describes his own part by his most urgent task,—the release.— ἐπιστράφη , prop., ‘turned round’; as a person faces about, Eur. Alc. 187 καὶ πολλὰ θάλαμον ἐξιοῦσ’ ἐπεστράφη. τῇδ’ , this way, in this direction ( O. C. 1547).

αὐτός τ’ ἔδησα κ.τ.λ. = ὥσπερ αὐτὸς ἔδησα, οὕτω καὶ αὐτὸς παρὼν ἐκλύσομαι. The co-ordination (parataxis) of clauses by τε...καί, as elsewhere by μέν... δέ, is peculiarly Greek. Cp. O. T. 419 βλέποντα νῦν μὲν ὄρθ’, ἔπειτα δὲ σκότον (=dark then, though now thou hast sight): O. C. 853 οὔτε νῦν καλὰ | δρᾷς, οὔτε πρόσθεν εἰργάσω (=thou art not doing well now, as neither didst thou formerly): ib. 1202 (οὐ καλὸν) αὐτὸν μὲν εὖ | πάσχειν, παθόντα δ’ οὐκ ἐπίστασθαι τίνειν (while receiving benefits, to be incapable of requiting them). Here, the rhetorical effect of the idiom is to place the two acts in bolder contrast. The middle ἐκλύομαι and the active ἐκλύω ( Aesch. PV 326) are equivalent in poetry. They do not differ as λύω (said of the captor) from λύομαι (of the ransomer).—Nauck and others take the words figuratively; ‘As I have made the tangle, I will unravel it’ (cp. 40 n.). This is surely wrong. See on v. 1111.

δέδοικα μὴ … ᾖ : cp. O. T. 747 δεινῶς ἀθυμῶ μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ . In both these places, ‘I fear lest...’ means ‘I shrewdly suspect that...,’ and δέδοικα μή might therefore have been followed by pres. indic., which expresses a fear that something is now going on (cp. 278 n. Aristoph. Nub. 493 δέδοικα...μὴ πληγῶν δέει ). τοὺς καθεστ. νόμους , the laws established by the gods,—the θεῶν νόμιμα of 454 f.

σῴζοντα … τὸν βίον τελεῖν = σῴζειν ἕως ἂν τελευτῄσης: but the turn of phrase chosen unconsciously foreshadows Antigone's fate.

1115-1154

This ὑπόρχημα, or ‘dance-song,’ takes the place of a fifth stasimon. The Chorus hopes that Creon may be in time to save Antigone, and that his sin against the dead may be expiated without disaster. Hence this strain, full of gladness, invoking the healing presence (1144) of the bright and joyous god who protects Thebes. The substitution of a ὑπόρχημα for a stasimon is used with a like dramatic purpose in other plays. (1) O. T. 1086—1109: the Chorus hopes that Oedipus may prove to be of Theban birth. (2) Ai. 693—717, a joyous invocation of Pan, the Chorus believing that Ajax has indeed repented. (3) Tr. 633—662: the Chorus joyously anticipates the return of Heracles. In each of these cases the beginning of the end is near.

1st strophe 1115—1125=1st antistr. 1126—1136: 2nd str. 1137—1145=2nd antistr. 1146—1154. See Metrical Analysis.

πολυώνυμε , i.e., worshipped by various special titles in different places. The reference of the epithet to local rituals is well brought out by Theocr. 15. 109 (aphrodite) πολυώνυμε καὶ πολύναε . Most of the greater deities are called πολυώνυμοι by the poets; but the word is peculiarly suitable to Dionysus, owing to the manner in which his cult was interwoven with other cults; thus in relation to Demeter he was Ἴακχος; to the Muses, Μελπόμενος; to Hades, Ζαγρεύς. Dionysus was distinctively πολυειδὴς καὶ πολύμορφος ( Plut. Mor. 389 c). Upwards of sixty titles given to him can be enumerated (see Preller, Griech. Mythol.).

Καδμείας . We should not write Καδμεΐας, and διλόφοιο in 1126, with Dindorf. Nor is it necessary to place νύμφας after ἄγαλμα, with Nauck. See Metrical Analysis.

ἄγαλμα , glory: Aesch. Ag. 207 τέκνον...δόμων ἄγαλμα.

νύμφας , bride, young wife. Semele, daughter of Cadmus and Harmonia, was beloved by Zeus, and was ensnared by Hera into praying him that he would come to her in the same guise as to Hera. He came to her. therefore, armed with his thunderbolts, and amid lightning, which destroyed her. She was great with child, and Zeus saved her son, Dionysus. βαρυβρεμέτα (for the υ—, cp. 336 n.) alludes to this story. Ov. Met. 3. 298(Jupiter, bound by his own oath, grants Semele's prayer): ergo maestissimus altum | Aethera conscendit, nutuque sequentia traxit | Nubila; quis nimbos immixtaque fulgura ventis | Addidit, et tonitrus, et inevitabile fulmen.

The traditional reading, Ἰταλίαν , may be supported by these considerations. (1) Southern Italy, the seat of so many Greek colonies, was preeminently associated with the cultivation of the vine; and Sophocles has himself used the name which expresses that fact: Triptolemus fr. 538 Οἰνωτρία τε πᾶσα καὶ Τυρσηνικὸς | κόλπος Αιγυστική τε γῆ σε δέξεται. (2) The opening words of the ode, Καδμείας νύμφας ἄγαλμα, claim Thebes as the birth-place of Dionysus. Though Italy, then, is mentioned before Eleusis, Parnassus and Euboea, that precedence has not the effect of representing Italy as the head-quarters of the Dionysiac worship. Rather the mention of Italy just after Thebes serves to exalt the Theban god by marking the wide range of his power. And this reference to a distant country well suits the immediately following παγκοίνοις, expressing that Eleusis receives votaries from every part of the Greek world. (3) Athenian colonists founded Thurii, on the site of Sybaris, in 444—3 B.C.,—only two or three years before the probable date of this play. Thus, just at this time, the Athenian mind had been turned towards Southern Italy, and the allusion would strike a chord of sympathy in the audience. It may be worth remembering that the poet himself would naturally have felt a more than common interest in the new home of his friend Herodotus.

The only worthy rival of Ἰταλίαν is the conjecture Ἰκαρίαν . This was the name of a deme in the N. E. of Attica, picturesquely situated in an upland valley bounded on the N. by the mountainchain (‘Aphorismo’) which shuts in the plain of Marathon, and on the s. by Pentelicus. The site—at a place called ‘Dionyso’—is proved by local inscriptions, found by members of the American School in 1888. The story was that, when Dionysus first entered Attica, he was received at Icaria by Icarius, whom he taught to make wine. Icaria was associated with the earliest celebrations of the rural Dionysia (thus the ἀσκωλιασμός, or dancing on greased wine-skins, was said to have been introduced by Icarius himself), and with the infancy of Attic drama in both kinds,—as it was also the birth-place of Thespis , and, at a later time, of the comic poet Magnes. Inscriptions and other remains show that, in the 5th century B.C., it was the seat of an active Dionysiac worship, with dramatic performances. These discoveries remind us that Sophocles might well have called Icaria κλυτάν. Prof. C. Merriam A. further points out that, in literature, the legend of Icaria is often associated with that of Eleusis (American School at Athens: Seventh Annual Report, 1887—88, p. 96). To Statius, Theb. 12. 619(Icarii Celeique domus), may be added Apollod. 3. 14. 7, Lucian De Salt. 39 f., Nonnus 27. 283 ff., etc. But these facts remain: (1) Ἰταλίαν is also suitable, and is in all the MSS.: (2) it widens the range ascribed to the god's power: (3) a corruption of Ἰκαρίαν into Ἰταλίαν is not one to which the letters would readily lend themselves, and would have been the less likely to occur because Icaria was familiarly associated with Dionysus.

παγκοίνοις , welcoming guests from every quarter to the Eleusinian Mysteries: schol. ἐν οἶς πάντες συνάγονται διὰ τὰς πανηγύρεις. Cp. El. 138 ἐξ Ἀΐδα παγκοίνου λίμνας . Pind. O. 6. 63

πάγκοινον ἐς χώραν (Olympia).

κόλποις , recesses, i.e., the sheltered Thriasian plain, enclosed by hills,—Aegaleos on the E. , Cithaeron on the N., and the Kerāta range on N. W. and W. Cp. Aristoph. Ran. 373 ἐς τοὺς εὐανθεῖς κόλπους λειμώνων (where, though the scene is in Hades, the allusion is to the Initiated visiting Eleusis). So Pind. O. 9. 87 Νεμέας... κατὰ κόλπον : ib. 14. 23 κόλποις παρ’ εὐδόξου Πίσας . This is better than to refer κόλποις to the Bay of Eleusis, whose shores are the λαμπάδες ἀκταί of O. C. 1049 (where see nn.).

Ἐλευσι^νίας : on the ι^ , see n. on this v. in Analysis. μετρ.Δηοῦς = Δήμητρος: Hom. h. Dem. 47 πότνια Δηώ . In this connection the proper name of the god was Ἴακχος (1152), a young deity who was represented as the son of Cora (or of Demeter); cp. O. C. 682 n. Indeed, Arrian expressly distinguishes the Eleusinian Iacchus from the Theban Dionysus, An. 2. 16 § 3: Ἀθηναῖοι Διόνυσον τὸν Διὸς καὶ Κόρης σέβουσιν...καὶ ὁ Ἴακχος ὁ μυστικὸς (the chant of the initiated) τούτῳ τῷ Διονύσῳ, οὐχὶ τῷ Θηβαίῳ, ἐπᾴδεται. But, as Welcker remarks ( Götterl. 2, p. 543), Dionysus was the general name, often substituted for the special title.

Βακχεῦ . The omission of ὦ before this word, and the addition of ὁ before ματρόπολιν , are conjectural (cr. n.). But they are certainly right; for the antistrophic words (1133) answering to Βακχεῦ—Θήβαν, are χλωρά τ’ ἀκτὰ | πολυστάφυλος πέμπει, which are unquestionably sound.

ματρόπολιν : cp. O. C. 707 n. Thebes is the ‘mother-city’ of the Bacchants, as being the city of Semele and the native place of Dionysus. It was the place at which the Dionysiac cult, coming from Asia Minor by way of Thrace, first established itself in Greece Proper. From Thebes the cult was propagated to Delphi, and associated with the worship of Apollo. See Eur. Bacch. 306. Cp. O. T. 210 n., Tr. 510.

L has ὑγρὸν … ῥέεθρον , not ὑγρῶν … ῥεέθρων , which was merely a conjecture of Triclinius. And the use of παρά with the genit. is not only unexampled (see n. on 966), but here, at least, wholly unintelligible. Metre requires, however, that a long syllable (answering to the first syll. of Θηβαΐας in 1135) should precede ἀγρίου. I obtain this by adding τ’ after ῥεῖθρον . The second syll. of ὑγρόν , as the last of a verse, is common. παρά with acc. is correct in ref. to a river, the notion being that his abode extends along its banks: cp. El. 184 ὁ παρὰ τὸν Ἀχέροντα θεὸς ἀνάσσων : Xen. An. 4. 3§ 1 τοῦ πεδίου τοῦ παρὰ τὸν Κεντρίτην ποταμόν : ib. § 6 ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν . For the position of τ’ , cp. O. T. 258 n., O. C. 33 n. The sing. ῥεῖθρον is not less suitable than the plur.: cp. Aesch. Pers. 497, P. V. 790.For the epithet ὑγρόν , cp. Od. 4.458 (Proteus) γίγνετο δ’ ὑγρὸν ὕδωρ, ‘running water.’

Ἰσμηνοῦ : see n. on 103 f.

ἐπὶ σπορᾷ δρ. , ‘over the seed of the dragon,’ i.e., on the ground where Cadmus sowed the dragon's teeth, from which the ancestors of the Cadmeans sprang. Hence the Thebans are called σπαρτοὶ ἄνδρες (O.C. 1534 n.). The place where Cadmus sowed the teeth was shown on the s. side of Thebes, near the Ἤλεκτραι πύλαι (Paus. 9.10.1).—Not, ‘(ruling) over the dragon's seed,’ as if σπορᾷ meant the Thebans.

The general sense is: ‘and on the heights of Parnassus thou holdest thy revels by night amid the Corycian Nymphs, who brandish torches.’

διλόφου πέτρας : i.e., two πέτραι, each with a λόφος (cp. 146 δικρατεῖς λόγχας, n.): two peaks, one of which stands on each side of a great recess in the steep cliffs above Delphi,—the cliffs called Φαιδριάδες, ‘gleaming,’ from their splendour in the morning sunshine (cp. Eur. Ion 86 ff.). These cliffs are about 2000 ft. above sealevel. The easternmost of the two peaks was called Ὑάμπεια: the westernmost, perh. Ναυπλία, but this is doubtful. Neither of them is the summit of Parnassus. That summit, called Αυκώρεια, rises high above them (about 8000 ft. above the sea). Misunderstanding δικόρυφος, the Roman poets gave a wrong impression by their ‘biceps Parnassus,’ which Lucan brings out when he says (5. 72) ‘Parnassus gemino petit aethera colle.’

By ὑπὲρ διλόφου πέτρας Soph. means the high ground above these two lower péaks, but below the summit of Parnassus. This high ground is what Eur. calls the δικόρυφος πλάξ (Eur. Bacch. 307). It consists of uplands stretching about 16 miles westward from the summit, and affording pasturage, interspersed with firs, and with pieces of arable land: wheat, oats, and barley are now grown there. These uplands were the scene of a Dionysiac τριετηρίς, a torch-festival, held every second year, at the end of winter, by women from the surrounding districts; even Attic women went to it (Paus. 10.4.3). Cp. Lucan 5. 73 Mons Phoebo Bromioque sacer, cui numine misto | Delphica Thebanae referunt trieteria Bacchae: and Macrobius Sat. 1. 18. 3. Here, however, the poet alludes, not to the human festival, but to supernatural revels.

λιγνύς is a smoky flame, such as a resinous pine-torch gives; στέροψ finely expresses the lurid and fitful glare flashing through the smoke.

ὄπωπε , gnomic perf., ‘hath (oft) seen thee’: i.e., when the Nymphs brandish their torches, Dionysus is in the midst of them. It was the popular belief that dancing fires could be seen by night on Parnassus, when the god was holding his revels. Eur. Ion 716 (Parnassus) ἵνα Βάκχιος ἀμφιπύρους ἀνέχων πεύκας | λαιψηρὰ πηδᾷ νυκτιπόλοις ἅμα σὺν Βάκχαις: cp. ib. 1125: Bacch. 306: Phoen. 226: I. T. 1243.

Κωρύκιαι … Νύμφαι : Nymphs who haunt the Κωρύκιον ἄντρον and its neighbourhood. The name is from κώρυκος, ‘a wallet’ (and so, a hollow thing), and was given also to a cave on the Cilician coast. The Parnassian cave is near the top of a hill on the high table-land which lies at the base of the central cone,— about 7 miles N. E. of Delphi, and as many N.W. of Aráchova. E. Itis a large stalactite cavern, consisting of an outer chamber of some 200 ft. in length, and an inner one of about 100 ft.; the greatest breadth is about 200 ft., and the greatest height, E. It 40.In 480 B.C., when the Persians were coming, many of the Delphians took refuge in it (Her. 8.36). An old place of sacrifice can still be seen in it; and an inscription found there shows that it was sacred Πανὶ καὶ νύμφαις (C. I. G. 1728). Aesch. Eum. 22 σέβω δὲ νύμφας, ἔνθα Κωρυκὶς πέτρα | κοίλη, φίλορνις, δαιμόνων ἀναστροφή .

The simple transposition, στείχουσι νύμφαι for νύμφαι στείχουσι, satisfies the metre, and is far more probable than the change of στείχουσι into στίχουσι,—a form which, though noticed by Hesychius, is not known to have been used by any Attic writer of the classical age.

Κασταλίας τε νᾶμα , sc. ὄπωπέ σε. The Κασταλία is a stream which flows from a fissure in the high cliffs above Delphi. It issues near the easternmost of the two peaks (1126 ff., n.),—that which was called Ὑάμπεια: and bounds in cataracts, down a precipitous channel, to Delphi, where its water was used for all sacred purposes. Below Delphi it joins the Pleistus (Aesch. Eum. 27). It is now called Ἅγιος Ἰωάννης. It is fitly mentioned here, since it rises on the edge of the highlands which form the scene of the revels.

καί σε Νυσαίων . And from Nysa in Euboea thou comest to visit Thebes, with thy followers who cry εὐοῖ. The Euboean Nysa was imagined near Aegae (famous for its temple of Poseidon), on the W. coast of the island, opposite Anthedon. Cp. Stephanus Byz. and Hesych. s.v. Νῦσα. That word prob. denoted a moist and fertile place: Welcker would refer it to a lost νύω from rt. νυ (νέω): Götterl. 1. 439. ‘Dionysos’ was ‘the Zeus of Nysa’ (Preller Myth. 1. 549). Legend placed a Nysa in Thrace ( Il. 6.133), Macedonia, Thessaly, Boeotia, Naxos, Caria, Lydia, Cilicia, Arabia, Aethiopia, Libya, India, and even at Parnassus. In a fragment of the Thyestes Sophocles beautifully describes a wondrous vine of Euboea, which puts forth leaves and bears fruit in the same day: fr. 235 ἔστι γάρ τις ἐναλία | Εὐβοιὶς αἷα· τῇδε βάκχειος βότρυς | ἐπ’ ἦμαρ ἕρπει, κ.τ.λ.

κισσήρεις ὄχθαι , ivy-clad hills. Usually ὄχθη =a river-bank, ὄχθος =a hill: so Ph. 726 Σπερχειοῦ...παρ’ ὄχθας, and just afterwards (729) Οἴτας ὑπὲρ ὄχθων. But the distinction is not always observed; nor need we suspect our MSS.,

for the fact was noticed in antiquity (schol. on Aratus Phaenom. 33). Thus Pind. P. 1. 64 ὄχθαις ὕπο Ταϋγέτου: Eur. Suppl. 655 Ἰσμήνιον πρὸς ὄχθον .—The κισσός was to Dionysus what the δάφνη was to Apollo. The crowning with ivy (κίσσωσις) was a regular incident of his festivals: he was called κισσεύς, κισσοκόμης, κισσοχαίτης. Cp. Alciphron Epist. 2. 3 § 10 μὰ τὸν Διόνυσον καὶ τοὺς Βακχικοὺς αὐτοῦ κισσούς. F. 3. 767 hedera est gratissima Baccho.

πολυστάφυλος : cp. Il. 2.537 Χαλκίδα τ’ Εἰρέτριάν τε πολυστάφυλόν θ’ Ἱστίαιαν . As Histiaea, afterwards Oreus, was on the N. coast, we may suppose that the Homeric epithet—here borrowed by Soph. —would have been at least equally applicable to other parts of the island.

πέμπει , agreeing with nearest subject: 830 n.

The words ἀμβρότων ἐπέων answer metrically to ναιετῶν παρ’ ὑγρόν (1123). There is no metrical reason, then, for altering the MS. ἀμβρότων, with Turnebus, to ἀβρότων. Cp. O. T. 158 ἄμβροτε Φάμα . There is no certain instance of ἄβροτος in Tragedy. Cp. Pind. P. 4. 299 ἀμβροσίων ἐπέων, ‘divine strains.’ Here the epithet suggests the mystic power of the invocation.

εὐαζόντων : see on εὔιον, 964: ‘while divine chants resound with the cry evoe’; i.e., while the bacchants escort thee on thy way to Thebes with chants of praise. The conjecture ἑπετᾶν is neat, but needless.

τὰν ἐκ πασᾶν . There is no reason, metrical or other, for suspecting the MS. reading here. See on 1146. τάν , Θήβαν, implied in Θηβαΐας: cp. 668, 1072.—For ἐκ (‘chosen out of’) cp. 164: ὑπερτάταν , proleptic; cp. Eur. I. A. 573 μείζω πόλιν αὔξει : Plat. Rep. 565C τοῦτον τρέφειν τε καὶ αὔξειν μέγαν .

κεραυνίᾳ , destroyed by the lightning of Zeus: see on 1115 f. Works of art frequently associate Dionysus with his mother. Thus a fragmentary vase-painting shows him introducing her to Olympus (Welcker, Alte Denkm. III. pl. 13). On coins she is sometimes enthroned beside him. See Baumeister, Denkm. p. 443.

ἔχεται ἐπὶ βιαίας νόσου , is captive to a violent (=a most grievous) plague. The νόσος is the divine anger which Thebes has incurred (1015). ἐπὶ νόσου seems to be like ἐπ’ εἰρήνης (‘in time of peace’ Il. 2.797), ἐπὶ σχολῆς ( Aeschin. or. 3 § 191): i.e., the prep. expresses the continuing presence of the νόσος, and the whole phrase strictly means, ‘the city is in distress, under the prevalence of a malady.’ (We could scarcely compare ἐπὶ ξύλου, and suppose a metaphor from a rack or cross; cp. n. on 308 f.) Musgrave's ὑπό (for ἐπί) is tame. For ἔχεται cp. Plat. Legg. 780B ὑπὸ πολλῆς ἀπορίας ἐχομένοις . There is only a verbal likeness to Her. 6.11 ἐπὶ ξυροῦ γὰρ ἀκμῆς ἔχεται (are poised) ἡμῖν τὰ πρήγματα.—For βιαι^ας cp. n. on 1310 δείλαι^ος. The text is sound, without Boeckh's conjectural insertion of ἀμὰ before πόλις : see on 1150.

πάνδαμος : cp. on 7.

μολεῖν : infin. for imperat.: cp. n. on 150 ff.

καθαρσίῳ : Dionysus was often invested with the attributes of the Purifier and Healer, as καθάρσιος, ἀλεξίκακος, ἀκέσιος, etc. Cp. Athen. 22 E, and 36—37. This was one aspect of the Delphian cult which associated him with Apollo.

κλιτύν ¯˘, as Tr. 271: but ¯¯, Od. 5.470 ἐς κλιτὺν ἀναβάς . Here, the last syll. of the verse being common, υ^ν stands for υ—ν.

πορθμόν , the Euripus, between Euboea and Boeotia. At Chalcis (Egripo) it is only 40 yards across.

στονόεντα refers to the noise of wind and water in the strait, with its constantly changing currents. Strabo 9. 403 περὶ δὲ τῆς παλιρροίας τοῦ Εὐρίπου τοσοῦτον μονον εἰπεῖν ἱκανόν, ὅτι ἑπτάκις μεταβάλλειν φασὶ καθ’ ἡμέραν ἑκάστην καὶ νύκτα. Livy (28. 6) explains this by the squalls from the hills. Cp. Lucan's description of the Euripus, 5. 234, Arctatus rapido fervet qua gurgite pontus.

πνειόντων , Brunck's simple correction of πνεόντων, heals the metre. The MS. reading in 1137 f. is above all reasonable suspicion; and these verses now agree with them. It is a sin against all critical method to make violent changes in 1137 f.—as Dindorf (followed by Wecklein) does—in order to keep the short syllable of πνεόντων here. Hermann's argument against πνειόντων , which has deterred editors from admitting it, was strangely weal. He said that the first syllable of the epic πνείω never occurs with ictus (i.e., in arsis); and that, if the tragic poets had used that form, they would at least not have put an ictus on the πνει. But Homer repeatedly has πνοιῇ with ictus on the 1st syll. (as first word of the verse): and as πνοιή to πνοή, so is πνείω to πνέω. It is plain, therefore, that the Homeric absence of ictus from the πνει of πνείω was purely an accident of convenience in composition, —the phrases being μένεα πνείοντες, ζεφυρίη πνείουσα, ἡδὺ μάλα πνείουσαν, πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει, etc. We need not dwell, then, on the fact which makes a second fallacy in the argument,—viz. that the ictus on πνει here is only equal to that which falls on οντ (see Anal.). Tragic lyrics teem with epic forms and phrases. ζάω was at least as familiar a word as πνέω. Yet twice in lyrics Soph. has ventured to use the epic ζώω: El. 157 οἵα Χρυσόθεμις ζώει : O.C. 1213 ζώειν. Is it, then, reasonable to suppose that the poet, requiring ¯¯¯ instead of ˘¯¯, would have hesitated to use the familiar epic form πνειόντων? Nor is this all. In Aesch. Cho. 621 the MSS. give πνέονθ’ ἁ κυνόφρων ὕπνῳ: where πνέονθ’ ἁ = σύμμετρον in the strophe (610), and the 1st syllable is (pace Hermanni) necessarily long, being that of a spondee (or trochee): Heath's correction, πνείονθ’, is therefore certain.

Other conjectures are: (1) ἰὼ πύρπνων ἄστρων χοραγὲ καὶ νυχίων (G. Wolff). The objection is that the contracted πύρπνους and πύρπνουν do not justify πύρπνων for πυρπνόων: cp. Eur. Med. 478 ταύρων πυρπνόων ἐπιστάτην . (2) ὢ (for ἰὼ ) πῦρ πνεόντων χοραγὲ καὶ νυχίων (Campbell). Here πνεόντων is a spondee. But such a synizesis seems very improbable. Remark, too, that L's χοραγὲ ἄστρων does not warrant us in supposing that ἄστρων

originally preceded χοραγέ. Neglect of elision is frequent in L: thus, to take one play only, the O. C. supplies these examples: 266 τἀμά· ἐπεὶ: 694 ἔστιν δὲ οἶον: 883 τάδε. ὕβρις: 915 κύρια ὦδε: 1026 θηρῶντα ἡ τύχη: 1210 ἴσθι, ἐάνπερ. The deletion of καί before νυχίων is also varranted by instances in which καί has been thrust into L. Here, the καί would decidedly enfeeble the passage.

χοράγ’ ἄστρων . The sympathetic joy of the elemental powers—stars, moon, and sea—was especially associated with those night-festivals in which Dionysus bore his mystic character, as the young Ἴακχος of the Eleusinian ritual, the companion of Demeter and Cora (n. on O. C. 682 ff.). See Eur. Ion 1078 ff., where the reference is to the Dionysus of the Great Mysteries at Eleusis: ὅτε καὶ Διὸς ἀστερωπὸς | ἀνεχόρευσεν αἰθήρ, | χορεύει δὲ Σελάνα | καὶ πεντήκοντα κόραι | Νηρέος. Hence this crowning strain, which begins by greeting him as χοραγὸς ἄστρων, fitly closes with his Eleusinian name.

νυχίων φθεγμάτων , the songs, or wild cries, of his worshippers. Eur. Bacch. 485 (Pentheus) τὰ δ’ ἱερὰ νύκτωρ ἣ μεθ’ ἡμέραν τελεῖς;— ΔΙ. νύκτωρ τὰ πολλά· σεμνότητ’ ἔχει σκότος. Plut. Mor. 291A mentions, as Boeotian festivals of Dionysus, the Ἀγριώνια and Νυκτέλια,—ὧν τὰ πολλὰ διὰ σκότους δρᾶται. Aristoph. Ran. 340 (the Chorus of the Initiated) ἔγειρε φλογέας λαμπάδας ἐν χερσὶ τινάσσων, | Ἴακχ’, ὦ Ἴακχε, | νυκτέρου τελετῆς φωσφόρος ἀστήρ.

παῖ Διὸς = καὶ νῦν ὡς (1140), but is sound, since the second syllable may be either long or short (see Anal.).

ὦναξ is a certain correction of L's ναξίαις. The latter, i.e. Ναξίαις, may be rejected for two reasons. (1) vv. 1140 f. (καὶ νῦν—ἐπὶ νόσου) are clearly sound, and the weak addition of ἀμά before πόλις is a pure guess, based on the supposed genuineness of Ναξίαις here. (2) Naxos was, indeed, peculiarly associated with Dionysus, through Ariadne's story, and in other ways ( Diod. 5. 50 ff., N. H. 4. 12. 22): but, here, Ναξίαις, as the epithet of his followers, would be inappropriate, since he is to visit Thebes either from Parnassus or from Euboea (1143 f.).

Θυίαισιν (θύω, to sacrifice), female votaries of Dionysus,—here, his attendant Nymphs ( O. C. 679 n.),—not human worshippers. The pediment of the temple at Delphi represented Dionysus with the Thyiads, and a setting sun (Stephani, Compt. rend., 1860, vol. 3 pp. 77 ff.). Similar names were Βάκχαι, Αῆναι, Μαινάδες (this properly a general epithet); and, in Macedonia, Κλώδωνες, Μιμαλλόνες ( Plut. Alex. 2). Plut. Mor. 389C quotes some words of a thyiad song, εὔιον ὀρσιγύναικα μαινομέναις Διόνυσον ἀνθέοντα τιμαῖς. In Elis a Dionysiac festival was called τὰ Θυῖα (Paus. 6.26.1). Cp. Catull. 64. 255 ff.: Verg. Aen. 4. 301 ff.

χορεύουσι with acc. of the god, as Pind. I. 1. 7 Φοῖβον χορεύων. Cp. κόπτομαι, τίλλομαι, τύπτομαι with acc. of person mourned.

ταμίαν , dispenser (of their fortunes): cp. Plat. Rep. 379E ὡς ‘ταμίασ’ ἡμῖν Ζεὺς ‘ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε τέτυκται.’

Ἴακχον : see on χοράγ’ ἄστρων (1146).

1155-1352

Exodos. The threefold catastrophe. Creon's remorse.

δόμων goes with Κάδμου also: cp. O. T. 417 μητρός τε καὶ τοῦ σοῦ πατρός : O. C. 1399 κελεύθου τῆς τ’ ἐμῆς δυσπραξίας . Cadmus founded Thebes; at a later time, Amphion (Niobe's husband) and his brother Zethus built a wall round it (Apoll. Rhod. 1. 740 ff.). The Thebans are πάροικοι (neighbours) δόμων , as dwelling around the Καδμεία, the Theban acropolis which was the seat of Cadmus (cp. O. T. 20 n.).

οὐκ ἔστι (τοιοῦτος ἀνθρώπου βίος), ὁποῖον οὔτ’ αἰνέσαιμι ἄν ποτε οὔτε μεμψαίμην στάντα: there is no kind of human life that I would ever praise, or complain of, as fixed. The partic. στάντα has a causal force, giving the ground for the praise or blame. Prosperity may seem secure, or misery irremediable; but no condition can be regarded as really stable (στάσιμον). Soph. has given us a perfect comment on στάντα (which Nauck calls ‘undoubtedly’ corrupt) in fr. 786, and it is strange that it should have escaped notice:—ἀλλ’ οὑμὸς ἀεὶ πότμος ἐν πυκνῷ θεοῦ | τρόχῳ κυκλεῖται, καὶ μεταλλάσσει φύσιν· | ὥσπερ σελήνης δ’ ὄψις εὐφρόνας δύο | στῆναι δύναιτ’ ἂν οὔποτ’ ἐν μορφῇ μιᾷ,—cannot remain fixed in one phase.

βίον is the antecedent drawn into the clause and case of the relative: O. C. 56 ὃν δ’ ἐπιστείβεις τόπον | ...καλεῖται etc.: ib. 907 νῦν δ’ οὕσπερ αὐτὸς τοὺς νόμους εἰσῆλθ’ ἔχων .—The only other tenable view would be: οὐκ ἔστι (βίος τοιοῦτος στὰς) ὁποῖον αἰνέσαιμι ἄν: there is no life so situated that I could praise it. On this view, στάντα would cohere closely with ὁποῖον, having been attracted into the acc. like βίον itself. This is not impossible; but, if this were the construction, I should wish to read ὁποίᾳ : cp. Ai. 950 οὐκ ἂν τάδ’ ἔστη τῇδε μὴ θεῶν μέτα .

μάντις … τῶν καθεστώτων , a prophet about them,—i.e. one who can say how long they will last. The conjecture ἐφεστώτων (‘imminent’), which Nauck receives, is decidedly wrong for two reasons. (1) Though we find Κῆρες ἐφεστᾶσιν, etc., the perf. part. was regularly used as it is in Ai. 1072 τῶν ἐφεστώτων (masc.) κλύειν ‘to obey the rulers’, and here a Greek would rather have supposed the sense to be, ‘no one in authority is a prophet.’ (2) The point is that things may seem established, and yet be unstable.

ὡς ἐμοί : Ai. 396 ἔρεβος ω<*> φαεννότατον ὡς ἐμοί : cp. O. C. 20 n.

σώσας … ἐχθρῶν : the gen. as after λύω, ἐλευθερόω: Ph. 919 σῶσαι κακοῦ : Eur. Or. 779 σωθῆναι κακῶν .— The regular constr. would have been ἦν ζηλωτός, σώσας μὲν χθόνα, λαβὼν δὲ μοναρχίαν. For δέ , τε has been substituted, as in Tr. 1012 πολλὰ μὲν ἐν πόντῳ κατά τε δρία πάντα καθαίρων : Ph. 1056 πάρεστι μὲν | Τεῦκρος,... | ἐγώ θ’: ib. 1136 ὁρῶν μὲν αἰσχρὰς ἀπάτας, | στυγνόν τε φῶτ’ . Then in the second clause, λαβών τε , a new finite verb, ηὔθυνε , has been inserted, with the result that λαβών now begins a new sentence. Cp. 815 ὕμνησεν, n.— παντελῆ , complete; Plat. Legg. 698A ἡ παντελὴς...ἐλευθερία : cp. 737 n.

ηὔθυνε : cp. 178: O. T. 104 ἀπευθύνειν πόλιν . The temporal augment for verbs beginning with ευ is attested by Attic inscrr. of c. 403—321 B.C. (Meisterhans, p. 78).

εὐγενεῖ , not εὐγενῶν: 793 n.

ἀφεῖται πάντα , all has been given up,—has slipped from his grasp, and been lost. Cp. Her. 8.49 ἡ γὰρ Ἀττικὴ ἀπεῖτο ἤδη (to the Persians). The perf. pass. of ἀφίημι is always pass. in sense, usu. meaning either ‘set free’ (as Isocr. or. 17 § 11), or, ‘left free’ (Plat. Critias 117C, of open ground), or ‘permitted’ (Thuc. 5.91). The only apparent instance of ἀφεῖμαι as a perf. midd. is Dem. or. 23 § 157 τοῦ μὲν τιμωρεῖσθαι τὸν Χαρίδημον ἀφεῖσθαι, ἀποστεῖλαι δ’ ὑπόσπονδον . But there, as ἀποστεῖλαι suggests, we must surely read the 2nd aor. midd. ἀφέσθαι, which was frequent in this sense (Plat. Gorg. 458C, etc.). If ἀφεῖται were midd. here, we should require πάντων: cp. Thuc. 2.60 τοῦ κοινοῦ τῆς σωτηρίας ἀφίεσθε .

προδῶσιν . προδιδόναι ἡδονάς could not mean merely, ‘to resign’ one's joys. It necessarily implies a fault on the loser's part; and it is precisely because Creon had committed such a fault that I believe προδῶσιν to be sound. The man accused of taking a bribe to break the law was described at 322 as ἐπ’ ἀργύρῳ... τὴν ψυχὴν προδούς. Our word, ‘to forfeit,’ i.e. ‘to lose by one's own fault,’ seems fairly to represent the shade of meaning which distinguishes προδιδόναι ἡδονάς from ἀπολλύναι ἡδονάς. Creon's joys—the life of his son, and the good opinion of his subjects—have been sacrificed by him to the indulgence of stubborn self-will. Athenaeus, who twice quotes this passage (cr. n.), shows that c. 200 A. D. it was read as above: he is our oldest and best source for it. L's ἀνδρὸς must be considered in connection with the fact that L (like our other MSS.) omits v. 1167. L has a point at προδῶσιν , and its reading was (I suspect) understood thus: ‘when (men) forfeit their pleasures, I do not count that the part of a man’ (i.e. of one who can be really said to live). Hence I do not think that L's ἀνδρὸς really confirms Seyffert's conjecture, καὶ γὰρ ἡδοναὶ | ὅταν προδῶσιν ἀνδρός, ‘when a man's pleasures fail.’ For this use of προδιδόναι, cp. Her. 7.187 οὐδέν μοι θωῦμα παρίσταται προδοῦναι τὰ ῥέεθρα τῶν ποταμῶν (that they failed=ἐπιλιπεῖν): id. 8. 52 τοῦ φράγματος προδεδωκότος , the barricade having failed (them). Xenophanes fr. 1. 5 ἄλλος δ’ οἶνος ἑτοῖμος, ὃς οὔποτέ φησι προδώσειν. So with acc., [Dem. ] or. 52 § 13 τὸν ὀφθαλμὸν αὐτὸν προδιδόντα (his eye-sight failing him). Yet here the phrase would seem a strange one. And if ἄνδρες was older than ἀνδρός , as we have reason to believe that it was, that fact would confirm the genuineness of τὰς γὰρ ἡδονάς .—See Appendix.

οὐ τίθημι with inf., as oft. with the midd. τίθεμαι; Plat. Phaedo 93C τῶν οὖν τιθεμένων ψυχὴν ἁρμονίαν εἶναι . Cp. El. 1270 δαιμόνιον αὐτὸ τίθημ’ ἐγώ .

For ζῆν, ζών has been proposed: but the Epic and Ionic ζώς does not occur in

τοῦτον after the plur. as, conversely, ὅστις is followed by οὗτοι (709 n.), and νέκυν by ὧν (1072).

ἔμψ. νεκρόν : cp. Ph. 1018 ἄφιλον, ἔρημον, ἄπολιν, ἐν ζῶσιν νεκρόν.

πλούτει … ζῆ , the hypothetical imperat.: Antiphon fr. 130 (ap. Flor. 68. 37) φέρε δὴ καὶ παῖδες γενέσθωσαν· φροντίδων ἤδη πάντα πλέα. Dem. or. 20 § 14 οὐδὲ γὰρ εἰ πάνυ χρηστός ἐσθ’, ὡς ἐμοῦ γ’ ἕνεκα ἔστω, βελτίων ἐστὶ τῆς πόλεως τὸ ἦθος.

εἰ βούλει : Plat. Rep. 432A τοὺς ἰσχυροτάτους καὶ τοὺς μέσους, εἰ μὲν βούλει, φρονήσει, εἰ δὲ βούλει, ἰσχύϊ . For the form ζῆ , cp. Eur. I. T. 699 ἀλλ’ ἕρπε καὶ ζῆ καὶ δόμους οἴκει πατρός . But Anthol. P. 11. 57 πῖνε, γέρον, καὶ ζῆθι (by Agathias, c. 550 A.D.): and so ib. 10. 43 (author uncertain). σχῆμα , outward show, dignity, pomp: Plat. Legg. 685C τὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς σχῆμα...οὐ σμικρόν .

τὸ χαίρειν : Ai. 555 ἕως τὸ χαίρειν καὶ τὸ λυπεῖσθαι μάθῃς . Aesch. Eum. 301 ἔρρειν, τὸ χαίρειν μὴ μαθόνθ’ ὅπου φρενῶν : ib. 423 ὅπου τὸ χαίρειν μηδαμοῦ νομίζεται . For the thought, cp. Simonides fr. 71 τίς γὰρ ἁδονᾶς ἄτερ θνατῶν βίος ποθεινὸς ἢ ποία τυραννίς; | τᾶς δ’ ἄτερ οὐδὲ θεῶν ζαλωτὸς αἰών: where ἡδονή is as general as τὸ χαίρειν here. More often, however, the sentiment refers to sensuous ἡδοναί: cp. Mimnermus fr. 1 τεθναίην ὅτε μοι μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι: Antiphanes fr. incert. 51 (it is foolish to disparage ἔρως), εἰ γὰρ ἀφέλοι τις τοῦ βίου τὰς ἡδονάς, | καταλείπετ’ οὐδὲν ἕτερον ἢ τεθνηκέναι.

καπνοῦ σκιᾶς : gen. of price (nom., καπνοῦ σκιά). Ph. 946 οὐδ’ οἶδ’ ἐναίρων νεκρὸν ἢ καπνοῦ σκιάν, | εἴδωλον ἄλλως. Aesch. fr. 390 τὸ γὰρ βρότειον σπέρμ’ ἐφ’ ἡμέραν φρονεῖ, | καὶ πιστὸν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἢ καπνοῦ σκιά. So Soph. fr. 12 ἄνθρωπός ἐστι πνεῦμα καὶ σκιὰ μόνον. Cp. Pind. P. 8. 95 σκιᾶς ὄναρ | ἄνθρωπος . Aesch. Ag. 839 εἴδωλον σκιᾶς .

πριαίμην ἀνδρί . After a verb of buying or receiving, the dat. of interest denotes the person who has the thing taken off his hands: Aristoph. Ach. 812 πόσου πρίωμαί σοι τὰ χοιρίδια ; Il. 15.87 Θέμιστι δὲ καλλιπαρῃῳ | δέκτο δέπας.

πρὸς τὴν ἡδ. , compared with it: fr. 327. 4 κἄστι πρὸς τὰ χρήματα | θνητοῖσι τἄλλα δεύτερ’: Eur. fr. 96 ἀλλ’ οὐδὲν ηὑγένεια πρὸς τὰ χρήματα. Suppose that one could buy either (1) wealth and power without joy, or (2) joy without wealth and power; in comparison with (2), (1) would be worth nothing.—Not, ‘in exchange for pleasure,’ like Plat. Phaedo 69A ἡδονὰς πρὸς ἡδονὰς... καταλλάττεσθαι : for the price is expressed by καπνοῦ σκιᾶς.

βασιλέων = τυράννων, the royal house. Tr. 316 μὴ τῶν τυράννων ; is she of the royal stock?— αἴτιοι θανεῖν , instead of τοῦ θανεῖν: Antiphon or. 5 § 23 ἐγὼ αἴτιος ἦν πεμφθῆναι ἄγγελον.—As vv. 1186 ff. show, Eurydicè is supposed to be in the act of opening the palace-door, to come out, when she overhears evil tidings. If she is supposed to have fainted (1188) immediately on hearing the general announcement in v. 1173, then her request in v. 1190 is the more natural. Possibly the spectators were allowed to catch a glimpse of her through the partly opened doors; though the Chorus announce her only at 1180.

φονεύει = ὁ φονεύς ἐστιν: cp. O. T. 437 τίς δέ μ’ ἐκφύει βροτῶν (is my sire), where see n.— ὁ κείμενος : cp. Aesch. Eum. 590 οὐ κειμένῳ πω τόνδε κομπάζεις λόγον.

αὐτόχειρ could mean either ‘by a kinsman's hand,’ or ‘by his own hand.’ See n. on 56 αὐτοκτονοῦντε. Hence such compounds sometimes receive a further definition, as Ai. 841 αὐτοσφαγεῖς | πρὸς τῶν φιλίστων ἐκγόνων . But in Aesch. Eum. 336 αὐτουργίαι , without any such addition,=‘murders of kinsfolk.’ G. Wolff ought not, however, to have compared Xen. Hellen. 6.4.35, ἀποθνῄσκει αὐτόχειρίᾳ μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς γυναικὸς ἀδελφῶν, βουλῇ δὲ ὑπ’ αὐτῆς ἐκείνης, i.e., ‘by the deed of their hands’ (cp. above, v. 306), ‘though at her instigation.’ Attic prose does not use αὐτόχειρ or αὐτοχειρία in the pregnant poetical sense (a slayer, or a slaying, of kinsfolk), but merely in the general sense, ‘doing with one's own hands,’ etc. See Plat. Legg. 872B: ib. 865 B, etc.

φόνου , causal gen.: 931 (τούτων) n.

ὀρθὸν ἤνυσας , hast fulfilled it, so that it comes right (cp. 1136, n. on ὑπερτάταν): O. T. 506 πρὶν ἴδοιμ’ ὀρθὸν ἔπος : cp. ib. 853. O. C. 454 (μαντεῖα ) ἁμοὶ Φοῖβος ἤνυσέν ποτε.

ὡς with the gen. absol. (cp. 1063 n.) marks the point of view which is to be taken: ‘in the certainty that matters stand thus.’ πάρεστι βουλ. τὰ ἄλλα , ‘ye may consider of the rest’: i.e., such are the facts; it only remains to deal with them as may seem best. βουλεύειν , to form plans, decide on a course of action, O. T. 619: τὰ ἄλλα , adverbial acc. of respect, ‘as to what remains,’ instead of περὶ τῶν ἄλλων ( Ai. 551 τὰ δ’ ἄλλ’ ὅμοιος ).

ὧδ’ ἐχόντων , neut. gen. abs., without a subject: Ai. 981 ὡς ὧδ’ ἐχόντων... | πάρα στενάζειν : El. 1344 τελουμένων εἴποιμ’ ἄν : Aesch. Pers. 170 πρὸς τάδ’, ὡς οὕτως ἐχόντων τῶνδε, σύμβουλοι λόγου | τοῦδέ μοι γένεσθε, Πέρσαι . Thuc. 1.116 ἐσαγγελθέντων ὅτι...νῆες...πλέουσιν .

καὶ μήν : 526 n.

Εὐρυδίκην : anapaest in 5th place: cp. 11 n. Schol.: Ἡσίοδος Ἡνιόχην αὐτὴν καλεῖ· ἵκετο δ’ εἰς Κρείοντα καὶ Ἡνιόχην [τανύπεπλον, sc. Heracles: Scut. 83].— ὁμοῦ = ἐγγύς: Aristoph. Pax 513 καὶ μὴν ὁμοῦ ’στιν ἤδη . Soph. has it also as a prep.: Ai. 767 θεοῖς...ὁμοῦ = σὺν θ .: in Ph. 1218 νεὼς ὁμοῦ = πέλας νεώς.

κλύουσα παιδός : gen. of connection, ‘about’ him: O. C. 307 κλύων σοῦ (n.), hearing of thee.

ὦ πάντες ἀστοί , said to the Chorus and the Messenger, as representing the Thebans generally. In Eur. I. T. 1422 Thoas says ὦ πάντες ἀστοί, not to the Chorus (of Greek women), but to the Tauri as represented by his attendants. So, too, in Aristoph. Eccl. 834 ὦ πάντες ἀστοί is said to an imaginary body of Athenian citizens, represented by two men on the stage. In Lys. 638 the Chorus say ὦ πάντες ἀστοί to the audience.

Παλλάδος προσήγορος εὐγμάτων answers to Παλλάδα προσαγορεύω εὔγματα: i.e., the first gen. is objective, while the second represents an ‘inner’ accus. A combination of genitives was easily tolerated by Greek idiom: cp. 795 βλεφάρων ἵμερος...νύμφας (n.): Xen. Cyr. 8.3.19 δεόμενοι Κύρου ἄλλος ἄλλης πράξεως. προσήγορος , active, as O. T. 1338: it is passive ib. 1437, Ph. 1353.—The shrine to which Eurydicè was going may be imagined as one of the two Παλλάδος ναοί at Thebes mentioned in O. T. 20 (n.). She was anxious to do her part in seeking to propitiate the angry gods (1019).—So Iocasta comes forth from the house to offer prayers at the altar of Apollo Λύκειος ( O. T. 919), and Clytaemnestra at that of Apollo προστατήριος ( El. 637).

τυγχάνω τε … καὶ … βάλλει : just as she was loosing the bolt, she heard

the sound (cp. 1172 f. n.). For the temporal parataxis with τε … καί , cp. Xen. An. 1. 8 § 1 ἤδη τε ἦν ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν καὶ πλησίον ἦν ὁ σταθμός : so ib. 4. 2. 12, Xen. An. 4. 6. 2, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 28. So with καί alone, O. T. 718 n.

κλῇθρα χαλῶσα πύλης ἀνασπαστοῦ , loosing the bolts of the door, so that it should be opened (proleptic, cp. 475, 881). For the fem. of the verbal in -τός, see O. T. 384 n.

κλῇθρα , ‘bolts,’ are bars of wood drawn across the doors inside, and held by staples or sockets (πυθμένες O. T. 1261) in the door-posts (σταθμοί). Such bars were usu. called μοχλοί, but even in prose we find the more general word κλῇθρα: Xen. Anab. 7.1.17 διακόπτοντες ταῖς ἀξίναις τὰ κλεῖθρα ἀναπεταννύουσι τὰς πύλας . There, as here, the plur. κλῇθρα, referring to only one gate, indicates that more than one bolt was used; so, too, Aristoph. Lys. 310 κἄν μὴ καλούντων τοὺς μοχλοὺς χαλῶσιν αἱ γυναῖκες, | ἐμπιμπράναι χρὴ τὰς θύρας . Cp. Aesch. Cho. 878 πύλας | μοχλοῖς χαλᾶτε , open the door by (withdrawing) the bars. Eur. Med. 1314 χαλᾶτε κλῇδας . Pelop. 11 ἐνδοῦναι καὶ χαλάσαι τὰς θύρας.

ἀνασπαστοῦ . These doors opened inwards. ἐπισπᾶν θύραν meant to shut the door after one, in going out. Cp. Xen. Hellen. 6.4.36 ὡς δ’ εἰσῆλθον, ἐπισπάσασα τὴν θύραν εἴχετο τοῦ ῥόπτρου (Thebè's object was to shut her brothers into the room, till they had killed Alexander of Pherae): ‘when they had entered, she, [having gone out and] shut the door, held the knocker,’—the ῥόπτρον being a metal ring on the outside of the door, which also served as ἐπισπαστήρ or handle (cp. Her. 6.91). Dion 57 οἱ μὲν ἔξω τὰς θύρας ἐπισπασάμενοι κατεῖχον. (In O. T. 1244 πύλας...ἐπιρράξασα is said of Iocasta, within the room, shutting the doors; but they, too, opened inwards, see ib. 1261 ff.) Hence ἀνασπᾶν θύραν, ‘to draw it back,’ is the opposite of ἐπισπᾶν, and means ‘to open it’ (from within). That phrase was not actually current, ἀνοιγνύναι being the common word; but the poetical ἀνασπαστός here implies it. Polyb. 5. 39. 4 is not rightly compared: there, ὡς ἀνασπάσοντες...τὰς πυλίδας=‘intending to wrench the gates open,’ from outside: cp. id. 2. 5. 5 τῆς ...γεφύρας ἀνασπάσαντες τὰς σανίδας, ‘having torn up the floor of the bridge.’

φθόγγος , the Messenger's words. She had fainted before hearing more, perhaps, than vv. 1172 f., where see n.

οἰκείου , domestic (affecting her family): cp. 1249. —Distinguish οἰκ. πάθη ( Ai. 260), οἰκ. ἄτας ( El. 215) as=‘caused by oneself.’

δῑ ὤτων : El. 737 ὀξὺν δῑ ὤτων κέλαδον ἐνσείσας θοαῖς | πώλοις : cp. O. T. 1386 f.

πρὸς δμωαῖσι , with κλίνομαι: a use of the dat. with πρός which has epic precedent, as Il. 20.420 λιαζόμενον προτὶ γαίῃ , sinking to earth: ib. 21. 507 τὴν δὲ προτὶ οἷ | εἷλε πατὴρ Κρονίδης , took her to his arms: cp. O. T. 1302 n.

ἀποπλήσσομαι , as=λιποψυχῶ, only here: Hippocr. uses it of apoplexy.

καὶ παρὼν ἐρῶ, κοὐδὲν παρήσω : I both will speak as one who was present, and will omit nothing: i.e., as my knowledge is full, so shall the story be told without reserve. For the parataxis, cp. 1112: El. 680 κἀπεμπόμην πρὸς ταῦτα καὶ τὸ πᾶν φράσω : Tr. 626 ἐπίσταμαί τε καὶ φράσω σεσωσμένα . For παρὠν as partic. of the imperfect, cp. 166 σέβοντας (n.). Verses 1192—1195 form the dramatic apology for a trait which is manifestly open to criticism,— viz., the fulness of harrowing details communicated by the Messenger to this unhappy mother, who has only just recovered from a swoon. (See esp. 1231 —1239.)

ὧν = τούτοις ὧν: Xen. Mem. 1.2.6 διαλέγεσθαι παρ’ ὧν λάβοιεν τὸν μισθόν , to converse with any who might pay them. Cp. 35 n.

ὧν with ψεῦσται (=fabricators), as one could say, ταῦτα ἐψεύσαντο. For φανούμεθ’ after the sing. verb, cp. 734 n.

ὀρθόν , not ὀρθή : O. T. 542 n.: O. C. 592.

ποδαγός , Doric (cp. 715 ναός, n.), ‘guide,’ as Eur. Phoen. 1715 σύ μοι ποδαγὸς ἀθλία γενοῦ (Oed. to Antigone). Plat. Legg. 899A has ποδηγεῖν as= ‘to guide.’ —The word is usu. taken here as merely pedissequus, ‘attendant.’ But the sense of ‘guiding’ is essential to it. Creon had indicated the region (1110), but he need not be supposed to know the spot where the body lay, or even the exact situation of Antigone's tomb. ἑσπόμην , ‘attended,’ is compatible with guiding.

πεδίον … ἄκρον =the furthest part of the plain. Near this part were the πάγοι on which the watchers sat (411), and Antigone's tomb was in one of those πάγοι (774 n.). Thebes had hills to the N. of it, and stood on a low spur which they throw out southward (117 ff., n.). The ἄκρον πεδίον, then, is the plain's northern edge, where it touches the lower slopes of the hills. The ‘furthest’ was thus also the highest part.

νηλεές , passive: O. T. 180.

κυνοσπάρακτον : cp. 206, 1017. Antigone had paid the rites while the corpse was still intact (257), and in this sense is said to have saved it from birds and dogs (697: cp. 467).

τὸν μέν , as opposed to Antigone: but instead of τῆς δὲ νυμφεῖον, etc., we have a change of construction (1204 αὖθις κ.τ.λ.).

ἐνοδίαν θεόν , Hecatè, who was conceived as a wandering goddess, haunting the places where roads met, and where offerings were left for her. ( Τριοδῖτις, Trivia: Theocr. 2. 36 ἁ θεὸς ἐν τριόδοισι .) Sophocles in his *(πιζοτόμοι gave an incantation by Medea, invoking Helios and Hecatè (fr. 490, schol. Apoll. Rhod. 3. 1214): Ἥλιε δέσποτα καὶ πῦρ ἱερόν, | τῆς εἰνοδίας Ἑκάτης ἔγχος, | τὸ δῑ Οὐλύμπου πωλοῦσα φέρει (which she bears when she moves through the sky, as Selenè), | καὶ γῆσναίουσ’ ίερὰς τριόδους, | στεφανωσαμένη δρυΐ καὶ πλεκταῖς | ὠμῶν σπείραισι δρακόντων. The last two lines refer to a custom of representing her as crowned with serpents, and with chaplets of oakleaves. Creon invokes her along with Pluto (Hades, O. T. 30 n.), because on earth she represented the χθόνιοι. As ἐνοδία, she was more especially associated with Hermes ἐνόδιος and ψυχοπομπός: hence she was sometimes called ἄγγελος.

θεόν , fem., as 834: O. C. 1548 ἡ... νερτέρα θεός , ib. 1556 τὰν ἀφανῆ θεόν (Persephone). Cp. ib. 683 n.

εὐμενεῖς , proleptic: 881 n.

κατασχεθεῖν : cp. on 1102.

λούσαντες ἁγν. λουτρόν (cognate acc.): cp. on 901.

ἐν , ‘with,’ of the instrument: 764 (n.), 962, 1003.— θαλλοῖς , from the ὕλη πεδιάς close by (420).—Boeckh thought that olive-boughs were meant, citing a νόμος ap. [Dem. ] or. 43 § 71 ἐὰν μὴ (ἐλαίᾳ)...ἐπὶ ἀποθανόντα δέῃ χρήσασθαι. But that, surely, does not refer to a πυρά. The olive, like the laurel, was used for other purposes connected with the dead,—viz., in crowning the corpse for the πρόθεσις (cp. schol. Eur. Phoen. 1626), and in decking the κλίνη on which the corpse was laid (Aristoph. Eccl. 1030).—ὅ δὴ = ὅ τι δήποτε, implying that much of the body had been destroyed. Cp. Her. 1.160 ἐπὶ μισθῷ ὅσῳ δή· οὐ γὰρ ἔχω τοῦτό γε εἰπεῖν ἀτρεκέως.

)λέλειπτο : cp. 457 'φάνη n.

συγκατῄθομεν . The σύν here is perh. not merely ‘completely,’ but implies the collecting of dismembered pieces: as συγκατακαίω regularly=to burn something ‘along with’ something else (Xen. Anab. 3.2.27). Like εἰσεβαίνομεν (1205), this is the imperf. of consecutive action (‘proceeded to burn,’ = ‘next burned’).

τύμβον . If the Homeric usage was followed, when the flesh had been burned the bones would be washed with wine or oil, wrapped in fat, and placed in an urn (λάρναξ). The urn having been deposited in a grave (κάπετος), the τύμβος (or σῆμα) would be raised over it. Cp. Introd. to Homer, ch. 11. § 33.

ὀρθόκρανον , lit., with head erect, so=‘high’: cp. ὑψικάρηνος, ὑψίλοφος (of hills). From κρα—ν (κρανίον) we have also βούκρα—νος, ταυρόκρα—νος.

οἰκείας , ‘native,’—a thing pleasing to the dead: so in O. C. 406 Oed. asks, ἦ καὶ κατασκιῶσι Θηβαίᾳ κόνει; The father's prophecy for his sons was fulfilled: of their father-land they obtained ὁπόσαν καὶ φθιμένοισιν κατέχειν ( Aesch. Th. 731: cp. O. C. 789).

αὖθις answers to τὸν μέν (1199), as in 167 τοῦτ’ αὖθις to τοῦτο μέν.

For αὖθις as=‘afterwards,’ cp. Ai. 1283, Tr. 270.

λιθόστρωτον , ‘with floor of stone,’ here suggests, ‘affording no couch but one of stone,’ in contrast with a real νυμφεῖον, which contains a λέχος εὔστρωτον... | χλαίνῃσιν μαλακῇς ἐστρωμένον (Hom. hymn. Ven. 157 f.).

κόρης νυμφεῖον‐Ἅιδου , the maiden's death-bower: cp. 795 n., 929.

κωκυμάτων , the word used by Teiresias (1079): here, as usu., for the dead: cp. 28, 204, 1302: so κωκυτός, Ai. 851 etc.—Cp. El. 683 ὀρθίων κηρυγμάτων .

ἀκτέριστον ἀμφὶ παστάδα , near (i.e. from the quarter of) the bridalchamber where no funeral-rites had been paid; i.e., where Antigone had been made the bride of Death, without even such honours as befitted such nuptials. For ἀκτέριστος cp. 1071 n. The word παστάς seems to be here used simply as a poetical equivalent for θάλαμος. There is probably no reference to pillars of rock (natural or artificial) in the τάφος. On the uses of παστάς, see Appendix.

ἀθλίας … ἄσημα βοῆς , indistinct sounds, consisting in an ἀθλία βοή: i.e., as he drew nearer, the sounds resolved themselves into the mournful cry of a human voice. The genit. is thus a ‘defining’ one. Cp. O. C. 923 n. φωτῶν ἀθλίων ἱκτήρια (suppliant objects consisting in unhappy persons). Below, in 1265, the form of ὤμοι ἐμῶν ἄνολβα βουλευμάτων is analogous, but the gen. is there partitive (see n.). Here, βοῆς could, indeed, be possessive (‘sounds belonging to, i.e., forming part of, a cry’). But the perspective of the description is better kept by the other view of the genitive, which supposes that a sound, ambiguous at a distance, defines itself as we approach.

περιβαίνει , with dat. instead of the normal acc.; this dat. denotes the person interested, i.e., here affected through the senses: O. C. 372 εἰσῆλθε τοῖν τρὶς ἀθλίοιν ἔρις (n.): Tr. 298 ἐμοὶ γὰρ οἶκτος... εἰσέβη . For the image, cp. O. C. 1477 ἀμφίσταται | διαπρύσιος ὄτοβος : Od. 6.122 ὥς τέ με κουράων ἀμφήλυθε θῆλυς ἀϋτή .

μᾶλλον ἆσσον : cp. Aesch. Th. 673 μᾶλλον ἐνδικώτερος: Eur. El. 222 μᾶλλον ἐχθίους : Plat. Legg. 781A λαθραιότερον μᾶλλον καὶ ἐπικλοπώτερον.

ἔπος (=θρῆνον ) δυσθρήνητον : see n. on 7.

ὦ τάλας : cp. O. T. 744 n.

τῶν παρελθουσῶν : cp. 100 f. κάλλιστον...τῶν προτέρων, n.

σαίνει , ‘greets my ear.’ As σαίνω was properly said of a dog wagging its tail or fawning so it could be said of a sight or a sound which appeals for recognition by vividly striking our senses. Like arridere, the word usually implied a sensation of pleasure ( O. C. 319 n.). But it could also denote, as here, a recognition attended by pain. So in Hippol. 862 f., where Theseus recognises the seal on the tablets left by his dead wife, he says τύποι...προσσαίνουσί με .

ὠκεῖς , adverbial: cp. 823, 847: Tr. 927 δρομαία βᾶς '.

ἁρμὸν χώματος λιθοσπ. , an opening in the stones heaped up at the entrance, made by dragging some of them away. Cp. 848 ἕργμα τυμβόχωστον. Haemon, in his frenzy of despair, had broken into the tomb by wrenching away part of this rude wall-work. The gap remained as he had made it. He had reached the spot only a short time before Creon (cp. on 1223).

ἁρμόν . The word ἁρμός means, (1) a fastening: Eur. Med. 1315 ἐκλύεθ’ ἁρμούς , undo the fastenings of the doors: (2) the chink between two things which are jointed together: so in Plut. Alex. 3 a furtive listener is described as τῷ τῆς θύρας ἁρμῷ προσβαλὼν (τὴν ὄψιν), ‘having put his eye to the chink in the door.’ So here ἁρμός is an aperture, just wide enough to admit of a man going through (cp. δύντες ).— ἁρμός (with its derivatives ἁρμοῖ, ἁρμόζω, ἁρμονία), and ἁρπεδόνη (or ἁρπεδών), ‘rope,’ are connected with the causative form of the root ar, ar-pajā-mi, ‘to fasten’: see Curt. Etym. § 488.

στόμιον . Having passed through the gap, they will find themselves in a narrow passage. They are to go along this passage to the very mouth (στόμιον) of the sepulchral chamber into which it opens.

The kind of tomb which the poet here imagines is perhaps best represented, in Greece, by the rock-tombs of Nauplia, and of Spata in Attica. These consist of chambers worked horizontally into the rock, and approached by a passage or δρόμος, answering to that which Creon's men have to traverse before they reach the στόμιον of the tomb. The general type seems to have been determined by that of the more elaborate domed tombs, such as the so-called ‘Treasury of Atreus’ at Mycenae, which, like these ruder copies, were entered by a δρόμος. Indeed, the Nauplia tombs indicate a rough attempt to reproduce the dome (θόλος). [See Helbig, Das Homer. Epos aus den Denkm. erläutert, p. 53, with the sources quoted there in nn. 5, 6.]

The phrase λοίσθιον τύμβευμα (1220) might suggest a recess within the principal chamber, like that in the ‘Treasury of Atreus’; but it is simpler to take it as merely ‘the furthest part of the tomb.’ We may observe that the words κατῶρυξ (774) and κατασκαφής (891) are sufficiently explained if we suppose that the δρόμος leading to the chamber sloped downwards from the entrance.

θεοῖσι : dat. of agent with pres. pass.: see n. on 503 ff.

κλέπτομαι , am deluded: 681 n.—Cp. O. C. 316 ἢ γνώμη πλανᾷ;

The simple correction, κελευσμάτων for κελεύσμασιν, is (I think) certainly right. Cp. Aesch. Pers. 397 ἔπαισαν ἅλμην βρύχιον ἐκ κελεύσματος (and similarly Eur. I. T. 1405 ): Her. 6.50 ἔλεγε δὲ ταῦτα ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς τῆς Δημαρήτου .

With κελεύσμασιν , we have only two tolerable resources. (1) To join κελεύσμασιν ἐξ ἀθύμου δεσπότου, ‘orders given by him.’ But, though τοῖς ἐξ ἀθ. δεσπ. κελεύσμασιν could be defended by τὴν ἐξ ἐμοῦ δυσβουλίαν (95), the phrase without the article is very strange. In phrases which might appear similar, it will be found that a verb has influenced the use of ἐκ with gen.: thus Ai. 137 σὲ δ’ ὅταν... | λόγος ἐκ Δαναῶν κακόθρους ἐπιβῇ : Aesch. Ag. 1366 ἦ γὰρ τεκμηρίοισιν ἐξ οἰμωγμάτων | μαντευσόμεσθα τἀνδρὸς ὡς ὀλωλότος ; here, however, it is impossible to take ἐξ ἀθύμου δεσπότου with ἠθροῦμεν, and to make κελεύσμασιν a mere epexegesis (‘looked, at our master's instigation, i.e., by his command’).

(2) The alternative is to amend ἐξ ἀθύμου . Only one correction is probable, viz. ὀξυθύμου . The decisive objection to this is the sense. It could mean only, ‘swift to wrath,’ like ὀξύχολος (955). It could not mean merely, ‘agitated’ (by alarm). But Creon is no longer proud or fierce; he has been humbled: his late words (1211 ff.) expressed only grief and fear.

Dindorf writes κελεύμασιν , holding this to be the older Attic form (cr. n.). The fact appears to be that both κέλευμα and κέλευσμα are well attested in our MSS. of some authors: and there is no evidence from inscriptions. As regards the verb, Lobeck (on Ai. 704) remarks that, while ἐκελεύσθην is far commoner than ἐκελεύθην, κεκέλευμαι and κεκέλευσμαι are both well attested for the best age. But Veitch's statement on this point is more accurate. While ἐκελεύθην is extremely rare in classical Greek, κεκέλευμαι is nearly (if not quite) unknown to it. It would be very rash, then, to affirm that Soph. must have used the nonsigmatic form of the noun.

αὐχένος : the gen. of the part, as with verbs of seizing, etc.: H.A. 9. 50. 7 ὅταν κρεμάσωσι (τὰς ὗς) τῶν ὀπισθίων ποδῶν: so κρεμῶμεν with gen., Plut. 312: Il. 17.289 (τὸν ) ποδὸς ἕλκε: Od. 3.439 βοῦν δ’ ἀγέτην κεράων .

μιτώδει , thread-like, i.e., formed by a thread-wrought fabric (the σινδών), and not, as usual, by a cord. μίτρος (ὁ), the thread of the warp: Eur. I. T. 817 ὕφηνα καὶ τόδ’ εἶδος εὐμίτοις πλοκαῖς (I wrought this scene, too, with threads deftly woven).— σινδόνος. σινδών (prob. from Ἰνδ-, Sind) was a general term for a smooth, fine texture, as βύσσος was the specific word for a kind of fine linen: Her. 2.86 describes mummies as swathed σινδόνος βυσσίνης τελαμῶσι (where see Stein). Thuc. 2.49. 4 τῶν πάνυ λεπτῶν ἱματίων καὶ σινδόνων. Laert. Diog. 6. 90 tells of an Athenian (c. 300 B.C.) being reprimanded by the ἀστυνόμοι for luxuriousness, ὅτι σινδόνα ἠμφίεστο.—Antigone used her veil ( κάλυμμα: cp. Aristoph. Lys. 532).

Haemon has thrown his arms around her waist (ἀμφὶ μέσσῃ περιπετῆ ), embracing her ( προσκείμενον ), where she hangs lifeless. But verses 1236—1240 require us to suppose that Antigone's body is then stretched on the ground. We are left to understand that Haemon, while uttering his lament (1224 f.), has lifted the corpse, so as to extricate it from the noose, and has laid it down. Cp. O. T. 1266 (where Oed. finds Iocasta hanging), χαλᾷ κρεμαστὴν ἀρτάνην.

μέσσῃ : cp. 1236: fr. 235. 5 (iambics). Eur. has this form only in lyr.; Aesch. nowhere.

περιπετῆ , act.; but pass. in Ai. 907 ἔγχος πε, πετές (‘on which he fell’), unless I am right in suspecting that there we should read, τόδ’ ἔγχος περιπετοῦς κατηγορεῖ, ‘shows that he fell upon it.’ Cp. O. C. 1620 ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοισιν ἀμφικείμενοι , n.

εὐνῆς … τῆς κάτω , his bride who is dead. Cp. Eur. Tro. 831 αἱ μὲν εὐνάς (husbands), αἱ δὲ παῖδας, | αἱ δὲ ματέρας γεραιάς. It would be awkward to understand, ‘the ruin of his marriage, (which is to be only) in the world below.’

πατρὸς ἔργα : he does not know that Creon is listening.

λέχος , marriage, as in 573. This word, too, could mean ‘bride’ ( Ai. 211): it is v. 1224 that decides our version.

σφε , Haemon: 44 n.

στυγνόν , bitter,—the notion of ‘sad,’ ‘gloomy,’ coming from that of ‘hateful’: cp. Moschus 3. 68 καὶ στυγνοὶ ( tristes) περὶ σῶμα τεὸν κλαίουσιν Ἔρωτες.

οἷον ἔργον : i.e., Haemon's forcible entrance into Antigone's tomb.— τίνα νοῦν ἔσχες ; lit., ‘what thoughts hast thou conceived?’—the aor. meaning, as usu., not ‘had,’ but ‘came to have.’ So El. 1013 f. νοῦν σχὲς...εἰκαθεῖν , ‘form the purpose to yield’: ib. 1465 νοῦν ἔσχον, ὤστε συμφέρειν τοῖς κρείσσοσιν.

ἐν τῷ συμφορᾶς , by what manner of calamity: i.e., ‘what cruel god hath deprived thee of thy reason?’ Ai. 314 κἀνήρετ’ ἐν τῷ πράγματος κυροῖ ποτε : Ph. 174 ἐπὶ παντί τῳ χρείας: Eur. Helen 1195 ἐν τῷ δὲ κεῖσαι συμφορᾶς;

διεφθάρης , mentally: Il. 15.128 μαινόμενε, φρένας ἠλέ, διέφθορας : Eur. Helen 1192 διέφθαρσαι φρένας ;

ἱκέσιος , adverbial: cp. 1215 ὠκεῖς, n. He extends his right hand in supplication.

ὄσσοισι : Aesch. admits ὄσσοις, and Eur. both ὄσσοις and ὄσσων, in iambics no less than in lyrics.

παπτήνας : with an acc. this verb usu.=‘to look around for,’ as Il. 4.200.

πτύσας προσώπῳ . Haemon is momentarily insane with despair and rage: the very words αὑτῷ χολωθείς, 1235, indicate the transport of frenzy which these verses were meant to depict. Nothing could do more violence to the language, or more injury to the dramatic effect, than the Scholiast's theory that πτύσας προσώπῳ has a merely figurative sense, ‘with an expression of loathing on his face.’ When the figurative sense of a word (like πτύσας) is to be marked by a qualifying addition (like προσώπῳ), that addition must not be such as equally to suggest the literal sense. Thus a socialist riot might be called ‘a fire not of Hephaestus’ (Eur. Or. 621); but it would not be equally happy to describe it as ‘a fire kindled by the tables of the rich.’ πτύσας προσώπῳ, instead of ἐπιπτύσας προσώπῳ (πατρός), is merely an instance of the boldness with which poetry could use a simple dative to express the object to (or against) which an action is directed. Such a dat. is often equivalent to (a) ἐπί with dat., (b) ἐπί, πρός, or εἰς, with acc., —in various relations, and with various shades of meaning. Thus we have such phrases as κακοῖς γελῶν ( Ai. 1042)=κακοῖς ἐπεγγελῶν: Ph. 67 λύπην...Ἀργείοις βαλεῖς = ἐμβαλεῖς: Eur. Suppl. 322 τοῖς κερτομοῦσι γοργὸν ὡς ἀναβλέπει , how she looks up sternly at her revilers: Il. 7.101 τῷδε δ’ ἐγὼν αὐτὸς θωρήξομαι , against him: ib. 23. 635 ὅς μοι ἀνέστη , against me: and below 1236 ἤρεισε πλευραῖς = ἐπήρεισε . Prose would have πτύσας εἰς (or ἐπὶ) πρόσωπον .

διπλοῦς κνώδοντας ξίφους , his cross-hilted sword. κνώδοντες are the two projecting cross-pieces at the point where the hilt joins the blade. The hilt (κώπη) of the Greek sword had no guard, nor had it always the cross-pieces; but these, when used, served partly to protect the hand. The κνώδοντες, or cross-hilt, can be seen on some of the swords given by Guhl and Koner, p. 244, fig. 277 (a, d). The cross-hilt was sometimes simply a straight cross-bar; sometimes the side next the hand was rounded. Cp. Silius Italicus Pun. 1. 515 pressumque ira simul exigit ensem, | Qua capuli statuere morae. —κνώδων (κνάω, ὀδούς) meant properly any tooth-like prong or spike: see Cyneg. 10. 3, where boar-spears ( προβόλια) have κνώδοντας ἀποκεχαλκευμένους στιφρούς, stout teeth forged of bronze, projecting from the shaft a little below the head (λόγχη). In Ai. 1025, τοῦδ’ αἰόλου κνώδοντος, ‘this gleaming spike,’ is the end of the sword-blade projecting through the body of Ajax. So in Kaibel Epigr. 549. 11 (an epitaph of the 1st cent. A.D. ) φασγάνου κνώδοντι=‘with the point (not, ‘edge’) of the sword’: the ref. is to thrusting, not cutting.—The Scholiast wrongly explains διπλοῦς κνώδοντας by διπλᾶς ἀκμάς, ‘double edge.’ This interpretation was obviously suggested by διπλοῦς (since a sword is often called δίστομον or ἄμφηκες), while the true sense of κνώδων was not accurately remembered: thus the Schol. vaguely calls it τὸ ὀξὺ τοῦ ξίφους.

ἐκ δ’ ὁρμ. , tmesis: cp. 427.

φυγαῖσιν , dat. of manner (620 n.). The poet. plur. of φυγή, when it does not mean ‘remedies’ (364), usu. means ‘exile’ ( Eur. El. 233). The gen. might be absol., but is more simply taken with ἤμπλακ’ .

Haemon, in his madness, meant to kill his father. He had harboured no such purpose before (see on 752); and his frantic impulse is instantly followed by violent remorse. Arist. ( Arist. Poet. 14) observes that it is not conducive to a properly tragic effect (οὐ τραγικόν, ἀπαθές) if a person contemplates a dreadful act, and then desists from it, in the light of sober thought or fuller knowledge: διόπερ οὐδεὶς ποιεῖ ὁμοίως εἰ μὴ ὀλιγάκις (such incidents in Tragedy are rare), οἷον ἐν Ἀντιγόνῃ Κρέοντα ὁ Αἵμων. It need not be assumed that Arist. meant to censure Sophocles; it is more natural to suppose that he cited the exception as one justified by the circumstances. But it should further be noticed that Aristotle was not accurate in taking this incident as the exception which illustrated his rule. For Haemon did not abandon his dreadful purpose; he was simply foiled by his father's flight. And then, in swift remorse, he actually did τῶν ἀνηκέστων τι.

ὥσπερ εἶχ’ : cp. 1108.— ἐπενταθείς , lit., ‘stretched,’ or ‘strained,’ against the sword: i.e., pressing his right side against the point of the sword, which at the same time he drove home with his right hand.

πλευραῖς , used as though ἤρεισε were ἐπήρεισε: cp. Pind. P. 10. 51 ἄγκυραν ἔρεισον χθονί. For the verb cp. Eur. Andr. 844 (ξίφος) ἀπόδος,...ἵν’ ἀνταίαν | ἐρείσω πλαγάν.

μέσσον , predicative, denoting the point up to which he drove it in: Ai. 899 κεῖται κρυφαίῳ φασγάνῳ περιπτυχής.

ἔγχος = ξίφος : Ai. 95, 658, etc.

ἐς δ’ ὑγρὸν ἀγκῶν’ , since π. προσπτύσσεται = παρθένον λαμβάνει: cp. the beautiful lines in Eur. Phoen. 1439 (the dying Eteocles): ἤκουσε μητρός, κἀπιθεὶς ὑγρὰν χέρα | φωνὴν μὲν οὐκ ἀφῆκεν, ὀμμάτων δ’ ἄπο | προσεῖπε δακρύοις.

φυσιῶν , breathing hard: ῥοήν is governed by ἐκβάλλει only. But in Aesch. Ag. 1389 the compound governs the acc.: κἀκφυσιῶν ὀξεῖαν αἵματος σφαγὴν | βάλλει μ’ ἐρεμνῇ ψακάδι φοινίας δρόσου.

ῥοὴν is plainly right: the bad variant, πνοήν, was perh. suggested by φυσιῶν.

τέλη , rites: O. C. 1050 n.

ἔν γ’ Ἅιδου . Though εἰν occurs nowhere else in tragic iambics, it might fairly be defended, in a ῥῆσις of epic colour, as a reminiscence of the Homeric εἰν Ἀΐδαο. But I decidedly prefer Heath's ἔν γ ' (‘in that world, though not in this’), because it adds point and pathos to what would otherwise be a somewhat tame statement of fact. Cp. 750. For another (probable) loss of γε in this play, cp. 648. For ἔν γε , cp. O. T. 1380 ἔν γε ταῖς Θήβαις : O. C. 153 ἔν γ’ ἐμοί : Ph. 685 ἴσος ἔν γ’ ἴσοις: Eur. fr. 349 ὡς ἔν γ’ ἐμοὶ κρίνοιτ’ ἂν οὐ καλῶς φρονεῖν.

δείξας … τὴν ἀβουλίαν : for the constr., cp. n. on 883 f. For δεικνύναι said of a warning example, see El. 1382 καὶ δεῖξον ἀνθρώποισι τἀπιτίμια | τῆς δυσσεβείας οἷα δωροῦνται θεοί : cp. O. T. append. on 622 ff.

πρόσκειται : cp. 94 n.

τί τοῦτ’ ἂν εἰκάς. , sc. εἶναι: what wouldst thou conjecture this to be (or, to mean)? The optat. ending used here was the usual one in Attic: cp. O.T. 843 n.

ἐσθλὸν ἢ κακόν : cp. on 40.— A silent exit is similarly a prelude to disaster in the case of Deianeira ( Tr. 813). Iocasta, too, quits the scene, not, indeed, without a word, yet with a reticence which is called σιωπή (O.T. 1075).

τεθάμβηκ’ : cp. O. C. 1140 θαυμάσας ἔχω (n.): and so oft. τεθαύμακα.

βόσκομαι : cp. fr. 863 ἐλπὶς γὰρ ἡ βόσκουσα τοὺς πολλοὺς βροτῶν.

γόους … ἀξιώσειν =to think them ἄξιοι, i.e., meet. This use of ἀξιόω is freq. in regard to persons, as Ai. 1114 οὐ γὰρ ἠξίου τοὺς μηδένας (esteem them). On the other hand, ἄξιος, as applied to actions, oft.=‘proper,’ ‘becoming’: as Aristoph. Eq. 616 νῦν ἄρ’ ἄξιόν γε πᾶσίν ἐστιν ἐπολολύξαι . But, if ἀξιοῖ τινα could mean, ‘he thinks a person estimable,’ poetry, at least, could surely say, ἀξιοῖ τι, ‘he thinks a thing proper.’ The text, then, seems sound.

ὑπὸ στέγης : for the gen., cp. 692 n.

προθήσειν governs πένθος: στένειν is epexeg. (for them to mourn): cp. 216 n. She will ‘set the grief before

them’ by making a lament, after which her handmaids, sitting around her, will wail in chorus. Il. 24.746 (Andromache has bewailed Hector,) ὡς ἔφατο κλαίουσ’· ἐπὶ δὲ στενάχοντο γυναῖκες. | τῇσιν δ’ αὖθ’ Ἑκάβη ἀδινοῦ ἐξῆρχε γόοιο.

γνώμης … οὐκ ἄπειρος . The reading has been unjustly suspected. γνώμη, ‘judgment,’ or ‘discretion,’ is here regarded as an influence moulding the character from without. The phrase means, then, ‘not uninformed by discretion,’—not unversed in its teachings. Cp. Plat. Rep. 519B τοὺς ἀπαιδεύτους καὶ ἀληθείας ἀπείρους , ‘uninformed by truth.’

δ’ οὖν : 688 n. προσεῖναι : so oft. of attendant circumstances (or of characteristic attributes): Tr. 250 τοῦ λόγου δ’ οὐ χρὴ φθόνον, | γύναι, προσεῖναι . —Cp. 720.

εἰσόμεσθα, μή τι … καλύπτει , ‘we shall know (about our fear) lest (μή) she is concealing,’ i.e., whether we are right in fearing that she conceals something. As Goodwin says (Moods and Tenses, § 46, N. 5 a), this passage is one of the most favourable to the view that μή has an interrogative force, and yet here also μὴ καλύπτει plainly expresses a fear. The pres. indic. is used, because the fear is strictly present; there is no thought that the thing feared can possibly be prevented. Before assuming that μή could have the force of εἰ οὐ (‘whether not’), we should require an example in which the clause with μή, after a verb like οἶδα, expressed something which is not feared (but hoped; or else regarded with neither fear nor hope). As if here we had, εἰσόμεσθα μὴ ζήσειν ἔτι μέλλει. Cp. 278 n. The use of μή in direct question ( O. C. 1502) is, of course, elliptical: e.g., μὴ οὕτως ἔχει; comes from (δέδοικα) μὴ οὕτως ἔχει.

καὶ (‘indeed’) goes with the whole phrase κατάσχετον … καλύπτει : cp. 770n.

κατάσχετον , a poet. word, here=‘repressed’ (cp. El. 1011 κατάσχες ὀργήν ): usu., ‘possessed’ (by a god, or by passion), like κάτοχος.

δόμους παραστείχοντες , advancing into the house: Eur. Med. 1137 παρῆλθε νυμφικοὺς δόμους .

καὶ μήν : 526.

ἐφήκει : Ai. 34 καιρὸν δ’ ἐφήκεις .—The Messenger now goes into the palace. The same actor returns at 1277 as ἐξάγγελος.

μνῆμ ', as the epithet ἐπίσημον shows, means that the son's corpse is a memorial of the father's unwisdom.

διὰ χειρός : cp. 916.

εἰ θέμις εἰπεῖν (cp. O. C. 1556), because it is a heavy charge against the King, that he has caused his son's death.— ἄτην , in apposition with μνῆμα: the corpse is an ἄτη, because the death was caused by Creon's infatuation. ἀλλοτρίαν here answers to οἰκεῖος as=‘caused by oneself’ (cp. on 1187).

ἁμαρτών is causal: he is bringing a corpse, not through the fault of others, but because he himself has erred. For the partic. in the nom., opposed to a clause of different form, cp. Dem. or. 23 § 156 εἶδεν, εἴτε δή τινος εἰπόντος εἴτ’ αὐτὸς συνείς . See also 381 f.

1261-1347

This κομμός is composed of four strophes and four antistrophes, which correspond as follows. (1) 1st strophe 1261—1269=1st antistr. 1284—1292. (2) 2nd str. 1271—1277 =2nd ant. 1294—1300. (3) 3rd str. 1306—1311=3rd ant. 1328—1333. (4) 4th str. 1317—1325=4th ant. 1339— 1347.

The lyric strophes and antistrophes are divided from each other by iambic trimeters, spoken by the Chorus or by the Messenger.—See Metrical Analysis.

φρενῶν δυσφρόνων : 502 n. Cp. Aesch. Th. 874 ἰὼ ἰὼ δύσφρονες, ‘misguided ones.’ More often, δύσφρων =‘gloomy,’ or ‘malignant.’

στερεά , with ref. to his own αὐθάδεια, cp. 1028. So Plat. Polit. 309B τὸ στερεὸν ἦθος . Cp. Ai. 925 ἔμελλες χρόνῳ | στερεόφρων ἄρ’ ὦδ’ ἐξανύσειν κακὰν | μοῖραν .

ὦ … βλέποντες . Like Antigone (937), Creon now calls the Theban Elders to witness. Cp. n. on 162—210.

κτανόντας refers to Creon himself (for the plur., cp. 10), as θανόντας to Haemon: for the παρήχησις, cp. Ph. 336 ὁ κτανών τε χὡ θανών.

ἐμφυλίους = συγγενεῖς: cp. O. T. 1406 αἷμ’ ἐμφύλιον (n.): O. C. 1385 γῆς ἐμφυλίου , ‘the land of thy race.’

ἐμῶν ἄνολβα βουλευμάτων , the unhappy (counsels) among my counsels (partitive gen.); i.e., the unhappiness involved in my counsels. See on 1209. This poetical periphrasis has the effect of making the idea expressed by ἄνολβα stand out with a quasi-substantival force, and so is slightly stronger than ὤμοι ἐμὰ ἄνολβα βουλεύματα. It would be possible, but it is neither requisite nor fitting, to supply ἁμαρτήματα (1261) with ἄνολβα, placing only a comma at ἐμφυλίους.— For ἄνολβος, of folly, cp. 1026.

νέος νέῳ ξυν μόρῳ , ‘young, and by an untimely death,’ is a pleonasm, but a natural one. The Schol. explains νέῳ by καινοπρεπεῖ (‘a death of a strange kind’). This sense is possible (cp. Aesch. Suppl. 712 ἀπροσδοκήτους τούσδε καὶ νέους λόγους ), but is far less fitting here. νέῳ ξὺν μόρῳ, suggesting the thought that his years had been few, recalls Andromache's lament,—ἆνερ, ἀπ’ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο ( Il. 24.725).

ἀπελύθης : cp. 1314, where the midd. aor. has the same sense. In later Greek ἀπολύεσθαι and ἀπόλυσις came to be used of any ‘departure’: thus in Polyb. 3. 69 τὴν ἀποχώρησιν...ἐποιοῦντο is presently varied to ἐποιοῦντο τὴν ἀπόλυσιν. Here, however, the word has a distinctly poetical colour, and suggests the release of ψυχή from σῶμα,—though without the feeling expressed by the words, ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου...ἐν εἰρήνῃ (St Luke ii. 29). A fragment of Plutarch (Wyttenbach, p. 135) attests a familiar use of ἀπολύεσθαι and ἀπόλυσις with reference to death. Eustathius quotes this v., and v. 1314, in support of a like statement (p. 548, 52).

ἐμαῖς οὐδὲ σαῖσι . οὐδέ here= καὶ οὐ: cp. 492. The negative form would be οὐκ ἐμαῖς ἀλλὰ σαῖς ( El. 1470).

ἔχω μαθὼν = μεμάθηκα (21 n.), though here with a slightly stronger emphasis than that of an ordinary perf.: ‘I have fully learned.’—No change is required in 1273. The soundness of the metre is confirmed by the antistrophic verse (1296), which is free from suspicion. Construe: ὁ δὲ θεὸς ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ κάρᾳ ἔπαισέ με, μέγα βάρος ἔχων. Three points claim notice. (1) The place of με . This was possible, because μέγα βάρος, without ἔχων, could have stood as an adverbial cognate acc.: hence ἔχων is rather a superfluity than a word for which the ear was waiting. Greek poetry (esp. lyric) often has bold arrangements of words: cp. 944, 960 (n.). (2) μέγα βάρος ἔχων = σφόδρα βαρὺς ὤν. Cp. 300: Od. 24.249 γῆρας | λυγρὸν ἔχεις : ib. 1. 368 ὕβριν ἔχοντες . (3) ἐν δ’ ἐμῷ κάρᾳ might have been followed by ἐνήλατο, or the like; but, ἔπαισε being used, the enclitic με was required to make it clear. The charge of redundancy would be just only if ἐμῷ were followed by ἐμέ.—For the image, cp. 1345: Aesch. Ag. 1175 δαίμων ὑπερβαρὴς ἐμπίτνων : and see O. T. 263n. Triclinius understood the blow on the head to mean a disordering of the intellect (ἀντὶ τοῦ, ἐξέστησε τὰς ἐμὰς φρένας). But it is simply a poetical picture of the fell swoop with which the god descended on his victim,—taking possession of him, and driving him astray. Perhaps ἐμβρόντητος helped to suggest the other view. For the form of the dat. κάρᾳ , cp. O. C. 564 n.

ἐν δ’ ἔσεισεν , tmesis (420).

ἀγρίαις ὁδοῖς : cp. Pind. P. 2. 85 ἀλλ’ ἄλλοτε πατέων ὁδοῖς σκολιαῖς, in paths of guile.

λακπάτητον , proleptic (475). The form λαξπάτητον, which Eustathius treats as the normal one (adding, ὅ τινες ..διὰ τοῦ κ γράφουσιν), is defended by Ellendt. He thinks that the κ form came from correctors who supposed that ξπ was an impossible combination for Attic Greek. We find, indeed, ἑξπηχυστί Soph. fr. 938, and the ‘Attic’ forms ἕξπουν, ἕξκλινον, ἑξμέδμινον ( O. T. 1137 n.). But, though λαξπάτητον may well have been admissible, it is evident that the κ form would be recommended by ease of pronunciation. The compound occurs only here.

ἀντρέπων , as though it were an altar, a statue, or a fair building. Cp. Aesch. Ag. 383, Eum. 539(quoted on 853 ff.).—For the apocopè of ἀνά in comp., cp. O. C. 1070 ἄμβασις , Tr. 528 ἀμμένει , ib. 839 ἄμμιγα , Ai. 416 ἀμπνοάς (all lyr.). In Tr. 396 (dial.) Herm. conjectured κἀννεώσασθαι for καὶ νεώσασθαι. It is unknown whether ἄγχαζε (fr. 883) occurred in lyr. or in dial. Cp. Introd. to Homer, Appendix, p. 197.

φεῦ φεῦ, ὦ . The hiatus is excused by the pause.

πόνοι .. δύσπονοι : cp. 502 n.

ὡς ἔχων τε καὶ κεκτημένος . Creon is actually touching (or helping to support) his son's corpse (1258 διὰ χειρὸς ἔχων, 1297 ἔχω μὲν ἐν χείρεσσιν). And meanwhile his wife lies dead within the house. The Messenger therefore says that Creon has come as one who both has in hand (ἔχων), and has in store (κεκτημένος). ἔχων is explained by τὰ μὲν πρὸ χειρῶν..φέρων, and κεκτημένος by τὰ δ’ ἐν δόμοις. Cp. Plat. Theaet. 197 B οὐ τοίνυν μοι ταὐτὸν φαίνεται τῷ κεκτῆσθαι τὸ ἔχειν. οἶον εἰ ἱμάτιον πριάμενός τις καὶ ἐγκρατὴς ὢν μὴ φοροῖ, ἔχειν μὲν οὐκ ἂν αὐτὸν αὐτό, κεκτῆσθαι δέ γε φαῖμεν . So ib. 198 D; the chase after knowledge has a view either to (a) τὸ κεκτῆσθαι, possession, or (b) τὸ ἔχειν, holding, ready for use, that which is already possessed,—ἣν ἐκέκτητο μὲν πάλαι, πρόχειρον δ’ οὐκ εἶχε τῇ διανοίᾳ. Cp. Rep. 382 B (men do not like) τῇ ψυχῇ περὶ τὰ ὄντα ψεύδεσθαί τε καὶ ἐψεῦσθαι καὶ ἀμαθῆ εἶναι καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἔχειν τε καὶ κεκτῆσθαι τὸ ψεῦδος: where ψεύδεσθαι answers to ἔχειν τὸ ψεῦδος,—to be deceived at a given time on a given matter; and ἐψεῦσθαι to κεκτῆσθαι τὸ ψεῦδος, —the settled incapacity for apprehending realities. In Crat. 393 A he says that ἄναξ and ἕκτωρ mean the same thing; οὗ γὰρ ἄν τις ἄναξ ᾖ, .. δῆλον .. ὅτι κρατεῖ τε αὐτοῦ καὶ κέκτηται καὶ ἔχει αὐτό (where ἕκτωρ has suggested both verbs).— The point of the phrase here is missed when it is taken as merely, ‘possessing sorrows in the fullest sense of possession.’

πρὸ χειρῶν : cp. Eur. Tro. 1207 καὶ μὴν πρὸ χειρῶν αἵδε σοι σκυλευμάτων | Φρυγίων φέρουσι κόσμον (they are carrying robes, ib. 1220). I. A. 36 δέλτον τε γράφεις | τήνδ’ ἣν πρὸ χερῶν ἔτι βαστάζεις. Thus the phrase means merely, ‘visible in the hands,’ without implying that the hands are outstretched.

τάδε , with adverbial force, ‘yonder’: so 155, 386, 526, 626, 805, 868, 1257.

τὰ δ’ ἐν δόμοις κ.τ.λ. The regular constr. would have been, ἔοικας ἥκειν ὡς ἔχων τε καὶ κεκτημένος,—τὰ μὲν πρὸ χειρῶν τάδε φέρων, τὰ δ’ ἐν δόμοις τάχ’ ὀψόμενος. The present form has arisen thus. (1) Since τὰ μὲν … φέρων interprets ἔχων, the poet wished it to come immediately after ἔχων τε καὶ κεκτημένος. (2) ἔοικας ἥκειν , although thus postponed, ought still to have been followed by τάχ’ ὀψόμενος. But the place of ἔοικας in the long sentence now prompted the change of τάχ’ ὀψόμενος into καὶ τάχ’ ὄψεσθαι . The sentence, as it stands, would have seemed less boldly irregular to the Greek ear than it does to us, because Greek idiom so readily permitted the change of a second participial clause into a clause with a finite verb. (Cp. 256 ἐπῆν: 816 ὕμνησεν.) Thus there would be nothing unusual in the following:—ἥκεις, τὰ μὲν φέρων, τὰ δὲ ἔοικας τάχα ὄψεσθαι. Here, instead of ἥκεις, we have ἔοικας ἥκειν, and the place of ἔοικας has led to ἥκειν and ὄψεσθαι being linked by καί.

Since τὰ δ’ ἐν δόμοις is governed by ὄψεσθαι only, the words ἥκειν καὶ form a parenthesis, being equivalent to ἥκων. This is a rare constr., and alleged examples should be scrutinised before acceptance (cp. 537 n.); but there are some undoubted instances. Cp. Xen. Hellen. 7.3.7 ὑμεῖς τοὺς περὶ Ἀρχίαν ...(οὐ ψῆφον ἀνεμείνατε, ἀλλὰ) ὁπότε πρῶτον ἐδυνάσθητε ἐτιμωρήσασθε. Thuc. 6.68 § 3 ἐξ ἧς (κρατεῖν δεῖ ἢ) μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀποχωρεῖν. Plat. Legg. 934E διδασκέτω (καὶ μανθανέτω) τὸν .. ἀμφισβητοῦντα. [Lys. ] In Andoc. § 33 ἐπιτιμᾷ (καὶ ἀποδοκιμάζεἰ τῶν ἀρχόντων τισί . Anlhol. P. 7. 664 Ἀρχἱλοχον

(καὶ στᾶθι καὶ) εἴσιδε. Others, indeed, take καὶ τάχα as=‘full soon,’ and ὄψεσθαι as depending on ἥκειν: ‘thou seemest to have come in order to see full soon,’ etc. This final inf. is tenable ( O. T. 198 n.). But I know no example of καὶ τάχα as=‘full soon,’ like καὶ μάλα, καὶ λίαν, etc. And, even if it were possible, it would here be weak.—See Appendix.

τί δ’ ἔστιν . In order to form a judgment on this difficult verse, a careful scrutiny of Sophoclean usage is required. (1) The reading closest to the MSS. would be, τί δ’ ἔστιν αὖ; κάκιον ἦ κακῶν ἔτι; This involves merely a change of punctuation, and of accent (ἦ for ἤ). But it suggests these difficulties. (a) The interrogative ἦ occurs about 50 times in Soph. : and in every instance it is the first word of the interrogative clause. Only a vocative sometimes precedes it, as O. C. 1102 ὦ τέκνον, ἦ πάρεστον ; so ib. 863, Ph. 369.Eur. , indeed, does not always observe this rule: El. 967 τί δῆτα δρῶμεν; μητέρ’ ἦ φονεύσομεν ; In Eur. Hec. 1013 I should point thus, ποῦ δῆτα; πέπλων ἐντὸς ἦ κρύψασ’ ἔχεις; (ἦ Valckenaer for ἢ). But, if we read κάκιον ἦ κακῶν ἔτι here, it would be a solitary departure from the practice of Soph. , as seen in fifty other examples. (b) The formula τί δ’ ἔστι (cp. on v. 20) occurs 21 times in Soph. (including Soph. Ph. 733, where the MSS. give τί ἔστι without δ’) as a question complete in itself. But there is not one instance of τί δ’ ἔστιν αὖ; which is, indeed, illsuited to the rhythm of the tragic senarius.

(2) Transposing αὖ and ἤ , we could read, τί δ’ ἔστιν; ἢ [or better, ἦ ] κάκιον αὖ κακῶν ἔτι; But: ( a) if this had been the original order, it is most improbable that ἤ and αὖ would have changed places. The sense would have been perfectly clear, whereas with αὖ...ἤ (the order in the MSS.) it is obscure. (b) The prominent place of αὖ in the MSS. is confirmed by many like instances: e.g. 1172: O. C. 1500 τίς αὖ παρ’ ὑμῶν κοινὸς ἠχεῖται χτύπος ; Ph. 1089 τίπτ’ αὖ μοι τὸ κατ’ ἆμαρ | ἔσται; ib. 1263 τίς αὖ παρ’ ἄντροις θόρυβος ἵσταται βοῆς;

(3) Canter gave, τί δ’ ἔστιν αὖ κάκιον ἐκ κακῶν ἔτι; The change of ἐκ to ἢ would have been peculiarly easy before initial κ (KAKIONEKAKON for KAKIONEKKAKON). For ἐκ , cp. Tr. 28 ἀεί τιν’ ἐκ φόβου φόβον τρέφω . Il. 19.290 ὤς μοι δέχεται κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ αἰεί . Eur. Phoen. 371 ἀλλ’ ἐκ γἀρ ἄλγους ἄλγος αὖ σέ δέρκομαι | ...ἔχουσαν . On the grounds stated above, I prefer this

reading. The comparat. κάκιον means merely that the sum of his misery will be greater: not that he can conceive a calamity sorer than his son's death. Cp. O. T. 1364 f. εἰ δέ τι πρεσβύτερον ἔτι κακοῦ κακόν, | τοῦτ’ ἔλαχ’ Οἰδίπους.

παμμήτωρ : schol. ἡ κατὰ πάντα μήτηρ: true mother; whose grief for her son would not suffer her to survive him; and whose act shows the same passionate temperament as his. Contrast μήτηρ ἀμήτωρ ( El. 1154). παμμήτωρ usu. =ἡ πάντων μήτηρ (n. on 338). Cp. παμβασιλεία as=‘monarchy in the fullest sense’ (n. on 737).

νεοτόμ .: adj. compounded with a word cognate in sense to the subst.: cp. 7 n. ἄρτι (‘a moment ago’) gives precision to the less definite νεοτόμοισι: Tr. 1130 τέθνηκεν ἀρτίως νεοσφαγής (cp. Ai. 898): Plat. Legg. 792E τὸν ἀρτίως νεογενῆ .

δυσκάθαρτος Ἅιδου λιμήν (nom. for voc., 1211). The ‘haven’ or ‘receptacle’ of Hades,—that nether world in which he receives the dead (810, 893)—is ‘hard to be appeased,’ in the sense that Hades is ever demanding fresh victims. The life of Haemon has already been exacted by Hades as a penalty for the offence of Creon against the νέρτεροι. But even this atonement (καθαρμός) has not proved enough. δυσκάθαρτος is used here as if one could say καθαίρω (for ἱλάσκομαι) θεόν: but that constr. does not occur. Cp. O. C. 466 καθαρμὸν...δαιμόνων (n.), such an atonement as belongs (is due) to them. Plat. Rep. 364E λύσεις τε καὶ καθαρμοὶ ἀδικημάτων .—For λιμήν cp. 1000: Anth. P. 7. 452 μνήμονες Εὐβούλοιο σαόφρονος, ὦ παριόντες, | πίνωμεν· κοινὸς πᾶσι λιμὴν Ἀτδης.

κακάγγελτα is equiv. to two distinct epithets, κακά and ἀγγελλόμενα, so that the whole phrase=‘tidings of dire woes.’ Cp. 146 δικρατεῖς λόγχας (n.).

προπέμψας , said to the ἐξάγγελος, as the herald of the tidings. This use of προπέμπω comes from its sense of ‘escorting’ ( O. C. 1667): we should not compare El. 1155 φήμας λάθρᾳ προὔπεμπες ὡς φανούμενος | τιμωρὸς αὐτός (‘didst send forth,’ from thy secret place of exile); nor, again, Ph. 1205 βελέων τι προπέμψατε (‘produce,’ ‘furnish’): but rather Ph. 1265 μῶν τί μοι vέα | πάρεστε πρὸς κακοῖσι πέμποντες κακά;

ἐπεξειργάσω : see on 1030.

ὦ παῖ , said to the Messenger. It has been objected that, at such a time, Creon could not use those words except with reference to Haemon (as in 1266, 1340). From a modern literary point of view, the objection is just. But we should remember how very familiar ὦ παῖ actually was as a mode of address, whether by elders to juniors, or by masters to slaves. Here it is used, not as to a slave, but merely as to a younger man; there is in it a certain pathetic appeal for sympathy. (Cp. ὦ παῖ, ὦ τέκνον, as said by the Messenger to Oed. in O. T. 1008, 1030.) Enger's conjecture, ὢ τίν’

αὖ (instead of ὦ παῖ τίνα), has not much palaeographical probability. It gives, indeed, a closer correspondence with 1266. But the form of dochmiac which the MS. reading gives here is equally correct. (See Analysis. Met.) Seidler was certainly right in omitting λόγον (see cr. n.): and that remedy suffices.

Construe: τίνα νέον σφάγιον γυναικεῖον μόρον λέγεις ἀμφικεῖσθαί μοι ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ , ‘what new death,’—the bloody death of a woman,—dost thou describe as heaped on destruction (i.e., superadded to Haemon's death), for my sorrow (μοι)?' (Cp. 595 πήματα φθιτῶν ἐπὶ πήμασι πίπτοντ’.) γυναικεῖον = γυναικός: cp. Aesch. Pers. 8 νόστῳ τῷ βασιλείῳ .—The notion expressed by ἀμφικεῖσθαι ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ seems to be, strictly, that of death entwined with death, like corpse embracing corpse (1240). The verb ἀμφικεῖσθαι prop.=‘to be set around’ (as a wall round a city). Perhaps the bold phrase here was partly prompted by the fact that persons embracing each other could be described ( O. C. 1620 n.) as ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοισιν ἀμφικείμενοι. I prefer this view.

But another version is possible, if μοι is taken with ἀμφικεῖσθαι: ‘besetting me,’ ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ, for (my) ruin. Cp. 1285 τί μ’ ὀλέκεις; For ἐπί, cp. Thuc. 4.86 οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐπ’ ἐλευθερώσει δέ . The difficulty is that ἀμφικεῖσθαι cannot well be said of one sorrow (Eurydicè's death), and that, therefore, we have to evolve from the epithet νέον the notion of a circle of woes of which this μόρος is one. Thus the image would be much more obscurely expressed than that in Ai. 351, ἴδεσθέ μ’ οἷον ἄρτι κῦμα φοινίας ὑπὸ ζάλης | ἀμφίδρομον κυκλεῖται, (‘behold what a surge hath but now burst around me and hemmed me in, under stress of a deadly storm,’) where Ajax is sitting in the midst of the carnage which he has wrought. It is altogether improbable that ἀμφικεῖσθαι alludes to Eurydicè's corpse having been brought (by the ἐκκύκλημα) into such a position that Creon stood between it and Haemon's. See 1298, where Creon speaks of her as being ἔναντα.

ὁρᾶν πάρεστιν . The corpse of Eurydicè, and probably also the altar at which she fell (1301), are now shown to the spectators by means of the ἐκκύκλημα. The precise mechanism of this contrivance is unknown; but the texts leave no doubt as to its general nature. It was a small stage, with space enough for

three or four persons; and was low enough to admit of an actor stepping off it with ease. It was pushed on through the central stage entrance, and was usually brought sufficiently far forward to allow of actors entering or making their exit behind it. Here, the corpse of Eurydicè is evidently in full view of the house (cp. 1299). Soph. has used the ἐκκύκλημα in two other plays: El. 1458 (the corpse of Clytaemnestra, with Orestes and Pylades beside it); and in Ai. 344 (Ajax in his tent among his victims). See Albert Müller, Gr. Bühnenalterthümer, pp. 142 ff. (1886).

Recent explorations in the Dionysiac theatre at Athens have given rise to a theory that there was no permanent raised stage or proscenium before the Roman age. Even if this could be proved, it would still, however, remain certain that some such expedient as the ἐκκύκλημα was used in the fifth century. This is proved by the texts of Aesch. , Soph. , and Eur. , as well as by the two scenes of Ar. where the tragic ἐκκύκλημα is parodied ( Ar. Ach. 408—479; Thesm. 95—238). Ar. has the words ἐκκυκλεῖν and ἐσκυκλεῖν. Wecklein thinks that the ἐκκύκλημα was employed when a part of the interior of the house was to be disclosed, but the ἐξώστρα when merely a single object was to be shown; and that the ἐξώστρα was used here (N. Jahrb. 1870, vol. 101, p. 572: Philol. 31. 451). The meaning of ἐξώστρα is, however, doubtful.

χείρεσσιν (976), though in an iambic verse, is excused by the lyric character of the whole κομμός. Eur. once admits it in dial., Eur. Alc. 756 ποτῆρα δ’ ἐν χείρεσσι κίσσινον λαβών, where Monk needlessly proposed ποτήριον δ’ ἐν χερσί.

ἔναντα : an epic form, sometimes admitted in Attic poetry. Eur. Or. 1478 (lyr.) ἔναντα δ’ ἦλθεν | Πυλάδης . Aristoph. Eq. 342 τῷ καὶ πεποιθὼς ἀξιοῖς ἐμοῦ λέγειν ἔναντα ; Triclinius gave here the Hellenistic form ἔναντι (St Luke i. 8), which seems to be confined to the LXX., Apocrypha, and N.T.; see n. by Moulton in his ed. of Winer's Grammar, p. 591 (8th Engl. ed.).

ἥδ’ : he indicates the dead body of Eurydicè, now made visible by the ἐκκύκλημα.—Arndt's first emendation is given in the text. His later substitution of πτώσιμος for βωμία was not an instance of second thoughts being wiser. The altar meant is that of Ζεὺς Ἑρκεῖος in the αὐλή of the house (487). The objection made to βωμία here is to the effect that one could say βώμιος ἐφέζεται or ἵσταται, but not βώμιος ποιεῖ τι: i.e. that the verb must refer directly to the assuming of the position denoted by βώμιος. It is quite true that this is usually the case; Eur. Suppl. 93 βωμίαν ἐφημένην : O. T. 32 ἑζόμεσθ’ ἐφέστιοι : and cp. above, 785 f. But here βωμία is not merely an adverbial word, to be taken closely with λύει. It is rather an instance of an adj. used with the force of a participle, and virtually equivalent to βωμία στᾶσα: i.e. it means, ‘having taken her place at the altar,’ she slew herself. Cp. O. C. 83 ὡς ἐμοῦ μόνης πέλας (sc. οὔσης): and see above on 471. Further: even if it were necessary to bind βωμία closely with λύει, it would be bold to say that poetry could not permit this slight modification in the ordinary use of the word, when we remember how free was the adverbial use of adjectives in poetry (e.g., Ai. 217 νύκτερος Αἴας ἀπελωβήθη ).

ξίφει . A sacrificial knife, which lay on the altar. Cp. Eur. Alc. 74 (Death speaks) στείχω δ’ ἐπ’ αὐτήν, ὡς κατάρξωμαι ξίφει. For the prep. cp. Ai. 828 πεπτῶτα τῷδε περὶ νεορράντῳ ξίφει .

Next to Arndt's, the best conjecture seems that of Blaydes, ἥδ’ ὀξυθήκτῳ σφαγίδι βωμίᾳ πέρι . In favour of Arndt's we may observe:—( a) the MS. πέριξ (a word not used by Soph. , and nowhere common) was not likely to have originated from πέρι alone: whereas it could easily arise from περὶ ξίφει, if ίφει had been blotted or lost. (b) The MS. ἥδε (or ἡ δὲ) is just the kind of feeble make-shift which is sometimes found in the MSS., where a verse had come down in a mutilated state: see, e.g., on O. T. 943 f., 1264 f.—For other conjectures, see Appendix.

λύει κελαινὰ βλέφαρα , allows her eyes to close in darkness. λύει=relaxes: the eyelids are deprived of power to remain open. The phrase has been suggested by the epic λῦσε δὲ γυῖα, λέλυντο δὲ γυῖα, etc., and seems quite intelligible; though, doubtless, it would have been more natural to say κλῄει, as Soph. has done in fr. 640, βλέφαρα κέκλῃται. In [Eur.] Rhes. 8 we have λῦσον βλεφάρων γοργωπὸν ἔδραν, of opening the eyes; but that has no bearing on the different use here. Wolff brings what at first sight is a perfect parallel: Anthol. P. 3. 11 ἄνθ’ ὧν ὄμματ’ ἔλυσε τὰ Γοργόνος ἐνθάδε Περσεύς. But unfortunately neither he nor Bellermann has observed the meaning. It is not, ‘ caused the Gorgon 's eyes to close,’ but ‘ uncovered the Gorgon 's head.’ The epigram refers to Perseus bringing Medusa's head to Seriphos, and therewith petrifying Polydectes, who had married Danaë, and sent her son on his perilous mission.—The objection to μύει is that elsewhere the verb has these usages:—(1) intrans.,—ὄμματα μύει, the eyes close, or μύομεν, we shut our eyes. (2) trans., as Anth. P. 9. 558 ὕπνος ἔμυσε κόρας (with the post-classical υ—), ‘caused to close.’ That is, there is no classical example of such a phrase as μύει ὀφθαλμούς, she shuts her eyes.

Μεγαρέως . Cp. Aesch. Theb. 474 Μεγαρεύς, Κρέοντος σπέρμα, τοῦ σπαρτῶν γένους , where he is one of the Theban warriors who guard the gates: his patriotic death is foreshadowed ib. 477 θανὼν τροφεῖα πληρώσει χθονί . The story is thus told by Eur. ( Eur. Phoen. 930—1018), who calls him Menoeceus. While the Argives are pressing Thebes, Creon and Eteocles send for Teiresias. The seer says that Ares is wroth, because Cadmus of old slew the god's offspring, a dragon (or serpent?) which had its lair outside the walls. One of the Cadmean race, sprung from the dragon's teeth, must die to appease him. Now, Creon and his two sons are the only pure-bred σπαρτοί left. And Haemon is married. The seer therefore suggests that Menoeceus should die. Menoeceus pretends that he means to fly to Delphi. Creon leaves the scene, in order to provide him with money for the journey. Menoeceus then rushes to the top of a tower on the walls, where he cuts his throat, and falls into the dragon's former den (σηκὸν ἐς μελαμβαθῆ | δράκοντος, Ph. 1010, see n. above on 411). Statius, who also calls him Menoeceus, tells the story in Theb. 10. 589—782, and, like Eur. , makes the son practise a pious fraud in order to hinder his father from preventing the sacrifice.

κλεινὸν λάχος : cp. Eur. Phoen. 1013, where he says, στείχω δὲ θανάτου δῶρον οὐκ αἰσχρὸν πόλει | δώσων, νόσου δὲ τήνδ’ ἀπαλλάξω χθόνα. Statius Th. 10. 670 where Virtus says to Menoeceus, rape nobile fatum. λάχος is freq. in poetry, and is used by Xenophon. The MS. λέχος would be forced as an allusion to the dragon's den (θαλάμαι, Eur. Phoen. 931, or σηκός, ib. 1010) into which the corpse fell. And it could not here be a general word for ‘grave.’

κακὰς πράξεις = δυσπραξίας. A solitary instance of the plur. in this sense; as, conversely, Tr. 879 is the only instance of the sing. πρᾶξις as=‘mode of doing,’ instead of ‘fortune’ ( O. C. 560 n.). In Eur. El. 1305 κοιναὶ πράξεις, κοινοὶ δὲ πότμοι , the sense is, ‘actions.’ But the peculiarity here does not warrant a suspicion (see cr. n.). It is equally exceptional, the other way, when πράσσειν καλῶς means ‘to act well’ ( O. C. 1764 n.).

ἐφυμνής. = ἐπαρασαμένη: cp. 658 n.

ἀνέπταν , aor. referring to a moment just past; we should use the pres.: cp. O. C. 1466 ἔπτηξα θυμόν : Ai. 693 ἔφριξ’ ἔρωτι περιχαρὴς δ’ ἀνεπτάμην : cp. O. T. 337 n. The act. aor. ἔπτην is once used in lyrics by Aesch. ( Aesch. P. V. 555 προσέπτα), and once by Eur. ( Eur. Med. 440, ἀνέπτα). Eur. Itis a poetical form, but occurs in late prose (Arrian, Lucian, etc.).— φόβῳ , with fear of the curses invoked by Eurydicè.

ἀνταίαν , sc. πληγήν ( O. C. 544 n.), a blow which strikes one full on the breast: El. 195 παγχάλκων ἀνταία | γενύων ὡρμάθη πλαγά : Eur. Andr. 844 ἵν’ ἀνταίαν | ἐρείσω πλαγάν . But διανταία =a thrust which passes through the body: Aesch. Cho. 639 ξίφος | διανταίαν ὀξυπευκὲς οὐτᾷ .

δείλαι^ος , but in 1311 δειλαίᾳ with αι—: cp. O. C. 442 οἱ τοῦ πατρὸς τῷ πατρί : ib. 883 ἆρ’ οὐχ ὕβρις τάδ’; ὕβρις : Ph. 296 ἀλλ’ ἐν πέτροισι πέτρον: ib. 827 ὕπν’...ὕπνε (with υ— in the first place, but υ^ in the second): El. 148 ἃ Ἴτυ^ν, αἰὲν

Ιτυ—ν ὀλοφύρεται.—The following are a few among many instances of αι^ before ο : 827 πετραία: 1131 Νυσαίων: 1140 βιαίας: Od. 20.379 ἔμπαιον : Tyrt. 10. 20 γεραιούς: Aesch. Suppl. 385 (lyr.) ἱκταίου (Dind. ἱκτίου): Eur. El. 497 (dial.) παλαιόν. For the repetition cp. 379, 977.

συγκέκραμαι , ‘blended with’ anguish, i.e. steeped in it: (Whitelaw: ‘Fulfilled with sorrow, and made one with grief.’) Cp. Ai. 895 οἴκτῳ τῷδε συγκεκραμένην , ‘her soul is steeped in the anguish of that wail’: Plut. 853 οὕτω πολυφόρῳ συγκέκραμαι δαίμονι, where the words just before, ὡς ἀπόλωλα δείλαι^ος (850), might suggest that the parody glanced at our passage.

ὡς αἰτίαν … ἔχων , as being responsible for,=ὡς αἴτιος ὤν. So Aesch. Eum. 579 Apollo, defending the accused Orestes, says, αἰτίαν δ’ ἔχω | τῆς τοῦδε μητρὸς τοῦ φόνου, I am responsible for (not, ‘am accused of’) the deed. In this sense of the phrase, ἔχω = παρέχω: cp. Thuc. 2.41 ἀγανάκτησιν ἔχει , gives cause of resentment; id. 2. 61 ἔχει αἴσθησιν, makes itself felt. But in prose αἰτίαν ἔχω usu.=‘to bear the blame’ for a thing, i.e. to be held responsible for it: Her. 5.70 εἶχον αἰτίην τοῦ φόνου τούτου : Plat. Apol. 38 C ὄνομα ἕξετε καὶ αἰτίαν...ὡς Σωκράτη ἀπεκτόνατε.

τῶνδε … μόρων , that of Haemon: κἀκείνων , that of Megareus (1303 f.). For the plur., cp. El. 205 τοὺς ἐμὸς ἴδε πατὴρ | θανάτους αἰκεῖς.

ἐπεσκήπτου , wast denounced. In Attic law ἐπισκήπτομαί τινι (midd.) meant, to take proceedings against a witness for perjury (ψευδομαρτυριῶν): Isae. or. 5 § 9 πρὶν ἐπεξελθεῖν οἶς ἐπεσκήψατο τῶν μαρρύρων. The rare pass. occurs in Plat. Legg. 937B ἐὰν δούλη ἐπισκηφθῇ τὰ ψευδῆ μαρτυρῆσαι .

κἀπελύσατ’ , quitted life: see on 1268 ἀπελύθης. For καί , cp. 772 n.— ἐν φοναῖς : 696 n.

ὑφ’ ἦπαρ , expressing movement, ‘home to’ it: cp. Tr. 930 ὁρῶμεν αὐτὴν ἀμφιπλῆγι φασγάνῳ | πλευρὰν ὑφ’ ἧπαρ καὶ φρένας πεπληγμένην . Eur. Or. 1063 παίσας πρὸς ἧπαρ φασγάνῳ.

ὀξυκώκυτον , by the household (cp. 1079): she herself heard the news in silence (1256).

τάδ’ οὐκ ἐπ’ ἄλλον βροτῶν

ἁρμόσει ποτέ , the guilt can never fit (=be fixed upon) another man, ἐξ ἐμᾶς αἰτίας, (being transferred) from my responsibility, —i.e., so as to leave me blameless. For the intrans. ἁρμόσει , cp. O. T. 902 (n.), El. 1293. ἐκ here is not for ἀπό, but is used as if we had, οὔποτε ἐξ ὑπαιτίου ἀναίτιος φανοῦμαι (cp. Tr. 284 ἐξ ὀλβίων ἄζηλον εὑροῦσαι βίον ). Thus ἐξ ἐμᾶς αἰτίας is really a compressed way of saying, ‘by change from a state of things in which the αἰτία (blame) was mine.’

μέλεος : for the nom., cp. 1211.

φάμ’ ἔτυμον , i.e., this is the simple truth: I was virtually, though not actually, his slayer.

ὅ τι τάχιστ’ . This (Erfurdt's) emendation seems the simplest and best cure for the metre (see cr. n.). It is worth noticing that Soph. has this phrase in a closely similar passage, O. T. 1340 ἀπάγετ’ ἐκτόπιον ὅ τι τάχιστά με . He has ὅσον τάχος thrice, and ὡς τάχος eight times, but ὅ τι τάχος nowhere else.

τὸν οὐκ ὄντα μᾶλλον ἢ μηδένα , one who exists no more than a nonentity. In μηδένα, μή has its generic force: one who is such as to be a mere cipher. Cp. Ai. 1114 οὐ γὰρ ἠξίου τοὺς μηδένας . O. T. 1019 καὶ πῶς ὁ φύσας ἐξ ἴσου τῷ μηδενί ; (dat. of ὁ μηδείς,—he who is μηδείς in respect to consanguinity). Here τὸν μηδέν would have been equally fitting: cp. Ai. 1231 ὅτ’ οὐδὲν ὢν τοῦ μηδὲν (the dead) ἀντέστης ὔπερ.—Postgate suggests (Trans. Cambridge Phil. Soc., 1886, p. 58) that this use of the oblique cases of μηδείς in sing., and of οὐδείς and μηδείς in plur., may have come from an attraction of the neuter by the masc. article: e.g., τοὺς μηδένας from τοὺς μηδέν. We do not find ὁ μηδείς. When it became declinable, the phrase could dispense with the article; e.g., τὸν μηδέν could be simply μηδένα.

κέρδη : the plur. more often refers to money (1061); but cp. El. 767 ἢ δεινὰ μέν, κέρδη δέ.

τὰ γὰρ ἐν ποσὶ κακὰ κράτιστά ( ἐστι) βράχιστα (ὄντα): instead of, κράτιστόν ἐστι τὰ...κακὰ βράχιστα εἶναι. For the personal constr., cp. O. T. 1368 κρείσσων γὰρ ἦσθα μηκέτ’ ὢν ἢ ζῶν τυφλός , and n. ib. 1061. For the omission of ὄντα, cp. the oracle μὴ κίνει Καμάριναν· ἀκίνητος γὰρ ἀμείνων (sc. οὖσα ), ap. Stephanus Byz. s. v. Καμἁρινα.

τἀν ποσίν , before our feet, claiming immediate attention. Cp. Eur. Alc. 739 ἡμεῖς δέ, τοὐν ποσὶν γὰρ οἰστέον κακόν, | στείχωμεν, ὡς ἂν ἐν πυρᾷ θῶμεν νεκρόν . So Pind. P. 8. 32 τὸ δ’ ἐν ποσί μοι τράχον, my present theme.

μόρων ὁ κάλλιστ’ ἔχων . I have adopted ἔχων, a conjecture of Pallis for ἐμῶν, on the following grounds. (1) The phrase μόρων ἐμῶν could mean nothing but, ‘of all fates possible for me.’ This, however, is most strange. In 1313 μόρων meant ‘violent deaths’: so Aesch. Th. 420 αἱματῃφόρους μόρους. Hence it has been proposed to render μόρων ἐμῶν here, ( a) ‘the deaths caused by me’: as Hermann, ‘veniat caedium per me factarum suprema, exoptatissime mihi ultimum diem adducens.’ ( b) Figuratively, ‘the many deaths that I have died’; cp. 1288 ὀλωλότ’ ἄνδρ’ ἐπεξειργάσω. But neither version is tolerable. (2) Triclinius proposed to make ἐμῶν fem., and to take it with τερμίαν: when it would at least be necessary to write ἐμᾶν (sc. ἁμερᾶν). But, either with ἐμῶν or with ἐμᾶν, the relation of ὁ κάλλιστ’ ...ἄγων to the gen. μόρων is exceedingly awkward. ‘That one among fates which best brings my last day,’ cannot be explained as an equivalent for, ‘that best of fates which brings it’; i.e., for μόρων ὁ κάλλιστος, ὁ...ἄγων.

Both these difficulties (which to me seem insuperable) are removed by reading μόρων ὁ κάλλιστ’ ἔχων , the best of fates. That ἔχων could have been changed to ἐμῶν, either by conjecture or by accident, is shown by v. 575, where at the end of the verse L has the probably true ἐμοί, while other MSS. have ἔφυ. (If κύνες is right in 467, and ξίφει in 1301, these, too, are instances of final words corrupted.) A question of punctuation remains. The comma might follow either ἔχων or ἐμοί. I prefer the latter. Cp. Ai. 394 ἰὼ σκότος, ἐμὸν φάος, | ἔρεβος ὦ φαεννότατον, ὡς ἐμοί .

ὕπατος , an emphatic repetition of ὁ κάλλιστ’ ἔχων,—‘supreme of fates,’— far best. It has been usual to take ὕπατος here as ‘last.’ But neither ὕπατος nor ὑπέρτατος ever bears that sense in classical Greek. Pindar often uses ὕπατος as ‘best,’ but never as ‘last’: O. 1. 100, P. 6. 42 and 10. 9, N. 10. 32. In post-classical poetry ὕπατος sometimes means ‘last,’ but that use was imitated from the Lat. supremus and summus. Thus in an epitaph on an Italian, a certain Aelius, Apollonides writes (Anthol. P. 7. 233), νοῦσον ὅτ’ εἰς ὑπάτην ὠλίσθανε, τέρμα τ’ ἄφυκτον | εἶδεν. Whether the Apollonides of the Anthology was or was not he of Nicaea, who dedicated to Tiberius a commentary on Timon's Σιλλοί (Diog. Laert. 9. 109), at least he belonged to that age. This is proved by his words in Anthol. P. 9. 287, Ἠελίου νῆσον ὅτ’ εἶχε Νέρων, alluding to the residence of Tiberius at Rhodes (c. 6 B.C.— 2 A.D.). The epigram was written after Tiberius had been adopted by Augustus in 4 A.D., as he is called Ζῆνα τὸν ἐσσόμενον, and perhaps after he had come to the throne (14 A.D.). It would be interesting to know whether ὕπατος as =‘last’ can be carried back beyond the Roman, or later Alexandrian, age; I can find no trace of it.

μέλλοντα , belonging to the future. To Creon's wish for death the Chorus replies, in effect, ‘Sufficient unto the day is the evil thereof.’

τῶν προκειμένων : the duties which lie immediately before us; meaning here especially the obsequies of the dead.

For τι cp. O. C. 500 ἀλλ’ ἐν τάχει τι πράσσετον .

τῶνδ’ = τῶν μελλόντων.

ὅτοισι χρὴ μέλειν , i.e., τοῖς θεοῖς. Cp. Ph. 1036 θεοῖσιν εἰ δίκης μέλει, | ἔξοιδα δ’ ὡς μέλει γε .

ἐρῶ μέν : for μέν cp. n. on 11. It merely gives a slight emphasis to ἐρῶ.

συγκατηυξάμην : κατά expresses that the prayer is solemn; σύν, that it sums up his desires. (For this force of σύν cp. 1202.) Cp. O. C. 585 ἐνταῦθα γάρ μοι κεῖνα συγκομίζεται (‘by that boon I reap all the rest’).—Nauck thinks that L's reading, ἀλλ’ ὧν ἐρῶ, ταῦτα συγκατηυξάμην , is sound, and that in the corresponding verse, 1314, we should perh. read, ποίῳ δὲ κἀλύετ’ (for κἀπελύσατ’) ἐν φοναῖς τρόπῳ; He refers to the scholium on 1314: τίνι τρόπῳ, φησίν, ἐλύετο, καὶ ἐφέρετο εἰς φονάς; ἀντὶ τοῦ, ποίῳ τρόπῳ εἰς φόνον ἔπεσεν; Now, this does not point, I think, to the Scholiast's having ἐλύετο in his text, though it suggests that he had εἰς φονάς. He used the simple verb in his paraphrase in order to bring out the literal sense (as he took it) of ἀπελύσατο. This is shown by ἐφέρετο and ἔπεσεν: he understood, ‘she was set free (as a runner in a race is dismissed from the starting-post), and rushed (ἐφέρετο) to bloodshed.’—Further, the origin of L's reading is manifest. ἐρῶ μὲν had become ἐρῶμεν (as it actually is in at least one later MS.). Then the plur. ἐρῶμεν seemed too harsh with the sing. συγκατηυξάμην immediately following (though, in fact, it would have been quite defensible, cp. 734 n.), and was changed to ἐρῶ ( μεν disappearing). Semitelos would read with L here, and yet leave 1314 unaltered. He refers to Ai. 905 where L has τίνος ποτ’ ἆρ’ ἔπραξε χειρὶ δύσμορος corresponding with 951 ἄγαν ὑπερβριθὲς ἄχθος ἤνυσαν. But there ἔπραξε is surely corrupt: Hermann gives ἔρξε, and Wecklein ἔπαθε.

προσεύχου , without θεοῖς or θεούς. Cp. Her. 1.48 ὡς τὸ ἐκ Δελφῶν ἤκουσε, αὐτίκα προσεύχετό τε καὶ προσεδέξατο .—Campbell thinks that ‘the rationalism of the day appears in this advice of the Chorus.’ But such an interpretation ill accords with the tone of the Chorus, which presently insists on the duty of piety towards the gods (1348). Nor does it seem in harmony with the pervading spirit of the poet's work. Rather Creon is exhorted to recognise, with pious resignation, the fixity of the divine decrees. Cp. the closing words of the Oed. Col., ἀλλ’ ἀποπαύετε μηδ’ ἐπὶ πλείω | θρῆνον ἐγείρετε· | πάντως γὰρ ἔχει τάδε κῦρος. Brunck compared Aen. 6. 376(Aeneas to Palinurus in the shades) Desine fata deum flecti sperare precando.

ἄγοιτ’ ἄν , an entreaty: cp. O. C. 725. The opt. with ἄν had a different tone in 444.

μάταιον here expresses rash folly: cp. O. T. 891 ματᾴζων : Tr. 565 ματαίαις χερσί .

κατέκανον is the best, as it is the simplest, emendation of κατέκτανον (see cr. n.). Though the pres. κατακαίνω is not classical, the aor. is frequent; Xen. uses it ( Xen. An. 3. 1. 2, etc.).

σέ τ’ αὖ τάνδ’ is a certain correction of σέ τ’ αὐτάν. Here the latter would be like saying, ‘and actually thee,’—as if the slaying of Haemon had been comparatively venial. It cannot be naturally explained as meaning, ‘the mother with the son.’

πρὸς πότερον … πάντα γάρ . The reading of this verse cannot be certainly determined. The traditional text (see cr. n.) exceeds the metre. My own view is as follows:

(1) The MS. ὅπᾳ should be struck out. It evidently came in from the margin, having been a gloss on πᾷ , meant to show that πᾷ κλιθῶ is not a direct question, but depends on οὐδ’ ἔχω. Retaining ὅπᾳ, we should have to suppose a double question: ‘nor do I know in what direction, (or) to which thing, I am to look.’ This is not only very awkward, but very weak. The hiatus after ἔχω, though not unexampled, is at least another point against ὅπᾳ.

(2) L has πάντα γάρ in a line by itself: but, considering the caprices of lyric division in that MS. (as in the rest), we cannot urge that fact as a hint of interpolation. If ὅπᾳ was a spurious addition to 1342, then πάντα γάρ might easily have been carried over. Again, the words πάντα γάρ are not indispensable; yet the effect of λέχρια τἀν χεροῖν, without them, would be rather oddly abrupt. Therefore we are by no means warranted (I think) in ejecting πάντα γάρ.

(3) κλιθῶ , for καὶ θῶ , is certain. On this last point there is now a general agreement.—The resulting dochmiac differs from that in 1320 only by the ‘irrational’ long (the ω of ἴδω) for short (the first of ἔτυμον): and this is admissible. See Metrical Analysis.—Other views are noticed in the Appendix.

πρὸς πότερον , i.e., to the corpse of Haemon at his side, or to that of Eurydicè in front of him (1297 ff.).

ἴδω , deliberative subjunct. in the indirect question, depending on οὐκ ἔχω: cp. n. on O. T. 72.

πᾷ κλιθῶ , in what direction I am to lean, i.e., where I am to find any support: my son and my wife have fallen: all my fortunes lie in ruin. πᾷ here answers to the dat. after κλίνομαι when it means ‘to lean against’ a thing, as Od. 6.307 (she sits) κίονι κεκλιμένη.—Not merely, ‘whither I am to betake myself,’ ποῖ τράπωμαι; This is shown by λέχρια.

λέχρια τἀν χεροῖν . τἀν seems right (see cr. n.): the MS. τάδ’ ἐν would come from ΤΑΕΝ. Creon is still touching the corpse of Haemon. The phrase τὰ ἐν χεροῖν would mean, figuratively, ‘the matters with which I am engaged’ (so ἔχειν τι ἐν χερσί, Her. 1.35 ). Here, the words take a dramatic force from their literal sense. ‘All is amiss with that which I handle.’ Creon has, indeed, mismanaged the work which his hands found to do; and the proof of it is the corpse which he is touching. λέχριος =‘slanting,’ ‘oblique.’ As ὀρθός means either ‘straight’ or ‘upright,’ so λέχριος can mean either ‘moving sideways’ ( O.C. 195), or, ‘not upright,’ ‘slanting.’ Cp. πλάγιος, the ordinary prose equiv. of λέχριος, which has the second sense in Philemon Ἀγύρτης 5 σχήματα | πλάγῑ ἐστὶ τἄλλα, τοῦτο δ’ ὀρθὸν θηρίον, man alone is erect, while other creatures (i.e. quadrupeds) are bent earthward (cp. Sallust, Cat. 1 pecora quae natura prona... finxit ). So, here, λέχρια means primarily ‘awry’:—τὰ πράγματα οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἔχει. Cp. Shaksp. Rich. II. 2. 4. 24 And crossly to thy good all fortune goes. But it is further tinged with the sense of ‘prone,’ applicable to the corpse. The Scholiast here has usu. been understood as explaining λέχρια by πλάγια καὶ πεπτωκότα. But he meant only πλάγια to explain λέχρια, while πεπτωκότα referred to πότμος... εἰσήλατο: this is clear (I think) from his whole phrase, πλάγια καὶ πεπτωκότα, τὰ μὲν ἐν χερσί, τὰ δὲ ἐπὶ τῇ κεφαλῇ.

τὰ δ’ ἐπὶ κρατί μοι κ.τ.λ., while on the other hand: for the adverbial τὰ δ’, see O. T. 666 n. These words refer to the deaths of Eurydicè and Antigone, as τὰ ἐν χεροῖν referred to the death of Haemon. It is quite possible to read τάδ’ , as =‘thus’; but then τὰ ἐν χεροῖν would denote all his woes, and so we should lose the dramatic blending of a literal with a figurative sense.

εἰσήλατο : cp. on 1272 f.

εὐδαιμονίας πρῶτον , the most important element in it. Cp. Plat. Rep. 389D σωφροσύνης δέ, ὡς πλήθει, οὐ τὰ τοιάδε μέγιστα, ἀρχόντων μὲν ὑπηκόους εἶναι, κ.τ.λ.

τά γ’ εἰς θεούς : cp. 889 n.: O. T. 706 (n.) τό γ’ εἰς ἑαυτόν. Ph. 1441 εὐσεβεῖν τὰ πρὸς θεούς .—For the sentiment, cp. 1050 f.

μεγάλοι … λόγοι : cp. 127 n.

For the position of τῶν ὑπεραύχων , cp. 944 f. Δανάας...δέμας.

πληγὰς … ἀποτείσαντες , as the price: cp. Her. 2.65 ἀποτίνει ζημίην (a fine). So ib. 5. 56 οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποτείσει .

γήρᾳ , without a prep.: so Eur. Hec. 203, etc.: but this is poetical, prose preferring ἐν γήρᾳ, ἐν τῷ γήρᾳ, or ἐπὶ γήρως.

τὸ φρονεῖν , so soon after 1347: cp. on 76 , 625 (ἐκτὸς ἄτας ), 956 (κερτομίοις ).

ἐδίδαξαν , gnomic aor. (709).